THE DECADES of the new world or west India, Containing the navigations and conquests of the spaniards, with the particular description of the most rich and large lands and Islands lately found in the west Ocean pertaining to the inheritance of the kings of Spain. In the which the diligent reader may not only consider what commodity may hereby chance to the hole christian world in time to come, but also learn many secrets touching the land, the sea, and the stars, very necessary to be known to all such as shall attempt any navigations, or otherwise have delight to behold the strange and wonderful works of God and nature. written in the Latin tongue by Peter Martyr of Angleria, and translated into english by richard Eden.  
¶ LONDINI. In aedibus Guilhelmi powel. ANNO. 1555.   

¶ POTENTISSIMO AC SERENISSIMO PHILIPPO, AC SERENISsimae potentissimaeque Mariae, Dei gratia Regi ac Reginae, Angliae, Franciae, Neapolis, jerusalem, et Hiberniae: Fidei defensoribus, Principibus Hispaniarum et Siciliae, Archiducibus Austriae, Ducibus Mediolani, Burgundiae, et Brabantiae, comitibus Haspurgi▪ Flandriae, et Tirolis, Richardus Edenus perpetuam optat foelicitatem.  
cum IN PRIMO VESTRO ingressu in hanc celeberimam Londini urbem (illustrissimi Principes) cernerem quanto omnium applausu, populi concursu, ac civium frequentia, quanto insuper spectaculorum nitore, nobilium virorum splendore, equorum multitudine, tubarum clangore, caeterisque magnificis pompis ac triumphis, pro dignitate vestra accepti estis dum omnes ꝙ sui est officij facere satagebant, ubi in tanta hominum turba vix unus reperiatur qui non aliquid agendo adventum vestrum gratulabatur, coepi et ego quoque aliorum exemplo (propius presertim ad me accedentibus Celsitudinibus vestris) tanto animi ardore ad aliquid agendum accendi ne solus in tanta hominum corona otiosus viderer, ꝙ vix me continebam quin in aliquam extemporariam orationem temere erupuissem, nisi et praesentiae vestrae maiestas, et mea me obscuritas a tam audaci facinore deterruissent. Verum, cum postea penitius de hac re mecum cogitassem, consyderassemque quam haec omnia alioqui per se lau de digna, vestris tamen meritis ac regiae dignitatis eminentiae comparata, plebeia ac ludicra videantur, coepi denuo cum animo meo reputare qua in re ita cum immortali rerum memoria foelicissimum vestrum adventum gratularer, ut inde nominis vestri fama et splendor, non ullis spectaculorum temporarijs osten tis, sed rerum gestarum gloria, ad posteros perpetuo emanaret. Excutio statim divitias meas. Perscrutor si quid ex penu meo depromere possum ꝙ me ad aliquid agendum vestris heroicis virtutibus dignum excitet. Sed cum penes me nihil tale reperio, agnosco nuditatem meam, atque ad vos confugio. Patrum, avorum, proavorum, atque atavorum vitas et facta recolo. Syluam rerum gestarum video, totque preclarissimorum principum propagines, ut merito ab ipsis heroibus, Saturno videlicet, jove, ac Hercule, caete●●que theanthropis, originem duxisse videantur. Quod cum ita sit, non aliunde profecto quam ex hac sylua materies mihi petenda erit quo in mentibus hominum et aeterna rerum memoria, perpetua spectacula rerum a vobis et progenitoribus vestris praeclare gestarum, in mundi theatro ab omnibus cum summa nominis vestri fama ac veneratione cernantur. Cum itaque inter caetera a maioribus vestris praeclare gesta, nihil sit admirabilius aut maiori laud dignum, quam ꝙ incredibili fiducia et plus quam Herculeis laboribus superato Oceano, foelicissimo tandem eventu, Indiae Occidentalis ditissimas Insulas atque Continentis amplissimas regiones, mortalium primi invenerunt, in quibus infinitas incolarum myriades ad fidem Christi converterunt (quo nihil augustius aut Christianis principibus magis dignum excogitari potest) visus sum mihi ꝙ non alia in re magis possem foelicitati vestraemerito gratulari, quam si nostris quoque hominibus quibus haec hactenus nihil aut parum cognita sunt, innotescere faciam, ut perspectis illorum simul et vestrorum amplissimis imperijs non sine divina providentia (ut credere par est) ad ipsos usque Antipodes et PLUS VLTRA terminatis, omnes boni, ipsa rerum magnitudine in admirationem ducti, vos ament et venerentur: Malis vero et impro bis, os obstruatur si quam in maledicendo voluptatem capiunt. Haec dum cogito, venit mihi in mentem ꝙ olim adolescens perlegi Decades de Novo orb a Petro martyr ab Angleria, illustrissimi Ferdinandi regis Catholici, ac tui (Serenissime rex) proavi oratore, Latine conscriptas, atque sacrae Caesariae maiestati patri tuo d●dicatas. Tanti itaque autoris fide et eruditione motus, eum prae caeteris in nostram linguam traducendum suscepi, ꝙ non solum ut historicus res Indicas cum summa fide scriptis mandavit, sed etiam ut philosophus (ꝙ in caeteris scriptoribus desyderatur (naturalium rerum occultas causas reddit, ac admirabilium naturae operum (quibus haec vestra India plena est) rationes investigat. Atque ut h●ius Indiae posterior status cognoscatur▪ quantusque thesaurus auri, gemmarum, aromatum, aliarumque ditissimarum mercium ac annui census inde quotannis in Hispaniam advehitur, adiunxi doctissimi viri Gonzali Ferdinandi Ouiedi libellum quem ille Indicae historiae generalis Summarij titulo inscripsit, eiusdemque illustrissimi Caroli Imperatoris patris tui nomini consecravit: Caeteraque plurima ex recentioribus scriptoribus excerpsi, que mihi in tam immensa rerum memorabilium bibliotheca, praecipue adnotanda videbantur. Quae, quanta et qualia sunt, quantisque parasangis, omnium heroum ac Argonautarun res gestas toto terrarum orb tantopere celebratas superent, haec mea sequens praefacio vulgari sermone ad huius historiae lectores populumque Anglicum conscripta, satis prolixa oratione indicabit, adeo ut idem hic repetere superuacaneum sit, minimeque necessarium, quandoquidem Anglica lingua tibi Serenissima Regina vernacula est, idemque illustrissimo Regi ꝙ tibi scriptum aut dictum existimen, non solum ꝙ divino vinculo unum sitis in carne una, sed etiam ꝙ eadem animi lenitate, humanitate, affabilitate, caeterisque virtutibus, non minus animi moribus quam carnis vinculo unum sitis. Sed neque hic opus est ut ego Latino sermone vestras virtutes, animi moderationem, clementiam, religionem, pietatem, educationem, castitatem foelicitatem, fortunas, opes, munificentiam, victorias, imperia, stemmata, caeteraque huiusmodi multa enumerem, cum praesertim vir nobilis et doctus Leonhardus Goretius Polonus de his omnibus deque foelicissimo vestro matrimonio, orationae satis fusa tractavit, in qua nihil pretermisit ꝙ ad Celsitudinis vestrae et progenitorum vestrorum gloriam virtute partam, pertineat. Caeterum cum regiae vestre virtutes nominisque splendor ac regnorum amplitudo alias per universa Christiani orbis imperia satis nota sint, nisi forte ibi minime ubi maxime nota esse deberent, nempe in hoc Angliae regno, ideo operepraecium et rem omnibus bonis gratam, quodque mei est officij erga Celsitudines vestras me facturum existimavi, si haec nostris (ut dixi) hominibus, nostraque lingua ob oculos contemplanda proposuero. Quod quam foeliciter aut dextre a me factum sit, aliorum esto judicium. Quam vero fideliter, sincere, ac animo in Maiestatis vestras propenso hoc idem aggressus sum, testis est mihi conscientia mea in conspectu illius qui hominum corda et renes scrutatur. Macteigitur virtutis istius animi vestri estote Serenissimi Principes, atque Divino auxilio freti, pergite ea qua coepistis fiducia, huius deploratae ac collapsae reipub▪ nostrae statum, pristino decori restituere, id ꝙ omnes a vobis expectant atque eff●agitant, pollicentes insuper vobis in eo negotio suam operam in nullo defuturam. Ne terreat vos quorundam canum latratus qui bonis omnibus oblatrant, et tunc desinent latrare cum desinent vivere. Vulgatissimum semper fuit improbos homines viris probis vel propter invidiam vel propter dissimilitudinem, solere latrare. Et tamen ille pro bus semper habitus est, quem perversi maxime improbaverint. Non est igitur curandum quid de nobis homunculi, sed quid viri boni loquantur. Cogitat (Serenissimi Principes) ꝙ magnanimitate ac ma iorum insignijs, aquilis et leonibus similes estis. Aquilae natura est, alta petere, et adversus solis radios in altum volare. Leonis proprium est parcere subiectis et debellare superbos. Generosus equus per plateas incedens, canes ut animalcula imbella praeterit non perturbatus▪ Virtus non exercita (inquit Seneca ad Neronem) paruam laudem meretur. Non admodum magnificum fuerit mediocrem fortunam probe administrare: Sed tanta rerum omnium licentia non abuti, hoc vero admirabile est: Multo autem admirabilius in iwenili ac lubrica aetate cui accedat aetas magistra: hijs praesertim qui contumelia lacescuntur, quae alioqui homines vel placidissimos solet de gradu deijcere. Sed (ut supra dixi) non est hic me●propositi (Serenissimi Principes) vestras laudes pro meritis decantare, aut exprimere quo modo in summo rerum fastigio vos humiles praebuistis, de quare fu●ius in praefacione ad lectores tractavi. jam itaque ut huic epistolae dedicatoriae finem imponam, rogo Serenissimas Maiestates vestras ut has meas lucubrationes in hijs autoribus vertendis, (quas vestro nomini consecravi) ea humanitate ac favore suscipiatis, quibus omnes benevolo animo ad vos accedentes, facile admittitis ac neminem reijcitis. Quenadmodum enim qui pomarium aut vineam plantavit ac maturos inde fructus collegit, illi merito primitias soluit a quo prima semina primasque arborum insitiones habuit, ita et ego qui a maiorum vestrorum rebus gestis primis sumptis seminibus, hos qualescumque●tuctus aedidi, videor profecto mihi, debito vestro honore vos defraudasse, nisi eosdem vestro nomini ac numini obtulissem. Deus. Opt. Max. Celsitudines vestras perpetuo servat incolumes, faxitque ut foecunda sobolis propagine, summaque pace ac tranquillitate, huius regni habenas ad Divini nominis gloriam, diu gubernetis.  
FINIS.   

¶ The table of the contents of this book. Beside the Decades (the table of whose contents you may read in the end of the book) are contained furthermore in this book these things following.  

¶ Of the lands and Islands lat●ly found. Folio. 149.  
The pope's bull and donation. 167. and. 171.  
The history of the West Indies, written by Gonzalus Ferdinandus. 174.  
The ordinary navigation from Spain to the West Indies. 175.  
Of two notable things as touching the West Indies: and of the great riches brought from thence into Spain. 176  
Of the gold mines and manner of working in them. 177.  
The manner of fishing for pearls. 180.  
The familiarity that the Indians have with the devil. 181.  
Of temperate and habitable regions under the Equinoctial line. etc. 184.  
Of divers particular things, as worms, serpents, beasts, fowls. etc. 185.  
Of trees, fruits, and plants. etc. 194.  
Of the venomous apples wherewith the Canibales inveneme their arrows. 199.  
Of fishes and their manner of fishing. 201.  
Of the rising and falling of hour Ocean sea and the south sea called the sea of Sur. 204.  
Of the straight of land being between the north and south sea. 205.  
How things of one kind, differ by the nature of the place: and of the beasts called Tigers. 206.  
Of the manners and customs of the Indians of the firm land and of their women. 208.  
Of the Islands Hispaniola and Cuba. 210.  
Of the Island of Cuba and other. 213.  
Of the land of Baccalaos. 213.  
Other notable things gathered out of divers authors: and of the universal card and new world. 214.  
A discourse of the marvelous viage made by the spaniards round about the world. 215.  
The order of the stars about the pole Antarctic. 222.  
The prices of precious stones and sp●ces with their weights and measures as they are sold both of the moors and gentiles. 233.  
Of the weights of Portugal and India, and how they agree. 239.  
Of the doves of the Island of Madera. 239.  
Of the Island of saint Thomas under the Equinoctial line. 240.  
The debate and strife between the spaniards and Portugals for the division of the Indies and the trade of spices. 240.  
Of the pole Antarctic and the stars about the same: and of the quality of the regions and disposition of the elements about the Equinoctial line: Also of certain secrets touching the art of sailing. 245.  
A discourse of divers voyages and ways by the which spices, precious stones, and gold were brought in old time from India into Europe and other parts of the world. Also of the viage to Cathay and east India by the north sea: And of the viages of Sebastian Cabot. 249.  
Of the voyages to moscovia and Cathay. 249.  
A brief description of Moscovia. 259.  
The description of the north regions: and how they are habitable, contrary to th'opinion of the owlde writers. 264.  
Scondia. 267.  
Gronlande. 268.  
Island. 269.  
Laponia. 270.  
Norway. 273.  
Suetia or Suethlande. 275.  
Gothia or Gothlande. 276.  
Finlande and Eningia. 276.  
Bothnia. 275.  
The dy●ference of regions and causes of great cities. 277.  
The history of Paulus iovius of the ambassade of great Basilius' Prince of moscovia to pope Clement the seventh. 278.  
Other notable things as concerning moscovia, gathered out of the books of Sigismundus Liberus. 289.  
The description of the regions and people lying North and east from Moscovia to the river Petzora and the province of jugaria and the river Obi. etc. 294.  
Of the famous river of Tanais. 297.  
More directly from moscovia to ●athay. 298.  
Of the Tartars. 299.  
The navigation by the frozen se●▪ 303.  
The letters missive which king Edward the vi sent to the kings, princes, and other potentates inhabiting the north east parts of the world toward the Empire of Cathay. 306. and. 308.  
The letters of the prince of Moscovia sent to king Edward. 319.  
Other notable things as touching the Indies: and of the foreknowleage that the poet Seneca had of the finding of the new world & other regions not then known. 310  
Of the great Island which Plato called Atlantica or Atlantide. 310.  
Of the colour of the Indians. 311.  
Why they were called Indians. 311.  
The first discovering of the West Indies. 312.  
What manner of man Christopher Colon was, and how he came first to the knowledge of the Indies. 313.  
What labour and travail he took in attempting his first viage to the Indies. 313.  
Of new Spain called Nova Hispania or Mexico. 315.  
Of Peru. 316.  
Of the great river called Rio de la Plata. 316.  
Of the higher or superior India called India Tercera or Terciera. 317.  
again of the lands of Laborador and Baccalaos. 318.  
The discovering of the land of Florida. 319.  
An opinion that Europe, Africa, and Asia, are Islands: and of certain Navigations about the same. 320.  
That the spaniards have sailed to the Antipodes which inhabit the undermost half of the ball of the earth, contrary to th'opinions of the owlde writers. 321.  
Who first found the needle of the compass and the use thereof. 322.  
The situation and bigness of the earth. 323.  
What degrees are. 324.  
A demonstration of the roundness of the earth. 324.  
What credit ought to be given to writers as touching the works of nature. 325.  
The preface to the book of metals. 326.  
Of the generation of metals and their mines, with the manner of finding the same. 327.  
Of the mine of gold and the quality thereof. 334.  
Of the mine of silver. 340.  
The manner of working in the gold mines of egypt in old tyme. 342.  
The description of the two voyages made out of England to Guinea in Africa. 343.  
A brief description of Africa. 344.  
The first viage to Guinea. 345.  
The second viage to guynea. 350.  
The manner of finding the Longitude of regions by divers ways. 360.  
A new manner of finding the Longitudes of regions. 361▪  
A brief rehearsal of the contents of the books of the Decades. etc.   
FINIS.   

¶ The interpretation of certain Words.  

¶ Continente (that is) the firm land not enclosed with water, or no Island.  
A Caravel or carvel, a kind of ships.  
Hemispherium, the half globe of the earth and water.  
Pesus, a ducat and a half.  
Equinoctial, the line that divideth the heaven and the earth in the midst between the two poles, in the which when the son cometh, the days & nights are of equal length  
Clime, is a portion of the world between north and south.  
Parallels, are lines whereby the son passing causeth variation of tyme.  
Gatti Mammoni, Monkeys.  
Schoenus, is a space of xl furlongs.  
Werst, is an Italian mile.  
Colony, an habitation.   

The Indian language.  
¶ Canoa, a boat or bark.  
Caciqui, kings or governors.  
Zemes' an Idol.  
Tuyra, the devil,  
Machana, a sword.  
Areitos, songs or ballads.  
Tona, the moon.  
Tonatico, the son.  
Quines, priests.  
Chivy, a man.  
Ira, a woman.  
Boa, a house.  
Cauni, gold.  
Mayani, nothing. etc.   
¶ Note that the Island of Hispaniola, is now called San Domingo by reason of the chief city so named. Also saint john's Island called sancti johannis, or Burichena, is otherwise called Boriquen.   

richard Eden to the reader.  
THe most famous orator and learned Philosopher Marcus Tullius Cicero, writeth, that in all consultations as touching hour behaviour and order of living among men, it behoveth us ever to bear in mind how far the dignity of man's nature, excelleth the condition of brute beasts. For they, being ruled altogether by sense, delight in nothing but beastly appetites, whereunto they run headlong as to their only felicity. But the mind of man, being of more noble nature, is nurysshed with knowledge, and taketh pleasure in divising or excogitating sum honest thing, whereby it not only leaveth among men a memory of his immortal nature, but also engendereth the like affection in other that delight to see and hear such things as are commendable in their predecessors And this surely think I to be the cause that either the famous facts of worthy men, 
Commendation of noble facts.  or ingenious inventions of expert artificers, have not only nobilitate the authors and divisers of the same, or such to whom they have been dedicated, but also that part of their commendations have redounded to all such as have spent their time and taken pains in illustrating and setting forth their doings. For who should at this day have known Mausolus the king of Caria, 
Mausolus.  with his wife Artemisia, or these famous artificers, 
Cunning artificers.  Scopa, Bryaces, Timotheus, Leochares, or Pythis, if the wonderful and sumptuous work of the sepulchre which Artemisia made for king Mausolus her husband (being of such woorkemanshyppe that it was accounted for one of the marvels of the world) had not given unto all these immortal fame, whereas nevertheless it could not defend itself against thinjury of time consuming all things. There remaineth at this day no token of the laborious Tabernacle which Moses builded, 
The Tabernacle of Moses.  or of the renowned and maru●●lous Temple that was builded in Jerusalem by Solomon and renewed by Esdras. 
The Temple of Solomon.  Yet shall the name of the excellent artificers Ooliab and Beselchel, and Hyram the king of Tyrus, 
Hyram.  live for ever in the memory of men. Furthermore also, Solomon himself, although he were many other ways famous, yet gave he a great part of his glory to that princely building. But certainly the most true and permanent glory, 
True glory.  proceedeth of such monuments as bring sum great and notable commodity & profit to the life of men, rather than of the hugeous heaps of stones of the Pyramids of Egypt, wherein is nought else to see but the fond & barbarous ostentation of superfluous riches: 
Great and sumptuous works,  Or of the Mazes called Labyrinthi, or of horrible great Images called Colossi, of knots inexplicable, of brazen caudrons of monstrous bigness, of havens with echo seven times rebounding, and divers such other portentous inventions, the which as they do delight us in considering the marvelous art and wit of such artificers as devised and made the same, so are they otherwise unprofitable: And bring rather a fame to their inventors, then true glory. 
Fame differeth from true glory.  Perillus was famous by divising his brazen bull: yet so, that it had been better for him to have been obscure and unknown. They have therefore deserved more true commendation which in building of cities, towns, fortresses, bridges, cundites, havens, ships, and such other, have so joined magnificence with profect, that both may remain for an eternal testimony of absolute glory, 
Absolute glory.  whose perfection extendeth to the gratifying of universal mankind as far as man's mortality will permit. The which thing while I consider, and call to memory how Cicero defineth true glory to be a fame of many and great deserts either toward hour citizens, 
What is true glory.  hour country, or toward all man kind, and the same to be of such excellency that the owlde poets for sum effect feigned it to be the sweet Ambrosia and Nectar wherewith the gods are fed, and that of such force that who so may drink thereof, shall also become a god, (that is to say immortal and happy) me think verily that (if man may be a god to men as holy scripture speaketh of Moses and other) the kings of Spain of late days (if I may speak it without offence of other) may so much the more for their just deserts and good fortune be compared to those gods made of men (whom the antiquity called Heroes and for their manifold benefits to man kind honoured them with 
The kings of Spain. Heroes.  divine honour) as their famous facts so far excel all other, as I dare not speak to such as have not yet hard or red of the same, lest the greatness thereof should at the first brunt so much astonyshe the reader that he might give the less credit to the author of this book, who nevertheless hath most faithfully written this history of such things whereof he hath seen a great part himself (as being by the most catholic and puissant king Ferdinando appointed a commissionarie in th'affairs of India) and gathered the residue partly by information and partly out of the writings of such as have been (as Uyrgyll writeth of Aeneas, 
The certainty of this history  Et quorum pars magna fui) that is, doers and part of such things as are contained in the history: as Governors, lieutenants, Captains, Admirals, and pilots, who by their painful travails and prows, have not only subdued these lands and seas, but have also with like diligence committed thorder thereof to writing: And not this only, but for the better trial of the truth herein, have and yet do in manner daily send from thence into Spain such monuments as are most certain testimonies of their doing, as you may read in divers places in this book. This new world is now so much frequented, the Ocean now so well known, and the commodities so great, that the king erected a house in the city of Seville (called the house of the contracts of India) pertaining only to th'affairs of the Ocean, 
The house of the contracts of India.  to the which all such resort for necessaries as attempt any viage to this new world, and likewise at their return make their account to the counsel for the Indies for the gold and such other things as they bring from thence. 
The counsel for the Indieses  It is therefore apparent that the heroical facts of the Spaniards of these days, 
The heroical facts of the spaniards.  deserve so great praise that thauthor of this book (being no spaniard) doth worthily extol their doing above the famous acts of Hercules and Saturnus and such other which for their glorious and virtuous enterprises were accounted as gods among men. And surely if great Alexander and the Romans which have rather obtained then deserved immortal fame among men for their bloody victories only for their own glory and amplifying their empire obtained by slaughter of innocentes and kept by violence, 
Great Alexander.  
The ●panyardes wars in the Indies.  have been magnified for their doings, how much more than shall we think these men worthy just commendations which in their merciful wars against these naked people have so used themselves toward them in exchanging of benefits for victory, that greater commodity hath thereof ensued to the vanquished then the victourers. They have taken nothing from them but such as they themselves were well willing to depart with, and accounted as superfluities, as gold, pearls, precious stones and such other: for the which they recompensed them with such things as they much more esteemed. 
The benefits that the Indians have received by the spaniards.  But sum will say, they possess and inhabit their regions and use them as bondmen and tributaries, where before they were free. They inhabit their regions in deed: Yet so, that by their diligence and better manuring the same, they may now better sustain both, than one before. Their bondage is such as is much rather to be desired then their former liberty which was to the cruel Canibales rather a horrible licentiousness than a liberty, 
Liberty.  
The Canibales,  and to the innocent so terrible a bondage, tha● in the midst of their fearful idleness, 
Fearful idleness.  they were ever in danger to be a pray to those manhunting wolves. But now thanked be God, by the manhodde and policy of the spaniards, this devilish generation is so consumed, partly by the slaughter of such as could by no means be brought to civility, and partly by reserving such as were overcome in the wars, and converting them to a better mind, that the prophecy may herein be fulfilled that the wolf and the lamb shall feed together, 
Isai. 65.  and the wild fields with the vale of A●hor, shallbe the fold of the heard of god's people. Moses as the minister of the law of wrath and bondage given in fire & tempests, 
The wars of Moses.  was commanded in his wars to save neither man, woman, nor child, and yet brought no commodity to the nations whom he overcame and possessed their lands. But the Spaniards as the ministers of grace and liberty, 
The Indians subdued to the faith.  browght unto these new gentiles the victory of Christ's death whereby they being subdued with the worldly sword, are now made free from the bondage of Satan's tyranny, by the mighty power of this triumphant victorer, 
Isai. 42.  whom (as saith the prophet) god hath ordained to be a light to the gentiles, to open the eyes of the blind, and to deliver the bound out of prison and captivity. What other men do fantasy herein, I can not tell: but sure I am, that like as the slow and brutyssh● wits, for the slenderness of their capacity and effeminate hearts, do never or seldom lift up their minds to the contemplation of god's works and majesty of nature, 
The contemplation of gods works.  but like brute beasts looking ever downward, think the world to be in manner no bigger than their own dungehylles or cagies, little passing whether the Christian faith do spread through the world, or be driven to one corner: Even so all good wits and honest natures (I doubt not) will not only rejoice to see the kingdom of God to be so far enlarged upon the face of the earth, to the confusion of the devil and the Turkysshe antichrist, 
The Christian Empire enlarged.  but also do the uttermost of their power to further the same. For surely, as Gonsalus Ouiedus writeth to the emperors majesty in his history of the West Indies, that he thinketh him no true spaniard which rejoiceth not in the good fortune of their kings by whose aid and godly zeal this mighty portion of the world hath been added to the flock of Christ's congregation, 
The conversion of the gentiles.  Even so do I think them no true Christian men that do not rejoice with the Angels of heaven for the delivery of these hour brootherne, hour flesh, and hour bones, from the hands of hour common enemy the old serpent who hath so long had them in his possession, until the fullness of the gentiles be accomplished according to the time prefinite by him, who unto the year after his incarnation. M. CCCC.lxxxxii. hath suffered the great serpent of the sea Leviathan, 
Leviathan.  to have such dominion in the Ocean and to cast such mists in the eyes of men, that sense the creation of the world until the year before named, there hath been no passage from our known parts of the world to these new lands, whereas now the same are most certainly known to be not past xxx days sailing from Spain. Neither yet had the church of Europe any knowledge of the mighty Christian Empire of Preciosus johannes, otherwise called Presbyter johannes, Emperor of many Christian nations in Ethiope, 
Prester john the Christian Emperor of Ethiope.  until the year of christ. M. CCCC.xxxiii. as largely appeareth in the navigations of the Portugals, and especially in the book of Damianus a Goes, written to the bishop of Rome, Paul the third of that name, of the faith and religion of the Ethiopians which they have had sense the time of the Apostles. A thing certes most wonderful, and such, that if the same were not hid hitherto by gods unsearchable providence, I can not but think much negligence or ignorance in our forefathers and predecessors until the days of the right noble, prudent, and Catholic king of Arragon Don Ferdinando grandfather to Themperors majesty by his eldest daughter, 
Don Ferdinando king of Arragon.  & to the queen's highness by his second daughter the most virtuous lady queen Catherine her grace's mother: A prince doubtless of such nobility, prows, magnificence, and all other virtues commendable in a prince, that who so shall indifferently way all his doings and good success in all his affairs, comparing the same to thenterprises and doings achieved by such famous princes in whom the Greeks and Romans have so greatly gloried, may with one eye perceive not only how far his noble facts do surmount theirs, but also well consider what noble branches of isshewe were like to spring out of so worthy a stock. And surely if sense the beginning of the world, the favour of god toward men hath been known by such benefits and blessings as he hath given to men, 
The favour of god known by his benefits.  it seemeth to me that in manner (only christ excepted) there never lived man to whom god hath given greater benefits and showed more favour. Great doubtless was the favour and mercy that god showed unto Noah, 
Noe.  by whom he saved the remanent of mankind being but few in number. But much greater was the grace which he showed to king Ferdinando under whom and by whose means he saved not only the bodies but also the souls of innumerable millions of men inhabiting a great part of the world heretofore unknown and drowned in the deluge of error. 
What god hath wrought by king Ferdinando.  What should I here speak of Abraham the father of faith whose promises were great, 
Abraham,  and he called the friend of god? Did he or his posterity see Israel increase to such multitudes and nations as king Ferdinando's posterity may see th'increase of this spiritual Israel unto whom as a second Abraham he was the father of faith? 
Spiritual Israel.  Moses was so great in the sight of god that he disclosed unto him his secret name, 
Moses.  and miraculously caused a corner of the sea to open at his prayer. But how greater a miracle was it that he opened unto the navy of Don Ferdinando the great Ocean thowght before that time to be without end, where nevertheless he and his posterity the kings of Spain have now planted a new Israel much greater than that which Moses led through the red sea. It were here superfluous to speak of David whom god found a man according to his hearts desire: 
David.  and yet may it be doubted whether his plagues and scourges were greater than his benefits? His son Solomon for all his inconstant and wavering wisdom and his great riches obtained by his navigations to Ophir, 
Solomon.  
Ophir.  yet was there at this time no knowledge of Antipodes, 
Antipodes.  neither did any of his ships sail about the hole world, pierce the Ocean, 
The navigation round about the world.  and traverse the Equinoctial line to thinferior hemisphery or half globe of the earth and sea as did the famous ship Uictoria sent forth by Themperors majesty. A thing doubtless so strange and marvelous that as the like was never done before, so is it perhaps never like to be done again: so far have the navigations of the spaniards excelled the viage of jason and the ‛ Argonautae to the region of Colchos, or all that ever were before. And although in the book of kings and Paralipomenon it be hyperborically written that in the da●es of Solomon gold & silver were in Jerusalem in manner as plentiful as stones, & that his servants brought from Ophir four hundredth & fifty talents of gold, yet do we not read that any of his ships were so laden with gold that they sunk, as did a ship of king Ferdinando's as you may read in the last book of the first Decade. Neither was the dominion of Solomon extended from the river of Euphrates to the land of the Philistians and th'extreme confines of egypt to be compared with the large Empire which the kings of Spain have in the west Indies: 
The dominion of Solomon. Paral, 9  
The Indies.  Nor his riches of gold to be thought much in respect of that which hath been browght from thence into Spain as shall plainly appear to all such as will seek to know the truth hereof. But to let pass to speak any further of the miracles which god hath wrought by the hands of this noble prince in this new world among these new gentiles. 
The wars of king Ferdinando against the Saracens.  Is it not well known to al● the world what a defence and brazen wall he hath been to all Christendom in that he hath quite driven out of Spain the moors or Saracens and jews which so many hundredth years possessed a great part of Spain to no smaule daungioure of the hole Christian Empire, and yet could never before be clean vanquished until the days of this noble and catholic prince so named for his wars against the infidels, whom God raised for a captain of his people as an other Gedion under whose banner they might overcome their enemies and purge his vinyeard from such wicked weeds. The which thing doubtless may seem so much the greater and more difficult, forasmuch as in the midst of the chief heat of his chargeable wars against the moors of Granada, he even then and at the same time sent forth ships for the conquesting of the Indies, 
The conquest of the Indies  as although he and the nation of the spaniards had been appointed by god either to subdue the enemies of the faith or to bring them to Christ's religion. The self same king Ferdinando also about the year of Chryst. 1503. sent a navy of ships into Italy, where they vanquished, chased, and show the frenchmen, and recovered the kingdom of Naples with all the dominions belonging thereunto. 
The conquest of Naples.  By which noble victory, his succession and posterity as th'emperors majesty and now his son the king hour master and sovereign lord have ever sense enjoyed th'inheritance of the same as of antiquity by just and right title dew to them and their predecessors. And as it is the nature of god not only to show his love and favour to such as have pleased him, but also to pour forth the plenty of his grace upon their succession from generation to generation, so hath he with like fecilitie prospered the reign of Themperors majesty who by his wisdom and prows hath not only pollitikly governed, 
The emperors majesty  but also augmented and enlarged such dominions as fell to him by discente of inheritance. What should I speak of his wars and conquests in India, in afric, in Italy, in France, in Germany, and in Flaunders: all the which to be declared accordingly would rather require hole volumes than few sheets of paper. Yet hath one in few words effectually expressed his dominions and conquests in these verses following.  
Impiger expavit rapidas transire per undas  
Oceani Alcides: continuitque gradum.  
Maximus at Caesar, PLUS VLTRA tendere cur●um  
Ausus, et ignotis est dare iura locis.  
Et domita aurifera nunc victor gente reversus,  
Caetera sub sceptro ponat ut ipse suo.  
Nam pater omnipotens ut famam terminet astris  
jussit, et imperium fineat Oceano.  
¶ An other also briefly hath declared the same in these verses.  
Consortem Imperij voluit quia jupiter orbis.  
Astra Deo cedunt, Carole terra tibi.  
And certes who so well considereth the progeny of kings that in so short a time have lineally descended from Don Ferdinando, and how many kingdoms they possess, may see that God hath fulfilled in him also the promises and blessings of Abraham, 
Gen. 17.  as to make him the father of many nations, and his seed to grow great upon the earth: Also that many kings should come forth of his loins, and to make a perpetual league and convenant with him and his posterity to be their god for ever. And here to omit to speak of other: Was there ever better hope or more likeness than now, that these blessings and promises of god should continue in this princely progeny, sith the virtues and felicity of them all do so shine and flourish in our noble and gracious prince king Phylyppe, 
The kings majesty.  to whom even in his youth his father (occupied in the wars of italy and afric) committed the hole governance of the kingdoms of Spain and the Indies. Of his behaviour in England, his enemies (which canker, virtue never lacked) They I say (if any such yet remain) have greatest cause to report well: ye so well, that if his natural clemency were not greater than was their unnatural indignation they know themselves what might have followed. The properties of ●ooles and wise men are declared in these owld verses.  
Quid stulti proprium? Non posse et velle nocere.  
Quid sapie●tis opus: Non velle et posse nocere.  
That is to say: What is the property of a fool: To will to do hurt and can not. What is the work of a wise man? Not to will to hurt though he may. But whether he hath lacked power or will, it is known to barbers and blere eyed men. Who lamented their folly more than he? Who more humbly admitted their suits and supplications? Ye who obtained their pardon but he? Being a Lion he behaved himself as a lamb, 
Apostrophe to England.  and struck not his enemy having the sword in his hand. Stoop England stoop, and learn to know thy lord and master, as horses and other brute beasts are taught to do. Be not indocible like Tigers and dragons, and such other monsters noyous to man kind. God by the mouth of Isaias the prophet reproveth the Israelites that they knew not so well their duty toward him as did the brute beasts the mangiers of their masters. 
Isai. 1.  The ox and the ass (saith he) knoweth the manger of their master, but Israel knoweth not me. For shame let us not be worse than oxen and asses, & like unto horses and mules in whom is no understanding. But O unthankful England and void of honest shame? Who hath given the the face of a hoore and tongue of a serpent without shame to speak venomous words in secrets against the anointed of god. O painted whore that hast christ in thy mouth and the devil in thy heart. Hath not the pocke of thy licentiousness brus●e forth in manner to thine own destruction. How long wilt thou nourish in thy bosom that serpent whose nature is to devour her mother? Take a vomit in time lest thy disease become uncurable. What need I rehearse unto the thy manifold infirmities and deformities which thou art faulen into by thine own owtragiousnesse? If the griefs of them be to thee unsensible by reason of thy feebleness and long sickness, take unto the that glass wherein thou gloriest with the jew and thinkest that thou seest at things and ●●nst judge all mysteries. Look I say in that pure glass and behold thy own deformities, which thou canst not or wilt not feel. I fear greatly that if thou look therein diligently and look even through thyself▪ thou wilt abhor thyself to see how many monsters lie hid in the under the shape of man. 
Monstrous births.  There is even now great talk of the in the mouths of all men that thou hast of late years brought forth many monsters and strange births, whereof divers men make divers interpretations more monstrous than the monsters themselves. But shall I briefly and simply declare unto thee the signification of thy monsters? 
The significations of monstrous births.  first then consider that they are monsters of mankind and not of other beasts. Secondarily mark well that in them all, the head is perfect, so that the monstrosit●e groweth out of the body, although not out of the hole body but certain parts thereof. But not to go to far. Consider again that disorder of the parts is a deformity to the hole. One hath well interpreted that such monstrous births signify the monstrous and deformed minds of the people mysshapened with fantastical opinions, 
T●e deformity of monstrous minds.  dissolute living, licentious talk, and such other vicious behavoures which monstrously deform the minds of men in the sight of god who by such signs doth certify us in what similitude we appear before him, & thereby giveth us admonition to amend before the day of his wrath and vengeance. What deformed beasts are more monstrous than lying, rebellion, strife, contention, privy malice, slandering, mu●terynge, conspiraces, and such other devilysshe imaginations. But O England while time is given thee, circumcise thy heart. Put to only thy good will, and thou mayst find grace and favour to recover thine ancient beauty which hath so long been defaced. 
The king and Queen.  Thou haste now a king and queen that desire thee to remember thy duty, and hold their arms abroad to embrace thee if thou wilt draw near unto them. They are sorry to occupy the whip if thou mightest otherwise be brought to obedience. But if thou take pleasure to persist in froward stoobbernesse, know thou that they are Lions whelps and conquerors of monsters whereof thou hast had such experience, that proudly trusting 〈◊〉 thine own strength, and attempting like an other Nembroth to build a n●we tower of confu●●on, the works of thy giants were miraculously overthrown by a woman who delivered thee from that captivity, whereby thou oughtesse to know the daungiour thou wast in, and be thankful to thy deliverer. Beware therefore least while thou contemn the peaceable princes that god hath sent thee, thou be like unto Isopes frogs to whom for their unquietness, jupiter sent a hearon to pick them in the hedes. Consider what benefices than mayst receive at their hands if thou do thy duty toward them. Consider again that as they are able, so may thy gentleness make them willing to recomp●nse the same. Stop thine ears from vain fables as from the enchanting Mermaids. For as many speak of Robbyn Hood and of his bow that never shot therein, so do fools prate of such things as they know not. But O god? what fantasies are now in the head●s of men? How ●edy they are to invent lies and tales? and of how small sparks they kindle great flames? sum are so curious to find fault in other, 
How curious sum are to find fault in other.  that for lack of just matter worthy reproach in them whom they desire to deprave, they speak evil of their parents & kindred of whom they know as little. And not so satisfied they despise and with lying dispraise their hole nation and country. Ye sum take such pleasure herein, that if they can find nought else to dispraise, they will find fault in such as they favour not, because they wear not their apparel as they do, or perhaps are not so effeminate as they, or eat not as they eat, or fight not as they fight, so partial is the iudgenent of fools in their own rudeness, thinking themselves the better for dispraising of other. 
Lies Imagined.  Spain is a beggarly country saith one: Themperor is but poor saith an other: He is dead saith an other: The Indies have rebelled saith an other, and either there cometh no more gold from thence, or there is no more found now: with such other false and licentious talk devised by unquiet brains in whose heads the hammers of sedition seize not to forge ingens of iniquity. If I should here answer to all these quarrels particularly and as the worthiness of the thing requireth, I might find matter sufficient to make a volume of just quantity and perhaps be tedious to sum. Yet not to pass over so great a matter untouched, and partly to stop the mouths of such impudence liars, I have thought good to speak somewhat hereof. first therefore to speak of Spain, 
Commendations of Spain  & by the testimony of old authors to declare the commodities thereof: Pliny a grave & faithful autour, in the last book & last chapiture of his natural history greatly commending Italy above all other countries, giveth the second praise unto Spain, aswell for all such things as in manner the heaven can give & the earth bring forth for the commodity of this life as also for the excellent wits of men & Civil governance. Also Diodorus Siculus in the sixth book of his Bibliotheca speaking of Spain (called of the Greeks Iberia) writeth that when in the mountains named Pyrine● thinhabitants burnt up the woods, 
Rich silver mines in Spain,  there ran out of the mountains as it were divers streams of pure silver melted by the heat of the fire. But the estimation and price of silver being at those days to them unknown, the Phenician merchants bought the same of them for things of smaule value: And carrying it into Grecia, Asia, and other countries, got great richesse thereby. For the desire o● gains (saith he) so greatly moved the merchants, that when more silver remained then might lad their ships, they took the lead from their anchors, and put silver in the place thereof. The Phenices by this gains being made very rich, did assign many colonies both in Sicily and the Islands there about, and also in Libya, Sardinia, and Iberia. But after many years when the Iberians (that is the Spaniards) knew the price of silver, and applied themselves to the seeking of metals and found great plenty of silver, they obtained great riches thereby forasmuch as in manner all that earth of the mountains is so replenished with silver that it is a marvelous thing to consider the nature of the region and the continual labour of the workmen in those mines. Likewise when afterward the Romans subdued the Iberians, 
The Romans enriched by the silver of Spain.  the Italians which for the desire of gains searched those metals, got great richesse by the same. For they deputed to that labour a multitude of bowght servants, which searching the haynes of metals in divers places, and piercing the earth divers ways for the space of many furlongs, browght forth great plenty of gold and silver. But the richesse of these mines was first found at such time as the Carthaginenses (the enemies of the Roman Empire) had the Iberians in subjection: 
The Carthaginenses enriched by the silver of Spain.  which was the cause that their power afterward increased. For, with money hyringe the best and most expert● soldiers, they kept grievous wars against their enemies. And not using the aid either of their own soldiers or their associates, they were a terror to the Romans, Sicilians, and Libian, whom they browght into great daungiour by reason they passed them all in abundance of gold and silver. With better fortune therefore, and greater hope of gain are rich metals sought in Spain, the goodness of whose soil yieldeth clods of earth containing much gold and silver. And these be the very words of Diodorus Siculus, which the later writers do also confirm. For julius Solinus in his Polyhistor, compareth Spain to the best countries in plenty of grain, victuals, oil, silver, gold, and Iron. Likewise Strabo, Statius, and Claudius, do no less commend it. It were to long here to speak of the great plenty of fine wools little inferior unto owrs: also abundance of sugar, 
The commodities of Spain  vines, pome granates, limondes, and orangies in such plenty that they suffice not only Spain, but also in manner all Europe: whereas the apples and crabs of England are scarcely able to serve itself. And although here sum will object, that they lack corn, wood, and certain other things, yet are their commodities so great otherwise, that all such things are browght them out of other countries for their wares: and that in such plenty, that they are there better cheap than ever they were in England sense the sign of the steeple the poor man's Inn was pulled down in all places. 
The sign of the steeple.  sum for lack of other matter, find great fault that in travailing in Spain, men shallbe served with half a hen, and go to the cooks for their meat and to the tavern for their drink. And what then I pray you? What inconvenience ensueth hereof? Is it not better so to do then to pay thrice for one thing as is the manner to do in sum of hour Inns and in taverns where all that eat roast meat are beaten with the spit, as where they that of late in Barthelmewe fair paid forty pennies for a pig, where the good man of the house was not a shamed to make his vaunt that he had made four shillings of a pig, and had in one day taken four pound for pigs. But if I should here particularly and at large declare how England is in few years decayed and impoverysshed, 
England impoverisshed, Spain enriched.  and how on the contrary part Spain is enriched, I should perhaps displease more in describing the misery of the one, then please other in expressing the flourishing state of the other, which by all reason is like daily to increase, aswell for the great richesse that are yearly browght thither from the Indies, as also for the rich silver mines that are found of late in Spain in the country of Asturia as I was credibly informed by the worthy and learned gentleman Augustinus de Ceratta, 
Silver mines found of late in Spain.  Contador (that is) the auditor of the kings mints who had long before been surueyoure of the gold mines of Peru, 
Silver brought from Peru into England.  and browght from thence and from Rio de Plata xiii thousand pound weight of silver which was coined to the kings use in the tower of London where never so much hath been seen at once as such as have been old officers in the mint do affirm. What should I hear speak of the gold which th'emperors majesty receiveth from all the Indies, 
Themperors revenues from the Indies.  whereas only in the two melting shops of the gold mines of the Island of Hispaniola, is melted yearly three hundredth thousand pound weight of viii ounces to the pound, whereof the fift part is dew unto him, which amounteth to three score thousand weight yearly. Yet do I not here speak of the gold mines of the other Islands and the firm land reaching viii thousand miles from the north to the south: Neither of the rich Islands of the south sea called Mare deal Sur, 
The Islands of the South-sea.  where the king of one little Island named Tararequl, Margaritea, or de las Perlas, lying in the gulf of Saint Michael, payeth yearly for his tribute a hundredth pound weight of pearls: Neither yet of the fift part of other things, as precious stones, brasile, gossampine cotton, spices, and divers other things, whereas also the rich Islands caused the Maluchas pertain to the inheritance of Castille, 
The Islands of Maluca.  although the king of Portugal enjoy them for certain years by composition. But the Indies have rebelled (say they) and there cometh no more gold from thence. But what if sum of them have rebelled? doth it thereby follow that there cometh no more gold from the other that live under obedience? But if thou wilt say that they have all rebelled at once, thou must prove that thou sayest either by history or witness of such as know the truth hereof, as I (having made diligent search for the same) am able to prove the contrary, and that such talk is only imagined by busy heads. again: what if they have rebelled in sum provinces? doth it follow that they may not again be browght under subjection as were oftentimes the provinces of the Romans and as were in hour days divers countries of England which have been sore afflicted with that plague. But whether the sands of the rivers and the mountains of the Indies be so emptied with gold that no more can be found there, I think it here superfluous to answer to this objection, forasmuch as it is hereafter confuted in the book of metals where you shall find by experience that metals grow and increase, and that after certain years, such owlde caves of the mines as have been digged, are again replenished with ure: Also that the springs of such mountains turning their course and breaking forth in other places, bring with them great plenty of such golden sand as is found in the rivers into the which they faule. What impudency is it therefore with words of reproach to call him poor whose power is so great, his treasure so infinite, and his doings so chargeable, that I believe that when so ever it please almighty God to call him from this life to the great damage of all Christendom, it shallbe hard to find an other that shall in all points be so well able to supply that room and maintain th'imperial dignity. Let all honest natures therefore learn to speak well of princes according to the sentence De Principibus nil nisi bonum, forasmuch as they are the ministers of god who hath their hearts in his hand and ruleth the same as seemeth best unto him. For there is no power neither good nor bad, but of god: and he that resisteth or speaketh evil of the power, resisteth and speaketh evil of god. Thou shalt not speak evil of the prince or ruler of thy people saith saint Paul.  
But whereas now by the power of Neptunus' (I wots near with what wind) I have been driven thus far from my navigations, 
The navigations of the spaniards  I have thought good to turn my sails and to follow the ordinary course which I began, and by th'exemple of this worthy captain king Ferdinando, encourage all other to their power to attempt the like voyages: As touching the which in few words to declare my opinion, if any man s●ulde as●e me what I think these things will grow to in time, I will answer as doth the author of this book, that when I consider how far hour posterity shall see the Christian religion enlarged, I am not able with tongue or pen to express what I conceive hereof in my mind. Yet one thing I see which enforceth me to speak & lament, that the harvest is so great & the workmen so few. The spaniards have showed a good exemple to all Christian nations to follow. But as god is great and wonderful in all his works, so beside the portion of land pertaining to the spaniards (being eight times bigger than italy as you may read in the last book of the second Decade) and beside that which pertaineth to the Portugals, 
Itali is 〈◊〉 miles in length and, 126. in breadth.  there yet remaineth an other portion of that main land reaching toward the North-east, thought to be as large as the other, and not yet known but only by the sea coasts, neither inhabited by any Christian men: whereas nevertheless (as writeth Gemma Phrisius) in this land there are many fair and fruitful regions, high mountains, and fair rivers, with abundance of gold and divers kinds of beasts. Also cities and towers so well builded and people of such civility, that this part of the world seemeth little inferior to hour Europe, if thinhabitants had received hour religion. They are wytt●e people and refuse not bartering with strangers. These regions are called Terra Florida and Regio Baccalearum or Bacchallaos of the which you may read somewhat in this book in the viage of the worthy old man yet living Sebastiano Cabote, 
The land called Terra florida, & regio baccalearum.  in the vi book of the third Decade. 
Look the last book. third decade.  But Cabote touched only in the north corner and most barbarous part hereof, 
This region is now called Nova Hispania. S●m think that this c●tie is Quinsa● of marcus P●ulus.  from whence he was repulsed with Ice in the month of july. Nevertheless, the west and south parts of these regions have sense been better searched by other, and found to be as we have said before. The chief city in the south-west parts of these regions, is called Temixtetan, or Mexico in manner under the circle called Tropicus Cancri, and strongly defended by the nature of the place. 
Look the last book of the 3. decade, and the be●●n●ing of the book of ●he land●s lately ●ound.  For it standeth in a very great lake having about it innumerable bridges, and buildings to be compared to the works of Dedalus. Th●nhabitaun●es also can write and read. sum writers connect th●s land to the firm land of Asia: But the truth hereof is not yet known. And although the spaniards have certain colonies in that part of this land that is now called Nova Hispania, yet are the people for the most part idolaters. How much therefore is it to be lamented, and how greatly doth it sound to the reproach of all Christendom, and especially to such as dwell nearest to these lands (as we do) being much nearer unto the same then are the spaniards (as within xxv days sailing and less) how much I say shall this sound unto hour reproach and inexcusable slothfulness and negligence both before god and the world, that so large dominions of such tractable people and pure gentiles, not being hitherto corrupted with any other false religion (and therefore the easier to be alured to embrace ours) are now known unto us, and that we hau● no respect neither for god's cause nor for hour own commodity to attempt sum voyages into these coasts, to do for our parts as the Spaniards have done for theirs, and not ever like sheep to haunt one trade, and to do nothing worthy memory among men or thanks before god, who may herein worthily accuse us for the slackness of hour duty toward him. Saint Paul the doctor of the gentiles (to whose apostleship also these new gentiles do pertain) was of such zeal toward the jews whom god had rejected, 
The godly zeal of. S. Paul.  that he wished himself to be accursed of god for their sakes. He went from Damascus to Arabia, preached the gospel in Grecia, came prisoner to Rome, was scourged and stoned, and suffered thrice shipwreck, what then think you he would do if he were now alive? Is it to be thought that he would not adventure xxv days sailing to come to such a mart of souls in such readiness to be easily obtained? I believe verily that neither death, nor the devil, nor Leviathan, nor the world, should let him but that he would give thonset against them all in hope of victory by him by whom he saith he can do all things. He was not negligent in his office nor ignorant of his reward, but trusted to the promise of him that said by the mouth of the prophet Isai: 
Isai. 66.  Of them that shallbe saved, I will send sum to the gentiles in the sea, into afric and Libya, Italy, and Grecia, and into the Islands a far of, to them that have not hard of me, and have not seen my glory. The like zeal that Paul had, and proceeding of the same spirit, hath ever sense Christ's time, moved not only the Apostles, but also many other famous and godly men (as supervisors of his testament) to send owte preachers into divers parts of the world to show forth the glad tiding of the gospel. By this zeal did Gregory bishop of Rome and first of that name, 
Gregory th● First.  when he saw english mens children in Rome and asked what nation they were, when answer was made him in the latin tongue that they were Angli, (that is, english men) he said (alluding to the similitude of the word) that they might well be called Angeli, that is, Angels: 
Thoffice of bishops.  Meaning thereby that like as god had done his part in giving them bodies of natural beauty and comeliness, so it appertained to his office being the chief pastor of god's flock, to provide that their souls might be made worthy to inhabit such bodies and the hole nation consecrated unto god by baptism. For he said furthermore: It is meet that unto these also, the gospel of life be preached: And hereupon immediately sent preachers into England whereby the hole nation was in short time converted to Christ's faith, 
England converted to the faith of christ.  although sum had received the gospel long before even from Christ's time by the preaching of joseph of Arimathia who asked the body of christ of Pilot, and buried it reverently. I would to god that there were now many more such Gregory's in the world: And that there might like zeal and gentleness be found in us english men toward other nations, as we have found in other toward us. Hour predicessoures were not utterly unmindful of these benefits, but applied themselves likewise to spread the gospel in other nations. For Uadianus in his book De tribus terrae partibus, writeth, that more than seven hundreth years after the death of christ, one Unefride an english man and bishop of Mogunce (now called Mensae) was the first that tawght the faith of christ among the germans, 
This vnifrid● was afterward named Boneface.  at such time as the franks and Almains had passed over the rivers of Rhine and Danubius, and by putting the garrysons of the Romans to flight, had possessed a great part of their most notable provinces. For albeit that these rude and barbarous nations then accustomed only to war and robbery did hardly admit that wholesome doctrine at the beginning. Yet by the pollic●e and wisdom of the franks, it came so to pass that in manner through out all Germany, great increase of the Christian religion followed there most ample victories, as the like success is also seen in these barbarous nations subdued by the spaniards. Whereby it is apparent, that although sum hold opinion that none ought to be compelled to the faith, 
Whether any may be compelled to the faith.  yet we see by experience that without disputing of opinions (lest the pacientes should die before the physicians agree of the remedy) these enterprises have taken good effect to the great glory of god who cauleth men unto him by divers means and at divers ages of the declining world, otherwise now then in the time of christ and his Apostles when the pour of miracles was given unto men to confirm the new faith which had yet prevailed no where in the world. 
The time of miracles.  Albeit, I believe verily, that if we would take the matter in hand accordingly, god would not forget to aid us with miracles if it should so be requisite, as you may read in this book how he wrought miracles by the faith of a simple mariner even in thinfancy of faith. 
Miracles of l●te days.  And surely, like as there is no cause why we should any thing doubt of god's goodness in this behalf if the fave be not in hour selves. Even so, if we would first set hour hands to the plough, we ought to hope that he would give increase and work with us as he hath done with other, by whose prosperous success we may plainly see that it was his will that such things should go forward. For even Israel to whom promise was made by signs and miracles that they should possess the land to th'inheritance whereof, 
How Israel possessed the land of promise.  the sea opened itself to give them free passage, yet were they commanded by the power of the sword to make way, with great loss and slaughter of men and by force of arms to obtain the land promised to their fathers, which nevertheless few of them possessed that first fought for the same, but left their carcases in the wilderness. Is it not also written of the Jews which repaired the walls of the city of Jerusalem after their captivity in Babylon, 
●●dra. 2. cap. 4.  that Nehemias' their captain set the people in order with swords, spears, and bows to defend the workmen? And that also even the Princes of juda wrought upon the walls and carried burdens? likewise that they wrought with one hand and held their swords in the other? And if it were lawful for Israel according to the flesh, to use all means and policies to build up the walls of earthly Jerusalem, how much more than ought the spiritual Israelites to use all possible means to build up the walls and temples of spiritual Jerusalem, 
The building of spiritual Jerusalem.  whose foundation is Christ, willing all the nations of the world to be builded upon the same. It is the property of a wise builder to use such tools as the work requireth. And not at all times or in all works to use one tool. For that that serveth in soft timber, will not serve in knotty pieces, nor yet for stones. Thexpert physician useth v●hement remedies for desperate diseases: And cunning surgians use burning and cutting if the case so require, as in cutting of the finger to save the hand, or in cutting of the hand to save the hole body. Ye it hath sometimes so chanced that whereas men have intended hurt, there hath good proceeded thereof in fine: As he that would have slain Prometheus, wounded his wen with his sword, whereby he was healed of that disease. So is god able to turn evil into good, and to make things that are not, as things that are. Even so although sum will object that the desire of gold was the chief cause that moved the Spanyard●s and Portugals to search the new found lands, truly albeit we should admit it to be the chief cause, yet doth it not follow that it was the only cause, forasmuch as nothing letteth but that a man may be a warrior or a merchant, and also a Christian. Therefore what so ever hour chief intent be, either to obtain worldly fame or richesse, (although the zeal to increase Christian religion ought chief to move us) I would to god we would first attempt the matter: And then I doubt not but that it would so come to pass with us as it did with them who of long time after the beginning of the world before men were accustomed to eat flesh, thought it first sufficient so to use themselves among beasts that they were not hur●e of them: but shortly after, used them for their commodity: Then begun to wear their skins: And in fine, fell to eating of their flesh, and to use certain parts of them for remedies against diseases. Even so may these barbarians by the only conversation with the Christians, (although they were enforced thereto) be brought to such familiarity with civility and virtue, that not only we may take great commodity thereby, but they may also herewith imbibe true religion as a thing accidental although neither they nor we should seek the same. For like as they that go much in the son, are coloured therewith although they go not for that purpose, So may the conversation of the Christians with the gentiles induce them to hour religion, 
The conversion of the gentiles.  where there is no greater cause of contrary to resist as is in the Jews and Turks who are already drowned in their confirmed error. But these simple gentiles living only after the law of nature, may well be likened to a smooth and bare table unpainted, or a white paper unwritten, upon the which you may at the first paint or write what you list, as you can not upon tables already painted, unless you raze or blot out the first forms. They may also theslyer be alured to the Christian faith, 
The ch●istian faith.  for that it is more agreeable to the law of nature then either the ceremonious law of Moses, or portentous fables of Mahomates Alcharon. If we were therefore as desirous to enlarge the faith of christ as to seek worldly goods, why do we defer to adventure that wherein we may do both. We must not now look for a new Paul or doctor of the gentiles to be converted by heavenly revelations: Or for a new Moses to lead men through the sea: Or for an Angel to carry men in the air from one place to an other as Habacucke the prophet was carried by the hear of his head from judea to Babylon: Or as Phylippe th'apostle was carried by the spirit from Gaza to Azotus: but must (as saith the prophet Isaias) every man exhort his neighbour, 
Isai. 4●.  and bid his brother be of good cheer: That the mason and carpenter may build together, and say to the glue or cement, it is good and fast binding. What negligence and slackness hath hitherto been in Christian men in this kind of building of gods lively temple, the great clerk Erasmus hath declared in his book entitled Ecclessiastes, whose words for the worthiness of the author, I have here thowght good to rehearse as they are written by him in the latin tongue in the fyrhe book of the said work. He writeth therefore as followeth.  Audimus quotidianas queremonias deplorantium collapsan Christianam religionem, 
●ugust●● Christi●●● di●ionis.  eamque ditionem quae quondam complexa est universum terrarum orbem, in has angustias esse contractam Hoc igitur quibus ex animodolet, eos decet ardentibus assiduisque votis flagitare a Christo ut operarios dignetur mittere in messem suam, aut (ut melius dicam) seminatores mittere in segetem suam. Deum immortalem, quantum in orb patet agrorum in quibus aut non dum iactum est semen Euangelicum, aut ita iactum est, ut plus sit zizaniarum quam tritici. Orbis minima pars est Europa: Omnium florentissima pars est Graecia et Asia minor in quam magno successu primum a judaea demigravit evangelium. At haec fere tota, nun tenetur a Mahumetanis et ijs qui Christi nomen habent invisum? jam in Asia maiore quae latissime pater, quid obsecro nostrum est? quum ipsa Palestina unde primo eff●uxit lux evangelica, seruiat Allophylis? In Aphrica vero quid nostrum est? Nec dubitandum est quin in tanta vastitate regionum sint populi rudes et simplices qui facile possent ad Christum alici, si mitterentur qui facerent bonam sementem. Quid quod quotidie regiones hactenus incognitae reperiuntur, ferunturque superesse quo nullus adhuc nostratium pervenit. Omitto nunc infinitam judaeorum vim nobis admixtam: omitto plurimos qui titulo Christi tegunt Ethnicos: omitto tantas schismaticorum et haereticorum phalanges. Quantus in his esset proventus Christo, si guavi ac fideles mitterentur operarij qui iaciant semen bonum, qui revellant zizaniam, qui plantent plantulas bonas, malas exterpent, qui extruant domum Dei, demoliantur structuras non innitentes petrae Christo, denique qui metant maturam segetem, sed Christo metant non sibi, et animas Domino colligant, non opes sibi. Nuper Aethiopiae rex quem vulgus appellat Presteian, 
●resteian Aethiopia rex.  per oratorem suum submisit se sedi Romanae, non nihil expostulans cum pontifice quod ea gens quum a fide Christi non sit aliena, tam diu fuerit a tocius orbis pastore neglecta. Quidam viri boni, et propagandae religionis studiosi, queruntur Pilapios Scythiae septentrionalis populum mire simplicem ac rudem, 
●●apii.  a nescio quibus principibus Christianis teneri ditione, sed ita duro premi iugo humano, ut eis non imponatur suave jugum Christi, atque ita spoliari bonis externis, ut non ditentur opibus evangelicis. Pulcherrimum, Deoque gratissimum erat dare potius quam accipere ijs quos studemus Christo lucrifacere, ac sic eos in ditionem nostram recipere ut gaudeant se subiectos esse principibus sub quorum imperio commodius degant quam ante degebant. Novimus cicutare bestias feras et horribiles, vel ad voluptatem, vel ad usum vulgarem: et non novimus mansuefacere homines ut seruiant Christo? Monarchae alunt qui doceant elephantos ad saltandum, qui doment leones ad lus●m, qui doment lynces et leopardos ad venatum: et monarcha ecclesiae non invenit quo homines alliciat ad amabile Christi seruicium? Scio vix ullam reperiri beluam domitu difficiliorem quam est judaeus obstinatus, et obduratus haereticus: quanquam nullum est animal tam immite quod non cicuretur beneficentia et suavitate. Erepertis regionibus evehitur aurum et g●mmae: Sed triumpho dignius erat illuc invehere Christianam sapientiam auro preciosiorem, ac margaritum evangelicum quod omnibus divenditis benae comparatur. Dominus jubet suis rogare dominum messis ut extrudat operarios quod messis esset ampla, operarij pauci. Non minus opus est nunc rogare deum ut in tam late patentes agros eijciat operarios, Sed excusant omnes, alius aliud. 
Franciscani Ser●phici.  Atqui Christiana ditio tot habet myriadas Franciscanorum in quibus probabile est quamplurimos esse qui vere flagrant igni seraphico: nec pauciores sunt myriades Dominicanorum, et in his consentaneum est permultos esse Cherubici spiritus. 
Dominicani Cherubici.  Ex his cohortibus eligantur viri, mundo vere mortui, Christo vivi, qui sincere apud barbaras gentes doceant verbum Dei. Excusatur linguae imperitia. 
Linguae imperic●●.  Atqui principes ob humanas legationes inveniunt qui varias linguas perdiscant: Et Themistocles Athenienses uno anno sic didicit 
Miracula.  sermonem Asiaticum ut absque interpret cum rege lo qui posset: An idem non studebimus in tam sublimi negocio? Inter barbaras et ignotas nationes Aposto liinuenerunt victum et amictum: et Deus pollicitus est nihil defuturum quaerentibus regnum Dei. Nec miracula quidem defutura sunt si res postulet, modo ad sit syncera fides cum seraphica charitate. etc. 
Furthermore Damianus a Goes, 
Damianus a Goes  writeth in his book De deploratione Lappianae gentis, that he was the first that moved Erasmus to speak somewhat hereof: And that he (Erasmus I mean) was determined to write a just volume of this matter if he had not been prevented by death. Albeit (saith Damianus) in his book entitled Ecclesiastes, he did not keep silence of so wicked an ungodliness, which surely is such, that it may in manner make all Christian men (and especially such unto whom god hath given power and knowledge) guilty of so heyghnous a crime, 
To the christian princes.  that he may take vengeance of them in the day of judgement before the just judge Chryst. Now therefore (saith he) let the Christian monarchs take heed what account they shall make before the tribunal of christ at the last day, when neither favour, nor pardon, or flattery can take place to be any excuse for the loss of so many souls. And these be the very words of the worshipful and learned man Damianus a Goes, written to the bishop of Rome Paul the third of that name, whom he further chargeth to look diligently hereunto, as a thing most chiefly pertaining to the office of Christian prelate's. Me think verily that the sheep of Europe should by this time be so well fed, 
The sheep of Europe.  that they should by good reason be so strong and mighty in Christ's religion (except they be infected with the disease which the physicians call Cachexia, being an evil disposition of the body whereby the more they are fed the worse they like) that many shepherds might well be spared to be sent to other sheep which ought to be of the same fold. For this purpose the doctor of divinity when he commenseth, 
The doctor of divinity  hath his scapular cast over his head in token that he hath forsaken the world for Christ's sake: And his boots on his legs in token that he shall ever be in a readiness to go forward in preaching the gospel, as I doubt not there be many in England would gladly do even among these new gentiles if they were thereto maintained by the aid of the secular pour as in this case it shallbe requisite for the furniture of necessaries hereunto appertaining, 
An admonition to rich men.  I must now therefore appeal unto you, you rich men and rulers of the world, to whom god hath given goods as things neither good nor bad of themselves, but only as they are used well or evil. If you use them well, they are the gifts of god wherewith you may do many things acceptable both to god and men. And if you use them otherwise, you possess not them, but they possess you, and their canker and rust (as saith the Apostle) shallbe a testimony against you in the day of the great audit. Think not therefore that this thing pertaineth not unto you, if you pertain unto Christ and look to have any part with him. Consider with your selves if it were only to get worldly riches, how ready and greedy you would be to venture a great deal to get a third part, with out casting of any peril by land or by sea, as the witty poet Horase hath in few words describe the merchants desire and adventures to obtain richesse. 
The merchant  
Impiger extremos currit mercator ad Indos,  
Per mare pauperiem fugiens, per saxa, per ignes.  
The which verses are thus much to say in effect.  
The merchant in hope great richesse to find,  
By fire and by water passeth to Ind,  
By the burnt line or Equinoctial,  
To fly from poverty and hazard all  As the poet hath in these verses, by the merchant declared the desire that covetous men have to obtain slippery riches, the like affection to obtain worldly fame and honour, 
The desire of wordly fame.  may we see in valiant and noble captains in the wars where they contend to put themselves forward to the most dangerous adventure as to have the forward of the battle: a token surely of much nobility and manly courage. But oh immortal god? Is it not to be lamented that men can be so valiant, slowte, and in manner desperate in their own private matters, pertaining only to their bodies, and yet so could, negligent, 
Men are slothful in god's cause.  and fearful in god's cause and things touching the health of their souls? If there were neither devil nor law to accuse men before god in this case, shall not their own consciences be a law of condemnation against them in that they have not showed that love to mankind, which the very law of nature moveth brute beasts to show one to an other in their generations? But what hope is there (except god would in manner by miracle convert the hearts of such men) what hope is there I say, that they will departed with any of their goods, much less adventure their bodies, to the furtherance of Christ's religion in these regions being so far from them, whereas many show little love, charity, or liberality (if not rather cruelt●e, tyranny, and oppression) to their poor neighbours and brootherne dwelling even at home at their own elbows. But as this covetousness is to be reproved, so is the liberality of such to be commended as have been at great coast and charges in setting forward such viages: wherein not only the merchants of London, but also divers noble men and gentlemen as well of the counsel as other, 
Uyages from England.  which both with their money and furtherance otherwise have furnished and sent forth certain ships for the discovering of such lands and regions as were heretofore unknown, have herein deserved immortal fame, for as much as in such attempts and dangerous voyages, they have showed no smaule liberality upon uncertain hope of gain: wherein they have deserved so much the greater praise as their intent seemed to be rather to further honest enterprises then for respect of vantage. And here certainly in the mention of these viages I might seem ungrateful if I should omit to give dew commendations to the two chief captains of the same as the worthy knight sir Hugh Wylloby and the excellent pilotte richard Chancellor who have therein adventured their lives for the commodity of their country: 
Sir Hugh Wylloby and richard Chancellor.  Men doubtless worthy for their noble attempts to be made knights of the Ocean or otherwise preferred if ever god send them home again although they fail of their purpose. For as such have obtained absolute glory that have browght great things to pass, 
Glory and fame.  so have they deserved immortal fame which have only attempted the same: forasmuch as fortune (who sometimes favoureth the unworthiest) is not in the power of man. Xerses obtained glory in making a bridge over the sea Hellespontus joining Europe to Asia, and Darius over Bosphorus when he passed with his army toward the Scythians. No less fame and commendation (although not like glory) deserved Demetrius, Cesar, Calligula, and Seleucus Nicanor, which attempted to cut in sunder certain places called) Isthmi, (being narrow portions of land so dividing two seas, that there is no passage from the one to the other) and yet never finished that they took in hand, being hindered either by death, 
The reward of noble enterprises.  wars, or other chances. The ancient Romans & Greeks gave such glory unto them that had either well deserved of the common wealth, or otherwise attempted such great enterprises as might be profitable for mankind, that after their death they caused Images of gold, silver, brass, ivory, and marble to be made to their likeness, and the same to be placed in their solemn hauls, palaces, or temples, with certain verses made to the comnendation of them whom the Images represented. And th●s no less to provoke and encourage other forward natures to themula●ion of their virtues, than also to give them the due honour of their just deserts. And surely if ●uer sense the beginning of the world any enterprise have deserved great praise as a thing achieved by men of heroical virtue, doubtless there was never any more worthy commendation and admiration than is that which hour nation have attempted by the north seas to discover the mighty and rich empire of Cathay, 
The viage to Ca●hay by the north seas.  by wh●ch viage not only gold, silver, precious stones, and spices, may be browght hither by a safer and shorter way, but also much greater matters may hereof ensue in time if it shall please God to give unto Christian men such passage into those regions, whereby such familiarity may further grow between the Christian princes of Europe and the great emperor of Cathay, that (as writeth Haytho De societate Christianorum et Tartarorum) there can nothing be imagined more effectual for the confusion of the Turk if the great Cham of Cathay and the Sophy of Persia on the one side, 
Society between the Thebans and the Christians. The Turk. The Sophy.  and the Christian Princes on the other side, should with one consent invade his dominions, as did Tamburlanes Themperor of the Tartars who about the 
Tambulanes. Baiasetes.  year of Christ. M. CCC.lxxxxviii. took prisoner Baiasetes Ottomanus Themperor of the Turks and slew twenty thousand of his men in one battle beside many other great victories, as you may further read in this book in the history of Paulus iovius. And to have said thus much in manner of a preface it may suffice.   

¶ To the most noble Prince and Catholic king, Charles, Peter Martyr of Angleria wisheth perpetual felicity.  
THe divine providence, from the time that he first created the world, hath reserved unto this day the knowledge of the great and large Ocean sea: 
The largeness of the Ocean unknown to this day.  In the which time he hath opened the same, chiefly unto you (most mighty Prince) by the good fortune and happy success of your grandfather by your mother's side. The same providence (I know not by what destiny) hath brought me out of my native country of Milane, and out of the city of Rome (where I continued almost ten years) into Spain, that I might particularly collect, these marvelous and new things, which should otherwise perhaps have line drowned in the whirlpool of oblivion: forasmuch as the spaniards (men worthy great commendation) had only care to the general inventions of these things. notwithstanding, I do not challenge unto me only, the thanks of the travail bestowed herein, whereas the chief reward thereof is due to Ascanius viscount Cardinal, 
Cardinal Ascanius.  who perceiving that I was willing to depart out of the city to be present at the wars of Granatum, 
The wars of Granatum against the moors.  dissuaded me from my purpose. But seeing that I was fully resolved to depart, exhorted and required me to write unto him such news as were famous in Spain and worthy to be noted. I took therefore my journey into Spain chiefly for the desire I had to see th'expedition which was prepared against the enemies of the faith: forasmuch as in italy, by reason of the dissension among the Princes, I could find nothing wherewith I might feed my wit, being a young man desirous of knowledge and experience of things. I was therefore present at the wars: from whence I writ to Cardinal Ascanius, and by sundry epistles certified him of such things as I thought most worthy to be put in memory. But when I perceived that his fortun● was turned from a natural mother to a steppedame, I ceased from writing. Yet after I saw, that by thoverthrow of the enemies of hour faith, Spain was purged of the moors as of an evil weed plucked up by the roots, least I should bestow my slippery years in unprofitable Idleness I was minded to return to Italy. But the singular benignity of both the catholic king and queen now departed, and their large promises toward me upon my return from my legacy of Babylon, detained me from my purpose. 
The autour was ●ent ambassador to the Soltane of Alcayr in egypt.  Yet doth it not repent me that I drew back my foot: aswell for that I see in no other place of the world at this time the like worthy things to be done: As also that in manner through out all Italy, by reason of the discord of the Christian Princes, I perceived all things to run headelonge into ruin, 
Italy disquieted with wars.  the countries to be destroyed and made fat with human blood: The cities sacked, virgins and matrons with their goods and possessions carried away as capt●ues and miserable innocentes without offence to be slain unarmed within their own houses. Of the which calamities, 
The sequels of water.  I did not only hear the lamentable owtcryes, but did also feel the same. For even the blood of mine own kinsfolks and friends, was not free from that cruelty. As I was therefore musing with myself of these things, the Cardinal of Arragonie, after that he had seen the two first books of my Decades written to Ascanius, required me in the name of king Fredrick his uncle, 
King Fredrick.  to put forth the other eight epistle books, In the mean time also, while I was void of all care as touching the matters of the Ocean, the Apostolical messengers of the bysshopppe of Rome Leo the tenth, 
Leo the tenth▪ bishop of Rome.  (by whose wholesome counsel and authority we trust the calamities of Italy shallbe finished) raised me as it were from sleep, and encouraged me to proceed as I had begun. To his holiness I writ two Decades comprised in short books after the manner of epistles, and added them to the first, which was printed without mine advise, as shall further appear by the preface following. But now I return to you (most noble Prince) from whom I have somewhat digressed. 
Spain subdued from the moors,  Therefore whereas your grandfathers by your mothers side, have subdued all Spain under your dominion except only one corner of the same, and have also left you the kingdom of Naples with the fruitful Islands of our seas, 
The kingdom of Naples.  it is surely a great thing and worthy to be noted in hour chronicles. But not offending the reverence due to hour predecessors, what so ever from the beginning of the world hath been done or written to this day, 
Note, from the beginning of the world  to my judgement seemeth but little, if we consider what new lands and countries, what new seas, what sundry nations and tongues, what goldemynes, what treasuries of pearls they have left unto your highness, beside other revenues. The which, what they are and how great, these three Decades shall declare. Come therefore most noble Prince elected of God, and enjoy that high estate of things not yet understood to men. We offer unto you the Equinoctial line hitherto unknown and burnt by the furious heat of the son and unhabitable after the opinion of the owlde writers a few excepted: 
The temperateness of the Equinoctial unknown to the owlde writers.  But now found to be most replenished with people, fair, fruitful, and most fortunate, with a thousand Islands crowned with gold and beautiful ●erles, beside that great portion of earth supposed to be part of the firm land, exceeding in quantity three Europe's. 
Continente or firm land as big as three Europe's  Come therefore and embrace this new world, and suffer us no longer to consume in desire of your presence. From hence, from hence I say (most noble young Prince) shall instruments be prepared for you, 
riches are the instruments of conquests.  whereby all the world shallbe under your obeisance.  
And thus I bid your majesty farewell: To whose taste if I shall perceive the fruits of this my tillage to be delectable, I will hereafter do my endeavour that you may receive the same more abundantly. From Madrid. The day before the kalends of October, In the year of christ. M. D. XVI.  
FINIS.   

The first decade.  

¶ THE first BOOK OF THE DECADES of the Ocean, written by Peter Martyr of Angleria, Milenoes', counsiler to the king of Spain and Protonotary Apostolical, To Ascanius Sphorcia, viscount Cardinal. etc.  
THE REVEREND AND thankful antiquity was accustomed to esteem those men as gods, 
The reward of vert●e  by whose industry and magnanimity such Lands and Regions were discovered, as were unknown to their predicessoures. But unto us having only one god whom we honour in triplicity of person, this resteth, that albeit we do not worship that kind of men with divine honour, yet do we reverence them, and worthily marvel at their noble acts and enterprises. Unto kings and princes we give due obeisance, by whose governance and furtherance they have been aided, to perfurme their attempts. we commend both, and for their just deserts worthily extol them. Wherefore, as concerning the Islands of the west Ocean, 
The Islands of the west Ocean.  lately discovered, & of the auctors of the same, (which thing you desire by your letters to know) I will begin at the first author thereof, lest I be injurious to any man. Take it therefore as followeth.  
¶ Christophorus Colonus (other wise called Columbus) A gentleman of Italy, 
Christophorus Colonus.  borne in the city of Genua, persuaded Fernando and Elyzabeth, catholic princes, that he doubted not to find certain Islands of India, 
India.  near unto hour Ocean sea, if they would furnish him with ships and other things appertaining. affirming that thereby not only the Christian religion might be enlarged, but Spain also enriched by the great plenty of gold, pearls, precious stones, and spices, which might be found there. At the length three ships were appointed him at the kings charges: of the which one was a great caracte with decks: and the other two were light merchant ships without decks, which the Spaniards call Caravelas. Thus he departed from the costs of Spain about the kalends of September, in the year of Christ 1492. and set forward on his voyage, 
The first voyage of Colonus.  being accompanied with C C. xx. spaniards. The fortunate Islands (as many think them to be, which the Spaniards call Canariae, 
The Islands of Canary.  found but of late days) are distant from the Islands of Gades, 
Gades or Calls male.  a thousand and two hundredth miles, according to their account: for they say they are distant three hundredth leaques: 
A leaque, what it containeth by sea.  whereas such as are expert sea men, affirm that every leaque containeth four miles, after their supputations. These Islands were called fortunate, 
the fortunate Islands.  for the temperate air which is in them. For neither the coldness of winter is sharp unto them, nor the heat of summer intolerable. Yet some men are of opinion, that those were in old time called the fortunate Islands, 
Caboverde.  which the Portugals call Capo Verde. Colonus therefore sailed first to the Islands of Canariae, to the intent there to refresh his ships with fresh water and fuel, before he committed himself to this so laborious a viage. And because I have here made mention of the Islands of Canariae: It shall not be much from my purpose to declare how of unknown they became known, and of salvage and wild, better manured. For by the long course of many years, they were forgotten, and remained as unknown.  
These seven Islands (therefore) called the Canaries, 
The seven Islands of Canary.  were found by chance by a french man, called Betanchor, 
Betanchor A french man subdued the Islands of Canary.  by the permission of queen Katherine, protectrixe of king john her son, while he was yet in his nonage, about the year of Christ. M. CCCC. V This Betanchor invaded two of these Islands called Lancelotus and Fort●suentura, 
L●ncelotus.  
Fortisuentura.  which he inhabited and brought to better culture. He being dead, his son and heir sold both the said Islands to certain Spaniards.  
After this, Fernandus Peraria and his wife, invaded Ferrea and Gomera. 
Ferrea.  
Gomera.  The other three were subdued in our tyme. Grancanaria, 
Grancanaria.  by Perrus de Vera, citizen of the noble city of Xericium, and Michael of Moxica. Palma and Tenerifen, 
Palma.  
Tenerifen.  by Alphonsus Lugo, at the kings charges. Gomera and Ferrea were easily subdued: But the matter went hard with Alphonsus Lugo. 
Alphonsus Lugo.  For that naked and wild nation, fighting only with stones and clubs, drove his army to flight at the first assault, and slew about four hundredth of his men. But at the length he overcame them. And thus all the Islands of Canariae were added to the dominion of Spain. From these Islands Colonus directing his voyage toward th● west, following the falling of the son, but declining somewhat toward the left hand, sailed on forward xxxiii days continually, having only the fruition of the heaven and the water. Then the spaniards which were accompanied with him, began first to murmur secretly among themselves: and shortly after with words of reproach spoke evil of Colonus their governor, 
Colonus men rebel against him.  and consulted with themselves, either to rid him out of the way, orels to cast him into the sea: Raging that they were deceived of a stranger, an outlandish man, a Ligurian a Genues, and brought into such dangerous places, that they might never return again. And after xxx days were paste, they furiously cried out against him, and threatened him that he should pass no further. But he ever with gentle words and large promises, 
Fair wo●des and promises.  appeased their fury, and prolonged day after day, some time desiring them to bear with him yet a while, and some time putting them in remembrance that if they should attempt any thing against him, or otherwise disobey him, it would be reputed for treason. Thus after a few days, with cheerful hearts they espied the land long looked for. In this first navigation, he discovered vi Islands, whereof two were exceeding great: Of which, the one he called Hispaniola, 
hispaniola.  and the other johanna. 
johanna.  But at that time he knew not perfectly that johanna (other wise called Cuba,) was an Island. As they coasted along by the shore of certain of these Islands, they hard nyghtingales sing in the thick woods in the month of November. 
Nightingales sing in November.  They found also great rivers of fresh water, and natural havens, of capacity to harborowe great navies of ships. Sailing by the coasts of johanna, from the north point to the west, he road little le●se than eight hundredth miles (for they call it a hundredth and four score leaques) supposing that it had been the continent or firm land, because he could neither find the lands end, nor any token of the end, as far as he could judge with his eye: wherefore he determined to return back again, being thereto partly enforced by the roughness of the sea. for the sea banks of the Island of johanna, by sundry wyndinge and turnynge, bend themselves so much toward the north, that the northnortheaste wind roughely tossed the ships by reason of the winter. Turning therefore the stems of his ships toward the east, he affirmed that he had found the Island of Ophir, 
The Island of Ophir.  whither salomon's ships sailed for gold. But the description of the Cosmographers well considered, it seemeth that both these, and the other Islands adjoining, are the Islands of Antilia. 
The islands of Anti●ia.  This Island he called Hisp●niola: on whose north side as he approached near to the land, the keel or bottom of the biggest vessel ran upon a blind rock covered with water, 
A shipwreck  and clove in sunder. But the plainness of the rock was a help to them that they were not drowned. Making haste therefore with the other two sh●ps to help them, they brought away all the men without hurt. Here coming first a land, they saw certain men of the Island: 
The people of the Iland●.  who perceiving an unknown nation coming toward them, flocked together and ran all into the thick woods, as it had been hares courc●d with greyhounds. 
Naked people.  Hour men pursuing them, took only one woman, whom they brought to the ships: where fyllinge her with meat and wine, and appareling her, they let her depart to her company. Shortly after a great multitude of them came running to the shore to behold this new nation, whom they thought to have descended from heaven. They cast themselves by heaps into the sea, and came swiming to the ships, bringing gold with them, 
Expert swimmers▪ go●d for earth and glass.  which they changed with hour men for earthen pots, drinking glass', points, pins, hawks bells, looking glass', and such other trifles. Thus growing to further familiarity, hour men were honourably entertained of the king of that part of the Island, 
Many kings  whose name was Guaccanarillus: for it hath many kings, as when Aeneas arrived in Italy, he found Latium divided into many kingdoms and provinces, as Latium, Mezeurium, Turnum, and Tarchontem, which were separated with narrow bounds, as shall more largely appear hereafter. At the even tide about the fauling of the son, 
Religious & humane people  when hour men went to prayer, and kneeled on their knees after the manner of the Christians, they did the like also. And after what manner so ever they saw them pray to the cross, they followed them in all points as well as they could. They showed much humanity towards hour men: and helpen them with their lighters or small boats (which they call Canoas') to unlade their broken ship: 
Canoas'.  And that with such celerity and cheerfulness, that no friend for friend, or kinsman for kinsman, in such case moved with pity, could do more. Their boats are made only of one tree, 
Mono●yla. They have no Iren.  made hollow with a certain sharp stone (for they have no iron.) And are very long and narrow. Many affirm that they have seen some of them with forty oars. The wild and mischievous people called Canibales, or Caribes, which were accustomed to eat man's flesh (and called of the old writers, Anthropophagi) molest them exceedingly, 
Can●bales or Caribes Anthropophagi.  invading their country, taking them captive, killing and eating them. As hour men sailed to the Islands of these meek and human people, they left the Islands of the Canibales, in manner in the midst of their voyage toward the south. They complained that their Islands were no less vexed with the incursions of these manhunting Canibales when they go forth a roving to seek their pray: 
The cruelty of the Canibales.  then are other tame beasts, of Lions and Tigers. Such children as they take, they geld to make them fat as we do cock chikyns and young hogs, and eat them when they are well fed: of such as they eat, they first eat the entrails and extreme parts, as hands, feet, arms, neck, and head. The other most fle●shy parts, they powder for store, as we do pestelles of pork and gammondes of bacon. Yet do they abstain from eating of women and count it vile. Therefore such young women as they take, they keep for increase, as we do hens to lay eggs. The old women, they make their drudges. They of the Islands (which we may now cawl ours) both the men and the women when they perceive the Canibales coming, have none other shift but only to fly: for although they use very sharp arrows made of reeds, yet are they of small force to repress the fury of the Canibales: for even they themselves confess, that ten of the Cannibals are able to overcome a hundredth of them if they encounter with them. Their meat is a certain root which they call Ages: 
Ages. Roots ●n the steed or meat.  much like a navew root in form and greatness: but of sweet taste, much like a green chestnut. They have also an other kind of roots, which they call jucca, whereof they make bread in like man●●. 
jucca. Bread of roots.  They use Ages more often roasted or sodden, then to make bread thereof. But they never eat jucca, except it be first sliced and pressed, (for it is full of liquor) and then baked or sodden. But this is to be marveled at, that the juice of this root is a poison as strong as Aconitum, 
an herb of a strange nature.  so that if it be drunk it causeth present death, and yet the bread made of the ●a●e thereof, is of good taste and wholesome, as all they have proved. They make also an other kind of bread of a certain pulse, called ●anicum, 
Ma●●●um.  much like unto wheat, whereof is great plenty in the dukedom of milan, Spain, and Granatum.  
But that of this country is longer by a span, somewhat sharp toward the end, and as big as a man's arm in the brawn: The grains whereof are set in a marvelous order, and are in form somewhat like a pease. While they be sour and unripe, they are white: but when they are ripe they be very black. When they are broken, they be whiter then snow. This kind of grain, they call Maizium. Gold is of some estimation among them: 
●olde in esti●ation.  for some of them hang certain small pieces thereof at their ears and nostrils. A little beyond this place, our men went a land for fresh water, where they chanced upon a river whose sand was mixed with much gold. 
Gold in the sands of rivers.  They found there no kinds of four footed beasts except three kinds of little conies. These Islands also nourish serpents: 
Serpents without vem●ne.  but such as are without hurt. Likewise wild geese, turtle doves, and ducks, 
Turtle doves Ducks.  much greater than ours, and as white as swans, with heads of purple colour. Also Popiniaies, 
popinjays.  of the which some are green, some yellow, and some like them of India, with yellow rings about their necks, as Pliny describeth them. 
Plini.  Of these they brought forty with them, of most lively and delectable colours, having three feathers entermengled with green, yellow, and purple, which variety, delighteth the sense not a little. Thus much thought I good to speak of Potingiays, (right noble Prince) specially to this intent, that albeit the opinion of Christophorus Colonus (who affirmeth these Islands to be part of India) doth not in all points agree with the judgement of ancient writers as touching the bigness of the Sphere and compass of the Globe as concerning the navigable portion of the same being under us, 
These Islands are part of India. The Indians are Antipodes to the spaniardes.  yet the Popingiays and many other things brought from thence, do declare that these Islands savour somewhat of India, either being near unto it, or else of the same nature: forasmuch as Aristotle also, 
Aristotle.  about the end of his book De C●elo et Mundo. and likewise Seneca, 
Seneca.  with diverse other authors not ignorant in Cosmography, do affirm that India is no long tract by sea, distant from Spain by the west Ocean, 
India not far from Spain  for the soil of these Islands, bringeth forth master, 
master.  Aloes, 
Aloe.  and sundry other sweet gums and spices as doth India. Cotton also of the gossampine tree, 
Gossampyne cotton or bombase.  as in India in the country of the people called Seres. 
Seres.   
¶ The languages of all the nations of these Islands, 
The language of these Indians.  may well be written with our Latin letters. For they call heaven Tur●i. A house, Boa. Gold, Cauni. A good man, Taino. nothing Mayani. All other words of their language, they pronounce as plainly as we do the Latin tongue. In these Islands they found no trees known unto them, but pine appe trees, and date trees: 
Trees and fruits unknown to us.  And those of marvelous height and exceeding hard, by reason of the great moistness and fatness of the ground, 
Far & moist ground.  with continual and temperate heat of the son, 
heat continual and temperate.  which endureth so all the hole year. They plainly affirm the Island of Hispaniola to be the most fruitful land that the heaven compasseth about, 
The fruitfulness of hispaniola  as shall more largely appear hereafter in the particular description of the same, which we intend to set forth when we shall be better instructed.  
Thus making a league of friendship with the king, and leaving with him xxxviii men to search the Island, he departed to Spain taking with him ten of the inhabitants to learn the Spanish tongue, to the intent to use them afterward for interpreters. Colonus therefore at his return, was honourably received of the king and queen: who caused him to sit in their presence, which is a token of great love and honour among the Spaniards. He was also made Admiral of the Ocean: and his brother govenoure of the Island.  
Toward the second voyage, 
The second voyage of Colonus.  he was furnished with xii ships: whereof there were great caractes of a thousand tun: xii. were of that sort, which the Spaniards call Caravelas: without decks: and two other of the same sort somewhat bigger, and more apt to bear decks, by reason of the greatness of their masts. He had also a thousand and two hundredth armed footmen well appointed: Among which were many artificers, as smiths, carpenters, miners, and such other: Certain horsemen also, well armed: Likewise mares, shiepe, heyghfers, and such other of both kinds for incrase. Likewise all kind of pulse or grain and corn, as wheat, barley, rye, beans and pease, and such other, as well for food as to sow: 
Come and sedes to sow,  Beside wines, plants and seeds, of such trees, fruits, and herbs, as those countries lack. And (not to be forgotten) sundry kinds of artillery & iron tools, 
Tools and artillery.  as bows, arrows, crossbows, bills, hargabuses, broad swords, large targets, pikes, mattocks, sh●ouelles, hammers, nails, saws, ears, and such other. Thus being furnished accordingly, they set forward from the Islands of Gad●s, (now called Calls,) the vii day before the kalends of October, in the year of Christ .1493. and arrived at the Islands of Canary, at the kalends of October. Of these Islands, the last is called Ferrea, in which there is no other water that may be drunk, but only that is gathered of the dew which continually distilleth from one only tree growing on the highest back of the Island, 
water dropping from a tree continually.  and falleth into a round trench made with man's hand. We were informed of these things within few days after his departure. what shall succeed, we will certify you hereafter. Thus far ye well, from the court, at the Ideses of November .1493.   

¶ The second book of the first Decade to Ascanius Ph●rcia, viscount Cardinal. etc.  
YOwe repeat (right honourable Prince) that you are desirous to know what news we have in Spain from the new world: and that those things have greatly delighted you which I wrote unto your highness of the first navigation. Yowe shall now therefore receive what hath succeeded. Methymna Campi, 
Methymna Campi.  is a famous town in high Spain in the respect from you, and is in that part of Spain which is called Castilia Vetus: 
Castilia virtue.  being distant from Gades about xl miles. Here the court remained, when about the ix of the kalends of Aprell in this year of ninety and four, there were posts sent to the king and queen, certifyinge them that there were xii ships come from the new Islands and arrived at Gades. 
Gades  But the governor of the ships sent word to the king and queen that he had none other matter to certify them of by the posts, but only that the Admiral with five ships and four score and ten men remained still in Hispaniola, to search the secrets of the Island. And that as touching other matters, he himself would shortly make ralation in their presence, by word of mouth. Therefore the day before the nonce of Aprel, he came to the court himself. What I learned of him and other faithful and credible men which came with him from the Admiral, I will rehearse unto you in such order as they declared the same to me when I demanded them. Take it therefore as followeth. The third day of the Ideses of October, departing from Ferrea, 
The Island of Ferrea.  the last of the Islands of Canariae, and from the costs of Spain with a navy of xvii ships, they sailed xxi days before they came to any Island: inclining of purpose more toward the left hand then at the first voyage, following the northnortheast wind: and arrived first at the Islands of the Canibales, 
islands of the Canibales.  or Caribes of which, only the fame was known to our men. Among these, they chanced first upon one, so beset with trees, that they could not see so much as an elle space of bare earth or stony ground. this they called Dominica, 
The Island of Dominica.  because they found it on the sunday. They tarried here no time, because they saw it be desert. In the space of these xxi days, they think that they sailed viii hundredth and twenty leaques, 
viii. hundredth & twenty leaques in xxi days.  the Northenortheast wind was so full with them, and so freshly followed the stern of their ships. After they had sailed a little further, they espied diverse Islands replenished with sundry kinds of trees, from the which came fragrant savours of spices and sweet gums. Here they saw neither man nor beast, except certain lisartes of huge bigness, 
Lysertes,  as they reported which went aland to view the country. This Island they called Galana, or Galanta. 
The Island of Galanta.  From the cape or point of this Island, espying a mountain a far of, they sailed thither. About xxx miles from this mountain, they saw a river descending which seemed to be a token of some great and large flood. This is the first land which they found inhabited from the Islands of Canariae, and is an Island of the Canibales, 
The Island of Guadalupea.  as they learned by the interpreters which they took with them from Hispaniola into Spain at their first voyage. searching the Island, they found innumerable villages of twenty houses or xxx at the most, set round about in order, 
Uilages of .xx or. ●xx. houses.  making the street in coompasse like a market place. And for as much as I have made mention of their houses, it shall not be greatly from my purpose to describe in what manner they are builded. They are made round like bells or round pavilions. 
The building of their houses.  Their frame is raised of exceeding high trees, set close together and fast rampaired in the ground, so standing a slope and bending inward that the taps of the trees join together and bear one against an other, having also within the house, certain strong and short props or posts which sustain the trees from ●allynge. They cover them with the leaves of date trees and other trees strongly compact and hardened, wherewith they make them close from wind and wether. At the shore posts or props with●n the hou●e, they t●e ropes of th●●ottō of 〈◊〉 trees, 
●●●ampine ●otton.  or other ropes made of certain long and tough ●●tes much like unto the shrub called Sp●r●●m. whereof in old time they used to make bonds for unnes 〈…〉 and rop●● for ships. These they tie over 〈◊〉 the hou●e fro● post to post. On these they lay as it 〈…〉 matt●e●●es made of the cotton of the gossampine tress, which g●●we plentifully in these Islands.  
Th●s cotton the Spaniards call Algodon, and the Italians Bombasine. And thus they ●●eepe in hanging beds. 
Bomba●e. hanging beds.  At the entrance of one of their house's, they saw two Images of wood like unto serpents, which they thought had been such idols as they honour. But they leaned afterward that they were se●te there only for cooml●nesse. For they know none other god than the Sun and Moon, although they make certain Images of gossampine cotton to the similitude of such fantasies as they say appear to them in the night. 
Images.  Our men found in their houses, all kinds of earthen vessels, not much unlike unto ours. They found also in their kichens, man's flesh, ducks flesh, and goose flesh, all in one pot: 
Fyne cookery  and other on the spits ready to be laid to the fire. Entering into their inner lodgings, they found faggots of the bones of men's arms and legs, which they reserve to make heads for their arrows, 
Arrow heads of bones.  because they lack iron. The other bones they cast away when they have eaten the flesh. They found likewise the head of a young man fastened to a post and yet bledinge. They have in some villages, one great haul or palace, about the which their common houses are placed. To this they resort, as often as they come together to play. When they perceived the coming of our men, they fled, in their houses they found also about thirty. children and women captives which were reserved to be eaten, but our men took them away to use them for interpreters. Searching more diligently th'inner parts of the Island, they found vii other rivers, bigger than this which we spoke of before, running through the Island, with fruitful and pleasant banks, delectable to behold. This Island, they called Guadalupea, for the similitude that it hath to the mount Guadalupus in Spain, 
The mount Guadalupus●  where the Image of the virgin MARIE is religiously honoured. But the inhabitants cawl it Carucueria. 
Carucueria.  or Queraquiera. It is the chief habitation of the Canibales. They brought from this Island vii Popinpayes, bigger than pheasants, 
Popyngayes bigger than phesauntes  much differing from other in colour: having their backs, breasts, and bealies of purple colour, and their wings of other variable colours. In all these Islands is no less plenty of popinjays then with us of sparrows or starlinges. As we bring up capons and hens to frank or make them fat, so do they these bigger kinds of popyngays for the same purpose. After that they had thus searched the Island and driven these Canibales to flight, 
The Canibales dry●en to flight.  (which ran away at their first approach as soon as they had espied them) they called their company together. And as soon as they had broken the Cannibals boats or lighters (which they call Canoas') they loosed their anchors the day before the Ideses of November, and departed from Guadalupea. Colonus the admiral, for the desire he had to see his companions, which at his first viage he left the year before in Hispaniola to search the country, let pass many Islands both on his right hand and left hand, and sailed directly thither. By the way, there appeared from the north. A great Island which the captives that were taken in Hispaniola, called Madanino, or Matinino: 
Matinino an Island of women.  Affirming it to be inhabited only with women: To whom the Canibales have access at certain times of the year, as in old time the Thracians had to the Amazons in the Island of Lesbos. The men children, they send to their fathers. But the women they keep with themselves. They have great and strong caves or dens in the ground, to the which they fly for safeguard if any men resort unto them at any other time than is appointed. And there defend themselves with bows and arrows, ag●nst the violence of such as attempt to invade them. They could not at this time approach to this Island, by reason of the Northenortheast wind which blewe so vehemently from the same, where as they now followed the Eastesoutheaste. After they departed from Madanino, and sailed by the space of xi miles, they passed not far from an other Island which the captives said to be very peopulous, and replenished with all things necessary for the life of man. This they called Mons Serratus, 
The Islands of Mons Serratus.  because it was full of mountains. The captives further declared that the Canibales, are wont at some time to go from their own coasts above a thousand mile to hunt for men. 
hunting for men.  The day following, they saw an other Island the which, because it was round, they called Sancta Maria Rotunda. 
Sancta Maria Rotunda.  The next day, they found an other, which they called S. Marrini. 
Sanctus Mar●inus.  Which they let pass also because they had no leisure to tarry. Likewise the third day they espied an other, whose Diamerral side extending from the east to the west, they judged to be a hundredth and fifty mile.  
they affirm all these Islands to be marvelous fair and fruitful. This last, they called Sancta Maria Antiqua. 
Sancta Maria Antiqua,  Sailing yet forward, and leaving many other Islands, after they had sailed about forty mile, they chanced upon an other much bigger than any of the rest, which thinhabitants call Ay Ay, but they named it Insula crucis. 
Insula crucis An Island of the Cannibals  Hear they cast anchor to fetch fresh water. The Admiral also commanded xxx men to go a land out of his own ship, and to search the Island Here they found four dogs on the shore. The Inhabitants are Canibales, 
The Canibales are expert archers.  and marvelous expert in shutinge, as well women as men: And use to infect their arrows with poison: when they had tarried there two days, they saw a far of, a Canoa, in the which were eight men and as many women having with them bows and arrows. 
Arrows infected with veneme.  They fiercely assailed hour men without all fear, and hurt sum of them with their venomous arrows. Among these there was a certain woman to whom the other gave reverence and obeyed as though she were their queen. Her son waited upon her, being a young man, strongly made, of terrible & frowning countenance and a lions face. 
A conflict ●ith the Canib●les.  Hour men least they should take the more hurt by being wounded a far of, thowght it best to join with them. Therefore with all speed setting forward with their oars the brigantine in which they were set aland, they overturned their Canoa with a great violence, which being overwhelmed, they notwithstanding, as well the women as the men swiming, cast their darts at hour men, thick and threefowlde. At the length, gathering themselves together upon a rock covered with the water, they fowght manfully until they were overcome and taken, one being slain, and the queen's son sore wounded. When they were browght into the Admiral's ship, they did no more put of their fiernes and cruel countenances, 
The fierceness and terrible countenance of the Canibales.  then do the Lions of Libya when they perceive themselves to be bound in chains. There is no man able to behowlde them, but he shall feel his bowels grate with a certain horror, nature hath endued them with so terrible menacing, and cruel aspect. This conjecture I make of myself and other which often times went with me to see them at Methymna Campi. 
Methymna Campi.  But now to return to the voyage. proceeding thus further and further, more than five hundreth miles, first towards the Westesoutheweste, then toward the south-west, and at the length toward the West northeweste, they entered into a main large sea having in it innumerable Islands, 
Innumerable islands.  marvelously differing one from an other, for sum of them were very fruitful and full of herbs and trees. Other sum, very dry, barren, and rough with high rocky mountains of stone, whereof sum were of bright blue or asurine colour, and other glysteringe white: wherefore they supposed them by good reason to be the mines of metals and precious stones. 
The mines of Metales & precious stones.  But the roughness of the sea, and multitude of Islands standing so thick together, hindered them so, that they cold cast no anchor least the bigger vessels should run upon the rocks. Therefore they deferred the searching of these Islands until an other time They were so many and stood so thick, that they could not number them. Yet the smauler vessels which drew no great depth, entered among them and numbered forty and six Islands. But the bigger vessels, kept aloof in the main sea for fear of the rocks. They call the sea where this multitude of Islands are situate, Archipelagus. 
The sea called Archipelagus.  from this tract proceeding forrewarde, in the mid way there lieth an Island which thinhabitants call Burichena, or Buchona. But they named it Insula. S. johannis, 
Insula. S. johannes o● Buchena.  divers of them whom we had delivered from the Canibales, said that they were borne in this Island: affirming it to be very peopulous and fruitful, having also many fair woods and havens. There is deadly hatred and continual battle between them & the Canibales, They have no boats to pass from their own coasts to the Canibales. But if it be their chance to overcome them, when they make incursion into their country to seek their pray (as it sometime happeneth, the fortune of war being uncertain) they serve them with like sauce, requiring death for death. 
Death for death  For one of them mangeleth an other in pieces, and roast them and eat them even before their eyes. They tarried not in this Island. Yet in the west angle thereof, a few of them went a land for fresh water, and found a great and h●gh house after the manner of their building, having xii other of their vulgar cottages placed about the same: 
The mountains are colder than the plains.  but were all left desolate, whether it were that they resorted to the mountains by reason of the heat which was that time of the year, and to return to the plain when the air waxeth cowlder, or else for fear of the Canibales which make incursion into the Island at certain seasons. In all this Island is only one king. The south side hereof extendeth about two hundreth miles. Shortly after, they came to the Island of Hispaniola, being distant from the first Island of the Canibales, five hundreth leaques. 
From Dominica to hi●paniola five hundredth leaques  Here they found all th●nges out of order, and their fellows slain whi●h they left here at their first viage. In the beginning of Hispaniola, (having in it many regions and kingdoms as we have said) is the region of Xamana whose king is named Gua●canarillus. 
The Spany●●des left in the Island are s●ayne. king Guaccanari●lus rebelleth.  This Guaccanarillus joined friendship with hour men at the first voyage, and made a league with them: But in the absence of the Admiral, he rebelled, & was the cause of hour men's destruction, although he dissimuled the same, and pretended friendship at the Admirales return. As hour men sailed on yet a little further, they espied a long Canoa with many oars, in which was the b●other of Guaccanarillus with only one man waiting on him. He browght with him two Images of gold, 
Two images of gold.  which he gave the Admiral in the name of his brother. And told a ●ale in his language as concerning the death of hour men, as they proved afterward, but at this time had no regard to his communication for lack of interpreters, which were either all dead, or escaped and stoulne away when they drew near the Islands. But of the. x.vii. died by change of air and dyer. The inhabitants of these Islands have been ever so used to live at libert●e, in play and pastime, 
Liberty and idleness.  that they can hardly away with the yoke of servitude which they attempt to shake of by all means they may. And surely if they had received hour religion, I would think their life most happy of all men, 
A happy kind of life.  if they might therewith enjoy their ancient liberty. A few things content them, having no delight in such super●luites, 
Superfluite.  for the which in other places men take infinite pains and commit many unlawful acts, and yet are never satisfied, whereas many have to much, and none enough. 
many have to much and none enough.  But among these simple souls, a few clothes serve the naked: we●ghtes and measures are not needful to such as can not skill of craft and deceit and have not the use of pestifetous money, the seed of innumerable mischiefs. So that if we shall not be ashamed to confess the truth, they seem to live in that golden world of the which owlde writers speak so much▪ 
The golden world  wherein men lived simply and innocently without enforcement of laws, without quarellinge judges and libels, content only to satisfy nature, without further vexation for knowledge of things to come. Yet these naked people also are tormented with ambition for the desire they have to enlarge their dominions: 
Naked men troubled with ambition.  by reason whereof they keep war & destroy one an other: from the which plague I suppo●e the golden world was not free. For even then also, Cede, non c●dam, that is, give place, 
give place.  & I will not give place, had entered among men. But now to return to the matter from which we have digressed. The admiral desirous to know further of the death of his men, sent for Guaccanarillus to come to him to his ship, dissimulinge that he knew any thing of the matter. 
The Admira sendeth for the king.  After that he came aboard ship, saluting the Admiral & his company giving also certain gold to the Capetaynes and officers, turned him to the women captives which not long before our men had delivered from the Canibales. And earnestly beholding one of them whom hour men called Catharyne, he spoke gently unto her. 
No horses in the Islands.  And thus when he had seen and marveled at the horses and such other things as were in the ship, unknown to them, and had with a good grace and merely asked leave of the Admiral, he departed. Yet sum there were which counseled the Admiral to keep him still: that if they might by any means prove that he was consenting to the death of hour men, he might be punished accordingly. But the Admiral considering that it was yet no time to incense thinhabitants minds to wrath, 
A time for all things.  dismissed him. The next day following, the kings brother resorting to the ships, either in his own name or in his brothers, seduced the women. For on the next night about midnight, this Katherine aswell to recover her own liberty as also her fellows, being suborned thereto either by the king or his brother's promises attempted a much more difficult and dangerous adventure than did Cloelia of Rome, 
A desperate adventure of a woman.  
Cloelia of Rome.  which being in hostage with other maids to the king Porcena, deceived her keepers, and road over the river Tiber, with the other virgins which were pledges with her. For whereas they swam over the river on horseback. This Katharyne with seven other women, trusting only to the strength of their own arms, swam above three long miles: and that also, at such time as the sea was somewhat rough. For even so far of from the shore, lay the ships at road, as nigh as they could conjecture But hour men following them with the shippeboates, by the same light seen on the shore whereby the women were led, took three of them: supposing that Katharyne with the other four, went to Guaccanarillus. For in the springe of the morning, certain messengers being sent to him by the Admiral, had intelligence that he was fled with all his family and stuff, and the women also. which thing ministered further suspection that he was consenting to the death of hour men. Wherefore the Admiral sent forth an army of three hundreth men, over the which he appointed one Melchior to be captain, willing him to make diligent search to find out Guaccanarillus. Melchior therefore with the smauleste vessels entering into the country by the rivers and scouring the shores, 
Guaccanarillus is sought. ●●l●hior.  chanced into certain crooked gulfs defended with v little & steep hills, supposing that it had been the mouth of sum great river. He found here also a very commodious and safe haven, and therefore named it Portus Regalis. They say that the entrance of this is so crooked and bending, that after the ships are once within the same, whether they turn them to the left hand, or to the right, they can not perceive where they came in until they return to the mouth of the river: Although it be there so broad that three of the byggeste vessels may sail together on a froont. The sharp & high hills on the one side and on the other, so broke the wind, that they were uncertain how to rule their sails. In the middle gulf of the river, there is a promontory or point of the land with a pleasant grove full of popinjays and other birds which breed therein and sing very sweetly. 
popinjays and birds  They perceived also that two rivers of no smaule largeness fell into the haven. While they thus searched the land between both, Melchior espied a high house a far of, where supposing that Guaccanarillus had line hid, he made toward it. And as he was going, there met him a man with a frowning countenance and a grim look, with a hundredth men following him, armed with bows and arrows, and long and sharp staves like iavelynnes, made hard at the ends with fire. Who approaching towards hour men, spoke out aloud with a terrible voice, saying that they were Taini, 
Taini.  (that is) noble men, and not Canibales. But when hour men had given them signs of peace, they left both their weapons and fierceness. Thus giving each of them certain hawks bells, 
hawks bells.  they took it for so great a reward, that they desired to enter bonds of near friendship with us, and feared not immediately to submit themselves under hour power, and resorted to our ships with their presents. They that measured the house (being made in round form found it to be from side to side xxxii great paces, 
A large house  compassed about with xxx other vulgar houses, having in them many beams cross over, and covered with reeds of sundry colours, 
Reeds of sundry colours.  wreathed and as it were weaved with marvelous art When hour men asked sum of them where they might find Guaccanarillus. They answered that that Region was none of his. But their kings being there present. Yet they said they supposed that Guaccanarillus was gone from the plain to the mountains. Making therefore a brotherly league with this Caccicus, 
Caccius.  (that is to say a king) they returned to the admiral to make relation what they had seen and hard.  
whereupon he sent forth divers other Centurians with their hundreds to search the country yet further. among the which were Hoiedus and Gorualanus, 
ho●edus and Gorualanus.  noble young gentlemen & of great courage. And as they went toward the mountains to seek Guaccanarillus, dyvidinge the mountains between them one of them found on the one side thereof four rivers falling from the same mountains: and the other found iii on the other side. In the sands of all these rivers is found great plenty of gold, 
Gold in rivers faulinge from mountains.  which thinhabitants of the same Island which were with us, gathered in this manner. Making holes in the sand with their hands, a cubit deep, and taking up sand with their left hands from the bottom of the same, 
The manner of gathering gold.  they picked out grains of gold with their right hands without any more art or cunning. 
Grains of gold.  And so delivered it to hour men: who affirm that many of them thus gathered, were as big as tars or fytchiss. And I myself saw a mass of rude gold, 
A mass of rude go●de weighing ix ounces.  (that is to say, such as was never melted) like unto such stones as are found in the bottoms of rivers, weighing nine ounces, which Hoieda himself found. Being contented with these signs, they returned to the Admiral to certify him hereof. For the Admiral had commanded under pain of punishment that they should meddle no further than their commission: which was only to search the places with their signs. For the fame went that there was a certain king of the mountains from whence those rivers had their fall, whom they call Cacicus Caunaboa that is, the lord of the house of gold. 
Cannaboa, king of the house of gold  For they call a house Boa, gold, Cauni: and a king or Lord, Cacicus, as we have said before. 
wholesome water and plenty of fish.  They affirm that there can nowhere be found better fish, nor of more pleasant taste, or more wholesome then in these rivers: also the waters of the same to be most wholesome to drink. Melchior himself towld me, that in the month of December, 
The day and night of equal length in December.  the days and nights be of equal length among the Canibalis. But the sphere or circles of the heaven, agreeth not thereunto. 
hyrdes breed in December  Albeit that in the same month, sum birds make their nests, and sum have already hatched their eggs by reason of the heat being rather continual then extreme. He told me also when I questioned with him as concerning the elevation of the pole from the horizontal line, 
The elevation of the po●e  that all the stars called Plastrum or charles wain, 
The stars are called gardens of the pole,  are hid under the north pole to the Canibales. And surely there returned none from thence at this voyage, to whom there is more credit to be given, then to this man. But if he had been skilful in astronomy, he should have said that the day was almost equal with the night. For in no place toward the stay of the son (called Solsticium) can the night be equal with the day. And as for them, they never came under the Equinoctial, 
The Equinotial line.  for as much as they had ever the north pole their guide, and ever elevate in sight above the Horizontal. Thus have I briefly written unto your honour, as much as I thought sufficient at this tyme. And shall shortly hereafter (by God's favour) write unto you more largely of such matters as shallbe daily better known. For the admiral himself (whom I use familiarly as my very friend) hath promised me by his letters, that he will give me knowledge of all such things as shall chance. He hath now chosen a strong place where he may build a City near unto a commodious haven. And hath already builded many houses and a chapel in the which (as in a new world heretofore void of all religion) god is daily served with xiii priests according to the manner of hour churches. 
A chapel and priests.  When the time now approached when he promised to send to the king and queen, and having prosperous wind for that purpose, sent back the xii caravels whereof we made mention before it was no small hindrance and grief, unto him: Especially considering the death of his men whom he left in the Island at the first viage, whereby we are yet ignorant of many places & other secrets whereof we might otherwise have had further knowledge. But as time shall reveal them again, so will I advertise you of the same. And that you may the better know by conference had with the Apothecaries and merchant strangers Sirophenicians, 
Merchants Sirophenicians.  what these Regions bear, and how hot their ground is, I have sent you all kinds of grains, with the bark & inner parts of that tree which they suppose to be the Cinamome tree. 
The Cynamome tree.  And if it be your pleasure to taste either of the grains, or of the smaule seeds the which you should perceive to have fawlen from these grains, or of the wood itself, touch them first softly moving them to your lips. For although they be not hurtful, yet for their excess of heat, they are sharp and bite the tongue, if they remain any while thereon. But if the tongue be blystered by tasting of them, the same is taken away by drinking of water. Of the corn also whereof they make their bread, this bringer shall deliver sum grains to your lordship both white and black: And therewith also, a Trunk of the tree of Aloes The which if you cut in pieces, 
Xiloaloes or lignum Aloes.  you shall feel a sweet savour to proceed from the same. Thus far you heartily well. From the court of Methimna Campi. The third day before the kalends of May. Anno. Domini, M. CCCC. XCIIII.   

¶ The third book of the first Decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonye and Nevie to the king.  
YOwe desire that foolish Phaeton should again rule the Chariotes of the Sun: 
The fable of Phaeton.  And contend the draw sweet lycoures out of the hard flint, whereas you require me to dysscribe unto you the new world, found in the west by the good fortune & governance of the Catholic Princes Ferdinandus and Helisabeth, 
king Ferdinandus and queen Helizabeth  your Uncle and Aunt: showing me also the letters of king Fredrick your uncle, written to me in the same behalf. But sith you have laid this burden on my back, in whose power it is to command me to take upon me more than I am well able. Ye both shall receive this precious stone, rudely closed in lead after my manner of workmanship. Wherefore when you shall perceive the learned sort friendly: The malicious, enviously: And the backbiters, furiously, to bend their slanderous darts against hour fair Nymphs of the Ocean, 
hereides. He meaneth the Islands.  You shall freely protest in how short time, and in the midst of what troubles and calamities, you have enforced me to write of the same. Thus far you well from Granata the ninth day before the kalends of May.  
¶ We have declared in the book here before, how the Admiral passed by the coasts of the Canibales to the Island of Hispaniola with his whole navy. 
hispaniola.  But now we intend further to show what he found as concerning the nature of this Island, after that he had better searched the seacreates of the same: Likewise of the Island of Cuba near unto it which he yet supposed to be the firm land. Hispaniola therefore (which he affirmeth to be Ophir, 
ophir whether salomon's ●hips sailed for gold.  whereof we read in the third book of the kings) is of latitude, five south degrees: having the north pole elevate on the north side xxvii degrees: And on the south side (as they say) xxii. degrees. It reacheth in length from the east to the West, seven hundreth and four score miles. It is distant from the Islands of Gades (called Cales) xlix. degrees, and more as sum say. The form of the Island, resembleth the leaf of a chesnutte tree. Upon a high hill on the North side of the Island, he builded a city, 
Isabel.  because this place was most apt for that purpose by reason of a mine of stones which was near unto the same, serving well both to build with, and also to make lime. At the bottom of this hill, is there a great plain of three score miles in length: 
A plain of threescore miles of length.  and in breadth somewhere xii somewhere twenty miles where it is brodest, and vi miles where it is narrowest Through this plain run divers fair rivers of wholesome waters. But the greatest of them which is navigable, falleth into the haven of the city for the space of half a furlong. How fertile and fruitful this valley is, you shall understand by these things which follow. On the shore of this river, 
A token of marvelous fruitfulness,  they have limited and enclosed certain ground to make gardens and orchiardes, in the which all kinds of bigger herbs, as radyshe, lettuce, coleworts, borage, and such other, wax ripe within xvi days after the seed is sown. Likewise Melones, Gourds, Cucumbers, and such other, within the space of xxxvi days. These garden herbs, they have fresh and green all the whole year. 
herbs green at the hole year.  Also the roots of the canes or reeds, of the liquor whereof, sugar is made, grow a cubit high within the space of xu days: 
Sugar reeds plants and vines.  but the liquor is not yet hardened. The like they affirm of plants or shrouddes of young vines: And that they have the second year gathered ripe and sweet grapes of the same. But by reason of to much rankness, they bear but few clusters. Furthermore, a man of the country sowed a little wheat about the kalends of February, and brought with him to the city a handful of the ripe ears of the same the third day before the kalends of Aprell: which was that year the vigil of the Resurrection of hour Lord. Also, all kinds of pulse, as beans, peason, fitches, tars, and such other, are ripe twice in the year, 
Corn and grain ripe twice a year  as all they which come from thence, affirm with one voice: Yet that the ground is not universally apt to bear wheat. In the mean time while these things were doing, the Admiral sent out a company of thirty. men to search the Region of Cipangae, otherwise called Cibana This Region is full of mountains and rocks: 
The Region of C●panga or Cibana.  And the middle ba●ke of the hole Island in the which is great plenty of gold. 
Gold.  When they that went to search the Region, were returned they reported marvelous things as touching the great riches of this Region. from these mountains, descend four great rivers, 
Four great rivers.  which by the marvelous industry of nature, divided the hole Island into four parts, in manner equal, overspreadinge and watering the hole Island with their branches. Of these four rivers, the one reacheth toward the east. This the inhabitants call junna: An other, toward the West, and is called Attibunicus. The third toward the north, named jachem: the last reacheth into the south, and is called Naiba. The day before the Ideses of March, the Admiral himself with all his horse men and four hundredth footmen, 
The golden region of Cibana.  marched directly toward the South side of the golden Region. Thus passing over the river, the plain and the mountain which environed the other side of the plain, he chanced upon an other vale the which a river much bigger than the first, and many other mean rivers run through. When he had also conveyed his army over the river and passed the second vale which was in no part inferior to the first, he made away through the third mountain, 
Uales and mountains.  where was no passage before, and descended into an other vale which was now the beginning of Cibana. 
The vale of Cibana.  Through this also run many floods, and rivers, out of every hill, and in the sands of them all, is found great plenty of gold. And when he had now entered three score and twelve miles into the golden region from the city he intended to build a fortress upon the top of a hill, standing by the shore of a certain great river, that he might the better and more safely search the secrets of the inner parts of the Region. This he called the fortress of saint Thomas. The which in the mean time while he was building, thinhabitants being desirous of hawks bells and other of hour things, 
Gold for hawks bells.  resorted daily thither. To whom the Admiral declared, that if they would bring gold, they should have what so ever they would ask, Forthwith turning their backs and running to the shore of the next river, they returned in a short time, bringing with them their hands full of gold. Amongst all other, there came a owld man bringing with him two pybble stones of gold weighing an ounce, 
Grains end pipple stones of gold.  desiring them to give him a bell for the same who when he saw our men marvel at the bigness thereof, he made signs that they were but smaule and of no value in respect of sum that he had seen. And taking in his hand four stones the least whereof was as big as a walnut, and the bigest as big as an orange, he said that there was found pieces of gold so big in his country, being but half a days journey from thence, and that they had no regard to the gathering thereof. Whereby we perceive that they pass not much for gold in as much as it is gold only, 
They pass not for gold, in that it is gold only but. etc.  but so far esteem it, as the hand of the artificer hath fashioned it in any coomely form. For who doth greatly esteem rough marble or unwrought ivory. But if they be wrought with the cunning hand of Phidias or Praxiteles, and shaped to the similitude of the fair nymphs or fayeres of the sea (called Nereiades) or the fairs of the woods, (called Hamadryads) they shall never lack buyers. Beside this owld man, there came also divers other, bringing with them pypple stones of gold weighing ten or xii drams: And feared not to confess, that in the place where they gathered that gold, there were found sometime stones of gold as big as the head of a child When he had tarried hear a few days, 
Stones of gold as big as the head of a child,  he sent one Luxanus, a noble young gentleman with a few armed men to search all the parts of this Region. Who at his return, reported that thinhabitants showed him greater things than we have spoken of here before. But he did openly declare nothing thereof: which they thought was done by the Admirales commandment. They have woods full of certain spices: 
spices.  but not such as we commonly use. These they gather even as they do gold: that is as much as will serve for their purpose, every man for himself, to exchange the same with the inhabitants of other countries adjoining to them, for such things as they lack, as dishes, pots, stools, and such other necessaries. As Luxanus returned to the Admiral, (which was about the Ideses of March) he found in the woods, certain wild vines, ripe and of pleasant taste. 
wild Vines of pleasant taste.  But thinhabitants pass not on them. This Region though it be full of stones and rocks (and is therefore called Cibana, which is as much to say as a stone) yet it is well replenished with trees and pastures. 
Fruitful mountains.  Ye they instantly affirm, that if the grass of these mountains be cut, it groweth again within the space of four days, higher than wheat. And for as much as many showers of rain do fall in this Region, whereof the rivers and floods have their increase, in every of the which, gold is found myrte with sand in all places, they judge that the gold is driven from the mountains, 
Gold in the lands of rivers faulinge from the mountains.  by the vehement course of the streams which fall from the same, and run into the rivers. The people of this Region are given to idleness and play. 
Liberty and idleness.  For such as inhabit the mountains, sit quaking for could in the winter season, 
The mountains are could.  & had rather so wander up and down idly, then take the pains to make them apparel, whereas they have woods full of gossampine cotton. But such as dwell in the vales or plains feel no could in winter. When the Admiral had thus searched the beginning of the region of Cibana, he repaired to Isabel (for so he named the city) where, leaving the governance of the Island with his deputies, he prepared himself to search further the lymettes of the Island of Cuba or johanna, which he yet doubted to be the firm land, 
The Island of Cuba.  and distant from Hispaniola. only three score and ten miles. This did he with more speedy expedition, cauling to remembrance the kings commandment, who willed him first with all celerity to over run the coasts of the new Islands, least any other prince should in the mean time attempt to invade the same. 
Lest any other prince. etc.  For the King of Portugal affirmed that it pertained only to him to discover these unknown lands. But the bishop of Rome Alexander the vi to avoid the cause of this dissension, 
Dissension between the Portugals and Spaniards.  granted to the King of Spain by th'authority of his leaden bulls, that no other prince should be so bold as to make any viages to any of those unknown regions, dying without the precinct of a direct line drawn from the North to the south a hundredth leaques westward without the parallels of the Islands called Capud Viride. or Caboverde, which we think to be those that in old time were called Hesperides. 
T●e Islands o● Caboverde o● hesperides  These pertain to the king of Portugal. And from these, his pilots which do yearly search new coasts and regions, direct their course to the east, 
The Portugals viages  sailing ever toward the left hand by the back of afric and the seas of the Ethiopians: Neither to this day had the Portugals at any time sailed southward, or Westewarde from the Islands of Caboverde. Preparing therefore three ships, he made haste toward the Island of johanna or Cuba whither he came in short space, and named the point thereof where he first arrived, Alpha and O: 
Alpha and O  that is, the first and the last: for he supposed that there had been th'end of hour east because the son falleth there: And of the west, because it riseth there. For it is apparent, that westward, it is the beginning of India beyond the river of Ganges: And Eastewarde, the furthest end of the same: 
The end of the east and West.  which thing is not contrary to reason forasmuch as the Cosmographers have left the limits of India beyond Ganges undetermyned: where as also sum were of opinion that India was not far from the coasts of Spain as we have said before. 
Note. India not far from Spain.  Within the prospect of the beginning of Cuba, he found a commodious haven in the extreme angle of the Island of Hispaniola. For in this part, the Island receiveth a great gulf. This haven, he named saint Nycolas port, 
Saint Nycolas port.  being scarcely twenty leaques from Cuba. As he departed from hence and sailed westward by the south side of Cuba, the further that he went, so much the more the sea seemed to be extended in breadth & to bend toward the south. On the south side of Cuba, he found an Island which thinhabitants call jamaica. 
The Island of jamaica.  This he affirmeth to be longer and brother than the Island of Sicily: having in it only one mountain, which on every part beginning from the sea, riseth by little and little into the midst of the Island: And that so plainly without roughness, that such as go up to the top of the same, can scarcely perceive that they ascend. 
jamaica.  This Island he affirmed to be very fruitful and full of people as well in thinner parts of the same as by the shore: And that thinhabitants are of quicker wit then in the other Islands, 
Quick witted people.  and more expert artificers and warlike men. For in many places where he would have arrived, they came armed against him and forbodde him with threatening words But being overcome, 
The composeinge of the earth.  they made a league of friendship with him. Thus departing from jamaica, he sailed toward the West with a prosperous wind for the space of three●core & ten days: thinking that he had passed so far by the compass of the earth being underneath us, that he had been near unto Aurea Chersonesus (now called Malaccha, 
Aurea Chersonesus, or Malaccha. ) in hour east India beyond the beginning of Persides. For he plainly believed that he had left only two of the twelve hours of the son, 
A secret of Astronomy.  which were unknown to us, for the owlde writers have left half the course of the son untouched, where as they have but only discussed that superficial part of the earth which lieth between the Islands of Gades and the river of Ganges: 
The river of Ganges.  or at the uttermost, to Aurea Chersonesus. In this navigation, he chanced on many furious seas, running with a fall as it had been the streams of floods: Also many whorlepooles, and shelves, with many other dangers, and straits by reason of the multitude of Islands, 
Dangerous straits by reason of many Islands.  which lay on every side. But not regarding all these perils, he determined to proceed until he had certain knowledge whether Cuba were an Island or firm land. Thus he sailed forward coasting ever by the shore toward the west for the space of CC.xxii. leaques, that is, about a thousand and three hundredth miles: And gave names to seven hundredth Islands by the way: 
The Admiral gave names to seven hundreth Islands.  Leaving also on the left hand (as he feared not to report) three thousand here and three. 
three thousand Islands.  But let us now return to such things as he found worthy to be noted in this navigation. Sailing therefore by the side of Cuba, and searching the nature of the places, he espied not far from Alpha and O, a large haven of capacity to harborowe many ships: 
A large haven  whose entrance is bending, being enclosed on both sides with capes or points which receive the water. This haven is large within, and of exceeding depth. Sailing by the shore of this port, he saw not far from the same, two cottages covered with reeds, and in many places fire kindled. Here he sent certain armed men out of the ships to the cottages: where they found neither man nor woman, but rostemeate enough. For they found certain spyttes of wood dying at the fire, having fish on them about a hundredth pound weight, and two serpents of viii foot long a piece, 
Roasted fish and serpents of viii foot long.  whereat marveling, and looking about if they could espy any of thinhabitants, and that none appeared in sight (for they fled all to the mountains at the coming of hour men) they fell to their meat, and eat the fish taken with other men's travail: But they abstained from the serpents, which they affirm to differ nothing from Crocodiles of Egypt, 
Crocodiles of egypt.  but only in bigness. For (as Pliny saith) Crocodiles have sometimes been found of xviii cubits long. But of these the bigest were but of viii foot. Thus being well refreshed, they entered into the next wood where they found many of the same kind of serpent's hanging upon boughs of trees: of the which, sum had their mouths tied with strings, and sum their teeth taken out. And as they searched the places near unto the haven, they saw about lxx men in the top of a high rock, which fled as soon as they had espied hour men. Who by signs and tokens of peace, caulinge them again, there was one which came near them and flood on the top of a rock, seeming as though he were yet fearful. But the Admiral sent one Didacus to him, 
Didacus' th'interpreter.  a man of the same country, whom he had at his first viage taken in the Island of Guanahaini, being near unto Cuba: willing him to come near and not to be afraid. When he hard Didacus speak to him in his own tongue he came bowldly to him: and shortly after resorted to his company, persuading them to come without all fear. After this message was done, there descended from the rocks to the ships, about three score and ten of thinhabibitantes, proferinge friendship and gentleness to hour men: which the Admiral accepted thankfully, and gave them divers rewards: And that the rather, for that he had intelligence by Didacus' thinterpretor, that they were the kings fishers, 
The kings. fishers.  sent of their lord to take fish against a solemn feast which he prepared for an other king. And whereas the Admirales men had eaten the fish which they left at the fire, they were the gladder thereof, because they had left the serpents. 
Serpents esteemed for delicate mea● Ophiophagi.  For there is nothing among their delicate dishes, that they esteem so much as these serpents: In so much that it is no more lawful for the common people to eat of them, than peacocks or pheasants among us. As for the fishes, they doubted not to take as many more the same night. Being asked why they first roasted the fish which they intended to bear to their king. They answered, that they might be the fresher and uncorrupted. Thus joining hands for a token of further friendship, every man resorted to his own. The Admiral went forward as he had appointed, following the faulinge of the son from the beginning of Cuba called Alpha and O. The shores or sea banks even unto this haven, albeit they be full of trees, yet are they rough with mountains. Of these trees, su●e were full of blossoomes and flowers, and other laden with fruits. 
Blossoms & fruits both at one tyme.  Beyond the haven the land is more fertile and peopulous, whose inhabitants are more gentle and more desirous of hour things. For as soon as they had espied hour sh●ppes, they flocked all to the shore, bringing with them such bread as they are accustomed to eat, and gourds full of water, offering them unto hour men, and further desiring them to come aland. In all these Islands is a certain kind of trees as big as elms, which bear gourds in the stead of fruits. 
Trees which bear gourds  These they use only for drinking pots, and to fetch water in, but not for meat, for the inner substance of them, is sourer than gall, & the bark as hard as any shell. At the Ideses of may, the watch men looking out of the top castle of the ship toward the south, saw a multitude of Islands standing thick together, 
A multitude of Islands.  being all well replenished with trees, grass, and herbs, and well inhabited. In the shore of the continent, he chanced into a navigable river whose water was so hot, 
hot water.  that no man might endure to abide his hand therein any tyme. The day following, espying a far of a Canoa of fisher men of thinhabitants, fearing lest they should fly at the sight of hour men, he commanded certain to assail them privily with the ship boats. But they fearing nothing, tarried the coming of hour men. Now shall you hear a new kind of fyshinge. 
A strange kind of fishing.  Like as we with greyhounds do hunt hares, in the plain fields. So do they as it were with a hunting fish, 
A h●ntynge wysshe.  take other fishes. This fish was of shape or form unknown unto us: but the body thereof, not much unlike a great yele: having on the hinder part of the head, a very tough skin, like unto a great bag or purse. This fish is tied by the side of the boat with a cord let down so far into the water, that the fish may lie close hid by the keel or bottom of the same, for she may in no case abide the sight of the air. Thus when they espy any great fish, or tortoise (whereof there is great abundance bigger than great targets) they let the cord at length. 
Abundance of to●oy●es.  But when she feeleth herself loosed, she enuadeth the fish or tortoise as swiftly as an arrow. And where she hath once fastened her howld she casteth the purse of skin whereof we sp●ke before: And by drawing the same together, so graspeleth her prey, that no man's strength is sufficient to unloose the same, except by little and little drawing the line, she be lifted somewhat above the brim of the water. For then, as soon as she seeth the brightness of the air, she letteth go her howled. The pray therefore, being now drawn near to the brim of the water, 
fisher men.  there leapeth soodenly out of the boat into the sea so many fishers, as may suffice to hold fast the pray, until the rest of the company have taken it into the boat. Which thing done, they lose so much of the cord, that the hunting fish, may again returns to her place with in the water: where by an other cord, they let down to her a piece of the pray, as we use to reward greyhounds after they have killed their game. This fish, they call Guaicanun, 
The fish Guaicanum.  But hour men call it Reversum. They gave hour men four tortoises taken by this means: And those of such bigness that they almost filled their fysshinge boat. For these fishes are esteemed among them for delicate meat. Hour men recompensed them again with other rewards, and so let them depart. Being asked of the coompasse of that land, they answered that it had no end westewarde. Most instantly defyringe the Admiral to come aland: 
humane people.  or in his name to send one with them to salute their Cazicus, (that is) their king: Affirming that he would give hour men many presents, if they would go to him. But the Admiral, least he should be hindered of the viage which he had begun, refused to go with them. Then they desired to know his name, and towld hour men likewise the name of their king. Thus sailing on yet further ever toward the West, within few days he came near unto a certain exceeding high mountain, well inhabited by reason of the great fertility of the same. 
A mountain fruitful and well inhabited.  Th'inhabitants of this mountain, browght to hour ship, bread, gossampine cotton, coneys, and sundry kinds of wyldfowle: demanding religiously of thinterpreters, if this nation descended not from heaven. The king of this people, and divers other sage men that stood by him, informed him that that land was no Island. Shortly after, entering into one of the Islands being on the left hand of this land, they found no body therein: for they fled all at the coming of hour men. Yet found they there four dogs of marvelous deformed shape, 
Dogs of strange shape and dumb.  and such as could not bark. This kind of dogs, they eat as we do goats. Here is great plenty of geese, ducks, 
Ducks.  and hearons. 
hearons'  Between these Islands and the continente, he entered into so narrow straits, that he could scarcely turn back the ships: And these also so shallow, that the keel of the ships sometime razed on the sands The water of these straights, 
straits.  for the space of forty miles, was white and thick like unto milk, 
white and thick water.  and as though meal had been sparkled through out all that sea. And when they had at the length escaped these straights, and were now come into a main and large sea, and had sailed thereon for the space of four score miles, they espied an other exceeding high mountain, whither the Admiral resorted to store his ships with fresh water and fuel. Hear among certain woods of date trees, 
woods of date trees.  and pyneable trees of exceeding height he found two native springs of fresh water. In the mean time while the wood was cutting and the barrels filling, one of hour archers went into the wood to hunt: where he espied a certain man with a white vesture, 
Men apparelled like white friars.  so like a friar of thorder of saint mary of Mercedis, that at the first sight he supposed it had been the admirals priest which he browght with him, being a man of the same order. But two other followed him immediately out of the same woods, shortly after, he saw a far of a hole company of men clothed in apparel, being about xxx in number. Then turning his back and crying out to his fellows, he made haste to the ships with all that he might drive. These appareled men, made signs and tokens to him to tarry and not to be afraid. But that notwithstanding, he ceased not to fly. The Admiral being advertised hereof, and not a little rejoicing that he had found a civil people, in continently sent forth armed men, with commandment, that if need should so require, they should enter forty miles into the Island, until they might find either those appareled men, or other inhabitants of that country. When they had passed over the wood, they came into a great plain full of grass and herbs, in which appeared no token of any path way. Here attempting to go through the grass and herbs, they were so entangled and bewrapte therein, that they were scarcely able to pass a mile, the grass being there little lower than hour ripe corn. 
grass almost as high as corn  Being therefore wearied, they were enforced to return again, finding no path way. The day following he sent forth xxv armed men an other way: Commanding them to make diligent search and inquisition what manner of people inhabited the land. Who departing, when they had found not far from the sea side certain steps of wild beasts, 
Steps of wild beasts feet.  of the which they suspected sum to be of lions feet being stricken with fear, returned back again. As they came they found a wood in the which were many native vines here and there creeping about high trees, 
Native vines  with many other trees bearing aromatical fruits and spices. 
Trees bearing spices and sweet fruits.  Of these vines they browght with them into Spain many clusters of grapes very ponderous and full of liquor. But of the other fruits, they browght none because they putrefied by the way in the ship, and were cast into the sea. They say also that in the lands or meadows of those woods, they saw flocks of great crane's twice as big as ours. 
Great Cranes.  As he went forward and turned his sails toward certain other mountains, he espied two cottages on the shore, in the which he saw only one man: who being browght to the ship, signified with head, fingers, and by all other signs, that he could devise that the land which lay beyond those mountains, was very full of people. And as the Admiral drew near the shore of the same, there met him certain Canoas' having in them many people of the country, who made signs and tokens of peace and petition. But here Didacus' th'interpreter which understood the language of thinhabitants of the beginning of Cuba, 
divers languages in the Island of Cuba.  understood not them one whit, whereby they considered that in sundry provinces of Cuba, were sundry languages He had also intelligence, that in the inland of this Region, was a king of great power, and accustomed to wear apparel. He saith that all the tract of this shore, was drowned with water and full of mud, beset with many trees, after the manner of hour marishes, Yet whereas in this place they went aland for fresh water, they found many of the shelfysshes in the which pearls are gathered. 
Pearls in ●helfysshes.  But that could not cause the Admiral to tract the time there, entending at this voyage, only to prove how many lands & seas he could discover according to the kings commandment. As they yet proceeded forward, they saw here and there all the way along by the shore, a great smoke rising, until they came to an other mountain four score miles distant. There was no rock or hill that could be seen, but the same was all of a smoke. But whether these fierce were made by thinhabitants for their necessary business, or as we are wont to set beacons on fire when we suspect thapproach of hour enemies, thereby to give warning to their neighbours to be in a readiness, and gather together if perhaps hour men should attempt any thing against them, or otherwise as seemethe most likely, to call them together as to a wonder to behold hour ships, they knew yet no certainty. In this tract, the shores bended sometime toward the south, and sometime toward the West and westesouthwest: And the sea was every where entangled with Islands: 
The sea entangled with Islands  by reason whereof, the keels of the ships often times razed the sands for shalownes of the water: So that the ships being very sore bruised and appaired the sails, cables, and other tackelinges, in manner rotten, and the victuals, (especially the byskette bread) corrupted by taking water at the rifts evil closed, the Admiral was enforced to turn back again. This last point where he touched of Cuba (not yet being known to be an Island) he called evangelista. 
evangelista.  Thus ●urning his sails toward other Islands lying not far from the supposed continente, he chanced into a main sea where was such a multitude of great tortoises, 
A multitude of great tortoises  that sometime they stayed the ships. Not long after, he entered into a gulf of white water, 
A goufe of white water humane people.  like unto that whereof we spoke before. At the length fearing the shelves of the islands, he returned to the shore of Cuba by the same way which he came. Here a multitude of thinhabitants, as well women as men, resorted to him with cheerful countenance and without fear: bringing with them popingayes bread, water, and cunnyes: But especially stock doves much bigger than ours: which he affirmeth, in savour and taste, to be much more pleasant than hour partridges. 
Stock doves of more pleasant taste than partridges.  Wherefore where as in eating of them he perceived a certain savour of spice to proceed from them, he commanded the crop to be opened of such as were newly killed, and found the same full of sweet spices, which he argued to be the cause of their strange taste. For it standeth with good reason, that the flesh of beasts, should draw the nature and quality of their accustomed nury●hemente. As the Admiral hard mass on the shore, there came toward him a certain governor, 
The humanity of a reverend old governor.  a man of four score years of age, and of great gravity, although he were naked saving his privy parts. He had a great train of men waiting on him. All the while the priest was at mass, he showed himself very humble and gave reverent attendance with grave and demure countenance. When the mass was ended, he presented to the Admiral, a basket of the fruits of his country, delivering the same with his own hands. When the Admiral had gently entertained him, desiring leave to speak, he made an oration in the presence of Didacus' th'interpreter, in this effect. 
An oration of the naked governor.  I have been advertised (most mighty prince) that you have of late with great power subdued many lands and Regions hitherto unknown to you: and have browght no little fear upon all the people and inhabitants of the same. The which your good fortune, you shall bear with less insolency, 
Their opinion of the 〈◊〉 of man.  if you remember that the souls of men have two journeys after they are departed from this body. The one fowl and dark, prepared for such as are injurious and cruel to man kind: The other pleasant and delectable, ordained for than which in their life time, loved peace and quietness. If therefore you acknowleage yourself to be mortal, and consider that every man shall receive condign reward or punishment for such things as he hath done in this life, you will wrongfully hurt no man. When he had said these words and other like, which were declared to the Admiral by th'interpreter, he marveling at the judgement of the naked old man, answered, that he was glad to hear his opinion as touching the sundry journeys and rewards of souls departed from their bodies: Supposing that neither he, or any other of thinhabitants of those Regions, 
Desire of gold found that which religion could not find.  had had any knowledge thereof. declaring further that the chief cause of his coming thither was to instruct them in such godly knowledge and true religion: And that he was sent into those countries by the Christian king of Spain (his lord and master) for the same purpose: 
Virtus post nummos. etc.  And specially to subdue and punish the Canibales and such other mischievous people: And to defend innocentes against the violence of such evil doers willing him and all other such as embraced virtue, in no case to be afraid: But rather to open his mind unto him, if either he, or any other such quiet men as he was, had sustained any wrong of their neighbours: and that he would see the same revenged. These comfortable words of the Admiral so pleased the old man, that notwithstanding his extreme age, he would gladly have gone with the Admiral as he had done in deed, if his wife and children had not hindered him of his purpose. But he marveled not a little, that the Admiral was under the dominion of an other: And much more, when th'interpreter told him of the glory, magnificence, pomps, great power, and furnymentes of war of hour kings, and of the multitudes of cities and towns which were under their dominions. Intending therefore to have gone with the Admiral, his wife and children fell prostrate at his feet, with tears desiring him not to forsake them and leave them desolate. At whose pitiful requests, the worthy old man being moved, remained at home to the comfort of his people and family, satisfying rather them then himself. For not yet ceasing to wonder, and of heavy countenance because he might not depart, he demanded oftentimes if that land were not heaven, which browght forth such a kind of men. For it is certain, that among them, the land is as common as the son and water: 
The Island as common as the sun and water.  And that Mine and Thine (the seeds of all mischief) have no place with them. They are content with so little, that in so large a country, they have rather superfluity than scarceness. So that (as we have said before) they seem to live in the golden world, 
The golden world.  without toil, living in open gardens, not entrenched with dykes, divided with hedges, or defended with walls. They deal truly one with an other, without laws, without books, and without judges. They take him for an evil and mischievous man, which taketh pleasure in doing hurt to other. And albeit that they delight not in superfluities, yet make they provision for th'increase of such roots, 
Provision without care.  whereof they make their bread, as Maizium, jucca, and Ages, contented with such simple diet, 
Simple diet  whereby health is preserved, and diseases avoided. The Admiral therefore departing from thence, and minding to return again shortly after, chanced to come again to the Island of jamaica being on the sooth side thereof: 
The Island of jamaica.  and coasted all a long by the shore of the same, from the West to the east. From whose last corner on the East side, when he saw toward the North on his left hand, certain high mountains he knew at the length that it was the sooth side of the Island of Hispaniola, 
hispaniola.  which he had not yet passed by. Wherefore at the kalends of September, entering into the haven of the same Island, called saint Nycolas haven, he repaired his ships to th'intent that he might again waist and spoil the Islands of the Canibales, 
The Canibales.  and burn all their Canoas', that those ravening wolves might no longer persecute and devour the innocent sheep. But he was at this time hindered of his purpose by reason of a disease which he had gotten with to much watching. 
Sickness of to much watching.  Thus being feeble and weak, he was led of the mariners to the city of Isabel, where, with his two brethrens which were there, & other his familiars, he recovered his health in short space. Yet could he not at this time assail the Canibales, by reason of sedition that was risen of late among the spaniards which he had left in Hispaniola, whereof we will speak more hereafter. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The fourth book of the first decade to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
COlonus the Admiral of the Ocean, returning (as he supposed) from the continent or firm land of East India, 
east India.  had advertisement that his brother Boilus & one Peter Margarita, an owld familiar of the kings, and a noble man, with divers other of those to whom he had left the government of the Island, 
The Spanyarde● rebel in the Admir●ls absence.  were of corrupted mind against him, departed into Spain. Wherefore as well to purge him of such crimes as they should lay to his charge, as also to make a supply of other men in the place of them which were returned, & especially to provide for victuals, as wheat, wine, oil, and such other which the spaniards are accustomed to eat, because they could not yet well agree with such meats as they found in the Islands, determined shortly to take his viage into Spain. But what he did before his departure, I will briefly rehearse.  
The kings of the Islands which had hitherto lived quietly and content with their little which they thowght abundante, 
The kings of the Island rebel.  whereas they now perceived that hour men began to fasten foot within their Regions and to bear rule among them, took the matter so grievously, that they thowght nothing else but by what means they might utterly destroy them, and for ever abolysshe the memory of their name. For that kind of men (the spaniards I mean which followed the Admiral in that navigation, 
The Spaniards m●sbehauour. ) was for the most part unruly, regarding nothing but Idleness, play, and liberty: And would by no means abstain from injuries: ravishing the women of the Islands before the faces of their husbands fathers, and brothers: By which their abominable mysde maynour, they disquieted the minds of all thinhabitants: In so much that where so ever they found any of hour men unprepared, they slew them with such fyercenes and gladness, as although they had offered sacrifice to God. Intending therefore to pacify their troubled minds, and to punish them that slew his men before he departed from thence, he sent for the king of that vale, which in the book before, we describe to be at the foot of the mountains of the Region of Cibava. This kings name was Guarionexius: 
Guarionexius the king of the greatyale Didacus the interpreter  who, the more straightly to concyle unto him the friendship of the Admiral, gave his sister to wife to Didacus, a man from his child's age browght up with the Admiral, whom he used for his interpreter in the provinces of Cuba. After this, he sent for Caunaboa, called the lord of the house of gold: that is, of the mountains of Cibava, For this Caunaboa, 
Caunaboa, the king of the house of gold.  he sent one capitayne Hoieda, whom the dictionaries of Caunaboa had enforced to keep his howled bysiegeinge for the space of xxx days, the fortress of saint Thomas, in the which Hoieda with his fifty soldiers, stood at their defence, until the coming of the Admiral. While Hoieda remained with Caunaboa, 
captain hoieda.  many ambassadors of the kings of divers Regions were sent to Caunaboa, persuading him in no condition to permit the Christians to inhabit the Island, except he had rather serve then rule. On the other party, Hoieda advertised Caunaboa to go to the Admiral, and to make a league of friendship with him. But the ambassadors on the contrary part, threatened him, that if he would so do, the other kings would invade his Region. But Hoieda answered them again, that whereas they conspired to maintain their liberty, they should by that means be browght to servitude & destruction if they intended to resist or keep war against the Christians. Thus Caunaboa on the one side and the other, 
king Caunaboa, ●ad s●ain the Spanyarde●.  being troubled as it were a rock in the sea, beaten with contrary floods, & much more vexed with the storms of his guilty conscience for that he had privily slain twenty of hour men under pretence of peace feared to come to the Admiral. But at the length, having excogitated this deceit, 
Caunaboa conspireth the Admiralle● death.  to have slain the Admiral and his company under the colour of friendship if opportunity would so have served, he repaired to the Admiral with his hole family and many other waiting on him, armed after their manner. Being demanded why he browght so great a rout of men with him, he answered that it was not decente for so great a prince as he was, to go forth of his house without such a band of men. But the thing chanced much otherwise then he looked for. For he fell into the snares which he had prepared for other. For whereas by the way he began to repent him that he came forth of his house, Hoieda with many fair words and promises, 
Fair word make fools feign.  browght him to the Admiral: At whose commandment, he was immediately taken & put in prison: So that the souls of hour men were not long from their bodies unrevenged. Thus Caunaboa with all his family being taken, the Admiral was determined to run over the Island. But he was certified that there was such famine among thinhabitants, 
Famine in the Island of hispaniola.  that there was already fifty thousand men dead thereof: And that they died yet daily as it were cotton sheep: The cause whereof was well known to be their own obstinacy and frowardness. For where as they saw that hour men intended to choose them a dwelling place in the Island, supposing that they might have driven them from thence if the victuals of the Island should fail, they determined with themselves, not only to leave sowing and planting, but also to destroy and pluck up by the roots every man in his own region, 
The hunger of gold causeth great famine.  that which they had already sown of both kinds of bread whereof we made mention in the first book. But especially among the mountains of Cibava, otherwise called Cipanga, for as much as they had knoweleage that the gold which aboundeth in that Region, was the chief cause that detained hour men in the Island. In the mean time, he sent forth a captain with a band of men to search the sooth side of the Island. Who at his return, reported that through out all the Regions that he travailed, there was such scarceness of bread, that for the space of xvi days he eat nowght elles but the roots of herbs, and of young date trees, or the fruits of other wild trees, But Guarionexius, the king of the vale lying beneath the mountains of Cibava, whose kyngedoome was not so wasted as the other, gave hour men certain victuals.  
Within a few days after, both that the journeys might be the shorter, and also that hour men might have more safe places of refuge, if the inhabitants should hereafter rebel in like manner, he builded an other fortesse (which he called the tower of Conception) between the city of Isabel and saint Thomas fortress, 
The tower of conception.  in the marches of the kingdom of this Guarionexius within the precinct of Cibava upon the side of A hill, having a fair river of wholesome water running hard by the same. Thus when the inhabitants saw new buildings to be daily erected, and hour ships lying in the haven rotten and half broken, they began to despair of any hope of liberty, & wandered up and down with heavy ●here. From the tower of Conception, searching diligently the inner parts of the mountains of Cibava, there was A certain king which gave them a mass of rude gold, as big as a man's fist, weighing twenty ounces. 
A mass of gold weighing twenty ounces.  This gold was not found in the bank of that river, but in a heap of dry earth: and was like unto the stone called Tofus, 
Tofus.  which is soon resolved into sand. This mass of gold, I myself saw in Castille, in the famous city of Methymna Campi, where the court lay all that winter. I saw also a great piece of pure Electrum: 
Electrum is a metal naturally mixed of one portion of gold & another of ●iluer being of property to bewray poison, and was therefore in old time in greater estimation than gold.  of the which bells and apothecary's mortars, and many such other vessels and instruments may be made, as were in old time of copper of the city of Corinthus. This piece of Electrum, was of such weight, that I was not only with both my hands unable to lift it from the ground, but also not of strength to remove it either one way or an other. They affirmed that it weighed more than three hundredth pound weight, after viii ounces to the pound. It was found in the house of a certain prince, and left him by his predecessors. And albeit that in the days of thinhabitants yet living, Electrum was no where digged, yet knew they where the mine thereof was: 
The mine of Electrum.  but hour men with much ado, could hardly cause them to show them the place, they bore them such privy hatred. Yet at the length, they browght them to the mine, being now ruinated and stopped with stones and rubbisshe. It is much easier to dig then is the iron mine: and might be restored again, if miners and other workmen skilful therein, were appointed thereto. Not far from the tower of Conception, in the same mountains, is found great plenty of Amber: 
another kind of amber is taken out of great whale fishes  and out of certain rocks of the same distilleth a substance of the yellow colour which the painters use. 
Orpement or ochre.  Not far from these mountains are many great woods, in the which are none other trees than brasile, which the Italians call Verzino. 
woods of brasile trees.  But here perhaps (right noble prince) you would ask what should be the cause, that where as the spaniards have brought out of these Islands certain ships laden with brasile, somewhat of gossampine cotton, a quantity of amber, a little gold, and sum spices, why they have not brought such plenty of gold and such other rich merchandise as the fruitfulness of these regions seem to promiss. To this I answer, 
Causes of hindrance.  that when Colonus the admiral was likewise demanded the cause hereof, he made answer that the spaniards which he took with him into these regions, were given rather to sleep, play, and idleness; then to labour: And were more studious of sedition and news, then desirous of peace and quietness: Also that being given to lycenciousnes, 
Licenciusnes of to much liberty  they rebelled & forsook him, finding matter of false accusations against him, because he went about to repress their owtragiousenes.  
By reason whereof he was not yet able to break the power of the inhabitants, and freely to possess the full dominion of the Island. And these hindrances to be the cause that hitherto the gains have scarcely countervailed the charges. 
And this only gathered & not digged out of the body of the min●  Albeit, even this year while I write these things at hour request, they gathered in two moons the sum of a thousand and two hundredth pounds weight of gold. But because we intend to speak more largely of these things in their place, we will now return from whence we have digressed. When the inhabitants perceived that they could by no means shake the yoke from their necks, they made humble supplication to the Admiral that they might stand to their tribute, 
The people make supplication to st●d to their tribute  and apply themselves to reincrease the fruits of their country, being now almost wasted. He granted them their request: and appointed such order that every Region should pay their tribute, with the commodities of their countries, according to their portion, and at such time as they were agreed upon. But the violent famine did frustrate all these appointments. 
Famine.  For all the travails of their bodies, were scarcely able to suffice to find them meat in the woods, whereby to sustain their lives, being of long time contented with roots and the fruits of wild trees. Yet many of the kings with their people, even in this extreme necessity, browght part of their tribute: Most humbly desiring the Admiral to have compassion of their calamities, and to bear with them yet a while, until the Island were restored to the owlde state. promising further, that that which was now wanting, should then be double recompensed. But few of the inhabitants of the mountains of Cibava, kept their promise, because they were sorer oppressed with famine than any of the other. 
The nature of the Region dispo●eth the manner of the people.  They say, that the inhabitants of these mountains, differ no less in manners and language from them which dwell in the plains, them among us, the rusticals of the country from gentlemen of the court: whereas notwithstanding, they live both as it were under one portion of heaven, and in many things, much after one fashion, as in nakedness, and rude simplicity: But now let us return to Caunaboa, 
king Caunaboa in captivity.  the king of the house of gold, being in captivity. When he perceived himself to be cast in prison, fretting and grating his teeth as it had been a lion of Libya, and daily and nightly devising with himself how he might be delivered, 
The persuasion of Caunaboa.  began to persuade the Admiral, that for as much as he had now taken unto his dominion the Region of Cipanga or Cibava (whereof he was king) it should be expedient to send thither a garrison of Christian men, to defen●e the same from the incursions of his owld enemies and borderers. For he said, that it was signified unto him, that the country was wasted and spoiled with such incursions. By this crafty devise, he thought to have browght to pass, that his brother which was in that region, and the other his kinsfolks and friends with their adherentes, should have taken, either by sleight or force, as many of hour men, as might have redeemed him. But the admiral understanding his crafty meaning, sent Hoi●dae with such a company of men, as might vanquish the Cibavians, if they should move war against them. Hour men had scarcely entered into the Region, but the brother of Caunaboa came against them with an army of five thousand naked men, 
Caunaboa his brother rebelleth.  armed after their manner with clubs, arrows typte with bones, and spears made hard at the ends with fire. He stole upon hour men being in one of their houses: and encamped round about the same on every side. This Cibavian, as a man not ignorant in the discipline of war, about the distance of a furlong from the house, divided his army into five battles, appointing to every of them a circuit by equal division: And placed the froont of his own battle, directly against hour men. When he had thus set his battles in good array, he gave certain signs that the hole army should march forward in order with equal paces, and with a larome freshly assail their enemies, 
A conflict between the Cibavians and the spaniards.  in such sort that none might escape. But hour men judging it better to encounter with one of the battles, then to abide the brunt of the hole army, gave onset on the main battle aranged in the plain, because that place was most commodious for the horsemen. When the horsemen therefore had given the charge, they overthrew them with the breasts of their horses, and slew as many as abode th'end of the fight. 
The Cibavians have the overthrow.  The residue being stricken with fear, disparkled, and fled to the mountains and rocks: from whence they made a pitiful howling to hour men, desiring them to spare them: protesting that they would never more rebel, but do what so ever they would command them, if they would suffer them to live in their own country. Thus the brother of Caunaboa being taken, the Admiral licensed the people to resort every man to his own. These things thus fortunately achieved this Region was pacified. Among those mountains, the vale which Caunaboa inhabited, is called Magona, and is exceeding fruitful: having in it many goodly springs: and rivers, in the sand whereof, is found great plenty of gold. The same year in the month of june, 
A great tempest in the month of june.  they say there rose such a boisterous tempest of wind from the sowtheaste, as hath not lightly been hard of: The violence hereof was such that it plucked up by the rooes what so ever great trees were within the reach of the force thereof. When this whirl wind came to the haven of the city, it beat down to the bottom of the sea, three ships which lay at anchor, 
Three ships drowned lying at anchor  & broke the cables in sunder: and that (which is the greater marvel) without any storm or roughness of the sea, only turning them three or four times about. The inhabitants also affirm, that the same year, the sea extended itself further in to the land, and rose higher than ever it did before by the memory of man, by the space of a cubet. The people therefore, muttered among themselves, that hour nation had troubled the elements, and caused such portentous signs. These tempests of the air (which the Grecians call Tiphones, that is, whirl winds) they call, 
whirl winds.  Furacanes: 
Furacanes.  which they say, do often times chance in this Island: But that neither they nor their great grandfathers ever saw such violent and furious Furacanes, that plucked up great trees by the roots: Neither yet such surges and vehement motions on the sea, that so wasted the land. As in deed it may appear, for as much as, where so ever the sea banks are near to any plain there are in manner every where, flourishing meadows reaching even unto the shore. But now let us return to Caunaboa. As king Caunaboa therefore and his brother should have been browght into Spain, 
The death of king Caunab●a and his brother.  they died by the way for very pensiveness and anguish of mind. The Admiral, whose ships were drowned in the foresaid tempest, perceiving himself to be now enclosed, commanded forthwith two other ships (which the Spaniards call Caravelas) to be made. For he had with him, all manner of artificers pertaining thereunto. While these things were doing, he sent forth Bartholomeus Colonus his brother, being lieutenant of the Island, with an army of men to search the gold mines being distant three score leaques from the city of Isabel, 
Bartholomeus Colonus th●●eauete●a●nt sear●he●● the gold-mines.  which were found by the conduct of certain people of the Island, before the mines of Cipanga or Cibava, were known. In these mines, they found certain deep pits which had been digged in old time, out of these pits, the Admiral (who affirmeth this Island of Hispaniola to be Ophir, as we have said before) supposeth th●t Solomon the king of Hierus●lem had his great riches of gold whereof we reed in the owlde testament: 
The gold mines of Solomon.  And that his ships sailed to this Ophir by the gulf of Persia called Sinus Persicus. But whether it be so or not, it lieth not in me to judge, but in my opinion it is far of. As the miners digged the superficial or uppermost part of the earth of the mines, 
Gold in the superficial parts of the earth.  during for the space of vi miles, and in divers places sifted the same on the dry land, they found such plenty of gold, that every hired labourer could easily find every day, the weight of three drams. These mines being thus searched and found, the lieutenant certified the Admiral hereof by his letters. The which when he had received the .v. day of the Ideses of March. Anno. 1495. he entered into his new ships, and took his voyage directly to Spain to advertise the king of all his affairs, 
The Admiral taketh his voyage to spain  leaving the hole regiment of the Island with his brother the lieutenant,   

¶ The fift book of the first decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
AFter the admirals departing into Spain his Brother the lieutenant, builded A fortesse in the gold mines, as he had commanded him. This he called the golden tower, 
The golden tower.  because the labourers found gold in the earth and stone whereof they made the walls of the fortress. He consumed three months in making the instruments wherewith the gold should be gathered, washed, tried, and molten. 
Lack of victuals.  Yet was he at this time by reason of want of victuals, enforced to leave all things imperfect, and to go seek for meat. Thus as he with a band of armed men, had entered three score miles further within the land, the people of the country here and there resorting to him, gave him a certain portion of their bread in exchange for other of hour things. But he could not long tarry here, because they lacked meat in the fortress, whither he hasted with such as he had now gotten. Leaving therefore in the fortress a garrison of ten men, with that portion of the Island bread which yet remained, 
hunting hounds.  leaving also with them a hound to take those kinds of little beasts which they call Vsias, not much unlike hour conies, he returned to the fortress of Conception. This also, was the moonthe wherein the king Guarionexius, and also Manicautexius, 
king Manicautexius.  bortherer unto him, should have brought in their tributes. Remaining there the hole moonthe of june, he exacted the hole tribute of these two kings, and victuals necessary for him and such as he brought with him, which were about four hundredth in number. Shortly after, about the kalends of july, there came three caravels from Spain, 
Uytayles browght from Spain.  bringing with them sundry kinds of victuals, as wheat, oil wine, bacon, and marckelmas beef: which were divided to every man according as need required. Sum also was lost in the carriage for lack of good looking too. At the arrival of these ships, the lieutenant received commandment from the king and the admiral his brother, that he with his men should remove their habitation to the sooth side of the Island, because it was nearer to the gold mines: Also that he should make diligent search for those kings which had slain the Christian men, and to send them with their confederates, bound into Spain. At the next viage therefore, he sent three hundredth captives with three Kings: And when he had diligently searched the coasts of the south side, he transported his habitation, and builded a fortress there, upon the top of a hill, near unto a sure haven.  
This fortress, he called saint Dominic'S tower. 
Saint Dominic'S tower.  Into this haven, runneth A river of wholesome water, replenished with sundry kinds of good fishes. They affirm this river to have many benefits of nature. For, where so ever it runneth all things are exceeding pleasant and fruitful: having on every side, groves of date trees, 
Groves of date trees.  and divers other of the Island fruits so plentifully, that as they sailed along by the shore, often times the branches thereof laden with flowers & fruits, hung so over their heads, that they might pluck them with their hands. Also that the fruitfulness of this ground, is either equal with the soil of Isabel, or better. In Isabel, 
Isabe●l●.  he left only certain sick men and ship wrights, whom he had appointed to make certain caravels The residue of his men, he conveyed to the sowth, to saint Dominickes tower. After he had builded this fortress, leaving therein a garrison of twenty men, he with the remanent of his soldiers, prepared themselves to search the inner parts of the West side of the Island, hitherto known only by name. Therefore about xxx leaques, (that is) four score and ten miles from the fortress, he chanced on the river Naiba, 
The river of Naiba  which we said to descend from the mountains of Cibava, right toward the sowth, by the midst of the Island. When he had overpassed this river with a coompanye of armed men divided into xxv decurions, that is, ten in a company with their captains, he sent two decurions to the regions of those kings in whose lands were the great woods of brasile trees. 
woods of brasile trees.  Inclyninge toward the left hand, they found the woods, entered into them, and felled the high and precious trees, which were to that day, untouched. Each of the decurions filled certain of the Island houses with the trunks of brasile, there to be reserved until the ships came which should carry them away. But the lieutenant directing his journey toward the right hand, not far from the banks of the river of Naiba, found a certain king whose name was Beuchius Anacauchoa, 
king Beuchius Anacauchoa.  encamped against thinhabitants of the province of Naiba, to subdue them under his dominion, as he had done many other kings of the Island, borderers unto him: The palace of this great king, is called Xaragua: 
The palace of ●aragua.  and is situate toward the West end of the Island, distant from the river of Naiba xxx leaques. All the princes which dwell between the West end and his palace, are dictionaries unto him. All that Region from Naiba,, to the furthest marches of the west, is utterly without gold, although it be full of mountains. 
Mountains without gold  When the king had espied hour men, laying a part his weapons, & giving signs of peace, he spoke gently to them, incerteyne whether it were of humanity or fear) and demanded or them what they would have. The lieutenant answered: That he should pay tribute to the Admiral his brother, 
Tribute.  in the name of the Christian king of Spain. To whom he said: How can you require that of me, whereas never a Region under my dominion bringeth forth gold. For he had hard, that there was a strange nation entered into the Island, which made great search for gold. But he supposed that they desired none other thing. The lieutenant answered again: God forbid that we should enjoin any man to pay such tribute as he might not easily forbear, or such as were not engendered or growing in the Region: But we understand that your Regions bring forth great plenty of Gossampine cotton, and hemp, 
The wolf entreateth. the sheep.  with such other, whereof we desire you to give us part. When he hard these words, he promised with cheerful countenance, to give him as much of these things as he would require. Thus dismissing his army, & sending messengers before, he himself accoompanyed the Leavetenaunte and browght him to his palace, being dystante (as we have said) xxx leaques. In all this tract, they passed through the jurisdiction of other princes being under his dominion: Of the which, sum gave them hemp, of no less goodness to make tackelinges for ships then hour wood. Other sum, browght bread, and sum gossampyne cotton: 
hemp and gossampine cotton.  And so every of them paid tribute with such commodities as their countries browght forth. At the length they came to the kings mansion place of Xaragua. Before they entered into the palace, 
how the Lieutenant was received at the kings palace.  A great multitude of the kings servants and subjects resorted to the court, honourably (after their manner) to receive their king Beuchius Anacauchoa, with the strangers which he browght with him to see the magnificence of his court. But now shall you hear how they were entertained. Among other triumphs and sights, two are especially to be noted. first there met them a company of thirty. women, being all the kings wives and concubines, 
The kings wives.  bearing in their hands branches of date trees, singing and dancing: They were all naked, saving that their privy parts were covered with breeches of gossampine cotton. But the virgins, having their hear hanging down about their shoulders, tied about the forehead with a fillet, were utterly naked. 
well favered women.  They affirm that their faces, breasts, paps hands, and other parts of their bodies, were exceeding smooth, and well proportioned: but somewhat inclining to a lovely brown. They supposed that they had seen those most beautiful Dryads, 
dryads.  or the native nymphs or fairs of the fountains whereof the antiquities speak so much. The branches of date trees which they bore in their right hands when they danced, they delivered to the lieutenant with low courtesy and smiling countenance. Thus entering into the kings house, they found a delicate supper prepared for them after their manner. 
A delicate supper.  When they were well refreshed with meat, the night drawing on, they were browght by the kings officers, every man to his lodging, according to his degree, in certain of their houses about the palace, where they rested them in hanging beds after the manner of the country, 
hanging beds.  whereof we have spoken more largely in an other place.  
¶ The day following they browght hour men to their common haul, 
A common haul.  into the which they come together as often as they make any notable games or triumphs, as we have said before. Here, after many daunsynges, singings, maskinges runnynges, wrestlynges, and other trying of masteries, soodenly there appeared in a large plain near unto the haule ii great armies of men of war, which the king for his pastime had caused to be prepared, 
A pretty pastime.  as the Spaniards use the play with reeds which they call juga de Canias. As the armies drew near together, they assailed the one the other as fiercely, as if mortal enemies with their banners spleade, should fight for their goods, their lands, their lives, their liberty, their country, their wives and their children.  
So that within the moment of an hour, four men were slain, 
Four men slain in ●port  and many wounded. The battle also should have continued longer, if the king had not at the request of hour men, caused them to cease. The third day, the Lieutenant conseling the king to sow more plenty of gossampine upon the banks near unto the water's side, that they might the better pay their tribute privately according to the multitude of their houses, he repaired to Isabel to visit the sick men which he had left there, and also to see how his works went forward. In the time of his absence xxx of his men were consumed with diverse diseases. 
Provision for diseased men  Wherefore being sore troubled in his mind, and in manner at his wits end what he were best to do, for as much as he wanted all things necessary as well to restore them to health which were yet acrased, as also victuals to maintain the hole multitude, where as there was yet no ship come from Spain, as at the length he determined to send abroad the sick men here and there to sundry Regions of the Island, and to the castles which they had erected in the same. for directly from the city of Isabel to saint Dominic'S tower, that is, from the north to the south, 
The castles or towers of hispaniola.  through the Island, they had builded thus many castles. first xxxvi miles distant from Isabel, they builded the castle of Sperantia. from Sperantia. xxv. miles, was the castle of saint Catharine. from saint Catharines' twenty miles, was saint james tower. Other twenty miles from saint james tower, was A stronger fortress than any of the other, which they called the tower of Conception: which he made the stronger because it was situate at the roots of the golden mountains of Cibava, 
The golden mountains of Cibava.  in the great and large plain so fruitful and well inhabited as we have before described. He builded also an other in the mid way between the tower of Conception & saint Dominic'S tower. The which also was stronger than the tower of Conception, because it was within the limits of A great king, having under his dominion five thousand men: whose chief City and head of the Realm, being called Bonawm, 
Bonawm  he willed that the castle should also be called after the same name.  
Therefore leaving the sick men in these castles and other of the Island houses near unto the same, he himself repaired to saint Dominikes, 
Tribute.  eractinge tributes of all the kings which were in his way. When he had tarried there A few days, there was a rumour spread, that all the kings about the borders of the tower of Conception, had conspired with desperate minds to rebel against the Spaniards. 
The kings rebel.  When the lieutenant was certified hereof, he took his journey toward them immediately, not being discouraged either by the length of the way, or feebleness of his soldiers, being in manner forweried with travail. As he drew near unto them, he had advertisement that king Guarionexius was chosen by the other princes to be the captain of this rebellion: 
Guarionexius captain of the conspiracy.  And that he was enforced thereto half unwilling, being seduced by their persuasions and provocations. The which is more likely to be true, for that he had before had experience of the power and policy of hour men. They came together at a day appointed, accoompanied with xu thousand men, 
An army of xv thou●ande Barbarians.  armed after their manner, once again to prove the fortune of war. Here the lieutenant consulting with the captain of the fortress and the other soldiers of whom he had the conduct, determined to set upon them unwares in their own houses before they could prepare their army. He sent forth therefore to every king, a Centurion, that is, a captain of a hundredth, which were commanded upon a sudden to invade their houses in the night, and to take them sleeping, before the people (being scattered here and there) might assemble together. Thus secretly entering into their villages, not fortified with walls, trenches, or bulwarks, they broke in upon them, took them, bound them, 
The kings are taken p●●soners.  and led away every man his prisoner according as they were commanded. The lieutenant himself with his hundredth men, assailed king Guarionexius as the worthier parsonage, whom he took prisoner as did the other captains their kings, & at the same hour appointed. Fourteen of them were browght the same night to the tower of Conception. Shortly after, when he had put to death two of the kings which were the chief authors of this new revolt, and had suborned Guarionexius and the other kings to attempt the same: lest the people for sorrow of their kings should neglect or forsake their country, which thing might have been great incommodity to hour men, who by th'increase of their seeds and fruits were oftentimes aided, he freely pardoned and dismissed Guarionexius and the other kings. 
king Guarionexius is pardoned.  The people in the mean time flocked together about the tower, to the number of five thousand without weapons, with pitiful howling for the deliverance of their kings: The air thundered, & the earth trembeled through the vehemency of their owtery The lieutenant warned Guarionexius and the other kings, with threatenings, with rewards, and with promises, never hereafter to attempt any such thing. Then Guarionexius made an oration to the people of the great power of hour men, of their clemency toward offenders, and liberality to such as remain faithful: desiring them to quiet their minds: and from hensefoorth neither in deed nor thowght to interpryse any thing against the Christians, but to obey & serve them, except they would daily br●nge themselves into further calamities. When the oration was finished, they took him up and set him on their shoulders, and so carried him home to his own palace. And by this means, this Region was pacified for a while. But hour men, with heavy countenance wandered up and down, as desolate in a strange country, lacking victuals, 
Lack of victuals.  and worn out of apparel, whereas xu moons were now passed sense the Admiral's departure: during which time, they could hear nothing out of Spain. The lieutenant comforted them all th●t he could with fair words and promises. In the mean time, Beuchius Anacauchoa (the king of the West parts of the Region of Xaragua (of whom we spoke before) sent messengers to the lieutenant to signify unto him, 
Beuchius Anacauchoa, the king of Xaragua.  that he had in a readiness the gossampine cotton and such other things as he willed him to prepare for the payment of his tribute. whereupon the lieutenant took his journey thither, and was honourably received of the king and his sister, sometime the wife of Caunaboa the king of Cibava, 
Queen Anacaona, the wife of king Caunaboa.  bearing no less rule in the governance of her brother's kingdom, than he himself. For they affirm her to be a wise woman, of good manners, and pleasant in company. She earnestly persuaded her brother by th'example of her husband, to love and obey the Christians. This woman was called Anacanoa. He found in the palace of Beuchius Anacauchoa xxxii kings which had browght their tributes with them, 
xxx●i. kings.  and abode his coming. They browght with them also beside their tribute assigned them, further to demerit the favour of hour men, great plenty of victuals: as both kinds of bread, cunnyes, and fishes, already dried because they should not putrefy: Serpents also of that kind which we said to be esteemed among them as most delicate meat, 
Serpents eaten.  and like unto Crocodiles saving in bigness. These serpents they call juannas, which hour men learned somewhat to late to have been engendered in the Island. For unto that day, none of them durst adventure to taste of them by reason of their horrible deformity and loath sumnes. Yet the lieutenant being enticed by the pleasantness of the kings sister, determined to taste of the serpents. But when he felt the flesh thereof to be so delicate to his tongue, he fell too, amain without all fear. The which thing his companions perceiving, were not behind him in greediness: In so much that they had now none other talk then of the sweetness of these serpents: which they affirm to be of more pleasant taste, than either hour phesauntes or partridges. But they lose their taste, except they be prepared after a certain fashion: as do peacocks and phesauntes except they be interlarded before they be roasted. They prepare them therefore after this manner. 
The dressing of serpents to be eaten.  first taking out their bowels even from the throat to the thighs, they wa●●e and rub their bodies very clean both within and without. Then rolling them together on a circle, involved after the manner of a sleeping snake, they thrust them into a pot of no bigger capacity then to hold them only. This done, putting a little water unto them with a portion of the Island pepper, they seeth them with a soft fire of sweet wood, and such as maketh no great smoke. Of the fat of them being thus sod, is made an exceeding pleasant broth or pottage. They say also, that there is no meat to be compared to the eggs of these serpents, 
Serpent's eggs eaten.  which they use to seeth by themselves. They are good to be eaten as soon as they are sod: And may also be reserved many days after. But having said thus much of their entertainment and dainty fare, let us now speak of other matters. When the lieutenant had filled one of the Island houses with the gossampine cotton which he had received for tribute, 
Gossampine cotton.  the kings promised furthermore to give him as much of their bread, as he would demand. He gave them hearty thanks and gently accepted their friendly proffer. In the mean time while this bread was gathering in sundry Regions to be browght to the palace of Beuchius Anacauchoa king of Xaragua, he sent messengers to Isabel for one of the two caravels which were lately made there: intending to send the same thither again laden with bread. The mariners glad of these tidings, sailed about the Island, and in short space browght the ship to the coasts of Xaragua. The sister of king Beuchius Anacauchoa, that wise and pleasant woman Anacaona, 
●ueene Anacaona.  (the wife sometime of Caunaboa the king of the golden house of the mountains of Cibava, whose husband died in the way when he should have been carried into Spain,) when she hard say that hour ship was arrived on the shore of her native country, persuaded the king her brother that they both might go together to see it. For the place where the ship lay, was not passed vi miles distant from Xaragua. They rested all night, in the mid way, in a certain village in the which was the treasury or jewel house of An●caona. 
The treasury of Queen Anacaona.  Her treasure was neither gold, silver, or precious stones, but only things necessary to be used, as cheyars, stools, settels, dishes, potingers, pots, pans, basins, treyes, and such other household stuff and instruments, workmanly made of a certain black and hard shining wood which that excellent learned physician john baptiste Elisius, affirmeth to be hebene. 
hebene wood.  What so ever portion of wit nature hath given to the inhabitants of these Islands, the same doth most appear in these kind of works, in which they show great art and cunning. But those which this woman had, were made in the Island of Guanabba, 
The Island of Guanabba  situate in the mouth of the west side of Hispaniola. In these they grave the lively Images of such fantasies as they suppose they see walk by night which the Antiquity called Lemures. Also the Images of men serpents, 
cunning artificers.  beasts, & what so ever other thing they have once seen. What would you think (most noble Prince) that they could do, if they had the use of Iren and steel? For they only first make these soft in the fire, and afterward make them hollow & carve them with a certain stone which they find in the rivers. 
A stone in the steed of Iren  Of stools and chairs, she gave the lieutenant xiiii And of vessels pertaining to the table and kitchen, she gave him three score, sum of wood and sum of earth. Also of gossampine cotton ready spun four great bottoms of exceeding weight. The day following when they came to the sea side, where was an other village of the kings, the lieutenant commanded the ship boat to be browght to the shore. The king also had prepared two canoas, painted after their manner: one for himself and certain of his gentlemen: an other for his sister Anacaona and her waiting women. But Anacaona desired to be carried in the ship boat with the lieutenant. When they now approached near unto the ship, 
Guns.  certain great pieces of ordinance were discharged of purpose. The sea was filled with thunder, and the air with smoke. They trembled and quaked for fear, supposing that the frame of the world had been in danger of fauling. But when they saw the lieutenant lawgh, and look cheerfully on them, they called again their spirits. 
Musical instruments.  And when they yet drew nearer to the ship, and hard the noise of the flutes, shawms, & drums, they were wonderfully astonied at the sweet harmony thereof. 
Ignorance causeth admiration.  Entering into the ship and beholding the foreship and the stern, the top castle, the mast, the hatches, the cabens, the keel, and the tackelinges, the brother fixinge his eyes on the sister, and the sister on the brother, they were both as it were dumb and amazed, and wist not what to say for to much wondering. While beholding these things they wandered up and down the ship, the lieutenant commanded the anchors to be loosed, and the sails to be hoist up. Then were they further astonished, when they saw so great a mole, to move as it were by itself, without oars and without the force of man. For there arose from the earth such a wind as a man would have wished for of purpose. Yet furthermore, when they perceived the ship to move sometime forward and sometime backward: sometime toward the right hand and sometime toward the left, & that with one wind and in manner at one instant, they were at their wits end for to much admiration. These things finished and the ships being laden with bread and such other rewards, they being also recompensed with other of hour things, he dismissed not only the king Beuchius Anacauchoa, and his sister, but likewise all their servants and women replenished with joy and woonderinge. After this, he himself took his journey by foot with his soldiers to the city of Isabel: where he was advertised that one Roldanus Ximenus, 
Roldanus Xeminus.  a naughty fellow, (whom before being his servant, he had preferred to be captain of the miners and labourers, and after made him a judge in causes of controversy) had used himself owtragiously and was maliciously minded against him, and further, the cause of much mischief in his absence. 
The intemperancy and malice of a servile wit advanced.  For king Guarionexius (who a while before was pardoned of his former rebellion, and persuaded the people to obey the spaniards) was by his naughty usage, and such other as were confethered with him, so accensed to revenge the injuries which they sustained at his hands, bysyde the abominable acts which they following only the law of nature, abhorred to admit, that he with his family, familiars, & dictionaries, of desperate mind fled to the mountains being distant from Isabel only ten leaques Westward, toward the north side of the sea. These mountains, 
Cignaian●.  and also the inhabitants of the same they call by one name Ciguaios. The great king of all the kings and regions of these mountain, is called Maiobanexius: 
Maiobanexius, the great king of the mountains  and his court or palace is named Capronus. The mountains are rough, high, and such as no man can pass to the tops thereof. They are also bending: and have their corners reaching down to the sea. Between both the corners of the mountains, is there a great plain, by the which many rivers fall from the mountains into the sea. The people are very fierce and warlike men, 
The inhabitants of the mountains.  having their original of the Canybales. For when they descend from the mountains to the plains to keep war with their borderers, they eat all such as they kill. Guarionexius therefore, 
Guarionexius rebelleth again.  flying to this king of these mountains, gave him many presents of such things as are wanting in his country: therewith declaring how vilely, villainously, and violently, he had been used of hour men: with whom he could nothing prevail neither by fair means, nor by foul: neither by humility nor by stoutness. And that to be the cause of his resorting to him at that time: most humbly desiring him to be his defence against thoppressions of such mischievous people. Maiobanexius here upon, made him promise to aid and help him against the Christians all that he might. The lieutenant therefore made haste to the fortress of Conception: whither as soon as he was come, he sent for Roldanus Xeminus, 
Roldanus Xeminus rebelleth.  who with such as followed him, lay in certain of the Island villages, twelve miles distant from the fortress. At his coming, the lieutenant asked him what all these stirs and tumults meant. He answered without abashement: your brother the Admiral hath to do therewith, and shall answer for the same before the king. For we perceive that the king hath so put him in trust, that he hath had no regard to us. Here we perish for hunger while we follow you: and are driven to seek hour unhappy food in the deserts. your brother also, assigned me assistant with you in governing the Island. Wherefore sith you have no more respect unto us, we are determined no longer to be under your obedience. When Roldanus had spoken these words & such other, the lieutenant would have laid hands on him: but he escaped his fingers, and fled to the west parts of the Region of Xaragua, having with him a train of threescore and ten men which were of his confetheracie. Here this filthy sink of rebels thus conspired, played their vages and lived with lose bridals in all kinds of mischief robbing the people, spoiling the country, 
Licentiousness in l●berte  and ravishing both wives and virgins. While these things were doing in the Island, the Admiral had eight ships appointed him by the king: Of the which he sent two laden with victuals, from Cales or Gades of Hercules pillars, 
hercules pillars.  directly to the lieutenant his brother. These ships by chance arrived first on that side of the Island where Roldanus Xeminus ranged with his companions. Roldanus in short time had seduced them: promising them in the stead of mattocks, 
A violente persasion.  wenches paps: for labour, pleasure: for hunger, abundance: and for weariness and watching, sleep and quietness. Guarionexius in the mean time, 
The fury of guarionexius  assembling a power of his friends and confetherates, came oftentimes down into the plain, and slew as many of the Christian men, as he could meet conveniently, and also of the Island men which were their friends: wasting their ground, destroying their seeds, and spoiling their villages. But Roldanus and his adherentes, albeit they had knowledge that the Admiral would shortly come, yet feared they nothing because they had seduced the new men which came in the first ships. While the lieutenant was thus tossed in the midst of these storms, in the mean time his brother the admiral set forward from the coasts of Spayre: But not directly to Hispaniola: For he turned more toward the south. In the which viage, 
The third viage of ●olenus the Admiral.  what he did, what coasts both of the land and sea he coompased, and what new regions he discovered, we will first declare. For to what end and conclusion the said tumults and seditions came, we will express in th'end of the book following. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The sixth book of the first decade, to Lodovic Cardinal of Aragonie.  
COlonus the admiral, the third day of the kalends of june, in the year of Christ .1498. hoist up his sails in the haven of the town Barramedabas, not far distant from Cales: and set forward on his viage with eight ships laden with victuals and other necessaries. He diverted from his accustomed race which was by the Islands of Canary, by reason of certain frenchmen pirates and covers on the sea, 
French men pirates.  which lay in the right way to meet with him. In the way from Cales to the Islands of Canary, about four score and ten miles toward the left hand, is the Island of Madera, 
The Island of Madera.  more southward than the city of Civil by four degrees. For the pole arctic is elevate to Civil, xxxvi. degrees: But to this Island (as the mariners say) only xxxii He sailed therefore first to Madera. And sending from thence directly to Hispaniola, the residue of the ships laden with victuals and other necessaries, he himself with one ship with decks, and two merchant caravels coasted toward the south to come to the Equinoctial line, 
The Admiral aileth to the Equinoctial.  and so forth to follow the tract of the same toward the West, to th'intent to search the natures of such places as he could find under or near unto the same, leaving Hispaniola on the north side on his right hand. In the middle of his race, lie xiii. Islands of the Portugals, which were in old time called Hesperides: And are now called Caput Viride, or Caboeurde. 
●ixii. Islands of hesperides, now called Caboverde.  These are situate in the sea, right over against the inner parts of Ethiope, Westward two days sailing. One of these the Portugals call Bonavista. With the snails, or rather tortoises of this Island, many leprous men are healed and cleansed of their leprositie. 
healing of the leper.  Departing suddenly from hence by reason of the contagiousness of the air, he sailed. CCCCLXXX miles toward the West south-west, which is the midst between the west and the south. There was he so vexed with maladies and heat (for it was the month of june) that his ships were almost set on fire. 
Contagious air and extreme heat  The hoops of his barrels cracked and broke, and the fresh water ran out. The men also complained that they were not able to abide that extremity of heat. Here the north pole was elevate only .v. degrees from the horizontal. 
The pole elevate .v. degrees.  For the space of viii days in the which he suffered these extremites, only the first day was fair: but all the other, cloudy and rainy: yet nevertheless fervent hot. Wherefore it oftentimes repent him not a little that ever he took that way. Being tossed in these dangiours and vexations eight continual days, at the length an Eastsoutheaste wind arose, and gave a prosperous blast to his sails. Which wind following directly toward the west, he found the stars over that paralelle, placed in other order, 
The stars placed in other order.  and an other kind of air, as the Admiral himself told me. And they all affirm, that within three days sailing, they found most temperate and pleasant air. The Admiral also affirmeth, that from the clime of the great heat and unwholesome air, he ever ascended by the back of the sea, as it were by a high mountain toward heaven. 
A sea rising like a mountain.  Yet in all this time, could he not once see any land. But at the length, the day before the kalends of july, the watchman looking forth of the toppecastell of the greatest ship, cried out aloud for joy that he espied three exceeding high mountains: exhorting his fellows to be of good cheer, and put away all pensiveness. For they were very heavy and sorrowful, as well for the grief which they sustained by reason of th'intolerable heat, as also that their fresh water failed them, which ran out at the rifts of the barels, caused by extreme heat as we have said. 
heat causeth the barrels to break.  Thus being well comforted, they drew to the land. Yet at their first approach, they could not arrive by reason of the shalownes of the sea near the shore. Yet looking out of their ships, they might well perceive that the Region was inhabited and well cultured. For they saw very fair gardens, and pleasant meadows: from the trees and herbs whereof, when the morning dews began to rise, there proceeded many sweet savours. 
Sweet savours proceeding from the land.  Twenty miles distant from hence, they chanced into a haven, very apt to harborowe ships, but it had no river running into it. Sailing on yet somewhat further, he found at the length a commodious haven wherein he might repair his ships and make provision of fresh water and fuel. Arenalis cauleth this land Puta. 
The Island of Puta.  They found no houses near unto the haven: but innumerable steps of certain wild beasts feet, of the which they found one dead much like a goat. The day following, 
People of lie corporature & long hear near the Equinoctial.  they saw a Canoa coming a far of, having in it xxiiii, young men of godly corporature & high stature, all armed with targets, bows & arrows The hear of their heads, was long & plain, & cut on the forehead much after the manner of the spaniards. Their privy parts were covered with fillettes of gossampyne cotton, of sundry colours interlaced: And were beside all over naked. Here the Admiral considering with himself the corporature of this people and nature of the land, he believed the same to be so much the nearer heaven than other Regions of the same paralelle, 
The higher the colder.  and further removed from the gross vapours of the vales and marishes, how much the highest tops of the bigest mountains are distant from the deep vales. For he earnestly affirmeth, that in all that navigation, he never went out of the parallels of Ethiope: So great difference is there between the nature of thinhabitants and of the soils of divers Regions all under one clime or paralelle▪ as is to see between the people and regions being in the firm land of Ethiope, 
Difference between people of one c●ime. Ethiopia.  and them of the Islands under the same clime, having the pole star elevate in the same degree. For the Ethiopians are all black, having their hear curled more like wulle then hear. But these people of the Island of Put● (being as I have said under the clime of Ethiope) are white, with long hear, and of yellow colour. Wherefore it is app●rente, the cause of this so great difference, 
Note the cause of difference.  to be rather by the disposition of the earth, than constitution of heaven. For we know, that snow falleth on the mountains of the Equinoctial or burnt line, and the same to endure there continually: We know likewise that thinhabitants of the Regions far distant from that line toward the north, are molested with great heat.  
¶ The Admiral that he might allure the young men to him with gentleness, showed them looking glasses, fair & bright vessels of copper, hawks bells, and such other things unknown to them. But the more they were called, so much the more they suspected craft and deceit, and fled backward. Yet did they with great admiration behold hour men and their things, but still having their oars in their hands ready to fly. When the Admiral saw that he could by no means allure them by gifts, he thought to prove what he could do with musical instruments: 
Musical instruments.  and therefore commanded that they which were in the greatest ship, should play on their drums and shawms. But the young men supposing this to be a token of battle, left their oars, and in the twynling of an eye had put their arrows in their bows and their targets on their arms: And thus directing their arrows toward hour men, stood in expectation to know what this noise might mean. Hour men likewise preparing their bows and arrows, approached toward them by little and little. But they departing from the Admiral's ship, and trusting to the dexterity of their oars came so near one of the less ships, that one of them plucked the clock from the governor of that ship, and as well as they could by signs, required him to come aland, promising faith that they would common with him of peace. But when they saw him go to the Admiral's ship whether he went to ask leave that he might common with them, suspecting heareby sum further deceit, they leapt immediately into the Canoa, and fled as swift as the wind. So that to conclude, they could by no means be alured to familiarity.  
Wherefore the Admiral thowght it not convenient to bestow any long time there, at this viage. No great space from this Island, ever toward the west, the Admiral saith he found so owteragious a fall of water, running with such a violence from the east to the West, 
The violent course of the water from the east to the West.  that it was nothing inferior to a mighty stream falling from high mountains. He also confessed, that since the first day that ever he knew what the sea mente, he was never in such fear. proceeding yet somewhat further in this dangerous viage, he found certain gulfs of viii miles, as it had been thentrance of sum great haven, into the which, the said violent streams did fall. These gulfs or straights, he called Os Draconis, 
The gulf called Os Draconis.  that is, the dragon's mouth. And the Island directly over against the same, he named Margarita. Owte of these straights, isshewed no less force of fresh water which encountering with the salt, did strive to pass forth: So that between both the waters, was no smaule conflict. 
A conflict between the french water & the salt.  But entering into the gulf, at the length he found the water thereof very fresh and good to drink. The admiral himself, and they which were his companions in this viage, being men of good credit, and perceiving my diligence in searching for these matters, told me yet of a greater thing. That is, that for the space of xxvi, leaques, amounting to a hundredth and four miles, he sailed ever by fresh water: 
A sea of fresh water.  In so much, that the further he proceeded, especially toward the west, he affirmeth the water to be the fresher. After this, he came to a high mountain, 
marmosets & monkeys.  inhabited only with moonkeys or marmasits on that part toward the East. For that side was rough with rocky and stony mountains: And therefore not inhabited with men. Yet they that went a land to search the country, found near unto the sea, many fair fields well tilled and sown: But no people, nor yet houses or cottages. Perhaps they were gone further in to the country to sow their corn and apply their husbandry, as we often see hour husband men to leave their stations and vyiages for the same purpose. In the west side of that mountain, they espied a large plain, whither they made haste, 
The fair & large region of paria.  and cast anchor in the broad river. As soon as the inhabitants had knowledge that a strange nation was arrived in their coasts, they came flocking without all fear to see hour men. We understood by their signs and poyntynges, that this Region was called Paria: and that it was very large: In so much that the further it reacheth toward the west, to be so much the better inhabited and replenished with people. The Admiral therefore, taking into his ship four of the men of that land, searched the west parts of the same. By the temperateness of the air, the pleasantness of the ground, 
Temperate air and fruitful ground.  and the multitude of people which they saw daily more and more as they sailed, they conjectured that these things portended sum great matter: As in deed their opinion failed them not, as we will further declare in his place. The son not yet risen, but beginning even now to rise, being one day alured by the pleasantness of the place and sweet savours which breathed from the land to the ships, 
Sweet savours proceeding from the land.  they went aland. Here they found a greater multitude of people then in any other place. As hour men approached toward them, there came certain messengers from their Cacici, that is, the kings of the country, to desire the Admiral in the name of their princes to come to their places without fear, 
human people.  and that they and all theirs should be at his commandment. When the Admiral had thanked them and made his excuse for that time, there came innumerable people with their boats to the ships: having for the most part chains about their necks, garlands on their heads, and bracelets on their arms of pearls of India: 
Chains and garlands of gold & pearls  And that so commonly, that hour women in plays and triumphs have not greater plenty of stones of glass and crystal in their garlands, crowns, gerdels, and such other tyrementes. Being asked where they gathered them, they pointed to the next shore by the sea banks. They signified also by certain scornful giestures which they made with their mouths and hands, that they nothing esteemed pearls. 
baskets full of pearls, I know who had bags full.  Taking also baskets in their hands, they made signs that the same might be filled with them in short space. But because the corn wherewith his ships were laden to be carried into Hispaniola, had taken hurt by reason of the salt water, he determined to defer this mart to a more convenient tyme. Yet he sent to land two of the ship boats laden with men, to th'intent to fetch sum garlands of pearls for exchange of our things, and also somewhat to search the nature of the Region and disposition of the people. They entertained our men gently: 
how the Admiral's men were entertained.  and came flocking to them by heaps, as it had been to behold sum strange monsters. first there came to meet hour men, two men of gravity, whom the multitude followed. One of these was well in age, and the other but young. They think it was the father with his son which should succeed him. When the one had saluted and embraced the other, they browght hour men into a certain round house, near unto the which, was a great court. Hither were browght many chairs and stools made of a certain black wood, 
cheyers and st●les of hebene.  and very coonningely wrowght. After that hour men, and their Princes were set, their waiting men came in laden, sum with sundry delicate dishes, and sum with wine. 
Fruits and wine.  But their meat, was only fruits: and those of divers kinds and utterly unknown to us. Their wine was both white and red: not made of grapes, but of the liquor of divers fruits, and very pleasant in drinking. 
wine of the liquor of fruits.  After this banquet made in the owlde man's house, the young man browght them to his tabernacle or mansion place, where was a great company both of men and women, but they stood deceavered the one from the other. They are white, 
white men near the Equinoctial  even as hour men are, saving such as are much conversant in the son. They are also very gentle, and full of humanity toward strangers. They cover their privy parts with gossampine cotton wrowght with sundry colours: and are beside all naked. There was few or none, that had not either a collar, a chain, or a braselette of gold and pearls, and many had all. Being asked where they had that gold, they pointed to certain mountains, 
mountains are the matrices of gold.  seeming with their countenance to dissuade hour men from going thither. For putting their arms in their mouths, and grynninge as although they bit the same, still pointing to the mountains, they seemed to insinuate that men were eaten there: But whether they mente by the Canibales, 
Canibales  or wild beasts hour men cold not well perceive. They took it exceeding grievously, that they could neither understand hour men, nor hour men them. When they which were sent to land, were returned to the ships about three of the clock at after noon the same day, bringing with them certain garlands and collars of pearls, they loosed their anchors to depart, minding to come again shortly, when all things were set in good order in Hispaniola. But he was prevented by an other, which defeated him of the reward of his travail. He was also hindered at this time by reason of the shalownes of the sea & violent course of the water, 
Shalownes of the sea,  which with continual tossing, bruised the greatest ship as often as any great gale of wind arose. To avoid the daungiours of such shallow places, and shelves, he ever sent one of the smaulest caravels before, 
The use of carevelles or brigantines.  to try the way with sounding: and the bigest sh●ppes followed behind. The Regions being in the large province of Paria for the space of . CCXXX. miles, are called of thinhabitants, Cumana,, and Manacapana: 
Cumana and Manacapana regions of the province of Paria. Curiana.  from these regions distant three score leaques, is there an other Region called Curiana. When he had thus passed over this long tract of sea, supposing still that it had been an Island, & doubting that he might pass by the West to the north directly to Hispaniola, he chanced into a river of xxx cubits depth, & of such breadth as hath not lightly been hard of. 
A river of marvelous depth and breadth.  For he affirmeth it to be xxviii leaques. A little further toward the West, yet somewhat more sowthwarde as the bending of the shore required, ●he entered into a sea full of herbs or weeds. 
A ●ea of weeds.  The seed of the herbs which swim on the water, are much like the berries of the tree called Lentiscus, 
Lentiscus.  which beareth the sweet gum called M●stix. 
Mastix.  They grew so thick, that they sometime in manner stayed the ships. The Admiral reported, that here there is not one day thorough out all the year much longer or shorter than an other: And that the north pole is here elevate only five degrees as at Paria, 
The elevation of the pole at Paria.  in whose tract all these coasts lie. He also declared certain things as concerning the variety of the north pole: The which because they seem contrary to thopinions of all the Astronomers, 
Note a secret as concerning the pole star.  I will touch them but with a dry foot as saith the proverb. But it is well known (most noble prince) that the star which we call the pole star, or north star, (called of the Italians Tramontana) is not the very point of the pole arctic upon the which the axes or extremities of heavens are turned about. The which thing may well be proved, if when the stars first appear, 
An experience  you behold the pole star through any narrow hole. For so, applying your instrument thereto in the morning somewhat before the day springe have blemished their light, if then you look through the same hole, you shall perceive it to be moved from the place where you saw it first. But how it cometh to pass, that at the beginning of the evening twilight, it is elevate in that Region only five degrees in the month of june, and in the morning twilight to be elevate xu degrees by the same quaadrante, 
A marvelous secret.  I do not understand. Nor yet do the reasons which he bringeth, in any point satisfy me. For he saith, that he hereby conjectured, that the earth is not perfectly round: But that when it was created, there was a certain heap raised thereon, 
That the earth is not perfectly round.  much higher than the other parts of the same. So that (as he saith) it is not round after the form of an apple or a ball (as other think) but rather like a pear as it hangeth on the tree: And that Paria is the Region which possesseth the supereminente or highest part thereof nearest unto heaven. In so much that he earnestly contendeth, the earthly paradise to be situate in the tops of those three hills, 
paradise is in the mountains of paria.  which we said before, 
Look the nin●h book second decade.  that the watch man saw out of the top castle of the ship: And that the outrageous streams of the french waters which so violently isshewe out of the said gulfs and strive so with the salt water, fall headlong from the tops of the said mountains. But of this matter, it shall suffice to have said thus much. Let us now therefore return to the history from which we have dygressed. When he perceived himself to be thus enwrapped in so great a gulf beyond his expectation, so that he had now no hope to find any passage toward the north whereby he might sail directly to Hispaniola, he was enforced to turn back the same way by the which he came, and directed his voyage to Hispaniola by the north of that land lying toward the east. They which afterward searched this land more curiou●lye, will it to be part of the continente or firm land of India, 
Paria is part of the firm land of india  and not of Cuba as the Admiral supposed. For there are many which affirm that they have sailed round about Cuba. But whether it be so or not, or whether envying the good fortune of this man, they seek occasions of querelinge against him, I can not judge: But time shall speak, which in time appointed, revealeth both truth and falsehood. 
Time revealeth all things  But whether Paria be Continent or not, the Admiral doth not much contend. But he supposeth it to be Continente. He also affirmeth that Paria is more southewarde than Hispaniola, 
Paria more southewarde than hispaniola  by eight hundredth fourscore and two miles. At the length he came to Hispaniola (to see his soldiers which he left with his brethren) the third day of the kalends of September: In the year 1498. But (as often times chanceth in human things,) among his so many prosperous, pleasant, and lucky affairs, fortune mengeled sum seeds of wormewoodde, and corrupted his pure corn with the malicious weeds of coccle.   

¶ The seventh book of the first decade, to the same Lodovic Cardinal. etc.  
WHen the Admiral was now come to the Island of Hispaniola, he found all things confounded and out of order. For Roldanus (of whom we spoke before) refused in his absence to obey his brother, 
The spaniards rebel in the Admiral's absence  trusting to the multitude of such as were confethered with him. And not only behaved himself proudly against the admirals brother and lieutenant sometime his master, but also sent letters to his reproach to the king of Spain, therein accusing both the brehtrens, leying heinous matters to their charges. But the Admiral again, sent messengers to the king, which might inform him of their rebellion: Instantly desiring his grace, to send him a new supply of men, whereby he might suppress their licentiousness and punish them for their mischievous acts. They accused the Admiral and his brother to be unjust men, 
The spaniards accuse the Admiral.  cruel enemies and sheaders of the Spanish blood: declaring that upon every light occasion, they would rack them, hang them, and head them: And that they took pleasure therein. And that they departed from them as from cruel tyrants and wild beasts rejoicing in blood, also the kings enemies. affirming likewise that they well perceived their intent to be none other than to usurp Thempire of the Islands: which thing (they said) they suspected by a thousand conjectures. And especially in that they would permit none to resort to the gold mines, but only such as were their familiars. 
The Admirales answer.  The Admiral on the contrary part, when he desired aid of the king to infringe their insolency, avouched that all those his accusers, which had devised such lies against him, were nowghtye fellows, abominable knaves and villains, thieves and bawds, ruff●ans adulterers and ravishers of women false perjured vagabonds, and such as had been either convict in prisons, or fled for fear of judgement: so escaping punishment, but not leaving vice wherein they still continued and browght the same with them to the Island, living there in like manner as before, in theft, lechery, and all kinds of mischief: And so given to Idleness and sleep, 
Insolence & idleness of liberty.  that whereas they were browght thither for miners, labourers, & scullyans, they would not now go one furlong from their houses except they were borne on men's backs, like unto them which in old time were called Aediles Curules. For, 
These had the cust●●●es of the tēp●ts.  to this office, they put the miserable Island men, whom they handled most cruelly. For least their hands should discontinewe from shedding of blood, and the better to try their strength and manhood, they used now and then for their pastime to strive among themselves and prove who could most cleanly with his sword at one stroke strike of the head of an innocent. 
A cruel and deuel●she pastime.  So that he which could with most agility make the head of one of those poor wretches to fly quite and clean from the body to the ground at one stroke, he was the best man and counted most honourable. These things and many such other, the one of them laid to the others charge before the king. While these things were doing, the Admiral sent his brother the lieutenant with an army of four score and ten footmen, and a few horsemen, (with three thousand of the Island men which were mortal enemies to the ciguavians) to meet the people of Ciguava, with King Guarionexius their grand captain, 
king Guarionerius is captain of vi thousand ciguavians.  who had done much mischief to hour men and such as favoured them. Therefore when the lieutenant had conducted his army to the banks of a certain great river running by the plain which we said before to lie between the corners of the mountains of Ciguava and the sea, he found two scouts of his enemies lurking in certain bushes: whereof the one, casting himself head long into the sea, escaped: and by the mouth of the river swam over to his companions. The other being taken, declared that in the wood on the other side the river, there lay in camp two thousand Cyguavians ready, unwares to assail hour men passing buy. Wherefore the lieutenant finding a shallow place where he might pass over, he with his hole army entered into the river. The which thing when the ciguavians had espied, they came running out of the woods with a terrible cry and most horrible aspect, much like unto the people called Agathyrsi of whom the poet virgile speaketh. 
Pie●i Agathyrsi.  For they were all painted and spotted with sundry colours, and especial with black and red which they make of certain fruits nourished for the same purpose in their gardens, 
Naked men painted with the juice of certain fruits.  with the juice whereof they paint them selves from the forehead, even to the knees: having their hear (which by art they make long and black if nature deny it them wreathed and rolled after a thousand fashions. 
hear made long & black by art.  A man would th●nke them to be devils incarnate newly broke out of hell, they are so like unto hellhounds. As hour men waded over the river, they shot at them and hurled darts so thick, that it almost took the light of the son from hour men. In so much that if they had not borne of the force thereof with their targets, 
The use of targets.  the matter had gone wrong with them. Yet at the length, many being wounded, they pa●●ed over the river, which thing when the enemies saw, they fledge: whom hour men pursuing, slew sum in the chase: 
The Ci●uani an● 〈◊〉 driven to ●l●ght.  but not many, by reason of their swyftenes of foot. Thus being in the woods, they shot at hour men more safely. For they being accustomed to the woods and naked without any let, passed through the bushes and shrubs as it had been wild bores or hearts: whereas hour men were hindered by reason of their apparel, targets, long iavelens, and ignorance of the place. Wherefore, when he had rested there all that night in vain, and the day following saw none steringe in the woods, he went (by the council and conduct of the other Island men which were in his army) immediately from thence, to the mountains in the which king Maiobanexius had his chief mansion place in the village called Capronum, 
king Maiobanexius.  by the which name also, the kings palace was called, being in the same village. Thus marching forward with his army, about twelve mile of, he encamped in the village of an other king, which thinhabitants had forsaken for fear of hour men. Yet making diligent search, they found two, by whom they had knowledge that there was ten kings with Maiobanexius in his palace of Capronum, with an army of eight thousand ciguavians. 
An army of viii. thousand Ciguau●a●●.  At the lieutenants first approach, he durst not give them battle until he had somewhat better searched the Region: Yet did he in the mean time skyrmysshe with them twice. The next night about midnight, he sent forth scouts, and with them guides of the Island men which knew the country. Whom the ciguavians espying from the mountains, prepared themselves to the battle with a terrible cry or alarum after their manner: 
A Larome.  but yet durst not come out of the woods, supposing that the lieutenant with his main army had been even at hand. The day following, when he brought his army to the place where they encamped, leaping out of the woods, 
The ciguavians out to f●yght again  they twice attempted the fortune of war, fiercely assailing hour men with a main force, and wounding many before they could cover them with their targets. Yet hour men put them to flight, slew many, and took many. The residue fled to the woods, where they kept them still as in their most safe hold. Of them which were taken, he sent one, & with him an other of the Island men which was of his part to Maiobanexius with commandment in this effect. The lieutenant brought not hither his army (O Maiobanexius) to keep war either against you or your people: 
The lieutenant his embassage to king Maiobanexius.  For he greatly desireth your friendship. But his intent is, that Guarionexius who hath persuaded you to be his aid against him to the great destruction of your people and undoing of your country, may have dew correction aswell for his disobedience toward him, as also for raising tumults among the people. Wherefore, he requireth you and exhorteth you, to deliver Guarionexius into his hands. 
king Guarionexius.  The which thing if you shall perform, the Admiral his brother will not only gladly admit you to his friendship, but also enlarge & defend your dominion. And if herein you refuse to accomplys●●e his request, it will follow, that you shall shortly repent you thereof. For your kingdom shall be wasted with sword and fire, and you shall abide the fortune of war●e whereof you have had experience with favour, as you shall further know here after to your pain, if with stobernes you provoke him to show the uttermost of his power. When the messenger had thus done his errant, Maiobanexius answered, 
Maiobanexius h●s answer.  that Guarionexius was a good man, endued with many virtues as all men knew: And therefore he thought him worthy his aid: especially in as much as he fled to him for succour, and that he had made him such promise, whom also he had proved to be his faithful friend. 
Natural hatred of vice.  again, that they were naughty men, violent and cruel, desiring other men's gods, and such as spared not to shed innocentes blood: In fine, that he would not have to do with such mischievous men, nor yet enter into friendship with them. When these things came to the lieutenants ear, he commanded the village to be burnt where he himself encamped, with many other villages there about. And when he drew near to the place where M●iobanexius lay, he sent messengers to him again, to common the matter with him, and to will him, to send sum one of his most faithful friends to entreat with him of peace. Where upon the king sent unto him one of his chief gentlemen, and with him two other to wait on him. When he came to the lieutenants presence, 
The Lieuetenaunte● gentleness toward Ma●obanexius  he friendly required him to persuade his lord and master in his name, and earnestly to admonish him, not to suffer his floryshinge kingdom to be spoiled, or himself to abide the hazard of war for Guarionexius sake: And further to exhort him to deliver him, except he would procure the destruction both of himself, his people, and his country. When the messenger was returned, Maiobanexius assembled the people, declaring unto them what was done, but they cried out on him to deliver Guarionexius: And began to curse the day that ever they had received him, 
A rare faithfulness in a barbarous king.  thus to disturb their quietness. Maiobanexius answered them, that Guarionexius was a good man, and had well deserved of him, giving him many princely presents: And had also tawght both his wife and him to sing and dance, which thing he did not little esteem. And was therefore fully resolved in no case to forsake him, or against all humanity to betray his friend which foedde to him for succour: but rather to abide all extremities with him, then to minister occasion of obloquy to slaunderes to report that he had betrayed his geste whom he took into his house with warranties, Thus dismissing the people sighing and with sorrowful hearts, he called Guarionexius before him, promising him again, that he would be partaker of his fortune while life lasted. In so much that he thowght it not best to send any further word to the lieutenant: but appointed him whom before he sent to him, to keep the way with a garrison of men, to th'intent that if any messengers should be sent from the lieutenant, to slay them by the way, and admit none to communication or further entretie of peace. In the mean time, the lieutenant sent two, whereof the one was a captive C●guauian, and the other an Island man of them which were friends to hour men: They were both taken and slain. 
The lieutenants messengers are slain.  The lieutenant followed them only with ten footmen and four horsemen. finding his messengers dead in the way, he was further provoked to wrath, and determined more extremely to deal with Maiobanexius. And therefore went forward incontinently with his hole army to his chief palace of Capronum where he yet lay in camp. At his approach, all the kings fled, 
A● the k●nges are driven to plight.  every man his way, and forsook their captain Maiobanexius: who also with all his family, fled to the rough mountains. Sum of the ciguavians, sowght for Guarionexius to slay him, for that he was the cause of all these troubles. But his feet saved his life. For he fled in time to the mountains where he lurked in manner alone among the desolate rocks.  
Whereas now the lieutenants soldiers were forweryed with long war, with watching, labour, and hunger, (for it was now three moons sense the wars began) many desired leave to depart to the tower of Conception, where they had graneges and exercised tillage. He gave them their pa●seportes with allowance of victuals, and so that only thirty remained with him. These three moons war, they continued very painful and miserably: So th●t during all that time, 
The spaniards are painful in the wars.  they had none other meat but only Cazibi: that is, such roots whereof they make their bread, and that but seldom to their fill: Also Vsias, that is, little beasts like conies, if by chance now and then, they took sum with their hounds. Their drink was none other then water, such as they found, sometime sweet, and sometime muddy saveringe of the marishes. among these delicates, that little sleep that they had, was ever for the most part abroad under the firmament: And that not without watchmen, and in continual removing as the nature of war requireth. 
A desperate adventure with xxx men  With these few therefore, the lieutenant determined to search the mountains, dens, & caves, if he could in any place find the steps of Maiobanexius or Guarionexius. In the mean time certain of his men (whom hunger enforced to go a hunting to prove if they could take any coneys) chanced upon two of Maiobanexius familiars, which were sent to certain villages of his, to make provision of bread. These he enforced to declare where their lord lay hid. And used the same also for guides to bring hour men to the place. Twelve of hour men took this enterprise in hand, painting themselves after the manner of the ciguavians. So that by this stratagem or policy, 
A policy,  they came suddenly upon Maiobanexius, 
king Maiobanexius is taken.  and took him prisoner with his wife, children, and family, and conveyed them to the tower of Conception to the lieutenant. Within a few days after, hunger compelled Guarionexius to come out of the dens: whom, certain of the people fearing the lieutenant, bewrayed to hour hunters. The lieutenant being certified hereof, sent forth a band of foot men, commanding them to lie in ambush until such time as Gu●rionexius went from the plains to the mountains, 
Guarionexius is taken.  and then soodenly to entrap him. They went as they were commanded, took him, and browght him away with them. And by this means were all the Regions near about, pacified and quieted. A certain noble woman of near kindred to Maiobanexius, and wife to an other king whose dominion was yet untouched, followed him in all these adversities. They affirm this woman to be the fairest and most bewetifull that ever nature browght forth in the Island. 
A Beautiful woman.  Whom, when the king her husband who loved her most ardently (as her bewetie deserved) hard say that she was taken prisoner he wandered up and down the deserts like a man out of his wit, not knowing what to do or say. But at the length, he came to the lieutenant, promising most faithfully that he would submit himself and all that he could make, under his power, so that he would restore him his wife. The Lieutenant accepted the condition & restored him his wife, with certain other rulers and gentlemen which he had taken prisoners before: charging them, and binding them with an oath, to be ever ready at his commandment. Shortly after, this king, of his own free motion, came again to the lieutenant, bringing with him five thousand men without weapons, saving only such instruments as they use in tillage of their ground. 
A king sendeth the lieutenant five thousand men to till the ground.  He brought with him also, seeds to sow: wherewith at his own charge, he caused such plenty of their corn and fruits to grow in sundry places of the large vale whereof we spoke before, that shortly after, were seen many fair and fruitful fields that came thereof. And for his gentleness being rewarded of the lieutenant with certain of hour things, he departed joyfully. When the report hereof came to the ciguavians, 
The kings submit themselves to the lieutenant  it moved the minds of the kings to hope of clemency. Where upon they came together to the lieutenant with humble submission and faithful promise ever after to be under his obedience: desiring him to restore unto them their king, with his family. At their request, the kings wife and his household was set at Liberty, but he kept still as a prisoner. These things did the lieutenant in the Island, not yet knowing what his adversaries and accusers had laid to his charge before the king of Spain: who being disquieted with their quarelinges and accusations, and especially for that by reason of their dissension, of so great abundance of gold and other things, there was as yet but little browght into Spain, appointed a new governor which should see a redress in these things: 
A new gouen●our of the island.  And either to punish such as were faulty, or else to send them to him. What was found against the Admiral and his brother, 
An unworthy reward fo● so great pains.  or against his adversaries which accused him, I do not well know. But this I am sure of, that both the brothers are taken, browght, and cast in prison, with their goods confiscate. But as soon as the king understood that they were browght bound to Cales, he sent messengers in post, with commandment that they should be loosed and come freely to his presence: whereby he declared that he took their troubles grievously. It is also said, that the new governor sent letters to the king, written with the admirals hand in strange and unknown sypheringes, to his brother the lieutenant being absent, willing him to be in a readiness with a power of armed men to come and aid him if the governor should proffer him any violence. Whereof the governor having knowledge (as he saith) being also advertised that the lieutenant was gone to his brother before the men which he had prepared were in a readiness, apprehended them both unwares, before the multitude came together. What will follow, time, the most true and prudent judge, will declare. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The eight book of the first Decade, to Cardinal Lodovic.  
THe great rich, and plentiful Ocean sea, heretofore unknown, 
The Ocean sea heretofore unknown.  and now found by Christophorus Colonus the admiral, by th'authority and furtherance of the catholic king, I have presented unto your honour (right noble Prince) like a golden chain unwoork manly wrought. But you shall now receive a precious jewel to be appendent thereto. Therefore among such as were pilots or governors under the admiral, 
Shipmasters under the Admiral.  and had diligently marked the courses and differences of the winds, many had licences granted them of the king to seek further of their own charges, upon condition to pay him faithfully his portion, 
The fift portion dew to the king.  which is the first part. But because among all other, one Petrus Alphonsus called Nignus by his surname) sailed toward the south with more prosperous fortune than any of the other, 
The navigation of Petrus A●phonsus.  I think it best first to speak somewhat of his viage. He therefore, with only one ship, well furnished at his own charges, after that he had his passport with commandment in no case to cast anchor passed fifty leaques distant from any place where the admiral had touched, sailed first to Paria where the admiral found both the men and women so laden with chains, 
Paria.  garlands, and bracelets of pearls, as we have said before. coasting therefore along by the same shore according to the kings commandment, (yet leaving behind him the Regions of Cumana and Manacapana) he came to the Region which thinhabitants thereof, 
Cumana.  
Manacapana▪  call Curiana: 
Curiana.  where he found a haven (as he saith) much like the port of Gades or Cales. In to the which entering, he saw a far of certain houses on the shore, and perceived when he drew near, that it was a village of only eight houses. proceeding yet further for the space of three miles, he espied an other village well replenished with people, where there met him fifty naked men on a company having with them a certain ruler, who desired Alphonsus to come to their coasts. He browght with him at this time, many hawks bells, pins, needles, bracelets, chains, garlands, and rings with counterfeit stones and glasses, and such other tryfelles, 
Pearls for trifles.  the which within the moment of an hour, he had exchanged for xu ounces of their pearls which they wore about their necks and arms. Then they yet more earnestly desired him to sail to their coasts: promising him that he should there have as many pearls as he would desire. 
Great plenty of pearls.  He condecended to their request: And the day following, came to the place where they appointed him: lying there at anchor, a great multitude of people resorted to him, 
human people.  instantly requiring him to come aland. But when he considered the innumerable multitude of people which was there assembled, and that he had only xxxiii men in his company, he durst not commit himself to their hands, but gave them to understand by signs and tokens that they should come to the ship with their canoas. For their boats (which the men of the Island call Canoas') are made only of one hole piece of wood as in the Islands: yet more rude, and not so artificially as theirs are. These they call Gallitas: They swarmed therefore to the ship as fast as they might, bringing with them great plenty of pearls (which they call Tenoras') exchaunginge the same for hour merchandise. He found this people to be of gentle nature, simple and innocent, being conversant with them in their houses, for the space of twenty days. Their houses are made of wood, covered with the leaves of date trees. Their meat for the most part, is the shelfysshes in the which pearls are engendered, 
Shel fish in which pearls are engendered  whereof their sea coasts are full. They have also great plenty of wild beasts, as hearts, wild bores, and coonies like unto hares, both in colour and bigness. 
Beasts and fowls.  Stock doves also, and turtle doves. Likewise geese and ducks which they nourish in their houses as we do. peacocks fly about in manner in every wood and grove: but they are not distinct with sundry colours as ours are: for the cocks are like unto the hens. These people of Curiana, are crafty hunters and exceeding cunning archers, 
hunters and archers.  so that they will not lightly miss any beast or bird that they shoot at. Hour men consumed certain days here very plesauntely. During which time, who so ever brought them a peacock, 
Their manner of bargaining  had for the same, four pins. He that brought a pheasaunt, had two: And for a stock dove or turtle dove, one: And for a goose, a small looking glass or a little stone of glass. Thus they bought and sold with proffering and bidding, denying and refusing as it had been in a great market. When pins were proffered them, 
The use of pins.  they asked what they should do with them, being naked. But hour men satisfied them with a crafty answer, declaring by tokens that they were very necessary to pick their teeth and to pull thorns out of their flesh. But above all things hawks bells were most esteemed among them, 
hawks bells in great estimation.  for their sound & fair colour: And would therefore give much for one of them. Hour men lodging in their houses, hard in the night season horrible noises and rorynges of wild beasts in the woods which are full of exceeding great and high trees of sundry kinds. 
roaring of wild beasts  But the beasts of these woods, are not noisome to men. For the people of the country go daily a hunting, naked, with their bows and arrows: Yet hath it not been hard of, that any man hath been slain of any wild beast. As many hearts or wild bores as hour men would desire them to bring, 
hearts and wyl● bores.  they would kill in the woods with their bows and arrows, and not fail to bring them. They lack kine, goats, & sheep. Their bread is made of roots, as is theirs of the Islands. This nation, hath black hear, gross and somewhat curled, yet long also. They keep their teeth very white: 
Black and curled hear. White teeth.  And for that purpose use to carry a certain herb between their lips for the most part of the day, and to wash their mouths when they cast it away. The women do all their business at home in their houses, and have also the cure of tillage of the ground. But the men apply themselves to the wars and huntynge, to play, 
Earthen Uessels.  singing and dancing. They have sundry kinds of water pots, jugs, and drinking cups made of earth in other places about them and brought thither for exchange of other things: For they use fairs and markets for the same purpose: and are greatly desirous of such things, as are not brought forth or made in their country, as nature hath given a disposition to all men to desire and be delighted with new and strange things. Many of them, had hanging at their pearls, 
cunning a●t●ficers.  the Images of certain beasts and birds very artificiously made of gold, but not pure. These also are brought them from other places for exchange of other things. The gold whereof they are made, 
Base gold.  is native, and of much like fineness to that whereof the florenes are coined. The men of this country, in close their privy members in a gourd, cut after the fashion of a coddepiece: or else, cover the same with the shell of a tortoise, 
A strange m●ner of covering their privities.  tied about their loins with laces of gossampine cotton. In other places of that tract, they thrust the sinew with in the sheethes thereof, and bind the skin fast with a string. The great wild beasts whereof we spoke before, and many other things which are not found in any of the Islands, testify that this region is part of the continent or firm land. 
Tokens of the continent or firm land.  But the chiefest conjecture whereby they argue the same, is, that by the coasts of that land, from Paria toward the west, they sailed about three thousand miles, finding no sign or token of any end. These people of Curiana (which sum call Curtana) being demanded where they had such plenty of gold, signified that it was brought them from a Region called Canchieta or Cauchieta, 
The g●●den Region of Cauchieta.  being distant from them two sons, that is, six days journey westward: And that their Images of gold, were m●de in the same Region. Where upon hour men directed their viage thither immediately: and arrived there at the kalends of November, in ●he year of Christ a thousand and five hundredth. The people of the country resorted to them without fear, bringing with them of the gold which we said to be native in that Region. This people had also collars of pearls about their necks, which were brought them from Curiana for exchange of their merchandise. None of them would exchange any of those things which they had out of other countries: as neither the Curians gold, nor the Canchietans pearls. Yet among the Canchietans, they found but little gold ready gathered. They took with them from thence, certain very fair marmosets or monkeys, & many popinjays of sundry colours. In the month of November, 
Temperate air ●n November.  the air was there most temperate, & nothing could. The gardens of the north pole, were out of sight to both these people, they are so near to the Equinoctial. 
The Equinoctial line.  Of the degrees of the pole, they can give none other account. These people, 
human people.  are well disposed men, of honest conditions, and nothing suspicious. For all most all the night long, they resorted to the ship with their boats, and went aboard ship without fear, as did the Curians. They call pearls, Corixas. They are somewhat ielyous. For, when any strangers come among them, they ever place their women behind them. In this Region of Canchieta, the gossampine trees grow of themselves commonly in many places, 
Gossampine trees.  as do with us elms, willows, and salowes. And therefore they use to make breeches of cotton, 
Chorlyshe people  wherewith they cover their privy parts in many other Regions there about. When they had yet sailed on forward by the same coasts, there came forth against them about two thousand men, armed after their manner, forbidding them to come aland. These people were so rude and salvage, that hour men could by no means allure them to familiarity. Hour men therefore, contented only with their pearls, returned back the same way they came: where they remained with the Curians continually for the space of twenty days, 
Alphonsus returneth to Paria.  and filled their bellies well with good meat. And here it seemeth to me, not far from my purpose, to declare what chanced unto them in their return, when they came now within the sight of the coast of Paria. 
Can●bales in the gulfs of Paria.  They happened therefore in the way, at Os Draconis and the gulfs of Paria, (whereof we spoke before) to meet with a navy of xviii Canoas' of Canibales which went a roving to hunt for men. Who soon as they had espied our men, assailed their ship fiercely and without fear enclosed the same, disturbing hour men on every side with their arrows. But hour men so feared them with their guns, that they fled immediately, whom hour men following with the ship boat, took one of their Canoas', and in it, only one Cannibal (for the other had escaped) and with him, an other man bound: Who, with tears running down his cheeks, and with giesture of his hands, eyes, and head, signified that six of his companions had been cruelly cut in pieces and eaten of that mischievous nation: and that he should have been likewise handled the day following. Wherefore they gave him pour over the Canyball, to do with him what he would. 
Death for death.  Then with the Canibales own club, he laid on him all that he might drive with hand and foot, grinning and fretting as it had been a wild bore: Thinking that he had not yet sufficiently revenged the death of his companions, when he had beaten out his brains and guts. When he was demanded after what sort the Canibales were wont to invade other countries, 
how the canibales fortify their camp  he answered that they ever used to carry with them in their Canoas', a great multitude of clubs: The which, where so ever they land, they pitch in the ground, and encamp themselves within the coompasse of the same, to lie the more safely in the night season. In Curiana, they found the head of a captain of the Canibales, nailed over the door of a certain governor, for a token of victory, as it had been the standard or helmette taken from the enemy in battle. In these coasts of Paria, is a Region called Haraia, 
Haraia.  in the which, great plenty of salt is gathered after a strange sort. For the sea being there tossed with the power of the winds, driveth the salt waters into a large plain by the sea side: 
Salt engendered of the water of the sea.  where: afterward when the sea waxeth caulme, and the son beginneth to shine, the water is congealed into most pure and white salt, wherewith innumerable ships might be laden, if men do resort thither for the same before there faule any rain. For the rain meltethe it, and causeth it to sink into the sand, and so by the pores of the earth, to return to the place from whence it was driven. Other say, that the plain is not filled from the sea, but of certain springs whose water is more sharp and salt than the 
Springs of of salt water.  water of the sea. Thinhabitantes do greatly esteem this bay of salt. Which they use, not only for their own commodity, but also working the same into a square form like unto bricks, they sell it to strangers for exchange of other things which they lack. In this Region, they stretch and dry the dead bodies of their kings and noble men, 
The bodies of princes dried & reserved  laying the same upon a certain frame of wood much like unto a hurdle or grediren, with a gentle fire under the same, thus by little and little consuming the flesh and keeping the skin hole with the bones enclosed therein. These dried carcases, they have in great reverence, and honour them for their household and familiar gods. They say that in this place they saw a man, and in an other place a woman, thus dried and reserved. When they departed from Curiana, the viii day of the Ideses of February to return to Spain, they had three score and xvi pounds weight (after viii ounces to the pound) of pearls, which they bought for exchange of hour things, amounting to the value of five shillings. 
Threescore & xvi. pounds weight of pearls for .v. shillings.  Departing therefore, they consumed three score days in their journey (although it were shorter than from Hispaniola) by reason of the continual course of the sea into the west, 
The course of the sea toward the west.  which did not only greatly stay the ship, but also sometimes drive it back. But at the length they came home so laden with pearls, that they were with every mariner, in manner as common as chaff. But the master of the ship, Petrus Alphonsus, 
pearls as common as chaff petrus Alphonsus in prison.  being accused of his companions that he had stowlen a great multitude of precious pearls, and defrauded the king of his portion which was the five part, was taken of Fernando de Vega, a man of great learning and experience and governor o● Gallecia, where they arrived, and was there kept in prison a long tyme. But he still denieth that ever he detained any part of the pearls. Many of these pearls were as big as hazel nuts, 
Orient pearls as big as hazel nuts.  and orient, (as we call it) that is, like unto them of the east parts. Yet not of so great price, by reason that the holes thereof are not so perfect. When I myself was present with the right honourable duke of Methyna, and was bidden to dinner with him, in the city of Civil, they browght to him above a hundre●h and twenty ounces of pearls to be sold: which surely did greatly delight me with their fairness and brightness. Sum say, that Alphonsus had not these pearls in Curiana being distant from Os Draconis more than a hundredth and twenty leaques, 
Curiana  
Os Draconis.  but that he had them in the Regions of Cumana and Manacapana, 
Cumana.  
Manacapana.  near unto Os Draconis and the Island of Margarita. 
The Island of Margarita.  For they deny that there is any pearls found in Curiana. But sith the matter is yet in controversy, we will pass to other matters. Thus much you have whereby you may conjecture what commodity in time to come may be looked for from these new lands of the west Ocean, whereas at the first discovering, they show such tokens of great riches. Thus far ye well.   

¶ The ix book of the first Decade to cardinal Lodovic.  
VIncentiagnes Pinzonus, and also Aries Pinzonus, 
The navigation of vincentius and Aries Pinzonus.  his nephew, by his brother's side, which accompanied the Admiral Colonus in his first viage, and were by him appointed to be masters of two of the smaule ships which the Spaniards call Caravelas, being moved by the great riches and amplytude of the new lands, furnished of their own charges, four caravels in the haven of their own country which the spaniards call Palos, bortheringe on the west Ocean. Having therefore the kings licence and passport to depart, 
Licence and passport.  they loosed from the haven, about the kalends of December, in the year 1499. This haven of Palos is three score and twelve miles distant from Gades, commonly called Cales: and three score and four miles from Civil. 
Cales. Civil.  All thinhabitants of this town, not one excepted, are greatly given to searching of the sea, and continually exercised in sailing. They also directed their viage first to the Islands of Canary by the Islands of Hesperides, 
The Islands of Canary  now called Caboverde, 
Caboverde.  which sum call Gorgodes Meducias. Sailing therefore directly toward the south from that Island of the Hesperides which the Portugals (being possessers of the same) call Sancti jacobi, and departing from thence at the Ideses of january, they followed the south-west wind, 
s. james Island.  being in the midst between the south and the west. When they supposed that they had sailed about three hundreth leaques by the same wind, they say that they lost the sight of the north star: 
The North pole out of sight.  and were shortly after, tossed with exceeding tempests both of wind and sea, and vexed with intolerable heat. Yet sailed they on further (not without great danger) for the space of two hundreth and forty leaques, following yet the same wind by the lost pole. Wherefore, whether habitable Regions be under the Equinoctial line or not, 
habitable Regions under the Equinoctial line.  let these men and the owlde writers, aswell Philosophers as poets and cosmographers discuss. For these men, affirm it to be habitable, and marvellously replenished with people: and they, that it is unhabitable by reason of the soon beams depending perpendicularly or directly over the same. Yet were there many of the old writers, which attempted to prove it habitable. These mariners being demanded, if they saw the south pole, they answered that they knew no star there like unto this pole, that might be discerned about the point. But that they saw an other order of stars, and a certain thick mist rising from the horizontal line, 
another order of stars A thick mist  which greatly hindered their sight. They contend also, that there is a great heap or rising in the midst of the earth, 
A rising in the midst of the earth.  which taketh away the sight of the south pole, until they have utterly passed over the same. But they verily believe that they saw other images of stars, much differing from the situation of the stars of hour hemisphery or half circle of heaven. How so ever the matter be, as they inform us, we certify you. At the length, the seventh day of the kalends of Februarye, they espied land a far of. And seeing the water of the sea to be troublous, sounding with their plummet, they found it to be xvi fathames deep. going a land, and tarienge there for the space of two days, they departed because they saw no people steringe, although they found certain steps of men by the sea side. Thus graving on the trees and the stones near unto the shore, the kings name and theirs, and the time of their coming thither, they departed. Not far from this station, following the fierce on the land by night, they found a nation lying under the open firmament after the manner of war. Hour men thought it not best to trouble them until the morning. Therefore, at the rising of the son, forty of hour men well armed, went toward them: against whom came forth xxxii of them, with bows, slings and darts, even ready to the fight. The other coompanye followed them, armed after the same manner. our men affirm that they were of higher stature then either the Almains or Pannonians. 
People of high stature.  They beheld hour men with frowning and threatening countenance. But hour men thought it not good to fall to bickering with them, uncertain whether it were for fear, or because they would not drive them to flight. Wherefore they went about to allure them by fair means & rewards. But they refused all kind of gentleness, & stood ever in a readiness to fight, declaring the same by signs and tokens. Thus our men resorted to their ships, and they to the place from whence they came, without any further business. The same night about midnight, they fled, and left the place void where they lay in camp. Hour men suppose them to be a vagabond and wandering nation like unto the Scythians, 
A vagabond kind of men  without houses or certain dwelling places, living only with the fruits of the earth, having their wives and children following them. Such as measured their footsteps in the sand, affirm with great oaths, that one of their feet is almost as long as two feet of hour men of the mean sort. Sailing on yet further, 
Giants.  they found an other river, but not of depth sufficient to bear the caravels. They sent therefore the four ship boats to land, full of armed men to search the country. They espied upon a high hill near unto the sea side, a great multitude of people, to whom hour company sent forth one man with certain of hour things to allure them to exchange. And when he had cast a hawks bell toward them, they cast down a wedge of gold a cubit long. The which as he stooped to take up, they soodenly enclosed him, and carried him away. But he was shortly after rescued by his companions, to sum of their pains: for they slew eight of hour men, and wounded many a far of, with their arrows, and darts made of wood hardened at the ends with fire. After this, they encoompased hour ship boats within the river, and came rashly within the reach of hour men, 
Desperate boldness.  laying hold on the boats sides, where they were thrust through and hewn in pieces as it had been sheep, by reason they were naked. Yet would they not for all this, give over: but took from hour men one of their boats, having no men in it. For the governor thereof being slain with an arrow, the other fled and escaped. And thus they left this fierce and warlike people, sailing toward the northwest along by the same coasts, with sorrowful hearts for the death of their companions. When they had sailed about xl leaques, they chanced into a sea of such fresh water, 
A sea of fresh water.  that they filled their barrels and hogs heads therewith. Searching the cause hereof, they understood that a vehement course of rivers descended with great violence from the tops of certain great hills. They say also that there lieth within the sea, many fortunate and fruitful Islands, 
Many fruitful Islands.  and well inhabited: And that thinhabitants of this tract are men of meek nature and such as do not refuse strangers: 
human people.  Yet little profitable to them, because they had no marchandyes for their purpose, as gold or precious stones. For lack whereof, they brought from thence thirty captives to sell for slaves. Thinhabitantes call this Region Mariatambal. 
Mariatamball.  The Region of the east part of that river, is called Camomorus: 
Camomorus.  And that of the west part, Paricora: 
Paricora.  in the midland whereof, thinhabitants signified that there is great plenty of gold. For, following this river directly toward the north (as the bending of the shore required) they recovered again the sight of the north pole. All the coast of this tract, pertaineth to Paria, 
Regions of Paria.  the which (as we said before) was first found by Colonus himself, 
Gold and pearls.  and hath in manner in every place, great abundance of pearls. They say that these coasts are adjoining unto, and all one with Os Draconis, 
Os Draconis.  and also borthering upon the Regions of Cumana, 
Cumana.  Manacapana, 
Manacapana.  Curiana, 
Curiana  Cauchieta, and Cuchibachoa. Wherefore they thought it to be part of the firm land of India beyonge the river of Ganges. For the great and large coompa●se thereof, doth not permit that it should be an Island. Albeit, the hole earth uncovered with water, largely taken, may be called an Island. 
The hole earth largely tak●●▪ may be called an Island.  From the point of that land where they lost the sight of the north pole, sailing by a continual track about three hundredth leaques toward the west side of Paria, they say that almost in the mid way, they chanced into a river called Maragnonum, 
Maragnonus a river of excead●nge breadth and full of islands look decade ●i. liber. ix.  which they affirm to be of such exceeding breadth, that it might seem incredible, if the antiquity did not make mention of the like. Being demanded of me if it were not salt water where it divided the land, they answered, that the water thereof was very fresh and sweet: And that the further it ran, to be so much the fresher: Also full of Islands & homsome fish. They bore avouch the breadth thereof, to be more than thirty leagues. Yet if we well weigh and consider the largeness and wideness of Boriostomea and Spiriosiomea, the mouths of the famous river of Ister (now called Danubius) & how far they violate or corrupt the salt water with their freshness, 
Boriostomea, and Spirios●omea▪ mouths of the river of Danubius,  we shall cease to marvel, although this other river be greater. For, who can diminish the power of nature, but that it may make this bigger than the other, and an other bigger than this. And I suppose this to be the river whereof Colonus the Admiral made mention in the description of his viage in these coasts. But we shall hereafter have further knowledge hereof. Let us now therefore return to the commodities of these Regions. They found in many Islands about Paria, 
The commodities of the Regions and Islands about Paria. Brasile.  great woods of brasile trees: And brought away with them, three thousand pounds weight thereof. They say that the brasile of Hispaniola, is much better than this, to die cloth with a more fair and durable colour. From hence, following the wind (which the spaniards call Norduest, and the Italians Graeco) they passed by many Islands very fruitful, yet left desolate and wasted by reason of the cruelty of the Canibales. 
Mani fruitful Islands left desolate.  For they went aland in many places, and found the ruins of many destroyed houses. Yet in sum places, they found men, but those exceeding fearful, flying to the mountains, rocks, and woods at the sight of every stranger or ship, and wandering without houses or certain abiding places, for fear of the Cannibals laying wait and hunting after them. 
Canibales.  Here they found those great trees which of themselves in divers places bring forth the fruit or spice which the Apothecaries call Cassia fistula: 
Trees of Cassia fistula.  And that of no less goodness then that which the physicians minister to such as be diseased with the ague. Bu● it was not ripe at their being there. They affirm that there are trees of such bigness, 
Trees of marvelous bigness.  that xvi men joining hands together and standing in coompasse, can scarcely embrace sum of them. among these trees is found that monstrous beast with a snout like a fox, a tail like a marmasette, 
A monstrous beast.  ears like a bat, hands like a man, and feet like an ape, bearing her whelps about with her in an outward belly much like unto a great bag or purse. The dead carcase of this beast, you saw with me, and turned it over and over with your own hands, marvelling at that new belly and wonderful provision of nature. They say it is known by experience, that she never letteth her whelps go owte of that purse, exexcept it be either to play, or to suck, until such time that they be able to get their living by themselves. They took this beast with her whelps: But the whelps died shortly after in the ships. Yet the dam lived certain moons: But at the length, not being able to abide so great alteration of air, and change of meat, 
Alteration of air & change of meat  she died also in the way. But of this beast, we have said enough. Let us now therefore return to the authors of these things. These two Pinzoni, the uncle and the nephew, sustained many great troubles and horrible tempests and perils in this navigation. For when they had now sailed by the coasts of Paria about vi hundredth leaques, and (as they supposed) beyond the city of Cathay and the coasts of east India beyond the river of Ganges, 
Cathay in India beyond the river of Ganges  there rose soodenly so fierce a tempest in the month of july, that, of the four caravels which they had with them, two were drowned even before their eyes: 
A shipwreck by tempest.  and the third dying at anchor, with like soodennes carried out of their sight through the violence of the tempest: The fourth also lying at anchor, was so shaken and bruised, that all the seams thereof were almost loosed. Yet came they to land out of this last ship, but utterly despairing of the ship. Wherefore consulting with themselves what was best to be done in so extreme a case, and how to provide them a safe dwelling place in those Regions being out of all hope how to depart from thence, 
Extreme remedy in a desperate case  they determined to slay all the inhabitants of the country near about them, least they with the other should conspire together to kill them, but their fortune was better. For the caravel which the tempest had carried a way, was come to them again. This had in it xviii men: And the other that remained, was saved and repaired. With these two therefore, they took their viage directly to Spain And thus being tossed with tempests and vexed with adversities, they returned to their native country of Palos, to their wives and children, the day before the kalends of October, with the loss of many of their dear friends and neighbours. they browght with them Cinamome and gynger: 
Cinamome and ginger  but not very good, because they were not there fully seasoned with the heat of the soon before they brought them from thence. They browght also, certain precious stones, which Baptista Elysius'. that excellent philosopher and your lordships physician, affirmeth to be true Topases. 
Topases.  After these men's return, other of their neighbours being moved thereto by a certain emulation, to prove if their fortune would be any better, like men of good courage, 
Men of noble courage.  being nothing discomforted by the hard fortune of their neighbours, knowing that it often times chanceth that that which is one man's undoing is an other man's making, attempted a new viage toward the sooth by the coasts of Paria, 
Another viage  following the steps of Colonus the Admiral, who had first discovered the same. They also browght with them great plenty of Cassia fistula: And found that precious medicine called of the spaniards, Animae album, 
Animae album.  whose perfume is of most excellent effect to heal the rheums, murres, and heaviness of the head. As touching this viage, as yet I know no other news that I thought worthy to certify you of. Wherefore, I will now make an end of this book, because you put me so often in remembrance of your departure. Yet to accomplish the Decade, I will declare sumwhae of the superstitions of Hispaniola. 
The superstitions of hispaniola.  Yowe shall now therefore understand the illusions wherewith the people of the Island have been seduced after the errors of the owlde gentility, 
The errors of the owlde gentility.  and wandered in the ignorance and blindness of human nature corrupted by the disobedience of our first parents, which hath remained in all nations upon the face of the earth, except where it hath pleased god by the light of his spirit by his word, to pour upon his elect the grace of renovation, 
The grace of renovation.  by the light whereof the natural darkness receiveth sum clearness as in a glass, until imperfection shallbe abolished. Hour men therefore, were long in the Island of Hispaniola, before they knew that the people thereof honorede any other thing than the lights of heaven, or had any other Religion. But when they had been now long conversant with them, and by understanding their language, drew to a further familiarity, they had knowledge that they used divers rites and superstitions. I have therefore gathered these few things following, out of a book written by one Ramonus an hermit, 
Ramonus an hermit.  whom Colonus had left with certain kings of the Island to instruct them in the Christian faith. And because in manner their hole religion is none other thing than Idolatry, I will begin at their Idols. 
Idolatry and Idols.  It is therefore apparent by the Images which they honour openly and commonly, that there appear unto them in the night seasons certain fantasies and illusions of evil spirits, 
Illu●ions of evil spirits.  seducing them into many fond and foolish errors. For they make certain Images of gossampine cotton folded or wreathed after their manner, 
Images of gossampine cotton.  and hard stopped within. These Images they make sitting, much like unto the pictures of spirits and devils which our painters are accustomed to pa●nt upon walls. But forasmuch as I myself sent you four of these Images, you may better presently signify unto the king yowre uncle, what manner of things they are, & how like unto painted devils, than I can express the same by writing. These Images, thinhabitants call Zemes: 
zemes.  whereof the least, made to the likeness of young devils, 
young devils.  they bind to their foreheads when they go to the wars against their enemies: And for that purpose have they those strings hanging at them which you see. Of these, they believe to obtain rain if rain be lacking, and likewise fair wether. For they think that these Zemes are the mediators and messengers of the great god, 
Mediators.  whom they acknowleage to be only one, eternal, 
Only one god eternal.  without end, omnipotent and invisible. Thus every king hath his particular Zemes which he honoureth. 
The names of god.  They call the eternal god, by these two names, jocauna, and Guamaonocon, as their predecessors tawght them. affirming that he hath a father called by these five names: 
The father of god.  that is, Artab●ra, Mamona, Cuacarapita, Liella, Guimazoa. Now shall you hear what they fable on the earth as touching the original of man. 
The original of man kind  There is in the Island a Region called Caunana, where they feign that mankind came first out of two caves of a mountain: and that the bigest sort of men, came forth of the mouth of the bigest cave, and the least sort out of the least cave. The rock in the which these caves are, they call Cau●a. The greatest den, they name Cazibaxagua, and the less Amaiauna. 
Fables much like ovid his transformations.  They say, that before it was lawful for men to come forth of the cave, the mouth of the cave was kept and watched nightly by a man whose name was Machochael. This Machochael, departing somewhat far from the cave to th'intent to see what things were abroad, was soodenly taken of the son (whose sight he was forbidden) and was turned into a stone. They feign the like of divers other, that whereas they went forth in the night season a fishing, so far from the cave that they could not return before the rising of the soon (the which it was not lawful for them to behold) they were transformed into myrobalane trees, 
The original of Mirobalane trees.  which of themselves grow plentifully in the Island. They say furthermore, that a certain ruler called Vagoniona, sent one forth of the cave to go a fishing, who by like chance was turned into a nightinggale because the son was risen before he came again to the cave: 
The nightingale.  And that yearly about the same time that he was turned into a bird, he doth in the night with a mourning song bewail his misfortune, and call for the help of his master Vagoniona. And this they think to be the cause why that bird singeth in the night season. But Vagoniona, being sore troubled in his mind for the loss of his familiar friend whom he loved so entirely, leaving the men in the cave, brought forth only the women with their sucking children, leaving the women in one of the Islands of that tract, called Mathinino, 
The Island of Mathinino.  and carried the children away with him: which poor wretches oppressed with famine, fainted and remained on the bank of a certain river where they were turned into frogs, 
Children turned into frogs.  and cried toa, toa, that is, mama, mama, as children are wont to cry for the mother's pap. And hereof they say it cometh that frogs use to cry so pytifully in the spring time of the year: And that men were scattered abroad in the caves of Hispaniola without the company of women. They say also, that whereas Vagoniona himself, was accustomed to wander in divers places, and yet by a special grace, 
A special grace.  never transformed, descended to a certain fair woman whom he saw in the bottom of the sea, and received of her certain pibple stones of marble (which they call Cibas) and also certain yellow and bright plates of laton, which they call Cuaninos. These things to this day are had in great estimation among the kings, as goodly jewels and most holy relics. 
holy relics  These men which we said before were left in the caves without women, went forth in the night (as they say) to wash themselves in a pond of rain water and saw a far of by the way a great multitude of certain beasts in shape somewhat like unto women, creeping as thick as ants about the myrobalane trees: And that as they attempted to take these beasts, 
women are slippery cattle.  they slipped out of their hands as they had been yeles. Where upon they consulted, and determined bythaduice of the elders, 
All wisdom goeth not by age.  that all such should be sowght forth among them, as were scabbyd and leprous, to th'intent that with their rough and hard hands, they might theselyer take hold of them. These men, they call Caracaracoles': And sent them forth a hunting to take these beasts. But of many which they took, they could keep but only four: The which as they would have used for women, they found that they lacked woman's privities. Wherefore caulinge thelders'elders again to counsel, to consult what were best to be done in this case, 
here needeth sum tropological interpreter.  their advice was that the bird which we call the Pie, should be admitted with his bill to open a place for that purpose, while in the mean time these men called Caracaracoles', should hold fast the women's thighs abroad with their rough hands. Full wisely therefore was the pie put to this office, and opened the women's privities, and hereof the women of the Island have their original and offspring. But now do I cease to marvel that the old Greeks did fable and write so many books of the people called Myrmidones, 
Myrmidones  which they feigned to be engendered of ants or pissemeres. These and such like, the sagest and wisest of the people, 
Preachers for the devil.  preach continually to the simple sort, and rehearse the same as most holy oracles. But it is yet more childish that they fable as touching th'original of the sea. For they say that there was once in the Island, a man of great power, whose name was jaia: whose only son being dead, he buried him within a great gourd. 
A vengeable great gourd.  This jaia, grievously taking the death of his son, after a few moonthes, came again to the gourd: The which when he had opened, there isshewed forth many great whales and other monsters of the sea: 
The original of the sea.  where upon he declared to such as dwelled about him, that the sea was enclosed in that gourd. By which report, four brethren (borne of one woman who died in her travail) being moved, came to the gourd in hope to have many fishes. The which when they had taken in their hands, and espied jaia coming, (who oftentimes resorted to the gourd to viset the bones of his son, fearing lest he should suspect them of theft and sacrilege, suddenly let the gourd faule owte of their hands: which being broken in the faule the sea forthwith broke out at the rifts thereof, and so filled the vales, & overflowed the plains, that only the mountains were uncovered, which now contain the Islands which are seen in those coasts. 
The original of Islands.  And this is the opinion of their wise men as concerning th'original of the sea. But now (most noble prince) you shall hear a more pleasant fable. There is a certain cave called jovanaboina, in the territory of a certain king whose name is Machinnech. This cave they honour more religiously than did the Greeks in time paste, Corinth, Cyrrha, or Nysa: 
A holy cave.  And have adorned it with pictures of a thousand fashions. In thentrance of this cave they have two graven Zemes, whereof the one is called Binthaitel, and the other Marohu. 
Images.  Being demanded why they had this cave in so great reverence, they answered earnestly, because the Son and the Moon came first out of the same to give light to the world. 
The original of the soon and moon.  They have religious concourse to these caves, as we are accustomed to go on pilgrimage to Rome or Uaticane, 
pilgrimage.  Compostele, or Jerusalem, and most holy and head places of hour Religion. They are also subject to an other kind of superstition. 
walking spirits.  For they think that dead folks walk in the night, and eat of the fruit called Guannaba, unknown unto us, and somewhat like unto a quynse. Affirming also that they are conversant with living people, 
Incubi.  even in their beds, and to deceive women in taking upon them the shape of men, showing themselves as although they would have to do with them: But when the matter cometh to actual deed, soodenly to vanish away. 
A remedy against walking spirits.  If any do suspect that a dead body lieth by him when he feeleth any strange thing in the bed, they say he shallbe out of doubt by feeling of the belly thereof: affirming that the spirits of dead men may take upon them all the members of man's body, saving only the navel. If therefore by lack of the navel he do perceive that a dead body lieth by him, the feeling is immediately resolved. They believe verily, that in the night, and often times in their journeys, and especially in common and high ways, dead men do meet with the living. against whom, if any man be stout and out of fear, the fantasy vanisheth incontinently. 
Fantasies proceeding of fear.  But if any fear, the fantasy or vision doth so assault him and strike him with further fear, that many are thereby astonysshed and have the limbs of their bodies taken. Thinhabytantes being demanded of whom they had those vain superstitions, 
All is not good that is old  they answered that they were left them of their forefathers as by descent of inheritance: And that they have had the same (before the memory of man) composed in certain rhymes and songs, which it was lawful for none to learn but only the kings sons, who committed the same to memory, 
singing & playing  because they had never any knowledge of letters. These they sing before the people on certain solemn and festival days, as most religious ceremonies: while in the mean time they play on a certain instrument made of one hole piece of wood somewhat hollow like a timbrel. Their priests and divines (whom they call Boitios) instruct them in these superstitions. 
priests and divines.  These priests, are also physicians, 
Physicians.  devising a thousand crafts and subtylties how to deceive the simple people which have them in great reverence. For they persuade them that the Zemes use to speak with them familierlye, 
Ignorance is nourished with superstition.  and tell them of things to come. And if any have been sick & are recovered, they make them believe that they obtained their health of the Zemes. These Boitii, bind themselves to much fasting and owtewarde cleanliness and pourgeinges: 
Fasting and outward cleanliness.  Especially when they take upon them the cure of any Prince. For than they drink the powder of a certain herb, by whose quality they are driven into a fury: At which time (as they say) they learn many things by revelation of the Zemes. 
A powder of marvelous effect.  Then, putting secretly in their mouths, either a stone, or a bone, or a piece of flesh, they come to the sick person, commanding all to depart out of that place, 
juggeling.  except one or two, whom it shall please the sick man to appoint. This done, they go about him three or four times, greatly deforming their faces, lips, and nostrils with sundry filthy giestures: 
A strange ma●er of curing  blowing, breathing, and sucking the forehead, temples, and neck of the patient, whereby (they say) they draw the evil air from him, and suck the disease out of his veins. Then rubbing him about the shoulders, thighs, and legs, and drawing down their hands close by his feet, holding them yet fast together, they run to the door being open, where they unclose and shake their hands, affirming that they have driven away the disease, and that the patient shall shortly be perfectly restored to health. After this, coming behind him, he conveygheth the piece of flesh out of his own mouth like a iuggeler, and showeth it to the sick man, saying, behold what you have eaten to much: you shall now be hole, because I have taken this from you. But if he intend yet further to deceive the patient, he persuadeth him that his Zemes is angry, 
Angry gods  either because he hath not builded him a chapel, or not honoured him religiously, or not dedicated unto him a grove or garden. And if it so chance that the sick person die, his kinsfolks by witchcraft enforce the dead to confess whether he died by natural destiny, 
They make the dead to speak.  or by the negligence of the Boitius, in that he had not fasted as he should have done, or not ministered a convenient medicine for the disease. So that if this physician be found faulty, they take revenge of him. Of the stones or bones which these Boitii carry in their mouths, if the women can come by them, they keep them religiously believing them to be greatly effectual to help women which travail with child: And therefore honour them as they do their Zemes. For divers of thinhabitants, honour Zemes of divers fashions. Sume make them of wood, 
divers Idols of sundry shape.  as they were admonished by certain visions appearing unto them in the woods. Other, which have received answer of them among the rocks, make them of stone and marble. Sum they make of roots to the similitude of such as appear to them when they are gathering the roots called Ages, whereof they make their bread, as we have said before. These Zemes, they believe to send plenty and fruitfulness of those roots, as the antiquity believed such fairies or spirits as they called Dryads, Hamadryades, Satyros, Panes, and Nereids, 
Fairies or spirits of the gentiles.  to have the cure and providence of the sea, woods, springs and fountains, assigning to every thing, their peculiar gods. 
Peculiar gods.  Even so do thinhabitants of this Island attribute a Zemes to every thing, supposing the same to give ear to their invocations. Wherefore, as often as the kings ask counsel of their Zemes as concerning their wars, 
They ask counsel of Idols  increase of fruits or scarceness, or health and sickness, they enter into the house dedicate to their Zemes, where, snuffing up into their nosethryls the powder of the herb called Cohobba (wherewith the Boitii are driven into a fury) they say that immediately they see the houses turn topsy turnye, 
The ●ouder of the herb Cohobba.  and men to walk with their heels upward: of such force is this powder utterly to take away all sense. As soon as this madness ceaseth, he embraceth his knees with his arms, holding down his head. And when he hath remained thus a while astonysshed, he lifteth up his head as one that came new out of sleep: And thus looking up toward heaven, first he fumbeleth certain confounded words with himself. Then certain of the nobility or chief gentlemen that are about him (for none of the common people are admitted to these mysteries) with loud voices give tokens of rejoicing that he is returned to them from the speech of the Zemes, 
Secreate mysteries.  demanding of him what he hath seen. Then he opening his mouth, doteth that the Zemes spoke to him during the time of his trance: declaring that he had revelations either concerning victory or destruction: 
Revelations.  famine or plenty: health or sickness, or what so ever happeneth first on his tongue. Now (most noble Prince) what need you hereafter to marvel of the spirit of Apollo so shaking his Sibylles with extreme fury? 
The spirit of Apollo.  
The Sibyl's  Yowe had thowght that the superstitious antiquity had perished. But now whereas I have declared thus much of the Zemes in general, I thowght it not good to let pass what is said of them in particular. They say therefore, that a certain king called Guamaretus, 
I have hard the like of other in England.  had a Zemes whose name was Corochotum: who (they say) was often times wont to descend from the highest place of the house where Guamaretus kept him fast bound. They affirm, that the cause of this his breaking of his bands and departure, was either to hide himself, or to go seek for meat, 
hungry and ●echerous Gods.  or else for the act of generation: And that sometimes being offended, that the king Guamaretus had been negligent and slack in honouring him, he was wont to lie hid for certain days. They say also that in the kings village there are sometime children borne having two crowns which they suppose to be the children of Corochotum the Zemes. 
Children with two crowns  They feign likewise, that Guamaretus being overcome of his enemies in the battle, and his village with the palace consumed with fire, Corochotus broke his bands and was afterward found a furlong of, safe and without hurt. He hath also an other Zemes called Epileguanita, made of wood, in shape like a four footed beast: who also is said, 
wandering Images.  often times to have gone from the place where he is honoured, in to the woods. As soon as they perceive him to be gone, a great multitude of them gather together to seek him with devout prayers: And when they have found him, bring him home religiously on their shoulders to the chapel dedicated unto him. But they coomplayne that sense the coming of the Christian men into the Island, he fled for all together, and could never sense be found, whereby they divined the destruction of their country. They honoured an other Zemes in the likeness of a woman, on whom waited two other like men, as they were ministers to her. One of these, executed th'office of a mediator to the other Zemes which are under the power and commandment of this woman, 
Mediators,  
A woman zemes of great power.  to raise winds, clouds, and rain. The other is also at her commandment a messenger to the other Zemes which are joined with her in governance, to gather together the waters which fall from the high hills to the valleys, that being loosed, they may with force burst out into great floods and overflow the country if the people do not give due honour to her Image. There remaineth yet one thing worthy to be noted, wherewith we will make an end of this book. It is a thing well known, and yet fresh in memory among the inhabitants of the Island, that there was sometime two kings (of the which one was the father of Guarionexius of whom we made mention before) which were wont to abstain five days together continually from meat and drink, 
five days fasting.  to know somewhat of their Zemes of things to come: 
A marvelous illusion of the devil.  And that for this fasting being acceptable to their Zemes, they received answer of them, that within few years, there should come to the Island a nation of men covered with apparel, which should destroy all the customs and ceremonies of the Island. and either slay all their children, 
The devil sometime telleth truth.  or bring them into servitude. The common sort of the people, understood this oracle to be mente of the Canibales. And therefore when they had any knowledge of their coming, they ever fled, and were fully determined never more thadventure the battle with them. But when they saw that the spaniards had entered into the Island, consulting among themselves of the matter, they concluded that this was the nation which was meant by th'oracle. 
The Idols abolished.  Wherein, their opinion deceived them not. For they are now all subject to the Christians, all such being slain as stoobernely resisted. Nor yet remaineth there any memory of their Zemes: for they are all brought into Spain, that we might be certified of their illusions of evil spirits and Idols, the which you yowre self (most noble Prince) have seen and felt when I was present with you. I let pass many things because you put me in remembrance that to morrow you take your journey toward your country, to bring home the queen yowre aunt, whom you accoompanyed hither at the commandment of king frederic your uncle. Wherefore I bid you farewell for this time, desiring you to remember your Martyr, whom you have compelled in the name of the king yowre uncle, to gather these few things out of a large field of histories.   

¶ The tenth and last book of the first decade, as a conclusion of the former books: written to Inacus Lopez Mendocius, county of Tendilla, and viceroy of Granata.  
AT the first beginning and new attempt, when Colonus had taken upon him th'enterprise to search the Ocean sea, I was earnestly moved and required by the letters of certain of my friends and noble men of Rome to write such things as should happen. For they whyspered with great admiration, that where as there were many new lands found, and nations which lived naked and after the law of nature, 
The Law of nature.  they could hear no certainty thereof, being greatly desirous of the same. In this mean time had fortune overthrown Ascanius (his brother Lodovic being cast out of milan by the frenchmen) whose authority would not suffer me to be idle, 
Milayne in the hands of the frenchmen  but ever to have my pen in hand. To him I write the two first books of this decade, beside many other of my hid commentaries which you shall see shortly. Fortune did no less withdraw my mind from writing, then disturb Ascaniu● from power. As he was tossed with contrary storms and ceased to persuade me, even so slacked my ferventness to inquire any further, until the year of Christ .1500. When the court remained at Granata where you are viceroy: At which time Lodovic the Cardinal of Aragonie, nevie to king Fredrick by his brother's side (being at Granata with the queen Parthenopea the sister of hour catholic king) browght me king frederic's letters, whereby he exhorted me to finish the other books which followed the two epistle books, 
Epistel books  which I write to Ascanius. For they both acknowleaged that they had the copy of all that I write to cardinal Ascanius. And albeit that even than I was sick (as you know) yet took I the burden upon me, and applied myself to writing. I have therefore chosen these few things, out of a great heap of such as seemed to me most worthy to be noted among the large writings of the authors and searchers of the same. Wherefore, forasmuch as you have endeavoured to wrest out of my hands the hole exemple of all my works, to add the same to the innumerable volumes of your library, I thowght it good now to make a brief rehearsal of those things which were done from that year of a thousand and five hundredth, 
The history following, containeth the acts of ten year.  even unto this year which is the tenth from that. For I intend to write more largely of these things hereafter, if god grant me life. I had written a hole book by itself of the superstitions of the people of the Island, supposing therewith to have accomplished the hole Decade consisting of ten books. But I have added this to the tenth as a perpendicular line, and as it were a back guide or rearward to the other: So that you may knit the first tenth, to the ninth, and impute this to occupy the place of the tenth to fill up the Decade. This order have I appointed, lest I should be compelled often times to write over the hole work, or send you the same defaced with blots and interlyning. But now let us come to hour purpose. The ship masters and mariners ran over many coasts during these ten years: But ever followed such as were first found by Colonus. For rasinge continually along by the tract of Paria, 
Paria, part of the firm land of East India  which they believe to be part of the firm land or continent of east India, sum of them chanced upon certain new lands toward the east, and sum toward the west, in which they found both gold and frankincense. 
Gold & frankincense.  For they browght from thence many jewels and ouches of gold, and great plenty of frankincense, which they had of the people of those countries, partly for exchange of sum of hour things, and partly by force, over coming them by war. Yet in sum places, although they be naked, 
The fierceness of the naked people.  they overcame hour men, and slew hole armies. For they are exceeding fierce, and use venomous arrows, and long staves like iavelens, made hard at the end with fire. They found many beasts, 
Innumerable beasts unlike unto ours.  both creeping and four footed, much differing from ours, variable and of sundry shapes innumerable: yet not hurtflul, except Lions, Tigers, and Crocodiles. This I mean in sundry Regions of that great land of Paria: but not in the Islands: No not so much as one. For all the beasts of the Islands, are meek and without hurt, 
Nothing hurtful in the Islands.  except men which (as we have said) are in many Islands devourers of man's flesh. There are also divers kinds of fowls. And in many places bats of such bygnes, that they are equal with turtle doves. 
Bats as big as turtle doves.  These bats, have often times assaulted men in the night in their sleep, and so bitten them with their venomous teeth, that they have been thereby almost driven to madness, in so much that they have been compelled to fly from such places, as from ravenous harpies. In an other place, where certain of them slept in the night season on the sands by the sea side, a monster coming out of the sea, 
A man devoured of a monster of the sea  came upon one of them secretly and carried him away by the myddeste out of the sight of his fellows to whom he cried in vain for help until the beast leapt into the sea with her pray. It was the kings pleasure that they should remain in these lands, 
The spaniards proffer themselves to subdue the new lands.  and build towns and fortresses. Where unto they were so well willing, that divers proffered themselves to take upon them the subduing of the land, making great suit to the king that they might be appointed thereto. The coast of this tract is exceeding great and large: and the Regions and lands thereof extend marvelous far: 
Note the largeness of the new lands.  So that they affirm the continent of these Regions with the Islands about the same, to be thrice as big as all Europe, beside those lands that the Portugals have found southward, which are also exceeding large. Therefore doubtless Spain hath deserved great praise in these hour days, 
Commendation of the Spaniards.  in that it hath made known unto us so many thousands of Antipodes which leye hid before and unknown to hour forefathers: 
Antipodes.  And hath thereby ministered so large matter to write of, to such learned wits as are desirous to set forth knowledge to the commodity of men: to whom I opened away when I gathered these things rudely together as you see: The which, nevertheless I trust you will take in good part, aswell for that I can not adorn my rudeness with better vesture, 
The authors excusse.  as also that I never took pen in hand to write like an historiographer, but only by epistles scribeled in haste, to satisfy them, from whose commandments I might not draw back my foot. But now I have digressed enough. Let us now therefore return to Hispaniola. 
Hispaniola.  Hour men have found by experience, that the bread of the Island is of smaule strength to such as have been used to our bread made of wheat: And that their strenthes were much decayed by using of the same, Wherefore the king hath of late commanded that wheat should be sown there in divers places and at sundry times of the year. 
The nature of the place, altereth the forms and qualities of things. Wheat. herbs. cattle,  It groweth into hollow reeds, with few ears, but those very big and fruitful. They find the like softness or delicateness to be in herbs, which grow there to the height of corn. Neat or cattle, become of bigger stature and exceeding fat, but their flesh is more unsavoury, and their bones (as they say) either without mary, or the same to be very waterysshe. But of hogs and swine, 
hogs.  they affirm the contrary, that they are more holsoome and of better taste, by reason of certain wild fruits which they eat, being of much better nooryshement than mast. There is almost none other kind of flesh commonly sold in the market. The multitude of hogs, are exceedingly increased,, and become wild as soon as they are out of the swineherds keeping. They have such plenty of beasts and fowls, 
Plenty of beasts and fou●e.  that they shall hereafter have no need, to have any brought from other places. Thincrease of all beasts, grow bigger than the brood they came of, by reason of the rankness of the pasture, unless their feeding be only of grass, without either barley or other grain. But we have said enough of Hispaniola. They have now found that Cuba, 
Cuba, is an Island.  (which of long time they thowght to have been firm land for the great length thereof) is an Island. Yet is it no marvel that thinhabitants themselves told hour men when they searched the length thereof, that it was without end. For this nation being naked and content with a little, and with the limits of their own country, is not greatly curious to know what their neighbours do, or the largeness of their dominion. Nor yet knew they if there were any other thing under heaven, beside that which they walked on with their feet. Cuba, 
The description of Cuba.  is from the east into the West, much longer than Hispaniola: And in breadth from the north to the south, much less than they supposed at the first: for it is very narrow in respect to the length: And is for the most part, very fruitful and pleasant. Eastward not far from Hispaniola, there lieth an Island, less than Hispaniola more than by the half, which hour men called Sancti johannis, 
The Island of Burichema or S. johannis.  being in manner square. In this they found exceeding rich gold mines. But being now occupied in the gold mines of Hispaniola,, 
Gold mines  they have not yet sent labourers in to that Island. But the plenty and revenue of gold of all other Regions, give place to Hispaniola, where they give themselves in manner to none other thing then to gather gold, 
The order of working in the gold mines.  of which work this order is appointed. To every such witty and skilful man as is put in trust to be a suruoier or overseer of these works, there is assigned one or more kings of the Island with their subjects. 
The kings bring their subjects to work in the gold mines.  These kings according to their league, come with their people at certain times of the year, and resort every of them to the gold mine to the which he is assigned: where they have all manner of dygginge or myninge tools delivered them: And every king with his men, have a certain reward allowed them for their labour. For when they depart from the mines to sowing of corn, and other tillage (whereunto they are addict at certain other times, 
tillage.  least their food should fail them) they receive for their labour, one a jerkin, or a doublet, an other a shirt, an other a cloak or a cap. For they now take pleasure in these things, and go no more naked as they were wont too do. And thus they use the help and labour of the inhabitants both for the tillage of their ground, and in their gold mines as thowghe they were their servants or bondmen. They bear this yoke of servitude with an evil will: but yet they bear it. They call these hired labourers, Anaborias. Yet the king doth not suffer that they should be used as bondmen: And only at his pleasure they are set at liberty or appointed to work. At such time as they are called together of their kings to work (as soldiers or pioneers are assembled of their centurians) many of them steel away to the mountains and woods, where they lie lucking, 
They abhor labour  being content for that time to live with wild fruits, rather than take the pains to labour. They are docible and apt to learn, 
They are docible.  and have now utterly forgotten their owlde superstitions. They believe godly, and bear well in memory such things as they have learned of hour faith. Their kings children are brought up with the chiefest of hour men, 
The kings children.  and are instructed in letters and good manners. When they are grown to man's age, they send them home to their countries to be exemple to other, and especially to govern the people if their fathers be dead that they may the better set forth the Christian Religion, and keep their subjects in love and obedience. By reason whereof, they come now by fair means and gentle persuasions to the mines which lie in two Regions of the Island about thirty miles distant from the city of Dominica: whereof the one is called Sancti Christophori: 
The two chief gold mires of hispaniola.  And the other being distant about four score and ten miles, is called Cibava, not far from the chief haven called Portus Regalis. These regions are very large: In the which in many places here and there, are found sometime even in the upper crust of the earth and sometime among the stones, 
Gold found in the upper part of the earth.  certain round pieces or plates of gold, sometime of smaule quantity, and in sum places of great weight: In so much that there hath been found round pieces of three hundredth pound weight, and one of three thousand, three hundredth and ten pound weight: 
A piece of gold weighing three thousand three hundredth & ten pounds. A coastly shipwreck.  The which (as you hard) was sent hole to the king in that ship in the which the governor Boadilla was coming home into Spain, the ship with all the men being drowned by the way, by reason it was ouerladen with the weight of gold and multitude of men. Albeit, there were moo then a thowesande persons which saw and handled the piece of gold. And whereas here I speak of a pound, I do not mean the common pound, but the sum of the ducat of gold, with the coin called Triens, which is the third part of a pound, which they call Pesus. 
Pesus.  The sum of the weight hereof, the spaniards call Castellanum Aureum. All the gold that is digged in the mountains of Cibava and port Regale, 
The fyning and 〈…〉 of go●de.  is carried to the tower of Conception, where shops with all things appertaining are ready furnished to fine it, melt it, and cast it into wedges. That done, they take the kings portion thereof, which is the fift part, and so restore to every man his own which he got with his labour. But the gold which is found in saint Christopher's mine and the Region there about, is carried to the shops which are in the village called Bonaventura. In these two shops, is melted yearly, above three hundredth thousand pound weight of gold. 
Three hundredth thousand weight of gold molten yearly 〈◊〉 ●ispaniola.  If any man be known deceatefully to keep back any portion of gold, whereof he hath not made the kings officers privy, he forfiteth the same for a fine. There chance among them often times many contentions and controversies, 
Controverses  the which unless the magistrates of the Island do finish, the ease is removed by applelation to the high counsel of the court, from whose sentence it is not lawful to appeal in all the dominions of Castyle. But let us now return to the new lands from whence we have digressed. 
The new lands.  They are innumerable, divers, and exceeding fortunate. Wherefore the spaniards in these hour days, and their noble enterprises, 
The spaniards noble enterprises. are not inferior to the acts of hercules or Saturnus. etc.  do not give place either to the facts of Saturnus, or Hercules, or any other of the ancient princes of famous memory which were canonised among the god's called Heroes for their searching of new lands and regions, & bringing the same to better culture and civility. Oh God: how large and far shall hour posterity see the Christian Religion extended? 
Enlarging of the Christian Religion  How large a camp have they now to wander in, which by the true nobility that is in them, or moved by virtue, will attempt either to deserve like praise among men, or reputation of well doing before god. What I conceive in my mind of these things, 
The original of true nobility.  I am not able to express with pen or tongue. I will now therefore so make an end of this perpendicular conclusion of the hole Decade, as minding hereafter to search and gather every thing particularly, that I may at further leisure write the same more at large. For Colonus the Admiral with four ships, and a hundredth threescore and ten men appointed by the king, discovered in the year of Christ .1520. the land over against the west corner ●f Cuba, distant from the same about a hundredth and thirty leaques: In the midst of which tract, lieth an Island called Guanassa. 
The Island of Guanassa  From hence he directed his viage backward toward the east by the shore of that coast, supposing that he should have found the coasts of Paria: but it chanced otherwise. It is said also that Vincentius Agnes (of whom we have spoken before) and one johannes Diaz (with divers other of whose voyages I have as yet no certain knowledge) have over run those coasts. 
The viage of johannes Diaz.  But if God grant me life, I trust to know the truth hereof and to advertise you of the same. Thus far ye well.  
¶ The second Decade followeth.    


¶ THE first BOOK OF THE second Decade, to Leo bishop of Rome, the tenth of that name, of the supposed Continent or firm land.  
SENSE the time that Galeatius Butrigarius of Bononie, and johannes Cursius of Florence (moste holy father) came to the catholic king of Spain, the one, of your holiness ambasage, and tother for th'affairs of his common wealth, I was ever for the most part in their company, and for their virtues and wysedoome, had them in great reverence. And whereas they were greatly given to study, and continual revoluinge of divers authors, they chanced upon certain books negligently let slip out of my hands, entreating of the large lands and Regions hitherto lying hid, and almost west Antipodes, 
west Antipodes.  found of late by the spaniards. Yet being alured and delighted with the newenes and strangeness of the matter although rudely adorned, they commended the same: Therewith earnestly desiring me in their own names, and requiring me in the name of your holiness, to add here unto all such things as were found after that time, and to give them a copy thereof to send to your holiness, that you might thereby understand, both how great commodity is chanced to the progeny of mankind, as also increase of the militant congregation in these hour days, 
The ●ncrea●e of the Christian congregation.  by the fortunate enterprises of the kings of Spain. For like as razed or unpaynted tables, are apt to receive what forms so ever are first drawn thereon by the hand of the painter, even so these naked and simple people, do soon receive the customs of hour Religion, and by conversation with hour men, shake of their fierce and native barbarousness. I have thowght it good therefore to satisfy the request of these wise men, especially using th'authority of your name, whereunto not to have obeyed, I should esteem myself to have committed a heinous offence. Wherefore I will now briefly rehearse in order, what hid coasts the spaniards overran, who were the authors thereof, where they rested, what further hope they browght, and finally what great things those tracts of lands do promise in time to come. In the declaration of my decade of the Ocean, which is now printed and dispersed throwghowte Christendom unwares to me, I described how Christophorus Colonus found those Islands whereof we have spoken, 
Christophorus Colonus.  and that turning from thence toward the left hand southward, he chanced into great regions of lands, and large seas, distant from the Equinoctial line, only from five degrees to ten: 
Of lands distant from the Equinoctial from five degrees to ten.  where he found broad rivers and exceeding high mountains covered with snow and hard by the sea banks, where were many commodious and quiet havens. But Colonus being now departed out of this life, 
The death of Colonus.  the king began to take care, how those lands might be inhabited with Christian men to th'increase of hour faith: Where upon he gave licence by his letters patents to all such as would take the matter in hand, 
A general licence.  and especially to two, whereof Diego Nicuesa was one, and the other was Alphonsus Fogeda. 
The navigation of Alphonsus Fogeda.  Wherefore about the Ideses of December, Alphonsus departing first with three hundredth soldiers from the Island of Hispaniola (in the which we said the spaniards had builded a city, and planted their habitation) and sailing in manner full south, he came to one of the havens found before which Colonus named Portus Carthaginis, 
Portus Carthaginis.  both because of the Island standing against the course of the stream, & also that by reason of the largeness of the place and bending sides, it is much like to the haven of Spain called Carthago. Thinhabitantes call the Island Codego, as the spaniards call the Island of their haven, Scombria.  
This Region is called of the inhabitants Caramairi: 
The Region of Caramairi.  In the which they affirm both the men and women to be of goodly stature, 
People of goodly stature  but naked. The men have their hear cut round by their ears, but the women were it long. Both the men and women are very good archers. Hour men found certain trees in this province, which bore great plenty of sweet apples, but hurtful, for they turn into worms when they are eaten. 
Apples which turn into worms.  Especially the shadow of the tree, 
A tree whose shadow is hurtful.  is contagious, for such as sleep under it any time, have their heads swollen and lose their sight. But if they sleep but a while, their sight cometh again after a few days. This port is distant four hundredth fifty and six miles from that part of Hispaniola which the spaniards call Beata, in the which also they furnysshe themselves when they prepare any viage to seek other new lands. When Fogeda had entered into the haven, 
Fogeda his authority confirmed by the kings letters patents.  he invaded, slew, and spoiled the people, whom he found naked and scattered. For they were given him for a pray, by the kings letters patents because they had been before time cruel against the Christians, and could never be alured to permit them quietly to come within their dominions. Here they found gold, but in no great quantity, nor yet that pure. They make of it, certain breast plates and brooches, which they wear for coomelynes. But Fogeda not content with these spoils, using certain captives which he had taken before, for guides, entered into a village twelve miles distant from the sea side further into the land, into the which they were fled whom he first invaded. 
warlike people.  Here he found a naked people, but apt to war. For they were armed with targets, shields, long swords made of wood, and bows with arrows typte with bone, or hardened with fire. As soon as they had espied hour men, they with their gests whom they had received, assailed them with desperate minds, being thereto more earnestly provoked, beholding the calamity of these which fled unto them, by the violence done to their women and children, in the spoil and slaughter. In this conflict hour men had the otherthrowe: 
The spaniards have the overthrow.  In the which, one johannes de Lacossa (being in authority next unto Fogeda the captain, and also the first that gathered gold in the sands of Vraba) was slain with fifty soldiers. For these people infect their arrows with the deadly poison of a certain herb. 
Arrows infected with poison.  The other with their captain Fogeda being discomfited, fled to the ships. While they remained thus in the haven of Carthago sorrowful and pensive for the loss of their companions, the other captain Diego Nicuesa, 
The navigation of Diego Nicuesa.  (whom they left in Hispaniola, preparing himself toward the viage in the haven Beata) came to them with five ships and seven hundreth four score and fifteen men. For the greater number of soldiers, followed Nicuesa, both because free liberty was given them to choose which of the capitains them list, and also that by reason of his age, he was of greater authority: But especially because the rumour was that Beragua being by the kings commission appointed to Nicuesa, 
The regions of uraba and ●eragua.  was richer in gold than Vraba assigned to Alphonsus Fogeda. Therefore, at the arrival of Nicuesa, they consulted what was best to be done: And determined first to revenge the death of their fellows. Where upon, setting their battle in array, they marched in the night toward them which slew Cossa with his companions, 
The spaniards revenge the death of their companions.  Thus stealing on them unwares in the last watch of the night, and encoompasinge the village where they lay, consisting of a hundredth houses and more, having also in it thrice as many of their neighbours as of themselves, they set it on fire, with diligent watch that none might escape. And thus in short time they browght them and their houses to ashes, and made them pay the ransom of blood with blood. 
A great slaughter.  For of a great multitude of men and women, they spared only two children, all other being destroyed with fire or sword except few which escaped privily. They learned by the reserved children, that Cossa and his fellows were cut in pieces and eaten of them that slew them. By reason whereof, they suppose that these people of Caramairi took their original of the Caribes otherwise called Canibales. 
Canibales.  Here they found sum gold among the ashes. For the hunger of gold, 
The hunger of gold.  did no less encourage our men to adventure these perils and labours than did the possessing of the lands. These things thus finished, and the death of Cossa and his fellows revenged, they returned to the haven. After this, Fogeda which came first, first likewise departing with his army to seek Vraba, committed to his governance, sailed by an Island called Fortis, 
The Island Fo●tis.  lying in the midway between Vraba and the haven of Carthago. In to the which descending, he found it to be an Island of the Canybales, bringing with him from thence two men and seven women: for the residue escaped. Here he found in the cottages of them that fled, a hundreth four score and ten drams of gold, cast and wrought in divers forms. 
wrought gold  Sailing forward from hence, he came to the east coasts of Vraba, which thinhabitants call Caribana, 
Caribana.  from whence the Caribes or Canibales of the Islands are said to have their name and original. Here he began to build a fortress, and a village near unto the same, therein intending to place their first habitation. Shortly after, being instructed by certain captives that there was about twelve miles further within the land, a certain village called Tirufi, having in it a rich gold mine, 
A gold mine.  he determined to destroy the village. To the which when he came, he found thinhabitants ready to defend their right: 
The spaniards are repulsed.  And that so stoutly, that encountering with them, he was repulsed with shame and damage. For these people also, use bows and venomous arrows. within a few days after, being enforced for lack of vytales to invade an other village, he himself was stricken in the thigh with an arrow. 
Fogeda i● wounded.  Sume of his fellows say, that he was thus wounded of one of thinhabitants whose wife he had led away captive before. They say also that he had first friendly commoned with Fogeda for redeeming of his wife, & had appointed a day to bring a portion of gold for her ransom: 
Ransom.  And that he came at the day assigned, not laden with gold, but armed with bows and arrows, with eight other confetherate with him, which had been before partakers of the injuries done to them first at the haven of Carthago, and afterward at the burning of the village. In revenge whereof they had desperately consecrated themselves to death. But the matter being known, the captain of this conspiracy was slain of Fogeda his companions, and his wife detained in captivity. Fogeda also through the maliciousness of the veneme, consumed and was dried up by little & little. While these things chanced thus, they espied Nicuesa the other captain to whom Baragua the region of the west side of Vraba, 
Fogeda consumeth by force of the Beragua and Uraba.  was assigned to inhabit. He gave wind to his sails to take his viage toward Beragua, the day after that Fogeda departed out of the haven of Car●hago. 
Nicuesa.  He with his army which he browght with him, coasted ever along by the shore until he came to the gulf Coiba, 
The gulf Coiba.  whose kings name is Careta. Here he found their language to be in manner nothing like unto that of Hispaniola or of the haven of Carthago: whereby he perceived that in this tract there are many languages differing from their own borderers. 
divers languages.  Nicuesa departing from Coiba, went to the province or Lievetenauntshippe of Fogeda his companion. Within a few days after he himself entering into one of those merchant ships which the spaniards call Caravelas, commanded that the bigger vessels, should follow far behind. He took with him two smaule ships commonly called bergantines or brygantynes. 
Bergantines or brigāt●nes.  I have thowght it good in all the discourse of these books, to use the common names of things, because I had rather be plain then curious: especially forasmuch as there do daily arise many new things unknown to the antiquity, whereof they have left no true names. After the departure of Nicuesa, there came a ship from Hispaniola to Fogeda, the captain whereof, was one Barnardino de Calavera, 
Barnardino de 〈◊〉.  who had stoulne the same from Hispaniola with three score men, without leave or advice of the Admiral and the other governors. With the victuals which this ship browg●t they refreshed themselves and somewhat recovered their strengths much weakened for lack of meat, Fogeda his companions whyspered and muttered against him daily more and more, that he fed them forth with vain hope. For he had telled them that he left Ancisus in Hispaniola (whom he chose by the kings commission to be a judge in causes, 
Ancisus.  because he was learned in the law) to come shortly after him with a ship laden with victuals: And that he marveled that he was not come many days sense. And herein he said nothing but truth. For when he departed, he left Ancisus half ready to follow him. But his fellows supposing that all that he said of Ancisus had been feigned, sum of them determined privily to steal away the two brigantynes from Fogeda, and to return to Hispaniola. But Fogeda having knowledge hereof, prevented their device. For leaving the custody of the fortress with a certain noble gentleman called Francisco Pizarro, he himself thus wounded, with a few other in his company, entered into the ship whereof we spoke before, and sailed directly to Hispaniola, 
Fogeda returneth to hispaniola.  both to heal the wound of his thigh if any remedy might be found, & also to know what was the cause of Ancisus tarrying: Leaving hope with his fellows (which were now browght from three hundredth to three score, partly by famine and partly by war) that he would return within the space of xu days: 
Famine  prescribing also a condition to Pizarro and his companions, that it should not be imputed to them for treason to depart from thence if he came not again at the day appointed with victuals and a new supply of men. These xu days being now passed, whereas they could yet hear nothing of Fogeda, and were daily more and more oppressed with sharp hunger, they entered into the two brigantynes which were left, and departed from that land. And as they were now sailing on the main sea toward Hispaniola, a tempest soodeynly arising, 
A brigantine drowned with the stroke of a fish.  swallowed one of the brygantynes with all that were therein. Sum of their fellows affirm that they plainly saw a fish of huge greatness swimming about the brygantyne (for those seas bring forth great monsters) and that with a stroke of her tail, she broke the rudder of the ship in pieces: which failing, the brigantine being driven about by force of the tempest, was drowned not far from the Island called Fortis, 
The Island Fortis.  lying between the coasts of the haven Carthago and Vraba. As they of the other brygantyne would have landed in the Island, they were driven back with the bows and arrows of the fierce barbarians. proceeding therefore on their viage, they met by chance with Ancisus between the haven of Carthago, 
Ancisus.  and the Region of Cuchibacoa in the mouth of the river which the spaniards called Boium gatti, 
The Region of Cuchibacoa.  
Boium gatti.  that is, the house of the cat, because they saw a cat first in that place: and Boium, in the tongue of Hispaniola, is a house. Ancisus came with a ship laden with all things necessary, both for meat and drink, and apparel, bringing also with him an other brigantine. This is he for whose coming the captain Fogeda looked for so long. He loosed anchor from Hispaniola in the Ideses of September: And the fourth day after his departure, he espied certain high mountains, 
Mountains covered with snow.  the which for the abundance of snow which lieth continually in the tops thereof, the spaniards called Serra Nevata, 
Serra Nevata.  when Colonus the first finder of those Regions passed by the same. The fift day, he sailed by O● Draconis. 
Os Draconis.  They which were in the brygantyne, told Ancisus that Fogeda was returned to Hispaniola. But Ancisus supposing that they had feigned that tale, commanded them by th'authority of his commission to turn back again. The brigantiners obeyed and followed him: yet made they humble suit unto him that he would grant them that with his favour they might either go again to Hispaniola, or that he himself would bring them to Nicuesa: And that they would for his gentleness declared toward them in this behalf, reward him with two thousand drams of gold. For they were rich in gold, but poor in bread. 
rich in gold and poor in bread.  But Ancisus assented to neither of their requests: affirming that he might by no means go any other way then to Vraba the province assigned to Fogeda. Where upon, by their conduct, he took his viage directly toward Vraba. But now let it not seem tedious to your holiness to hear of one thing worthy to be remembered, which chanced to this lieutenant Ancisus as he came thither. For he also cast anchor in the coasts of the region of Caramairi which we said to be famous by reason of the haven of Carthago: 
The Region of Caramairi  and of the goodly stature, strength, and beauty of both men and women being in the same. Here he sent certain to go aland on the shore, both to fetch fresh water, and also to repair the ship boat which was sore bruised. In this mean time A great multitude of the people of the country armed after their manner, 
Fear on both parts.  came about hour men as they were occupied about their business, and stood in a readiness to fight, for the space of three days continually: during which time, neither durst they set upon hour men, nor hour men assail them. Thus both parties keeping their array, stood still three hole days the one gazing on the other. Yet all this time hour men applied their work, placing the shippewrightes in the midst of their army. 
Ship w●yghtes.  As they stood thus amazed, two of hour coompanye went to fill their water pots at the mouth of the river near unto them both, where soodenly there came forth against them a captain of the barbarians with ten armed men which enclosed them, & with terrible countenance bend their arrows against them, but shot them not of. One of hour men fled: but the other remained, cauling his fellow again and rebuking him for his fearfulness. Then he spoke to the barbarians in their own language which he had learned being conversant with the captives that were carried from thence long before. They marvelling to here a stranger speak in their native tongue, put of their fierceness and fell to friendly communication, demanding who were the captains of that company which were arrived in their land. He answered that they were strangers passing by: And that he marveled why they would attempt to drive them from their coasts and disturb their ships: arguing them of folly and cruelty, and further threatinge their ruin and destruction, except they would use themselves more friendly toward them. For he advertised them that there would shortly come into their land armed men, in number like to the sands of the sea: And that to theyrter destruction, not only if they resisted them not, but also except they received them and entertained them honourably. In the mean time Ancisus was informed that his men were detained. Wherefore suspecting sum deceit, he browght forth all his target men for fear of their venomous arrows: 
The use of targets against venomous arrows.  And setting them in battle array, he marched forward toward them which steyed his men. But he which communed with the barbarians, giving him a sign with his hand to proceed no further, he steyed. And cauling to him the other, he knew that all was safe. For the barbarians proffered him peace, because they were not they whom they suspected them to have been: meaning by Fogeda and Nicu●sa, who had spoiled the village standing there by the sea side, and carried away many captives, and also burnt an other village further within the land. And therefore (as they said) the cause of their coming thither, was to revenge those injuries, if by any means they could. 
The barbarian● have respect to justice  Yet that they would not exercise their weapon's against the innocent. For they said it was ungodly to fight against any, not being provoked.  
laying a part therefore their bows and arrows, they entertained hour men gently, and gave them great plenty of salted fish and bread of their country: 
Salted fiche.  And filled their vessels with cider made of their country fruits and seeds, 
wine of fr●t●s and see●es.  not inferior to wine in goodness. Thus Ancisus having entered into friendship and made a league of peace with thinhabitants of Caramairi which were before sore provoked by other captains, he launched from that land, and directed his course to Vraba by the Island Fortis, 
Vr●●a.  having in his ship a hundredth and fifty fresh men which were substitute in the place of such as were dead. Also twelve mates, and many swine, and other beasts both males and females for increase. Likewise, 
Artillery.  fifty pieces of ordinance, with a great multitude of targets, swords, javelins, and such other weapons for the wars. But all this with evil speed and in an evil hour. For as they were even now entering into the haven, 
Ancisus ship wrack.  the governor of the ship which sat at the helm, struck the ship upon the sands, where it was so fast enclosed, and beaten with the waves of the sea, that it opened in the myddes●e, and all lost that was therein. A thing surely miserable to behold. For of all the victuals that they had, they saved only twelve barels of meal, with a few chieses, and a little bysket bread. 
Meal. cheeves, & bysket.  For all the beasts were drowned: And they themselves scaped hardly and half naked by help of the brigantine & ship boat, carrying with them only a few weapons. Thus they fell from one calamity into an other, being now more careful for their lives then for gold. Yet being browght alive and in health to that land which they so greatly desired, they could do no less then to provide for the sustaining of their bodies, because they could not live only by air. And whereas their own failed, they must needs live by other men's. Yet among these so many adversities, one good chance offered itself unto them. For they found, not far from the sea side, a grove of date trees, 
A grove of date trees.  among the which, & also among the reek or weeds of the marshes, they espied a multitude of wild bores, 
wild bores.  with whose flesh they fed the selves well certain days. These they say to be less than ours: And with so short tails, that they thought they had been cut of. They differ also from ours in their feet: for their hinder feet are hole undivided, and also without any houfe. But they affirm that they have proved by experience their flesh to be of better taste & more holsoome than ours. During this time, they fed also of dates and the roots of young date trees, which they eat like wise in Civil and Granata where they call them Palmitoes, of the leaves whereof they make biesomes in Rome. sometimes also, they eat of the apples of that Region, 
Apples of a strange kind  which have the taste of prunes, and have also stones in them, and are but little and of red colour. I suppose them to be of that kind whereof I eat in the city of Alexandria in Egypt in the month of Aprell: The trees whereof, the jews that dwell there, being learned in the law of Moses, affirm to be the Ceders of Libane, 
Ceders of Libane.  which bear old fruits and new all the year as doth the orange tree. These apples are good to be eaten, and have a certain sweetness mixed with a gentle sharpness, as have the fruits called Sorbes. 
Sorbes are called in french Cou●●er they grow not in England.  Thinhabitantes plant these trees in their orchards and garedens, and nourish them with great diligence as we do cherries, peaches, and quynses. This tree in leaves, height, and trunk, is very like unto the tree that beareth the fruit called Ziziphas, which the Apothecaries call juiuba. But whereas now the wild bores began to fail them, they were again enforced to consult and provide for the time to come. Where upon with their hole army, they entered further into the land. The Canibales of this province, are most expert archers. 
The fruit called ●i●ipha or juiuba Canibales.  Ano●sus had in his company, a hundredth men. They met by the way with only three men of thinhabitants, naked, 
Men of desperate boldness.  and armed with bows and venomous arrows, who without all fear, assailed our men fiercely, wounded many, and slew many: And when they had emptied their quivers, fled as swiftly as the wind: For (as we have said) they are exceeding swift of foot by reason of their lose going from their child's age They affirm that they let slip no arrow out of their bows in vain. Hour men therefore returned the same way that they came, much more infortunate than they were before and consulted among themselves to leave that land: especially because thinhabitants had overthrown the fortress which Fogeda builded, and had burnt thirty houses of the village, as soon as Pizarrus and his company left of Fogeda, had forsaken the land. By this occasion therefore, being driven to seek further, they had intelligence that the west side of that gulf of Vraba, 
The gulf of Uraba.  was more fruitful and better to inhabit. Wherefore, they sent the one half of their men thither with the brigantine, and left the other near to the sea side on the east p●rt. This gulf, is xxiiii miles in breadth: And how much the further it entereth into the firm land, it is so much the narrower. Into the gulf of Vraba, there faule many rivers: but one (as they say) more fortunate than the river of Nilus in egypt. This river is called Darien,: 
The great river of Darien, falleth into the gulf of Uraba.  upon the banks whereof, being very fruitful of trees and grass, they intended to plaint their new colony or habitation. But thinhabitants marueling at the brygantine being bigger than their canoas, and specially at the sails thereof, first sent away their children and weakest sort of their people with their baggage and household stuff, and assembled all such together both men and women, as were meet for the wars: Thus being armed with weapons and desperate minds, they stood in a readiness to fight, and tarried the coming of hour men upon a little hill, as it were to take th'advantage of the ground. Hour men judged them to be about five hundredth in number. Then Ancisus the captain of hour men, and lieutenant in the steed of Fogeda, setting his men in order of battle array, and with his hole company kneeling on his knees, they all made humble prayers to god for the victory, and a vow to the Image of the blessed virgin which is honoured in Civil, 
Prayer and vows.  by the name of Sancta Maria Antiqua, promising to send her many golden gifts and a stranger of that country: also to name the village Sancta Maria Antiqua after her name: likewise to ●erecte a temple called by the same name: or at the least to dedicate the king of that province his palace to that use, if it should please her to assist them in this dangerous enterprise. This done, all the soldiers took an oath, 
The soldiers make an oath.  that no man should turn his back to his enemies. Then the capitain commanding them to be in a readiness with their targets and iavelens, and the trumpyter to blow the battle, they fiercely assailed their enemies with a larome. But the naked barbarians, not long able to abide the force of hour men, were put to flight, 
The barbarians are driven to flight.  with their king and captain Cemaccus. Hour men entered into the village, where they found plenty of meat such as the people of the country use, sufficient to assuage their present hunger, as bread made of roots, with certain fruits unlike unto ours, which they reserve for store as we do chestnuts. 
chestnuts.  Of these people, the men are utterly naked: but the women from the navel downward, are covered with a fine cloth made of gossampine cotton. This Region is utterly without any sharpness of winter. For the mouth of this river of Darien, is only eight degrees distant from the Equinoctial line: 
The river of Darien, but viii. degrees from the Equinoctial.  So that the common sort of hour men, scarcely perceive any difference in length between the day and night all the hole year. But because they are ignorant in astronomy, they can perceive no smaule difference. Therefore we need not much pass if the degree do differ sum what from their opinion, for asmuch as the difference can not be great. The day after that they arrived at the land▪ they sailed along by the river, where they found a great thicket of reeds continuing for the space of a mile in length supposing (as it chanced in deed) that the borderers there about which had fled, had either line lurking there, or else to have hid their stuff among those reeds: Where upon, arming themselves with their targets, 
Gold found in a thicket of reeds.  for fear of the people lying in ambusshe, they searched the thicket diligently, and found it without men, but replenished with household stuff and gold. They found also a great multitude of sheets, made of the silk or cotton of the gossampine tree. 
Sheets of gossampine.  Likewise divers kinds of vessels and tools made of wood, and many of earth: Also many breast plates of gold and ouches wrought after their manner, 
Breast plates of gold.  to the sum of a hundredth and two pound weight. For they also take pleasure in the beauty of gold, and work it very artificially, although it be not the price of things among them as with us. They have it out of other Regions for exchange of such things as their country bringeth forth. For such Regions as have plenty of bread and gossampine, lack gold: And such as bring forth gold, are for the most part rowght with mountains and rocks, and therefore barren. 
The golden Reg●on● are for the most pa●te barren.  And thus they exercise merchandise without the use of money. Rejoicing therefore with double gladdenes, aswell in that they saw great likeness of gold, as also that fortune had offered them so fair and fruitful a country, they sent for their fellows whom they had left before in the east side of the gulf of Vraba, Yet sum say that the air is there unwholesome, because that part of the Region lieth in a low valley environed with mountains and marishes.   

¶ The second book of the second decade, of the supposed continente.  
I Have described to your holiness where Fogeda with his company (to whom the large tracts of Vraba was assigned to inhabit) intended to fasten there foot. 
Fogeda, the lieutenant of Uraba.  Let us now therefore leave them of Vraba for a while, and return again to Nicuesa to whom the governance and Lievetenaunteshippe of the most large province of Beragua (being the west side of the gulf of Vraba) was appointed. 
Nicuesa the lieutenant of Beragua.  We have declared how Nicuesa departing with one caravel and two brigantines from Vraba the jurisdiction of his friend and companion Fogeda, directed his course westward to Beragua, leaving the bigger ships somewhat behind him, 
Nicuesa lost his fellows in the night.  to follow him a far of. But he took this device in an evil hour. For he both lost his fellows in the night, and went past the mouth of the river of Beragua, which he chiefly sowght. One Lupus Olanus a Cantabrian, 
Lupus Olanus  and governor of one of the great ships, had the conduct of one of the brigantines. He coming behind, learned of thinhabitants which was the way Eastewarde to the gulf of Beragua over passed and left behind of Nicuesa. Olanus therefore directing his course toward the east, met with the other brigantine which had also wandered out of the way by reason of the darkness of the night. The governor of this brigantine, was one Petrus de Vmbria. 
Petrus de umbria  Thus both being glad of their meeting, they consulted what was best to be done, and which way they could conjecture their governor had taken his viage. 
The captains consuete where to find their lost governor.  After deliberation, they judged that Nicuesa could no more lack sum to put him in remembrance of Beragua, than they themselves were mindful thereof, hoping also to find him there. They sailed therefore toward Beragua: where they found within xvi miles distant, a river which Colonus named Lagartos, because it nooryshethe great lysardes which in the spanish tongue are called Lagartos. 
The river Lagartos.  These lysertes are hurtful both to man and beast, and in shape much like unto the Crocodiles of the river of Nilus in egypt. In this river, they found their companions and fellows of their error lying at anchor with the great ships which followed behind by the governors commandment. Here the hole assemble being careful and disquieted by reason of the governors error, after consultation, by th'advise of the captains of the brigantines, who had razed near unto the coasts of Beragua, they sailed directly thither. Beragua, in the language of thinhabitants of the same province, is as much to say, as the golden river. 
The golden river of Beragua.  The region itself is also called by the same name, taking name of the river. In the mouth of this river, the greatest vessels cast anchor, and conveyed all their victuals and other necessaries to land with their ship boats: and elected Lupus Olanus to be their governor in the steed of Nicuesa whom they had lost. By th'advice therefore of Olanus and the other under captains, that all hope of departure might be taken from the soldiers which they had now browght thither, and to make them the more willing to inhabit that land, they utterly forsook and cast of those ships being now rotten for age, and suffered them to be shaken and bruised of the surges of the sea. Yet of their soundest planks, with other new, made of the trees of that Region (which they say to be exceeding big and high) they framed a new caravel shortly after, which they might use to serve for their necessity. But Beragua was found by the unfortunate destiny of Petrus de Vmbria. 
The enterprise & death of Petrus de Umbria.  For he, being a man of prompt wit and apt forwardenes to attempt things (in which sometime fortune will bear a stroke notwithstanding hour providence) took upon him th'adventure to search the shore to th'intent to find a way for his fellows where they might best come aland. For this purpose, he chose him twelve mariners, and went aboard the ship boat which served the greatest ships. The flowing of the sea, raged and roared there, with a horrible whurlinge as we reed of the dangerous place of Scylla in the sea of Sicily, 
The dangerous place of Scylla in the sea of Cicilie.  by reason of the huge and ragged rocks reaching into the sea, from which the waves rebounding with violence, make a great noise and roughness on the water, which roughness or reflowinge, the spaniards call Resacca. In these dangers wretched Vmbria wrestled a while. But in short space, a wave of the sea almost as big as a mountain, rebounding from the rocks, overwhelmed the boat and devoured the same with the men, even in the sight of their fellows: So that of them all, only one escaped by reason he was expert in swiming. 
swiming  For getting hold of the corner of a rock, and sustaining the rage of the sea until the next day when it waxed calm, and the shore was dry by the fall of the water, he escaped and resorted to his coompanye. But Vmbria with the other eleven, were utterly cast away. The residue of the company, durst not commit themselves to the ship boats, but went aland with their brigantines. Where remaining a few days, and sailing along by the river, they found certain villages of thinhabitants, which they call Mumu. Here they began to build a fortress, and to sow seeds after the manner of their country, in a certain vale of fruitful ground, because in other places the region is barren. As these things were thus doing in Beragua, one of their coompanye standing upon the top of a high rock of especial, and lifting his eyes toward the West, began to cry, Lynnyn sails, lynnyn sails. And the nearer it drew toward him, he perceived it to be a ship boat coming with a little sail. Yet received they it with much rejoicing: for it was the fisher boat of Nicuesa his caravele, 
The fisher boat of Nicuesa his caravele.  and of capacity to carry only five men, and had now but three in it, which had stoulne it from Nicuesa because he refused to give credit to them that he had passed Beragua, and left it behind him Eastward. For they seeing Nicuesa and his fellows to consume daily by famynne, thowght they would prove fortune with that boat, if their chance might be to find Beragua, as in deed it wss. debating therefore with their fellows, of these matters, they declared how Nicuesa erred and lost the caravele by tempest, 
The miserable case of Nicuesa.  and that he was now wandering among the marishes of unknown coasts, full of misery and in extreme penury of all things, having now lived for the space of three score and ten days, only with herbs and roots, and syldoome with fruits of the country, contented to drink water, and yet that often times failing, because he was instant to travail westward by foot, supposing by that means to come to Beragua. Colonus the first finder of this main land, had coasted along by this tract, and named it Gratia Dei: but the inhabitants call it Cerabaro. 
The Region of Gratia Dei or Cerabaro.  through this Region, there runneth a river which hour men named Sancti Matthei, 
The river of Sancti Matthei.  distant from the west side of Beragua about a hundreth and thirty miles. Here I let pass the name of this river, and of many other places by the names which thinhabitants use, because hour men are ignorant thereof. Thus Lupus Olanus the conductor of one of the ships of Nicuesa, and now also vice lieutenant in his steed, after that he had received this information of the mariners, sent thither a brigantine under their guiding, these mariners therefore, which came in the fisher boat, found Nicuesa, 
The rigorousness of Nicuesa.  and browght him to the place where Olanus lay, whom at his coming he cast in prison, and accused him of treason because he usurped th'authority of the Lievetenauntshippe, and that for the desire he had to bear rule and be in authority, he took no care of his errors: also that he behaved himself negligently: demanding furthermore of him, what was the cause of his so long delay. Likewise he spoke to all the under officers sharply and with a troubled mind: And within few days after commanded them to truss up their packs, and make them ready to depart. They desired him to quiet himself, and to forbear them a while until they had reaped the corn that they had sown, which would shortly be ripe. For all kind of corn waxeth ripe there every fourth moonethe after it is sown. 
Come wa●eth ripe every fourth month  But he utterly denied to tarry and whit: but that he would forthwith depart from that unfortunate land: And plucked up by the roots all that ever was browght into the gulf of Beragua, and commanded them to direct their course toward the east. After they had sailed about the space of xvi miles, a certain young man whose name was Gregory, a Genues borne, and of a child browght up with Colonus, 
The commendation of a young man browght up with Colonus  called to remembrance that there was a haven not far from thence: And to prove his saying true, he gave his fellows these tokens: that is, that they should find upon the shore, an anchor of a lost ship half covered with sand: And under a tree next unto the haven, a spring of clear water. They came to the land: found the anchor and the spring, and commended the wit and memory of the young man, that he only among many of the marynes which had searched those coasts with Colonus, bore the thing so well in mind. This haven, Colonus called Portus belus. 
Portus belus.  Whereas in this viage for lack of victuals they were sometimes enforced to go aland, they were evil entreated of the inhabitants. By reason whereof, their strengths were so weakened with hunger, 
weakness of hunger.  that they were not able to keep war against naked men, or scarcely to bear their harness on their backs. And therefore hour men lost twenty of their company, which were slain with venomous arrows. They consulted to leave the one half of their fellows in the haven of Portus belus: And the other part Nicu●sa took with him toward the east: where about twenty and eight miles from Portus belus, he intended to build a fortress hard by the sea side upon the point or cape which in time passed Colonus named Marmor. 
Cap Marmor.  But they were so feeble by reason of long hunger, that their strength served them not to sustain such labour. Yet he erected a little tower able to resist the first assault of the inhabitants. This tower he called Nomen Dei. 
Nomen Dei.  From the time that he left Beragua, what in the journey among the sandy plains, than also for hunger while he builded the tower, 
Nicuesa his men consumed  of the few which remained a live, he lost two hundredth. And thus by little and little, the multitude of seven hundredth four score and five men, was now browght to scarcely one hundredth. While Nicuesa lived with these few miserable men, there arose a contention among them of Vraba, 
Contention about the lievetenauntship of Uraba.  as concerning the Lievetenantshippe. For one Vaschus Nunnez, 
Ua●chus Nunnez month sedition.  by the judgement of all men, trusting more to his strength then wit, stoured up certain light fellows against Ancisus, saying that Ancisus had not the kings letters patents for that office: And that it was not sufficient that he was authorised by Fogeda. 
Ancisus lieutenant for Fogeda.  And therefore forbodde that he should execute the office of the Lievetenaunteshippe: And willed them to choose certain of their own coompanye, by whose counsel and authority they might be governed.  
Thus being divided into factions by reason that Fogeda, their captain came not again, whom they supposed to be now dead of his venomous wound, they contended whether it were best to substitute Nicuesa in his place. The wisest sort such as were familiar with Nicuesa, and could not bear th'insolency of Vaschus Nunnez, thowght it good that Nicuesa should be, 
Nicu●sa.  sowght out through out all those coasts. For they had knowledge that he departed from Beragua because of the barrenness of the ground: And that by th'exemple of Ancisus, and such other as had made shipwreck, it were possible that he might wander in sum secret place: And that they could not be quiet in their minds until they knew the certainty, whether he with his fellows were alive or dead. But Vaschus Nunnez, fearing least at the coming of Nicuesa he should not be had in authority among his fellows, said they were mad men to think that Nicuesa lived: And although he were alive, yet that they had no need of his help. For he avouched that there was none of his fellows, that were not as meet to rule as Nicuesa. While they were thus reasoning too and froo, one Rodericus Colmenaris arrived in those coasts with two great ships having in them three score fresh men, 
Rodericus Colmenaris.  with great plenty of victuals and apparel. Of the navigation of this Colmenaris, 
The navigation of Rodericus Colmenaris.  I intend to speak somewhat more. He therefore departed from the haven of Hispaniola called Beata (where they prepare and furnish themselves which make any voyage into these lands) about the Ideses of October in the year .1510: And landed the ix of November in a Region in the large province of Paria found by Colonus between the haven Carthago and the Region of Cuchibachoa. 
Cuchibacoa.  In this voyage what by the roughness of the sea & fierceness of the barbarians, he suffered many incommodities. For when his fresh water failed, he sailed to the mouth of a certain river which thinhabitants call Gaira, 
The river Gaira.  being apt to receive ships. This river had his course from the top of an exceeding high mountain covered with snow, 
An exceeding high mountain covered with snow.  higher than the which, all the companions of this captain Rodericus, say that they never saw. And that by good reason, if it were covered with snow in that Region which is not past ten degrees distant from the Equinoctial line. As they began to draw water out of their shippeboate, a certain King made toward them apparelled with vestures of gossampine cotton, having twenty noble men in his coompanye apparelled also: 
Apparelled men.  Which thing seemed strange to hour men, and not seen before in those parties. The kings apparel, hung lose from his shoulders to his elbows: And from the ge●dle downward, it was much like a woman's kertle, reaching even to his heels. As he drew near toward hour men, he seemed friendly to admonish them to take none of the water of that river, affirming it to be unwholesome for men: And showed them that not far from thence, there was a river of good water. They came to the river. And endeavouring to come near the shore, they were driven back by tempest. Also the burbulinge of the sand, declared the sea to be but shallow there. They were therefore enforced to return to the first river where they might safely cast anchor. This King laid wait for hour men. For as they were fyllinge their barrels, he set on them with about seven hundredth men (as hour men judged) armed after their manner, although they were naked. For only the king and his noble men were apparelled. They took away the shippeboate, and brook it in manner to chips: so fiercely assyling hour men with their venomous arrows, 
Seven and forty spaniards are s●aine with venomous arrows.  that they slew of them forty and seven before they could cover themselves with their targets. For that poison is of such force, that albeit the wounds were not great, yet they died thereof immediately. For they yet knew no remedy against this kind of poison, 
jerua.  
A remedy against venomous arrows  as they after learned of thinhabitants of Hispaniola. For this Island bringeth forth an herb which quencheth and mortifieth the violent poison of the herb wherewith their arrows are infected, so that it be ministered in tyme. Yet of hour company which went for water, seven escaped that conflict, and hid themselves in a hollow tree, 
Seven men left behind.  lurking there until night. Yet escaped they not the hands of their enemies. For the ship departed from thence in the night season and left them there, supposing that they had been slain. Thus by many▪ such perils and dangers (which I lightly overpass because I will not be tedious to your holiness) he arrived at the length at the haven of Vraba, 
The haven of Uraba.  and cast anchor at the east side thereof, from whence not long before, hour men departed to the west side by reason of the barrenness of that soil. When he had continued a while in the haven, and saw no man stouring, marveling at the silence of the places (for he supposed there to have fowunde his fellows) he could not coviecture what this should mean: and there upon began to suspect that either they were dead, or that they had changed the place of their habitation. To know the certainty hereof, he commanded all the great ordinance and other smaule guns which he had in his ships, to be charged: And fierce to be made in the night upon the tops of the rocks. Thus the fierce being kindled, he commanded all the guns to be shot of at one instant: by the horrible noise whereof, the gulf of Vraba was shaken, 
The gulf of Uraba.  although it were xxiiii miles distant: for so broad is the gulf. This noise was hard of their fellows in Dariena: 
Dariena.  And they answered them again with mutual fierce. Wherefore, by the following of these fierce, Colmenaris browght his ships to the West side. Here those wretched and miserable men of Dariena which now tho rough famen and feebleness held their weary souls in their teeth ready to depart from their bodies by reason of the calamities which befell unto them after Ancisus shipwreck, 
Famen.  lifting up their hands to heaven, with the tears running down their cheeks both for joy and sorrow, embraced Rodericus and his fellows with such kind of rejoicing as their present necessity seemed to require. For whereas they were before his coming, without victuals and almost naked, he brought them abundance of meat, drink, and apparel. It resteth now (most holy father) to declare what came of the dissension among them of Vraba, 
what became of the contention of Uraba  as concerning the governance after the loss of their captains.   

¶ The third book of the second Decade of the supposed continent.  
ALl the chief officers in Beragua, 
Beragua.  and such as were most politic in counsel, determined that Nicuesa should be sowght owte if by any means he could be found. Where upon they took from Ancisus the governor refusing the coming of Nicuesa, a brygantyne which he made of his own charges: And agreed, against both the will of Ancisus, and the master of fence Vaschus Nunnez, that Nicuesa should be sowght forth to take away the strife as touching the government. 
Nicuesa is sought forth  They elected therefore Colmenaris (of whom we spoke before) to take this matter in hand: willing him to make diligent search for Nicuesa in those coasts where they supposed he erred. For they hard that he had forsaken Beragua, the region of an unfruitful ground. They gave him therefore commandment to bring Nicuesa with him, and further to declare unto him that he should do right good service to come thither, in taking away thoccasion of their seditions. Colmenaris took the thing upon him the more gladly because Nicuesa was his very friend: Supposing that his coming with victuals should be no less thankful to Nicuesa and his company, than it was to them of Vraba. Furnysshing therefore one of his own ships which he browght with him and also the brigantyne taken from Ancisus, he freighted the same with part of the victuals and other necessaries which he browght with him before from Hispaniola to Vraba. Thus coursing along by all the coasts and gulfs near there about, at the length at the point called Marmor, he found Nicuesa, 
Nicuesa is found in a miserable case.  of all living men most infortunate, in manner dried up with extreme hunger, filthy and horrible to behold, with only three score men in his company, left alive of seven hundredth. They all seemed to him so miserable, that he no less lamented their case, then if he had found them dead. But Colmenaris comforted his friend Nicuesa: and embracing him with tears and cheerful words, relieved his spirits, and further encouraged him with great hope of better fortune: declaring also that his coming was looked for and greatly desired of all the good men of Vraba, for that they hoped that by his authority, their discord and contention should be finished. Nicuesa thanked his friend Colmenaris. after such sort as his calamity required. Thus they took ship together, and sailed directly to Vraba. But so variable and unconstant is the nature of man, that he soon groweth out of use, becometh insolent and unmyndful of benefits after to much felicity. 
Insolence of to much felicity.  For Nicuesa, after thus many tears and weepynges after divers bewailings of his infortunate destiny, after so many thanks giving, ye after that he had faulen down to the ground and kissed the feet of Colmenaris his saviour, he began to quarrel with him before he came yet at Vraba, reproving him and them all for th'alteration of the state of things in Vraba, and for the gathering of gold: Affirming that none of them ought to have laid hand of any gold with out the advice of him or of Fogeda his coompanion. When these sayings and such like, came to the ears of them of Vraba, they so stoured up the minds of Ancisus lieutenant for Fogeda, and also of Vaschus Nunnez, of the contrary part, against Nicuesa, 
Nicuesa falleth from one misery into an other.  that shortly after his arrival with his three score men, they commanded him with threatening to depart from thence. But this pleased not the better sort. Yet fearing least tumult should be among the people whom Vaschus Nunnez had stired to factions, the best part was fain to give place to the greatest. 
The greatest part overcometh the best  This wretched man therefore Nicuesa thus drowned in miseries, was thrust into the brigantyne which he himself browght: and with him only seventeen men, of his three score which remained alive. He took ship in the kalends of March in the year .1511. intending to go to Hispaniola to coomplayne of the rasshenes of Vaschus Nunnez, and of the violence done to him by Ancisus. 
The death of Nicuesa.  But he entered into the brigantine in an unfortunate hour: for he was never seen after. They suppose that the brigantine was drowned with all the men therein. And thus unhappy Nicuesa falling headlong out of one misery into an other, ended his life more miserably than he lived. Nicuesa being thus vilely rejected, 
Famen enforceth them to faule to spoiling.  & all their victuals consumed which Colmenaris browght them, falling in manner mad for hunger, they were enforced like ravening wolves seeking their pray, to invade such as dwelt about their confines. Vas●hus Nunnez therefore, 
Uaschus usurpeth thautorit●e of the Lievetenantshippe.  their new captain of their own election, assembling together a hundredth and thirty men, and setting them in order of battle after his swoordeplayers fashion, puffed up with pride, placed his soldiers as pleased him in the forward and rearward, and sum as pertisens' about his own person. Thus associating with him Colmenaris, he went to spoil the kings which were borderers there about, and came first to a Region about that coast, called Coiba, (whereof we made mention before) imperiously and with cruel countenance commanding the king of the region whose name was Careta, 
Careta, king of Coiba.  (of whom they were never troubled as often as they passed by his dominions) to give them victuals. But Careta denied that he could give them any at that time: alleging that he had oftentimes aided the Christians as they passed by those coasts: by reason whereof his store was now consumed: Also that by the means of the continual war which he kept ever from his child's age with a king whose name is Poncha, bortheringe upon his dominion, he and his family were in great scarceness of all things. But Vaschus would admit none of these excuses: And thereupon took Careta prisoner, 
king Careta is taken and spoiled.  spoiled his village, and browght him bound with his two wives and children and all his family to Dariena. With this king Careta, they found three of the fellows of Nicuesa, the which when Nicuesa passed by those coasts to seek Beragua, fearing punishment for their evil deserts stoule away from the ships lying at anchor: And when the navy departed, committed themselves to the mercy of Careta, who entertained them very friendly. They had now bin there xviii moons, and were therefore as utterly naked as the people of the country. During this time, the meat of thinhabitances seemed unto them delicate di●shes and princely fare: 
hunger is the best sauce.  especially because they enjoyed the same without any strife for mine and thine, 
Wine & thine the seeds of all mischief.  which two things move and enforce men to such hard shifts and miseries, that in living they seem not to live. Yet desired they to return to their owlde cares, of such force is education and natural effection toward them with whom we have been browght up. The victuals which Vaschus browght from the village of Careta to his fellows left in Dariena, was rather somewhat to assuage their present hunger, and utterly to take away their necessity. But as touching Anc●sus being lieutenant for Fogeda, 
Ancisus, lieutenant for Fogeda is cast in prison.  whether it were before these things or after, I know not. But this I am sure of, that after the rejecting of Nicu●sa, many occasions were sought against Ancisus by Vascus and his factionaries. How so ever it was, Ancisus was taken, and cast in prison, and his goods confiscate. The cause hereof was, (as Vaschus alleged) that Ancisus had his commission of the Lievetenauntshippe, of Fogeda only whom they said to be now dead, and not of the king. saying that he would not obey any man that was not put in office by the king himself by his letters patents. Yet at the request of the graveste sort, he was somewhat pacified, and dealt more gently with him, having sum compassion of his calamities. And thereupon commanded him to be loosed. Ancisus being at liberty, took ship to depart from thence to Hispaniola. 
Anci●us taketh his viage to hispaniola.  But before he had hoist up his sail, all the wisest sort resorted to him, humbly desiring him to return again: promising that they would do their diligence, that Vaschus being reconciled, he might be restored to his full authority of the Lievetenauntshippe. But Ancisus refused to consent to their request and so departed. Yet sum there were that murmured that god and his angels showed this revenge upon Ancisus, 
The revenge of God.  because Nicuesa was rejected through his counsel. How so ever it be, the searchers of the new lands, fall headlong into ruin by their own folly, consuming themselves with civil discord, 
The inconveniences of discord.  not weighing so great a matter, nor employing their best endeavour about the same as the worthiness of the thing requireth. In this mean time, they determined all with one agreement, to send messengers into Hispaniola to the young Admiral and viceroy, son and heir to Christophorus Colonus the finder of these lands, 
The son & heyr● of Colonus, is Admiral and viceroy of hispaniola.  and to the other governors of the Island (from whom the new lands receive their aid and laws) to signify unto them what state they stood in, and in what necessity they lived: also what they had found, and in what hope they were of greater things if they were furnished with plenty of victuals and other necessaries. For this purpose they elected at the assignment of Vascus, one Valdivia,, 
Valdivia.  being one of his faction, and instructed by him against Anc●sus. And to be assistant with him, they appointed one Zamudius a Cantabrian: So that commandment was given to Valdivia to return from Hispaniola with victuals: And Zamudius was appointed to take his viage into Spain to the king. 
zamudius & Ancisus, take their viage to Spain.  They took ship both together with Ancisus, having in mind to certify the king how things were handled there, much otherwise then Zamudius information. I myself spoke with both Ancisus and Zamudius at their coming to the court. While they were occupied about these matters, those wretched men of Dariena loosed Carera the king of Coiba upon condition that he should aid them in their wars against his enemy and theirs, king Poncha bortheringe upon his dominions. 
king Poncha.  Careta made a league with them, promising that as they passed by his kingdom, he would give them all things necessary, and meet them with an army of men, to go forward with them to the battle against Poncha. Their weapons are neither bows nor venemed arrows, as we said thinhabitants to have which dwell eastward beyond the gulf. They fight therefore at hand, with long sword (which they call Macanas) made of wood because they have no Iren. 
Swords of wood.  They use also long staves like ia●elens hardened at the ends with fire, or typte with bone. Also certain stings and darts. Thus after the league made with Careta, both he and hour men had certain days appointed them to till their ground and sow their seeds. This done, by the aid of Careta and by his conduction, they marched toward the palace of Poncha, 
king Careta conspireth with the spaniards against king Poncha.  who foedde at their coming. They spoiled his village and mytigated their hunger with such victuals as they found there. Yet could they not help their fellows therewith by reason of the far distance of the place, although they had great plenty. For the village of Poncha, was more than a hundredth miles distant from Dariena: whereas was also none other remedy but that the same should have been carried on men's backs to the sea side being far of, where they left their ships in the which they came to the village of Car●ta. Here they found certain pounds weight of gold, graven & wrought into sundry ouches. 
wrought gold  After the sacking of this village they resorted toward the ships intending to leave the kings of the inland untouched at this time, & to invade only them which dwelled by the sea coasts. Not far from Coiba, in the same tract, there is a Region named Comogra, 
The region of Comogra, distant from Dariena thirty. leaques.  and the King thereof, called Comogrus after the same name. To this King they came first next after the subversion of Poncha: And found his palace situate in a fruitful plain of twelve leaques in breadth, at the roots of the further side of the next mountains. Comogrus had in his court a certain noble man of nexe consanguinity to King Careta, which had fled to Comogrus by reason of certain dissension which was between Careta and him. These noble men, they call jura. 
king Comogrus.  This jura therefore of Coiba, met hour men by the way, and conciled Comogrus to them, because he was well known to our men from the time that Nicuesa passed first by those coasts. Hour men therefore went quietly to the palace of Comogrus being distant from Dariena thirty leaques by a plain way about the mountains, This King Comogrus, had seven sons, 
The kings palace.  young men of comely form and stature, which he had by sundry wives. His palace was framed of posts or props made of trees fastened togeyther after a strange sort, and of so strong building, that it is of no less strength than walls of stone. They which measured the length of the flower thereof, found it to be a hundredth and fifty paces, and in breadthe, four score foot: being roofed and paved with marvelous art. They found his store house, furnished with abundance of delicate victuals after the manner of their country: And his wine cellar replenished with great vessels of earth and also of wood filled with their kind of wine and cider. 
wine & cider  For they have no grapes. But like as they make their bread of those three kinds of roots called jucca, agis, and Naizium, (whereof we spoke in the first decade) So make they their wine of the fruits of date trees, and cider of other fruits and seeds, as do the Almains, flemings english men, and hour spaniards which inhabit the mountains, as the Uascons and Asturians: likewise in the mountains of the Alpes, the Noricians, suevians, and Helvetians, make certain drinks of barley, wheat, hops, and apples. They say also that with Comogrus, they drunk wines of sundry tastes, both white and black. 
Black wine.  But now you shall hear of a thing more monstrous too behold. Entering therefore into the inner parts of the palace, they were browght into a chamber hanged about with the carcases of men, 
The bodies of dead kings, religiously honoured.  tied with ropes of gossampine cotton. Being demanded what they meant by that superstition, they answered that those were the carcases of the father, grandfather, and great grandfather with the other ancestors of their King Comogrus. declaring that they had the same in great reverence, and that they took it for a godly thing to honour them religiously: And therefore apparelled every of the same sumptuously with gold and precious stones according unto their estate. After this sort did the antiquity honour their Penates, 
Penat●s.  which they thowght had the governance of their lives. How they dry these carcases upon certain instruments made of wood, 
The carcases of men dried  like unto hurdles, with a soft fire under the same, so that only the skin remaineth to hold the bones together, we have described in the former decade. Of Comogrus his seven sons, the eldest had an excellent natural wit. 
The kings son a young man of excellent wit,  He therefore thowght it good to flatter and please this wand'ring kind of men (our men I mean) living only by shifts and spoil, least being offended and seeking occasions against him and his family, they should handle him as they did other which sowght no means how to gratify them. Wherefore, he gave Vaschus and Colmenaris four thousand ounces of gold artificially wrought, 
Four thousand ounces of wrought gold.  and also fifty slaves which he had taken in the wars. For such, either they sell for exchaunce of other things, or otherwise use them as them lysteth▪ For they have not the use of money. This gold with as much more which they had in an other place, hour men weighed in the porch of Comogrus his palace to separate the fift part thereof, 
The distribution of gold.  which portion is due to the Kings escheker. For it is decreed that the fift part of both gold, pearls, and precious stones, should be assigned to the kings treasurers: And the residue, to be divided among themselves by composition. Here as brabbling and contention arose among our men about the dividing of gold, this eldest son of King Comogrus being present, whom we praised for his wisdom, coming sum what with an angry countenance toward him which held the balences, he struck them with his fist, and scattered all the gold that was therein, 
Young Comogrus his oration.  about the porch, sharply rebuking them with words in this effect. What is the matter you Christian men, that you so greatly esteem so little a portion of gold more than your own quietness, which nevertheless you intend to deface from these fair ouches and to melt the same into a rude mass. If your hunger of gold be so insatiable that only for the desire you have thereto, 
The hunger of gold.  you disquiet so many nations, and you your selves also sustain so many calamities and incommodities, living like banished men out of your own country, I will show you a Region floweinge with gold, 
A reg●on flowing with gold.  where you may satisfy your ravening appetites. But you must attempt the thing with a greater power: For it standeth you in hand by force of arms to overcome kings of great puissance, and rigorous defenders of their dominions. For beside other, the great king Tumanama will come forth against you, 
king Tumanama.  whose kengdome is most rich with gold, and distant from hence only six sons: that is, six days: for they number the days by the son. 
Canibales.  Furthermore, or ever you can come thither, you must pass over the mountains inhabited of the cruel Canybales a fierce kind of men, devourers of man's flesh, living without laws, wandering, and without empire. For they also, being desirous of gold, have subdued them under their dominion which before inhabited the gold mines of the mountains, 
The gold mines of the mountains.  and use them like bondmen, using their labour in dygginge and working their gold in plates and sundry Images like unto these which you see here. For we do no more esteem rude gold unwrought, 
Unwrought gold not esteemed.  than we do clods of earth, before it be form by the hand of the workman to the similitude either of sum vessel necessary for hour use, or sum ouche bewetifull to be worn. These things do we receive of them for exchange of other of hour things, as of prisoners taken in war, 
Exchange.  which they buy to eat, or for sheets and other things pertaining to the furniture of household, such as they lack which inhabit the mountains: And especially for victuals whereof they stand in great need by reason of the barrenness of the mountains. This journey therefore, must be made open by force of men. And when you are passing over these mountains (pointing with his finger toward the south mountains) you shall see an other sea, where they sail with ships as big as yowres (meaning the caravels) using both sails and oars as you do, 
Abundance of gold.  although the men be naked as we are. All the way that the water runnethe from t●e mountains, and all that side lying toward the south, bringeth forth gold abundantly. As he said these words, he pointed to the vessels in which they use to serve their meat, affirmyng● that king Tumanama, and all the other kings beyond the mountains, had such and all their other household stuff of gold: 
household stuff of gold  And that there was no less plenty of gold among those people of the south, then of Iren with us. For he knew by relation of hour men, whereof hour swords and other weapons were made. Hour captains marvelling at the oration of the naked young man (for they had for interpreters those three men which had been before a year and a half conversant in the court of king Careta) pondered in their minds, & earnestly considered his sayings. So that his rasshenes in scattering the gold owte of the balances, they turned to mirth and urbanity, commending his doing and saying therein. Then they asked him friendly, upon what certain knoweleage he spoke those things: Or what he thowght best herein to be done if they should bring a greater supply of men. To this, young Comogrus, staying a while with himself as it were an orator preparing himself to speak of sum grave matter, and disposing his body to a giesture meet to persuade, spoke thus in his mother tongue. give ear unto me o you Christians. Albeit that the greedy hunger of gold hath not yet vexed us naked men, 
Naked people tormented with ambition  yet do we destroy one an other by reason of ambition and desire to rule. Hereof springeth mortal hatred among us, and hereof cometh hour destruction. Hour predecessors kept wars, and so did Comogrus my father with princes being borderers about him. In the which wars, as we have overcome, so have we been over come, as doth appear by the number of bondmen among us, which we took by the overthrow of hour enemies, of the which I have given you fifty. Likewise at an other time, hour adversaries having th'upper hand against us, led away many of us captive. For such is the chance of war. Also, among hour familiars (whereof a great number have been captives with them) behold here is one which of long time led a painful life in bondage under the yoke of that king beyond the mountains, in whose kingdom is such abundance of gold. Of him, and such other innumerable, and likewise by the resort of free men on their side coming to us, and again of hour men resorting to them by safe conduct, these things have been ever as well known unto us, 
A vehement persuasion.  as hour own possessions. But that you may be the better assured hereof, and be out of all suspection that you shall not be deceived, make me the guide of this voyage, binding me fast and keeping me in safe custody to be hanged on the next tree, if you find my sayings in any point untrue. Follow my counsel therefore, and send for a thousand Christian men apt for the wars, by whose power we may with also the men of war of Comogrus my father armed after hour manner, invade the dominions of hour enemies: where, both you may be satisfied with gold, and we for hour conducting and aiding you in this enterprise, shall think hour selves abundantly rewarded, in that you shall help to deliver us from the injuries and perpetual fear of hour enemies. After these words, this prudent young Comogrus held his peace. And hour men moved with great hope and hunger of gold, 
A token of hunger.  began again to swallow down their spertle.   

¶ The fourth book of the second Decade, of the supposed Continent.  
AFter that they had tarried here a few days and baptized Comogrus with all his family, 
king Comogrus is baptized with his family.  and named him by the name of Charles after the king of Spain, they returned to their fellows in Dariena leaving with him the hope of the thousand soldiers, which his son required to pass over those mountains toward the South sea. Thus entering into the village which they had chosen to inhabit, they had knowledge that Valdivia was returned, 
Ualdivia returneth from hispaniola.  within six moons after his departure: but with no great plenty of victuals, because he browght but a smaule ship: yet with hope that shortly after, there should be sent them abundance of victuals with a new supply of men. For young Colonus, the Admiral and viceroy of Hispaniola, and the other governors of the Island, acknowleaged that hitherto they had no respect to them of Dariena, because they supposed that Ancisus the Lieutenant had safely arrived there with his ship laden with vatayles: willing them from hensefoorth to be of good cheer, and that they should lack nothing hereafter: But that at this present time, they had no bigger ship whereby they might send them greater plenty of necessaries by Valdivia. The victuals therefore which he browght, served rather somewhat to mitigate their present necessity, then to satisfy their lack. Wherefore within a few days after Valdivia his return, they fell again into like scarceness: especially for as much as a great storm and tempest which came from the high mountains with horrible thunder and lightening in the month of November, 
horrible thunder and lightning in the month of November.  browght with it such a flood, that it partly carried away and partly drowned all the corn and seeds which they had sown in the moonethe of September in a fruitful ●rounde before they went to king Comogrus. The seeds which they of Hispaniola call Maizium, 
Bread of Maizius & hobba  and they of Vraba call Hobba: Whereof they make their bread, which also we said to be ripe thrice every year, because those Regions are not bitten with the sharpness of winter by reason of their nearness to the Equinoctial line. It is also agreeable to the principles of natural philosophy, that this bread made of Maizius or Hobba, should be more wholesome for thinhabitants of those countries than bread made of wheat, by reason that it is of easier digestion. 
Digestion strengthened by outward cold.  For whereas could is wanting, the natural heat is not driven from the owtewarde parts into the inward parts and precordials, whereby digestion is much strengthened. Being therefore thus frustrate of the increase of their seeds, and the kings near about them spoiled of both victuals and gold, they were enforced to seek their meat further of: 
hunger.  And therewith to signify to the governors of Hispaniola with what great necessity they were oppressed: And what they had learned of Comogrus as concerning the Regions toward the south: willing them in consideration thereof to advertise the king to send them a thousand soldiers, 
A new supply of a thousand soldiers.  by whose help they might by force make way through the mountains dividing the sea on both sides, if they could not bring the same to pass quietly. The same Valdivia was also sent on this message, carrying with him to the kings treasurers (having their office of receipt in Hispaniola) three hundredth pounds weight of gold after eight ounces to the pound, for the fift portion dew to the kings escheker. This pound of viii ounces, the spaniards call Marcha, 
Marcha.  which in weight amounteth to fifty pieces of gold called Castellani. But the Castilians, call a pound Pesum. We conclude therefore, 
Pesus.  that the sum hereof, was xu thousand of those pieces of gold called Castellani. And thus is it apparent by this account, that they received of the barbarous kings, a thousand and five hundredth pounds of eight ounces to the pound. 
A thousand and five hundredth pounds weight of wrought gold  All the which they found ready wrought in sundry kinds of ouches, as chains, bracelets, tablets, and plates, both to hang before their breasts, and also at their ears, and nosethryls. Valdivia therefore took shyppinge in the same caravel in the which he came last, and returned also before the third day of the Ideses of january, in the year of Christ M.D.XI What chanced to him in this viage, we will declare in place convenient. But let us now return to them which remained in Vraba. After the dismissing of Valdivia, being pricked forward with owtragious hunger, they determined to search the inner parts of that gulf in sundry places. 
The gulf of Uraba.  The extreme angle or point of the same gulf is distant from the entrance thereof, about four score miles. This angle or corner, the spaniards call Culata. 
Culata.  Vaschus himself came to this point with a hundredth men, coasting along by the gulf with one brygantine and certain of the boats of those regions, which the Urabians call Vru, 
Uaschus searcheth the gulf of Uraba.  like unto them which thinhabitants of Hispaniola call Canoas'. From this point, there falleth a river from the East into the gulf, 
A marvelous great river▪ falling into the gnuffe of Uraba.  ten times bigger than the river of Dariena which also falleth into the same. Sailing along by the river about the space of thirty miles (for they call it nine leaques) and somewhat inclining toward the right hand southward, they found certain villages of thinhabitants, the King whereof, was called Dabaiba. Hour men also were certified before, that Cemacchus the king of Dariena whom they put to flight in the battle, 
king Dabaiba and ●hemacchus, are driven to flight.  fled to this Dabaiba. But at the coming of hour men, Dabaiba also fled. It is thowght that he was admonished by Cemacchus, that he should not abide the brunt of hour men. He followed his counsel: forsook his villages, and left all things desolate. Yet hour men found heaps of bows and arrows: Also much household stuff and many fishing boats. But those marish grounds were neither apt for sowing of seeds or planting of trees. 
Marysshe ground  By reason whereof, they found there few such things as they desired that is, plenty of victuals. For thinhabitants of this Region, have no bread but such as they get in other countries near about them by exchange for their fy●she, only to serve their own necessity. Yet found they in the houses of them that fled, gold wrought and graven, amounting to the sum of seven thousand of those pieces which we said to be called Castellani: 
wrought gold wheyghing seven. thousand Castellane●.  Also certain canoas: of the which they brought away two with them, and great plenty of their household stuff, with certain bundles of bows and arrows. They say, that from the marishes of that river, there come certain bats in the night season, as big as turtle doves, 
Bats as big as turtle doue●.  invading men and biting them with a deadly wound, as sum of them testify which have been bitten of the same. I myself communing with Ancisus the Lieutenant whom they rejected, 
Ancisus bitten of a bat  and among other things asking him of the venomous biting of these bats, he told me that he himself was bitten by one of them on the heel, his foot lying uncovered in the night by reason of the heat in summer season: But that it hurt him no more, then if he had been bitten by any other beast not venomous. Other say, that the biting of sum of them is venomous: Yet that the same is healed incontinently, 
Remedies against venomous arrows  if it be washed with water of the sea. Ancisus told me also, that the venomous wounds made by the Canibales arrows infected with poison, are healed by washing with water of the sea, and also by cauterising with hot Irens: And that he had experience thereof in the region of Caribana, where many of his men were so wounded. They departed therefore, from the point of the gulf of Vraba, not well contented because they were not laden with victuals. In this their return, there arose so great a tempest in that wide gulf, 
A tempest.  that they were enforced to cast into the sea, all the household stuff which they took from the poor wretches which lived only by fisshinge. The sea also swallowed up the two boats that they took from them, wherewith the men were likewise drowned. The same time that Vaschus Nunnez attempted to search the point of the gulf toward the south, even then by agreement, did Rodericus Colmenaris take his voyage toward the mountains by the east, 
Colmenaris taketh his viage toward the mountains  with threscormen, by the river of the other gulf. About forty miles distant from the mouth of the river, (for they call it twelve leaques) he found certain villages situate upon the banks of the river, whose Chivi, (that is,) king, they call Turui. With this king did Colmenaris yet remain when Vaschus after his return to Dariena, sailing by the same river, came to him. Here refreshing their hole company with the victuals of this Turui, 
king Turui.  they departed from thence together. Other forty miles from hence, the river encoompaseth an Island inhabited with fisher men. In this, because they saw great plenty of the trees which bear Cassia fistula, they named the Island Cannafistula. 
The Island of Cannafistula.  They found in it, threescore villages of ten cottages apiece. On the right side of the Island there runneth an other river, whose channel is of depth suffiente to bear brigantines. This river they called Riwm Nigrum: 
She river or Riuu● Niger. A to●●e of v. hundredth houses.  from the mouth whereof about xv. miles distant they found a town of five hundredth houses severed: whose Chebi, (that is,) king, was called Abenamachei. They all forsook their houses as soon as they hard of hour men's coming. But when they saw that hour men pursued them, they turned again and ran upon them with desperate minds, as men driven from their own possessions. Their weapons, are sword of wood, and long staves like iavelens, hardened at the end with fire: But they use neither bows nor arrows: nor any other of thinhabitants of the west side of the gulf. 
Th●nhabitantes of the west ●yde of the gulf.  The poor naked wretches were easily driven to flight with hour weapons. As hour men followed them in the chase, they took the king Abenamachei and certain of his noble men. 
king Abenamachei, is taken and his arm cut of.  A common soldier of ours whom the king had wounded, coomminge to him when he was taken, cut of his arm at one stroke with his sword. But this was done unwares to the captains. The number of the Christian men which were here, was about a hundreth and fifty: the one half whereof, the capitains left here, and they with the residue, rowed up the river again with twelve of the boats of those Regions, which they cawl. Vru, as they of Hispaniola call them Canoas', as we have said. From the river of Riuus Niger and the Island of Cannafistula, 
Many other rivers fauling into Riuus Niger.  for the space of threescore and ten miles, leaving both on the right hand & on the left many rivers faulinge into it bigger than itself, they entered into one by the conducting of one of the naked inhabitants, being appointed a guide for that purpose. Upon the bank of this river next unto the mouth of the same, there was a king called Abibeiba: 
king abibeiba dwelleth in a tree.  who, because the Region was full of marishes, had his palace builded in the top of a high tree, a new kind of building and seldom seen. But that land beareth trees of such exceeding height, 
Abundance of moister & heat is cause of bigness.  that among their branches, a man may frame large houses: As we reed the like in divers authors how in many Regions where the ocean sea riseth and overflowethe the land, the people were accustomed to fly to the high trees, and after the fall of the water, to take the fish left on the land. 
The rising of the Ocean sea.  This manner of building, is to lay beams cross over the branches of the trees, fast bound together, and there upon to raise their frame, strongly made against wind and wether. Hour men suppose that they build their houses in trees, by reason of the great floods and overflowing of rivers which often times chance in those Regions. These trees are of such height, 
Trees of marvelous height  that the strength of no manes arm is able to hurl a stone to the houses builded therein. And therefore do I give the better credit to Pliny and other authors which writ that the trees in sum places in India are so high by reason of the fruitfulness of the ground, 
Pliny.  abundance of water, and heat of the Region, that no man is able to shoot over them with an arrow. And by judgement of all men, it is thowght that there is no frutfuller ground under the son, 
Fruitful ground.  than this is whereof we now entreat. our men measuring many of these trees, found them to be of such biggnes, that seven men, ye sometimes eight, holding hand in hand with their arms stretched forth, were scarcely able too fath●me them about. Yet have they their cellars in the ground, 
Cellars in the ground.  well replenished with such wines whereof we have spoken before. For albeit that the vehemency of the wind, is not of pour to cast down those houses, or to breeke the branches of the trees, yet are they tossed therewith, and sway somewhat from side to side, by reason whereof, the wine should be much troubled with moving. All other necessary things, they have with them in the trees. When the king or any other of the noble men, dine or sup in these trees, their wives are browght them from the celleres by their servants, which by means of exercise, are accustomed with no less celerity to run up and down the steers adherente to the tree, then do hour waiting boys upon the plain ground, fetch us what we call for from the cobbarde bysyde our dyninge table. Hour men therefore, came to the tree of king Abibeiba, and by thinterpreters called him forth to communication, giving him signs of peace, and there upon willing him to come down. But he denied that he would come out of his house: desiring them to suffer him to live after his fashion. But hour men fell from fair words to threatening, that except he would descend with all his family, they would either overthrow the tree, or else set it on fire. When he had denied them again, they fell to hewing the tree with their axes. Abibeiba seeing the chips faule from the tree on every side, 
Abibeiba, the king of the tree, yeldethe to Uaschus.  changed his purpose, and came down with only two of his son's. Thus after they had entreated of peace, they communed of gathering of gold. Abibeiba answered that he had no gold, and that he never had any need thereof, nor yet regarded it any more than stones. But when they were instant upon him, he said unto them. 
Gold no more esteemed then stones.  If you so greatly desire gold, I will seek for sum in the next mountains, and bring it unto you. For it is plentifully engendered in those mountains. Then he appointed a day when he would bring this gold. But Abibeiba came neither at the day, nor after the day appointed. They departed therefore from thence well refreshed with his victuals and wine, but not with gold as they hoped. Yet were they informed the like by Abibeiba and his dictionaries as concerning the gold mines and the Canibales, as they hard before of king Comogrus. Sailing yet further about thirty miles, they chanced upon certain cottages of the Canibales: 
Canibales.  But utterly void with out men or stuff. For when they had knowledge that hour men wandered in the provinces near about them they resorted to the mountains, carrying all their goods and stuff with them.   

¶ The fift book of the second Decade of the supposed continent.  
IN the mean time while these things were done along by the shores or banks of the river, a certain Decurian, that is a capitain over ten, of the coompanye of those which Vascus and Colmenaris had left for a garrison in Rivo Nigro in the dominion of king Abinamachei, whether it were that he was compelled through hunger, or that his fataule days was now come, he attempted with his soldiers to search the countries near there about, and entered into the village of a king called Abraiba. 
king Abraib●  This captains name was Raia: whom Abraiba slew, with two of his fellows: but the residue fled. Within a few days after, Abraiba having compassion of the calamity of his kinsman and neighbour Abenamacheius being driven from his own possessions (whose arm also we said before that one of the soldiers cut of at the river of Rivo Nigro and now remaining with Abraiba to whom he fled by stealth after he was taken, went to Abibeiba thinhabitor of the tree, who had now likewise forsaken his country for fear of hour men, and wandered in the desolate mountains and woods. When he had therefore found him, he spoke to him in this effect. 
Abraiba causeth the kings to rebel.  What thing is this Oh unfortunate Abibeiba? or what nation is this that so tormenteth us that we can not enjoy hour quiet liberty? How long, how long I say shall we suffer their cruelty? were it not much better for us to die, then to abide such injuries and oppressions as you, as Abinamacheius hour kinsman, as Cemacchus, as Careta, as Poncha, as I and other princes of our order do sustain? Can any thing be more intolerable then to see hour wives, hour children, and hour subjects, to be led away captives, and hour goods to be spoiled even before hour faces.  
I take the gods to witness, that I speak not so much for mine own part as I do for you whose case I lament. For albeit they have not yet touched me, nevertheless, by the example of other, I ought to think that my destruction is not far of. 
Men good enough if they had ●ren  Let us therefore (if we be men) try hour strength and prove hour fortune against them which have dealt thus cruelly with Abenam●cheius, and driven him out of his country. Let us set on them with all hour pour, and utterly destroy them And if we can not slay them all, yet shall we make them afraid either to assail us again, or at the least dimynysshe their power. For what so ever shall befaule, nothing can chance worse unto us then that which we now suffer. When Abibeiba hard these words and such other like, he condecended to do in all things as Abraiba would require: Where upon they appointed a day to bring their conspiracy to pass. But the thing chanced not according to their desire. For of those which we said to have passed to the Canibales, there returned by chance to Riuus Niger the night before the day appointed to work their feat, thirty men to the aid of them which were left there if any sedition should rise they suspected. 
The kings are driven to flight.  Therefore at the dawning of the day, the confetherate kings with five hundredth of their dictionaries armed after their manner, besieged the village with a terrible alarum, knowing nothing of the new men which came thither the same night. Here hour target men came forth against them, and first assailed them a far of with their arrows, then with their pikes, and last with their swords: But the naked silly souls, perceiving a greater number of their adversaries than they looked for, 
captives.  were soon driven to flight, and slain for the most part like scattering sheep. The kings escaped, they slew many, and took many captives which they sent to Dariena where they use them for labourers to till and sow their ground. These things thus happily achieved, and that province quieted, they returned by the river to Dariena, leaving their thirty men for a garrison under the governance of one Furatado a captain. 
A garrison of thirty. men.  This Furatado therefore, sent from Riu● Nigro where he was appointed governor, twenty of his fellows & one woman, with, xxiiii. captives to Vaschus and his company, in one of the bigest Canoas' of that province. As they rowed down by the river, 
xviii. spaniards slain and drowned  there came forth soodenly overthwart the river against them, four great Canoas', which overthrew their boat and slew as many of them as they could come by, because they were unprepared suspecting no such thing. Hour men were all drowned and slain except two, which hid themselves among certain faggots that swam on the water, in the which they lay lurking, and so escaped to their fellows in Dariena: who by them being advertised hereof, began to cast their wits what this thing might mean: being no less solicitate for themselves, then meditating in what danger their fellows had been in Rivo Nigro, except by good fortune, those thirty new men which were sent to them, had come to the village the night before the conspiracy should have been wrought. consulting therefore what was best to be done herein, at the length with diligent searching they had intelligence that five king, that is to wit, Abibeiba the inhabitoure of the tree, 
The kings which conspired the death of the Christians.  and Cem●cchus driven from his village which hour men now possessed, Abraiba also and Abenamacheius, kinsmen, with Dabaiba the king of the fisher men inhabytinge the corner of the gulf which we called Culata, were all assembled to conspire the Christian men's destruction at a day assigned. Which thing had surely come to pass, if it had not been otherwise hindered by god's providence. It is therefore ascribed to a miracle: 
A strange chance.  And truly not unworthily if we weigh how chance detected and bewrayed the counsel of these kings. And because it is worthy to be hard, I will declare it in few words. Vaschus Nunnez therefore, 
Vaschus.  who rather by pour then by election, usurped the governance in Dariena, being a master of fence, and rather a rash royster then politic captain (unless fortune sometime favoureth fools) among many women which in divers of these regions he had taken captive, had one which in favour and beauty excelled all other. To this woman her own brother often times resorted, 
women can keep no counsel.  who was also driven out of his country with king Cemacchus, with whom he was very familiar and one of his chief gentlemen. Among other communication which he had with his sister whom he loved entirely, he uttered these words. My dear and well-beloved sister, give care to my sayings, and keep most secreatelye that which I will declare unto you, if you desire your own wealth and mine, and the prosperity of hour country and kinsfolks. The insolency and cruelty of these men which have driven us out of hour possessions, is so intolerable, that the princes of the land are determined no longer to sustain their oppressions.  
By the conducting therefore of five kings (which he named in order) they have prepared a hundredth great Canoas', 
An army of C●anoas and live. W●men  with five thousand men of war by land and by sea, with victuals also in the village of Tichiri, sufficient to maintain such an army. declaring further, that the kings by agreement, had divided among them the goods and heads to hour men: 
Triumph before victory  And therefore admony●hed her, at the day appointed by sum occasion to convey herself out of the way, lest she should be slain in the confusion of the battle. For the soldier victorer, is not wont to spare any that cometh in his race. And thus shewing his sister the day assigned to the slaughter, 
Affection corru●teth true judgement.  he departed. But the young woman (for it is the sword that women fear and observe more than the gravity of Cato,) whether it were for the love or fear that she had to Vaschus, forgetting her parents, her kinsfolks, her country and all her friends, ye and all the kings into whose throats Vaschus, had thrust his sword she opened all the matter unto him, and concealed none of those things which her undiscrete brother had declared to her. When Vaschus therefore had hard the matter, he caused Fulvia, (for so had they named her) to send for her brother, who came to her immediately, was taken, and enforced to tell the hole circunstances of the matter. Where upon, he plainly confessed that king Cemacchus his lord and master, sent those four canoas to the destruction of hour men, and that these new conspiraces were attempted by his counsel. 
The con●pir●ti● of the kings is detected.  Likewise that Cemacchus sowght the destruction of Vaschus himself when he sent him forty men under pretence of friendship to till and sow his ground after the manner of the country, giving them in commandment to slay Vaschus at Marris, whither he resorted to comfort his labours as the manner is of all good husbands. Yet durst they at no time execute their lords commandment upon him, because Vaschus came never among them afoot or unarmed, 
king Cemacchus, con●●●reth the o●th of Uaschus.  but was accustomed to ride to them in harness with a iavelen in his hand and a sword by his side. Wherefore Cemacchus being frustrate of his particular counsel, took this last thing in hand to his own destruction and his neighbours. For the conspiracy being detected, Vaschus called threescore and ten soldiers, 
Ua●chus purseweth the kings with threescore & ten men.  commanding them to follow him, but declared nothing unto them whether he went or what he intended to do. He went forward therefore first toward Cemacchus which lay from him, only ten miles. But he had knowledge that he was fled to Dabaiba the king of the marshes of Culata. Yet searching his village, he found a noble man a ruler under him and also his kinsseman, whom he took prisoner with many other of his familiars and friends both men and women. The same hour that he set forward to seek for Cemacchus, Rodericus Colmenaris rowed up the river with four of their biggest Canoas' and threescore men by the conduction of the maids brother who browght him to the village of ●ichiri, 
Colmenaris ●acketh the village of Cichiri.  in the which we said all their victuals to remain which were prepared for their army. Colmenaris therefore, sacked the village, and possessed all their victuals and wine of sundry colours: likewise took the governor thereof prisoner, and hanged him on the tree in which he dwelt himself, commanding him too be shot through with arrows in the sight of thinhabitants, 
five rulers hanged and shot th●owgh with arrows.  and with him four other rulers to be hanged on iebbettes to the exemple of other rebels. This punishment thus executed upon the conspirators, strooke the hearts of all thinhabitants of the province who such fear, that there is not now a man that dare store his finger against the wrath of hour men. They live now therefore quietly: And the other kings by their exemple do the gladlier live in subjection, with less offence bearing the yoke which they can by no means shake of.   

The sixth book of the second decade of the supposed continente.  
THese things, thus finished, assemblinge all their company together they determined with one consent, that a messynger should forth with be sent to Hispaniola (from whence they have their laws and aid) to declare the hole order of all these affairs, first to the admiral and governor of the Island, and afterward to the King of Spain, and to persuade him to sen●e those thousand men which young Comogrus said to be expedient to pass over the mountains lying between them and the golden regions toward the south. 
The golden region● on the south side the mountains.  Vaschus himself did greatly affect this embassage: But neither would the residue of his fellows elect him thereto, nor his factionaries suffer him to depart: Aswell for that thereby they thought they should be left desolate, as also that they murmured that if Vaschus should once go from them, he would never return to such turmoils and calamities, by th'exemple of Valdivia and zamudius, 
The death of Ualdivia and zamudius.  who had been now absent sense the month of january, in so much that they thowght they would never come again. But the matter was otherwise then they took it, as I will show in his place. For they were perissh●d. At the lengeth after many scrutinies, they elected one john Quicedus, 
johannes Quiced●s is sent to Spain  a grave man well in years, & treasurer of the kings escheker in those provinces. They had conceived a good opinion of this Quicedus that all things should be well browght to pass by his means, aswell for his wisdom, as also that they were in good hop of his return, because he had brought his wife with him to those regions, whom he left with his fellows for a pledge of his coming again. When they had thus elected Quicedus, they were again of divers opinions whom they might join with him for assistance: affirming that it were a dangerous thing to commit so weighty a matter to one man's hands. Not that they mistrusted Quicedus. but because the life of man is frail, and the change of the air perilous, 
Change of the air is dangerous.  especially to them having now of long time been accustomed to the temperature near unto the Equinoctial, if they should be compelled to return to the North with alteration of air & diet. They thowght it therefore good to appoint a companion to Quicedus, that if ●y chance the one should fail the other might remain: And that if they both escaped, the king should give the better credit to the relation of both: After long consultation therefore, they chose Rodericus Colmenaris a man of good experience, 
Rodericus Colmenaris assistant wi●● Quicedus.  of whom we have often times made mention. For from his youth, he had travailed over all Europe by land and by sea, and was present at the doings of all things in Italy against the frenchmen: Of whose return also, they had no smaule hope because he had many fermes and h●dde tilled and sown much ground in Dariena, by th'increase whereof he might get much gold by selling the same to his fellows. He left therefore the charge of all his affairs in Dariena, with his partner Alphonsus Nunnez, a judge of the law, who also was like to have been chosen procuratoure of this viage before Colmenaris if one had not put them in remembrance that he had a wife at Matritis: 
A wife is a hindrance  fearing lest being overcome with her tears, he would no more return. Colmenaris therefore, a free man and at liberty being associate assistant with Quicedus they took shipping together in a brigantine, the fourth day of the kalends of November, in the year of Christ .1512.  
In this viage, being tossed with sundry tempests, they were by the violence of the wind, cast upon the West coasts of that large Island which in the first Decade we called Cuba, 
Cub●.  supposed to have been firm land. They were sore oppressed with hunger. For it was now three moons sense they departed from their fellows. 
Three moo●eth●●●rom 〈◊〉 to Cuba, by rea●on of tepest●  By reason whereof, they were enforced to take land to prove what aid they could get among the inhabitants. Their chance therefore, was to arrive in that part of the Island, where Valdivia was driven aland by tempest. But oh you wretched men of Dariena? Tarry for Valdivia whom you sent to provide to h●lpe your necessity's? 
〈…〉  provide for your selves rather and trust not to them whose fortune you know not. For when he arrived in Cuba, thinhabitants slew him with all his fellows, and left the caravel wherein they were carried, torn in pieces and half covered with sand on the shore: where Quicedus and Colmenaris finding the fragments thereof, bewailed their fellows misfortune. But they found none of their carcases: supposing that they were either drowned, or devoured of the Cannibals, which oftentimes make incursions into that Island to hunt for men. But at the length, by two of the Island men which they had taken, they had knowledge of Valdivia his destruction: And that thinhabitants the more greedily attempted the same, 
hurt of lavyshenes of the tongue.  for that they had hard by the babbling of one of his fellows that he had great plenty of gold. For they also take pleasure in the beauty of gold, which they form artificially into sundry ouches. Thus hour men stricken with pensiveness for the cruel destiny of their fellows, and in vain seeking revenge for their injuries, determined to forsake that unfortunate land, departing from those covetous naked barbarians with more sorrow and necessity than they were in before. Or ever they had passed the South side of Cuba, they fell into a thousand misfortunes: and had intelligence that Fogeda arrived thereabout, 
The calamity & death of Fogeda.  leading a miserable life, tossed and turmoiled with tempests and vexed with a thousand perplexities: So that departing from thence almost alone, his fellows being for the most part all consumed with maladies and famine, 
Maladies & famen.  he came with much difficulty to Hispaniola, where he died by force of the poison of his venomous wound which he had received in Vraba as we have said before. But Ancisus elected lieutenant, 
The prosperous viage of Ancisus.  sailed by all those coasts with much better fortune. For as he himself told me, he found prosperous winds in those parties, and was well entertained of thinhabitants of Cuba. But this specially in the dominion of a certain king whose name was Commendator. 
A king of Cuba baptized by the name of Commendator.  For whereas he desired of the Christian men which passed by, to be baptized, demanding the name of the governor of the Island next unto Hispaniola, being a noble man and a knight of thorder of Galatrava of which order all are called Commendatores, this kings desire was to be named after him. King Commendator therefore, friendly received Ancisus, and gave him great abundance of all things necessary. But what Ancisus learned of their religion during the time of his 
Ancisus  remaining there, I have thowght good to advertise your holiness. Yowe shall therefore understand, 
A marvellous history how God wrought miracles by the simple faith of a mariner.  that certain of hour men sailing by the coasts of Cuba, left with king Commendator▪ a certain poor mariner being diseased. Who in short space recovering his health, and having now somewhat learned their language, began to grow into great estimation with the king and his subjects, in so much that he was oftentimes the kings lieutenant in his wars against other princes his borderers. This man's fortune was so good, that all things prospered well that he took in hand. And albeit that he were not learned, yet was he a virtuous and well meaning man according to his knowledge, and did religiously honour the blessed virgin, bearing ever about with him her picture fair painted upon paper & sowed in his apparel near unto his breast: 
Be not rash in judgement  signifying unto the king, that this holiness was the cause of all his victories: persuading him to do the like, and to cast away all his Zemes which were none other than the similitudes of evil spirits, 
Zemes,  most cruel enemies and devourers of hour souls: And to take unto him the holy virgin and mother of god to be his patroness if he desired all his affairs aswell in war as in peace to succeed prosperously. Also that the blessed virgin would at no time fail him, but be ever ready to help him and his, if they would with devout hearts call upon her name. The mariner had soon persuaded the naked nation: And there upon gave the king (who demanded the same) his picture of the virgin, to whom he builded and dedicated a chapel and an altar, 
A chapel builded to the picture of the virgin Mary  ever after contemning and rejecting his Zemes. Of these Zemes made of gossampine cotton to the similitudes of spirits walking in the night which they oftentimes see, and speak with them familiarly, we have spoken sufficiently in the ninth book of the first Decade. Furthermore, according to the institution of this mariner; when the son draweth toward the fall, this king Commendator with all his family both men and women, resort daily to the said chapel of the virgin Marie, 
God re●pecteth the infancy of fa●the for zeles sake  where kneeling on their knees and reverently bawing down their heads, holding their hands joined together, they salute th'image of the virgin with these words: ave Maria, ave Maria. For few of them can rehearse any more words of this prayer. At Ancisus his being there, they took him and his fellows by the hands, and led them to this chapel with rejoicing, saying that they would show them marvelous things. When they were entered, 
One Religion turned into an other, holdeth still many th●nges of the first.  they pointed with their fingers to the Image of the virgin altobeset and hanged about with ouches and jewels and many earthen pots, filled sum with sundry meats, and sum with water, round about all the tabernacle. For these things they offer to the image in the sleede of sacrifice, according to their owlde superstition toward their Zemes. Being demanded why they did thus, they answered, 
A strange fantasy.  least the image should lack meat if perhaps it should be a hungerd. For they most certainly believe that images may hunger, and that they do eat and drink.  
But what aid and help they confess that they have had of the godly power of this image, that is of the blessed virgin, it is a thing worthy to be hard, and most assuredly to be taken for a truth. For by the report of hour men, there is such fervent godly love & zeal in these simple men toward the holy virgin, that to them being in the dangers of war against their enemies, they do in manner (if I may so term it) compel her to descend from heaven to help them in their necessities. 
The effect of godly zeal.  For such is the goodness of god, that he hath left unto men in manner a price whereby we may purchase him with his holy angels and saints, that is to wit, burning love, charity & zeal. How therefore can the blessed virgin at any time be absent from them which call for her help with pure faith & fervent love? Commendator himself, with all his noble men and gentlemen, do testify with one voice, that in a fought battle in the which this mariner was captain, bearing with him this picture of the virgin Marie, 
A miracle in the time of the battle  the Zemes of their enemies turned their backs and trembeled in the presence of the virgin's Image and in the sight of them all. For every of them bring their Zemes to the battle, hoping by their help to obtain the victory. Ye they say further, that during the time of the battle, they saw not only an Image, but a lively woman clothed in fair and white apparel, aiding them against their enemies: which thing also the enemies themselves acknowleaged, 
The virgin Mary▪ is present at the battle.  confessing that on the contrary part she appeared to them, shaking a sceptre in her hand with threatening countenance, which caused their hearts to shake and faint for fear. But after that this maryner departed from them, being taken into a ship of certain Christians passing by those coasts, Commendator declared that he with all his subjects, continually observed his institutions: In so much that being at contention with an other prince, which of their Zemes were most holy and of greatest power, the matter grew to such extremity that they tried it with hand strokes: And that in all these attempts, the blessed virgin never failed him, but was ever present in the brunt of the battle, and gave him easy victory with a smaule pour of men, against a main army of his enemies. Being demanded with what words they cried upon the virgin Mary when they assailed their enemies, they answered that they had learned no other words of the mariners doctrine, but Sancta Maria adiwa nos, Sancta Maria adiwa nos: That is, holy Mary help us, holy mary help us: And this also in the spanish tongue. For he had left these words in the mouths of all men. 
A maruelus experience of faith  While they murdered and destroyed themselves thus on both sides, they fell to entreaty of peace and agreed to try the matter, not hand to hand by combat of certain chosen for both parties as the manner was among the Romans and divers other nations in the owlde time, or by any slight or policy, but that two young men should be chosen, for each party one, with their hands bound fast behind them in the plain field, both parties being sworn to acknowledge that Zemes to be the better, which first loosed the bands of the young man which stood bound for the trial of his religion. Thus dividing themselves, 
Much like unto this, is red in. Reg. xviii.  and placeinge the said young men before them in the sight of them all, with their hands fast bound by their enemies, the contrary part called first on their Zemes (that is, the devil to whose similitude their Images are made) who immediately appeared in his likeness about the young man that stood bound in the defence of Satan's kingdom. 
The devil appeareth in his likeness   
But as soon as Commendator with his coompanye cried Sancta Maria adiwa nos, Sancta Maria adiwa nos, forthwith there appeared a fair virgin clothed in white, at whose presence the devil vanquished immediately. But the virgin having a long rod in her hand, & putting the same on the bands of the young man that stood for Commendator, his hands were loosed immediately in the sight of them all, and his bands found about the hands of him that stood for the other party, 
another miracle.  in somuch that they themselves found him double bound. But for all this, were not the enemies satissyed: querelinge that this thing was done by sum slight or devise of man, and not by the power of the better Zemes. And there upon required for thavoiding of all suspection, that there might be eight grave and sage men appointed, for each side four, which should bind the men in the sight of them all, and also give judgement whether the thing were done without craft or guile. Oh pure simplicity and constant faith: Oh golden and blessed confidence. Commendator and his familiars, doubted not to grant their enemies their request with like faith wherewith the diseased woman obtained health of the flux of her blood, 
Math. 14.  and whereby Peter feared not to walk on the sea at the sight of his master Christ. These young men therefore were bound in the presence of these eight grave men, and were placed within their lists in the sight of both parties. Thus upon a sign given, when they called upon their Zemes, there appeared in the sight of them all, 
The devil appeareth again.  a devil with a long tail, a wide mouth, great teeth, and horns, resembling the similitude of the Image which the king being enemy to Commendator, honoured for his Zemes. As this devil attempted to lose the bands of his client, the blessed virgin was immediately present as before at the call of Commendator and his subjects, 
The Virgin Mary overcometh the devil.  and with her rod loosed the bands of her suppliant, which were again likewise found fast tied about the hands of him that stood for the contrary part. The enemies therefore of Commendator, being stricken with great fear and amazed by reason of this great miracle, confessed that the Zemes of the virgin was better than their Zemes. For the better proof whereof, these pagans being borderers to Commendator, 
Infidels converted by miracle▪ and baptized.  which had ever before been at continual war and enmity with him, when they had knowledge that Ancisus was arrived in those coasts, they sent ambasadoures unto him, to desire him to send them priests of whom they might be baptized: Where upon he sent them two which he had with him there at that present. They baptized in one day a hundredth and thirty of thinhabitants, sometime enemies to Commendator, but now his friends & joined with him in alliance.  
All such as came to be baptized, gave the priests of their own liberality, 
The priest & reward.  either a cock or a hen. But no capons: for they can not yetskyl how to carve their cock chyckens to make them capons. Also certain salted fishes, and new fine cakes made of their bread: likewise certain fowls franked and made fat. When the priests resorted to the ships, six of these new baptized men accoompanied them laden with victuals, wherewith they led a joyful Easter. For on the Sunday two days before saint Lazarus day, they departed from Dariena, and touched at that time, only to the cape or angle of Cuba near unto the east side of Hispaniola. At the request of Commendator, Ancisus left with him one of his company, to th'intent too teach him and his subjects with other his borderers, the salutation of the angel which we call the ave Maria. 
ave Maria.  For they think themselves to be so much the more beloved of the blessed virgin, as they can rehearse the more words of that prayer. Thus Ancisus taking his leave of king Commendator, directed his course to Hispaniola, from which he was not far. Shortly after, he took his voyage to Spain, 
Ancisus viage to Spain  and came to Valladoleto to the king, to whom he made grievous complaint of the insolency of V●schus Nuns', 
Ancisus complaineth of Uaschuz.  in so much that by his procurement, the King gave sentence against him. Thus much have I thowght good (most holy father) whereof to advertise your holiness as concerning the religion of these nations, not only as I have been instructed of Ancisus (with whom I was daily coversante in the court and used him familiarly) but also as I was informed of divers other men of great authority, to th'intent that your excellency may understand how docible this kind of men is, and with what facility they may be alured to embrace our religion. But this can not be done soodenlye. 
The harvest is grea●, but the labourers are few.  Yet we have great cause to hope that in short time they willbe all drawn by little and little to the evangelical law of Christ, to the great increase of his flock. But let us now return to the messengers or procurators as concerniing the affairs of Dariena.   

¶ The seventh book of the second decade of the supposed continente.  
FRom Dariena to Hispaniola is eight days sailing and sometimes less with a prosperous wind. 
From Dariena to hispaniola viii. days sailing.  Yet Quicedus and Colmenaris the procuratoursof Dariena, by reason of tempests and contrary winds, could scarcely sail it in a hundreth days. When they had tarried a few days in Hispaniola, and had declared the cause of the coming to the admiral and the other governors, they took shiping in two marchante ships being ready furnished, which were also accustomed to sail too and froo between Spain and the Island of Hispaniola. They departed from Dariena (as we said before) the fourth day of the kalends of november in the year of Christ .1512, and came not to the court before the kalends of May in the year following being the year of Christ .1513. 
The procurators of Dariena, are honourably received at the court.  At thyr coming to the court, johannes Fonseca (to whom at the beginning the charge of these affairs was committed, whom also for his faithful service toward the king, your holiness created general commissary in the wars against the moors) received them honourably, as men coming from the new world, from naked nations, and lands unknown to other men.  
¶ By the prefermente therefore of the bishop of Burges, Quicedus and Colmenaris were brought before the king, and declared their legacy in his presence. Such news and presents as they brought, were delectable to the king and his noble men, for the newness and strangeness thereof. They also suiorned with me often times. 
Their complexion is altered  Their countenances do declare the intemperateness of the air and region of Dariena. For they are yellow like unto them that have the yellow gaundies: And also swollen. But they ascribe the cause hereof, to the hunger which they sustained in time past. I have been advertised of th'affairs of this new world, not only by these procurators of Dariena, 
Of whom the autour had information  and Ancisus, and Zamudius, but also by conference with Ba●●ia the lawyer, who ran over a great part of those coasts. Likewise by relation of Vincentius Annex the patron of the ships, and Alfonsus Nignus, both being men of great experience and well travailed in those parties, beside many other, of whom we have made mention in other places For there came never any from thence to the court, but took great pleasure to certify me of all things either by word of mouth or by writing. Of many things therefore which I learned of them, I have gathered such as to my judgement seem most worthy to satisfy them that take delight in histories. But let us now declare what followed after the coming of the procurators of Dariena. Therefore, before their arrival there was a rumour spread in the court, that the chief governors and Lievetenauntes Nicuesa and Fogeda, also johannes De la Gossa (a man of such reputation that by the kings letters patents he was named the great master of the kings ships) were all perished by mischance: 
The great master of the kings ships  And that those few which yet remained alive in Dariena, were at contention and discord among themselves: So that they neither endeavoured their diligence to allure those simple nations to hour faith, nor yet had regard to search the natures of those Regions. In consideration whereof, the king was determined to send a new captain thither which should restore and set all things in good order, and put them out of authority which had usurped th'empire of those provinces without the kings special commandment. To this office, was one Petrus Arias assigned, 
Petrus arias is e●ected governor of Dariena.  a man of great prows and a citizen of Segovia. But when the procurators of Dariena had published in the court how great a matter it was, and of what moment, many laboured earnestly to the king, to take the office owte of his hands. But the bishop of Burges being the kings chief chaplain, and one of the commissioners appointed by him in these matters, being advertised hereof, came immediately to the king, and spoke to him in this effect. 
Thoration of the bishop. of Burges in the def●nce of Pe●●us arias.  May it please your highness to understand (most catholic Prince) that whereas Petrus Arias a man of valiente courage and great service, hath offered himself to adventure his life in your majesties affairs, under uncertain hope of gain and most certain perils, yet that notwithstanding sum other have ambitiously maliced his felicity and preferment labouring for th'office whereto he is elected: It may please your grace herein so to show him your favour and permit him to enjoy his said office, as your majesty do know him to be a worthy and meet man for the same, having in time paste had great experience of his prowess and valianenesse, aswell in bejhaving himself as ordering his soldiers, as your highness may the better consider if it shall please you to call to remembrance his doings in the wars of Aphrica, 
The wars of Aphrica.  where he showed himself both a wise captain, and valiant soldier. As concerning his manners and usages other ways, they are not unknown to your majesty, under whose wing he hath of a child been browght up in the court, and ever found faithful toward your highness. Wherefore, to declare my opinion under your graces favour (whom it hath pleased to appoint me a commissioner in these affairs) I think it were ungodly that he should be put from his office at the suit of any other, especially being thereto moved by ambition and covetousness: who perchance would prove themselves to be the same men in the office if they should obtain it, as they now show themselves in the ambitious desiring of the same. When the bishop had said these words, the king confirmed the election of Petrus Arias in more ample manner then before: 
Petrus Arias lieutenant of Dariena.  willing the bishop to appoint him a thousand and two hundredth soldiers at his charges, making him a warrant to th'officers of his escheker to deliver him money in pressed for the same purpose. Petrus Arias therefore being thus put in office and authorized by the kings letters patents under his broad seal, 
Petrus Arias hath a thousand & tw●o hundredth men appointed at the kings charges.  chose a great number of his soldiers in the court, and so departed from Valladoleto about the calend●s of October in the year 1513: And sailed first to Civil being a very rich city and well replenished with people: where by the kings magistrates he was furnished with men and victuals and other necessaries pertaining to so great a matter. For the king hath in this city erected a house serving only for th'affairs of the Ocean, 
A house in Civil appointed to the affairs of India.  to the which all they that go or come from the new lands and Islands, resort to give accounts aswell what they carry thither as what they bring from thence, that the king may be truly answered of his custom of the fift part both of gold and other things as we have said before. This house, they call the house of the Contracts of Indi. Petrus Arias found in Civil above two thousand young men which made great suit to go with him: 
Perularia.  likewise no small number of covetous old men: of the which, many offered themselves to go with him of their own charges without the kings stipend. 
Many proof themselves to go of they● own charges.  But lest the ships should be pestered with to great a multitude, or least victuals should fail them, the liberty of free passage was restraint. It was also decreed that no stranger might pass without the kings licence. Wherefore I do not a little marvel at Aloisius Cadamustus a venetian and writer of the Portugals voyages, 
Aloisius Cadamustus i● reproved.  that he was not a shamed to write thus of the spaniards navigations: we went: we saw: we did. Whereas he never went, not any Venetian saw. But he stoule certain annotations out of the three first books of my first Decade written to Cardinal Ascanius and Arcimboldus, supposing that I would never have published the same. It might also happen that he came by the copy thereof at the hand of sum ambasadoure of Venice. For I have granted the copy to many of them, and was not dangerous to forbid them to communicate the same to other. How so ever it be, this honest man Aloisius Cadamustus feared not to challenge unto him the fruit of an other man's labour. Of the inventions of the Portugals (which surely are wonderful) whether he have written that which he hath seen (as he saith) or likewise bereaved other men of the just commendations of their travails, 
The Portugales inventions.  I will not judge, but am content to let him live after his manner. among the company of these soldiers, there were none embarked but such as were licensed by the king, except a few Italians, Genues, who by friendship and suit were admitted for the Admiral's sake young Colonus, son and heir to Christophorus Colonus the first finder of those lands. Petrus Arias therefore took shipping in the river Betis (now called Guadalquevir) running by the city of Civil, 
The navigation of Petrus Arias.  about the beginning of the year of Christ .1514. But he loosed anchor in an evil hour. 
A shipwreck  For such a tempest followed shortly after his departure, that it rend in pieces two of his ships, and so tossed the other that they were enforced to heave over board part of their victuals to lighten them. All such as escaped, sailed back again to the coasts of Spain: where, being newly furnished and refreshed, by the kings officers, they went forward on their voyage. The master pilot of the governors ship, was johannes Vesputius a Florentine, the nephew of Americus Vesputius, 
Americus Vesputius.  who left him as it were by discente of inheritance, th'experience of the mariners faculty, and knowledge of the sea, card and compass. But we were advertised of late by certain which came from Hispaniola, that they had passed the Ocean with more prosperous wind. For this merchant ship coming from Hispaniola found them landing at certain Islands near there about. But in the mean time while my importunate caulers on, Galeaceus Butrigarius and johannes Cursius, men studious by all means to gratify your holiness, ceased not to put me in remembrance that they had one in a readiness to departed into Italy, and tarried only to carry with him unto your holiness these my fair Nereids although rudely decked, least I should bestow much time in vain, I have let pass many things, & will rehearse only such as seem in my judgement most worthy memory, although somewhat disordered as occasion hath served. So it is therefore that this Petrus Arias hath a wife named Helisabeth a Boadilla, 
A notable exemple of a valiant woman.  being niese by the brothers side to the marquis of Boadilla, which rendered the city of Segovia to Fernando and Helisabeth princes of Spain at such time as the Portugals invaded the kingdom of Castille: by reason whereof they were encouraged fy●ste to resist, and then with open war to assail and expulse the Portugals for the great treasure which king Henry brother to queen Helisabeth had gathered together there. 
king henry.  This marquis while she lived, did ever show a manly and stout mind, both in peace and war, so that by her counsel many noble things were browght to good effect in Castille: unto this noble woman, the wife of Petrus Arias was niese by her brother's side. She following the magnanimity of her aunt, perceiving her husband now furnishing himself to departed to the unknown coasts of the new world, and those large tracts of land and sea, spoke these words unto him. My most dear and well-beloved husband, 
The wife of Petrus Arias.  we ought not now to forget that from hour young years we have been joined together with the yoke of holy matrimony to th'intent that we shield so live together and not a sunder during the time of hour natural life. Wherefore for my part to declare my affection herein, you shall understand, that whither so ever your fatal destiny shall drive you, either by the furious waves of the great Ocean, or by the manyfoulde and horrible dangers of the land, I will surely bear you company. There can no peril chance to me so terrible, nor any kind of death so cruel, that shall not be much easier for me to abide, then to live so far separate from you. It were much better for me to die, and either to be cast into the sea to be devoured of the fishes, or on the land to the Canibales, then with continual mourning and bewailing, to live in death and die living, while I consume in looking rather for my husbands letters then for himself. This is my full determination, not rashly nor presently excogitate, nor conceived by the light fantasy of woman's brain, but with long deliberation and good advisement. Now therefore choose to whether of these two you will assent: Either to thrust your sword in my throat, or to grant me my request. As for the children which god hath given us as pledges of our inseparable love, (for they had four sons and as many daughters) shall not stay me a moment. Let us leave unto them such goods and possessions as have been left us by hour parents and friends whereby they may live among the worshipful of their order. For other things I take no care. When this noble matron of manly virtue had finished these words, her husband seeing the constant mind of his wife, and her in a readiness to do according to her words, had no heart to deny her loving petition: but embracing her in his arms, commended her intent and consented to her request. She followed him therefore as did Ipsicratea her Mithridates with her hear hangeinge lose about her shoulders. For she loveth her husband as did Halicarnassea of Caria, hers being dead, and as did Artemisia her Mausolus: We have also had advertisement sense their departure that she (being browght up as it were among soft feathers) hath with no less stout courage sustained the roringes and rages of the Ocean, than did either her husband or any of the mariners brought up even among the surges of the sea. But to have said thus much hereof, this shall suffice. Let us now speak of other things no less worthy memory. Therefore, whereas in the first Decade we have made mention of Vincentius Annez Pinzonus, ye shall understand that he accoompanyed Christophorus Colonus the Admiral in his first viage, and afterward made an other viage of his own charges with only one ship. again, the first year after the departing of the Captains Nicuesa and Fogeda, he ran over those coasts from Hispaniola, 
The third navigation of Uincentiu● Pinzonus.  and searched all the south side of Cuba from the east to the west, and sailed round about that Island which to that day for the great length thereof, was thowght to have been part of the continent or firm land, all although sum other say that they did the like. Vincentius Annez therefore, knowing now by experience that Cuba was an Island, sailed on further, and found other lands westward from Cuba, 
Cuba.  but such as the Admiral had first touched. Wherefore, being in manner encompased with this new land, turning his course toward the left hand, and rasing the coasts of that land by the East, overpassing also the mouths of the gulfs of Beragua, 
Beragua.  Vraba, 
Vraba.  and Cuchibachoa, 
Cuchibacoa.  he arrived at the Region which in the first Decade we called Paria and Os Draconis: 
Paria.  
Os Draconis  And entered into the great gulf of fresh water, which Colonus discovered, being replenished with great abundance of fish, and famous by reason of the multitude of Islands lying in the same, being distant Eastward from Curiana about a hundredth and thirty miles, 
Curiana,  in the which tract are the Regions of Cumana and Manacapana, 
Cumana.  
Manacapana,  which also in the sixth book of the first Decade we said to be Regions of the large province of Paria, where many affirm to be the greatest plenty of the best pearls, 
Plenty of Pearls.  and not in Curiana.  
The kings of these regions (whom they cawl Chiacones, as they of Hispaniola call them Cacici) being certified of the coming of hour men, sent certain spies to inquire what new nation was arrived in their coasts, what they browght, and what they would have: and in the mean time furnished a number of their Canoas' (which they call Chichos) with men armed after their manner. For they were not a little astonisshed to behold hour ships with the sails spread, whereas they use no sails, nor can use but smaule on's if they would, by reason of the narownes of their canoas. Swarming therefore about the ship with their canoas (which we may well call Monoxyla, 
Monoxyla. The Barbarians assail hour men being in their ships.  because they are made of one hole tree,) they feared not to shoot at our men being yet within their ships and keeping themselves under the hatches as safely as if they had been defended with stone walls. But when hour men had shot of certain pieces of ordinance against them they were so discomfited with the noise and slaughter thereof that they drove themselves to flight. 
The use of guns.  Being thus disparkled, our men chased them with the ship boat, took many, and slew many. When the kings hard the noise of the guns, and were certified of the loss of their men, they sent ambasadours to Vincentius Agnes to entreat of peace, fearing the spoil of their goods and destruction of their people, if hour men shuld● coomme aland in their wrath and fury. They desired peace therefore, 
Great abundance of gold and frankincense.  as could be conjectured by their signs and poyntinges: For hour men understood not one word of their language. And for the better proof that they desired peace, they presented hour men with three thousand of those weights of gold that the spaniards call Cas●ellanum Aureum, which they commonly call Pesum. 
Olibanum.  Also a great barrel of wood full of most excellent masculine frankincense, weighing about two thousand and two hundredth pounds weight after eight ounces to the pound: Whereby they knew that that land browght forth great plenty of frankincense. 
Sabea, ●is a country in Arabia, which bringeth forth frankincense  For there is no intercourse of merchandise between thinhabitants of Paria and the sabeans being so far distant, whereas also the of Paria know nothing with out their own coasts. 
Paria.  With the gold and frankincense which the presented to hour men, they gave them also a great multitude of their peacocks, 
Peacocks which we cau●e Turkey cocks.  both cocks and hens, dead and alive, aswell to satisfy their present necessity, as also to carry with them into Spain for increase. Likewise certain carpets, cooverlettes, table clothes and hangings made of gossampine silk finely wrought after a strange device with pleasant & variable colours, 
carpets and couerlett●s finely wrought.  having golden bells & such other spangles and pendants as the Italians call Sonaglios, and the spaniards Cascaveles, hanging at the purfles thereof. They gave them furthermore speaking popingiaiss of sundry colours as many as they would ask. 
Popyngayes.  For in Paria, there is no less plenty of popingiaiss, then with us of doves or sparous, Thinhabitantes of these Regions both men and women are apparelled with vestures made of gossampine cotton, 
Thapparel of the ●●h●bittants o● paria  the men to the knees, and the women too the calf of the leg. The fashion of their apparel, is simple and plain much like unto the Turks. But the men's, is double and quilted like that which the Turks use in the wars. The princes of Paria, are rulers but for one year: 
Ruler's for one year.  But their authority is no less among the people both in peace and war, then is th'authority of other kings in those Regions. Their villages are builded in coompasse, 
〈◊〉 great gulf of Paria.  along by the banks of all that great gulf. five of their princes came to hour men with their presents, whose names I thowght worthy to be put in this history in remembrance of so notable a thing Chiaconus Chiavaccha, (that is the prince of Chiavaccha, for they call princes or kings Chiaconos) Chiaconus Pintiguanus, Chiaconus Chamailaba, Chiaconus Polomus, and Chiaconus Potto. The gulf being first found of the admiral Colonus, they call, Baia Nativitatis, 
Baia Nativitatis the great gulf of Pa●ia.  because he entered into the same in the day of the nativity of Christ: But at that time he only passed by it without any further searching. and Baia in the spanish tongue, signifieth a gulf. When Vincentius had thus made a league with these Princes, following his appointed course, he found many regions toward the East, 
Uincentuis maketh a league with v. princes. of Paria.  desolate by reason of divers finddes and over flowings of waters: also many standing pools in divers places, and those of exceeding largeness. He ceased not to follow this tract until he came to the point or cape of that most long land. This point seemeth as though it would invade the monte Atlas in Aphrica. 
Mount Atlas in afric.  For it prospectethe toward that part of afric, which the portugals call Caput Bonoe Sperantiae. The points or capes of the mount Atlas, are rough and salvage near unto the sea. The cape of Bona Speranza, gatherethe thirty and four degrees of the south pole, called the pole antarctic: But that point, only seven degrees. I suppose this land to be that, which I find in old writers of cosmography to be called the great Island Atlantike, 
The great Island atlantike.  without any further declaring either of the situation, or of the nature thereof.   

¶ The eight book of the second decade of the supposed continente.  
WHen johan the king of portugal lived which was predicessoure to him that now reigneth, 
Contention between the Castilians & Portugales for the new lands  there arose a great contention between the Castilians and Portugals as concerning the dominion of these new found lands. The Portugals, because they were the first that durst attempt to search the Ocan sea sense the memory of man, affirmed that all the navigations of the Ocean, ought to pertain to them only. The Castilians argued on the contrary part, that what so ever god by the ministration of nature hath created on the earth, was at the beginning common among men: And that it is therefore lawful to every man to possess such lands as are void of Christian inhabitors. While the matter was thus uncerteynly debated, both parties agreed that the controversy should be discerned by the bishop of Rome, and plighted faith to stand to his arbitrament. The kingdom of Castille was at that time governed by that great Queen Helisabeth with her husband: for the royalme of Castille was her dowerye. 
The bishop of Rome divideth the land  She also and the king of Portugal, were cousin germans of two sisters: by reason whereof the dissension was more easily pacified. By th'assent therefore of both parties, Alexander the bishop Rome, the vi of that name, by th'authority of his leaden bull, drew a right line from the North to the South a hundredth leaques westward without the parallels of those Islands which are called Caput Viride or Caboverde, 
Caboverde look decade i. lib. iii  Within the compass of this line (unless soomme deny it) faulethe the point of this land whereof we have spoken, which they call Caput Sancti Augustini, otherwise called Promontorium Sancti Augustini, that is, saint Augustine's cape or point. And therefore it is not lawful for the Castilians to fasten foot in the beginning of that land. Vincentius Annez therefore, departed from thence, being advertised of thinhabitants, that on the other side of the high mountains toward the South, lying before his eyes, there was a Region called Ciamba, 
The golde● region of Ciamba.  which browght forth great plenty of gold. Of certain captives which he too●e in the gulf of Paria (which certainly pertaineth to the dominion of Castille) he browght sum with him to Hispaniola, and left them with the young Admiral to learn hour language. But he himself, repaired to the court to make earnest suit to the king that by his favour, he might be governor of the Island of Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burichena, 
The Island of S. johannes  being distant from Hispaniola only xxv leaques) because he was the first finder of gold in that Island. Before Vincentius made suit for this office, one Don Christopher a Portugal, the son of the county of Camigna, was governor of the Island: whom the Canibales of the other Islands slew, with all the Christian men that were in the same, except the bishop and his familiars, which fled and shifted for themselves, forsaking the church and all the ornaments thereof. For your holiness hath consecrated five bishops in these Islands at the request of the most catholic king. 
five bishops of the Island made by th● bishop of Rome.  In Sancto Dominico being the chief city of Hispaniola, Garsia de Padilla, a regular friar of the order of saint Frances, is bishop. In the town of Conception, doctor Petrus Xuarez of Deza: And in the Island of saint john or Burichena, Alfonsus Mansus a licenciate, being both obseruantes of th'institution of saint Peter. The fourth, is friar barnard of Mesa, a man of noble parentage, borne in Toledo, a preacher, and bishop of the Island of Cuba. The fift is johannes Cabedus, a friar preacher, whom your holiness anointed minister of Christ, to teach the Christian faith among the inhabitants of Dariena. The Canibales shall shortly repent them, and the blood of hour men shallbe revenged: And that the sooner, because that shortly after they had committed this abominable slaughter of hour men, they came again from their own Island of Sancta Crux (otherwise called AyAy) to the Island of Sancti johannis. 
The Canibales of the Island of Sancta Crux.  and slew a king which was a friend to hour men, and eat him and all his family, utterly subverting his village, upon this occasion that violating the law of hostage, he had slain seven Canibales which were left with him by composition to make certain canoas, because the Island of Sancti johannis beareth greater trees and apt for that purpose, then doth the Island of Sancti Crux the chief habitation of the Canibales. These Canibales yet remaining in the Island, certain of hour men sailing from Hispaniola, chanced upon them. The thing being understood by thinterpreters, hour men quarreling with them and cauling them to account for that mischievous deed, they immediately directed their bows and venomous arrows against them, and with cruel countenances threatened them to be quiet, lest it should repent them of their coming thither. Hour men fearing their venomous arrows (for they were not prepared to fight) gave them signs of peace. Being demanded why they destroyed the village, and where the king was with his family, they answered that they razed the village and cut the king with his family in pieces & eat them in the revenge of their seven workmen: And that they had made faggots of their bones to carry them to the wives and children of their slain workmen, in witness that the bodies of their husbands and parents lay not unrevenged: and therewith showed the faggots of bones to hour men: who being astonished at their fierceness and cruelty, were enforced to dissemble the matter and hold their peace, quarreling no further with them at tha● tyme. These and such other things do daily craunce, the which I do let pass lest I should offend the ears of your holiness with such bloody narrations. Thus have we sufficiently digressed from the regions of Beragua and Vraba being the chiefest foundations of hour purpose. 
Beragua and Uraba.  We will now therefore entreat somewhat of the largeness and depth of the rivers of Vraba: 
The rivers of Uraba.  Also declare both what they and the lands which they run through do bring forth: likewise of the greatness of the land from the east to the West, and of the breadth thereof from the south to the North, and what their opinion and hope is of things yet unknown in the same. We will therefore begin at the new names wherewith the spaniards have named these provinces sense they were under the dominions of the Christians.   

¶ The ninth book of the second Decade, of the supposed Continent.  
BEragua therefore, they called Castilia Aurea, that is golden Castille: And Vraba they named Andaluzia Nova, that is, new Andalusia. 
Beragua, called Castilia aurifera, and Uraba, Andaluzia nova. Sum call Peru, Nova Castilia.  And like as of many Islands which they subdued, they choose Hispaniola for the chief place of their habitation, so in the large tract of Paria, they appointed their coloine or biding place in the two regions of Vraba and Beragua, 
Beragua and Uraba, regions of Paria.  that all such as attempt and voyages in those coasts, may resort to them as to safe ports to be refreshed when they are weary or driven to necessity. All hour seeds, and plants, 
The fruitfulness of Uraba  do now marvelously increase in Vraba. Likewise blades, sets, slips, graffs, sugar canes, and such other as are brought from other places to those regions, as also beasts and fowls as we have said before. O marvelous fruitfulness. Twenty days after the seed is sown, they gather ripe cucumbers, and such like, But colwortes, beets, lettuce, Borage are ripe within the space of ten days. Gourds, melones, and pompones, within the space of xxviii days. Dariena hath many native trees and fruits of divers kinds with sundry tastes, 
The frutfu●nes of Dariena.  & wholesome for the use of men: 
divers holsomy fruits of ●rees.  of the which I have thowght it good to describe certain of the best. They noorysshe a tree which they call Guaiana, 
Guaiana,  that beareth a fruit much resembling the kind of citrous which are commonly called limones, of taste somewhat sharp mixed with sweetness. They have also abundance of nuts of pynetrees, and great plenty of date trees, 
Pine trees. Date trees.  which bear fruits bigger than the dates that are known to us: but they are not apt to be eaten for their to much sowernes. Wild and barren date trees, grow of themselves in sundry places, the branches whereof they use for biesommes, and ea●e also the buds of the same. Guaravana, 
Guaravana  being higher and bigger than the orange tree, bringeth forth a great fruit as big as pome citrous.  
There is an other tree much like to a chestnut tree whose fruit is like to the bigger sort of figs, being wholesome & of pleasant taste. Mameis, 
Mameis,  is an other tree that bringeth forth fruit as big as an orange, in taste nothing inferior to the best kinds of melones. Guananala, 
Guananala.  beareth a fruit less than any of the other, but of sweet savour like spice, and of delectable taste. Hovos, 
Hovos.  is an other tree whose fruit both in shape and taste, is much like to prunes, but somewhat bigger. They are surely persuaded that this is the Myrobalane-tree. 
Mirobalani, Hogs fed with mirobalanes  These grow so abundantely in Hispaniola, that the hogs are fed with the fruit thereof as with mast among us. The hogs like this kind of feeding so well, that when these fruits wax ripe, the swyneherdes can by no means keep them out of the woods of these trees: by reason whereof, a great multitude of them are become wild. They also affirm, that in Hispaniola, swines flesh is of much better taste and more wholesome than mutton. 
swines fle●she of better taste and more wholesome than mutton.  For it is not to be doubted, but that divers kinds of meats do engender sundry tastes and qualities in such as are nourished therewith. The most puissant prince Ferdinandus, declared that he had eaten of an other fruit browght from those lands, being full of scales with keys mu●h like a pine apple in form and colour, but in tenderness equal to melopepones, and in taste exceeding all garden fruits. For it is no tre, but an herb much like unto an archichoke, or Acantho. The king himself, gave the chiefest commendation to this. I have eaten none of these fruits. For of a great number which they browght from thence, 
Fruits putrefied on the sea.  only one remained uncorrupted, the other being putrefied by reason of the long viage. All such as have eaten of them newly gathered in their native soil, do marvellously commend their sweetness and pleasant taste. They dig also out of the ground certain roots growing of themselves, which they call Betatas, 
Betatas,  much like unto the navy roots of milan, or the great puffs or mushrooms of the earth. How so ever they be dressed, either fried or sod, they give place to no such kind of meat in pleasant tenderness. The skin is somewhat towgher than either of navies or mussheroms, and of earthy colour: But the inner meat thereof, is very white. These are noorysshed in gardens, as we said of jucca in the first Decade. They are also eaten raw, and have the taste of raw chestnuts, but are somewhat sweeter. We have spoken sufficiently of trees, herbs, and fruits. We will now therefore entreat of things sencitive. The lands and desolate pastures of these regions, are inhabited and devoured of wild and terrible beasts, as Lions, Tigers, 
Lions and Tigers.  and such other monsters as we now know, and have been describe of old authors in time past. But there is especially one beast engendered here, 
A strange beast.  in which nature hath endeavoured to show her cunning. This beast is as big as an ox, armed with a long snout like an Elephant, and yet no Elephant. Of the colour of an ox and yet no ox. With the houfe of a horse, and yet no horse. With ears also much like unto an Elephant, but not so open nor so much hanging down: yet much wider than the ears of any other beast. Of the beast which beareth her whelps about with her in her second b●lly as in a purse (being known to none of the owlde writers) I have spoken in the first Decade which I doubt not to have come to the hands of your holiness. Let us now therefore declare what resteth of the floods and rivers of Vraba. 
The rivers of Uraba.  The river of Dariena falleth into the gulf of Vraba with a narrow channel, 
The river of Darien falleth into the gulf of Uraba.  scarcely able to bear the canoas or lighters of that province, and runneth by the village where they chose their dwelling place. But the river in the corner of the gulf which we said that Vaschus passed by, they found to be xxiiii furlongs in breadth (which they call a league) and of exceeding depth, 
A league is xxiiii furlongs  as of two hundredth cubits, falling into the gulf by divers mouths. They say that this river falleth into the gulf of Vraba, like as the river Ister (otherwise called Danubius, 
Danubius.  and Danowe) falleth into the sea Pontic, and Nilus into the sea of egypt: wherefore they named it Grandis, 
Grandis or Rio grandis.  that is great: which also they affirm to nourish many and great Crocodyles, 
A crocodile is much like an eute, but of exceeding bigness.  as the owld writers testify of Nilus, and especially as I have learned by experience, having sailed up and down the river of Nilus when I was sent ambasadoure to the sultan of Alcayr at the commandment of the most catholic King.  
What I may therefore gather out of the writings of so many learned authors as concerning the river of Nilus, 
The author of this book was in Egypt The river Nilus in egypt  I know not. For they say that nature hath given two rivers of that name to water the land, whether they will them to spring out of the mountains of the moon or the son, 
Montes,  or out of the tops of the rough mountains of Ethiopia: 
Lunae.  Affirming one of the same to fall into the gulf of egypt toward the north, and the other into the South Ocean sea. What shall we say in this place? Of that Nilus in egypt, there is no doubt. The Portugals also which sail by the coasts of the Ethiopians called Nigritae, 
The Portugals navigations.  and by the kingdom of Melinda passing under the Equinoctial line, among their m●ruelous inventions have found an other toward the South, and earnestly affirm the same to be also derived from the mountains of the moon: And that it is an other channel of Nilus, because it bringeth forth Crocodyles, whereas it hath not been read before time that any other river noorysshed Crocodyles saving only Nilus. This river, the Portugals call Senega. 
The river Senega▪ an other channel of the river of Nilus.  It runneth through the Region of the Nigritas, being very fruitful toward the north shore: but on the south side sandy and rough. Crocodiles are also engendered herein. What shall we then say of this third: ye I may well say the fourth. 
Crocodiles. The third & fourth Nilus.  For I suppose them also to be Crocodiles which Colonus with his company found armed with scales as hard as shells in the river called Delagartos whereof we have made mention before. 
Delagartos.  Shall we say that these rivers also of Darien and Vraba, have their original from the mountains of the moon, whereas they spring out of the next mountains, and can by no means have the same original with Nilus in egypt, or that in Nigrita, 
The rivers springe out of the mountains  or else that in the kingdom of Melinda, from whence so ever they are derived. Whereas these other (as we have said) springe out of the next mountains which divide an other south sea with no great distance from the North Ocean. Wherefore it appeareth by experience of such as have travailed the world in hour time, that other waters beside the river of Nilus in egypt, 
Crocodiles engendered in other rivers beside Nilus' ●n egypt.  may likewise bring forth Crocodiles. In the marishes also and fens of the Regions of Dariena, are found great plenty of Phesauntes and peacocks, (but not of variable colours) with many other kinds of birds and fowls unlike unto ours, 
Birds and fowls.  as well apt to be eaten, as also to delight the ears of men with pleasant noise. But hour spaniards, because they are ignorant in fouling, take but few. Also innumerable popinjays of sundry kinds are found chattering in the groves of those fenny places. Of these there are sum equal to Capons in bigness, and sum as little as sparrows. But of the diversity of popinjays, 
popinjays.  we have spoken sufficiently in the first Decade. For in the race of this large land, Colonus himself browght and sent to the court a great number of every kind, 
A philosophical discourse as cuncerning th'original of springs and rivers.  the which it was lawful for all the people to behold, and are yet daily browght in like manner. There remaineth yet one thing most worthy to be put in history: The which I had rather to have chanced into the hands of Cicero or Livy, then into mine. For the thing is so marvelous in my estimation, that I find my wit more entangled in the description hereof, then is said of the hen when she seeth her young chicken enwrapped in tow or glaxe. The breadth of that land from the North Ocean to the south sea is only two days journey by relation of thinhabitants. 
The breadth of the ●ande at Uraba from the North Ocean to the South sea.  The multitude therefore and grea●nes of the rivers on the one side and on the other side the narowenes of the land, bring me into such doubt how it can come to pass, that in so little a space of three days journey, measuring from the high tops of those mountains, I do not understand how so many and so great rivers, may have recourse into this north sea. For it is to be thought that as many do flow toward thinhabitants of the south. These rivers of Vraba are but smaule, in comparison of many other in those coasts. For the spaniards say, that in the time of Colonus, they found and passed by an other river after this, 
A river of marvelous bigness look the first decade the ix. book.  whose gulf falling in to the sea, they affirm to be little less than a hundredth miles in the first coasts of Paria, as we have said elsewhere. For they say that it falleth from the tops of high mountains with so swift and furious a course, that by the violence and greatness thereof, it driveth back the sea although it be rough and enforced with a contrary wind. They all affirm likewise, that in all the large tract thereof, they felt no sour or salt water, but that all the water was fresh, sweet, and apt to be droonke. Thinhabitantes call this river Maragnonum: 
The great river Maragnonus. l●ber. i●. decade i.  And the regions adjacent to the same, Mariatambal, 
Mariatambal.  Camamorus, 
Camamorus.  and Paricora. 
Paricora.  Beside those rivers which I have named before, as Darien, Grandis, Dabaiba, Beragua, Sancti Mathei, Boius ga●ti, Delagartos, & Gaira, they which of late have searched those coasts, have found many other. Deliberatinge therefore with myself, from whence these mountains being so narrow and near unto the sea on both sides, have such great hollow caves or dens of such capacity, and from whence they are filled to cast forth such abundance of water, hereof also asking them the opinions of the inhabitants, they affirm them to be of divers judgements herein: Alleging first the greatness of the mountains to be the cause, which they say to be very high, which thing also Colonus the first finder thereof affirmeth to be true: Adding there unto that the Paradise of pleasure is in the tops of those mountains which appear from the gulf of Paria and Os Draconis, 
Paradise. Look vi, ●oke first decade.  as he is fully persuaded. They agree therefore that there is great caves within these mountains: but it resteth to consider from whence they are filled. 
The sea.  If therefore all the rivers of fresh waters by th'opinion of many, do so flow out of the sea as driven and compelled through the passages or pores of the earth by the ponderous weight of the sea itself, as we see them break forth of the springs and direct their course to the sea again, 
The land enclosed with two seas.  than the thing is less to be marveled at here then in other places. For we have not red that in any other place two such seas have environed any land with so narrow limits. For it hath on the right side, the great Ocean where the son goeth down on the left hand: And an other on the other side where the son riseth, nothing inferior to the first in greatness, for they suppose it to be mixed and joined as all one with the sea of East India.  
This land therefore being burdened with so great a weight on the one side and on the other (if this opinion be of any value) is enforced to swallow up such devoured waters, and again to cast forth the same in open springs and streams. But if we shall deny that the earth draweth humours of the sea, and agree that all fountains or springs are engendered of the conversion or turning of air into water distilling within the hallow places of the mountains (as the most part think) we will give place rather to th'authority of them which stick to those reasons, than that hour sense is satisfied of the full truth thereof. Yet do I not repugn that in sum caves of mountains, water is turned into air. 
Conursion of air into water in the caves of mountains.  For I myself have seen, how in the caves of many mountains in Spain, in manner showers of rain do fall continually: And that the water gathered by this means, doth send forth certain rivers by the sides of the mountains, wherewith all such trees as are planted on the steep or foot of the mountains, as vines, Olive trees, and such other, are watered. And this especially in one place: As the right honourable Lodovic the Cardinal of Aragonie most obsequious to your holiness, and two other bishops of Italy, whereof the one is Silvius Pandonus, and the other an archbishop (whose name and title I do not remember) can bear me witness. For when we were together at Granata, lately delivered from the dominion of the moors, and walked for hour pastime to certain pleasant hills (by the which there ran a fair river) While Cardinal Lodovic occupied himself in shuting at birds which were in the bushes near unto the river, I and the other two bishops determined to climb the mountains to search th'original and springe of the river: for we were not far from the tops thereof. Following therefore the course of the river, we found a great cave in which was a continual faule of water as it had been a shower of rain: 
Showers of rain in the caves of mountains  the water whereof, falling into a trench made with man's hand, increaseth to a river, and runneth down by the sides of the mountains. The like is also seen in this famous town of Valladoleto (where we now suiorne) in a certain green close, not past a furlong distant from the walls of the town. I grant therefore that in certain places by conversion of the airy dew into water within the caves of such mountains, many springs and rivers are engendered. But I suppose that nature was not sollicitate to bring forth such great floods by this so smaule industry. Two reasons therefore, do sound best to my judgement: whereof the one is, the often faule of rain: 
The often fall of ra●ne and continual spring time.  The other, the continual autumn or spring time which is in those regions being so near unto the Equinoctial that the common people can perceive no difference between the length of the day and the night through out all the year whereas these two seasons are more apt to engender abundance of rain then either extreme winter or fervent summer An other reason in effect much like unto the first, 
The Equinoctial.  is this: If the sea be full of pores, and that by the pores thereof being opened by the south winds, 
The pores of the sea & the South wind.  we shall consent that vapours are lifted up whereof the watery clouds are engendered, this land must needs be moisted with moo showers then any other, if it be as narrow as they say, and environed with two main seas collaterally beating on the same. How so ever it be: I can not but give credit to the report of such worthy men as have recourse to those regions: And can no less then declare the same albeit it may seem incredible to sum ignorant persons not knowing the power of nature to whom Pliny was persuaded that nothing was impossible. 
Nothing impossible to the pour of naure.  We have therefore thought it good to make this discourse by the way of argument, lest on the one side, men of good learning and judgement, and on the other side, such as are studious to find occasions of quarreling in other men's writings, should judge us to be so undescreete lightly to give credit to every tale not being consonant to reason. But of the force and great violence of those fresh waters, 
The cause of the greatness and force of the gulf.  which repulsinge the sea make so great a gulf (as we have said) I think the cause thereof to be the great multitude of floods and rivers, which being gathered together, make so great a pool: and not one river as they suppose. And for as much as the mountains are exceeding high and steep, 
high and steep hills  I think the violence of the fall of the waters to be of such force, that this conflict between the waters, is caused by thimpulsion of the pool that the salt water can not enter into the gulf. But here perhaps sum will marvel at me why I should marvel so much hereat, speaking unto me scornfully after this manner. Why doth he so marvel at the great rivers of these Regions? Hath not italy his Eridanus, 
The flood Eridanus.  named the king of rivers of the owlde writers? Have not other regions also the like? as we reed of Tanais, 
Tanais.  Ganges, 
Ganges.  and Danubius, 
Danubius.  which are said so to overcome the sea, that fresh water may be drawn forty miles within the fame. These men I would satisfy with this answer. The famous river of Padus in italy (which they now call Po, 
Padus.  and was of the Greeks called Eridanus) hath the great mountains called Alpes dividing France, 
Alpes.  Germany, and Pannonie from italy, lying at the back thereof as it were bulwarges agger, full of moisture: And with a long tract receiving Ticinum with innumerable other great rivers, 
Ticinum.  falleth into the sea Adriatic. 
The sea Adriatic, sum call the gowlfe of Uenes.  The like is also to be understood of the other. But these rivers (as hour men were informed by the kings) fault into the Ocean sea with larger and fuller channels near hand. And sum there are which affirm this land to be very large in other places unless it be but narrow here. There cometh also to my remembrance an other cause: the which although it be of no great force, 
another reason  yet do I intend to write it. Perhaps therefore the length of the land reaching far from the east to the west, if it be narrow, may be a help hereunto. For as we read that the river Alpheus passeth through the hollow places under the sea from the city of Elis in Peloponoso, 
The river Alpheus.  and breaketh forth at the fountain or spring Arethusa in the Island of Sicilia, 
Arethusa  so is it possible that these mountains may have such long caves pertaining unto them, 
Long caves in the mountains.  that they may be the receptacles of the water passing through the lands being far distant: And that the same waters coming by so long a tract, may in the way be greatly increased by the conversion of air into water, as we have said. Thus much have I spoken freely, permitting both to them which do friendly interpret other men's doings, and also to the malicious scorners, to take the thing even as them lysteth. For hitherto I can make no further declaration hereof. But when the truth shallbe better known, I will do my diligence to commit the same to writing. Now therefore, forasmuch as we have spoken thus much of the breadth of this land, we intend to describe the length & form of the same.   

¶ The tenth book of the second Decade, of the supposed Continent.  
THat land reacheth forth into the sea even as doth Italy, although not like the leg of a man as it doth. 
The length and form of the Island. Cap. S. Augusti.  But I now compare a Pigmean or a dwarf to a giant. For that part thereof which the Spaniards have over run from the said east point which reacheth toward the sea Atlantike (the end not being yet found toward the West) is more than eight times longer than italy. 
Eight times bigger t●en Italy beside that part which the Portugals possess. Italy is in length a thou●and and two hundredth miles, and in breadth four hundredth and ten.  And by what reason I am moved to say eight times, your holiness shall understand. From the time therefore that I first determined to obey their requests who willed me first in your name to write these things in the latin tongue, I did my endeavour that all things might come forth with dew trial and experience.  
Whereupon I repaired to the bishop of Burges being the chief refuge of this navigation. As we were therefore secretly together in one chamber, we had many instruments pertaining to these affairs as globes and many of those maps which are commonly called the shipman's cards, or cards of the sea. 
Cards of the sea.  Of the which, one was drawn by the Portugals, whereunto Americus Vesputius is said to have put to his hand, being a man most expert in this faculty and a florentine borne: 
The card of Americus Uesputius.  who also under the stipend of the Portugals, had sailed toward the south pole many degrees beyond the Equinoctial. In this card we found the first front of this land to be brooder than the kings of Vraba had persuaded hour men of their mountains. To an other, Colonus the Admiral while he yet lived and searched those places had given the beginning with his own hands: 
The card of Colonus.  Whereunto Bartholomeus Colonus his brother and lieutenant had added his judgement, for he also, had sailed about those coasts. Of the spaniards likewise, as many as thought themselves to have any knowledge what pertained to measure the land and the sea, drew certain cards in parchment as concerning these navigations. Of all other, they most esteem them which johannes de la Cossa the coompanion of Fogeda (whom we said to be slain of the people of Caramairi in the haven Carthago, 
The card of johannes de la Cossa. ) and an other expert pilot called Andrea's Moralis, 
The card of Andrea's moralis.  had set forth. And this aswell for the great experience which they both had (to whom these tracts were as well known as the chambers of their own houses) as also that they were thought to be cunninger in that part of cosmography which teacheth the description and measuring of the sea. Conferringe therefore all these cards together, in every of the which was drawn a line expressing, not the miles, 
The manner of measuring the cards.  but leagues after the manner of the spaniards, we took hour compases and began to measure the sea coasts after this order. From that point or front which we said to be included within the line pertaining to the Portugals jurisdiction, 
Look decade i. liber. iii.  being drawn by the parallels of the Islands of Caboverde, 
The Island of Caboverde.  but a hundredth leagues further toward the west (which they have now also searched on every side) we found three hundredth leagues to the entrance of the river Maragnonum: 
Maragnonum  And from thence to Os Draconis, 
Os Draconis  seven hundredth leagues: but somewhat less in the description of sum: For they do not agree in all points exquisitely. The spaniards will that a league contain four miles by sea and but three by land. 
A league.  From Os Draconis, to the cape or point of Cuchibacoa, 
Cuchibachoa.  which being pa●sed, there is a gulf on the left hand, we measured three hundreth leagues in one card, and much thereabout in an other. From this point of Cuchibacoa, to the region of Caramairi in which is the haven Carthago (which sum call Carthagena) we found about a hundredth and seventy leagues. 
Caramairi.  
Carthago.  From Caramairi to the Island Fortis,, 
The Island Fortis.  fifty leagues. From thence to the gulfs of Vraba among the which is the village called Sancta Maria Antiqua where the spaniards have appointed their habitation, 
Vraba.  only xxxiii leagues. From the river of Vraba in the province of Dariena to the river of Beragua where Nicuesa had intended to have fastened his foot if god had not otherwise decreed, 
Beragua.  we measured a hundredth and thirty leagues. from Beragua to that river which we said of Colonus to be called Sancti Matthei, 
R. Sancti Matthei i  in the which also Nicuesa loosing his caravel, wandered in great calamities, we found in hour cards, only a hundredth and forty leagues: Yet many other which of late time have come from these parts, have describe many moo leagues in this tract from the river of Sancti Matthei: In which also, they place divers rivers, as Aburema with the Island called Scutum Cateba 
R. Aburema  
Scutum Cateba  lying before it, whose kings name is Fancies combusta. Likewise an other river called Zobraba: 
R. Zobroba.  after that, Vrida: 
Vrid●.  and then Duraba in the which gold is found. 
Duraba,  Furthermore, many goodly havens, as Cerabaro and Hiebra, 
Cerabaro,  
Hiebra,  so called of thinhabitants. And thus if your holiness will confer these numbers together, you shall find in this account, a thousand five hundredth twenty and five leagues, 
Note.  which amount to f●ue thousand and seven hundredth miles from the point of Sancti Matthei, 
R. d● los perdides  which they call Sinum perditorum: that is, the gulf of the lost men. But we may not leave here. For after this, one Astar Ouetens●s, otherwise named johannes Dias de Solis, 
The navigation of I●●annes Dias.  borne in Nebrissa (which brings forth many learned men) sailing from this river toward the west, over ran many coasts & leagues: But the midst of that shore, bendethe toward the North: And is not therefore directly placed in order with the other. Yet may we gather by a diameter or right line, about three hundredth leagues. Hereby may you gather what is the length of this land. 
The elevation of the pole.  But of th● breadth, perhaps we shall hereafter have further knowledge. Let us now speak somewhat of the variety of the degrees of the elevation of the pole stars. This land therefore, although it reach forth from the East into the West, yet is it crooked and hath the point bending so toward the south, that it loseth the sight of the North pole, 
The jurisdiction of the Portugales.  and is extendend beyond the Equinoctial line seven degrees toward the South pole. But the point hereof, pertaineth to the jurisdiction of the Portugals as we have said. Leaving this point and sailing toward Paria the north star is seen again, 
Paria,  and is so much the more lifted up, in how much the region inclineth more toward the West. The spaniards therefore, have divers degrees of elevations, until they come to Dariena being their chief station and dwelling place in those lands. 
Darlena.  For they have forsaken Beragua, 
Beragua.  where they found the North pole elevate viii degrees But from hence the land doth so much bend toward the North, that it is there in manner equal with the degrees of the straights of Hercules pillars: 
hercules pillars.  especially if we measure certain lands found by them toward the north side of Hispaniola. among the which, there is an Island, about three hundredth and xxv leagues from Hispaniola, as they say which have searched the same, named Boiuca or Agnaneo, in the which is a continual spring of running water of such marvelous virtue, that the water thereof being drunk, 
The Island Boiuca or Agnaneo.  perhaps with sum diet, maketh owld men young again. And here must I make protestation to your holiness, not to think this to be said lightly or rashly. 
A water of marvelous virtue.  For they have so spread this rumour for a truth throughout all the court, that not only all the people, but also many of them whom wisdom or fortune hath divided from the common sort, think it to be true. But if you shall ask my opinion herein, 
The renovation of age.  I will answer that I will not attribute so great power to nature: but that god hath no less reserved this prerogative to himself, then to search the hearts of men, or to give substance to privation, (that is) being to no being: Except we shall believe the fable of Colobis of Aeson renovate, to be as true as the writings of Sibylla Erythrea. Albeit perhaps the schools of physicians and natural philosophers will not much stick to affirm that by those of certain secret medicines and diet, 
The accidents of age may be hidden.  the accidents of age (as they call them) may be long hidden and deferred, which they will to be understood, by the renovation of age. And to have said thus much of the length and breadth of these Regions, and of the rough and hugeous mountains with their watery caves, also of the divers degrees of that land, I think it sufficient. But I thowght it not good to let pass what chanced to these miserable men among their general calamities. I remember that when I was a child, me thowght my bowels grated and that my spirits were marvelously troubled for very pity, when I read in the poet Uirgyl how Achemenides was left of Ulysses upon the sea banks among the giants called Cyclopes. 
Achemenides,  
Vlyss●s.  
Encas.  where for the space of many days from the departing of Vlyss●s until the coming of Encas he eat none other meat but only berries and haws. But hour unfortunate spaniards which followed Nicuesa to inhabit Beragua, 
Extreme hunger.  would have esteemed haws and berries for great delicates. What should I hear speak of the head of an ass bowght for a great price, and of such other extremities as men have suffered in towns besieged? 
This was at the ●iege of hieru●alem.  After that Nicuesa had determined to leave Beragua for the barrenness of the soil, he attempted to search Por●um Bellum, 
Portus B●llus  and then the coasts of the point called Marmor, 
Ma●mo●.  if he might there find a place more fortunate to inhabit. In this mean time, so grievous famen oppressed his soldiers, that they neither abstained from eating of mangy dogs which they had with them aswell for their defence as for hunting (for in the war against the naked people, 
Mangy dogs eaten.  dogs stood them in great stead) nor yet sometimes from the slain inhabitants. Fo● they found not there any fruitful trees or plenty of fowls as in Dariena, but a barren ground and not meet to be inhabited. Here certain of the soldiers made a bargein with one of their fellows for the price of a lean dog, who also was almost dead for hunger: 
A mangy dog dear sold.  They gave the owner of the dog many of those pieces of gold which they call Pesos or golden Castellans. Thus agreeing of the price, they fleid the dog to be eaten, and cast his mangy skin with the bones of the head hanging thereto, among the bushes. The day following, a certain foot●man of their company, chanced to find the skin being now full of maggottes and stinking. He brought it home with him, sod it, and eat it. Many resorted to him with their dishes for the broth of the sod skin, 
Broth of a mangy dog's skin.  proferinge him for every dysshefull a piece of gold. An other found two toads and sod them which a sick man bought of him for two fine shirts curiously wrought of linen intermyxt with gold. 
Toads eaten  certain other wandering about to seek for victuals, found in a patheway in the midst of a field, a dead man of thinhabitants which had been slain of his own coompanye and was now rotten and stinking. 
A dead man eaten.  They drew him a side, dismemberde him secretly, roasted him and eat him, therewith assuaging their hunger as if they had been fed with pheasauntes. One also, which departing from his companions in the night season, went a fishing among the reeds of the marishes, lived only with slime or mud for the space of certain days, until at the length creeping and almost dead, he found the way to his fellows. And thus these miserable men of Beragua vexed with these and such other afflictions, were browghe from the number of seven hundredth three score & ten soldiers, scarcely to forty, being now also added to the company of them in Dariena. Few were slain of thinhabitants. But the residue consumed by famen, breathed out their weary souls, opening a way to the new lands for such as shall come after them, appeasinge the fury of the barbarous nations, with the price of their blood. 
Note.  considering therefore after these storms, with what case other men shall overrun and inhabit these lands, in respect to the calamities that these men have suffered, they shall seem to go to bride feasts where all things are ready prepared against their coming. But where Petrus Arias arrived with the kings navy and new supply of men, 
Petrus Arias whom the spaniards call Ped●arias.  to this hour I know no certainty. What shall chance hereafter I will make diligent inquisition if I shall understand this to be acceptable to your holiness. Thus I bid you heartily farewell: from the court of the most catholic king, the day before the nonce of December, in the year of Christ, M. D. XIIII.    


¶ The first book of the third Decade, to the bishop of Rome Leo the tenth.  
I Was determined (most holy father) to have closed up the gates to this new world, supposing that I had wandered far enough in the coasts thereof, while in the mean time new letters were brought me from thence, which caused me again to take my pen in hand. For I received letters not only from certain of mine acquaintance there, but also from Vaschus Nunnez whom we said by the confidence of his own power with his confetherates, 
Ua●chus Nunn●z, governor of Dariena.  to have usurped the governance of Dariena after the rejecting of Nicues● and Ane●sus, Lievetenantes. By his letter written after his warlike manner, we understand that he hath passed over the mountains, dividing the Ocean known to us, 
The new south Ocean.  from the other main sea on the south side of this land hitherto unknown. His epistle is greater than that called Capreensis de Seiano. But we have gathered out of that and other, only such things as we thowght moste worthy to be noted. Vaschus so behaved himself in these affairs, that he did not only pacify the kings displeasure conceived against him, but also made him so favourable and gracious good lord toward him, that he rewarded him and his companions with many honourable gifts and privileges for their attempts. Wherefore I desire your holiness to incline your attentive cares, and to consider with a joyful mind what they have browght to pass in these great enterprises. 
●●mmendati●● of the Spaniards.  For this valiant nation (the spaniards I mean) have not only with great pains and innumerable dangers subdued to the Christian empire, infinite hundre●es and legions, but also myriades of men. Vaschus Nunnez therefore, whether it were that he was impatient of Idleness (for a valiente mind can not rest in one place or be unoccupied) or least any other should prevent him in so great a matter (suspecting the new governor Petrus Arias) or being moved by both these causes, 
● Ualient mind can not ●ee idle.  and especially for that the king had taken displeasure with him for such things as he had done before, took th'adventure upon him with a few men to bring that to pass which the son of king Comogrus thought could hardly have been done with the aid of a thousand men, 
● desperate adventure  whereof Petrus Arias was appointed captain for the same purpose. Assembling therefore certain of the owlde soldiers of Dariena, and many of those which came lately from Hispaniola, alured by the fame of greater plenty of gold, 
Uaschus his usage toward ●he golden ●ountaynes.  he gathered an army of a hundredth fourscore and ten men. Thus being furnished and ready to take his viage by sea, while the wind served him, he departed from Dariena with one brygantine and ten of their boats which they call Canoas' as we have said. first therefore arriving in the dominion of Careta king of Coiba and friend to the Christians, 
Careta king of Coiba  and leaving his ship and boats there, he made his devout prayers to almighty god, and therewith went forward on his journey by land toward the mountains. Here he first entered into the region of king Poncha, 
king Poncha  who fled at his coming as he had done before. But Vaschus sent messengers to him by the conduct of certain of Careta his men, promising him frendsh●p and defence against his enemies, with many other benefits. Poncha thus enticed with the fair speech and friendly proffers both of hour men and of the Caretans, came to our men gladly and willingly making a league of friendship with them, Vaschus entertained him very friendly, and persuaded him never thereafter to stand in fear. Thus they joined hands, embraced, and gave great gifts the one to the other to knit up the knot of continual amity. Ponc●a gave Vaschus a hundredth and ten pounds weight of gold, 
A hundredth & x. pounds weight of gold.  of ●hat pound which the spaniards call Pesum. He had no greater plenty of gold at this time, by reason he was spoiled the year before as we have said. Vaschus to recompense one benefit with an other, gave him certain of hour things, 
Strange things are counted precious.  as counterfeit rings, Crystal stones, copper chains & brace lets, hawks bells, looking glasses, and such other fine stuff. These things they set much by and greatly esteem. For such things as are strange, are every where counted precious. He gave also to Poncha certain axes to fell trees: which he accepted as a princely gift, because they lack Iren and all other metals except gold: 
Lack of ●ren.  by reason whereof they are enforced with great labour to cut their trees to build their houses, and especially to make their boats hollow without instruments of Iren, with certain sharp stones which they find in the rivers. 
A stone in the steed of Iren.  Thus Vaschus leaving all things in safety behind him, marched forward with his army toward the mountains, by the conduct of certain guides and labourers which Poncha had given him, as well to lead him the way, as also to carry his baggages and open the straights through the desolate places and craggy rocks full of the dens of wild beasts. For there is seldoome intercourse or buying and selling between these naked people, because they stand in need of few things and have not the use of money. 
Superfluities hinder liberty.  But if at any time they exercise any bartering they do it but near hand, exchanging gold for household stuff with their confines which somewhat esteem the same for ornament when it is wrought. Other superfluities they utterly contemn, as hynderances of their sweet liberty, for as much as they are given only to play and idleness. And for this cause, the high ways which lie between their regions are not much worn with many journeys. Yet have their scouts certain privy marks whereby they know the way the one to invade the others dominions, and spoil and infest themselves on both sides with mutual incursions privily in the night season. By the help therefore of their guides and labourers, with hour carpenters, 
Carpenters.  he passed over the horrible mountains and many great rivers lying in the way, over the which h● made bridges either with piles or trunks of trees. 
bridges.  And here do I let pass many things which they suffered for lack of necessaries, being also in manner overcome with extreme labour, least I should be tedious in rehearsing things of smaule value. But I have thought it good not to omit such doings as he had with the kings by the way. Therefore or ever he came to the tops of the high mountains, he entered into a Region called Quarequa, 
The region of Quarequa.  and met with the king thereof called by the same name, with a great hand of men armed after their manner, as with bows and arrows, long and broad two handed sword made of wood, long staves hardened at the ends with fire, darts also and slings. He came proudly and cruelly against hour men, and sent messengers to them to bid them stand and proceed no further: demanding whither they went and what they had to do there. 
king Quarequa is driven to flight.  Herewith he came forth and showed himself being apparelled with all his nobility: but the other were all naked. Then approaching toward hour men, he threatened them with a lion's countenance to departed from thence except they would be slain every mother's son. When hour men denied that they would go back, he assailed them fiercely. But the battle was soon fyny●●●ed. For as soon as they hard the noise of the hargabu●●es, 
hargabus●es.  they believed that hour men carried thunder and lightening about with them. Many also being slain and sore wounded with quarrels of crossbows, 
Crossbows  they turned their backs and fled. Hour men following them in the chase, hewed them in pieses as the butchers do flesh in the shamwelles, from one an arm, from an other a leg, from him a buttock, 
vi. C. Barbarians are s●aine  from an other a shoulder, and from sum the neck from the body at one stroke. Thus, six hundredth of them with their king, were slain like brute beasts. Vaschus found the house of this king infected with most abominable and unnatural lechery. 
Unnatural lechery.  For he found the kings brother and many other young men in women's apparel, smooth & effeminately decked, which by the report of such as dwelt about him, he abused with preposterous venus. Of these about the number of forty, he commanded to be given for a pray to his dogs. For (as we have said) the Spaniards vs● he help of dogs in their wars against the naked people whom they invade as fiercely and ravenyngely as if they were wild boars or hearts. 
The use of dogs in the war against the naked Barbarians.  In so much that hour spaniards have found their dogs no less faithful to them in all daungiours and enterprises, than did the Colophonians or Castabalenses which instituted hole armies of dogs so made to serve in the wars, that being accustomed to place them in the forefront of the battles, they never shrunk or gave back. When the people had hard of the severe punishment which our men had excecuted upon that filthy kind of men, 
Naturaul hatred of unnatural sin.  they resorted to them as it had been to Hercules for refuge, by violence bringing with them all such as they knew to be infected with that pestilence, spitting in their faces and crying out to hour men to take revenge of them and rid them out of the world from among men as contagious beasts. This stinking abomination had not yet entered among the people, 
Palatini.  but was exercised only by the noble men and gentlemen. But the people lifting up their hands and eyes toward heaven, 
I would all men were of this opinion.  gave tokens that god was grievously offended with such vile deeds. Affirming this to be the cause of their so many thunderings, lightening, and tempests wherewith they are so often troubled: And of the overflowing of waters which drown their sets and fruits, whereof famennes and divers diseases ensue, as they simply and faithfully believe, although they know none other god than the son, whom only they honour, thinking that it doth both give and take away as it is pleased or offended. Yet are they very docible, 
The harvest is great & the workmen but few.  and easy to be alured to hour customs and religion, if they had any teachers. In their language there is nothing unpleasant to the ear or hard to be pronounced, but that all their words may be written with latin letters as we said of thinhabitants of Hispaniola. It is a warlike nation, 
warre●yke people.  & hath been ever hitherto molestous to their borderers. But the region is not fortunate with fruitful ground or plenty of gold. Yet is it full of great barren mountains being somewhat cold by reason of their height. 
The higher the colder.  And therefore the noble men and gentlemen are appareled. But the common people live content only with the benefits of nature. There is a region not past two days journey distant from Quarequa, in which they found only black moors: 
A region of black moors  and those exceeding fierce and cruel. They suppose that in time passed certain black mores sailed thither out of Aethiopia to rob: & that by ●hippewracke or sum other chance, they were driven to those mountains. Thinhabitantes of Quarequa live in continual war and debate with these black men. Here Vaschus leaving in Quarequa many of his soldiers (which by reason they were not yet accustomed to such travails and hunger, 
Diseases of change of air & diet.  fell into divers diseases) took with him certain guides of the Quarequatans' to conduct him to the tops of the mountains. From the palace of king Poncha, to the prospect of the other south sea, 
The south sea.  is only two days journey: the which nevertheless by reason of many hynderances and chances, and especially for lack of victuals, he could accomplish in no le●se than xxv days. But at the length, the seventh day of the kalends of October, 
Ua●chus is come to the fight of the new south sea.  he beheld with woonderinge eyes the tops of the high mountains showed unto him by the guides of Quarequa, from the which he might see the other sea so long looked for, and never seen before of any man coming out of hour world. approaching therefore to the tops of the mountains, he commanded his army to stay, and went himself alone to the top, as it were to take the first possession thereof. 
Prayer.  Where, falling prostrate upon the ground, and raising himself again upon his knees as is the manner of the Christians to pray, lifting up his eyes and hands toward heaven, and directing his face toward the new found south sea, he poured forth his humble and devout prayers before almighty God as a spiritual sacrifice with thanks giving, 
God raiseth the poor from the dungehyl  that it had pleased his divine majesty to reserve unto that day the victory and praise of so great a thing unto him, being a man but of smaule wit and knowledge, of little experience and base parentage.  
When he had thus made his prayers after his warlike manner he beckoned with his hand to his companions to come to him, showing them the great main sea heretofore unknown to thinhabitants of Europe, afric, and Asia. Here again he fell to his prayers as before: desiring almighty God and the blessed virgin to favour his beginnings, and to give him good success to subdue those lands to the glory of his holy name and increase of his true religion. All his companions did likewise, and praised god with loud voices for joy. Then Vaschus, with no less manly courage than Hannibal of Carthage showed his soldiers italy and the promontories of the Alpes, 
hannibal of Carthage.  exhorted his men to life up their hearts, and to behold the land even now under their feet, and the sea before their eyes, which should be unto them a full and just reward of their great labours and travails now overpassed. When he had said these words, he commanded them to raise certain heaps of stones in the steed of altars for a token of possession. 
Uaschus taketh possession of the mountains  Then descending from the tops of the mountains, lest such as might come after him should argue him of lying or falsehood, he wrote the king of Castles name here and there on the barks of the trees both on the right hand and on the left: and raised heaps of stones all the way that he went, until he came to the region of the next king toward the south whose name was Chiapes. 
king Chiapes.  This king c●me forth against him with a great multitude of men: threatening and forbidding him not only to pass through his dominions, but also to go no further. hereupon, Vaschus set his battle in array, 
A battle.  and exhorted his men (being now but few) fiercely to assail their enemies, and to esteem them no better than dogs meat as they should be shortly. Placeinge therefore the harquebusiers and mastiffs in the forefroonte, they saluted king Chiapes and his men with su●h a larome, 
Chiapes is d●yuen to f●yght.  that when they heard the noise of the guns, saw the flames of fire, and sme●te the savour of brimstone (for the wind blewe toward them) they drove themselves to flight with such fear least thunderboultes and lightnings followed them, that many fell down to the ground: whom hour men pursuing, first keeping their order, and after breaking their array, slew but few and took many captive. For they determined to use no extremity, but to pacify those Regions as quietly as they might. entering therefore into the palace of king Ch●apes, Vaschus commanded many of the captives to be loo●ed 〈◊〉 ling them to search owte their king, 
Ua●chus sen●●th for k●ng 〈◊〉.  and to 〈…〉 to come ●hyther: And that in so doing, he would h●e his friend and proffer him peace, beside ma●y 〈◊〉 benefits. But if he refused to come, it should turn to the destruction of him and his, and utter subversion of his country. ●nd that they might the more assuredly do this message to Chiape● he sent with them certain of the guides which came with him from Qnnrequa.  
Thus Chiapes being persuaded aswell by the Quareqans who could conjecture to what end the matter would come by th'experience which they had seen in themselves and their king, as also by the reasons of his own men to whom Vaschus had made so friendly promises in his behalf, came forth of the caves in the which he lurked, and submitted himself to Vaschus, 
Chiapes submitteth himself to Uaschus.  who accepted him friendly. They joined hands, embraced the one the other, made a perpetual league of friendship, and gave great rewards on both sides. Chiapes gave Vaschus four hundredth pounds weight of wrought gold of those pounds which they call Pesos: 
iiii. C. pounds weight of wrought gold.  And Vaschus recompensed him again with certain of hour things. Thus being made friends, they remained together a few days until Vaschus soldiers were come which he left behind him in Quarequa. Then caulinge unto him the guides and labourers which came with him from thence he rewarded them liberally and dismissed them with thanks. Shortly after, by the conduct of Chiapes himself, and certain of his men, departing from the tops of the mountains, he came in the space of four days to the banks of the new sea: where assembling all his men together with the kings scribes and notaries, they addicted all that main sea with all the lands adjacent there unto to the dominion and Empire of Castille. 
Uaschus addicteth the new land & sea, to the dominion of Castille.  Here he left part of his soldiers with Chiapes that he might theselier search those coasts. And taking with him nine of their lighters made of one hole tree (which they call Culchas as thinhabitants of Hispaniola cawl them Canoas') and also a band of fourscore men with certain of Chiapes men, he passed over a great river and came to the region of a certain king whose name was Coquera. 
king Coquera is driven to flyghe.  He attempted to resist hour men as did the other, and with like success: for he was overcome and put to flight. But Vaschus who intended to win him with gentleness, 
Uaschus useth both gentleness and rigour.  sent certain Chiapeans to him to declare the great power of hour menner how invincible they were: how merciful to such as submit themselves, also cruel and severe to such as obstinately with stand them. promising him furthermore, that by the friendship of hour men, he might be well assured by th'exemple of other, not only to live in peace and quietness himself, but also to be revenged of th'injuries of his enemies. Willing him in conclusion so to weigh the matter, that if he refused this gentleness proffered unto him by so great a victorer, he should or it were long, learn by feeling to repent him to late of that peril which he might have avoided by hearing. Coquera with these words and exemples, shaken with great fear, came gladly with the messengers, bringing with him two hundredth & l Pesos of wrought gold, 
vi. C. and l pounds weight of wrought gold  which he gave unto hour men. Vaschus rewarded him likewise as we said before of Poncha, Coquera being thus pacified, they returned to the palace of Chiapes. Where, visiting their companions, and resting there a while, Vaschus determined to search the next great gulf, the which, from the furthest reaching thereof into the land of their countries, from the entrance of the main sea, they say to be threescore miles. 
A gulf of threescore miles.  This they named saint Mychaeld gulf, 
Saint Mich●els gulf  which they say to be full of inhabited Islands ans hugeous rocks. entering therefore into the nine boats or Culchas wherewith he passed over the river before, having also with him the same coompanye of fourscore hole men, he went forward on his purpose, although he were greatly dissuaded by Chiapes, who earnestly desired him not to attempt that viage at that time, 
The manly courage and godly zeal of Uaschus  affirming the gulf to be so tempestuous and stormy three moons in the year, that the sea was there by no means navigable: And that he had seen many Culchas devoured of whirlepoles even before his eyes. But invincible Vaschus, impatient of idleness, and void of all fear in god's cause, answered that god and his holy saints would prosper his enterprises in this case, forasmuch as the matter touched God and the defence of the Christian religion, for the maynetenaunce whereof it should be necessary to have great abundance of riches & treasure as the sinews of war against the enemies of the faith. 
Ryche● are the synewea of war  
The faithfulness of king Chiapes.  Thus using also th'office both of an orator and preacher, and having persuaded his companions, he launched from the ●lande. But Chiapes, lest Vaschus should any thing doubt of his faithfulness toward him, proffered himself to go with him whither so ever he went: 
A tempest on the sea.  And would by no means assent that Vaschus should departed from his palace, but that he would bring him on the way and take part of his fortune. Therefore as soon as they were now entered into the main sea, such surges and conflicts of water arose against them that they were at their wits ends whither to turn them or where to rest. Thus being tossed and amazed with fear, the one looked on the other with pale and uncherefull countenances. But especially Chiapes and his company, who had before time with their eyes seetle th'experience of those ●eoderdies, were greatly discomforted. Yet (as god would) they escaped all, and landed at the next Island: Where making fast their boats, they rested there that night. Here the water so increased, that it almost overdowed the Island. 
The increasing of the South sea.  They say also that that south sea doth so in manner boil and sweet, that when it is at the highest it doth cover many great rocks, which at the fall thereof, are seen far above the water. But on the contrary part, all such as inhabit the North sea, 
The north Ocean.  affirm with one voice, that it scarcely riseth at any time a cubet above the banks as they also confess which inhabit the Island of Hispaniola and other Islands situate in the same. The Island therefore being now dry by the fall of the water, they resorted to their boats which they found all overwhelmed and full of sand, and sum sore bruised, with great rifts, and almost lost by reason their cables were broken. 
hard shift in necessity.  Such as were bruised, they tied fast with their girdles, with slips of the barks of trees, and with tough and long stalks of certain herbs of the sea, stopping the rifts or chynkes with grass according to the present necessity. Thus were they enforced to return back again like unto men that came from shipwreck, being almost consumed with hunger, because their victuals were utterly destroyed by tempest. Thinhabitantes declared that there is hard all the year horrible roaring of the sea among those Islands as often as it riseth or falleth. But this most especially in those three months in the which it is most boystious as Chiapes told Vaschus before: Meaning (as they could conjecture by his words) October, November, and December: for he signify) the present moon and the two moons following, counting the moons by the moons, whereas it was now October. Here therefore refreshing himself and his soldiers a while, and passing by one unprofitable king, he came to an other whose name was Tumaccus, 
The Region Tumacca.  after the name of the region, being situate on that side of the gulf. This Tumaccus came forth against hour men as did the other, and with like fortune. For he was overcome, driven to flight, 
king Tumaccus is driven to flight.  and many of his men slain. He himself was also sore wounded, but yet escaped. Vaschus sent certain messengers of the Chiapeans to him to return, and not to be afraid. But he could be nothing moved nether by promises nor threatenings. Yet when the messengers were instant, & ceased not to threaten death to him and his family, with the utter desolation of his kingdom if he persisted in that obstinacy, at the length he sent his son with them: whom Vaschus honourably enterteyninge, appareling him gorgeously and giving him many gifts, sent him to his father, willing him to persuade him of the puissance, munificence, liberality, humanity, and clemency of hour men. Tumaccus being moved by this gentleness declared toward his son, came with him the third day, bringing nothing with him at that tyme. But after that he knew that hour men desired gold and pearls, 
Gold and pearls,  he sent for six hundredth and xiiii Pesos of gold, and two hundredth and forty of the biggest and fairest pearls beside a great number of the smaulest sort. Hour men marveled at the bigness and fairness of these pearls although they were not perfectly white because they take them not out of the sea musculs except they first roast them, 
Musculs of the sea.  that they may theselyer open themself, and also that the fish may have the better taste, which they esteem for a delicate and princely dish, and set more thereby then by the pearls themselves. Of these things I was informed of one Arbolantius being one of Vaschus companions whom he sent to the king with many pearls and certain of those sea musculs. But when Tum●ccus saw that hour men so greatly regarded the beauty of the pearls, he commanded certain of his men to prepare themselves to go a fishing for pearls. 
fishing for pearls  Who departing, came again within four days, bringing with them twelve pound weight of orient pearls after eight ounces to the pound. 
xii pound weight of pearls.  Thus rejoicing on both parties, they embraced and made a league of continual friendship. Tumaccus thought himself happy that he had presented hour men with such thankful gifts and was admitted to their friendship: and hour men thinking themselves happy and blessed that they had found such tokens of great riches, swallowed down their spittle for thirst. 
The thirst of gold.  At all these doings, king Chiapes was present as a witness and coompanion. He also rejoiced not a little, aswell that by his conducting he saw that hour men should be satisfied of their desire, as also that by this means he had declared to the next king his bortherer and enemy, what friends he had of hour men, by whose aid he might live in quietness and be revenged of his adversary if need should so require. 
Ambition among naked men.  For (as we have said) these naked kings infest themselves with grievous wars only for ambition and desire to rule. Vaschus boasteth in his epistle, that he learned certain marvelous secrets of Tumaccus himself as concerning the great riches of this land: whereof (as he saith) he would utter nothing at this present, 
This Island is called Margarites Dives, or Dites.  for asmuch as Tumaccus told it him in his ear. But he was informed of both the kings, that there is an Island in that gulf, greater than any of the other, having in it but only one king, and him of so great power, 
A king of great power.  that at such times of the year as the sea is calm, he invadethe their dominions with a great navy of Culchas, spoiling and carrying a way for a pray, all that he meeteth. This Island is distant from these coasts, only twenty miles: So that the promontories or points thereof reching into the sea, may be seen from the hills of this Continent. In the sea near about this Island, sea musculs are engendered of such quantity, that many of them are as broad as bucklers, 
Biggeperles.  In these are pearls found (being the hearts of those shell fishes) often times as big as beans, sometimes bigger than olives and such as sumptuous Cleopatra might have desired. 
Cleopatra, queen of Egypt resolved a pearl in vinegar and drunk it, price. v. thousand pound of our money. thef●rcenes of U●schus.  Although this Island be so near to the shore of this firm land, yet is the beginning thereof in the main sea without the mouth of the gulf. Vaschus being joyful and merry with this rich communication, fantasinge now in manner nothing but princes treasures, began to speak fierce and cruel words against the tyrant of that Island, meaning hereby too won the minds of the other kings, and bind them to him with a nearer band of friendship. Yet therefore railing further on him with spiteful and opprobrious words, he swore great oaths that he would forthwith invade the Island, spoiling, destroying, burning, drowning, and hanging, sparing neither sword nor fire, until he had revenged their injuries: And therewith commanded his Culchas to be in a readiness. But the two kings Chiapes and Tumaccus, exhorted him friendly to defer this enterprise until a more quiet season, because that sea was not navigable without great danger, being now the beginning of November. Wherein the kings seemed to say true. For as Vaschus himself writeth, great roaring of the sea was hard among the Islands of the gulf by reason of the raging and conflict of the water. Great rivers also descending from the tops of the mountains the same time of the year, 
Great rivers falling from mounta●nes.  & overflowing their banks, driving down with their violence great rocks and trees, make a marvelous noise. Likewise the fury of the South and north-east winds, associate with thunder and lightening at the same season, did greatly molest them. 
Thunder and lightening in November.  While the wether was fair they were vexed in the night with could: and in the day time, the heat of the son troubled them: whereof it is no marvel, forasmuch as they were near unto the Equinoctial line, 
Cold in the night near the Equinoctial.  although they make no mention of the elevation of the pole. For in such regions, in the night, the moan and other could planets: but in the day, the soon and other hot planets, do chiefly exercise their influence: although the antiquity were of an other opinion, 
habitable regions under the Equinoctial line.  supposing th● Equinoctial circle to be unhabitable and desolate by reason of the heat of the son having his course perpendicularly or directly over the same: except a few of the contrary opinion, whose assertions the Portugals have at these days by experience proved to be true. 
The nativitations of the Portiugales toward the south pole. Antipodes. he meaneth S. Augustine and Lectautius.  For they sail yearly to thinhabitants of the south pole, being in manner Antipodes to the people called Hyperborei under the North pole, and exercise merchandise with them. And here have I named Antipodes, forasmuch as I am not ignorant that there hath been men of singular wit and great learning, which have denied that there is Antipodes: that is, such as walk feet to feet. But it is most certain, that it is not given to any one man to know all things. For even they also were men: whose property is to err and be deceived in many things. Nevertheless, the Portugals of hour time, have sailed to the five and fifty degree of the south pole: 
The stars ●b●i●●e the south pole.  Where, coompasinge about the point thereof, they might see throughowte all the heaven about the same, certain shining white clouds here & there among the stars, like unto them which are seen in the tract of heaven called Lactea via, 
Lactea via.  that is, the milk white way. They say, there is no notable star near about that pole like unto this of ours which the common people think to be the pole itself (called of the Italians Tramontana, and of the spaniards Nortes) but that the same falleth beneath the Ocean. 
A simyli●ude declaring Antipodes.  When the son descendeth from the midst of the exiltree of the world from us, it riseth to them, as a pair of balances whose weight inclining from the equal poised in the midst toward either of the sides, causeth the one end to rise as much as the other falleth. When therefore it is autumn with us, it is spring time with them: And summer with us when it is winter with them. But it sufficeth to have said thus much of strange matters. Let us now therefore return to the history and to hour men.   

¶ The second book of the third Decade.  
VAschus by th'advice of king Chiapes and Tumacus, determined to defer his viage to the said Island until the next spring or summer, at which time Chiapes offered himself to accoompany hour men and aid them therein all that he might. In this mean time Vaschus had knowledge that these kings had nets and fishing places in certain stations of that sea near unto the shore, where they were accustomed to fish for sea musculs in the which pearls are engendered: 
The manner of fishing for pearls.  And that for this purpose they had certain divers or fishers exercised from their youth in swiming under the water. But they do this only at certain times when the sea is calm, 
T●●e kinds o● per●es.  that they may theselyer come to the place where these shell fishes are wont to lie. For the bigger that they are, so much lie they the deaper and nearer to the bottom But the lesser, as it were daughters to the other, are nearer the bryme of the w●ter. Likewise the least of all, as it were their nieses, are yet nearer to the superficial part thereof. Too them of the byggeste sort which lie lowest, the fishers descend the depth of three men's height, and sometime four. But to the daughters or nieses as their succession, they descend only to the mid thigh. sometimes also, after that the sea hath been disquieted with vehement tempests, they find a great multitude of these fishes on the sands, being driven to the shore by the violence of the water. The pearls of these which are found on the sand, are but little. The fish itself, is more pleasant in eating then are hour oysters as hour men report. But perhaps hunger the sweet cause of all meats, caused hour men so too think. Whether pearls be the hearts of sea musculs (as aristotel supposed) or the birth or spawn of there entrails (as pliny thought) Or whether they cleave continually to the rocks, 
divers questi●s as concerning pearls  or wander by coompanies in the sea by the guiding of thelde●e: Whether every fish bring forth one pearl or more, at one birth or at divers: Also whether they be filed from the rocks whereunto they cleave, or may be easily pulled away, or otherwise faule of by themselves when they are come to there full growth: Likewise whether pearls be hard within the shell or soft, hour men have as yet no certain experience. But I trust or it be long, too know the truth hereof. For hour men are even now in hand with the matter. Also, as soon as I shall be advertised of the arrival of Petrus Arias the capitain of hour men, 
Petrus arias  I will desire him by my letters to make diligent search for these things, and certify me thereof in all points. I know that he will not be slack or omit any thing herein. For he is my very friend: and one that taketh great pleasure in considering the works of nature. And surely it seems unto me undecent, that we should with silence overslyppe so great a thing which aswell in the owlde time as in hour days, hath, & yet doth, draw both men and women to emmoderate desire of superfluous pleasure. 
wanton and superfluous pleasures.  Spain therefore shallbe able hereafter with pearls to satisfy the greedy appetite of such as in wanton pleasures are like unto Cleopatra & Asopus So that from henceforth we shall neither envy nor reverence the nice fruitfulness of Stoidum, 
Cleopatra.  
A●opus.  
Stoidum.  or Taprobana, 
Taprobana,  or the re●de sea. But let us now return to hour purpose. Vaschus therefore determined with the fishers of Chiapes to prove what might be done in his fish pools or stations of sea muscules. Chiapes to show himself obedient to Vaschus his request, although the sea were boystyous, coommaunded thirty of his fishers to prepare themselves and to resort to the fysshinge places. Vaschus scent only two of his men with them to behold them from the sea banks, but not to coommitte themselves to the danger of the sea. The fishing place was distant from the palace of Chiapes about ten miles. 
The fysshing place of king Chiapes.  They durst not adventure to dive to the bottom by reason of the fury of the sea. Yet of the muscles which lie highest, and of such as were driven to the shore by the violence of the water, they brought six great farthels in the space of a few days. The pearls of these were but little, about the bygnes of smaule fitches: yet very fair and beautiful, by reason they were taken newly out of the fish, being yet raw. And that they should not be reproved of lying as concerning the bigness of these sea musculs, they sent many of them into Spain to the king with the pearls, the fish being taken out. We think verily that there may in no place bigger be found. These shelle fishes therefore being thus found here in so many places in that sea, and gold in manner in every house, 
Gold in manner in every house.  do argue the rich treasury of nature too be hid in those coasts, forasmuch as such great riches have been found as it were in the little finger of a giants hand. 
The rich treasury of nature.  What then may we think of the hole hand of the gyante (for hitherto they have only bin in hand with the confines of Vraba) when they shall have thoroughly searched all the coasts and secrets of the inner parts of all that large land. But Vaschus contented with these signs & joyful of his good success in these enterprises, determined by an other way to return to his fellows in Dariena, where also, they have gold mines about ten miles from the village. 
The gold mines of Dariena.  He gave therefore king Chiapes leave to departed, and to follow him no further: Consailing him to continue faithful to the christian king his lord & master. Thus embracing the one the other, & joining hands, Chiapes departed, with tears declaring the good mind which he bore to hour men. Vaschus leaving his sick men with Chiapes, Went forward on his journey with the residue, having also with him for guides three of Chiapes mariners. He conveyed his army over a great river into the dominion of a certain king called Teaocha: 
King Teaocha enterteyneth vaschus frende●ye.  who being advertised of the coomming of hour men, of whose famous acts he had hard much before, was very glad thereof and entertained them honourably: So that for a token of his friendly affection toward them, he gave Vaschus twenty pounds weight of wrought gold after eight ounces to the pound: 
Twenty pound weight of wrought gold.  Also two hundredth big pearls: but not fair, by reason they were taken out of the musculs after they had been sodden. After they had joined hands, Vaschus recompensed him with certain of hour things. Likewise rewarding his guides the servants of Chiapes, he dismissed them with commendations to their lord. King Teaocha at the departure of our men from his palace, did not only appoint them guides to conduct them in the way, but also gave them certain slaves in the steed of beasts to carry their victuals, because they should pass through many deserts, 
Deserts full of wild beasts.  barren and rough mountains and terrible woods full of tigers and Lions. He sent also one of his sons with these slaves, lading them with salted and dried fysh●, 
Dried fish  and bread of those regions, made of the roots of Maizium and jucca. He also commanded his son not to departed from our men until he were licensed by Vaschus. By their conducting therefore, Vaschus came to the dominion of an other king whose name was Pacra, a cruel tyrant, 
King Pacr● a tyrant.  fearful to the other kings his borderers, and of greater power than any of them. This tyrant, whether it were that his guilty conscience for his mischievous acts, put him in fear that hour men would revenge the same, or that he thought himself inferior to resist them, fled at their coming. Vaschus writeth that in these regions in the month of November he was sore afflicted with great heat and intolerable thirst, 
Great heat in the month of November.  by reason that side of the mountains hath little water: In so much that they were in danger to have perished but that certain of th'inhabitants showed them of a spring which was in the secret place of a wood, whither Vaschus with all speed sent two quick and strong young men of his companions with their gourds and such water vessels as Teaocha his men brought with them. Of thinhabitants, there durst none departed from there company because the wild beasts do soon invade naked men. For in those mountains, and especially in the woods near unto the springe, they say that they are sometimes taken out of there houses in the night, except they take good heed that the doors be well spared. It shall not be from my purpose hereto declare a particular chance before I enter any further in this matter. 
hurt by wild beasts.  they say therefore that the last year the region of Dariena was noolesse infested and trowbeled with a fierce tiger, 
A tiger.  than was Calidonia in time passed with a wild bore, 
Calydonia is a forest in scotland.  and Nemea with a horrible lion. 
Nemea is a wood in Greece.  For they affirm that for the space of six hole moons there passed not one night without sum hurt done: so that it killed nyghtlye either a bullock, a mare, a dog, or a hog, sometimes even in the high ways of the village. For hour men have now greatheardes of cattle in those regions. They say also that when this tiger had whelps, 
Tiger's whelps.  no man might safely go forth of his doors, because she spared not men if she met first with them. But at the lengeth, necessity enforced them to invent a policy how they might be revenged of such bloodshed. searching therefore diligently her footsteps, 
Thus the Egyptians take Crocodiles.  and following the path whereby she was accustomed in the night season to wander out of her den to seek her pray, they made a great trenshe or pit in her walk, covering the same with hurdles whereupon they cast part of the earth and dispersed the residue. The dog tiger chanced first into this pitfaul, 
The dog tiger taken. The roaring of the tiger.  and fell upon the points of sharp stakes and such other ingens as were of purpose fixed in the bottom of the trenshe. Being thus wounded, he roared so terribly, that it grated the bowels of such as hard him, and the woods and mountains near about, rebounded the noise of the horrible cry. When they perceived that he was laid fast, they resorted to the trenshe and slew him with stones, darts, and pikes. With his teeth and claws, he broke the darts into a thousand chips, Being yet dead, he was fearful to all such as beheld him: what then think you he would have done being alive and lose. One johannes Ledisma of Civil, a near friend to Vaschus and one of the companions of his travails, told me that he himself did eat of the flesh of that tiger: 
Tiger's flesh eaten.  and that it was nothing inferior to beef in goodness. Being demanded how they knew it to be a tiger forasmuch as none of them had ever seen a tiger, they answered that they knew it by the spots, fierceness, agility, and such other marks and token whereby the ancient writers have described the tiger. For sum of them, had before time seen other spotted wild beasts, as lybardes & panthers. The dog tiger being thus killed, they following the trase of his steps toward the mountains, came to the den where the bitch remained with her two young sucking whelps. 
The bitch tiger.  But she was not in the den at there coming. they first carried away the whelps with them. But afterward fearing least they should die because they were very young, 
Tiger's whelps.  intending when they were bigger to send them into Spain, they put chains of iron about there necks, and carried them again to there den: whither returning within a few days after, they found the den empty and the chains not removed from there place. 
A strange thing.  they suppose that the dam in her fury fore them in pieces and carried them away, lest any should have the fruition of them. For they plainly affirm that it was not possible that they should be loosed from the chains alive. The skin of the dead tiger stuffed with dry herbs and straw, they sent to Hispaniola to the admiral and other of the chief rulers from whom the new lands receive there laws and succour. It shall at this time suffice to have written thus much of the tigers, as I have learned by the report of them which both sustained damage by there ravening, and also handled the skin of that which was slain. Let us, now therefore return to king Pacra from whom we have disgressed. 
king Pacr●.  When Vaschus had entered into the houses forsaken of Pacra, he sent messengiers to reconcile him as he had done the other kings. At the first he refused to come. But after threatenings, he came with three other kings in his coompanye. Vaschus writeth that he never saw a more monstrous and deformed creature: And that nature hath only given him human shape, and otherwise to be wor●e them a brute beast, with manners according to the linyamentes of his body. He abused with most abominable lechery the daughters of four kings his brotherers from whom he had taken them by violence. Of the filthy behaviour of Pa●ra, 
Natural hatred of vice.  of his cruelty and injuries done by him, many of the other kings made grievous coomplayntes to Vaschus as unto a high judge and just revenger: Most humbly beseeching him to see such things punished, forasmuch as they took him for a man sent of god for that purpose. hereupon Vaschus aswell to win their good wills, as also too show an exemple of terror to such as used like fashions, 
Four kings devoured of dogs.  coommaunded that this monstrous beast with the other three kings which were subject to him and of like conditions, should be given for a pray to his feyghtinge dogs, and their torn carcases to be burned. Of these dogs which they use in the wars, 
The use of dogs in war against naked men.  they tell marvelous things. For they say that they run upon thinhabitants armed after there manner, with no less fierceness then if they were hearts or wild bores, if the Spaniards do but only point toward them with their fingers: In so much that oftentimes they have had no need too drive their enemies too flight with swords or arrows: But have done the same only with dogs placed in the forefront of their battle, and letting them slip with their watch word and privy token. whereupon the barbaryans stricken with fear by reason of the cruel countenances of the mastiffs, with their desperate boldness and unaccustomed howling and backing, have disparkled at the first onset and broke their array. Yet it chanceth otherwise when they have any conflict against the Canibales and the people of Caramairi. For these are fyerser, and more warlike men: Also so expert arches, 
The Canybales are expert archers.  that they can most certainly direct their venomous arrows against the dogs with such celerity as if they were thunderbolts: By reason whereof, they sometimes kill many of them. Thinhabytantes of these mountains, do not keep war with bows and arrows: But use only M●chanis, that is certain long and broude sword made of wood: 
Swords of wood.  Also slings, long pikes and darts hardened at the ends with fire. While king Pacra yet lived, no man could know of him neither by fair means nor by foul, where he had the gold which was found in his house. For hour men found in his jewel house fifty pounds weight of gold. 
Footie pound w●●ght of gold.  Being therefore demanded where he had it, he answered that they which gathered the same in those mountains in his father's days, were all dead: And that sense he was a child, he never esteemed gold more than stones. More than this, they could not get of him. By this severe punishment executed upon Pacra, Vaschus concyled unto him the minds of all the other kings of that province. And by this means it came too pass, that when he sent for the sick men which he left behind him with king Chiapes, an other king which was in the mid way (whose name was Bononiama) entertained them gentellye, 
king Bononiama, frond to the christians.  and gave them twenty pound weight of pure wrought gold, 
wrought gold.  beside great plenty of victuals. And not this only, but also accoompanyed them himself until he had brought them safely from his palace into th● dominion of Pacra: Where taking each of them by the right hands, he delivered them to Vaschus himself, as a faithful pledge committed too his charge, and therewith spoke to Vaschus in this effect. most mighty and valiant vyctourer, behold I here deliver unto you, your companions in such plight as I received them: 
The oration of king Bonon●ama  wishing that I had been aswell able to give them health, as they were heartily welcoome to such poor entertainment as I was able to show them. For the favour and gentleness which I have found both in you and them, he shall reward you which sendeth thundering and lyghteling to the destruction of mischievous men, 
The spark of the law of nature, is the law written in the hearts of men.  and of his clemency giveth unto good men plenty of jucca and M●●izium in dew season. As he spoke these words, he lifted up his hands and eyes toward the son whom they honour for god. Then he spoke further to Vaschus, saying: In that you have destroyed and slain hour violent and proud enemies, you have browght peace and quietness to us and hour famelyes, and bound us for ever to love and obey you. Yowe have so overcome and tamed wild monsters, that we think you to be sent from heaven for the punishment of evil men and defence of innocentes, that under the protection of your mighty sword, we may hereafter lead hour lives without fear, and with more quietness give thanks to the giver of all good things for h●s mercy showed unto us in this behalf. When th'interpreter had told Vaschus that king Bononiama had said the●e words, and such like, Vaschus rendered him like thanks for his humanity declared toward hour men, and rewarded him as he had done other in whom he found like gentleness. Vaschus writeth that he learned many things of this king as concerning the great richesse of these regions: ●ut that he would at this present speak nothing thereof: And rehearseth the same as things like to have good success. What this implicate Hyperbole, 
Hyperbole.  or advancement meaneth, I do not well understand. But he plainly seemeth hereby to promise many great things. And surely it is to be thought that according to his hope, great riches may be looked for. For they came in manner into none of thinhabitants houses, 
Great plenty of gold.  but that they found in them, either bresteplates or curettes of gold, or else golden ouches, jewels, or garlands to wear about there heads, necks, or arms. I conjecture therefore thus by a similitude of hour houses: 
A similitude for the proof of plenty of gold.  If among us any man of great power were moved with the desire to have great plenty of Iron, and would enter into italy with a main force as did the Goths in time paste, what abundance of Iron should he have in their houses: where as he should find in one place a friyngpan, in an other a chauldron, here a trivet, and there a spit, and these in manner in every poor man's house, with such other innumerable: Whereby any man may conjecture that Iren is plentifully engendered in such regions where they have so great use thereof. Hour men also perceived that thinhabitants of these regions do no more esteem gold than we do Iren: 
Iren more esteemed than gold.  nor yet so much after they saw to what use Iren served us. Thus much have I thought good to write too your holiness of such things as I have gathered owt● of the letters of Vaschus Nunnez, and learned by word of mouth of such as were his companions in these affairs. As we receive them, so we give them unto you. Time which revealeth all secrets, shall hereafter minister larger argument of writing. they could at this time do no great thing in searching the gold mines, forasmuch as of a hundredth fourscore and ten men which Vaschus brought with him from Dariena, there remained only threescore and ten, or at the most fourscore, whose aid he now used in these dangerous adventures, leaving ever the crazed men behind him in the kings houses all the way that he went But they most especially fell into sundry diseases, 
Change of diet is dangerous.  which came lately from Hispaniola. For they were not able to abide such calamities as to live only contented with the bread of those regions, and wild herbs without salt, drinking none other then river water, and that oftentimes either lacking or unwholesome, where as before their stomachs had been used to good meats. But the owlde soldiers of Dariena, 
Owld● soldiers.  were hardened to abide all sorrows, and exceeding tolerable of labour, heat, hunger, and watching: In so much that merrily they make their booste that they have observed a longer and sharper lent than ever your holiness enjoined. 
A long len●.  For they say that for the space of four hole years, they eat none other than herbs and fruits, except now and then perhaps fish, and very seldoome flesh: Yea, and that sumtime for lack of all these, they have not abhorred from mangy dogs and fylt high toads as we have said before. The owlde soldiers of Dariena, I call those which first followed the capitains Nicuesa and Fogeda to inhabit the land, of the which now few were living. But let us now omit these things, and return to Vaschus the victorer of the mountains.   

¶ The third book of the third Decade.  
WHen Vaschus had remained thirty days in the palace of king Pacra, conciling unto him the mids of thinhabitants and providing things necessary for his companions, he departed from thence by the conduct of certain of king Teaocha his men, and came too the bank of the river Comogrus, 
Comogrus.  whereof the region and king thereof, are named by the same name. He found the sides of these mountains so rude and barren, that there was nothing apt to be eaten, but wild roots and certain unpleasant fruits of trees. Two kings being near of blood, inhabited this infortunate region, 
Two poor kings.  which Vaschus overpassed with all speed for fear of hunger. One of these poor kings was named Cotochus, and the other Ciuriza. He took them both with him to guide him in the way, and dismissed Teaocha his men with victuals and rewards. Thus for the space of three days, he wandered through many desert woods, 
Deserts.  craggy mountains, & muddy marishes full of such quamyres that men are oftentimes swallowed up in them if they look not the more warily to their fiete. Also through places not frequented with resort of men, and such as nature had not yet opened to their use, forasmuch as thinhabitants have seldoome intercourse between them, but only by sundry incurtions, the one to spoil and destroy the other: Being otherwise contented to live only after the law of nature, without worldly toil for superfluous pleasures. Thus entering at the length into the territory of another king whose name was Bechebuea, 
king Bechebuea submitteth himself  they found all things void and in silence: For the king and his subjects, were all fled to the woods. When Vaschus sent messengers to fetch him, he did not only at the first submit himself, but also promise his aid with all that he might make: Protesting furthermore, th●t he fled not for fear that hour men would do him any injury, but that he hid himself for very shame and grief of mind, for that he was not able to receive them honourably according unto their dignity, because his store of victuals was consumed. Yet in a token of obedience and friendship, he sent hour men many vessels of gold, 
Uessels of gold.  desiring them to accept them as the gift of a friend whose good will wanted not in greater things if his abilytye were greater. By which words the poor man seemed to insinuate that he had been rob and otherwise cruelly handled of his borderers. By reason whereof, hour men were enforced to depart from thence more hungerly than they came. As they went forward therefore, they espied certain naked men coomminge down from a hill toward them. Vaschus coommaunded his army to stay, and sent his interpreters to them to know what they would have. Then one of them to whom the other seemed to give reverence, spoke in this effect. Hour lord & king Chiorisus, 
king Chiorisus tendeth Ua●chus thirty. dishes of pure gold.  greeteth you well: Willing us to declare that he hath hard of your puissance and virtue whereby you have subdued evil men and revenged the wrongs done to innocentes. For the which your noble facts and justice, as he doth honour your fame, so would he think himself most happy if he might receive you into his palace. But, forasmuch as his fortune hath been so evil (as he imputeth it) that being out of your way, you have overpassed him, he hath sent you this gold in token of his good will and fryndshyppe toward you. And with these words he delivered to Vaschus thirty dishes of pure gold. Adding hereunto, that when so ever it should please him to take the pains to come to their king, he should receive greater gifts. He declared further, that a king which was their bortherer and mortal enemy, was very rich in gold: And that in subduing of him they should both obtain great richesse, and also deliver them from daily vexations: which thing might easily be done by their help because they knew the country. Vaschus put them in good coomforte, and gave them for reward certain Iren axes which they more esteemed then great heaps of gold. 
Axes of Iren more esteemed than any gold  For they have little need of gold, having not those of pestiferous money. But he that may get but one axe or hatchet, thinketh himself richer then ever was Crassus. For even these naked men do perceive that an axe is necessary for a thousand uses: And confess that gold is desired only for certain vain and effeminate pleasures, 
Superfluous an● effeminate pleasures  as a thing which the life of man may lack without any inconvenience. For hour gluttony and superfluous sumptuousness hath not yet corrupted them: By reason whereof they take it for no shame to lack cobardes of plate, where as the pride and wantonness of hour time doth in manner impute it to us for ignominy to be without that, whereof by nature we have no need. 
An exemple of the life of hour first parents.  But their contentation with the benefits of nature doth plainly declare that men may lead a free and happy life without tables, table clothes, carpets, napkins, and towels, with such other innumerable whereof they have no use, except perhaps the kings furnish their tables with a few golden vessels. But the common people drive away hunger with a piece of their bread in the one hand, and a piece of broiled fish or sum kind of fruit in the other hand. For they eat flesh but seldom. When their fingers are imbrued with any ounctuous meats, they wipe them either on the souls of their feet, or on their thighs, ye & sometimes on the skins of their privy members in the steed of a nappekynne. And for this cause do they often times wash themselves in the rivers. Hour men therefore went forward laden with gold, 
Plenty of gold & scarcenesss of mere.  but sore afflicted with hunger. Thus they came at the length to the dominion of king Pocchorrosa who fled at their coming. Here for the space of thirty days they filled their empty bellies with bread of the roots of Maizium. In the mean time Vaschus sent for Pocchorrosa: 
kn●g Pecchorro●a ●ub●ytteth himself.  who being alured with promises and fair words, came and submitted himself bringing with him for a present xu pounds weight of wrought gold, 
xv. pound weight of wrought gold.  and a few slaves. Vaschus rewarded him as he had done other before. When he was minded to departed, he was advertised that he should pass through the dominion of a certain king whose name was Tumanama. 
king Tumanama, look decad. two. lib. 〈◊〉  This is he whom the son of king Comogrus declared to be of so great power and fearful to all his borderers, & with whom many of Comogrus familiars had been captive. But hour men now perceived that they measured his power by their own. For their kings are but guattes compared to elephants, in respect to the power and policy of hour men. Hour men were also informed by such as dwelt near about Tumanama, that his region was not beyond the mountains as they supposed: Nor yet so rich in gold as young Comogrus▪ had declared. Yet consulted they of his subduing: which they thought they might theaslyer bring to pass because Pocchorrosa was his mortal enemy, who most gladly promised them his advice and aid herein. Vaschus therefore, leaving his sick men in the village of Poochorrosa, took with him threescore of his most valiant soldiers, and declared unto them how king Tumanama had oftentimes spoken proud and threatening words against them: 
A good policy.  Likewise that it now stood them in hand of necessity to pass through his dominion: And that he thought it best to set upon him unwares. The soldiers consented to his advice, an● exhorted him to give th'adventure, promising that they would follow him whether so ever he went. They determined therefore to go two days journey in one day, that Tumanama not knowing of their sooden coming, might have no leisure to assemble an army. The thing came to pass even as they had devised. For in the first watch of the night, hour men with the Pocchorrosians, invaded the village and palace of Tumanama, where they took him prisoner suspecting nothing less. 
〈…〉 is tak● prisoner.  He had with him two young men which he abused unnaturally: Also fourscore women whi●h he had taken violently from divers kings. Likewise a great number of his gentlemen and subjects were taken strageling in other villages near about his palace. For their houses are not adherent together as ours be, because they are oftentimes troubled with vehement whrilewyndes by reason of the sudden changes and motions of the air caused by the influence of the planets in the equality of the day and night being there in manner both of one length throughowte all the year, forasmuch as they are near unto the Equinoctial line as we have said before. 
The cause of vehement winds near he Equinoctial.  Their houses are made of trees, covered and after their manner thatched with the stalks of certain tough herbs. To the palace of Tumanama, 
king Tum●nama his palace.  was only one house adherent, and that even as big as the palace itself. Either of these houses were in length a hundredth and twenty paces; and in breadth fifty paces as hour men measured them. In these two houses the king was accustomed to muster his men as often as he prepared an army. When Tumanaman therefore, was thus taken captive with all his Sardanapamcall famelye, the Pocchorrosians bragged and threatened him being now bound, that he should shortly be hanged. The other kings also his borderers, rejoiced at his misfortune. Whereby hour men perceived that Tumanama was nolesse troublesome to his neighbours, than was Pacra to the kings of the south side of the mountains. Vaschus also the better to please them, threatened him grievously: But in deed intended no evil toward him. He spoke therefore sharply unto him with these words: 
Uaschus his words to king Tumanama.  Thou shalt now su●fer punishment thou cruel tyrant, for thy pride and abominations. Thou shalt know of what pour the christians are whom thou haste so contemned and threated to draw by the hear of their heads to the next ry●er and there to drown them as thou haste often times made thy vaunt among thy naked slaves. But thou thyself shalt first feel that which thou haste prepared for other.: And herewith commanded him to be taken up.  
Nevertheless giving a privy tooken of pardon to them which laid hands on him. Thus unhappy Tumanama, fearing and believing that Vaschus had mente in ernes●e as he commanded, fell prostrate at his feet and with tears desired pardon: Protesting that he never spoke any such words. But that perhaps his noble men in their drunkenness had so abused their tongues which he could not rule. For their wines although they be not made of grapes yet are they of force to make men drunken. He declared furthermore that the other kings his borderers had of malice surmised such lies of him envying his fortune because he was of greater power than they. 
Oderunt quen metuunt.  Most humbly desiring Vaschus that as he took him to be a just vyctourer, so to give no credytte unto their unjust and malicious complaints. 
king Tumanama his words.  Adding hereunto that if it would please him to pardon him not having offended, he would bring him great plenty of gold. Thus laying his right hand on his breast, he swore by the son, that he ever loved and feared the chrystians' sense he first hard of their fame and victories: Especially when he hard say that they had Machanas, that is, swords sharper than thearse, and such as cut in pieces all things that come in their way. Then directing his eyes toward Vaschus who had his sword in his hand, he spoke thus. Who (except he were out of his wit) dare lift up his hand against this sword of yowres wherewith you are able with one struck to clean a man from the head to the navel. Let no man therefore persuade you (o most mighty victorer) that ever such words proceeded out of my mouth. As Tumanama with trembeling spoke these words, therewith swallowing down the knot of death, Vaschus seemed by his tears to be moved to compassion: 
T●manama is pardoned.  And speaking to him with cheerful countenance commanded him to be loosed. This done, he sent immediately to his palace for xxx pounds weight of pure gold artifycially wrought into sundry ouches which his wives and concubines used to wear. 
thirty. pound weight of wrought gold.  Also the third day following, his noble men and gentlemen sent threescore pounds weight of gold for their fine and raunsumme. 
lx pounds weight of gold.  Tumanama being demanded where they had that gold, answered that it was not gathered in his dominions But that it was brought his ancestors from the river Comogrus toward the south. But the Pocchorrosians & other his enemies, said that he lied: Affirming that his kingdom was rich in gold. Tumanama on the contrary part, instantly protested that he never knew any gold my in all his dominions. Yet denied not but that there hath sometimes been found certain smaule grains of gold, to the gathering whereof, he never had any regard, because they could not get it without great & long labour. 
They abhor labour.  While these things were doing, the sick men which Vaschus had left in the village of Pocchorrosa, came to him the viii day of the kalends of january in the year of Christ. M.D.XIII. bringing with them certain labourers from the kings of the south with sundry instruments to dig the ground and gather gold. Thus passing over the day of the nativity of Christ without bodily labour, upon saint Steuens day he brought certain miners to the side of a hill not far dystante from the palace of Tumanama, where (as he saith) he perceived by the colour of the earth that it was likely to bring forth gold. When they had digged a pit not past a hand breadth and a half, 
The colour of the golden earth and a trial of the same.  and sifted the earth thereof, they found certain smaule grains of gold no bigger than lintel seeds, amounting to the weight of twelve grains as they proved with their balances of assay before a notary and witness that the better credytte might be given thereto. Whereby they argued that the rychenesse of that land was agreeable to the report of the borderers, although Vaschus could by no means cause Tumanama to confess the same. They suppose that he nothing esteemed so smaule a portion. But other say that he denied his country to be fruitful of gold, least by reason thereof the desire of gold, might entice hour men to inhabit his kingdom, as in deed the silly king was a prophet in so thinking. For they chose that and the region of Pocchorrosa to inhabit, and determined to build towns in them both, if it should so please the king of Castyle: Aswell that they might be baiting places and vytailing houses for such as should journey toward the south, as also that both the regions were fruitful and of good ground to bear fruits and trees. Intending now therefore to depart from thence, he tried the earth by chance in an other place, where the colour of the ground with certain shining stones, seemed to be a tooken of gold. where causing a smaule ●itte to be digged little beneath th'upper crust of the earth, he found so much gold as weighed that piece of gold which the Spaniards call Castellanum aureum, and is commonly called Pesus, 
Tokens of great plenty of go●de.  but not in one grain. Rejoicing at the●e tookens in hope of great riches, he bad Tumanama to be of good coomforte, promising him that he would be his friend and defender, so that he troubled not any of the kings which were friends to the Christians. He also persuaded him to gather plenty of gold. Sum say that he led away all Tumanam● his women, and spoilt him least he should rebel. Yet he delivered his son to Vaschus to be brought up with hour men, to learn their language and religion, that he might thereafter the better use his help aswell in all things that he should have to do with hour men, as also more polytykely rule, and obtain the love of his own subjects. Vaschus at this time fell into a vehement fever by reason of excess of labour, 
Ua●chus falleth ●icke.  immoderate watching, and hunger: In so much that departing from thence, he was fain too be borne upon men's backs in shietes of gossampyne cotton. 
Feebleness of hunger and watching.  Likewise also many of his soldiers which were so weak that they could neither go nor stand. To this purpose they used the help of thinhabitants, who showed themselves in allthings willing and obedient. Also sum of th●m which were sumwhat feeble and not able to travail, although not grievously sick, were led by the arms until they came to the dominion of king Commogrus a great friend to the christians, 
king Comog●us frende● to the Christians  of whom we have largely made mention before. At Vaschus coming thither, he found that the owlde king was dead, and his son (whom we so praised for his wisdom) to reign in his stead: And that he was bapti●e● b● the name of Charles. The palace of this Comogrus, is situate at the foot of a strepe hill well cultured. Having toward the south a plain of twelve leagues in breadth and veary fruitful. 
The large & ●●●teful plain o●●auana.  This plain, they call Zavana. Beyond his, are the great and high mountains which ●e●yd● th● two seas whereof we have spoken before. Owte of the styepe hills, springeth the river Comogrus, 
though river Comogru●.  which runneth through the said plain to the high mountains, receiving into his channel by their valleys, all the other rivers, & so falleth into the south sea. It is distant from Dariena, about threescore and ten leagues toward the west. As hour men therefore came to these parties, king Comogrus (otherwise called Charles by his christian name) met them joyfully and entertained them honourably, giving them their fill of pleasant meats and drinks. He gave also to Vaschus, twenty pound weight of wrought gold. 
xx. pound weight of wrought gold  Vaschus recompensed him with things which he esteemed much more: As axes and sundry kinds of carpenters tools. Also a soldiers cloak, and a fair shirt wrought with needle work By these gifts, Comogrus thought himself to be half a god among his borderers. Vaschus at his departing from hence, earnestly charged Comogrus and the other kings to remain faithful and obedient to the christian king of Castille, if they desired to live in peace and quietness: And that they should hereafter more diligently apply them selves to the gathering of gold to be sent to the great christian Tiba (that is) king. Declaring further, that by this means th●y should both get them and their posterity a patron and defender against their enemies, and also obtain great abundance of hour things. These affairs thus happily achieved, he went forward on his viage to the palace of king Poncha, where he found four young men which were come from Dariena to certify him that there were certain ships come from Hispaniola laden with victuals and other necessaries. 
Uaschus returns to Dariena.  Wherefore taking with him twenty of his most lusty soldiers, he made haste to Dariena with long journeys: leaving the residue behind him to follow at their leisure. He writeth that he came to Dariena the xiiii Cal. of Fe, An. 1514. The date of his letter is: From Dariena, the four day of march. 
The good fortune of Uaschus.  He writeth in the same letter, that he had many sore conflicts, & that he was yet neither wounded, or lost any of his men in the battle. And therefore in all his large letter, there is not one leaf without thanks giving to almighty god for his delivery and preservation from so many imminent pecels. He attempted no enterprise or took in hand any voyage without thinvocation of god and his holy saints. Thus was Vaschus Balboa of a violence Goliath, turned into Hels●as: 
Uaschus wa● turned from G●●●●th to ●●●●eus,  And from Anteus too Hercules the conqueror of monsters. Being therefore thus turned from a rash roister to a polytyke and discreet captain, he was judged worthy to be advanced to great honour. By reason whereof, he was both received into the kings favour, and thereupon created the general or lieutenant of the kings army in those Regions. 
O flattering fortune, look his death in the book of the Island lately found.  Thus much have I gathered both by the letters of certain my faithful friends being in Dariena, and also by word of mouth of such as came lately from thence. If your holiness desire to know what I think herein, surely as by such things as I have seen, I believe these things to be true, even so thorder and agreeing of Vaschus and his companions warlike letters, seem to confirm the same. 
The earth is hour general mother.  The spaniard therefore shall not need hereafter with undermining the earth with intolerable labour to break the bones of hour mother, and enter many miles into her bowels, and with innumerable dangers cut in sunder hold mountains to make a way to the court of infernal Pluto, 
The court of infernal Pluto.  to bring from thence wicked gold the seed of innumerable mischiefs, without the which notwithstanding we may now scarcely lead a happy life sith iniquity hath so prevailed and made us slaves to that whereof we are lords by nature: The spaniard (I say) shall not need with such travails & difficulty to dig far into the earth for gold, but shall find it plentifully in manner in the upper crust of the earth, or in the sands of rivers dryded up by the heat of summer, only washing the earth softly from the same: And shall with like facilite gather plenty of pearls. 
There i● a better way than this.  Certainly the reverent antiquity (by all the Cosmographers assent obtained not so great a benefit of nature, nor yet aspired to the knowledge hereof, because there came never man before out of hour known world to these unknown nations: 
The Spaniards conquests.  At the least, with a power of men, by force of arms, in manner of conquest: whereas otherwise nothing can be gotten here, forasmuch as these nations are for the most part severe defenders of their patrimonies, and cruel to strangers, in no condition admitting them otherwise then by conquest: especially the fierce Canibales or Caribes. For these wily hunters of men, 
Manhunters  give themselves to none other kind of exercise but only to manhunting and tillage after their manner. At the coming therefore of hour men into their regions, they look as surely to have them fall into their snares as if they were hearts or wild bores: 
The fierceness of the Can●bales.  and with no less confidence lick their lips secreately in hope of their pray. If they get the upper hand, they eat them greedily: If they mistrust themselves to be the weaker part, they trust to their feet, and fly swifter than the wind. again, if the matter be tried on the water, aswell the women as men can dive and swim, as though they had been ever brought up and fed in the water. It is no marvel therefore if the large tract of these regions have been hitherto unknown. But now sith it hath pleased God to discover the same in hour time, 
Hour duty to god, and natural love to mankind.  it shall become us to show hour natural love to mankind and duty to God, to endeavour hour selves to bring them to civility and true religion, to th'increase of Christ's flock, to the confusion of Infidels and the devil their father who delytethe in hour destruction as he hath done from the beginning. By the good success of these first fruits, hour hope is, that the Christian regilion shall streache forth her arms very far. Which thing should the sooner come to pass if all men to their power (especially Christian Princes to whom it chiefly pertaineth) would put their hands to the plough of the lords vinyeard. 
Thoffice of Christian princes. The harvest is great. etc.  The harvest surely is great, but the workmen are but few. As we have said at the beginning, your holiness shall hereafter nourish many myriades of broods of chickens under your wings. But let us now return to speak of Beragua being the west side of Vraba, 
Beragua.  and first found by Colonus the Admiral, then unfortunately governed by Diego Nicuesa, 
Nicuesa.  and now left in manner desolate: with the other large regions of those provinces brought from their wild and beastly rudeness to civility and true religion.   

¶ The fourth book of the third Decade.  
I Was determined (most holy father) to have proceeded no further herein, but that on● fiery spark yet remaining in my mind, would not suffer me to cease. Whereas I have therefore declared how Beragua was first found by Colonus, my think I should commit a heinous crime if I should defraud the man of the due commendations of his travails, 
The fourth navigation of Colonus the Admiral.  of his cares and troubles, and finally of the daungeours and perils, which he sustained in that navigation.  
Therefore in the year of Christ .1502. in the vi day of the Ideses of may, he hoist up his sails and departed from the Islands of Gades with four ships of fifty or iii score tun a piece, with a hundredth threescore and ten men, and came with prosperous wind to the Islands of Canari● within five days following, from thence arriving the xvi day at the Island of Dominica being the chief habitation of the Canibales, he sailed from Dominica to Hispaniola in five other days. Thus within the space of xxvi days, with prosperous wind and by the swift faule of the Ocean from the east to the west, he sailed from Spain to Hispaniola: Which course is counted of the mariners to be no less than a thousand and two hundredth leagues. 
From Spain to hispan●ola a thou●ande and two hundredth leagues  He tarried but a while in Hispaniola, whether it were willingly, or that he were so admonished of the viceroy. Directing therefore his viage from thence toward the west, leaving the Islands of Cuba and jamaica on his right hand toward the north, he writeth that he chanced upon an Island more southewarde than jamaica, which thinhabitants call Guanassa, so florysshinge and fruitful that it might seem an earthly paradise. 
The flory●shyng Island of Guanassa.   
coasting along by the shores of this Island, he met two of the Canoas' or boats of those provinces, which were drawn with two naked slaves against the stream. In these boats, was carried a ruler of the Island with his wife and children, all na●ed. The slaves seeing hour men a land, made signs to them with proud countenance in their masters name, to stand out of the way, and threatened them if they would not give place. 
Simple. people.  Their sympelnes is such that they neither feared the multitude or pour of hour men, or the greatness and strangeness of hour ships. They thought that hour men would have honoured their master with like reverence as they did. Hour men had intelligence at the length that this ruler was a great merchant which came to the mart from other coasts of the Island. 
A great merchant.  For they exercise buying and selling by exchange with their confinies. He had also with him good store of such ware as they stand in need of or take pleasure in: as laton bells, razors, knives, and hatchettes made of a certain sharp yellow bright stone, with handles of a strong kind of wood. Also many other necessary instruments with kitchen stuff and vessels for all necessary uses. Likewise sheets of gossampine cotton wrought of sundry colours. Hour men took him prisoner with all his family. But Colonus commanded him to be loosed shortly after, and the greatest part of his goods to be restored to win his fryndeshippe. Being here instructed of a land lying further toward the south, he took his viage thither. Therefore little more than ten miles distant from hence, he found a large land which thinhabitants called Quiriquetana: But he named it Ciamba. 
The region of Queriquetana or Ciamba.  When he went a land and commanded his chaplain to say ma●se on the sea banks, a great confluence of the naked inhabitants flocked thither simply and without fear, brinking with them plenty of meat and fresh water, marvelling at hour men as they had been sum strange miracle. 
Gentle people.  When they had presented their gifts, they went somewhat backward and made low courtesy after their manner bowing their heads and bodies reverently. He recompensed their gentleness rewarding them with other of hour things, as counters, bracelets and garlands of glass and counterfeit stones, looking glasses, nedelles, and pins, with such other trash, which seemed unto them precious merchandise. In this great tract there are two regions whereof the one is called Taia and the other Maia. 
The regions of Taia and Maia.  He writeth that all that land is very fair and wholesome by reason of the excellent temperateness of the air: And that it is inferior to no land in fruitful ground being partly full of mountains, and partly large playn●s: Also replenished with many goodly trees, wholesome herbs, and fruits, continuing green and flourishing all the hole year. It beareth also very many holy trees and pine apple trees. Also vii kinds of date trees whereof sum are fruitful and sum barren. 
Seven kinds of date trees.  It bringeth forth likewise of itself Pelgoras and wild wines laden with grapes even in the woods among other trees. 
wild vines.  He saith furthermore that there is such abundance of other pleasant and profitable fruits, that they pass not of wines. Of one of those kinds of date trees, they make certain long and broad swords and darts. These regions bear also gossampyne trees here and there commonly in the woods. Likewise Mirobalanes of sundry kinds, 
M●robalanes  as those which the physicians call Emblicos and Chebulos. Maizium also, jucca, Ages, and Battatas, like unto those which we have said before to be found in other regions in these coasts. The same nooryssheth also lions, Tigers, Hearts, Roes, Goats, and divers other beasts. Likewise sundry kinds of birds and fowls: 
Birds and fowls.  among the which they keep only them to frank and feed, which are in colour, bygnes, and taste, much like unto hour pehennes. He saith that thinhabitants are of high and goodly stature, 
People of goodly stature  well lym●ed and proportioned both men and women: Covering their privy parts with fine breeches of gossampine cotton wrought with divers colours. And that they may seem the more comely and beautiful (as they take it) they paint their bodies red and bla●ke with the juice of certain apples which they plant in their gardens for the sa●e purpose. sum of them paint their hole bodies: 
They paint their bodies  sum but part: and other sum draw th● portitures, of herbs, flowers, and knots, every one as seemeth be●te to his own fantasy. Their language differeth utterly from theirs of the Islands near about them. 
The swift cour●e of the sea from the East to the West.  From these regions, the waters of the sea ran with as full course toward the west, as if it had been the fall of a swift river. Nevertheless he determined to search the east parts of this land, revolving in his mind that the regions of Paria and Os Draconis with other coasts found before toward the east, 
Pari●.  should be near theraboute as in deed they were. Departing therefore from the large region of Quiriquetana the xiii. day of the kalends of September, when he had sailed thirty leaques, he found a river, without the mouth whereof he drew fresh water in the sea. 
Fresh water in the sea.  Where also the shore was so clean without rocks, that he found ground every where, where he might aptly cast anchor. He writeth that the swift course of the Ocean was so vehement and contrary, that in the space of forty days he could scarcely sail threescore and ten leaques, and that with much diffy●ultie with many fetches and coompasynges, 
F●●ches and compasinges  finding himself to be sometimes repulsed and driven far back by the violent course of the sea when he would have taken land toward the evening, le●s●e perhaps wandering in unknown coasts in the darkness of the night, he might be in danger of shipwreck: He writeth that in the space of eight leaques, he found three great and fair rivers upon the banks whereof, 
Fair rivers. Great reeds  there grew reeds bigger than a man's thigh, In these rivers was also great plenty of fish and great tortoises: 
Great tortoises.  Likewise in many places, mul●itudes of Crocodiles lying in the ●ande, and yaning to ●ake the heat of the son: Beside divers other kinds of beasts whereunto he gave no names. He saith also that the soil of that land is very divers a●d variable: being somewhere stony and full of rough and ●e●ggie promontories or points reaching into the sea. And in other places as fruitful as may be. They have also divers kings and rulers. 
divers languages.  In sum places they call a king Cacicus: in other places they call him Quebi, and somewhere Tiba. Such as have behaved themselves valiantly in the wars against their enemies, and have their faces full of scars, they call Cupras, and honour them as the antiquity did the gods which they called Heroes, 
Hero●●.  supposed to be the souls of such men as in their life time excelled in virtue and noble acts. The common people, they call Chivi: and a man, they call Ho●●cu●. When they say in their language, take man, they say Hoppa home. After this, he came to an other river apt to bear great ships: Before the mouth whereof, l●ye four smaule Islands full of florisshing and fruitful trees. These Islands he named Quatuor tempora. 
Quatuor tempora.  From hence sailing toward the east for the space of xiii leaques still against ●he violent course of the water, he found twelve other smaule Islands. In the which because he found a new kind of fruits much like unto hour lemondes, he called them Limonares. 
Twel●e islands na●ed Li●●●na●es.  Wandering yet further the same way for the ●pace of xii leaques, he found a great haven entering into th● land after the manner of a gulf the space of three l●aqu●s, and in manner as broad, into the which fell a great river. He●e was Nicuesa lost afterward when he sought Ber●ga●: By rea●on whereof they called it Rio delos perdido●: 
Rio de los pe●didos.  that is the river of the lost men. Thus Colonus the Admiral yet further con●ynuynge his cour●e against the fury of the ●ea, fou●de many high mountains and horrible valleys, with divers rivers and havens, from all the which (as he saith) proceeded sweet saviours greatly recreating and comforting nature. In so much that in all this long tract there was not one of his men diseased until he ca●e to a region which thinhabitants cau●e Quicuri, 
The region of Qu●curi.  in the which is the haven called Cariai, named M●robalanus by the admiral because the Mirobalane trees are native in the regions thereabout. In this haven of Cariai, 
The haven of Cariai or Mirobalanus  there came about two hundredth of thinhabitants to the sea side with every of them three or four darts in their hands: Yet of condition gentle enough, and not refusing strangers. Their coming was for none other purpose then to know what this new nation mente, or what they brought with them. When hour men had given them signs of peace, they came swiming to the ships and desired to barter with them by exchange. The admiral to allure them to friendship, gave them many of hour things: But they refused them, suspecting sum disceate thereby because he would not receive theirs. They wrought all by signs: 
Civil and human● people  for one understood not a word of the others language. Such gifts as were sent them, they left on the shore a●d would take no part thereof. They are of such civility and humanity, that they esteem it more honourable to give then to take. They sent hour men two young women being vyrgines, of commendable favour and goodly stature, sygnifyinge unto them that they might take them away with them if it were their pleasure. These women after the manner of their country, were covered from their ankles somewhat above their privy parts with a certain cloth made of gossampine cotton. But the men are all naked. The women use to cut their hear: But the men let it grow on the hinder parts of their heads, and cut it on the fore part. Their long hear, they bind up with fyllettes, & wind it in sundry rolls as hour maids are accustomed to do. The virgins which were sent to the Admiral he decked in fair apparel, & gave them many gifts, and sent them home again. But likewise all these rewards and apparel they left upon the shore because hour men had refused their gifts. Yet took he two men away with him (and those very willingly) that by learning the Spanish tongue, he might afterward use them for interpreters. He considered that the tracts of these coasts were not greatly troubled with vehement motions or overflowings of the sea, forasmuch as trees grow in the sea not far from the sh●re, 
sy●e.  even as they do upon the banks of rivers. The which thing also other do affirm which have latelyer searched those coasts, declaring that the sea riseth and falleth but little there about. He saith furthermore, that in the prospect of this land, there are trees engendered even in the sea, 
Trees growing in th● sea after a strange sor●.  which after that they are grown to any height, bend down the tops of their branches into the ground: which embracing them causeth other branches to spring out of the same, and take root in the earth, bringing forth trees in their kind successively as did the first root from whence they had their original, as do also the sets of vines when only both the ends thereof are put into the ground. Pliny in the twelfth book of his natural history maketh mention of such trees, 
Pliny,  describing them to be on the land, but not in the sea. The Admiral writeth also that the like beasts are engendered in the coasts of Cariai, as in other provinces of these regions, and such as we have spoken of before. Yet that there is one found here in nature much differing from the other. This beast is of the bigness of a great moonkeye, 
A strange kind of moonkeys.  but with a tail much longer and bigger. It liveth in the woods, and removeth from tree to tree in this manner. Hanging by the tail upon the branch of a tree, & gathering strength by swaying her body twice or thrice too and fro, she casteth herself from branch to branch and so from tree to tree as though she flew. An archer of ours hurt one of them. Who perceiving herself to be wounded, 
A moonkeye feyghteth with a man.  leapt down from the tree, and fiercely set on him which gave her the wound, in so much that he was fain to defend himself with his sword. And thus by chance cutting of one of her arms, he took her, and with much a do brought her to the ships where within a while, she waxed tame. While she was thus kep●e and bound with chains, certain other of our hunters had chased a wild bore out of the marshes near unto the sea side. For hunger and desire of flesh, caused them to take double pleasure in huntynge. In this mean time other which remained in the ships, going a land to recreate themselves, took this moonkey with them. Who, as soon as she had espied the bore, set up her bristles & made toward her. The bore likewise shook his bristles & whet his teeth. The moonkey furiously invaded the bore, 
● conflict between a monkey and a wild bore.  wrapping her tail about his body, and with her arm reserved of her victorer, held him so fast about the throat, that he was suffocate. These people of Cariai, use to dry the dead bodies of their princes upon hurdles, and so reserve them involved in the leaves of trees. 
The bodies of kings dried & reserved  As he went forward about twenty leagues from Cariai, he found a gulf of suc● largeness that it contained xii leagues in compass. In the mouth of this gulf were four little Islands so near together, that they made a safe haven to enter into the gulf. This gulf is the haven which we said before to be called Cerabaro of thinhabitants. 
Cerabaro.  But they have now learned th●t only the land of the one side thereof, lying on the right hand at the entering of the gulf, is called by that name. But that on the left side, is called Aburema. 
Aburema.  He saith th●t all this gulf is full of fruitful Islands well replenished with goodly trees: And the ground of the sea to be very clean without rocks, and commodious to cast anchor: Likewise the sea of the gulf to have great abundance of fish: and the land● of both the sides to be inferior to none in frutfulnes. At his first arriving, he espied two of thinh●bitan●es having chains about their necks, 
Chains of gold.  made of ouches (which they call Cuavines,) of base gold artificially wrought in the forms of Eagles, and lions, with divers other beasts and fowls. Of the two Cariaians' which he brought with him from Cariai, he was informed that the regions of Cerabaro and Aburema were rich in gold. And that the people of Cariai have all their gold from thence for exchange of other of their things. 
Plenty of gold.  They told him also, that in the sa●e regi●ns there are five villages not far from the sea ●yde, whose inhabitants apply the● selves only to the gathering of gold The names of the●e villages are these: Chirara, Puren, Chitaza, jureche, Atamea. 
Five villages rich in gold.  All the men of the province of Cerabaro, go naked, and are painted with divers colours. They take great pleasure in wearing garlands of flowers, and crowns made of the claws of Lions and Tigers. 
Crowns of beasts claws  The women cover only their privy parts wi●h a fyller of gossampine cotton. Departing from hen●e and ●oastynge still by the same shore for the space of xviii leagues, he came to another river, wh●re he espied about three hundredth naked men in a company. When they saw the ships draw near the land, they cried out aloud, with cruel countenances shaking thayr wooden swords and hurling darts, taking also wa●er in their mouths and spouting the same against our men: 
Soytefu●l people.  whereby they seemed to insinuate that they would receive no condition of peace or have ought to do with them. Here he commanded certain pieces of ordinance to be shot of toward them: Yet so to overshute them, that none might be hurt thereby. For he ever determined to deal quietly and peaceably with these new nations. At the noise therefore of the guns and sight of the fire, they fell down to the ground, and desired peace. 
Guns make peace.  Thus entering into further friendship, they exchanged their chains and ouches of gold for glasses and hawks bells and such other merchandise. They use drums or timbrels made of the shells of certain sea fishes, wherewith they encourage themselves in the wars. In this tract are these seven rivers, Acateba, Quareba, Zobroba, Aiaguitin, Vrida, Duribba, Beragua, 
Seven golden rivers  in all the which, gold is found. They defend themselves against rain and heat with certain great leaves of trees in the stead of cloaks. Departing from hence, he searched the coasts of Ebetere, and Embigar, into the which fall the goodly rivers of Zohoran and Cubigar: 
Note where the plenty of gold endeth  And here ceaseth the plenty and fruitfulness of gold, in the tract of fifty leagues or there about. From hence only three leagues distant, is the rock which in the unfortunate discourse of Nicuesa we said was called of hour men Pignonem. 
Pignonem.  But of thinhabitants the Region is called Vibba. 
Vibba.  In this tract also about six leagues from thence, is the haven which Colonus called Portus belus (whereof we have spoken before) in the region which thinhabitants call Xaguaguara. 
Portus belus.  This region is very peopulous: but they go all naked. The king is painted with black colours, but all the people with red. 
Painted people.  The king and seven of his noble men, 
A strange sight.  had every of them a little plate of gold hanging at their nostrils down unto their lips. And this they take for a comely ornament. 
A she● in the steed of a codpiece.  The men enclose their privy members in a shell: And the women cover theirs with a fyl●et of gossampine cotton tied about their loins. In their gardens they noorysshe a fruit much like the nut of a pine tree: the which (as we have said in an other place) groweth on a shrub much like unto an archichocke: But the fruit is much softer, and meat for a king. Also certain trees which bear gourds, whereof we have spoken before. This tree, they call Hibuero. In these coasts they met sometimes with Crocodiles lying on the sands. the which when they fled, or took the water, they left a very sweet savour behind them sweeter than musk or Castoreum. 
Crocodiles of sweet savour.  When I was sent ambassador for the catholic king of Castille to the Soltane of Babylon or Alcayer in Egipte, 
Alcayr or Babylon in Egypt  thinhabitants near unto the river of Nilus told me the like of their female Crocodiles. affirming furthermore that the fat or sewette of them is equal in sweetness with the pleasant gums of Arabic. But the Admiral was now at the length enforced of necessity to depart from hence, aswell for that he was no longer able to abide the contrary and violent course of the water, as also that his ships were daily more and more putrefied and eaten through with certain worms which are engendered of the warmness of the water in all those tracts near unto the Equinoctial line. 
Ships eaten with worms.  The venetians call these worms Bissas. The same are also engendered in two havens of the city of Alexandria in Egypt and destroy the ships if they lie long at anchor. 
Alexandria in egypt.  They are a cubet in lengch, and somewhat more: not passing the quantity of a finger in bigness. The Spanish mariner cauleth this pestilence Broma. 
Broma.  Colonus therefore whom before the great monsters of the sea could not fear, now fearing this Broma, being also sore vexed with the contrary faule of the sea, directed his course with the Ocean toward the west, and came first to the river Hiebra, 
Hiebra,  distant only two leaques from the river of Beragua, because that was commodious to harborowe great ships. This region is named after the river, and is called Beragua the less: 
Beragua.  Because both the rivers are in the dominion of the king which inhabiteth the region of Beragua .. But what chanced vn●o him in this viage on the right hand and on the left, le●te us now declare. While therefore Colonus the Admiral remained yet in the river Hiebra, he sent Bertholomeus Colonus his brother and lieutenant of Hispaniola, with the ship boa●es and threescore and viii men to the river of Beragua, 
how the king of Beragua enterteyn●d the lyevetenaunte.  where the king of the region being naked and painted after the manner of the country, came toward them with a great multitude of men waiting on him, but all unarmed and without weapons, giving also signs of peace. When he approached nearer, and entered communication with hour men, certain of his gentlemen nearest about his person, remembering the majesty of a king, and that it stood not with his honour to bargain standing, took a great stone out of the river, washing an● rubbing it veary● decently, & so put it under him with humble reverence. 
The●r reverence to their king.  The king thus sitting, seemed with signs & tokens to insinuate that it should be lawful for hour men to search & view all the rivers within h●s dominion. Wherefore, the vi. day of the Ideses of February, leaving his boats with certain of his company, he went by land a foot from the banks of Beragua until he came to the river of Duraba, 
Gold in the ry●er of Duraba.  which he affirmeth to be richer in gold then either Hiebra or Beragua. For gold is engendered in all the rivers of that land. In so much that among the roots of the trees growing by the banks of the rivers, & among the stones left of the water, 
Great plenty of gold.  & also where so ever they digged a hole or pit in the ground not passed the depth of a handful and a half, they found the earth taken out thereof, mixed with gold: Where upon he determined to fasten his foot there and to inhabit. Which thing the people of the country perceiving and smelling what inconvenience and mischief might thereof ensue to their country if they should permit strangers to plant their habitation there, assembled a great army, and with horrible out cry assailed hour men (who had now begun to build houses) so desperately that they were scarcely able to abide the first brunt. These nake● barbarians at their first approach, used only slings and darts: 
slings and darts.  But when they came nearer to hand strokes, they fought with their wooden swords which they call Machan●s, as we have said before. A man would not think what great malice and wrath was kindled in their hearts against hour men: And with what desperate minds they fought for the defence of their liberty which they more esteem then life or richesse. 
Liberty mo●e esteemed them riches.  For they were now so void of all fear, and contemning death, that they neither scared long bows or crossbows, nor yet (which is most to be marveled) were any thing discouraged at the terrible noise of the guns shot of from the ships. They retired once. But shortly after increasing their number, they returned more fiercely then at the first. They would have been contented to have received hour men friendly as strangers, but not as inhabitors. The more instant that hour men were to remain, so much the greater multitude of borderers flocked together daily, disturbing them both night & day sometimes on the one side & sometimes on the other. 
The spaniards are driven to flight.  The ships lying at anchor near unto the shore, warded them on the back half. But at the length they were fain to forsake this land, and return back the same way by the which they came. Thus with much diffyculty and danger, they came to the Island of jamaica dying on the south side of Hispaniola and Cuba, 
The Island of jamaica.  with their ships as full of holes as sieves, and so eaten with worms, as though they had been bored through with wimbles. The water entered so fast at the rifts and holes, that if they had not with the painful labour of their hands empted the same as fast, they were like to have perished. Where as yet by this means they arrived at jamaica, although in manner half dead. But their calamity ceased not here. For as fast as their ships leaked, their strength dimynisshed so that they were no longer able to keep them from sinking. 
A miserable case.  By reason whereof, falling into the hands of the barbarians, and enclosed without hope of departure, they led their lives for the space of ten months among the naked people more miserably than ever did Achemenides among the giants called Ciclopes: rather living than being either contented or satisfied with the strange meats of that Island: and that only at such times as pleased the barbarians to give them part of theirs. The deadly enmity and malice which these barbarous kings bear one against an other, made greatly with hour men. For at such times as they attempted war against their borderers they would sometimes give hour men part of their bread to aid them. But how miserable and wretched a thing it is to live only with bread gotten by begging, your holiness may easily conjecture: Especially where all other accustomed food is lacking, as wine, oil, flesh, butter, chiese, and milk, wherewith the stomachs of our people of Europe have ever been noorisshed even from their cradles. 
Necessity hath no law how far life is to be esteemed.  Therefore as necessity is subject to no law, so doth it enforce men to attempt desperate adventures. And those the sooner, which by a certain nobility of nature do no further esteem life than it is joined with sum felicity. Bertholomeus Colonus therefore, intending rather to prove what god would do with him and his companions in these extremities, 
A dangerous enterprise.  than any longer to abide the same, commanded Diegus Mendez his steward with two guides of that Island whom he had hired with promises of great rewards at their return, to enter into one of their canoas and take their voyage to Hispaniola.  
Being thus tossed on the sea two and fro from rock too rock by reason of the shortness and narownes of the canoa, they arrived at the length at the last corner of Hispaniola, being distant from jamaica forty leagues. Here his guides departing from him, returned again to Colonus for the rewards which he had promised them. But Diegu● Mendez went on forward a foot until he came to the city called Sanctus Dominicus being the chief and head city of the Island. 
Sanctus Dominicus.  The officers and rulers of Hispaniola, being informed of the matter, appointed him two ships wherewith he returned to his master and companions. As he found them, so came they to Hispaniola, very feeble and in manner naked. What chanced of them afterward, I know not as yet. Let us now therefore leave these particulars, and speak somewhat more of generals. In all those tracts which we said here before to have bin found by Colonus the admiral, 
Lands found by Colonus.  both he himself writeth, and all his companions of that viage confess, that the trees, herbs, 
Temperate regions and wholesome air  and fruits, are floryshing and green all the hole year, and the air so temperate and wholesome, that of all his coompanye there never fell one man sick, nor yet were vexed either with extreme could or heat for the space of fifty leagues from the great haven of Cerabaro to the rivers of Hiebra and Beragua. 
Cerabaro.  
Hiebra.  
Beragua.   
Thinhabitantes of Cerabaro, and the nation's which are betwixt that and the said rivers, apply not themselves to the gathering of gold but only at certain times of the year: And are very expert & cunning herein, as are hour miners of silver and Iren. 
expert miners.  They know by long experience in what places gold is most abundantly engendered: as by the colour of the water of the rivers, and such as fall from the mountains: And also by the colour of the earth and stones. They believe a certain godly nature to be in gold, 
A god●y nature in gold.  for asmuch as they never gather it except they use certain religious expiations or purging, as to abstain from women, and all kinds of pleasures and delicate meats and drinks, d●ring all the time that their golden harvest laste●he. 
Go●den harvest.  They suppose that men do naturally live and die as other beasts do, and therefore honour none other thing as god. Yet do th●y pray to the son, and honour it when it riseth. But let us now speak of the montaines and situation of these lands. From all the sea banks of these regions, exceeding great and high mountains are seen toward the south, 
high ●nd great mountains.  yet reaching by a continual tract from the east into the west. By reason whereof I suppose that the two great seas (whereof I have spoken largely before) are divided with these mountains as it were with bulwarks, least they should join and repugn, as italy divideth the sea called Tirrhenum, 
Ty●rhenuum is now called Tu●eane  from the sea Adriatyke, which is now commonly called the gulf of Uenes.  
For which way so ever they sailed from the point called Promontorium, S. Augustini (which pertaineth to the Portugals & prospecteth against the sea Atlantike) even unto Vraba and the haven Cerabaro, 
Cap. S. Augustini.  
Vraba.  
Cerabaro.  and to the furthest lands found hitherto westward, they had ever great mountains in sight both near hand and far of, in all that long raze. These mountains were in sum place, smooth, pleasant and fruitful, 
fruitful mountains.  full of goodly trees and herbs: And somewhere, high, rough, full of rocks, and barren, as chanceth in the famus mountain of Taurus in Asia, and also in divers coasts of our mountains of Apennini, 
A●ennini are mountains which d●uide Italy lute ii parts  and such other of like bigness. The rydgies also of these mountains are divided with goodly and fair valleys. That part of the mountains which includeth the lymettes of Beragua, 
Beragaa.  is thought to be higher than the clouds, 
The mountains of Beragua higher than the clouds.  in so much that (as they say) the tops of them can seldom be seen for the multitude of thick clouds which are beneath the same. Colonus the Admiral the first finder of these regions, affirmeth that the tops of the mountains of Beragua are more than fifty miles in height. 
mountains of fifty mile's height.  He saith furthermore that in the same region at the roots of the mountains the way is open to the south sea, and compareth it as it were between Venice and Genua, or janua as the Genues will have it called, which fable that their city was builded of janus. 
janus otherwise called japhet, the son of Noe.  He affirmeth also that this land reacheth forth toward the south: And that from hence it taketh the beginning of breadth, like as from the Alpes out of the narrow thigh of Italy, 
Italy is like unto a leg in the sea, & the mountains of the alpes, are in the thigh thereof.  we see the large and main lands of France, Germanye, and Pannonye, to the Sarmatians and Scythyans, even unto the mountains and rocks of Riphea and the frozen sea, and embrace therewith as with a continual bond, all Tracia, and Grecia, with all that is included within the promontory or point of Malea and Hellespontus southward, and the sea Euzinus and the marishes of Maeotis in Scythia northward. The Admiral supposeth, 
Colonus his opinion of the supposed Continent. By this conjecture, the way should be open to Cathay by the hiperbore●●.  that on the left hand in sailing toward the west, this land is joined to India beyond the river of Ganges: And that on the right hand toward the North, it be extended to the frozen sea, beyond the Hyperborcans and the North pole: So that both the seas (that is to mean that south sea which we said to be found by Vaschus, and hour Ocean) should join and meet in the corners of that land: And that the waters of these seas do not only enclose and compass the same without division as Europe is enclosed with the seas of Hellespontus and Tanais, with the frozen Ocean & hour sea of Tyrrhenum with the spanish seas. But in my opinion, the vehement course of the Ocean toward the west, doth signify and let that the said two seas should not so join together: 
Look the navigation of Cabote. deca. three lib. vi.  But rather that that land is adherent to the firm lands toward the north, as we have said before. It shall suffice to have said thus much of the length hereof. Let us now therefore speak somewhat of the breadth of the same, 
The breadth of the land  We have made mention before how the south sea is divided by narrow limits from hour Ocean, as it was proved by th'experience of Vaschus Nun●ez and his companions which first made open the way thither. But as diversly as the mountains of hour Alpes in Europe are somewhere narrow and in sum place broad, even so by the like providence of nature, this land in sum part thereof reacheth far in breadth, and is in other places coarcted with narrow limettes from sea to sea, with valleys also in sum places, whereby men may pass from the one side to the other. Where we have describe the regions of Vraba and Beragua to be situate, 
The regions of Uraba and Beragua.  these seas are divided by smaule distance. Yet ought we to think the region which the great river of Maragnonus runneth through, 
The great river Maragnonus.  to be very large if we shall grant Maragnonum to be a river and no sea, as the fresh waters of the same ought to persuade us. For in such narrow caves of the earth, there can be no swalowinge gulfs of such bigness as to receive or nourish so great abundance of water. The like is also to be supposed of the great river of Dabaiba which we said to be from the corner of the gulf of Vraba in sum place of forty fathoms depth, 
The great river Dabaiba, or sancty johannis.  and somewhere fifty: Also three miles in breadth, and so to faule into the sea. We must needs grant that the earth is broad there, by the which the river passeth from the high mountains of Dabaiba from the East and not from the west. They say that this river consisteth and taketh his increase of four other rivers falling from the mountains of Dabaiba. 
The rivers have their increase from the springs of the mountains.  Hour men call this river Flumen. S. johannis. They say also that from hence it falleth into the gulf of Vraba by seven mouths as doth the river of Nilus into the sea of egypt. 
The river of Nilus in egypt.  Likewise that in the same region of Vraba there are in sum places narrow straits not passing fifteen leaques: and the same to be salvage and without any passage by reason of divers marishes and desolate ways, 
marshes and desolate ways.  which the Latins call Lamas: But the spaniards according to their variety, call them Tremedales, Trampales, Cenegales, Sumideros, and Zabondaderos. But before we pass any further, it shall not be greatly from our purpose to declare from whence these mountains of Dabaiba have their name according unto thantiquities of thinhabitants. 
A superstitious opinion of thoriginal of montaines of Dabaiba.  They say therefore that Dabaiba was a woman of great magnanimity and wisdom among their predecessors in old time: whom in her life, all thinhabitants of those provinces did greatly reverence, and being dead gave her divine honour and named the region after her name, believing that she sendeth thunder and lightning to destroy the fruits of the earth if she be angered, and to send plenty if she be well pleased. This superstition hath been persuaded them by a crafty kind of men under pretence of religion to th'intent that they might enjoy such gifts and offerings as were brought to the place where she was honoured. 
Dragons and crocodiles in the marshes  This is sufficient for this purpose. They say furthermore that the marishes of the narrow land whereof we have spoken, bring forth great plenty of Crocodiles, dragons, bats, and gnats being very hurtful. Therefore when so ever they take any journey toward the south, they go out of the way toward the mountains, and eschew the regions near unto those perilous fens or marshes. Sume think that there is a valley lying that way that the river runneth which hour men call Rio de los perdidos, that is, the river of the lost men (so named by the misfortune which there befell to Nicuesa and his company) and not far distant from the haven Cerabaro which divideth those mountains toward the south. 
The haven Cerabaro.  But let us now finish this book with a few other things worthy to be noted. They say therefore that on the right hand and left hand from Dariena, there are twenty rivers in all the which, 
Twenty golden rivers.  great plenty of gold is found. Being demanded what was the cause why they brought no greater abundance of gold from thence, they answered that they lacked miners: And that the men which they took with them from Spain thither, were not accustomed to labour, but for the most part brought up in the wars. This land seemeth also to promise many precious stones. 
Precious stones.  For beside those which I said to be found near unto Cariai and Sancta Martha, one Andreas Moralis a pilot (who had travailed those coasts with johannes de la Cossa while he yet lived) had a precious diamond which he bought of a naked young man in the region of Cumana in the province of Paria. 
a precious diemonde of erceding bygnes.  This stone was as long as two joints of a man's middle finger, and as big as the first joint of the thumme: being also painted on every side, consisting of eight squares perfectly form by nature. They say that with this they made scars in anuilles and hammers, and broke the teeth of files, the stone remaining unperysshed. The young man of Cumana, wore this stone about his neck among other ouches, and sold it to Andrea's Moralis for five of our counterfect stones made of glass of divers colours wherewith the ignorant young man was greatly delighted. They found also certain topases on the shore. 
Topases.  But thestimation of gold was so far entered into the heads of hour men, that they had no regard to stones. Also the most part of the spaniards, 
The spaniards contemn effeminate pleasures  do lawgh them to scorn which use to wear many stones: specially such as are common: judging it to be an effeminate thing, and more meet for women than men. The noble men only when they celebrate solemn marriages, or set forth any triumphs, wear chains of gold beset with precious stones, and use fair apparel of silk embrothered with gold intermixed with pearls and precious stones: And not at other times. They think it no less effeminate for men to smell of the sweet savours of Arabia: 
Sweet sauoru●.  And judge him to be infected with sum kind of filthy lechery, in whom they smell the savour of musk or Castoreum. But like as by one apple taken from a tree, we may perceive the tree to be fruitful, and by one fish taken in a river, we may know that fish is engendered in the same, even so, by a little gold, and by one stone, we ought to consider that this land bringeth forth great plenty of gold and precious stones. 
A similitude proving great plenty of gold & precious stones.  What they have found in the port of Sancti Martha in the region of Cariai when the hole navy passed thereby under the governance of Petrus Arias and his company with certain other of the kings officers, 
The haven of Sancta Martha.  
Cariai.  I have sufficiently declared in his place. To be short therefore, all things do so flourish, grow, increase, and prosper, that the last are ever better than the first. And surely to declare my opinion herein, 
The heroical facts of the Spaniards.  what so ever hath heretofore been discovered by the famous travails of Saturnus and Hercules, with such other whom the antiquity for their heroical facts honoured as gods, seemeth but little and obscure if it be compared to the spaniards victorious labours.  
This I bid your holiness far well, desiring you to certify me how you like these first fruits of the Ocean, that being encouraged with your exhortations, I may the gladlier and with less tediousness write such things as shall chance hereafter.   

The fift book of the third decade.  
ALL such living creatures as under the circle of the moon bring forth any thing, are accustomed by thinstinct of nature as soon as they are delivered of their birth, either to close up the matrice, or at the least to be quiet for a space. But hour most fruitful Ocean and new world, engendereth and bringeth forth daily new births whereby men of great wit, and especially such as are studious of new and marvelous things, may have somewhat at hand wherewith to feed their minds. If your holiness do ask to what purpose is all this, ye shall understand, that I had scarcely finished the history of such things as chanced to Vaschus Nunnez and his coompanye in their viage to the south sea, when soodenly there came new letters from Petrus Arias the new governor whom the king had appointed the year before with an army of men and a navy of ships to sail to these new lands. He signifieth by his letters, that he with his navy and company, arrived all safely.  
Furthermore, johannes Cabedus (whom your holiness at the request of the most catholic king had created bishop of that province of Dariena) and three other of the chief officers joined in commission to be his assistance, 
The bishop of Dariena.  as Alfonsus de Ponte, Diegus Marques, and johannes de Tavira, confirmed the same letters and subscribed them with their names. The navygation therefore of Petrus Arias, 
The navigation of Petrus Arias.  was in this manner. The day before the Ideses of Apryll, in the year of Christ .1514. he hoist up his sails in the town of saint Lucar de Barrameda, 
Saint Lucar.  sytuate in the mouth of the river Batis,, which the Spaniards now call Guadalchebir. The seven Islands of Canaria are about four hundredth miles distant from the place where this river falleth into the sea. 
The Island of Canary.  sum think that these are the Islands which the owlde writers did call the fortunate Islands. But other think the contrary. The name of the●e Islands, are these. The two which appear first in sight, are named Lanzelota and Fortisuentura. On the backhalf of these, lieth Magna Canaria or Grancanaria. Beyond that is Teurife: and Gomera somewhat toward the north from that. Palma and Ferrea, lie behind as it were a bulwark to all the other. Petrus Arias therefore, arrived at Gomera the eight day after his departure, with a navy of xvii ships and a. M. and five hundredth men, although there were only a thousand and two hundredth assigned him by the kings letters. It is said furthermore that he left behind him more than two thousand very pensive and sighing that they also might not be received, proffering themselves to go at their own charges. He tarried xvi days in Gomera to th'intent to make provision of fuel and fresh water: 
Provision of fresh water and fuel.  But chiefly to repair his ships being sore brosed with tempests, and especially the governors ship which had lost the rudder. For these Islands are a commodious resting place for all such as intend to attempt any navygations in that main sea. Departing from hence in the nonce of may, he saw no more land until the third day of june, at the which he arrived at Dominica an Island of the Canibales, 
The Island of Dominica.  being distant from Gomera about eight hundredth leaques. Here he remained four days, making new provision of fresh water and fuel, during which time he saw no man nor yet any steps of men: But found plenty of sea crabs and great lysartes. From hence he sailed by the Islands of Matinina (otherwise called Madanino) Guadalupea, 
Guadalupea, otherwise called Carucuer●a, or Queraquiera.  and Galanta (otherwise called Galana) of all which, we have spoken in the first decade. He passed also through the sea of herbs or weeds, continuing a long tract. Yet neither he, nor Colonus the admiral (who first found these Islands and sailed through this sea of weeds) have declared any reason how these weeds should come. 
The sea of herbs.  sum think the sea too be very muddy there, and that these weeds are engendered in the bottom thereof, and so being loosed, to ascend to the uppermooste part of the water, as we see oftentimes chance in certain standing pools, and sometimes also in great rivers. Other suppose that they are not engendered there, but to be beaten from certain rocks by the violence of the water in tempests. And thus they leave the matter in doubt: Neither have they yet any certain experience whether they stick fast and give place to the ships, or wander lose upon the water. But it is to be thought that they are engendered there. For otherwise they should be driven together on heaps by thympulsyon of the ships even as a beasome gathereth the swepynges of a house, and should also let the course of the ships. The fourth day after that he departed from Dominica, 
These mountains are called Montes Nivales or Serra Nevata, dec●de two. liber. i & ii  the high mountains covered with snow (whereof we have spoken in the second decade) appeared unto him. They say that there the seas run as swiftly toward the west, 
The swift cour●e of the sea toward the west.  as it were a river falling from the tops of high mountains: Although they sailed not directly toward the west, but inclined somewhat to the south. From these mountains falleth the river of Gaira, 
The river Gaira.  famous by the slaughter of hour men at such time as Rodericus Colmenares passed by those coasts as we have said before. Likewise many other fair rivers have their original from the same mountains. This province (in the which is also the region of Caramairi) hath in it two notable havens, 
Caramairi.  of the which hour men named the one Carthago or Carthagona, 
Carthago.  and the other Sancta Martha, the region whereof, thinhabitants call Saturma. 
Saturma.  The port of Sancta Martha, is nearer to the montaines covered with snow called Montes Nivales: 
Mountains covered with snow.  for it is at the roots of the same montaines. But the haven of Carthago, is more westewarde about fifty leaques. He writeth marvelous things of the haven of Sancta Martha, which they also confirm that came lately from thence: Of the which young Vesput●us is one to whom Americus Vesputius his uncle (being a Florentine borne) left the exact knowledge of the mariners faculty, 
Americus Vesp●tius.  as it were by inheritance after his death for he was a very expert master in the knowledge, of his card, his compass, and the elevation of the pole star with all that pertaineth thereto. This young Vesputius was assigned by the king to be one of the masters of the governors ship, because he was cunning in judging the degrees of the elevation of the pole star by the quadrante. For the charge of governing the rudder, was chiefly coommytted to one johannes Serranus a spaniard, who had oftentimes over run those coasts. Vesputius is my very familiar friend, and a witty young man in whose company I take great pleasure, and therefore use him oftentimes for my geste. He hath also made many voyages into these coasts, and diligently noted such things as he hath seen. Petrus Arias therefore writeth, and he confirmeth the same, that thinhabitants of these regions took their original of the Caribes or Canibales, as appeared by the desperate fierceness and cruelty which they oftentimes showed to hour men when they passed by their coasts. Such stoutness and fortitude of mind is naturally engendered in these naked Barbarians, 
The stoutness of the Barbarian●.  that they feared not to assail hour hole navy & to forbid them to come a land. They fight with venomous arrows as we have said before. perceiving that hour men contemned their threatenings, they ran furiously into the sea, even up to the breasts, 
The Canibales feygh● in the water.  nothing fearing either the bygnes or multitude of hour ships, but ceased not continually being thus in the water, to cast darts and shoot their venomous arrows as thick as hail: In so much that hour men had bin in great danger if they had not been defended by the cages or pavisses of the ships and their targets. Yet were two of them wounded which died shortly after. But this conflict continued so sharp, that at the length hour men were enforced to shoot of their bigest pieces of ordinance with hayleshotte: 
The use of guns.  At the slaughter and terrible noise whereof the barbarians being sore discomfited and shaken with fear, thinking the same to be thunder and lightning, 
The generation of thunder and lightning.  turned their backs and fled amain. They greatly fear thunder because these regions are oftentimes vexed with thunder and lightening by reason of the high mountains and dearness of the same to the region of the air wherein such fiery tempests are engendered which the philosophers call Meteora. 
Meteora.  And all be it that hour men had now driven their enemies to flight, and saw them disparkled and out of order, yet doubted they and were of divers opinions whether they should pursue them or not On the one party, shame pricked them forward, and on the other side fear caused them to cast many perils, especially considering the venomous arrows which these barbarians can direct so certainly. 
Uenemous arrows  To depart from them with a dry foot (as saith the proverb) with so great a navy and such an army, they reputed it as a thing greatly sounding to their reproach and dishonour. At the length therefore shame overcoming fear, they pursued them and came to land with their ship boats.  
The governor of the navy, and also Vesputius do write, that the haven is no less than three leagues in compass, being also safe without rocks, and the water thereof so clear, th●t a man may see pybble stones in the bottom twenty cubits deep. They say likewise that there falleth two fair rivers of fresh water into the ha●●n: but the same to be meeter to bear the canoas of these provinces than any bigger vessels. It is a delectable thing to hear what they tell of the plenty and variety, and also of the pleasant taste of the fishes aswell of these rivers as of the sea there about. By reason whereof they found here many fisher boats and nets wonderfully wrought of the stalks of certain her●bes or weeds dried and tawed and wreathed with cords of spun gossampine cotton. 
Plenty of fish.  For the people of Caramairi, Gaira, 
Cunning fishers.  and Saturma, are very cunning in fishing, and use to sell fish to their borderers for exchange of such things as they lack. When hour men had thus chased the Barbaryans from the sea coasts, and had now entered into their houses, they assailed them with new skyrmushes, especially when they saw them fall to sacking and spoiling, and their wives and children taken captive. Their household stuff was made of great reeds which grow on the sea banks, 
Their household stuff.  and the stalks of certain herbs beaten and afterward made hard. The flowers thereof were strewed with herbs of sundry colours: And the walls hanged with a kind of tapstery artificially made of gossampine cotton, 
Tapstery.  and wrought with pictures of Lions, Tigers, and Eagles. The doors of their houses and chambers were full of divers kinds of shells hanging lose by smaule cords, 
A strange fantasy.  that being shaken by the wind they might make a certain ratteling and also a whysteling noise by gathering the wind in their hollow places. For herein they have great delight, and impute this for a goodly ornament. divers have showed me many wonderful things of these regions: Especially one Conzalus Fernandus Ouiedus being one of the magistrates appointed in that office which the spaniards call Veedor, 
This is he whom Card●nus praiseth.  who hath also hitherto entered further into the land than any other. He affirmeth that he chanced upon the fragment of a sapphire bigger than the egg of a goose. And that in certain hills where he travailed with thirty men, he found many of the precious stones called Smaragdes, 
Precious stones The smaragd is the treweme●od●  calcidones, and jaspers', beside great pieces of amber of the montaines. He also with divers other do affirm that in the houses of sum of the Canibales of these regions, 
Another kind of amber is found in whales.  they found the like precious stones set in gold and enclosed in the tapstery or arras (if it may so be called) wherewith they hang their houses. The same land bringeth forth also many woods of brasile trees & great plenty of gold: 
Gold & brasile.  In so much that in manner in all places they found on the se● banks and on the shoores, certain marchasites in token of gold. 
Marchasites are flowers of metals, by the colours whereof the kinds of metals are known.  Fernandus Ouiedus declareth furthermore that in a certain region called Zenu, lying four score and ten miles from Dariena Eastward, they exercise a strange kind of merchandise. For in the houses of the inhabitants, they found great chests and baskets made of the twigs and leaves of certain trees apt for that purpose, being all full of gressehoppers, grylles, crabs, or crefysshes: snails also, and locusts which destrowe the fields of corn, 
These locusts burn the corn with toching and devour the residue they are in India of iii foot length. The fair region of Caramairi.  all well dried and salted. Being demanded why they reserved such a multitude of these beasts, they answered that they kept them to be sold to their borderers which dwell further within the land: And that for the exchange of these precious birds and salted fishes, they received of them certain strange things wherein partly they take pleasure, and partly use them for their necessary affairs. These people dwell not together, but scattered here and there. Thinhabitantes of Caramairi, seem to dwell in an earthly Paradise, their region is so fair and fruitful, without owtragious heat or sharp could, with little difference of the length of day and night throughout all the year. After that hour men had thus driven the barbarians to flight, they entered into a valley of two leagues in breadth & three in length, extending to certain fruitful mountains full of grass, 
fruitful mountains.  herbs, and trees, at the roots whereof, lie two other valleys toward the right hand and the left, through either of the which runneth a fair river, whereof the river of Gaira is one, but unto the other they have yet given no name. In these valleys they found many fair gardens and pleasant fields watered with trenshes distributed in marvelous order, 
Gardens. In●ubres are now called Lombard's, and hetrusci, Tuseans.  with no less art than hour Insubrians and etrurians use to water their fields. Their common meat, is Ages, jucca, Maizium, Battatae, with such other roots and fruits of trees, and also such fish as they use in the Islands and other regions of these provinces. They eat man's flesh but seldom, because they meet not oftentimes with strangers, except they go forth of their own dominions with a main army of purpose to hunt for men, 
Many countries left desolate by the fierceness of the Canibales.  when their ravening appetite pricketh them forward. For they abstain from themselves, and eat none but such as they take in the wars or otherwise by chance. But surely it is a miserable thing to hear how many myriades of men these filthy and unnatural devourers of man's flesh have consumed, 
One my●iade is ten thousand.  and left thousands of most fair and fruitful Islands and regions desolate without men: By reason whereof hour men found so many Islands which for their fairness and fruitfulness might seem to be certain earthly Paradyses, and yet were utterly void of men. Hereby your holiness may consider how pernicious a kind of men this is. We have said before that the Island named Sancti johannis (which thinhabitants call Burichena) is next to Hispaniola. It is said that only the Canibales which dwell in the other Islands near about this, as in the Island called Hayhay or Sancte Crucis, and in Guadalupea (otherwise called Queraqueiera, 
A miserable hearing.  or Carucuiera) have in hour time vyolentely taken out of the said Island of Sancti johannis, more than five thousand men to be eaten. But let it suffice thus much to have wandered by these monstrous bludsuckers. We will now therefore speak somewhat of the roots whereof they make their bread, forasmuch as the same shall hereafter be food to Christian men in steed of bread made of wheat, 
Bread of roots.  and in the stead of radysshe with such other roots as they have been accustomed to eat in Europe. We have oftentimes said before that jucca is a root whereof the best and most delicate bread is made both in the firm land of these regions, and also in the Islands. But how it is tilled or husbanded, how it groweth, and of how divers kinds it is, I have not yet declared. Therefore, when they intend to plant this jucca, 
The manner of planting the root jucca.  they make a hole in the earth knee deep, and raise a heap of the earth taken out of the same, fashioning it like a square bed of nine foot breadth on every side, setting twelve trunks of these roots (being about a foot and a half long a piece) in every of the said beds containing three roots of a side, so laid a slope, that the ends of them join in manner together in the centre or midst of the bed within the ground. Out of the joints of the roots and spaces between the same, spring the tops and blades of new roots, which by little and little increasing, grow to the bigness and length of a man's arm in the brawn, and oftentimes as big as the thigh: So that by the time of their full ripeness, in manner all the earth of the heap, is converted into roots. 
Earth turned into roots.  But they say that these roots are not ripe in less time than a year & a half: And that the longer they are suffered to grow even until two years complete, they are so much the better and more perfect to make bread thereof. 
how bread is made of roots.  When they are taken forth of the earth, they scrape them and slyse them with certain sharp stones scruing for the same purpose: And thus laying them between two great stones, or putting them in a sack made of the stalks of certain tough herbs and smaule reeds, they press them (as we do cheese or crabs to draw owte the juice thereof) and so let them dry a day before they eat them. The juice or lyquoure, they cast away: for (as we have said) it is deadly poison in the Islands. 
A strange thing.  Yet is the juice of such as grow in the firm land, wholesome if it be sod, as is the whey of hour milk. They say that there are many kinds of this jucca, whereof su●e are more pleasant and delicate then the other, and are therefore reserved as it were to make fine manchet for the kings own tables. But the gentlemen eat of the meaner sort, and the common people of the basest. The finest they call Cazabbi, 
Cazabbi.  which they make round like cakes in certain presses before they seeth it or bake it. They say furthermore that there are likewise divers kinds of the roots of Ages and Battata. 
Ages and Battata.  But they use these rather as fruits and dishes of service, then to make bread thereof, as we use rapes, radysshes, mussheroms, navies, perseneppes, and such like. In this case, they most especially esteem the best kind of Battatas, which in pleasant taste and tenderness far exceedeth hour musheromes. It shall suffice to have said thus much of roots. 
Panicum is a grain somewhat like 〈◊〉 The Italians call it Me●●ca.  We will now therefore speak of an other kind of their bread. We declared before that they have a kind of grain or pulse much like unto Panicum, but with sumwhrt bigger grains, which they beat into meal upon certain great hollow stones with the labour of their hands when they lack jucca: And of this is made the more vulgar or common bread. It is sown thrice a year, so that the frutfulnesse of the ground may bear it by reason of the equality of the time, whereof we have spoken sufficiently before. 
he meaneth the equal length of day and night which i● continually in regions under the Equinoctial line.  In these regions they found also the grain of Maizium, 
Maizium  and sundry kinds of fruits of trees diligently planted and well husbanded. The way between the regions of Caramairi and Saturma, is fair, broad, and right forth. They found here also sundry kinds of waterpots made of earth of divers colours, 
Earth of divers colours.  in the which they both fetch and keep fresh water. Likewise sundry kinds of jugs, godderdes, drinking cups, pots, pans, dishes, and platters artifycially made.  
When the governor had given commandment by proclamation, that thinhabitants should either obey the Christian king and embrace hour religion, or else to departed out of their country, they answered with venomous arrows. In this skirmish, hour men took sum of them: whereof clothing the most part in fair apparel, they sent them again to their own company: But leading the residue to the ships to thin●ent to show them the pour and magnificence of the christians that they might declare the same to their companions, thereby to win their favour, they apparelled them likewise and sent them after their fellows.  
they affirm that in all the rivers of these coasts, they saw great arguments and tokens of gold. 
Gold in rivers.  They found here and there in their houses good store of hearts flesh and bores flesh wherewith they fed themselves dilycately. 
hearts and bores.   
They also, have great plenty of sundry kinds of birds and fowls, 
Foules.  whereof they bring up many in their houses, sum for necessary food, and other for dainty dishes as we do hens and partridges. Hour men hereby conjecture that the air of these regions is very wholesome, 
wholesome air.  for as much as sleeping all night under the firmament on the banks of the rivers, none of them were at any time offended with rheums or head ache by reason of any noisome humour or vapour proceeding from the earth, air, or water. Hour men furthermore, found there many great bothomes of gossampyne cotton ready spunue, and farthels of divers kinds of feathers whereof they make them selue● crests and plumes 
Gossampine cotton. Feathers.  after the manner of hour men of arms: also certain cloaks which they esteem as most comely ornaments. They found likewise an innumerable multitude of bows and arrows. 
Bows and arrows.  Thinhabitantes also of these regions, in sum places use to burn the carcases of their princes when they are dead, and to reserve their bones buried with spices in certain hills. 
Dead bodies reserved  In other places, they only dry them and imbaume them with spyc●s and sweet gums, and so reserve them in sepulchres in their own houses. somewhere also, they dry them, spice them; adorn them with precious jewels and ouches, and so reverently place them in certain tabernacles made for the same purpose in their own places. When hour men had many of their tabellets, bracelets, collars, and such other ouches (which they call Guanines) they found them rather to be made of laton then of gold: 
Ouches of laton.  
Gonzalus Ouiedus, saith that they gilded marvellously with the juice of a certain. herb.  whereby they suppo●e that they have used to exchange their ware with sum crafty strangers which brought them those counterfeit ou●hes to defraud them of their gold. For even hour men perceived not the deceit until they came to the melting. Furthermore, certain of hour builders wandering a little way from the sea coasts, chanced to find certain pieces of white marble. 
white marble.  Whereby they think that in time passed sum strangers have come too those lands, which have digged marble out of the mountains, and left those fragments on the plain. There hour men learned that the river Maragnonus descendeth from the mountains covered with snow called Montes Nivales or Serra Nevata: 
The great river Maragnonus. This joineth with the mighty river called Flumen Amazonum, found of late.  And the same to be increased by many other rivers which fall into it throughowte all the low and watelye regions by the which it runneth with so long a tract from the said mountains into the sea: And this to be the cause of the greatness thereof. These things being thus brought to pass, the governor commanded the trumpitour to blow a retreat: whereupon they which were sent to land (being five hundredth in number) making a great shout for joy of their victory, set themselves in order of battle, and so keeping their array, returned to the ships laden with spoil of those provinces, and shining in soldiers cloaks of feathers, 
Cloaks of feathers.  with fair plumes and crests of variable colours. In this mean time having repaired their ships and furnished the same with all necessaries, they loosed anchor the xvi. day of the kalends of july, directing their course to the haven of Carthagena, in the which voyage they destroyed and wasted certain Islands of the Canibales lying in the way, according as they were commanded by the king. But the swift course of the water deceived both johannes Serranus the chief Pilet of the governors ship, 
The swift course o● the water.  and all the other, although they made their boast that they perfectly knew the nature thereof. For they affirm that in one night they were carried forty leaques beyond their estimation. 
x●. leaques in one night.    

The sixth book of the third Decade.  
HEre must we somewhat digress from cosmography, and make a philosophical discourse to search the secret causes of nature. For whereas they all affirm with on consent, that the sea runneth there from the east to the west as swiftly as it were a river faulinge from high mountains, 
Sundry opinions why the sea runneth with so swift course from the East into the west.  I thought it not good to let so great a matter slip untouched. The which while I consider, I am drawn into no smaule ambyguitie and doubt, whether those waters have their course which flow with so continual a tract in circuit from the east, as thowghe they fled to the west never to return, and yet neither the west thereby any whit the more filled, nor the east emptied. If we shall say that they faule to their centre (as is the nature of heavy things) and assign the Equinoctial line to be the centre (as sum affirm) what centre shall we appoint to be able to receive so great abundance of water? 
The equinoctial line.  
why all waters move toward the south or Equinoctial, bread Cardanus de subtly. l●ber ii de E●ementis.  Or what circumference shall be found weate? They which have searched those coasts, have yet found no likely reason to be true. Many think that there should be certain large straights or entrances in the corner of that great land which we described to be eight times bigger than italy, 
straights.  and the corner thereof to be full of gulfs, whereby they suppose that sum strayghtes should pass through the same lying on the west side of the Island of Cuba: And that the said straights should swallow up those waters, and so convey the same into the west and from thence again into hour east Ocean, or north seas as sum think. 
As by the straight of Magellanus. The north lands.  Other will, that the gulf of that great land be closed up: and the land to reach far toward the north on the back side of Cuba: so that it embrace the north lands which the frozen sea encompaseth under the north pole: And that all the land of those coasts, should join together as one fir●e land: Whereby they conjecture that those waters should be turned about by the object or resistance of that land so bending toward the north, as we see the waters ●courned about in the crooked banks of certain rivers. But this agreeth not in all points. For they also which have searched the frozen sea, 
The frozen sea.  and sailed from thence into the west, do likewise affirm that those north seas flow● continually toward the west, although nothing so swiftly. These north seas have been searched by one Sebastian Cabot a Venetian borne, 
Sebastian Cabot.  whom being yet but in manner an infant, his parents carried with them into England having occasion to resort thither for trade of merchandise, as is the manner of the venetians too leave no part of the world unsearched to obtain richesses. 
The venetians.  He therefore furnished two ships in England at his own charges: 
The voyage of Sebastian Cabot from England to the frozen sea.  And first with three hundredth men, directed his course so far toward the north pole, that even in the month of july he found monstrous heaps of Ice swimming on the sea, 
Frost in the month of july.  and in manner continual day light. Yet saw he the land in that tract, free from Ice, which had been melted by heat of the sun. Thus seeing such heaps of Ice before him he was enforced to turn his sails and follow the west, so coasting still by the shore, that he was thereby brought so far into the south by reason of the land bending so much southward that it was there almost equal in latitude with the sea called Fretum Herculeum, 
Fretum herculeum, divideth Spain & the moors and is now called the straights of Marrok.  having the north pole elevate in manner in the same degree. He sailed likewise in this tract so far toward the west, that he had the Island of Cuba his left hand in manner in the same degree of langitude. As he travailed by the coasts of this great land (which he named Baccalaos) he saith that he found the like course of the waters toward the west, 
Ba●●●llaos, or Terra Baccallea●um.  but the same to run more softly and gently then t●e swift waters which the spaniards found in their navigations southeward.  
Wherefore, it is not only more like to be true, but aught also of necessity to be concluded, that between both the lands hitherto unknown, there should be certain great open places whereby the waters should thus continually pass from the East into the west: which waters I suppose to be driven about the globe of the earth by the uncessant moving and impulsion of the heavens: 
The moving of heaven causeth the sea to move.  and not to be swallowed up and cast out again by the breathing of Demogorgon as sum have imagined because they see the seas by increase and decrease, 
Demogorgon is the spirit of the earth.  to flow and rescowe. Sebastian Cabot himself, named those lands Baccalaos, because that in the seas thereabout he found so great multitudes of certain big fishes much like unto ●umes (which thinhabitants call Baccalaos) that they sometimes stayed his ships. He found also the people of those regions covered with beasts skins: 
People covered with beasts sk●n●  Yet not without those of reason.  
He saith also that there is great plenty of bears in those regions, which use to eat fish. 
how bears take and eat fishes of the sea.  For plungeinge themselves into the water where they perceive a multitude of these fishes to lie, they fasten their claws in their scales, and so draw them to land and eat them. So that (as he saith) the bears being thus satisfied with fish, are not noisome to men. He declareth further, that in many places of these regions, 
Perhaps this laton is copper which holds gold. For laton hath no mine, and is an artificial metal and not natural. Cabot called out of England's into Spain.  he saw great plenty of laton among thinhabitants. Cabot is my very friend, whom I use famylierly, and delight to have him sometimes keep me company in mine own house. For being called out of England by the commandment of the catholic king of Castille after the death of Henry King of England the seventh of that name, he was made one of hour counsel and assistance as touching the affairs of the new Indies, looking daily for ships to be furnished for him to discover this hid secret of nature. This viage is appointed to be begun in March in the year next following, 
The Second voyage of Cabot.  being the year of christ M. D. X●I. What shall succeed, your holiness shallbe advertised by my letters if god grant me life. Sume of the spaniards deny that Cabot was the first finder of the land of Baccalaos: And affirm that he went not so far westewarde. But it shall suffice to have said thus much of the gulfs & straights, and of Cebastian Cabot. Let us now therefore return to the spaniards. At this time, they let pass the haven of Carthago untouched, with all the Islands of the Canibales there about, 
The Islands of the Canybales.  which they named Insulas Sancti Bernardi: Leaving also behind their backs, all the region of Caramairi. Hear by reason of a sooden tempest, they were cast upon the Island Fortis, 
The Island Fortis.  being about fifty leagues distant from the entrance of the gulf of Vraba. In this Island, they found in the houses of thinhabitants, many baskets made of certain great sea reeds, full of salt. For this Island hath in it many goodly salt bays: by reason whereof they have great plenty of salt which they sell to other nations for such things as they stand in need of. 
Salt  Not far from hence, 
A strange thing.  a great curlewe as big as a stork came flying to the governors ship, and suffered herself to be ●easely taken: which being carried about among all the ships of the navy, died shortly after, They saw also a great multitude of the same kind of fowls on the shore a far of.  
The governor his ship which we said to have lost the rudder being now sore bruised and in manner unprofitable, they left behind to follow at leisure. The navy arrived at Dariena the twelfth day of the kalends of july, 
how Petrus Arias with the kings navy arrived at Dariena.  and the governor his ship (being void of men) was driven a land in the same coasts within four days after. The spaniards which now inhabited Dariena, with their captain and Lieutenant Vuschus Nunnez Balboa (of whom we have largely made mention before) being certified of tharrival of Petrus Arias and his coompanye, 
how Uaschus received the new governor.  went forth three miles to meet him, & received him honourably & religiously with the psalm Te deum Laudamus, giving thanks to god by whose safe conduct they were brought so prosperously thither to all their comforts. They received them gladly into their houses builded after the manner of those provinces. I may well call these regions, Provinces, 
why these regions are cau●ed provinces.  a Procul victis, (that is) such as are overcome far of, forasmuch as hour men do now inhabit the same all the barbarous kings and idolaters being ejected. They entertained them with such cheer as they were able to make them: as with the fruits of those regions, and new bread both made of roots and the grain Mai●ium. Other delicates to make up the feast, were of their own store which they brought with them in their ships, as powdered flesh, salted fish, and bread made of wheat. For they brought with them many barrels of wheat meal for the same purpose. 
Barrels of meal.  Here may your holiness not without just cause of admiration behold a kings navy and great multitude of Christians, inhabytinge not only the regions situate under the circle of heaven called Tropicus Cancri, but also in manner under the Equinoctial line, 
habitable regions under the Equinoctial line.  contrary to th'opinion of the owlde writers, a few excepted. But after that they are now met together, let us further declare what they determined to do. Therefore, the day after that the navy arrived, there assembled a company of the spaniards thinhabitors of Dariena, to the number of four hundredth and fifty men. Petrus Arias the governor of the navy and his company, conferred with them both privily and openly of certain articles whereof it was the kings pleasure he should inquire: And most especially as concerning such things whereof Vaschus the first finder and Admiral of the south sea, made mention in his large letter sent from Dariena to spain. In this inquisition they found all things to be trewew, hereof Vaschus had certified the king by his letters: And there upon concluded that in the dominions of Comogra, Pocchorrosa, & Tumanama, at thassignment of Vaschus, certain fortresses should be erected forthwith to th'intent there to plant their colony or habitation. 
where the new governor planted his habitation  To the better accomplysshement hereof, they sent immediately one johannes Aiora a noble young gentleman of Corduba and under Lieutenant, 
The voyage of johannes Aiora  with four hundredth men and four caravels and one other little ship. Thus departing, he sailed first directly to the haven of Comogrus, 
The haven of Comogrus  distant from Dariena about twenty and five leagues, as they write in their last letters. from hence, he as appointed to send a hundredth and fifty of his four hundredth, toward the South by a new and righter way found of late, by the which (as they say) it is not passed xxvi leagues from the palace of king Comogrus to the entrance of the gulf of Sancti Michaelis. 
saint Mychaels' gulf  The residue of the four hundredth, shall remain there to be an aid and secure to all such as shall journey to and fro. Those hundredth and fifty which are assigned to go southward, take with them for interpreters certain of hour men which had learned the sootherne language of the bond men which were given to Vaschus when he overran those regions, and also certain of the bondem●n themselves which had now learned the spanish tongue. They say that the haven of Pocchorrosa, 
The haven Pocchorrosa.  is only seven leaques distant from the haven of Comogrus. In Pocchorrosa, he is assigned to leave fyft●e men with the lightest ship which may be a passenger between them: 
A passynger ship.  that like as we use post horses by land, so may they by this currant ship, in short space certify the lieutenant and th'inhabitors of Dariena of such things as shall chance. They intend also to build houses in the region of Tumanama. The palace of king Tumanama, 
King Tumanama.  is distant from Pocchorrosa about twenty leaques. Of these four hundredth men, being of the owlde soldiers of Dariena and men of good experience, fifty wear appointed to be as it were Decurians to guide and conduct the new men from place to place to do their affairs. 
Decurians are officers divided into ●ennes, etc.  When they had thus set all things in order, they thought it good to advertise the king hereof, and therewith to certify him that in those provinces there is a king named Dabaiba whose dominion is very rich in gold: 
King Dabaiba.  But the same to be yet untouched by reason of his great power. His kingdom joineth to the second great river named Dabaiba after his name, 
The gold mines of Dabaiba  which falleth into the sea out of the corner of the gulf of Vraba as we have largely declared before. The common report is, that all the land of his dominions is rich in gold. The palace of king Dabaiba is thirty leaques distant from Dariena. 
The palace of king Dabaiba.  Thinhabitantes say that from the palace, the gold mines reach to the borthers on every side. 
The gold mines of Dariena.  Albeit, hour men have also gold mines not to be contemned, even within three leaques of Dariena, in the which they gather gold in many places at this present: Yet do they affirm greater plenty to be in the mines of Dabaiba. In the books of hour first fruits written to your holiness, we made mention of this Dabaiba, wherein hour men were deceived and mystooke the matter. 
●n error.  For where they found the fisher men of king Dabaiba in the marishes, they thought his region had been there also. They determined therefore to send to king Dabaiba, three hundredth choice young men to be chosen out of the hole army as most apt to the wars, 
Expedition against king Dabaiba.  and well furnished with all kinds of armour and artillery, to th'intent to go unto him and will him, either friendly and peaceably to permit them to inhabit part of his kingdom with the fruition of the gold mines, or else to bid him battle and drive him out of his country. In their letters, they often ●ymes repeat this for an argument of great richesse to come, 
Great plenty of gold,  that they in manner digged the ground in no place, but found the earth mixed with sparks and smaule grains of gold. They have also advertised the king that it shallbe commodious to place inhabitors in the haven of Sancta Martha in the region of Saturma, 
The region of Saturma  that it may be a place of refuge for them that sail from the Island of Dominica from the which (as they say) it is but four or five days sailing to that haven of the region of Saturma: 
The Island of Dominica,  And from the haven, but three days sailing to Dariena. 
Dariena.  But this is to be understood in going and not in returning. For the returning from thence is so laborious and difficult by reason of the contrary course of the water, 
difficult sailing against the course of the sea,  that they seem as it were to ascend high mountains and strive against the power of Neptunus. This swift course of the sea toward the West, is not so violente to them which return to Spain from the Islands of Hispaniola and Cuba: Although they also do labour against the fall of the Ocean: The cause whereof is, that the sea is here very large, so that the waters have their full scoop. But in the tract of Paria, the waters are constrained together by the bending sides of that great land, and by the multitude of Islands lying against it, as the like is seen in the straights or narrow seas of Sicily where the violent course of the waters cause the dangerous places of Scylla and Charybdis, 
The dangerous straights of Scylla & Charybdis,  by reason of those narrow seas which contain jonium, Libicum, and Tirrhenum. Colonus the first finder of these regions, hath left in writing, that sailing from the Island of Guanassa, 
Guanassa.  and the provinces of jaia, 
jaia,  Maia, 
Maia.  and Cerabaro, 
Cerabaro.  being regions of the west marches of Beragua, 
Beragua.  he found the course of the water so vehement and furious against the fore part of his ship while he sailed from those coasts toward the east, that he could at no time touch the ground with his sounding plummet, but that the contrary violence of the water would bear it up from the bottom. 
The vehement course of the sea fro the east to the west.  He affirmeth also, that he could never in one hole day with a meately good wind, win one mile of the course of the water. And this is the cause why they are oftentimes enforced to sail first by the Islands of Cuba and Hispaniola, and so into the main sea toward the North when they return to Spain, that the north winds may further their viage which they can not bring to pass by a direct course. 
The north● wind  But of the motions of the Ocean sea to and fro, this shall suffice. Let us now therefore rehearse what they writ of Dariena, & of their habitation there, which they call Sancta Maria Antiqua, 
Sancta Maria Antiqua, the fy●st habitation of the spaniardes in the firm land.  planted on the sea banks of Dariena. The situation of the place, hath no natural munition or defence: And the air is more pestiferous then in Sardus. 
Sardus the Island of Sardinia,  The Spanish inhabitors, are all pale & yellow, like unto them that have the yellow gianndyes. Which nevertheless cometh not of the nature of the region as it is situate under the heaven. For in many regions being under the self same degree of latitude, having the pole of the same elevation, 
The variety of regions lying under one parallel,  they find wholesome & temperate air, in such places where as the earth bringeth forth fair springs of water, or where wholesome rivers run by banks of pure earth without mud: but most especially where they inhabit the sides of the hills and not the valleys. But that habytation which is on the banks of the river of Dariena, is sytuate in a deep valley, and environed on every side with high hills: By reason whereof, it receiveth the son beams at noontide directly perpenticular over their heads, and are therefore sore vexed by reflection of the beams both before, behind, and from the sides. For it is the reflection of the son beams which causeth fervent heat, 
By what means the ●onne beams are cau●e of fervent heat.  and not their access or nearness to the earth. Forasmuch as they are not passable in themselves as doth manifestly appear by the snow lying continually unmolten upon certain high mountains, as your holiness knoweth right well. The son beams therefore fauling on the mountains, are reflected downward into the valley by reason of thobject of the declining sides of the hills, as it were the fall of a great round stone rolled from the top of a mountain. The valley therefore receiveth, both those beams which fall directly thereon, and also those which are reflected downward from every side of the mountains. Their habitation therefore in Dariena, 
The pernicious air of Darien●.  is pernicious and unwholesome only of the particular nature of the place, & not by the situation of the region as it is placed under the heaven or ●●eare to the son. The place is also contagious by the nature of the soil, by reason it is coompased about with muddy and stinking marishes, th'infection whereof is not a little increased by the heat. The village itself, is in a marish, and in manner a standing puddle, where, of the drops falling from the hands of the bond men while they water the pavements of their houses, 
Toads and flees engendered of drops of water,  toads are engendered immediately, as I myself saw in an other place the drops of that water turn into flees in the summer season. Furthermore, where so ever they dig the ground the depth of a handful and a half, there springeth owte unwholesome and corrupt water of the nature of the river which runneth through the deep & muddy channel of the valley, and so falleth into the sea. Now therefore they consult of removing their habytation. Necessity caused them first to fasten their foot hear, 
Necessity hath no ●aw●  because that they which first arrived in those lands, were oppressed with such urgent hunger, that they had no respect to change the place although they were thus vexed by the contagion of the soil and heat of the son, beside the corrupt water and infectious air by reason of venomous vapours and exhalations rising from the same. another great incommodity was, that the place was destitute of a commodious haven, being three leaques distant from the mouth of the gulf. The way is also rough and difficulty to bring victuals and other necessaries from the sea. But let us now speak somewhat of other particular things which chanced.  
Therefore shortly after that they wear arrived, there happened many things whereof they had no knowledge before. A certain well learned phisytion of Civil, whom partly thauthority of the bishop of Dariena, and partly the desire of gold had alured to those lands, was so scared with lightening in the night season lying in bed with his wife, that the house and all the stuff therein being set on fire and burnt, 
A hou●e set on fire with lightening,  he and his wife being both sore scorched, ran forth crying and almost naked, hardly escaping the danger of death. At an other time, as certain of them stood on the shore, a great Crocodyle suddenly carried away a masty of a year and a half old, 
A dog devoured of a crocodyle,  as a kite should have snatched up a chicken: 
Tanquam canis e Nilo.  And this even in the presence of them all, where the miserable dog cried in vain for the help of his master. In the night season they were tormented with the biting of bats which are there so noisome that if they bite any man in his sleep, 
The biting of bats.  they put him in danger of life, only with drawing of blood: In so much that sum have died thereof, falling as it were into a consumption through the malyciousnesse of the venomous wound. If these bats chance to find a cock or a hen abroad in the night season, they bite them by the combs and so kill them. They also which went last into these regions, do write, that the land is troubled with Crocodyles, Lions, and Tigers: 
Lions and tigers,  But that they have now devised arts and ingens how to take them. Likewise that in the houses of their fellows, they found the hides and cases of such Lions and Tigers as they had killed. They write furthermore, that by reason of the rankness and fruitfulness of the ground, kine, swine, and horses, do marvelously increase in these regions, and grow to a much bigger quantity than they which wear of the first brood. 
Beasts were bigger in the●r kind,  Of the exceeding highness of the trees with their fruits, of the garden herbs, fruits, plants, and seeds which hour men brought from Spain and sowed and set the same in these regions, likewise of the hearts and other four footed beasts both tame and wild, also of divers kinds of fowls, birds, and fishes, they writ even as we have declared in the decades before. Careta the king of the region of Cioba, 
how the governor entertained king Careta,  was with them for the space of three days: whom when they had friendly entertained and showed him the secret places of their ships, their horses also with their trappars, bards, and other furnimentes, beside many other things which seemed strange to him, and had further delighted his mind with the harmony of their musical instruments, and given him many rewards, they dismissed him half amazed with to much admiration. 
Note.   
He signified unto them, that their trees in that province, of the planks whereof, if ships were made, they should be safe from the worms of the sea which they call Bromas. 
Broma or Bissa, are worms which destroy ships,  How these worms gnaw and corrode the ships, we have declared before. Hour ships are greatly trou●eled with this plague if they lie long in the havens of these regions. But they affirm that the wood of this tree is so bitter, that the worms will not taste thereof. There is also an other tree peculiar to these lands: 
A venomous tree.  whose leaves if they only touch the bare in any place of a man's body, they cause great blisters, and those so malicious that except the same be forthwith healed with salt water or fasting spittle, they do incontinently engender deadly pains. They say likewise, that the savour of the wood is present poison: 
Perhaps they● venomous arrows are made of this woodds or. etc.  And that it can no whither be carried without danger of life. When thinhabitants of the Island of Hispaniola had oftentimes attempted to shake of the yoke of servitude, and could never bring the same to pass neither by open war nor yet by privy conspiraces, they were determined in the night season to have killed hour men in their sleep with the smoke of this wood. But when the Christian men had knowledge hereof, they compelled the poor wretches to confess their intent, and punished the chief authors of the devise. They have also a certain herb with the favour whereof they are preserved from the hurt of this venomous wood so that they may bear it safely. 
A preservative against poison,  Of these smaule things it shall suffice too have said thus much. They look daily for many greater things to certify us of from the Islands of the south sea. 
The islands of the south sea,  For at such time as the messenger which brought hour letters departed from thence, Petrus Arias prepared an expedition to that rich Island which lieth in the mouth of the gulf called Sinus S. Michaelis, and reacheth into the south sea, 
The rich Island called Dites,  being also left untouched of Vaschus by reason that the sea was at that time of the year sore troubled with tempests, as we have further declared in Vaschus his viage to the south. We look therefore daily for greater things than are hitherto passed. For they have now taken in hand to subdue many other provinces, which we suppose too be either very rich, or to bring forth sum strange works of nature. johannes Diaz Solistus of Nebrissa (of whom we have made mention before) is sent by the froonte of the cape or point of Sancti Augustini (which reacheth seven degrees beyond the Equinoctial line, 
Cab, sancti Augustini, Of the evil success of these viages, read decade iii, Liber, ix,  and pertaineth to the dominion of the Portugals) to th'intent to over run the south side from the back half of Paria, Cumana, Cuquibacoa, with the havens of Carthag● and Sancta Martha, of Dariena also and Beragua, that more perfect and certain knowledge may be had of those tracts. Furthermore, one johannes Poncius was sent forth with three ships to destroy the Canibales both in the land and Islands there about: 
An expedition to destroy the Canibales,  aswell that the nations of the more human and innocent people may at the length live without fear of that pestiferous generation, as also the better and more safely to search the secrets and richesse of those regions. Many other likewise were sent divers and sundry ways: as Gasper Badaiocius too search the West parts: Franciscus Bezerra, to sail by the corner of the gulf: And Valleius, to pass by the mouth or entrance thereof to the east coasts of the gulf to search the secrets of that land, in the which Fogeda with his coompanye had of late begun to plant their habitation, 
Fogeda.  and had builded a fortress and a village. Badaiocius departed first from Dariena with four score soldiers well appointed: Whom Lodovicus Mercado followed with fifty:  
To Bezerra were also fourscore assigned, and three score and ten to Valleius. 
Look. decad. 〈◊〉 Lib. ix,  Whether they shall arrive at safe and commodious havens, or fall into unfortunate stations, he only knoweth whose providence ruleth all: For as for us men we are included within the knowledge of things after they have chanced. Let us now therefore come to other matters.   

¶ The seventh book of the third decade.  
PEtrus Arias the governor of the supposed continente, was scarcely entered into the main sea with his navy onward on his viage to Dariena. But I was advertised that one Andreas Moralis a pilot who had oftentimes over run the coasts of these new seas and the Islands of the same, 
The navigations of An●reas Mo●alis  was come to the court to sell such merchandise as he brought with him from thence. This man had diligently searched the tract of the supposed continente, and especially thinner regions of the Island of Hispaniola, whereunto he was appointed by his brother Nicolaus Ou●ndos (the governor of the Island and chief Commendatory of the order of the knights of Alcantara) because he was a witty man and more apt to search such things than any other: So that with his own hands he drew fair cards and tables of such regions as he discovered. Wherein as he hath bin found faithful of such as have sense had better trial hereof, so is he in most credit amongst the best sort. He therefore resorted to me as all they are accustomed to do, which return from the Ocean. 
A particular description of the Island of hispaniol●  What I learned of him and divers other of things heretofore unknown, I will now declare. The beginning of this narration, shallbe the particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, forasmuch as it is the head and as it wear the principal mart of all the liberality of the Ocean, and hath a thousand and again a thousand fair, pleasant, 
Nereids are nymphs of the ●ea▪ he meaneth Islands,  beautiful, and rich Nereids which lie about it on every side, adourning this their lady and mother, as it were an other Tethis the wife of Neptunus, 
T●this the wife of Neptunus and goddess of the sea,  enuyroning her about, and attending upon her as their queen and patroness. But of these Nereiades (that is to say, the Islands placed about her) we will speak more hereafter. Let us in the mean time declare somewhat of the Island which hour men named Margaritea Dives (which the spaniards call De las perlas) being now well known, 
The Island of Margaritea Dives,  and lying in the south sea in the gulf called Sinus Sancti Michaelis (that is) saint Michael's gulf. 
Saint Michael's gulf  This Island hath presently brought to hour knowledge many strange and wonderful things and promysseth no smaule hope of greater things in time to come. In this is found great plenty of pearls so fair & great, 
Great pearls  that the sumptuous queen Cleopatra might have seemed to wear them in her crowns, chains, and bracelets. Of the shelfysshes wherein these are engendered, we will speak somewhat more in th'end of this narration. But let us now return to Hispaniola most like unto the earthly paradise. 
hispaniola like unto the earthly paradise,  In the description hereof, we will begin of the imposytion of diverse names: Then of the form of the Island, temperate air and beneficial heaven: And finally of the division of the regions. Therefore for the righter pronunsyation to the names, your holiness must understand that they are pronounced with thaccent, as you may know by the verge set over the heads of the vowels, as in the name of the Island Matinino, where the accente is in the last vowel, and the like to be understood in all other names. They say therefore, that the first inhabitors of the Island were transported in their Canoas' (that is boats made of one hole piece of wood) from the Island of M●tinino, 
The fy●st inhabitors of hi●paniola  being like banished men driven from thence by reason of certain contrary factions and divisions among themselves, like as we read how Dardanus came from Corytho, 
Dardanus.  and Teverus from Creta into Asia, 
Teu●rus.  and that the region where they placed their habitation, was afterward called Troianum. 
Troianum.  The like we read how the Tirians and Sidonians arrived with their navy in Libya by the fabulous conduction of Dido. 
T●rians,  
Sidonians:  These Matininans in like manner being banished from their own country, planted their first habytation in that part of the Island of Hispaniola which they call Cabonao, upon the bank of the river named Bahaboni: As is red in the beginning of the Romans that Aeneas' of Troy arrived in the region of Italy called Latium upon the banks of the river of Tiber. 
Aeneas.  
Latium.  Within the mouth of the river of Bahaboni, lieth an Island where it is said that thinhabitants builded their first house which they named Camoteia. This house they consecrated shortly after, and honoured the same reverently with continual gifts and monuments, even until the coming of hour men, like as the Christians have ever religiously honoured jerusalem the fountain and original of hour faith: 
hierusalem  As also the Turks attribute the like to the city of Mecha in Araby, 
Mecha.  and thinhabitants of the fortunate Islands (called the Islands of Canary) to Tyrma builded upon a high rock from the which many were wounte with joyful minds and songs to cast themselves down headlong, 
The Islands of Canary,  being persuaded by their priests that the souls of all such as so did for the love of Tyrma, should thereby enjoy eternal felicity. The conquerors of the Islands of Canary, found them yet remaining in that superstition, even until hour time: Nor yet is the memory of their sacrifices utterly worn away: The rock also reserveth the old name unto this day. I have also learned of late, that there yet remaineth in the Island sum of the faction of Betanchor the Frenshe man and first that brought the Islands 
Betanchor, a Frenchman,  to good culture and civility being thereto licensed by the king of Castille as I have said before. These do yet (for the most part) observe both the language and manners of the Frenshemen, although the heirs and successors of Betanchor, had sold the two subdued Islands to certain men of Castille. Yet th'inhabitors which succeeded Betanchor, and builded them houses and increased their families there, do continue to this day: And live quietly and pleasantly with the spaniards, not grieved with the sharp could of France. But let us now return to thinhabitants of Matinino and Hispaniola. The Island of Hispaniola was first named by the first inhabitors, 
The first names of hispaniola.  Quizqueia, and then Haiti.  
And this not by chance, or at the pleasure of such as devised these names, but of credulity and belief of sum great effect. For Quizqueia, is as much to say as a great thing: And that so great that none may be greater. They interpret also, that Quizqueia signifieth, large, universal, or all, in like signification as the Greeks named their god called Pan: 
Pan.  Because that for the greatness thereof, these simple souls supposed it to be the hole world: And that the son beams gave light to none other world but only to this Island with the other adiacente about the same: And thereupon thought it most worthy to be called great, as the greatest of all other known to them. Haiti is as much to say by interpretation, as rough, sharp, or craggy. But by a figurative speech called denomination (whereby the hole is named by part) they named the hole Island Haiti (that is) rough: For as much as in many places the face of this Island is rough b● reason of the craggy mountains, 
The roughness of hispaniola  horrible thick woods, and terrible dark and deep valleys environed with great and high mountains, although it be in many other places exceeding beautiful and flourishing.  
Here must we somewhat digress from thorder we are entered into. Perhaps your holiness will marvel by what means these simple men should of so long continuance bear in mind such principles, where as they have no knowledge of letters. So it is therefore, that from the beginning, their princes have ever been accustomed to commit their children to the governance of their wise men which they call Boitios, to be instructed in knowledge, 
The manner of learning.  and to bear in memory such things as they learn. They give themselves chiefly to two things: As generally to learn th'original and success of things: And particularly to rehearse the noble facts of their grandfathers great grandfathers and ancestors aswell in peace as in war. These two things they have of old time composed in certain miters and ballets in their language. These rhymes or ballets, 
Ballets and rhymes.  they call Ar●itos. And as hour minstrels are accustomed too sing to the harp or lute, so do they in like manner sing these songs and dance to the same, playing on tymbrelles made of shells of certain fishes. These timbrels they call Maguei. They have also songs and ballets of love: And other of lamentations and mourning: 
Singing and dancing.  
Soonges of love and mourning.  Sum also to encourage them to the wars, with every of them their tewnes agreeable to the matter. They exercise themselves much in daunceinge, wherein they are very active and of greater agility than hour men, by reason they give themselves to nothing so much, and are not hindered with apparel which is also the cause of their swiftness of foot. In their ballets left them of their ancestors, they have prophecies of the coming of hour men into their country. These they sing with mourning and as it were with groaning, 
Prophecies,  bewail the loss of their liberty and servitude. For these prophecies make mention that there should come into the Island Maguacochios, 
Note  that is, men clothed in apparel, and armed with such swords as should cut a man in sunder at one stroke: under whose yoke their posterity should be subdued. And here I do not marvel that their predecessors could prophecy of the servitude and bondage of their succession, if it be true that is said of the familiarity they have with spirits which appear to them in the night, 
Their familiarity with spirits  whereof we have largely made mention in the ninth book of the first decade, where also we have entreated of their Zemes (that is) their Idols and Images of devils which they honoured. 
The devil is driven away by baptism  But they say that sense these Zemes were taken away by the Christians, the spirits have no more appeared. Hour men ascribe this to the sign of the cross wherewith they defend themselves from such spirits. For they are now all cleansed and sanctified by the water of baptism whereby they have renounced the devil and are consecrated the holy members of Christ. They are universally studious to know the bounds and lymettes of their regions and kingdoms: And especially their Mitaini (that is) noble men. So that even they are not utterly ignorant in the surueyinge of their lands. 
surveyors  The common people have none other care then of setting, sowing, and planting. They are most expert fishers, 
They live as much in the water as on the land  by reason that throughowte the hole year, they are accustomed daily to plounge themselves in the rivers, so that in manner they live no less in the water then on the land. They are also given to hunting. For (as I have said before) they have two kinds of four footed beasts, whereof the one is little cunnes called Vtias, and the other Serpents named juannas, 
Serpent's  much like unto Crocodiles, 
A Crocodile is much like to our ewte or Lyserte  of eight foot length, of most pleasant taste, and living on the land. All the Islands nourish innumerable birds and fowls: 
Birds and fowls  As stock doves, ducks, geese, hearons, bysyde nolesse number of popingiaiss than sparrows with us. 
popinjays  Every king hath his subjects divided to sundry affairs: As sum to hunting, other to fishing, and other sum to husbandry. But let us now return to speak further of the names. We have said that Quizqueia and Haiti, were the old names of this Island.  
The hole Island was also called Cipanga of the region of the mountains abounding with gold: 
Cipanga.  Like as hour ancient poets called all italy Latium of part thereof. 
Italy called Latium  Therefore as they called Ausonia and Hesperia, Italy, even so by the names of Quizqueia, Haiti, and Cipanga, they understood the hole Island of Hispaniola. Hour men did first name it Isabel of queen Helisabeth which in the Spanish tongue is called Isabel: 
Isabel  And so named it of the first Colony where they planted their habitation upon the bank near unto the sea on the north side of the Island, as we have further declared in the first decade. But of the names, this shall suffice. Let us now therefore speak of the form of the Island. 
The form of the Island of hispaniola  They which first over ran it, described it unto me to be like the leaf of a chestnut tree, with a gulf toward the west side, lying open against the Island of Cuba. But the expert ship master Andreas Moralis, brought me the form thereof somewhat differing from that. For from both the corners, as from the east angle and the West, he described it to be indented and eaten with many great gulfs, and the corners to reach forth very far: and placeth many large and safe havens in the great gulf on the East side. But I trust shortly so to travail further herein, that a perfect card of the particular description of Hispaniola may be sent unto your holiness. 
A particular card of hispaniola.  For they have now drawn the Geographical description thereof in cards, even as your holiness hath seen the form and situation of Spain and italy with their montaines, valleys, rivers, cities, and colonies. Let us therefore without shamefastness compare the Island of Hispaniola to Italy, 
hispaniola compared to Italy,  sometime the head and queen of the hole world. For if we consider the quantity, it shall be found little less, and much more fruitful. It reacheth from the east into the West, five hundredth and forty miles according to the computation of the later searchers: Although the admiral somewhat increased this number as we have said in the first decade. It is in breadth sum where, almost three hundredth miles: And in sum places narrower where the corners are extended. But it is surely much more blessed and fortunate than Italy: 
The temperature of hispaniola.  Being for the most part thereof so temperate and flourishing, that it is neither vexed with sharp could, nor afflicted with immoderate heat. It hath both the steyinge or conversyons of the son (called Solstitia) in manner equal with the Equinoctial, 
The equinoctial.  with little difference between the length of the day and night throughout all the year. For on the the south side, the day ascendeth scarcely an hour in length above the night, or contrary wise. But the difference is more on the north side. 
Could accidental, and not by the situation of the region,  Yet are there sum regions in the Island in the which the could is of sum force. But your holiness must understand this to be incident by reason of the object or dearness of the mountains, as we will more largely declare hereafter. Yet is not this could so piercing or sharp, that thinhabitants are molested with snow or biting frost. In other places, the Island enjoyeth perpetual springe time, and is fortunate with continual summer and harvest. 
Perpetual spring and ●oomer,  The trees flourish there all the hole year: And the meadows continue always green. All things are exceeding fortunate, and grow to great perfection. How wonderfully all garden herbs and fruits do increase, 
marvelous frutfulnes  so that within the space of sixteen days after the seed is sown, all herbs of smaule steams, as lettesse, borage, radish, and such other, come to their full ripenesss: And also how herbs of the bigger sort, as gourds, melones, cucumbers, pompons, citrous, and such other, come to their perfection in the space of thirty days, we have sufficiently declared else where. Of the beasts transported out of Spain thither, 
Beasts  we have said how they grow too a much greater kind: In so much that when they faule into communication of the oxen or kine, they compare them in bigness to elephants, and swine to mules: 
Oxen and swine of exceeding bigness,  But this somewhat by an excessive kind of speech. We have also made mention how their swines flesh is more savoury and of far better and more pleasant taste and more wholesome than ours, by reason they are fed with the fruits of Myrobalane trees, 
Swine fed with Myrobalanes  and other pleasant and nourishing fruits of that country, which grow there of themselves, as do with us beech's, holly, & oaks. Uynes would also prosper there with marvelous increase, 
Uines  if they had any regard to the planting thereof. The like increase cometh of wheat if it be sown upon the mountains where the cold is of sum strength: 
wheat  but not in the plains, by reason of to much fatness and rankness of the ground. It is in manner incredible to hear, that an ear of wheat should be bigger than a man's arm in the brawn, 
An ear of wheat as big as a man's arm in the brawn  and more than a span in length, bearing also more than a thousand grains, as they all confess with one voice, and earnestly affirm the same with oaths. Yet they say the bread of the Island (called Cazabbi made of the root of jucca, 
The bread of the Island.  to be more wholesome, because it is of easier digestion, and is cultured with less labour and greater increase. The residue of the time which they spend not en setting and planting, they bestow in gathering of gold. 
Gold,  They have now such plenty of four footed beasts, 
Great plenty of cattle,  that horses and ox hides with sheep skins and goat skins and such other, are brought from thence into Spain: So that now the daughter in many things helpeth and succurreth her mother. Of the trees of brasile, 
Brasile,  spices, the grain which coloureth scarlet in bright shining red, mastix, 
Mastyx,  gossampine cotton, 
Gossampine  the precious metal called Electrum, 
Electrum.  and such other commodities of this Island, we have spoken sufficiently before. What therefore can chance more happy unto man upon the earth, than there to live where he need not to be driven to close chambers with sharp could or fainting heat? 
Incommodities of intemperate regions  Nor yet in winter either to be laden with heavy apparel, or to burn the shins with continual sitting at the fire, which things make men old in short time by resoluinge the natural heat, where of a thousand diseases ensue. 
wholesome air and water  They also affirm the air to be very healthful: and the waters of the rivers to be no less wholesome, as they which have their continual course through the earth of the golden mines. 
Gold everywhere  For there is in manner no river, no mountains, and but few plains that are utterly without gold. But let us now at the length come to the particular description of the inner parts of this blessed Island. 
The description of the inner parts of ●he Island,  We have before declared how it is in manner equally divided with four great rivers descending from high mountains: whereof that which runneth toward the East, is called junna, as that toward the West is named Attibunicus: The third is Naiba or Haiba which runneth southward: The fourth is called jache, and falleth toward the North. But this ship master, hath brought an other description observed of thinhabitants from the beginning.  
Let us therefore divide the hole Island into five parts, cauling the regions of every province by their owlde names: and finally make mention of such things as are worthy memory in every of them. The beginning of the Island on the East side, is contained in the province named Caizcimu: so named for that in their language Cimu, signifieth the front or beginning of any thing. After this, followeth the province of Huhabo, and then Caihabo. The fourth is Bainoa, Guaccaiarima containeth the west corner. But the last save one, Bainoa is of larger bounds than the three other. Caizcimu reacheth from the first front of the Island to the river Hozama, which runneth by the city of saint Dominicke. 
The city of s. Dominicke  But toward the North side, it is ended at the rough mountains of Haiti. 
The mountains of haiti  Huhabo, is included within the mountains Haiti and the river jaciga. Caeiabo the third province, containeth all that lieth between Cubaho and Dahatio, even unto the mouth of the river of jaccha or jache (one of the four which divide the Island equally) and ascendethe to the mountains of Cibava, 
The mountains of Cibava  where the greatest plenty of gold is found: out of the which also the river Demahus springeth: and joining with the springs of the river of Naiba, (being an other of the four which divideth the Island toward the south sea) falleth to an other bank of the river of saint Dominicke. Bainoa, beginneth at the confines of Caiabi, and reacheth even unto the Island of Cahini which lieth near unto the sea banks of the north side of the Island where we said that they erected the first colony or habitation. 
The Island of Cahini  The province of Guaccaiarima, 
Of provinces divided into region●  occupieth the remanent toward the west. This they named Guaccaiarima, because it is the extreme or uttermost part of the Island. For jarima in their language signifieth the tail or end of any thing: And Gua, is an article which they use often times in the names of things: And especially in the names of their kings: as Guarionexius, and Guaccanarillus. In the province of Caizimu, are these regions: Higuei, Guanama, Reyre, Xagua, Aramana, Arabo, Hazoa. Macorix, Caiacoa, Guaiagua, Baguanimabo and the rough mountains of Haiti. Here let us speak somewhat of their aspirations which they use otherwise then the Latins do. 
Of their aspirations  It is to be noted that there is no aspiration in their vowels, which hath not theffect of a consonant. So that they pronounce their aspirations more vehemently than we do the consonant. f. Ye, all such words as in their tongue are aspirate, are pronounced with like breath and spirit as is. f. saving that herein the neither lip is not moved to thuppermost teeth. With open mouths and shaking their breasts, they breathe out these aspirations, ha, he, high, ho, hu, as the Hebrews and Arabians are accustomed to pronounce theirs. 
The pronunciation of the hebrews & Arabians,  I find also that the spaniards use the like vehemence in the aspirations of those words which they have received of the moors & Arabians which possessed Spain, 
The moors and Arabians possessed Spain.  and continued there many years: As in these words: Almo hadda, which signifieth a pillow or bolster: Also Almohaza, that is, a horse comb: with divers such other words which they speak in manner with panting breasts and vehement spirit. I have thought it good to rehearse these things, because among the Latins it often times so chanceth that only the accent or aspiration, changeth the signification of the word: 
how the aspiration changeth the signification of words  as hora, for an hour, and ora for the plurale number of this word os, which signifieth the mouth: Also ora, which signifieth regions or coasts. The like also chanceth in the diversity of the accente, as occido I kill, and occi●o I faule. Even so in the language of these simple men, there are many things to be observed. But let us now return to the description. In the province of Hubabo, are these regions: Xamana, Canabacoa, Cuhabo, with many other, the names whereof I have not yet learned. The province of Caibabo, containeth these regions: Magua, and Cacacubana. Thinhabitantes of this region, have a peculiar language much differing from the common language of the Island, 
divers languages in the Island  and are called Macoryxes. There is also an other region called Cubana, whose language differeth from the other. Likewise the region of Baiohaigua, hath a divers tongue. There are also other regions, as Dahabon, Cybaho, and Manabaho. Catoy is in the middle of the Island. By this runnethe the river Nizaus: And the mountains called Mahaitin, Hazua, and Neibaymao, confine with the same. In the province of Bainoa, are the regions of Maguana, jagohaiucho, Bauruco, Dabaiagua, and Attibuni, so named of the river: Also Caunoa, Buiaici, Dahabonici, Maiaguariti, Atiei, Maccazina, Guahabba, Annivici, Marien, Guaricco, Amaguei, Xaragua, Yaguana, Azzuei, jacchi, Honorucco, Diaguo, Camaie, and Neibaimao. In Guaccaierima the last province, these regions are contained: Mavicarao, Guabagua, Taquenazabo, Nimaca, Bainoa the less, Cabaymi, jamaizi, Manabazao, Zavana, Habacoa, and Ayqueroa. But let us entreat somewhat of the particulars of the regions. In the province of Caizcimu, with in the great gulf of the beginning, there is a great cave in a hollow rock under the root of a high mountain, 
A great cave in the rock of a mountain,  about two furlongs from the sea. The entry of this cave is not much unlike the doors of a great temple, being very large and turning many ways. Andrea's Moralis the ship master, 
A daungerus enterprise  at the commandment of the governor, tempted to search the cave with the smaulest vessels. He saith that by certain privy ways, many rivers have concourse to this cave as it were to a sink or channel. 
rivers devoured of caves,  After th'experience here of, they ceased to marvel whither other rivers ran which coming fourscore and ten miles, were swallowed up, so that they appeared no more, nor yet fell into the sea by any known ways. Now therefore they suppose that rivers swallowed up by the hollow places of that stony mountain, fall into this cave. As the shipmaster entered into the cave his ship was almost swallowed. For he saith that there are many whyrlepooles and rysinges or boylinge of the water, which make a violent conflict and horrible roaring one encountering the other. Also many huge holes & hollow places: So that what on the one side with the whirl pools, 
whirlpools and conflicts of waters,  & on the other side with the boiling of the water, his ship was long in manner tossed up and down like a ball. It greatly repented him that he had entered, yet knew he no way how to come forth. He now wandered in darkness, as well for the obscureness of the cave into the which he was far entered, 
Clouds in the cave.  as also that in it were thick clouds engendered of the moist vapours proceeding of the conflict of the waters which continually faule with great violence into the cave on every side. He compareth the noise of these waters, to the fall of the famous river of Nilus from the montaines of ethiop. 
The Cataracts of Nilus  They were all so deaf, that one could not here what an other said. But at the length with great danger & fear, he came forth of the cave as it had been out of hell. About three score miles distant from the chief city of saint Dominicke, there are certain high mountains upon the tops whereof is a lake or standing pool inaccessible, 
A standing pool in the tap of a high mountain.  never yet seen of them which came lately to the Island, both by reason of the roughness of the montaines, and also for that there is no path or open way to the tops of the same. But at the length the ship master being conducted thither by one of kings, ascended to the tops of the montaines and came to the pool. He saith that the could is there of sum force. And in token of winter, he found fern and bramble bushes, which two, grow only in could regions. 
fern and bramble bushes, grow only in could regions.  These mountains, they call Ymizui Hibabaino. This pool is of fresh water three miles in compass, and well replenished with diverse kinds of fishes. Many smaule rivers or brooks faule into it. It hath no passage out, because it is on every side enclosed with the tops of mountains. But let us now speak of an other pool which may well be called a sea in the mydlande, and be coompared to the Caspian or Hyrcanian sea in the firm land of Asia: 
The Caspian and hyrcanian sea.  with certain other lakes and pools of fresh water.   

¶ The eight book of the third decade.  
THe province of Bainoa being thrice as big as the three first, that is, Caizcimu, Vhabo, and Caihabo, includeth a valley named Caiovani, in the which there is a lake of salt, sour, and bitter water, as we read of the sea called Caspium, 
A great lake of sour and salt water.  lying in the firm land between Sarmatia and Hyrcania. We have therefore named it Caspium, although it be not in the region of Hyrcania. It hath many swalowinge gulfs, 
Swalowinge gulfs.  by the which, both the water of the sea springeth into it, and also such as fall into it from the montaines, 
Sea fishes in lakes of the midland  are swallowed up. They think that the caves thereof, are so large and deep, that great fishes of the sea pass by the same into the lake. among these fishes, there is one called Tiburonus which cutteth a man in sunder by the midst at one snap with his teeth, 
The devouring fish called T●buronus.  and devoureth him. In the river Hozama, running by the chief city of saint Dominicke, these Tiburoni do sometimes come from the sea and devour many of thinhabitants: Especially such as do daily ploonge themselves in the water to th'intent to keep their bodies very clean. The rivers which fall into the lake, 
The rivers that fau●e into the lake Caspium,  are these. From the north side, Guaninicabon: From the south, Xaccoei: from the east, Guannabo And from the West, Occoa. They say that these rivers are great and continual: And that beside these, there are twenty other smaule rivers which fall into this Caspium. 
CC● springs within the space of a furlong.  Also on the north side within a furlong of the lake, there are above two hundredth springs, occupying likewise about a furlong in circuit, the water whereof is could in summer, fresh also, and wholesome to be droonke. These springs make a river than can not be waded over, which near at hand joining with the other, falleth into the lake. Here must we stay a while. The king of this region found his wife praying in a chapel builded by the Christians with in the precinct of his dominion, 
A miracle.  and required her company to satisfy his fleshly lust. His wife reproved him, and put him in remembrance to have respect to the holy place. The words which she spoke to him, 
The Indian language.  were these: Teitoca, Teitoca: which is as much to say, as, be quiet, be quiet: Techeta cynato guamechyna: That is, god will be greatly angry. Guamechyna, signifieth god, Techeta greatly, Cynato angry. But the husband haling her by the arm, said: Guaibba, that is, go: Cynato macabuca guamechyna: That is: what is that to me if god be angerye? 
A king stricken dumb and lame by ● miracle.  And with these words as he proffered her violence, soodenlye he became dumb and lame. Yet by this miracle being stricken with repentance, he ever after led a religious life: In so much that from thence forth he would never suffer the chapel to be swept or decked with any other man's hand. By the same miracle, many of thinhabitants and all the Christians being moved, resorted devoutly to the chapel. They take it in good part that the king suffered the revenge of that reproach. Let us now return to Caspium. That salt lake is tossed with storms and tempests: And oftentimes drowneth smaule ships or fisher boats, and swalloweth them up with the mariners: 
Such as are drowned in the lake are not cast up again.  In so much that it hath not been hard of, that any man drowned by shyppewracke, ever ploonged up again, or was cast on the shore, as commonly chanceth of the dead bodies of such as are drowned in the sea. These tempests, are the dainty banquetes of the Tiburones. This Caspium, is called Hagueigabon. In the midst hereof, lieth an Island named Guarizacca, 
The Island Guarizacca in the midst of the pool. A lake of salt and fresh water.  to the which they resort when they go a fishing: But it is not cultured. There is in the same plain, an other lake next unto this, whose water is mixed of salt and fresh: And is therefore neither apt to be droonke, not yet to be refused in urgent necessity. This containeth in length xxv miles, and in breadth eight miles: In sum places also nine or ten. It receiveth many rivers which have no passage out of the same, but are swallowed up as in the other. Water springeth out of the sea into this also: but in no great quantity, which is the cause that it is so commyxte. In the same province toward the West side, there is an other lake of fresh water, 
A lake of fresh water  not far distant from Caspius. This thinhabitants call jainagua. The same salt lake, hath on the North side thereof, an other named Guaocaa. This is but little: as not past three or four miles in breadth, and one in length. The water of this, may well be droonke. On the south side of the salt lake, there lieth an other named. Babbareo, of three miles in length and in manner round. The water of this is fresh as of ●he two other. This lake because it hath no passage out nor yet any swalowing gulfs, conveyeth the superfluous waters to the sea if it be increased with the streams which fall sometimes more abondantly from the montaines. This is in the region of Xamana in the province of Bainoa. There is an other called Guaniba, lying between the East & the South near unto the side of Caspius. This is ten miles in length and almost round. 
A lake of ten miles in length  There are furthermore many other smaule standing pools or lakes dispersed here and there in the Island, which I will let pass lest I should be tedious in remaining to long in one thing. I will therefore make an end with this addition, that in all these, great plenty of fish and foul is nourished. All these lakes lie in a large plain, the which from the East reacheth into the West a hundredth and twenty miles: 
A plain of a hundredth and twenty miles  being of breadth xviii miles where it is narrowest, and xxv where it is largest. Looking toward the West, it hath collaterally on the left hand the montaines of Daiguani: And on the right hand, the montaines, of Caigua, so called of the name of the vale itself. At the roots of the montaines of Caigua toward the North side, there lieth an other vale much longer & larger then that before named. For it containeth in length, almost two hundredth miles: 
A plain of two hundredth miles in length.  And in breadth xxx where it is largest, & about twenty where it is narrowest This vale in sum part thereof, is called Maguana: In an other place, Iguamu, & else where, Hathathiei. And forasmuch as we have here made mention of this part of the vale named Hathathiei, we will somewhat digress from the discourse of this description, and entreat of a thing so strange and marvelous, that the like hath not vyn hard of. So it is therefore, that the king of this region named Caramatexius, taketh great pleasure in fysshinge. Into his nets chanced a yonnge fish of the kind of those huge monsters of the sea which th'inhabitors call Manari, 
The marvelous fish Manari.  not found I suppose in hour seas nor known to hour men before this tyme. This fish is four footed, and in shape like unto a tortoise although she be not covered with a shell, but with scales: And those of such hardness & couched in such order, that no arrow can hur●e her. Her scales are beset & defend with a thousand knobs. Her back is plain, and her head utterly like the head of an ox. She liveth both in the water and on the land: She is slow of moving: of condition meek, gentle, 
A monster of the sea fed with man's hand.  assocyable and loving to mankind and of a marvelous sense or memory as are the elephant and the delphyn. The king nourished this fish certain days at home with the bread of the country, made of the root of jucca and Panycke with such other roots as men are accustomed to eat. For when she was yet but young, he cast her into a pool or lake near unto his palace there to be fed with hand. This lake also receiveth waters and casteth not the same forth again. It was in time pass called Guaurabo: But is now called the lake of Mana●i after the name of this fish which wandered safely in the same for the space of xxv years, and grew exceeding big. What so ever is written of the Delphines' of Baian or Arion, are much inferior to the doings of this fish: which for her gentle nature they named Matum, that is gentle or noble. Therefore when so ever any of the kings familiars, especially such as are known to her, resort to the banks of the lake and call Matum, Matum, 
Matum.  than she (as mindful of such benefits as she hath received of men) lyftethe up her head and cometh to the place whither she is called, 
A fish carrieth men oue● the lake.  and there receiveth meat at the hands of such as feed her. If any desirous to pass over the lake, make signs and tokens of their intent, she boweth herself to them, therewith as it were gently inviting them to amount upon her, and conveyeth them safely over. It hath been seen that this monstrous fish hath at one time safely carried over ten men singing and playing. 
A marvellous thing.  But if by chance when she lyfteed up her head she espied any of the Christian men, she would immediately ploonge down again into the water and refuse to obey, because she had once received injury at the hands of a certain wanton young man among the Christians, who had cast a sharp dart at her, although she were not hurt by reason of the hardness of her skin being rough and full of scales and knobs as we have said. Yet did she bear in memory thinjury she sustained, with so gentle a revenge requiting thingrat●tude of him which h●d dealt with her so ungentelly. From that day when so ever she was called by any of her familiars, sh● would first look circumspectly about her, lest any were present apparelled after the manner of the Christians. She would oftentimes play and wrestle upon the bank with the kings chamberlens: And especially with a young man whom the king favoured well, being also accustomed to feed her. She would be sometimes as pleasant and full of play as it had been a moonkey or marmoset: And was of long time a great comfort and solace to the hole Island. For no smaule confluence aswell of the Christians as of thinhabitants, had daily concourse to behold so strange a miracle of nature, the contemplation whereof was no less pleasant than wonderful. They say that the meat of this kind of fish, is of good taste: And that many of them are engendered in the seas thereabout. But at the length, this pleasant playfelowe was lost, and carried into the sea by the great river Attibunicus, 
The river Attibunicus.  one of the four which divide the Island. For at that time there chanced so terrible a tempest of wind, & rain, with such floods ensuring that the like hath not lightly been hard of. By reason of this tempest, the river Attibunicus so overflowed the banks, that it filled the hole vale & mixed itself with all the other lakes. At which time also, this gentle Matum and pleasant companion, 
The situation of the great ●ale.  following the vehement course and fall of the floods, was thereby restored to his old mother and native waters, and sense that time never seen again. Thus having digressed sufficiently, let us now come to the situation of the vale. It hath collaterally the mountains of Cibava and Caiguam which bring it to the South sea. 
The mountains of Cibava and Caiguam.  There is an other vale beyond the mountains of Cibava toward the North. This is called the vale of Guarionexius, because that before the memory of man, the predecessors and ancestors of king Guarionexius to whom it is descended by right of inheritance, 
The great vale of Guari●nexius.  were ever the lords of the hole vale. Of this king, we have spoken largely in the first narration of the Island in the first Decade. This vale is of length from the East to the West, a hundredth and fourscore miles: And of breadth from the South to the North, thirty miles where it is narrowest, and fifty where it is brodeste. It beginneth from the region Canobocoa by the provinces of Huhabo and Caiabo: And endeth in the province of Bainoa and the region of Mariena. It lieth in the midst between the mountains of C●baua, and the mountains of Cabonai and Cazacubuna. There is no province nor any region, which is not notable by the majesty of mountains, 
Mountains,  fruitfulness of vales, 
Uales.  pleasantness of hills, 
hills.  and delectablenes of plains, 
Plains.  with abundance of fair rivers running through the same. 
Rivers.  There are no sides of mountains or hills, no rivers, which abound not with gold and delicate fishes, 
Gold in all mountains, and gold and fish in all rivers.  except only one river which from th'original thereof, with the springs of the same breaking forth of the mountains, cometh out salt and so continueth until it perish. This river is called Bahuan: and runneth through the middle of the region Maguana in the province of Bainoa. They suppose that this river hath made itself away under the ground by sum passages of plaster or salt earth. For there are in the Island many notable salt bays, 
Salt bays,  whereof we will speak more hereafter. We have declared how the Island is divided by four rivers & five provinces. 
how the Island is divided with mountains.  There is also an other partition, which is this. The hole Island consisteth of the tops of four mountains which divide it by the midst from the East to the west. In all these is abundance of nooryshing moisture and great plenty of gold: 
Gold.  of the caves also of the which, the waters of all the rivers (into the which the caves empty themselves) have their original and increase. 
The rivers have their increase from the caves of the mountains  There are likewise in them horrible dens, obscure and dark vales, and mighty rocks of stone. There was never any noisome beast found in it: Nor yet any ravening four footed beast. 
No hurtful or ravening beast in the Island.  No lion, no bear no fierce tigers, no crafty foxes, nor devouring wolves. All things are blessed and fortunate: And now more fortunate, for that so many thousands of men are received to be the sheep of Christ's flock, all their Zemes and Images of devils being rejected and utterly out of memory. 
The authors excuse.  If I chance now and then in the discourse of this narration to repeat one thing divers times or otherwise to make digression, I must desire your holiness therewith not to be offended. For while I see, hear, and write these things, me seemeth that I am herewith so affected, that for very joy I feel my mind stirred as it were with the spirit of Apollo as were the Sibylles, whereby I am enforced to repeat the same again: Especially when I consider how far the amplitude of hour religion spreadeth her wings. Yet among these so many blessed and fortunate things, this one grieveth me not a little: That these simple poor men never brought up in labour, 
By what meane● the people of the Island are greatly consumed.  do daily perish with intolerable travail in the gold mines: And are thereby brought to such desperation, that many of them kill themselves, having no regard to the procreation of children. In so much that women with child, perceiving that they shall bring forth such as shallbe slaves to the Christians, use medicines to destroy their conception. And albeit that by the kings letters patents it was decreed that they should be set at liberty, yet are they constrained to serve more than seemeth convenient for free men. The number of the poor wretches is wonderfully extenuate. They were once reckoned to be above twelve hundredth thousand heads: But what they are now, I abhor to rehearse. We will therefore let this pass: and return to the pleasures of Hispaniola. 
The pleasures of hispaniola.  In the mountains of Cibava, which are in manner in the midst of the Island in the province of Caiabo (where we said to be the greatest plenty of native gold) there is a region named Cotohi, situate in the clouds, 
The region of Cotohi, situate in the Clouds.  environed with the tops of high mountains, and well inhabited. It consisteth of a plain of xxv miles in length, and xu in breadth. This plain is higher than the tops of other mountains: 
A plain in the tops of mountains  So that these mountains, may seem to be the chief and progenitors of the other. 
The higher, the colder.  This plain suffereth alterations of the four times of the year: as the Spring, summer, Autumn, and winter. Here the herbs ware withered, the trees lose their leaves, 
Moderate could in the mountains.  and the meadows become door: The which things (as we have said) chance not in other places of the Island, where they have only the Spring and Autumn. The soil of this plain bringeth forth fern and bramble bushes bearing black berries or wild raspes, 
fern of marvelous bigness  which two are tokens of could regions. Yet is it a fair region: for the could thereof is not very sharp: neither doth it aflicte thinhabitants with frost or snow. They argue the fruitfulness of the region by the fern, whose stalks or steams are bigger than a spear or iavelen. The sides of those mountains are rich in gold. 
Gold.  Yet is there none appointed to dig for the same, because it shallbe needful to have appareled miners, and such as are used to labour. For thinhabitants living confeuted with little, are but tender: And can not therefore away with labour or abide any could. 
Thinhabitantes of hispaniola can abide no labour nor could.  There are two rivers which run through this region, and fall from the tops of the present mountains. One of these is named Comoiayxa, whose course is toward the West, and falleth into the channel of Naiba. The other is called Tirecotus: which running toward the East, joineth with the river of junna. In the Island of Creta (now called Candie) as I passed b● in my legacy to the sultan of Alcayr or Babylon in egypt, 
The Island of Creta of Candie, under the dominion of the venetians.  the venetians told me that there lay such a region in the tops of the mountains of Ida, which they affirm to be more fruitful of wheat corn then any other region of the Island. But forasmuch as once the Cretenses rebelled against the venetians, and by reason of the straight and narrow way to the tops thereof, long defended the region with arms against th'authority of the Senate, and at the length being forweryed with wars, rendered the same, the Senate commanded that it should be left desert, and the straits of thentrances to be stopped, lest any should ascend to the region without their permission. Yet in the year of Christ M. D. two. licence was granted to the husband men to till and manure the region, on such condition that no such as were apt to the wars, might enter into the same. There is also an other region in Hispaniola named Cotoby after the same name. This divideth the bounds of the provinces of Vhabo and Caiabo. It hath mountains, vales, and plains. But because it is barren, it is not much inhabited. Yet is it richest in gold: For the original of the abundance of gold, beginneth here: In so much that it is not gathered in smaule grains and sparks as in other places: but is found hole, 
Pure and massy gold in the region of Cotoy.  massy, and pure, among certain soft stones and in the veins of rocks, by breaking the stones whereof, they follow the veins of gold. They have found by experience, that the vain of gold is a living tree: 
The vain of gold, is a living tree.  And that the same by all ways that it spreadeth & springeth from the root by the soft pores and passages of the earth, 
These colers or flowers are called Marchasites, pints.  putteth forth branches even unto the uppermost part of the earth, & ceaseth not until it discover itself unto the open air: At which time, it showeth forth certain beautiful colours in the steed of flowers, round stones of golden earth in the steed of fruits, and thin plates in steed of leaves. These are they which are disparkled throughout the hole Island by the course of the rivers, eruptions of the sprenges owte of the montaines, and violent faults of the floods. For they think that such grains are not engendered where they are gathered: especially on the dry land: but otherwise in the rivers. They say that the root of the golden tree extendeth to the centre of the earth & there taketh norishemmt of increase. 
The root of the golden tree.  For the deaper that they dig, 
The branches of the golden tree.  they find the trunks thereof to be so much the greater as far as they may follow it for abundance of water springing in the montaines. Of the branches of this tree, they find sum as smaule as a thread, and other as big as a man's finger according to the largeness or straightness of the rifts and clyftes. They have sumetimes chanced upon hole caves sustained and borne up as it were with golden pillars: 
Caves sustained with pillars of gold.  And this in the ways by the which the branches ascend: The which being filled with the substance of the trunk creeping from beneath, the branch maketh itself way by which it may pass out. 
The stones of the gold mines.  It is oftentimes divided by encountering with sum kind of hard stone. Yet is it in other clyftes noorisshed by the exhalations and virtue of the root. But now perhaps you will ask me what plenty of gold is brought from thence. Yowe shall therefore understand that only out of Hispaniola, 
what ●old is brought yearly from hispaniola into Spain.  the sum of four hundredth and sometimes five hundredth thousand ducats of gold is brought yearly into Spain: as may be gathered by the fifth portion dew to the kings Excheker, which amounteth to the sum of a hundredth and fourscore, or fourscore and ten thousand Castellanes of gold, and sometimes more. What is to be thought of the Island of Cuba and Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burich●na) being both very rich in gold, we will declare further hereafter. To have said thus much of gold, 
Salt of the mountains, very hard and clear.  it shall suffice. We will now therefore speak somewhat of salt wherewith we may season and reserve such things as are bought with gold. In a region of the province of Bainoa, in the mountains of Daiaguo, about twelve miles distant from the salt lake called Caspius, there are salt bays in the mountains in a manner as hard as stones, also clearer and whiter than crystal. There are likewise such salt bay which grow wonderfully in Lai●ta●ia (now called Cataloma) in the territory of the duke of Cadona the chief ruler in that region. But such as know them both, affirm that these of Bainoa are most notable. They say also that this can not be cleft without wedges and beatelles of Iron. But that of Lale●ana, 
Salt as hard as stones.  may easily be broken as I myself have proved. They therefore compare this to such stones as may easily be broken: And the other to marble. In the province of Caizimu▪ in the regions of Iguanama, Caiacoa, and Guariagua, there are springs whose waters are of marvelous nature, 
Springs of salt, fresh and sour water.  being in the superfytial or uppermooste part, fre●he: In the midst, mixed of salt and french: And in the lowest part, salt and sour. They think that the salt water of the sea, issheweth out softly, and the fresh, to sprink out of the mountains. The one falleth down and the other riseth: & are not therefore so universally mixed whereby the one may utterly corrupt tother. If any man lay his ear to the ground near to any of these springe●, he shall perceive the ground there to be so hollow, 
hollow caves in the ground  that the rebounding noise of a horseman coming may be hard for the space of three miles, and a foot man one mile. In the last region toward the south named Guaccaiarima, in the lordship of Zavana, 
Certain wild men living in caue● and dens  they say there are certain wild men which live in the caves & dens of the mountains, contented only with wild fruits. These men never used the company of any other: nor will by any means become tame.  
They live without any certain dwelling places, and with out tillage or culturing of the ground, as we read of them which in old time lived in the golden age. They say also that these men are without any certain language. 
Men without a certain language  They are sometimes seen. But hour men have yet laid hands on none of them. If at any time they come to the sight of men, and perceive any making toward them, they fly swifter than a heart. Ye they affirm them to be swifter than grehowndes. 
Men as swift as greihounds  What one of these solitary wanderers did, it is worth the hearing. So it is that our men having granges adjoining near unto the thick woods, certain of them repaired thither in the month of September in the year. M.D.xiiii. In the mean time, 
A wild man runneth away with a child  one of these wild men came leaping out of the wood. And approaching somewhat toward them with smile countenance, soodenly snatched up a child of therse being the son of the owner of the grange, which he begot of a woman of the Island. He ran away with the child, and made signs to hour men to follow him. Many followed aswell of hour men as of the naked inhabitants, but all in vain. Thus when the pleasant wanderer perceived that the Christians ceased to pursue him, he left the child in a cross way by the which the swineherds were accustomed to drive the swine to their pasture. Shortly after, a swynchearde found the child and brought him home to his father yet tormenting himself for sorrow, supposing that wild man to have been one of the kind of the Canibales, and that his son was now devoured. In the same Island they gather pitch which sweateth out of the rocks, 
Pitch of the rock.  being much harder and sourer than the pitch of the tree: and is therefore more commodious to calk or defend ships against the worms called Bromas, whereof we have spoken largely before. This Island also bringeth forth pitch in two kinds of trees, 
Pitch of two kinds of trees.  as in the Pine tree and an other named Copeia. I need not speak of the pine tree, 
The pine tree.  because it is engendered and known in manner every where. Let us therefore speak somewhat of the other tree called Copeia: 
The tree Copeia.  Pitch is likewise gathered of it as of the pine tree: although sum say that it is gathered by distilling or dropping of the wood when it is burnt. It is a strange thing to here of the leaf thereof: and how necessary provision of nature is showed in the same. It is to be thought that this is the tree in the leaves whereof the Chaldeans (being the first finders of letters) expressed their minds before the use of paper was known. 
The leaf of a tree in the steed of paper.  This leaf is a span in breadth and almost round. Hour men writ in them with pins or needles or any such instruments made of metal or wood, in manner as well as on paper. It is to be laughed at what hour men have persuaded the people of the Island as touching this leaf. 
They believe that leaves do speak.  The simple souls believe that at the commandment of hour men, leaves do speak and disclose secrets. 
A pretty story.  They were brought to this credulity by this means. One of hour men dwelling in the city of Dominica the chief of the Island, delivered to his servant (being a man borne in the Island) certain roasted coneyes, (which they call Vtias being no bigger than mice) willing him to carry the same to his friend which dwelt further within the Island. This messenger, whether it were that he was thereto constrained through hunger, or enticed by appetite, devoured three of the counnies by the way.  
He to whom they were sent, writ to his friend in a leaf how many he received. When the master had looked a while on the leaf in the presence of the servant, he said thus unto him. Ah son, where is thy faith? Could thy greedy appetite prevail so much with the as to cause the to eat the coneyes committed to thy fidelity? The poor wretch trembeling and greatly amazed, confessed his fault: And therewith desired his master to tell him how he knew the truth thereof. This leaf (quoth he) which thou browghtest me, hath told me all. Then he further rehearsed unto him the hour of his coming to his friend, 
Ignorance causeth admiration.  and likewise of his departing when he returned. And thus they merrily deceive these silly souls and keep them under obedience: In so much that they take hour men for gods, at whose coommaundement leaves do disclose such things as they think most hid and secret. Both the sides of the leaf receiveth the forms of letters even as doth hour paper. 
The leaf wherein they write.  It is thicker than double parchment, and marvelous tough. While it is yet florys●hynge and new, it showeth the letters white in green. And when it is dry, it becometh white and hard like a table of wood: but the letters wax yellow. It doth not corrupt or putrefy: nor yet looseth the letters though it be wet: nor by any other means except it be burnt. There is an other tree named Xagua: the juice of whose sour apple being of a dark red colour, 
A strong colour of the juice of an apple.  staineth and coloureth what so ever is touched therewith: And that so firmly, that no washing can take it away for the space of twenty days. When the apple is full ripe, the juice looseth that strength. The apple is eaten, and of good taste. There is also an herb whose smoke (as we have rehearsed the like before of a certain wood) is deadly poison. On a time when the kings assembled together and conspired the destruction of hour men, 
An herb who●e smoke is poison.  where as they durst not attempt th'enterprise by open war, their device was, privily to lay many bundles of those herbs in a certain house, which shortly after they intended to set on fire, to thinten● that hour men making haste to quenshe the same, might take their death with the smoke thereof. But their purposed practise being bewrayed, thauthors of the device were punished accordingly. Now (most holy father) for as much as your holiness writeth that what so ever we have written of the new world, doth please you right well, we will rehearse certain things out of order, but not greatly from hour purpose. Of the setting the roots of Maizium Agis, jucca, Battatas, and such other being their common food, and of those of the same, we have spoken sufficiently before. But by what means they were first applied to the commodity of men, we have not yet declared. We now therefore intend to entreat somewhat hereof.   

¶ The ninth book of the third Decade.  
THEY say that the first inhabitors lived contented with the roots of dates, 
The kinds of fruits wherewith thinhabitants lived first.  and Magueans, which is an herb much like unto that which is commonly called Sengrene or Orpin. Also the roots of Guaiegans, which are round and great much like unto puffs of the earth or mussheromes. They did likewise eat Guaieroes, like unto perseneppes: Cibaios like nuts, Cabaioes and Macoanes, like unto onions, with divers other such roots. They say that after many years, a certain Boi●ion, that is, a wise old man, saw upon the banks side, a bush like unto fenel: and transplanting the root thereof, brought it from wyldenes to a better kind, by noorysshing it in gardens. 
Necessity the mother of all arts.  This was the beginning of jucca, which at the first was deadly poison to all such as did eat thereof raw. But for as much as they perceived it to be of pleasant taste, they determined many ways to prove the use thereof: And at the length found by experience that being sod or fried, it was less hurtful: by which means also, they came to the knowledge of the veneme lying hid in the juice of the root. Thus by drying, salting, seasoning, and otherwise tempering it, they brought it to their fine bread which they call Cazabbi, 
The fine bread Cazabb●, made of the roots of jucca.  more delectable and wholesome to the stomach of man than bread made of wheat, because it is of easier digestion. The same is to be understood of other roots and the grain of Maizium which they have chosen for their chief meat among the seeds of nature, as we read how Ceres the daughter of Saturnus, 
how Ceres first found wheat and ●arly in egypt.  gathered wheat and barley (with such other corn as are now most in use among men) in egypt of certain grains taken out of the mud driven from the mountains of Ethiopia by th'increase of the river Nilus, and left in the plain at such time as Nilus resorted again to his channel. For the which fact, we read that the antiquity gave divine honour to Ceres, who first nourished and increased such chosen seeds. There are innumerable kinds of Ages: 
The boots of ages.  the variety whereof, is known by their leaves and flowers. One kind of these, is called Guanaguax. This is white both within & without An other named Guaraguei is of violet colour without & white within. The other kinds of Ages, they cawl Zazaveios. These are red without and white within. Squivetes, are white within and without. Tunna, is all together of violet colour. Hobos is yellow booth of skin and inner substance. There is an other named A●ibunicix: The skin of this is of violet colour, and the substance white. Aniguamar, hath his skin also of violet colour, and is white within. Guaccaracca. hath a white skin, and the substance of violet colour. There are many other which are not yet brought to us. But I fear me least in the rehearsal of these, 
The autour● excu●e.  I shall provoke the spurs of malicious persons against me which will scorn these our doings for that we have written of many such smaule things to a prince occupied in such weighty affairs, as unto your holiness upon whose shoulders resteth the burden of the hole Christian world. But I would ask of these malicious en●yers of other men's travails, whether Pliny and such other famous writers, 
Pliny.  when they directed and dedicated such things to kings and princes, intended only to profit them to whom they consecrated the fruit of their knowledge. They sometimes intermyxte famous things with obscure things, light with heavy, and great with smaule, that by the foortheraunce of princes, their universal posterity might enjoy the fruition of the knowledge of things. At other times also, being intent about particular things, and desirous of new things, they occupied themselves in the searching of particular tracts and coasts, with such things as nature brought forth in the same, by this means to come the better to more absolute and universal knowledge. Let them therefore contemn hour doing: And we will laugh to scorn, not their ignorance and slothfulness, but pernicious curiousness: And therewith having pity of their froward dispositions, will commit them to the venomous serpents of whom envy took his first original. It shall in the mean time abundantly content us that these things do please your holiness: And that you do not despise hour simple vestures wherewith we have only weaved together and not adorned, gathered and not described such marvelous things in the garnishing whereof, nature hath sufficiently showed her cunning. Hour desire is none other but herein for your sake to do hour endeavour that these things may not perish. Let every man take hereof what liketh him best. Of the sheep or bullock sold in the market, nothing remaineth in the evening, because the shoulder pleaseth one, the leg an other, and the neck an other. Ye, sum have most fantasy to the bowels, and sum to the feet. Thus having enough wandered, let us return to hour purpose and declare with what words they salute the kings children when they are first borne: or how they apply the beginning of their lives to the end: And why their kings are called by many names. Therefore when the king hath a son borne, such as dwell near about his palace or village, repair to the queen's chamber, where one saluteth the new borne child with one name, and an other with an other name. 
By what names they salute the kings children when they are borne.  God save the thowe shining lamp saith one: An other cauleth him bright and clear. Sume name him the victorer of his enemies: and other sum, the puissant conqueror descended of blood royal, and brighter than gold, with divers other such vain names. Therefore like as every of the Roman emperors was called Adiabenicus, 
The names and ytles of the Roman Emperors.  Par●●icus, Armenicus, Dacicus, Go●bicus, and Germanicus, according to the titles of their parents and ancestors, even so by thimposition of names invented by other kings, Beucbicus Anacachoa the lord of the region of Xaragua (of whom and of the wise woman Anachaona his sister, we have spoken largely in the first Decade) was called by all these names following: Tureigua Hobin: which is as much to say, as, a king shining as bright as laton. Starei, that is, bright: Huibo, highness: Duih●ynequen, a rich flood. With all these names and more than forty other such, doth king Beuchius magnify himself as often as he commandeth any thing to be done or causeth any proclamation to be made in his name. If the crier by negligence leave out any of these names, the king thinketh it to sound greatly to his contumely and reproach. The like is also of other. How fondly they use them selves in making their testaments, 
how they make their testaments  we will now declare. They leave th'inheritance of their kingdoms to th'elder sons of their eldest sisters. If she fail, to th'elder of the second sister and so of the third if the second also fail. For they are out of doubt that those children come of their blood. But the children of their own wives, they count to be not legitimate. If there remain none of their sisters children, they leave th'inheritance to their brothers. 
So did great Alexander  And if they fail, it descendeth to their own sons. last of all, if all these fail, they assign it to the worthiest, as to him that is of greatest power in all the Island, that he may defend their subjects from their ancient enemies. They take as many wives as them lysteth. They suffer the best beloved of the kings wives, and concubines to be buried with him. 
The kings wives and concubines are buried with him.  Anachaona the sister of Beuchius the king of Xaragua, being a woman of such wisdom and cunning that in making of rhymes and balettes she was counted a prophetess among the best, commanded, that among all the wives and concubines of the king her brother, the fayrerest (whose name was Guanahattabenechina) should be buried alive with him, and two of her waiting maids with her. She would also have appointed divers other to that office, if she had not been otherwise persuaded by the prayers of certain friars of saint France's order which chanced then to be present. 
They bury their jewels with them. A dream of an other life after this.  They say that this Guanahattabenechina had none in all the Island comparable to her in beauty. She buried with her all her jewels and twenty of her best ornaments. Their custom is, to place beside every of them in their sepultures, a cup full of water and a portion of the fine bread of Cazabbi. In Xaragua, the region of this king Beuchius, and in Hazua, part of the region of Caiabo, also in the fair vale of salt and fresh lakes, and likewise in the region of Yaquino in the province of Bainoa, it raineth but seldom. 
where it raineth but seldom.  In all these regions are fosses or trenches made of old time, whereby they convey the waters in order to water their fields, with no less art than do th'inhabitors of new Carthage, and of the kingdom of Murcien in Spartaria for the feldoome faule of rain. The region of Maguana, divideth the province of Bainoa from Caiabo, 
where it raineth much.  and Zavana from Guaccaiarima. In the deep vales, they are troubled with rain more often then needeth. Also the confines of the chief city named saint Dominike are moister than is necessary. In other places, it raineth moderately. There are therefore in the Island of Hispaniola, divers & variable motions of the elements, 
Uariable motions of the elements.  as we read the like of many other regions. Of their colonies or mantions which the Spaniards have erected in this Island we have spoken suffycientelye before. 
The colonies and villages which the spaniards have builded  They have sense that time builded these villages: Portus Platae, Portus Regalis, Lares, Villanova, Azuam, and Saluaterra. Having said thus much of the Island of Hispaniola the mother and lady of the other Islands, 
The other Islands about hispaniola,  and as it were Tethys the most beautiful wife of Neptunus' the god of the sea, let us now entreat somewhat of her Nymphs and fair Nereids which wait upon her and adorn her on every side. We will therefore begin at the nearest called the new Arethusa, 
The Island Arethusa.  so named of the fountain Arethusa in the Island of Sicily. This is famous by reason of a spring: but otherwise unprofitable. Hour men named it of late, Duas Arbores, because it hath only two trees growing in it: near unto the which is a fountain that cometh from the Island of Hispaniola through the secret passages of the earth under the sea, and breaketh forth in this Island, as the river Alpeus in Achaia runneth under the sea from the city of Elide, and breaketh forth in the Island of Sicily in the fountain Arethusa. 
A spring running under the sea from hispan●ola to Arethusa.  That the fountain of this new Arethusa hath h●s original from the Island of Hispaniola, it is manifest hereby, that the water isshewing out of the fountain, bringeth with it the leaves of many trees which grow in Hispaniola, and not in this Island. They say that the fountain hath his original from the river Yiamiroa in the region of Guaccaiarima confining with the land of Zauan● This Island is not pas●e a mile in circuit, and commodious for fisher men. Directly toward the east (as it were the porter keeping the entry to Tothys) lieth the Island of Sancti johannis (otherwise called Burichena) whereof we have spoken largely before. 
The Island of Sancti johannis.  This aboundeth with gold: and in fruitful soil, is equal with her mother Hispaniola. In this are many colonies or mansions of Spaniards, which apply themselves to gathering of gold. Toward the west on the north side, great Cuba (for the longenesse thereof, 
The Island of Cuba.  long supposed to be the continent or firm land) wardeth hour Tethys on the back half. This is much longer than Hispaniola: And from the east to the West, is divided in the midst with the circle called Tropicus Cancri. Hispaniola and the other lying on the South side of this, are included almost in the mid space between the said Tropyke and the Equinoctial line, 
habitable regions under the Equinoctial.  which many of the old writers supposed to be unhabitable & desert by reason of the fervent heat of the son in that clime as they conjectured. But they were deceived in their opinion. They affirm that rytcher gold mines are found in Cuba then in Hispaniola. 
The rich gold mines of Cuba.  They say also that even now while I write these things, there is gold gathered together ready to the melting, amounting to the quantity of a hundredth and fourscore thousand Castellans of gold, an argument surely of great richesse. jamaica is more toward the south than these: 
The Island of jamaica.  And is a pleasant and fruitful Island, of soil apt for corn, graffs, and sets, it consisteth of only one mountain. Th'inhabitants are warlike men and of good wit. Colonus compared it to Sicily in bigness. They which of late searched it more exactly, say that it is somewhat less: but not much. It is thought to be without gold and precious stones, as the like was supposed of Cuba at the beginning. The Island of Guadalupea (first named Caraqueira) lying on the south side of Hispaniola, 
The Island of Guadalupea.  is four degrees nearer the Equinoctial. It is eaten and indented with two gulfs (as we read of great Britanye now called England, and Calidonia now called scotland) being in manner two Islands. 
England and scotland.  It hath famous ports, In this they found that gum which the Apothecaries call Animae Album, 
The gum called Anim● album.  whose fume is wholesome against rheums and heaviness of the head. The tree which engendereth this gum, beareth a fruit much like to a date, 
Dates.  being a span in length. When it is opened, it seemeth to contain a certain sweet meal. As hour husband men are accustomed to reserve chestenuttes and such other hard fruits all the winter, so do they the dates of this tree, 
Pine trees.  being much like unto a sygge tree. They found also in this Island, pine trees of the best kind, and such other dainty dishes of nature, whereof we have spoken largely before. Ye, they think that thinhabitants of other Islands, had their seeds of so many pleasant fruits from hence. For the Canibales being a wild and wandering people, 
The Caniba●es.  and over running all the countries about them to hunt for man's flesh, were accustomed to bring home with them what so ever they found strange or profitable in any place. They are intractable, and will admit no strangers. It shall therefore be needful to overcoome them with great power. 
whereby it was thought that there were Islands of women.  For as well the women as men, are expert archers, and use to inveneme their arrows. When the men go forth of the land a man hunting, the women manfully defend their coasts against such as attempt to invade the same. And hereby I suppose it was thought that there were Islands in the Ocean, inhabited only with women, as Colonus the admiral himself persuaded me, as I have said in the first decade. This Island hath also fruitful mountains and plains, and notable rivers. It nourisheth honey in trees, and in the caves of rocks, 
honey in trees and ro●kes.  as in Palma one of the Ilandea of Canary, honey is gathered among the briars and bramble bushes. About xviii miles Easteward from this Island, lieth an Island which our men named Desiderata, 
The Island Desiderata.  bring twenty miles in circuit and very fair. Also about ten miles from Guadalupea toward the south, lieth the Island of Galanta, 
The Island Galanta.  being thirty miles in circuit and plain. It was so named for the neatness and bewtifulnes thereof. Nine miles distant from Guadalupea toward the East, there are two smaule Islands named Todos Sanctos or Barbara. 
The Islands of Todos Sanctos or Barbara.  These are full of rocks and barren: Yet necessary to be known to such as use to travail the seas of these coasts. again, from Guadalupea xxxv miles toward the north, there is an Island named Monsserratus, 
The Ilande● monsserratus  containing in circuit forty miles, having also in it a mountain of notable height. The Island named Antipua, 
The Island Antiqua,  distant from Guadalupea thirty miles, is about forty miles in circuit. Diegus Colonus the son and heir of Christophorus Colonus, told me that his wife (whom he left in the Island of Hispaniola a● his coming into Spain to the court) did write unto him, that of late among the Islands of the Canibales, there is one found which aboundeth with gold. On the left side of Hispaniola toward the south, near unto the haven Botea, there lieth an Island named Portus belus. 
The Island Portus belus Great Tortoises.  They tell marvelous things of the monsters of the sea about this Island, and especially of the tortoises. For they say that they are bigger than great round targets. At such time as the h●ate of nature moveth them too generation, 
The generation of Tortoises.  they come forth of the sea: And making a deep pit in the sand, they lay three or four hundredth eggs therein. When they have thus emptied their bag of conception, they put as much of the sand again into the pit, as may suffice to cover the eggs: And so resort again to the sea, nothing careful of their succession. At the day appointed of nature to the procreation of these beasts, there creepeth owte a multitude of tortoises, as it were pyssemares swarming out of an ante hill: And this only by the heat of the son without any help of their parents. They say that their eggs are in manner as big as geese eggs. 
The eggs o● Tortoises.  They also coompare the flesh of these tortoises, to be equal with veal in taste. There are beside these, innumerable Islands the which they have not yet searched: 
Innumerable Islands.  nor yet is it greatly necessary to sift this meal so finely. It may suffice to understand that there are large lands & many regions which shall hereafter receive hour nations, tongues, and manners: and therewith embrace hour religion. The Trojans did not soodenly replenish Asia, 
Troyans'.  the Tyrians Libya, 
Tirians.  nor the Greeks and Phoenices Spain. 
Greeks.  
P●en●t●ns.   
As touching the Islands which lie on the north side of Hispaniola, I have let pass to speak. For albeit they are commodious for ty●lage and fishing, yet are they left of the spaniards as poor and of smaule value. 
The North Iland●s.  We will now therefore take hour leave of this owlde Tethis with her moist and watery Nymphs: 
The Islands of the south sea,  And receive to hour new acquaintance the bewetifull lady of the South sea richly crowned with great pearls, the Island of Dites being rich both in name and in treasure. In my epistle book which I sent unto your holiness this last year, I declared how Vaschus Nunnez Balboa the captain of them which passed over the dangerous mountains toward the South sea, 
The Island of pearls.  learned by report that in the prospect of those coasts there lay an Island abounding with pearls of the greatest sort: And that the king thereof was rich and of great power, infesting with wars the other kings his borderers, and especially Chiapes and Tumacchus. We declared further how at that time it was left untouthed by reason of the raging tempests which troubled that South sea three moons in the year. But it is now better known to hour men, who have now also brought that fierce king to humanity: and converted him from a cruel tiger to one of the meek sheep of Christ's flock sanctified with the water of baptism with all his family and kingdom. 
wild beasts must be tamed with the rod.  It shall not therefore be from hour purpose to declare by the governance of what captains or by what means these things were so happily achieved.   

¶ The tenth book of the third Decade.  
TT the arrival of Petrus Arias the new governor of Dariena, he gave commandment that one Gaspar Moralis should take in hand th'expedition to the Island of Dites. 
An expedition to the Island of Dites in the south sea  He therefore took his viage first to Chiapes and Tumacchus kings of the South, whom Vaschus before had concyled and left friends to the Christians. They friendly and magnifycally entertained our men who prepared them a navy of the kings boats to pass over into this Island, which they call Dites and not Margarita or Margaritea, 
The Island of Margaritea.  although it abound with pearls which in the latin tongue are called Margaritae. For they first called an other by this name, which lieth next to the mouth of Os Draconis in the region of Paria, 
O● Draconis.  
Paria.  in the which also is found great plenty of pearls. Gaspan brought with him only threescore armed men to the Island, for that he could convey over no greater number by reason of the smaulenes and narownes of their boats or barks which they call Culchas, made of one hole piece of timber as we have said b●fore. 
A conflict.  The king of the Island came forth against them fiercely with cruel and threatening countenance, and with a great band of armed men crying in manner of a larome and in token of the battle, Guazzavara, Guazzavara, which is as much to say as, battle against the enemy: And is as it wear a watch word to give thonset, wherewith also they threw their darts. For they have not those of bows. They were so obstinate and desperate that they assailed hour men with four Guazzavaras'▪ that is, battles. At the length hour men with certain of Chiapes and Tumacchus men (being old enemies to this king of the Island, got the upper hand by reason they assailed the king soodenly and unwares. Yet was he determined to assemble a greater power, and once again to attempt the fortune of war, but that he was otherwise persuaded by the kings his borderers which counciled him to give over and submit himself: sometime by th'exemple of themselves and other threatening the destruction of his flooryshing kingdom: And otherwiles declaring unto him the humanity and gentleness of hour men, by whose friendship he might obtain honour and quietness to him and his: willing him furthermore to consider what chanced unto them which the year before resisted and adventured the hazard of the battle as did these kings, Poncha, Pocchorrosa, Quarequa, Chiapes, and Tumaccus with such other. By these persuasions, the king submitted himself and came freendely to hour men whom he conducted to his palace which they say to be marvelously adorned and princelike. 
The king of the Island of Dites submitteth himself.  As soon as they entered into the palace, 
The kings palace.  he brought forth a basket of curious woorkemanshyp and full of pearls which he gave them. The sum of these pearls amounted to the weight of a hundredth and ten pounds after viii ounces to the pound. 
A hundredth & ten pound weight of pearls.  Being again rewarded of hour men with such trifles as they brought with them of purpose, as garlands of Crystal and glass and other counterfeit stones of divers colours, with looking glasses also and laton bells, and especially two or three Iren hatchets (which they more esteem then great heaps of gold) he thought himself abundantly recompensed. 
axes and hatchets more esteemed than gold.  They laugh hour men to scorn that they will depart with so great and necessary a thing for any sum of gold: affirming an axe or hatchet to be profitable for many uses of men: and that gold serveth only for wanton pleasures, and not to be greatly necessary. Being therefore joyful and glad of the friendship of hour men, he took the captain by the hand and brought him with certain of his familiars to the highest tower of his palace, from whence they might prospecte the main sea. 
The kings words.  Then casting his eyes about him on every side, and looking toward the east, he said unto them. Behold here lieth open before you the infinite sea extended beyond the son beams. Then turning him toward the south and West, he signified unto them that the land which lay before their eyes, the tops of whose great mountains they might see, 
Islands rich in gold and pearls.  was exceeding large. Then coming somewhat nearer, he said: Behold these Islands on the right hand and on the left, which all obey unto hour empire, and are rich, happy, and blessed, if you call those lands blessed which abound with gold and pearl. We have in this Island little plenty of gold: But the deep places of all the seas about these Islands, are full of pearls: whereof you shall receive of me as many as you will require, so that ye persist in the bond of friendship which you have begun. I greatly desire your friendship, and would gladly have the fruition of your things, which I set much more by then millions of pearls. Yowe shall therefore have no cause to doubt of any unfaithfulness or breach of friendship on my behalf. Hour men gave him like friendly words: and encouraged him with many fair promises to do as he had said. When hour men were now in a readiness to depart, they covenanted with him to pay yearly to the great king of Castyle a hundredth pound weight of pearls. 
C. pound weight of pearls yearly for a tribute.  He gladly agreed to their request, and took it for no great thing: nor yet thought himself any whit the more to become tributary. With this king they found such plenty of hearts and coneyes, 
Plenty of hearts and conni●●.  that hour men standing in their houses might kill as many as them list with their arrows. They live hear very pleasantly, having great plenty of all things necessary. This Island is scarcely two degrees distant from the Equinoctial line. They have the same manner of bread made of roots and the grain of Maizium, and wine made of seeds and fruits, 
wine of fruits and sedes  even as they have in the region of Comogra and in other places aswell in the Islands as in the firm land. This king is now baptized with all his family▪ and subjects. 
The king is baptized.  His desire was at his baptism, to be named Petrus Arias after the name of the governor. When hour men departed, he accompanied them to the sea side and furnished them with boats to return to the continent. 
The fift part of pearls due to the king.  Hour men divided the pearls among them, reserving the fift portion to be delivered to thofficers of the kings Excheker in those parts. They say that these pearls were marvelous precious, fair, orient, and exceeding big: 
Big pearls.  In so much that they brought many with them bigger than hazel nuts. Of what price and value they might be, I consider by one pearl the which Paulus predecessor to your holiness, 
A pearl for a pope.  bowght at the second hand of a merchant of venice for four & forty thousand ducats. Yet among those which were brought from this Island, there was one bought even in Dariena for a thousand and two hundredth Castelans of gold. This was almost as big as a mean walnut: 
another pearl of great price.  And came at the length to the hands of Petrus Arias the governor, who gave it to that noble and faithful woman his wife, of whose manner of departure with her husband, we have made mention before. We must then needs think that this was very precious which was bowght so dear among such a multitude of pearls where they were not bought by one at once, but by pounds and at the least by ounces. It is also to be thought that the Uenecian merchant bought his for no great sum of money in the East parts. But he sold it the dearer for that he chanced to live in those lascivious and wanton days when men were given to such nice and superfluous pleasures, 
Nise and superfluous pleasures.  and met with a merchant for his purpose. But let us now speak somewhat of the shelfysshes in the which pearls are engendered. It is not unknown to your holiness, that aristotel, and Pliny his follower, were of divers opinions as concerning the generation of pearls. 
divers opinions of the generation of pearls.  But these Indians and hour men, rest only in one assertion, not assenting to them in any other: as either that they wander in the sea, or that they move at any time after they are borne. They will therefore that there be certain gree●● places as it were meadows in the bottom of the sea, 
herbs in the bottom of the sea.  bringing forth an herb much like unto thyme, and affirm that they have seen the same: And that they are engendered, nourished, and grow therein, as we see th'increase and succession of oysters to grow about themselves. Also that these fishes delighteth not in the conversation or coompanye of the sea dogs: Nor yet to be contented with only one, two, or three, or at the most four pearls: affirming that in the fishing places of the king of this Island, there was found a hundredth pearls in one fish, 
A hundredth pearls ●n one shell fish.  the whirhe Gaspar Moralis the captain himself, and his companions, diligently numbered. For it pleased the king at their being there & in their presence, to command his divers to go a fishing for those kind of fishes. They compare the matrices of these fishes, 
The matrice of the pearl fish.  to the places of conception in hens, in the which their eggs are engendered in great multitudes and clusters: And believe that these fishes bring forth their birth in like manner. For the better proof whereof, they say that they found certain pearls coming forth of their matreces, as being now come to the time of their full ripenesss, 
The girth of pearls.  and moved by nature to come out of their mothers womb opening itself in time convenient. Likewise that within a while after, they saw other succeed in like manner. So that to conclude, they saw sum coming forth, and other sum yet abiding the time of their perfection: which being complete, they also became lose and opened the matrice. They perceived the pearls to be enclosed in the midst of their bellies, there to be noris●hed and increase as an infant sucking his mothers paps within her womb, before he move to come forth of her privy places. And if it chance any of these shelfysshes to be found scattered in the sand of the sea (as I myself have seen oysters disparkled on the shores in divers places of the Ocean) they affirm that they have been violently driven thither from the bottom of the sea by force of tempests, and not to have wandered thither of themselves. But, that they become white by the clearness of the morning dew, or wax yellow in troubled wether, or otherwise that they ●eeme to rejoice in fair wether and clear air, or contrariwise to be as it were astonisshed and dim in thunder and tempests, with such other, the perfect knowledge hereof is not to be looked for at the hands of these unlearned men which handle the matter but grossly, and inquire no further than occasion serveth. Yet do they affirm by th'experience and industry of the divers, that the greatest pearls lie in the deepest places, 
where the bigest, mean, and least pearls are engendered  they of the mean sort higher, and the least highest of all and nearer to the brim of the water. And say therefore that the greatest do not wander: but that they are created, nourished, and increase in the deepest places of the sea, whether few, divers, and that but seldom dare adventure to dive so deep to gather them, aswell for fear of the sea crabs which wander among these pearl fishes to feed of them, 
Sea crabs  and for fear of other monsters of the sea, as also lest their breath should fail them into long remaining in the water. And this they say to be the cause why the owldest and therefore bigest sea muscles, 
The sea muscles wherein pearls are engendered.  inhabit the deepest places from whence they are not lightly moved by tempests. Furthermore, how much the bigger and older these fishes are, they say that in their larger matrices, the greater number and bigger pearls are found: And that for this cause, there are fewer found of the bigest sort. They think also, that when they first fall from their fishes in the deep places, they are devoured of other fishes, because they are not yet hard. again, the smaulest differ from the bigest in a certain swelling or impostumation which the Spaniards call a tympane. For they deny that to be a pearl which in old muscles cleaveth fast to the shell: But that it is a wart, which being razed from the shell with a file, is round and bright but only of one side, and not precious, being rather of the nature of the fish itself, then of a pearl. They confess that they have seen certain of these muscles cleaving on rocks: Yet these but few, and nothing worth. It is also to be thought that the pearl fishes or sea muscles which are found in India, Arabia, the red sea, or Taprobana, are ruled in such order as the afore named famous authors have written. For their opinion herein is not utterly to be rejected, forasmuch as they were learned men and travailed long in the searching of these things. But we have now spoken sufficiently of these sea fishes and of their eggs which the fond nysenes and wantonness of men have made dearer than the eggs of hens or geese. Let us therefore entreat somewhat of other particular things which are come to hour knowledge of late. We have else where largely described the mouths of the gulf of Vraba, with sundry and variable regions divided with the manifold gulfs of that sea. But asconcerning the West coasts in the which hour men have builded houses and planted their habitations on the banks of Dariena, I have no new matter to write. Yet as touching the East parts of the gulf, 
The regions of the ●ast side of the gulf of Uraba,  I have learned as followeth. They say that the universal land of the East region of the gulf from the corner thereof far reaching into the sea, and from the extreme or utter most mouth of the same receiving the waters of the sea which fall into it, even unto Os Draconis and Paria, is by one general name called Caribana, 
The region of Caribana.  of the Caribes or Canibales which are found in every region in this tract. But from whence they had their particular original, 
The original of the Canibales.  and how leaving their native soil, they have spread their generation so far like a pestiferous contagion, we will now declare. Therefore from the first front reaching forth into the sea (in whose tract we said that Fogeda fastened his foot) toward the corner, about nine miles distant, there lieth a village of Caribana named Fu●craca. 
The villages of Caribana.  Three miles distant from this, is the village of Vraba, of the which it is thought that the hole gulf took his name, because this village was once the head of the kingdom. About two miles from this, is Fe●i. Nine miles from Feti●, is Zerema: 
Manhun●ers.  And about twelve miles from this, Sorache. Hour men found all these villages full of people, all the which give themselves only to manhunting. In so much that if they lack enemies against whom they may keep war, they exercise cruelty against themselves, and either slay the one the other, or else drive the vanquysshed to flight.  
Whereby it is apparent that by these their continual wars, and driving the one the other out of their countries, this infection hath gone so far not only on the firm land, but also into the Islands. I was also advertised of an other thing the which to my judgement, seemeth worthy to be put in memory.  
One Corrales a judge in causes of law among the spaniards of Dariena, saith that on a time walking abroad with his book in his hand, he met by the way with a fugitive which had stead from the great lands lying far toward the west, and remained here with a King with whom he was entertained. When this man perceived the lawyer looking on his book, marvelling thereat, he came running unto him, and by interpreters of the king whom he served, spoke thus unto him: Have you also books wherein you may reserve things in perpetual memory? 
Books.  
Look in the beginning of the book of the lands lately found.  And letters whereby you may declare your mind to such as are absent? And herewith desired that the book might be opened unto him, supposing that he should therein have found the letters of his own country. But when he saw them unlike, he said further that in his country there were cities fortified with walls and governed by laws: and that the people also used apparel. But of what religion they were, I did not learn. Yet had hour men knowleage both by the words and signs of this fugitive, that they were circumcised. 
Circumcised people.  What now think you hereby (most holy father) Or what do you divine may come hereof when time shall subdue all these under your throne? 
what chanced to the Captains which the governor sent divers ways,  Let us now entermyngle certain smaule things among these great matters. I have not thought good to pretermit that which chanced to johannes Solysius', who, to search the South side of the supposed continent, departed with three ships from port joppa (not far distant from the Islands of Gades or Cales in the Ocean) the fourth day of the Ideses of September in the year. M D. xv. Or what success johannes Pontius had, whom the new governor Petrus Arias appointed to vanquish and destroy the Caribes or Canibales, devourers of man's flesh. 
Look decade iii. liber vi  Also to what end the voyages of the other captains came, which were sent forth divers ways at the same time: As Gonzalus Bada●ocius, Franciscus Bezerra, and Valleius, johannes Solicius took the matter in hand in an evil hour. 
The viage of johannes Solisius.  He sailed beyond the point of saint Augustine, (which they call Cabo. S. Augustini) toward the South side of the supposed continent beyond the Equinoctial line. 
Cap. S. Augusti●i.  For (as we have said before) that point reacheth southward to the seventh degree of the South pool called the pole Antarctic. He proceeded in that voyage six hundredth leagues: And found the land from the point to extend so far toward the South beyond the Equinoctial, that he came to the thirty degree of the South pole. As he sailed thus forward, having now on his back half the stars named Caput Draconis, (that is, the dragon's head) and the regions of Paria lying northward from him, and prospecting toward the pole arctic, he chanced to fall into the hands of the filthy Canibales. 
john Solysius' is slain of the Canibales.  For these crafty foxes seemed to make signs of peace, when in their minds they conceived a hope of a dainty banquet: 
The fierceness of the Canibale●.  And espying their enemies a far of, began to swallow their spittle as their mouths watered for greediness of their prey. As unhappy Solys●us descended with as many of his company as could enter into the boat of the bigest ship, soodenly a great multitude of thinhabitants bruste forth upon them, and slew them every man with clubs, even in the sight of their fellows. They carried away the boat, and in a moment broke it all to fytters. Not one man escaped. Their fury not thus satisfied, they cut the slain men in pieces even upon the shore where their fellows might behold this horrible spectacle from the sea. But they being stricken with fear through this exemple, durst not come forth of their ships, or devise how to revenge the death of their captain and companions. They departed therefore from these unfortunate coasts: And by the way lading their ships with brasell returned home again with loss and heavy cheer. 
Brasell.  Of these things I was advertised of late by their own letters.  
What they have else done, I shall have more particular knowledge hereafter, johannes Pontius was also repulsed by the Canibales in the Island of Guadalupea being one of the chief Islands of their habitation. 
johannes Pō●ius is repulsed by the Canibales.  For when they saw hour men a far of on the sea, they lay in ambush soodenly to invade them when they should come aland. Hour men sent forth a few foot men and with them their laundresses to wash their shirts and sheets. For from the Island of Ferrea being one of the Islands of Canary (even unto this Island, for the space of four thousand and two hundredth miles) they had seen no land where they might find any fresh water: for as much as in all this large space, the Ocean is without Islands. At their coming therefore to land, the Canibales assailed them, carried away the women, and put the men to such distress that few of them escaped. By reason whereof, Pontius being greatly discomfited, durst not invade the Canibales, fearing their venemed arrows which these naked manhunters can direct most certainly. Thus good Pontius failing of his purpose, was fain to give over the Canibales, whom (being safe and under the house roof) he threatened to vanquish and destroy. Whether he went from thence, or what new things he found, I have as yet no further knowledge. By these misfortunes, Solysius' lost his life, and Pontius his honour. Let us now speak of an other whose enterprise came to like purpose the same year. johannes Aiora borne in the city of Corduba, 
The viage of Io●annes Aior●.  a man of noble parentage, sent in stead of the lieutenant (as we have said) more covetous of gold then careful of his charge or desirous of praise for well deserving, 
Lock decade iii. liber, v●.  sought occasions of quereling against the kings and spoiled many, violently extorting gold of them against right and equity: And further handled them so extremely, that of friends they became most cruel enemies: 
The lewd behaviour of john Aiora.  In so much that they ceased not with desperate minds by all means they could to slay hour men openly or privily. By reason whereof it is come to pass, that where before they bartered quietly exchanging ware for ware, they are now fain to do all things by force of arms. When he had thus exacted a great quantity of gold of them (as it is said) he fled privily and took away a ship with him by stealth as the common rumour goeth: Nor yet hitherto have we hard whither he went or where he is arrived. Sum suspect that Petrus Arias the governor should consent to his departure because this johannes Aiora is brother to Gonsalus Aiora the kings historiographer, a man booth learned, and expert in the discipline of war: and so much the governors friend, that these two among a few, may be counted exemples of rare amity. I myself also am greatly bound unto them both and have long enjoyed their friendship. Yet shall I desire them both to pardon me in declaring my fantasy herein, that in all the turmoils and tragical affairs of the Ocean, nothing hath so much displeased me as the covetousness of this man who hath so disturbed the pacified minds of the kings. Now among these troublous chances, let us rehearse the variable fortune of Gonsalus Badaiccius, & his fellows, 
The variable fortune of Gō●alus Bada●ocius.  whose prosperous beginnings, ended with unfortunate success. Gonsalus therefore in the month of May in the year of Christ M. D. xv. departed from Dariena with fourscore armed men, directing his viage toward the south, and resting in no place until he came to the region of Cerabaro which hour men named Gratia Dei, 
Ce●abaro. Decade. iii.li.iii.  distant from Dariena about a hundredth and fourscore miles: for they call it threescore leaques. He spent certain days here in Idleness: for he could neither by fair means nor by foul, allure the king of the region to come to him. While he lay thus idly, there came to him other fifty men sent from Dariena under the governance of capitain Lodovicus Mercado who departed from Dariena in the kalends of may, to th'intent to search thinner parts of those regions. When they met together, they determined after consultation, to pass over the mountains lying toward the south, even unto the south sea lately found. Behold now a wonderful thing: That in a land of such marvelous longitude in other places, they found it here to be only about fifty miles distant to the south sea: 
The South sea.  for they count it xvii leaques, 
A leaque containeth four miles by sea and but three by land.  as the manner of the spaniards is to reckon, and not by miles. Yet say they that a leaque consisteth of three miles by land and four by sea as we have noted before. In the tops of the mountains and turning of the waters, they found a king named juana▪ whose kingdom is also named Coiba as is the region of king Careta, of whom we have made mention else where. But for as much as the region of this juana, is richer in gold, they named it Coiba Dites, 
The golden region of Coi●a Dytes.  that is, Coiba the rich. For, wheresoever they digged the ground, whether it were on the dry land or in the weate channels of the rivers, they found the sand which they cast forth, mixed with gold. juana fled at the coming of hour men, 
Sande mixed w●th gold. how their slaves are marked in the face.  and could never be brought again. They spoiled all the country near about his palace. Yet had they but little gold: for he had carried all his stuff with him. Here they found certain slaves marked in the faces after a strange sort. For with a sharp prick made either of bone, or else with a thorn, they make holes in their faces: and forthwith sprinkeling a powder thereon, they moist the pounced place with a certain black of red juice, whose substance is of such tenacity and claniminesse, that it will never wear away. They brought these slaves away with them. They say that this juice is of such sharpness and putteth them to such pain, that for extreme dolour they have no stomach to their meat certain days after. The kings which take these slaves in their wars, use their help in seeking for gold and in tillage of the ground, even as do hour men. From the palace of juana. following the course of the water about ten miles toward the south, they entered into the dominion of an other king, whom hour men named the old man, because he was old, not passing of his other name. In the region of this king also, they found gold in all places both on the land and in the rivers. 
Gold.  This region is very fair and fruitful: and hath in it many famous rivers. Departing from hence, in five days journey they came to a land left desolate. They suppose that this was destroyed by civil discord for as much as it is for the most part fruitful, 
A fruitful region left desolate by civil discord.  and yet not inhabited. The fifth day, they saw two men coming a far of. These were laden with bread of Maizium, which they carried on their shoulders in sacks. Hour men took them: and understood by them that there were two kings in that tract: The one was named Periqu●te, 
king Per●quete.  who dwelt near unto the sea. The others name was Totonoga. This Totonoga, was blind and dwelt in the continent. The two men which they met, were the fishers of Totonoga, whom he had sent with certain farthels of fish to Periquete, and had again received bread of him for exchange. For thus do they communicate their commodities one with an other by exchange, without choose of wicked money.  
By the conducting of these two men, they came to king Totonoga dwelling on the West side of saint Michaelles gulf in the south sea. 
S. Mi●hael,  
king Totonoga.  They had of this king, the sum of six thousand Castellans of gold both rude and artifycially wrought. among those groumes of rude or native gold, there was one found of the weight of two Castellans, 
Six thousand Cas●ellan● of gold.  which argued the plentiful rychenesse of the ground. Following the same coasts by the sea side toward the West, they came to a king whose name was Taracuru, 
king Taracuru.  of whom they had gold amounting to the weight of eight thousand Pesos. 
viii. thou●and pesoes of gold  We have said before that Pesus is the weight of a Castelane not coined. From hence they went to the dominion of this kings broother named Pananome, 
king Pananome.  who fled at their coming, and appeared no more afterward. They say that his kingdom is rich in gold. They spoiled his palace in his absence. Syxe leaques from hence, they came to an other king named Tabor. 
king Tabor.  From thence they came to th● king of Cheru. 
king Cheru.  He friendly entertained hour men, and gave them four thousand Pesos of gold. 
●iii. thousand pesoes of gold Salt.  He hath in his dominion many goodly salt days: the region also aboundeth with gold. About twelve miles from hence, they came to an other king called Anata, 
king Anata.  of whom they had xu thousand Pesos of gold which he had gotten of the kings his borderers whom he had vanquished by war. 
xv. thousand pesoes of gold  A great part of this gold was in rude form because it was melted when he set the kings houses on fire whom he spoiled. 
Their manner of war.  For they rob and slay the one the other, sacking and fyring their villages, and wasting their countries. They keep war barbarously and to utter destruction, executing extreme cruelty against them that have the overthrow. Gonsalus Badaiocius with his fellows, wandered at liberty until they came to this king: And had gathered great heaps of gold of other kings. For, what in bracelets, collars, earrings, breast plates, helmets, and certain bars wherewith women bear up their breasts, they had gathered together in gold the sum of fourscore thousand Castellans, 
Fourscore thousand Castellans o● gold.  which they had obtained partly by exchange for hour things where they found the kings their friends, & otherwise by forceible means where they found the contrary. They had gotten also forty slaves whose help they used both for carriage of their victuals and bagagies in the stead of moils or other beasts of burden, and also to relieve such as were sick and forweried by reason of their long journeys and hunger. After these prosperous viages, they came by the dominion of king Scoria, 
king Scoria.  to the palace of a king named Pariza: 
king Pariza.  where (fearing no such thing) Pariza enclosed them with a great army, 
Gasalus Badaiocius hath the overthrow and is spoiled of grea● riches of gold,  and assailed them straggeling and unwares, in such sort that they had no leisure to put on their armure. He slew and wounded about fifty, and put the residue to flight. They made such● hast, that they had no respect either to the gold they had gathered, or to their slaves: but left all behind them. Those few that escaped, came to Dariena. The opinion of all wise men as concerning the variable and inconstant chances of fortune in human things, 
The Inconstancy of fortune.  were false, if all things should have happened unto them prosperously. For such is the nature of this blind goddess, that she oftentimes delighteth in the overthrow of them whom she hath exalted: and taketh pleasure in confounding high things with low, and the contrary. We see this order to be impermutable, that who so will apply himself to gather roots, shall sometimes meet with sweet lyqueresse, and other while with sour cockle. Yet woe unto Pariza: for he shall not long sleep in rest. The governor himself was of late determined with three hundredth and fifty choice soldiers to revenge the death of our men: But where as he by chance fell sick, his power went forward under the conducting of his Lieutenant Gaspar Spinosa, a judge in cases of law in Dariena. At the same time other were sent forth to the Island of Dites to exact the portion of pearls limited to the king for his tribute. What shall succeed, time will bring to hour knowledge. The other two, attempted thinhabitants beyond the gulf Franciscus Bezerra passing over by the corner of the gulf and the mouths of the river of Dabaiba, 
The expedition of Frances Be●arra ●geynst the Canibales.  with two other captains and a hundredth and fifty soldiers well appointed, went to make war upon the Canibales even in Caribana their own chiefest dominion, toward the village of Turusy, whereof we have made mention before in the coming of Fogeda. They brought also with them divers engens of war: 
Gun●e●.  as ●hree pieces of ordinanunce whose shot were bigger than eggs: Likewise forty archers, and xxv hagbutters to th'intent to reach the Cannibals a far of, and to prevent their venemed arrows. But what became of him and his company, or where they arrived, we have yet no perfect knowledge. Certain which came of late from Dariena to Spain, reported that at their departure, they of Dariena stood in great fear lest they also were tossed with sum misfortune. The other captain Valleius, 
Ualeius repulsed of the Canibales.  obtained the fore part of the gulf. But he passed over by an other way than did Bezerra. For he took the beginning of Caribana, and Bezerra the end. Valleius returned again. But of the three score and ten men which he conveyed over with him, he left forty and eight slain among the Canibales. These are the news which they bring that came last from Da●iena. There came to me the day before the Ideses of October in this year M.d.xvi Rodericus Colmenares (of whom we have made mention before) and one Franciscus Delapuente. This Franciscus, was one of the under captains of this band, whose chief captain was Gonsalus Badaiocius who hardly escaped the hands of king Pariza. These two captains therefore, Rodericus and Franciscus who departed from Dariena immediately after the misfortune which befell to Badaiocius and his company, 
The Islands of the south s●a.  do both affirm, the one that he hath hard, and the other that he hath seen, that in the south sea there are divers Islands lying westward from the Island of Dites and saint Michael's gulf, 
In this sea 〈◊〉 Islands of Molucca. most fruitful of apexes.  in many of the which are trees engendered and nourished which bring forth the same aromatical fruits, as doth the region of Collocutea, 
Collocutea.  This land of Collocutea, with the regions of Cochinus and Camemorus, 
Cochinus and Camemorus, from whence the Portugals have their spices.  are the chief mart places from whence the Portugals have their spices. And hereby do they conjecture that the land where the frutfulnesse of spice beginneth, should not be far from thence. In so much that many of them which have overrun those coasts, do only desire that leave may be granted them to search further, and that they will of their own charges frame and furnish ships and adventure the voyage to seek those Islands and regions. They think it best that these ships should be made and prepared, 
he meaneth by the straight of Magellanus.  even in saint Michael's gulf: And not to attempt this viage by saint Augustine's point, which way were both long and di●fyculte, and full of a thousand dangers, and is said to reach beyond the forty degree of the pole Antarctic. The same Franciscus, being partner of the travails and dangers of Gonsalus, saith that in over running those lands, he found great herds of hearts and wild bores: 
how they take hearts and wild bores.  and that he took many of them by an art which thinhabitants taught him: which was to make pits or trenches in their walks, and to cover the same with bouwes. By this means also they deceive all other kinds of wild and four footed beasts. But they take fowls after the same manner that we do: As stock doves with an other tame stock done brought up in their houses. 
Stock d●ue●  These they tie by a string, and suffer them to fly a little among the trees. To the which as other birds of their kind resort, they kill them with their arrows. 
Their manner of fouling.  Otherwise they take them with nets in a bare place purged from trees & bushes: and scattering certain seeds round about that place, in the myddeste whereof they tie a tame foul or bird of the kind of them which they desire to take. In like manner do they take popinjays and other fowls. But they say that popinjays are so simple, 
Po●ingiayes ar● ea●ely taken.  that a great multitude of them will fly even into the tree in whose bouwes the fouler sitteth: & swarm about the tame chattering popingiaye, suffering themselves to be easily taken. For they are so without fear of the sight of the fouler, that they tarry while he cast the snare about their necks, the other being nothing feared hereby, though they see him draw them to him with the snare, and put them in the bag which he hath about him for the same purpose. There is an other kind of fouling, 
A strange kind of fouling.  heretofore never hard of, and pleasant to consider. We have declared before how that in certain of the Islands, and especially in Hispaniola, there are divers lakes or standing pools. In sum of these (being no deaper than men may wade over them) are seen great multitudes of water fowls: as well for that in the bottom of these lakes, there grow many herbs and weeds, as also that by reason of the heat of the son pearceinge to the natural place of generation and corruption, 
fishes and worms engendered of sum  where being doubled in force by reflection and preserved by moister, there are engendered of the stymines of the earth and water, and by the providence of the universal creator, innumerable little fishes, with a thousand sundry kinds of frogs, worms, knattes, flies and such other. The fowls which use these lakes, 
Foules.  are of divers kinds: As ducks, geese, swans, seemewes, gulls, and such other. We have said also that in their orchards they nourish a tree which beareth a kind of great gourds. Of these gourds therefore well stopped least any water should enter in at their rifts and cause them to sink, 
Gourds of the tree.  they cast many in the shallow pools: where, by their continual wandering and wavering with the motions of the wind and water, they put the fowls out of suspection and fear. The fouler in the mean time, disguysinge himself as it were with a viso, putteth a great gourd on his head much like to a helmet, with two holes near about his eyes, his face and hole head beside being covered therewith. And thus entereth he into the pool even unto the chin. For being from their infancy exercised in swiming and accustomed to the waters, they refuse not to continue therein a long space. The fowls thinking this gourd to be one of the other that swim upon the water, the fouler goeth softly to the place where he seeth the greatest flock of fowls: And with wagging his head, counterfectinge the moving of the wavering gourds, draweth near to the fowls: where softly putting forth his right hand, he soodenly snatcheth one by the legs and plungeth her into the water where he putteth her into a bag which he hath with him of purpose The other fowls supposing that this dived into the water of her own motion to seek for food (as is their manner) are nothing moved hereby, but go forward on their way as before, until they also faule into the same snare. I have here for this cause entered into the declaration of their manner of huntynge and fouling, that by these more pleasant narrations I may somewhat mitigate and assuage the horror conceived in your stomach by the former rehearsal of their bloody acts and cruel manners. Let us now therefore speak somewhat again of the new and later opinions as concerning the swift course of the sea toward the west about the coasts of Paria: 
L●●er opinions of the swift course of the Ocean toward the west.  also of the manner of gathering of gold in the gold mine of Dariena, as I was advertised of late. And with these two quiet and peaceable things, we will make an end of the tragical affairs of the Ocean: and therewith bid your holiness far well. So it is therefore, that Andreas Moralis the pilot, and Ouiedus (of whom we have made mention before) repaired to me, at my house in the town of Matrite, As we met thus together, there arose a contention between them two, as concerning this course of the Ocean. They both agree that these lands and regions pertaining to the dominion of Castille, do with one continual tract and perpetual bond, embrace as one hole firm land or continent all the main land lying on the north side of Cuba and the other Islands, 
The continent or firm land.  being also northwest both from Cuba and Hispaniola. Yet as touching the course of the water, they vary in opinion. For Andrea's, will that this violent course of water be received in the lap of the supposed continente which bendeth so much and extendeth so far toward the North, as we have said: And that by the object or resistance of the land so bending and crooking, the water should as it were rebound in coompasse, and by force thereof be driven about the north side of Cuba and the other Islands excluded without the circle called Tropicus Caneri, where the largeness of the sea may receive the waters falling from the narrow streams, and thereby repress that inordinate course, by reason that the sea is there very large and great. I can compare his meaning to nothing more aptly then to the swift stream coming forth of a mill and falling into the mill pool. For in all such places where waters run with a violent faule through narrow channels, and are then received in large pools, they are soodenly disparkled and their violence broken: So that whereas before they seemed of such force as to overthrow all things being in their way, it can not then be perceived which way they run. The Admiral himself Diegus Colonus, 
The voyages of Diegus Colonus.  son and heir to Christophorus Colonus the first finder of these lands (who had now in coming and going, four times passed through these seas) being demanded of me what he found or perceived in sailing too and fro, 
The viage from the new lands to Spain.  answered that there was much difficulty in returning the same way by the which they go. But whereas they first take the way by the main sea toward the North before they direct their course to Spain, he saith that in that tract, he felt the ship sometimes a little driven back by the contrary course of the water. Yet supposeth that this chanceth only by the ordinary flowing and reflowing of the sea: And the same not to be enforced by the circumflection or course of the water rebounding in compass as we have said. But thinketh rather, that this main land or supposed continent, should somewhere be open: And that the said open place, should be as it were a gate, entry, or straight, divyding the North parts of that land from the South: by the which also, the Ocean running toward the West, may by the rotation or impulsion of the heavens, be driven about the hole earth. Ouiedus agreeth with Andrea's Motralis as touching the continual adherence and closeness of the said continente. Yet neither that the waters should so beat against the bending back of the West land, or be in such sort repulsed and driven into the main sea. But saith that he hath diligently considered, that the waters run from the deepest and midst of the main sea, toward the West. Also that sailing near unto the shore with smaule vessels, he found the same waters to return again toward the East. 
The contrary course of waters.  So that in the same place, they run together with contrary course, as we oftentimes see the like to chance in rivers whereby the object of the banks, divers whirlpools and turnings arise in the water. By reason whereof, if any chaff, straw, wood, or any other thing of light substance be cast in any such places in rivers, it followeth that all such as run with the water in the midst of the channel, proceed well forward: But such as fall into the bending gulfs and indented margentes of the crooked banks, are carried overthwart the channel, and so wander about until they meet with the full and direct course of the river. Thus have we made you partner of such things as they have given us, and written their divers opinions. We will then give more certain reason, when more certain truth shallbe known. We must in the mean time, lean to opinions until the day come appointed of god to reveal this secret of nature, with the perfect knowledge of the point of the pole star. 
The point of the pole star,  Having said thus much of the course of the Ocean, a brief declaration of the gold mines of Dariena, 
The gold mines of Dariena and the manner of gathering gold.  shall close up hour Decades and make an end of hour travails. We have said, that nine miles distant from Dariena, are the sides of the hills and the dry plains in the which gold is gathered both on the dry land, and also on the banks and in the channels of rivers. Therefore to all such as are willing to gather gold, there is of ordinary custom appointed to every man by the suruoiers of the mines, a square plot of ground containing twelve paces, at the arbitrament of the chooser, so that it be not ground already occupied, or left of other. The portion of ground being thus chosen (as it were assigned of the augurs to build a temple) they enclose their slaves within the same, whose help the Christians use in tilling of their ground and gathering of gold, as we have said. These places appointed unto them, they keep as long as them live. And if they perceive tookens of little gold, they require an other plot of ground of twelve paces to be assigned them, leaving the first in comen. 
Hour inclosiers would leave no such commons.  And this is thorder which the Spaniards inhabiting Dariena observe in gathering of gold. I suppose also that they use the like order in other places: How be it, I have not yet inquired so far. It hath been proved that these twelve paces of ground, have yielded to their choosers, the sum of fourscore Castellans of gold. 
Aurisacra Famed  And thus lead they their lives in fulfilling the holy hunger of gold. But the more they fill their hands with finding, 
The broosie of covetousness.  the more increaseth their covetous desire. The more wood is laid to the fire, the more furiously rageth the flame. Unsaciable covetousness is no more diminished with increase of richesse, then is the dryness of the dropsy satisfied with drink. I let pass many things whereof I intend to write more largely in time convenient, if I shall in the mean season understand these to be acceptable unto your holiness: my duty and observance to whose authority; hath caused me the gladlier to take this labour in hand. The providence of the eternal creator of all things, grant your holiness many prosperous years.   

¶ The last book of Peter Martyr of Angleria, of the Lands and Islands lately found: and of the manners of the inhabitants of the same.  
I Have partli declared before in mi decades how certain fugitives which came out of the large West lands arrived in the confines of Dariena: 
Look Decade ●ii. Liber. x.  And how that marveling at the books of hour men, they declared that they sometime dwelt in regions whose inhabitants used such instruments and were ruled by politic laws. Also that they had cities fortified with walls, 
Cities fortified with walls.  and fair palaces with streets well paved, and common places whither merchants resort as to the burse or street. These lands, hour men have now found. Therefore who were thauthors hereof, or what success they had herein, who so desireth to know with the conditions of strange regions and the manners of the people, let him give diligent attendance to such things as follow. Of the Island of Cuba (now called Fernandina, 
The Island of Cuba or Fernand●na.  lying next unto Hispaniola on the west side, and yet somewhat so bending toward the north that the circle called Tropicus Caneri divideth it in the midst, where as Hispaniola is distant from the Tropic and declining certain degrees toward the Equinoctial line) we have spoken somewhat before. In this Island of Fernandina, there are now six towns erected. Whereof, the chief is named Sanctiago of saint james the patron of the spaniards. In this, there is native gold, found both in the mountains and rivers: By reason whereof they are daily occupied in gathering & digging the same. But shortly after that I had finished my said books, three spaniards that were the most ancient citizens of Cuba, 
The Spaniards of Cuba attempt new voyages.  as Franc●scus Fernandes of Corduba Lupus Ocho, & Christophorus Morantes, determined to seek new lands, as the minds of the spaniards are ever unquiet and given to attempt great enterprises. They furnished at their own charges, three of those ships which they call Caravels. And having first licence of Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island, they departed with a hundredth and ten men from the West angle of Cuba. 
The west angle of ●uba.  For this angle is most commodious to relieve ships and to make provision for fresh water and fuel. Thus they sailed continually two days and a half, between the West and the South, contented only with the sight of the heaven and the water: during which time, they suppose that they sailed not passed threescore and six miles. 
Note.  For they lay at anchor all night where so ever the falling of the son took the day light from them, least by wandering in unknown seas, they might chance to be cast upon rocks or sands. But at the length they chanced upon a great Island named jucatana, 
The Island of jucatana.  whose beginning thinhabitants call Eccampi. 
A great city well builded.  Hour men went to the city standing on the sea side, the which for the bygnes thereof, they named E●yrus or Alcair. Th'inhabitants entertained them very friendly. When they were entered into the city, they marveled to behold the houses builded like towers, magnifycall temples, 
Temples.  streets well paved, and great excercise of buying and selling by exchange of ware for ware. 
human people.  Their houses are either bylte of stone, or of brick and lime, and artifycially wrought. To the first porches of their houses and first habitations, they ascend by ten or twelve steers. They are covered either with tiles, 
Cunning artificers.  slates, reads, or stalks of certain herbs. They gratified the one the other with mutual gifts. The barbarians gave hour men many brooches and jewels of gold, very fair and of cunning woorkmanshyppe. Hour men recompensed them with vestures of silk and wool, counterfeit stones, of coloured glass and crystal, hawks bells of laton, and such other rewards which they greatly esteemed for the strangeness of the same. They set nowght by looking glasses, because they have certain stones much brighter. 
Apparelled people.  This nation is apparelled after a thousand fashions with vestures made of gossampyne cotton or bombage of divers colours. The women are covered from the girdle to the heel having divers fashions of veles about their heads and breasts, with great cautel lest any part of their legs or feet be seen. They resort much to their temples: unto the which the chief rulers have the ways paved from their own houses. They are idolaters and circumcised. 
Circumcised Idolaters.  They occupy their manner of exchaunginge, with much fidelity. They use to adorn the hears of their heads, being demanded by th'interpreters of whom they received their circumcision, they answered that there once passed an exceeding fair man by their costs, who left them that in tooken to remember him. Other say that a man brighter th●n the soon, went among them and executed that office. But there is no certainty hereof. When hour men had remained there certain days, they seemed to be molestous to thinhabitants according to the common saying. The longer a geste tarrieth, the worse is his entertainment. The which thing hour men perceiving, they made the more h●st away. Being therefore provided of all things necessary, they took their viage directly toward the west by the providence which thinhabitants call Comi and M●i●m. 
Comi.  
Mai●m.  They over passed these regions taking only fresh water and fuel in the same. The barbarians both men, women, and children flocked to the sea side, astonysshed greatly to behold the huge bigness of the ships. Hour men marveled in manner no le●se to view their buildings and especially their temples sytuate near unto the sea, and erected after the manner of towers. Thus at the length having sailed about a hundredth and ten miles, they thought it good to ley anchor in a province named Campechium, 
Campechium.  whose chief town consisteth of three thousand houses. 
A town of three thousand houses.  the inhabitauntes came swiming to the ships: marvelling exceedingly at the manner of sailing, and at the sails and other tackelynges But when they heard the thunder of the guns, saw the smoke, and smelt the savour of brimstone and fire, they supposed that thunderboultes and lightnings had been sent from god. The king received hour men honourably and brought them into his palace: where he feasted them well after his manner. They are accustomed to eat flesh, and have great plenty of beasts and fowls: 
Plenty of beasts and fowls.  as peacocks, and other which they frank and feed in their houses: Also divers kinds of wild fowls of the mountains, woods, and waters: Likewise partridges, quails, turtle doves, ducks, and geese. Of beasts, they have coneyes, wolves, lions, tigers, foxes, wild boors, hearts, and hares. After this banquet, the king with his train and family brought hour men into a broad cross way where many streets do meet. 
Their Idols and Idolatry.  In this, they showed them as it were a great and high altar builded four square of marble compact together partly with the tough clay of Babylon called Bitumem, and partly with smaule stones. It had on every side four steers. Upon the altar was an Image of a man made of marble: and fast by it the Images of two beasts of unknown shape, which seemed as though they would with yaning mouths have torn in sunder the belly of the man's Image. On the other side stood a great serpent compact of the said tough clay and smaule stones. This serpent being in length xlvii foot, and of the bigness of a large ox, seemed to devour a lion of marble, and was all by sparkled with fresh blood. Hard by the altar, were three posts fastened in the ground, the which three other traversed and were sustained with stones. In this place offenders were put to death: In token whereof they saw innumerable arrows stained with blood, sum scattered, sum lying on heaps, and sum broken: Also a great number of men's bones lying in a court or yard near unto this funestal place. Their houses are here also builded of lime and stone. 
houses of lime & stone.  They named this king, Lazarus, because they arrived at this land on saint Lazarus day. Departing from hence & directing their course still toward the West for the space of xu miles, they came to a province named Aquanil, 
The province Aquinall.  whose chief town is called Moseo, 
Moseo.  & the king thereof, Cupoton. He beheld hour men with a froward countenance, and fought occasion to do them sum privy mischief while they sought for fresh water. For he made signs unto them that on the further side of the next hill, they should find springs of water, intending to have assailed them in that narrow passage. But by the colouring of their foreheads (as they are accustomed in their wars) and by the bearing of their bows and other weapons, our men perceived their wiliness, and refused to go any further. Yet a thousand of the Barbarians assailed them unwares and unprepared. By reason whereof, they were put to flight, and divers of them slain in the chase. 
The spaniards are put to flight and many slain.  Many that fled to ward the ships, were entangled in the mud and marshes near unto the shore. Twenty and two, were slain with arrows, and the residue for the most part, wounded. Franciscus Fernandes the governor of the navy, received in this conflict three and thirty wounds. And in manner none escaped without hurt. If they had gone to the hills which were appointed them, they had been slain every man. They therefore that escaped, returned to the Island of Fernardina from whence they came, where they were received of their fellows with heavy cheer. But when Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island, had intelligence hereof, 
another expedition.  he immediately furnished a new navy of four caravels with three hundredth men. Of this navy he appointed john Grisalua his nephew, to be the governor: And assigned for under captains, Alphons Auila, Frances Montegio, and Peter Aluarado. For the pilot he assigned Antony Alamino who had the regiment of the first navy. They attempted the same viage again, but declined somewhat more toward the South about threescore and ten miles. Before they saw any land, they espied a tower a far of, by the view whereof, they came to an Island named Cozumella, 
The Island of Cozumella.  from the which they smelt sweet savours proceeding with the wind, 
Sweet savours.  before they approached to the land by the space of three miles. They found the Island to be forty and five miles in circuit. It is plain and of marvelous fruitful s●yle. 
A fruitful Island,  There is also gold in it, but it is not engendered there, but brought thither from other regions. It aboundeth with honey, fruits, and herbs: And hath also great plenty of fowls and four footed beasts. Their order and manner of living, is in all things like unto theirs of jucatana. 
Towers and temples.  Likewise their houses, temples, streets, and apparel. In many of their houses, are great posts of marble after the manner of hour building. They found there, the foundations of certain old towers ruinated: And one especially with xviii steers ascending to it, after the manner of solemn temples. They marveled greatly at hour ships and manner of sailing. At the first, they would admit no strangers: but shortly after, received them gently. Their chief ruler (whom hour men supposed to be a priest) led them up to the top of the tower, where they erected a banner and addicted the Island to the dominion of the king of Castyle, naming it Sancta Crux, 
Cozumella named Sancta Crux.  because they entered into the same in the nonce of may being then the feast of the holy cross. They say that it was called Cozumella of king Cozumellaus, whose ancestors were the first that inhabited the Island. 
Idols like bears.  In the tower, they found many chambers furnished with Images, made both of earth and marble to the similitude of bears. These they call upon with a howling and lamentable song, 
Idolatry.  perfuming them with sweet odours, and other wise honouring them as their domestical gods They are also circumcised. The king was in fair apparel made of gossampine cotton curiously wrought. He was lame on the one foot by reason that as he once exercised himself in swiming, a devouring fish called Tuberon, bit of all the toes, 
Gentle people.  of one of his feet. He entreated hour men very friendly and made them great chiere. After they had been here three days, they departed. And sailing still toward the West, they espied great mountains a far of. But as they drew near, they perceived it to be the Island of jucatana being distant from Cozumella only five miles. 
jucatana but five miles from Cozume●la.  Directing therefore their course toward the south side of jucatana, they compassed it on that side which lieth nearest to the supposed continent: Yet could they not sail round about it by reason of the multitude of rocks, shallow places, and shelves of sand. Then Alaminus the pilot turned his sails to the North side whereof he had better knowledge. Thus at the length, they came to the town Campeebium and king Lazarus with whom they had been that attempted the first viage the year before. At the first, they were gently received, and required to resort to the town. But shortly after, 
The Barbarians make resistance.  they repented that they had bidden them: and there upon willed them to stay about a stones cast from the town, and to proceed no further.  
When hour men desired that they might make provision for fresh water before their departure, they assigned them to a certain well which they had left behind them. declaring further, that it should be lawful for them to take water there or else no where. Hour men rested that night in the field adjoining to the well. The which thing the Barbarians suspecting, assembled an army of three thousand men, and encamped not far from them. Both parts passed away the night without sleep. They fearing least hour men should break into the town: And hour men, lest the Barbarians should invade them soodenly, on the one part with trumpets, and on the other side with the noise of timbrels kept them still waking that were disposed to sleep, At the spring of the day, the Barbarians approached to hour men's camp & called for th'interpreters of Cuba, whose language is much agreeable unto theirs. They had devised to light a torch of frankincense and to place the same between both th'armies to th'intent that if hour men did not departed before the torch were consumed, to stand to their peril. 
A conflict,  The torch was wasted and the matter came to hand strokes. They slew only one of hour men with an arrow because his target failed him. But many were wounded. After this conflict, hour men resorted to their ordinance which they had planted near unto the well. When they had discharged certain pecces, the Barbarians fled back into the town. Hour men were of fierce and greedy courage to have pursued them, but that Grisalua the governor would not suffer them. From thence they proceeded to the last end of jucatana, 
The length of Iuca●ana.  which they found to reach more than two hundredth miles from the East to the West. Here they found a commodious haven and named it Portus desideratus. From hence they sailed to other lands, and came to the region next to jucatana Westward, which they doubt whether it be an Island or part of the firm land: but think it rather to be annexed to the continent In this there is a gulf which they suppose to be incoompased with both the lands. But of this, there is no certainty. Thinhabitantes call this region Caluacam or otherwise Oloan. 
The region of Caluacam, or Oloan.  They found here also a great river which by his violente course and fall, driveth fresh water two miles into the sea. This they called Grisalua after the name of the governor. 
The river Grisalua.  The barbarians marueiling at the huge greatness and moving of hour ships, came swarming the banks on both sides the river, to the number of six thousand men armed with targets and breast plates of gold, 
Targets and breast plates of gold.  bows and arrows, broad swords of heavy wood, and long iavelens hardened at the ends with fire: Thus standing in battle ray to defend their coostes, and with proud countenances forbidding hour men to come aland. Both parties watched all that night in arms. In the dawn of the day, our men espied about a hundredth Canoas' (which we have said to be their boats) full of armed men. Here also the language of th'interpreters of Cuba agreed well enough with there's. When they had admitted the peace proffered them by th'interpreters, all the Canoas' stayed except one which approached toward the ships. A certain ruler that was in this Canoa, demanded of hour men what they sought in other men's lands. They answered, gold. And that, for permutation of other ware, and not of gift or violently. The Canoa returned and the ruler certified the king hereof, who came gladly to the ships. When he had saluted the governor, he called his chamberlain unto him, commanding him to bring his armure and other ornaments of gold wherewith he armed Crisalua from the top of the head to the soul of the foot: 
armour of gold.  In so much that, what so ever any man of arms armed at all parts, is among us accustomed to wear of Iren or steel when he cometh in to the field, 
expert artificers.  all such kind of furnitures made of gold and wrought with wonderful art, the king gave to the governor. He recompensed him with vestures of sick, cloth, linen, and other of hour things▪ In the beginning of this jucatana, when they sailed to Cozumella, they chanced upon a Canoa of fisher men to the number of nine, fishing with hooks of gold. 
fish hooks of gold.  They took them all prisoners. One of them was known to this king, who promised the day following to send the governor as much gold for his ransom as the man himself weighed. But the governor denied that he could release him without the consent of his fellows: And therefore kept him still to prove what he could further know of him. Departing from hence and sailing still westward, they found a great gulf in the which three smaule Islands were situate. Of these, 
The Islands of Sacrifice.  they went to the bigest. But oh abominable cruelty: oh most corrupted minds of men, and devilish impiety? Let every godly man close the mouth of his stomach lest he be disturbed. 
Children sacrified to Idols.  They offer young children of both kinds to their Idols of marble and earth. among their Idols of marble, 
Their Idols of marble.  there standeth a lion having a hole through the neck, into the which they pour the blood of the miserable sacrifice, that it may from thence run down into a sink of marble. Let us now declare with what ceremonies they sacrifice the blood of these poor wretches. They cut not their throats, but open the very breasts of these silly souls and take owte their hearts yet panting, with the hot blood whereof, they anoint the lips of their Idols, and suffer the residue to fall into the sink. This done, they burn the heart and bowels, supposing the smoke thereof to be acceptable to their gods. Of their Idols, one is made to the shape of a man, bowing down his head and looking toward the sink of blood, as it were accepting the offering of the slain sacrifice. They eat the flesh of the arms, thighs, and legs, especially when they sacrifice an enemy taken in the wars. They found a stream of congealed blood as though it had run from a bouchery. For this my 〈◊〉 purpose, they bring these wretches from the next Islands. They saw also innumerable heads, and trunks of bodies thus mangled, beside many other yet remaining hole and covered with certain mats. All the tracks of these regions abound with gold and precious stones. 
Gold and precious stones.  One of hour men wandering in the Island, chanced to find two water pots of alabaster artifycially wrought and full of little stones of divers colours. They say also that they found a stone of the value of two thousand Castilans of gold, 
A stone of great price.  which they sent to the governor. This Island they named the Island of sacrifice. Th'inhabitants are circumcised. There are also other Islands sytuate about this Coluacana, or Caluacam, the which are inhabited only with women living without the coompanye of men after the manner of the Amazons. 
Islands of women.  But they that ponder the matter more wisely, think them rather to be certain women which have vowed chastity and professed a solitary life as the nuns do with us, or as the virgins called Vestales or Bonae Deae, were accustomed to do among the gentiles in old tyme. At certain times of the year, men of the other Islands resort unto them. But not for th'intent of generation, but moved with pity to help them to dress their gardens and till their ground. The report goeth likewise that there are other Islands of corrupt women to whom men resort for carnal copulation: And that they cut of one of the paps of their women children lest it should hinder their shooting. Also that they keep only the women children and send away the men children. our men therefore drew near to the shore of Colluacana where they quietly exercised merchandise with thinhabitants. The king gave them a great pot of gold: 
Gold.  Also bracelets, chains, brouches, with many other jewels, and all of gold. Hour men again on the other part satisfied him with such stuff as they had done other before. Here would they gladly have planted a new colony or habitation, but that the governor would not permit them, whereat they gruged not a little. The houses and other edifyes of this province, are builded like unto towers. 
houses like towers.  It hath also xu great towns in it. 
xv. great towns in the prou●nce of Col●ua●ana.  Of these they affirm that they have seen sum consisting of more than twenty thousand houses, 
Towns of x●. thousand house's.  not joining together, but desevered with courts and gardens. They have also certain large market places encompased with walls, and streets well paved. Likewise furnaces and ovens made of lime and brick. Furthermore all sorts of handy crafts men & very cunning artificers. This kings name was Potanchanus: & the region is called Palmaria. 
The region of Palmaria.  The town where the king keepeth his court, containeth xu thousand houses. When they receive any strangers and make a league of friendship with them, they are accustomed with a knife made of a sharp stone, to let themselves blood in the tongue, 
A token of friendship.  hand, arm, or sum other part of the body: And this even in the sight of them whom they admit to friendship, in token that they are ready to shed their blood in their friends causes. Their priests profess a virtuous life, 
priests.  and live unmarried. What it is to have to do with women, no man knoweth before he be married. Fornication and adultery (which seld chance among them) they count abomination. The women are of marvelous chastity. 
Chastity.  Eurey noble man after that he have had one wife, may have as many concubines as him lysteth. But a married woman taken in adultery, 
The puny●hement of adultery.  is sold of her husband. But this only to the prince: at whose hands it shall be lawful for her kinsfolks to redeem her. It is not lawful for such as are not married, 
Marriage is honoured.  to sit at the same table with them that are married, or to eat of the same dish or drink of the same cup. In the month of August and September, they abstain xxxv days not only from flesh whereof they have great plenty, 
Fasting.  but also from fish and all other things that live by blood: And during these days, live only with herbs and fruits. They reckon twenty days to the month, and twenty months to the year. Hour men consumed certain days here very pleasantly. When they departed, coasting still by the same shore, they came to an other king whom they named Ouandus. 
king Ouandus.  When he had intelligence that hour men desired gold, he brought forth certain plates of molten gold. But when the governor signified unto him by thinterpreters that he desired great plenty of that metal, the day following he brought him a man's Image of gold being a cubit in length: Also a fan of gold, 
Idols, jewels, and ouches of gold.  and an Idol of one of his domestical gods of curious woorkemanshyppe. Likewise garlands of stones of sundry colours, with many breast plats, brooches, and other kinds of ornaments, and all of gold. He gave him furthermore abundance of delicate meats well salted and powdered with spices. When he had required hour men to come aland, he commanded his servants with all speed to prepare a great multitude of branches of trees and to wait upon hour men to his palace. As they went thus in order, sum behind and sum before on both sides, they seemed so to shadow hour men with the bouwes as though they had gone in a continual arbour. The king himself having a sceptre in his hand, did set them in their array, and sometime strike such as were negligent in bearing their bouwes. They showed themselves obedient in all things, and with grave countenance, humbled themselves to receive his stripes. When he was demanded where he had such plenty of gold, 
Gold in mountains and rivers  he pointed with his finger to the next mountains, and to the rivers descending from the same. They are so accustomed to the rivers and exercised in swimming, 
Their manner of gathering gold.  that it is all one to them to li●e in the water and on the land. When they desire to gather gold, they plunge themselves in the rivers and bring from the bottom thereof, both their hands full of sand, which syfting from hand to hand, they gather out the grains of gold. And by this means in the space of two hours, they fill a reed as big as a man's finger. Of the sweet savours of these lands, 
Sweet savours.  many things might be spoken, the which because they make rather to theffeminating of the minds of men, then for any necessary purpose, I have thought best to omit them. The king also gave the governor a young virgin of twelve years of age, adorned with rich and fair jewels. 
A stone of great price.  Of the stones which he had of this king, one was valued at two thousand Castellans of gold. Thus at the length they departed from this king, laden with gold and precious stones. Crisalua the governor, sent one of the caravels to his uncle Diego Velasquen governor of the Island of Cuba, with messengers to deliver him the gold, jewels, and other ornaments. The residue in the mean time still followed the tract toward the West. One of them in the which Francis Montegius the under governor was carried, sailed hard by the shore: and the other two kept aloof within prospect of the land. Th'inhabitants of these coasts also, no less marvelling at the ships than did the other, came with twelve Canoas' to Montegius, desiring him by th'interpreters to come aland, promising in the name of their king, that he should be honourably entertained. But Montegious answered that he could not assent to their request because his companions were so far from him. Yet did he give them certain of hour things strange unto them, and thanks for their gentleness. Shortly after espying a great town they directed their course thither. the inhabitauntes prohibited them to come aland, and came forth against them with bows & quivers full of arrows, broad swords made of heavy wood, and javelens hardened at the end with fire. They shot at hour men a far of: And hour men discharged certain pieces of ordinance against them. The Barbarians astonysshed at the noise of the guns, fled amain, and desired peace. Here hour men's victuals began to fail them, and their ships were bruised with long voyages. Having therefore found and done these things whereof we have spoken, Crisalua returned to the Island of Fernandina well contented, 
Other viages from Cuba or Fernandina.  but so were not his companions. We must now divert somewhat from this matter, and speak of an other navigation. And from thence will we return to these lands which hour men have found. So it is therefore, that Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island of Fernandina, about the same time that he had sent forth this navy of four caravels, he prepared an other navigation of only one caravel and one brygantine with forty and five men. These exercised violent hands against thinhabitants of those regions where they arrived, thinking that they might forcibly draw them to the digging of gold because they were Caffranite Idolaters and circumcised.  
There are at the sea side not far from the supposed continent, 
Many Iland● between Cuba and the firm land.  many little Islands of most fortunate and fruitful soil, whereof three are thus named: Guanapan, Guanguan, and Quitilla. Owte of one of these (which they named Sancta Marina) they violently carried away three hundredth men and women which they thrust into the caravel and returned immediately to Fernardina, leaving the brigantine with xxv of their fellows to th'intent to hunt for more men. The haven where the caravel first arrived, is called Carenas, being distant from the angle of Cuba and the chief city of Sanctiago, 
Sanctiago the chief city of Cuba.  two hundredth and fifty miles. For this Island of Cuba, is very long, reaching in length from the East to the West, and situate directly under the circle called Tropicus Cancri as we have said before. Now shall you hear how fortune sought the revenge of these poor wretches. Therefore as their keepers went aland and few remained in the Caravel, they perceiving occasion ministered where by they might recover their liberty, soodeynely snatched up out men's weapons and slew six of them which yet remained in the Caravel, while the residue leapt into the sea. 
The Barba●ians slay the Spaniards with their own weapons.  And by this means the Barbarians possessed the caravel which they had soon learned to rule, and thus returned to their own countries. But they sailed first to the next Island where they burnt the Caravel and carried away the weapons with them. From hence they conveyed themselves to their own countries with the Canoas' of this Island. Hear in like manner they privily assailed them that were left with the brigantyne, and slew many of them also. The residue that escaped, fled to the brigantine where they bewailed their fellows deaths and counted their own escape a victory. On the shore not far from the place where they suffered this misfortune, there is a tree, in the top whereof they set up a cross, and graved this inscription in the bark of the tree: Vannuis Aldarieci. There is a river named Darien, on the bank whereof standeth the chief city of the supposed continent. 
The chief city of the supposed continent.  The governor therefore having intelligence hereof, sent with all speed two ships of war well furnished, to the aid of them that were left. But they were wise to late. Yet following the view of the cross, they came to the shore and red the letters graven on the tree, but durst not attempt fortune. Thus with all their hardy soldiers departing from hence with despair, they sailed to the next Island, out of the which they carried away by violence five hundredth men and women, supposing likewise that they might lawfully so do because they were Idolaters and circumcised. But the like chance happened unto them when they landed at Fernandina. For the Barbarians espying opportunity, set upon the Spaniards in one of the ships with their own weapons and slew their keepers. 
The spaniards are s●ayne again with their own weapons.  The residue that escaped, casting themselves into the sea, swam to the next caravel, and with their fellows assailed the caravel that was taken from them. This conflict was so sharp, that for the space of four hours, it was doubtful whether part should obtain the victory. The Barbarians both men and women fought very fiercely, aswell to recover their liberty, as also to hold fast the pray which they had gotten. But in fine, the spaniards had the upper hand by reason they were more expert in handling of their weapons and ruling of their caravel. The Barbarians being thus overcome, 
The barbarians are slain and pu● to flight.  leapt into the sea: but the spaniards took them again with the ship boats. About a hundredth of the Barbarians perished, being partly drowned and partly slain with the sword: And but few of the spaniards. These things thus pacified, the residue of the Barbarians were carried to the town of Sanctiago and condemned to labour in the gold mines. Shortly after they made owte a new viage to an other of the Islands, 
another viage.  which lie there about so thick, that they commonly call the number of them Archipelagus, 
Archipelagus.  as they in hour sea of jonicum are called Symplegades. 
A multitude of Islands.  Here hour men were cruelly handled: and as many of them as came aland either slain or wounded. This Island they named Florida, because they arrived there on Easter day which the spaniards call the flourishing day of the resurrection. They say also that in this tract they saw xxvi Islands which Colonus had overpassed: 
xxvi. Islands about hispaniola & Cuba.  And the same so to lie about Hispaniola & Cuba, as though they warded them from the fury of the Ocean. In many of these they found native gold of like goodness to that which is found in Granatum. Thinhabitantes also wear many jewels, and have many Images of their domestical gods made both of gold artificially wrought and also of wood guilded. 
Images of gold.  Francis Cheregatus browght one of their Idols with him, whereby may be considered of what wit and aptness they are. It is a marvelous thing to see what manner of razors they have, 
Razors of stone.  made of certain yellow stones clear & transparent like unto Crystal. With these they shave and carve as though they were made of fine steel. When the edges are blunt with long exercise, they sharpen them not with a whetstone, or powder, or any other stone, but temper them only with water. They have also a thousand kinds of instruments or tools and such other things of fine devise, 
Instruments and tools.  which were to long to rehearse. Let us therefore return from whence we have digressed, as to Cozumella, jucatana, Colluacana or Olloa, being all lands lately found, and so rich fruitful and pleasant, that they may in manner be compared to the earthly paradise. 
Lands like unto the earthly paradise.  Therefore, after that it was known to hour men of how great moment these trattes were, the spaniards which inhabited the Island of Cuba Anunctus being the governor of the Island furnished a new navy of ten caravels and five hundredth men, 
another viage of ten Caravels and a. hundredth men.  with two smaule brigantines, as it wear in the stead of light horsemen or forerunners whose aid they might use as scouts to search the ways for danger of rocks and shallow sands or shelves. They shipped also certain horses, 
horses and mares.  as five stoned horses and xvi mares apt for the wars. For their general governor and Admiral of the navy, they elected Fernando Cortesius who at that time was the chief ruler of the city of Sanctiago. 
Fernando Cortesius.  For under captains, they appointed Alfons Portucarerius, Francis Montegius, Alfons Auila, Aluerado Spatense john Velasquen, & Diegus Ordassus. They still followed the same wind from the last angle of Cuba toward the west. As soon as Francis Fernandes of Corduba, and then john Grisalua came within prospect of the Island of Sacrifices (whereof we have made mention before) soodenly a tempest of contrary wind prohibited them to take land and drowe them backward to Cozumella lying on the East side of jucatana. 
The Island of Cozumella.  This Island hath only one haven named saint john's port. And hath in it, only six towns. Also none other water then in wells and cisterns, because it lacketh rivers and springs by reason it is plain, containing only xlv miles in circuit. At the coming of hour men, thinhabitants fled to the thick woods, & forsook their towns for fear. Hour men entered into their houses where they found plenty of victuals and many ornaments pertaining to the furnishing of their houses, as hangings and carpets of divers colours, sheets also of gossampine cotton (which they call Amaccas) and much apparel. 
Carpets and sheets.  They have furthermore innumerable books, 
Innumerable books.  of the which with many other things sent to hour new Emperor, we will speak more largely hereafter. The soldiers wandered about the Island & view allthings diligently, keeping themselves still in battle ray lest they might be suddenly invaded. They found but a few of thinhabitants and only one woman in their company. By th'interpreters of Cuba and other which the Spaniards took first from jucatana, they persuaded the woman to call the kings that were absent. They came gladly & made a league of friendship with hour men, whereby they were restored to their houses and a great part of their stuff. They are circumcised idolaters, 
Circumcised Idolaters.  and sacrifice children of both kinds to their Zemes, which are the Images of their familiar and domestical spirits which they honour as gods. When I inquired of Alaminus the pilot, also of Frances Montegius and Portucarerius, from whence they had the children they offered in sacrifice, 
They Sacrifice Children  they answered that they bowght them in the Islands theraboute by exchange for gold and other of their trafycke. For in all this so large a space of land, the devilish anxiety for the desire of wicked money, hath not yet oppressed thinhabitants. They say the same also of the Islands lately found, whereof two are named Destam and Sestam, 
The Islands of Dis●am & Sestam.  whose inhabitants go naked: and for scarenesse of children, sacrifice dogs which they nourish aswell for that purpose as also to eat as we do coneyes. These dogs are dumb and can not bark, 
Sacrifice of dogs.  having snowtes like unto foxes. Such as they destinate to eat, they geld while they are whelps, whereby they wax very fat in the space of four months. They reserve all the bitches for increase, and but few dogs. Hour men dissuaded them from these superstitions, declaring how they were abominable and detested of god. They were soon persuaded and desired a law which they might follow. 
They are soon persuaded to hour religion.  Hour men therefore declared unto them that there was only one god which made heaven & earth, the giver of all good things, being of one incomprehensible substance under triplicity of person. As soon as they hard these words, they broke their Zemes, and pared, scraped, and washed the pavements and walls of their temples. Hour men gave them a painted picture of the blessed virgin which they placed reverently in their temple, 
The picture of the blessed virgin  and above it a cross to be honoured in the remembrance of god and man and the salvation of mankind. They erected also an other great cross of wood in the top of the temple, whither they oftentimes resort together to honour the Image of the virgin. Thinhabitantes signified by th'interpreters that in the Island of jucatana not far from them, there were seven Christians captives which in time past were driven thither by tempest. The Island of Cozumella, is only five miles distant from jucatana. The governor Cort●si●s being advertised hereof, 
another viage  furnished two. Caravels with fifty men, willing them incontinent to direct their voyage thither & to make search for these men. They took with them three interpreters of Cozumella (whose language agreeth with theirs with let●ers to the Christians if any might be found. He further declared unto them how goodly a matter they should bring to pass if they could bring away any of them. For he no ways doubted but that by their information, he should be fully certified of the commodities of all those tracts, and the manners of thinhabitants. Thus they departed with commandment to return within the space of six days. But when they had remained there now viii days, and hard no word of their Cozumellane interpreters whom they had sent aland with the message and letters, hour men returned to Cozumella without them, suspecting that they were other slain or detained. And where as the hole navy was now determined to departed from Cozumella but that they were hindered by contrary wind, they suddenly espied toward the west a Canoa coming from jucatana, and in it, one of the Christian captives (named Hieronimus Aquillaris) who had lived seven years in that Island. 
Aquillaris vii years captive in the Island of jucatana.  With what joy they embraced the one the other, the chance may declare. They were no less desirous to hear, than he to tell of the misfortune which befell to him and his companions. And here it shall not be greatly from my purpose briefly to rehearse how the thing chanced. In my Decades I have made mention of a certain noble man named Valdivia, 
Valdivia.  whom the spaniards which inhabited Dariena in the supposed continente of the gulf of Vraba, sent to the Island of Hispaniola to Colonus the Admiral and viceroy with the residue of the Senate and counsel there (to whom pertaineth the redress and ordering of all things in these new lands) to signify unto them in what extreme necessity and penury they lived. Unhappy Valdivia therefore, 
The shipwreck of Ualdivis.  taking this matter in hand in an evil hour, was with a sudden and violent whirlwind, driven upon certain quicksands in the prospect of the Island of jamaica, lying on the South side of Hispaniola and Cuba. These blind and swallowing sands, the Spaniards call vipers: 
The quick sands called vipers.  And that by good reason, because in them many ships are entangled, as the lycertes are implycate in the tails of the vipers. While the caravel thus wrestled with the water, it was so burst in sunder, that Valdivia with thirty of his fellows, could scarcely with much difficulty descend into the ship boat: where, without ●ers, and without sails, they were carried away by the violence of the water. For (as we have said before in hour Decades) the seas do run there continually with a violent course toward the West. 
The course of the sea toward the west.  They wandered thus xiii days not knowing whither they went nor yet finding any thing to eat. Famen consumed seven of them which were cast in the sea to feed the fishes. The residue likewise in manner consumed by famen and falling from one calamity into an other, were driven to jucatana and fell into the hands of a cruel king who slew Valdivia the governor with certain of his fellows. 
Ualdivia is sacrificed to Idols.  And when he had first sacrificed them to his Zemes, shortly after he eat them with his friends of that conspiracy. For they eat only their enemies and strangers: And do otherwise abstain from man's flesh. In this mean time, while Hieronimus Aqullraris with six of his fellows were reserved to be sacrificed the third day, 
how Aquillaris escaped  they brook their bands, escaped the hands of that cruel tyrant, and fled to an other king being his enemy, who received them, yet only as bondmen. It is a strange thing to hear of the mother of this Aquillaris. For as soon as she hard that her son was faulen into the hands of the nations that eat man's flesh, she fell mad incontinent: So that when so ever after, she saw any meat roasting at the fire, or only ready spitted to lay to the fire, she ceased not to cry out in this manner. O me most wretched mother: Behold the members of my son. But to return to hour purpose. When Aquillaris had now received the governors letter sent by the Cozumellane messengers, he declared to the king his master (whose name was Taxmarus) what was their errant thither, 
king Taxmarus.  and wherefore they were sent: using in the mean time many large discourses in expressing the great power and magnificence of their king who had of late arrived in those coasts. Also of their humanity and gentleness toward their friends and such as submitted themselves to them, and again their rigour and fierceness against such as stoobernly either contemned them or denied their requests. With these words he brought Taxmarus into such fear, that the master was now fain to desire his servant so to handle the matter that they might quietly enter into his dominion as his friends and not as his enemies. Aquillaris promised in their behalf that they should not only come in peace, but also to aid him against his enemies if need should so require. whereupon he dismissed Aquillaris and with him three of his familiars and companions. Thus they sailed together from Cozumella to jueatana to the river which they had found before in the first viage thither by the governance of Alaminus the pilot. They found the mouth of the river stopped with sand, 
The mouth of a river sto●ped with sand.  as we read of the river of Nilus in Egipte when the winds (called Etesun) blow in summer and especially in the canicular days. Therefore where as they could not enter into them river with the biggest vessels (although it be otherwise apt to receive great ships) the governor caused two hundredth men to be set aland with the brigantynes and ship boats: willing Aquillaris to offer peace to thinhabitants. They demanded what hour men required. Aquillaris answered, victuals. There was a long space of sand by the side of the town, whither they willed them to resort, promising to bring them victuals thither the day following. 
Turkey hens.  Hour men went and they came according to their promiss and brought with them eight of their hens being as big as peacocks, of brownyshe colour, and not inferior to peacocks in pleasant taste. They brought also as much bread made of Maizium (which is a grain not much unlike unto panyke) as would scarcely serve ten hungry men: And here with desired them to departed. But when they perceived that hour men made no haste away, immediately there came a great coompanye of armed men toward them demanding what they had to do thus to wander in other men's lands. our men made answer by Aquillaris, that they desired peace, victuals, and gold for exchange of other things. They answered again, that they would neither peace nor war with them. But threatened them to avoid the land except they would be destroyed every man. Hour men said that they would not depart without sufficient victuals to maintain their soldiers.  
They appointed the day following to bring them more victuals: but they brook promise. Yet perceiving the second day that hour men were encamped on the sand and had reposed there that night, they brought them as much more victuals, and commanded them in the name of their king to depart. Hour men said that they were desirous to see the town, and to have yet more store of victuals. The Barbarians denied their request, and therewith departed whispering and muttering among themselves. In the mean time hour men were still so oppressed with hunger that they were enforced to seek for meat. The governor therefore sent his under captains to land with a hundredth and fifty men. 
A conflict.  As they went dispersed in divers companies about the villages of the country, the Barbarians met with one of their bands, and put them to great distress. But when their fellows being not far from them, hard the noise of their alarum, they came with all possible haste to their rescue. The governor on the other side, placing his ordinance in the brygantines and ship boats, approached to the shore with the residue of his soldiers. The Barbarians likewise, being ready furnished to the battle, came running to the sea side to disturb them that they should not come aland: And with their arrows, wounded many a far of unprepared. The governor discharged about twenty pieces of ordinance against them: 
The Barbarians are put to flight.  With the slaughter and terrible thunder whereof, & with the flame of fire and smell of brimstone, they were so astonished and put to such fear, that they fled and disparkled like wild beasts: whom hour men pursuing, entered into the town which thinhabitants forfooke in manner for fear of their own men whom they saw so dismayed. On the bank of this river there is a town of such portentous bigness as I dare not speak. 
The great town of Postanchana or Uictoria.  But Alaminus the pilot, saith that it containeth in circuit five hundredth miles, and that it consisteth of xxv thousand houses. 
A town of xxv. thou●and houses.  Sume make it somewhat less: But they all agree that it is exceeding great and notable. The houses are divided with gardens, and are builded of lime and stone very artificially and of cunning workmanship. To their hauls, chambers, parlours, or other places of habitation, they ascend by ten or twelve steers: And have certain spaces between every house: so that it is not lawful for any to lad his neighbour's walls with rafters or beams. Their houses are sep●rate one from an other by the space of three houses: And are for the more part covered with reed and thetche: And many also with slate or other stone. The barbarians themselves confessed that they were that day forty thousand men at the battle, which were vanquished of a few by reason of the new and unknown kind of fight with guns and horses. 
Guns and horses.  For the governor had unbarked xvi horses which were also at the battle, and so fiercely assailed the Barbarians on the backhalf, that they broke their array and scattered them as it had been flocks of sheep, overthrowing, wounding, and killing them on every side. Which thing th● silly wretches so imputed to a miracle, that they had not the power to occupy their weapons. For whereas before they had never seen any horses, they thought that the man on horseback and the horse, had been all one beast, 
The man & the horse. thought to be one beast.  as the antiquity did fable of the monster Centaurus. 
Centaurus.  our men possessed the town xxii days where they made good cheer under covert, while the owners of the houses lay under the firmament and durst not assail hour men who had placed themselves in the strongest part of the town, where sum kept continual watch (lest the Barbarians should soodenly invade them) while other gave themselves to rest and sleep. Thinhabitantes call this town Potanchana: But hour men for the victory which they obtained here, named it Victoria. It is a marvelous thing to consider the greatness, magnificence and fineness of the building of certain palaces they have in the country to the which they resort sometimes for their solace and pastime. 
●alaices of marvelous bygnes and ●el builded.  These are curiously builded with many pleasant devices, as galleries, solars, t●rrettes, portals, gutters with chambers boarded after the manner of hour waynscotte and well flowered. Four of our spaniards went into one of them of such greatness, that they wandered in the same for the space of four hours before they could find the way out. At the length by th'interpreters and certain captives hour men sent for the king and such rulers as were next under him in authority, willing them to submit themselves and to come into the town unarmed. giving the messengers further in commandment to certify them that in their so doing, they would comen with them as concerning conditions of peace, and restore them their town. They came gladly, and entered every man into his own house upon condition that they should ever thereafter abstain from such ceremonies and horrible sacrifices of man's flesh to devils the mortal enemies to mankind, whose Images they honoured. And to direct the eyes of their minds to Christ hour god the maker of heaven and earth, 
They receive hour religion.  who was borne into this world of a virgin, and suffered death on the cross for the redemption of mankind. And finally to profess themselves subjects to the great Christian king of Spain. They promised both, and were instructed as far as the shortness of time would permit. Being thus restored, they recompensed hour men with many rewards: Supposing such men to be sent from heaven, which being so few in number, durst attempt battle against so great a multitude. They gave hour men also certain gold and twenty slaves. Departing therefore from hence, and coasting still along by the same shore, they came again to the gulf which Alaminus the pilot found before under Grisalua. This they named Bian Sancti johannis, that is, Saint john's gulf: For Bian in the Spanish tongue signifieth a gulf. Here thinhabitants resorted to them peaceably. About a mile from the shore, was a town of a thousand and five hundredth houses situate upon a hill. 
A town of a thousand & five hundred houses,  They proffered hour men half the town if they would dwell with them for ever. This perhaps they did the rather either fearing th'exemple of thinhabitants of Potan●hana, the fame whereof might have come to their ears, or else hoping that under the shadow of such valiant men, they might obtain aid and succour against their enemies and borderers. For (as I have said before) they destroy one an other with continual war for the desire to enlarge their dominions. Hour men refused perpetual habitation, and accepted their friendly proffer for a tyme. As they came aland, the people followed them on every side with bouwes in their hands which they held over hour men's heads to defend them from the rain as though they had walked in a continual arbour. Here they encamped. And lest the residue left in the ships, should in the mean time wax slothefull with Idleness, the governor gave commandment to Alaminus the pilot and Francis Montegius to search the west parts of that land, while he relieved the wearied soldiers and healed such as were wounded. To them that went forward on this viage, he assigned two brigantines with fifty men. 
another usage of two brygantines & fifty men.  Unto this gulf, the course of the water was gentle enough and moderate. 
where the sea runneth swiftly from the East to the West.  But when they had sailed a little further toward the West, they found the sea running with so swift a course as if it were a great river falling from the tops of high mountains: In so much that in a short space of time it carried them fifty miles from their fellows. When they were now entered into this violent stream of the water, 
A conflict between the waters coming from the west and from the south.  they saw on their left hand a large plain sea which met with the course of the other waters falling from the west. And like as two great rivers that run contrary ways, make a vehement conflict where they meet, so seemed the water's coming from the south to resist these waters as enemies that had entered into the right or possession of an other. On the contrary part, they saw the land reaching far both on the left hand and on the right. In this strife between the waters, they were so tossed on both sides and entangled with whirlpools, 
A dangerous and painful viage.  that they long wrestled with out hope of life. At the length with much difficulty, turning the stems or forpartes of their ships against the stream from whence they came, and labouring all that they might with their oars and sails, they could scarcely overcoome the rage of the water: In so much that where as they thought that they had in one night sailed two miles, they found that they were driven back four miles. Yet at the length with god's help, they overcame this daungerours conflict. They spent xxii days in this little space of sea: And when they were now returned to their fellows, declared unto them that that end was the land of Colluacana which they adjudged to be part of the supposed continent. 
The land of Colluacana.  The land which they saw a far of before their face, they suppose either to be annexed to hour continent, or to be joined to the large North regions called Baccalaos, 
The land of Baccaleos or Baccal●arum  whereof we have made mention in our Decades in the viage of Sebastian Cabote. This matter is yet doubtful. But we trust it shall once be better known. While Alaminus and Montegius searched these secrets, the king of the province (whose name was Multoxumam) sent hour men by one of his chief officers (being also his lieutenant of the said town) many rich and goodly presents of gold, silver, and precious stones, 
Rich presents of gold and precious sleeves.  set and wrought after a marvelous strange devise and with no less cunning woorkemanshyp. Here they determined to send messengiers to hour new Emperor to know his pleasure that they might in this province plan● a new colony or habitation. And this did they without thadvise of Diegus Velasquen the governor of the Island of Cuba or Fernandina, who first sent them forth with commandment to return again after they had searched these regions and obtained plenty of gold. While they consulted hereof, they were of divers opinions. But the most part alleged that in this case it was not requisite to make the governor of their counsel. Forasmuch as the matter should be referred to a higher judge, as to the king of Spain himself. When they were thus agreed, they received victuals of the gentle king of the province, and assigned the place of their colony twelve miles from the said town, in a fruitful and wholesome soil. 
A new colony.  For their general governor, they elected Cortesius the governor of the navy, against his will as sum say. For other magistrates to govern the city which they intended to build he choose Portu●arerius and Montegius of whom we have made mention before. 
This Cortesius hath written a book of these things  They chose also certain messengiers to send to the king by the conduction of Alaminus the pilot. Furthermore, four of the princes of this province offered themselves willingly to go with hour men into Spain to th'intent to see hour lands and that king whose power is so great and whose authority reacheth so far. They brought likewise two women with them, which served & obeyed them in all things after the manner of their country. The people of this nation is of brown or yelowyshe colour. Both the men and the women have pendants of gold and precious stones hanging at their ears. The men also, boor their nether lips full of holes from the uppermost part of the lip even unto the nethermost part of the gum. 
They wear rings and plates at their lips.  At these they hang certain rings and plates of gold and silver fastened to a smaule and thin plate lying within between the lip and the gum. At the bigest hole in the midst of the lip, there hangeth a round plate of silver as broad as the coin called a Corolyne, and as thick as a man's finger. I do not remember that ever I saw any thing that seemed more filthy in mine eye. 
The divers fantasies of men.  Yet do they think that there is nothing more comely under the circle of the moon. Whereby we may see how vainly mankind wandereth in his own blindness. The Ethiopian thinketh the black colour to be fairer than the white: And the white man thinketh otherwise. They that are pouled, think that more decent then to wear a bush and they that wear beards, judge it a deformity to be shaven. As appetite therefore moveth, and not as reason persuadeth, men run after vanities: And every province is ruled by their ownesense, as writeth saint Jerome. From whence they have their gold, we have spoken sufficiently before. But as hour men marveled where they had their silver, 
Silver.  they showed them certain high mountains which are continually covered with snow saving that at certain ●ymes of the year, the only tops are seen hate because the snow is there molten by reason of the thick and warm ●loudes. The plains therefore, or mild, soft, and pleasant mountains seem to bring forth gold: And the rough craggy mountains with their could valleys, are the places wh●re silver is engendered. 
Note where go●d and silver are engendered.  They have also laton, whereof they make such maces and hammers as are used in the wars. 
I think this l●ton to ●e sum ky●de of pure copper▪ or else copper that holds gold. Fo● laton is an artificial me●a●, & hath no natural mine Their books  digging mattocks also, and spades: for they have neither Iren nor steel. But let us now speak of the presents sent into Spain to the king: and first of the books. These procurators therefore of the new colony of the province of Colluacana, among other their presents, brought also a great number of books, the leaves whereof are made of the inner rinds or barks of trees, thinner than either that of the elm or of the sallow. These they smear or anoint with the pitch of molten Bitumen, and while they be soft, extend them to what form them lysteth. When they be could and hard, they rub them over with a certain plaster. It is to be thought that they beat the plaster into fine flower, and so tempering it with sum binding moister, to make a crust therewith upon the leaves, whereon they write with any sharp instrument, and blot the same again with a sponge or sum such other thing, as merchant men and noble men's stewards are accustomed to do with their writing tables made of the wood of fig trees. The leaves of their books are not set in order after the manner of ours, but are extended many cubits in length. The matters which they writ, are contained in square table: Not lose, but so bound together with the tough and flexible clay called Bitumen, that they seem like wooden tables which had been under the hands of cunning bokebynders. Which way so ever the book lieth open, there are two leaves seen and two sides written, with as many lying hid under them, except the book be unfolded in length. For under one leaf there are many leaves joined together. The forms of their letters are nothing like unto ours. 
Their letters  But are much more crooked and entangled, like unto fyshehookes, knots, snares, stars, dise, files, and such other much like unto the Egyptian letters, and written in lines like unto ours. Here and there between the lines, are pictured the shapes of men & divers beasts: And especially the Images of kings and other noble men. 
what is contained in their books.  Whereby it is to be thought tha● in such books, the facts of their kings are conceived, as we see the like among us how hour printers express the sum of histories in pictures, that men may thereby be the more alured to buy such books. The coverings of their books are also artifycially wrought and painted. When they are shut, they seem to differre nothing from ours in form. In these books are furthermore comprehended their laws, rites of ceremonies and sacrifices, annotations of Astronomy, accounts, computations of times, with the manner of graffing, sowing, and other things pertaining to husbandry. They begin the year from the going down of the seven stars called Vergiliae or Pleiades: And count their months according to the moons. They name a month, Tona, of the moon. For in their language, they call the moon Tona, they reckon the days by the sons. Therefore as many days as they name, they say, so many sons. The son in their tongue, is called Tonati●o. They distribute the year (without any reason why) into twenty months: And the month into as many days. The temples which they frequent, 
Temple● richly adorned.  they adorn with golden hangings and other ornaments of gold and silver with precious stones intermixte. At the springe of the day, 
Prayer.  they perfume their temples with frankincense and make their prayers before they take in hand any other business. But oh horrible cruelty. For thinhabitants of all these tracts also, do sacrifice children to their Idols in like manner as we have said before. 
They sacrifice children & captives.  At such time as the seeds lie in the ground, and when the corn beginneth to show forth the ear, they destinate to their Zemes such bondmen as they have bought, or such captives as they have taken in the wars, which they sacrifice after that they have made them great chiere and decked them in precious apparel. Also before they sacrifice these poor wretches, 
A wrong way to heaven  they lead them about the town while all the people salute them humbly and reverently, affirming that in short space, they shallbe received into the coompanye of the gods. They honour their Zemes with an other sharp kind of devotion: For they let themselves blood, either in the tongue, 
Bloody gods  lips, ears legs, thighs, or breast, which they take in their hands and hurl it up toward heaven, so that with the fall thereof the pavement of the temple is all s●arcled with blood, whereby they think that their gods are well pleased. From the new colony (called Villa Ricca) nine miles distant, 
Villa Ricca.  there is a town of xu thousand houses, which thinhabitants call Cemobal, but hour men named it Sibylla. 
Sivilla Nova.  The king of this town had five men which he reserved to be sacrificed. Whom when hour men would have delivered, the king made humble request to them, saying that if they took away such men as he had consecrated to be offered to the gods, they should bring utter destruction to him and all his kingdom. 
The force of an owlde error.  For if hour sacrifices (said he) do cease, hour Zemes will take such displeasure with us that they will suffer hour corn, graffs, and fruits, to be consumed of worms, scorched with drought, destroyed with floods, or blasted with lightening. Hour men perceiving his ernestnesse herein, thought it best to choose the least evil, perceiving that it was yet no time to disquyes their minds, and therefore suffered them to exercise their accustomed ceremonies. And although their priests promise them immortal glory, eternal felicity, and perpetual conversation with the gods after the stormy days of this life, 
Their priests live chaste.  yet do they with heavy countenances give ear to their promises, and had rather be set at liberty. Their priests are named Quines in the plural number, and Quin in the singular. They lead a pure and chaste life: And are honoured of the people with fear and reverence. They make faggots of the bones of their enemies which they have taken in the wars, 
Faggots of bones.  and hang up the same at the feet of their Zemes, as tokens of the victories obtained by their favour. To these they add certain titles and superscriptions as testimonies of the same. This is strange and worthy to be noted, that when their children are a year old, the priests in their temples with devout ceremonies and murmuring words, pour water in form of a cross upon their heads with a cruet, whereby they seem to baptize them. 
A figure of baptism.  Neither do they as the jews and Turks, think their temples polluted if any of a strange religion be present at their sacrifices and other solemnities. We have now spoken suffycientely of their books, temples, and superstitions. Let us now therefore come to the other presents which were brought to the king. 
The presents sent into Spain to the king.  among these, there were two brood and round plates (which sum have named the Images of the son and moon) the one of silver and the other of gold in largeness and roundness much like to the stones of hand mills: 
Two Images of gold and silver.  yet but thin, and in manner both of one circumference, that is xxviii. spans in circuit.  
That of gold is of the weight of three thousand and viii hundredth Castellans, where as we have said before that a Castellane is a coin of gold which weigheth more than a Ducat by a trient, that is the third part of a pound. In the centre of this, was the Image of a king of half a cubit long, sitting in a throne and apparelled to the knee, like unto a maumette, with such countenance as hour painters are wont to paint fairies or spirits. About the Image, were the ●hapes of trees and flowers, so that it seemed to sit as though it had been in a field. The other of silver, was made to the same similitude, being also in manner of the same weight, and both of pure metal. They brought likewise certain grains of rude gold (that is, such as was never melted) about the bigness of fitches or the pulse called lintels in token of plenty of native gold. Also two chains of gold, 
Two cheine● of gold marvellously beset with precious stones and jewels.  whereof the one contained viii links in the which were set two hundredth threescore and two fair and clear red stones, and yet no rubies: furthermore, a hundreth fourscore and three green stones, and yet no emeralds. Nevertheless, these are in like estimation with them as the other are with us. At the edge of this chain, there hang xxvii golden bells, having between every of them, four jewels of precious stones enclosed in gold, at every of the which in like manner hang certain spangels of gold. The other chain consisteth only of four golden links, beset round about with a hundredth and two red stones, and a hundredth threescore and twelve green stones, with xxvi golden bells curiously wrought and placed in comely order. In the very midst of the chain, are ten great precious stones enclosed in gold, at the which also hang a hundreth golden pendants of cunning workmanship. 
Buskyns.  They brought furthermore twelve pair of leather huskynnes of divers colours, sum imbrothered with gold and sum with silver, with plates and jewels of gold and precious stones enclosed, and at every of them certain golden bells. Also certain miters beset with precious stones of diverse colours, 
miters.  among the which sum are blue like unto sapphires. Of crests, gerdles, and fans made of feathers, I wot not what I should say. 
how can we then ca●l them beastly or Barbarous.  But surely if ever the wits and inventions of men have deserved honour or commendation in such● arts, these seem most worthy to be had in admiration. I do not marvel at gold and precious stones. But am in manner astony●hed to see the woorkemanshyppe excel the substance. For I have with woondering eyes beheld a thousand forms and similitudes, of the which I am not able to write. 
If they had changed their gold for hour Iren, they had not so soon been subdued. quills.  And in my judgement, I never saw any thing whose beauty might so allure the eyes of men. As they marveled at the natural beauty of the feathers of hour peacocks and pheasants, so did we no less marvel at the artifycial beauty of such things as they make of feathers and quills impaled with gold. For I saw in many of their works, all manner of native colours even in the quills whereof they make such instruments. They brought also two helmets garnished with precious stones of a whiteshe blue colour. 
●elmets.  One of these is edged with bells and plates of gold, and under every bell two knobs of gold. The other, beside the stones wherewith it is covered, 
● bird.  is likewise edged with xxv golden bells and knobs: & hath on the crest, a green bird with the feet, bill, and eyes, of gold. Also four spears much like unto trout spears or yele spears, 
Spears.  the wood whereof is all covered with quills of divers colours marvelously wreathed with golden wires and plates intermyxte. Every of these spears have three pikes, whose edges or teeth are all of precious stones made fast with wires of gold. Of like workmanship they brought a great sceptre beset with precious stones and bells of gold, 
A sceptre.  also a braslet of gold, 
A braselet.  and shows made of a hearts skin, 
Shoes.  sowed bimbrothered with golden wires, with a white sole beneath. Furthermore a glass of a bright blue stone, 
Glasses.  and an other of white, bo●h enclosed in gold. Likewise a precious stone of the kind of them that are called Sphinxes, enclosed in gold. Furthermore the head of a great lizard, two great shells, two ducks, the shapes of divers other birds, fowls, and fishes, and all of massy gold. 
Birds. fowls, & fishes of gold.  Furthermore xxiiii round and sovare targets, 
Targets. etc. of gold.  shields, and bucklers of gold, and five of silver. Also a triple crown of plates and wires of gold marueyleuslye wreathed with quills and feathers of divers colours, 
A crown of gold.  having on the front a plate of gold on the which is graven the Image of the Idol Zemes. About this Image, hang four other plates like crosses of gold in the which are graven the heads of divers beasts, 
Crosses.  as lions, tigers, wolves, and such other. They brought also the similitudes of certain beasts made sum of rods or twigs, and sum of wood with the beasts own skins thereon, 
Images of baest●s.  and garnished with collars of laton bells. Likewise divers shietes weaved of gossampyne cotton of sundry colours, 
Shi●tes.  whereof two are richly frynged with gold and precious stones, and three other with evils and feathers intermyxte with gossampine cotton of sundry colours and chequered like the panes of a chest board. Sum are on the one side, of black, white, and red colours: and on the other side, plain without any variety. Other sum, are wrought in like manner with variable colours wi●h a wheel or circle of black in the midst intermyxt● with shining feathers and sparks of gold like stars. They brought also cloth of Aras or Uerdure of marvelous wo●kmanshyppe. 
Cloth of arras.  Lekewise a soldiers cl●ke such as their princes wear in the wars, 
A soldiers clock.  with certain privy coats of sense, and sundry tirementes pertaining to their heads, with also many such other things more beautiful to the eye then rich or precious, whereof to entreat particularly, it should be more tedious than profitable. I let pass here also to speak of many particular navigations and of the travails and dangers which they sustained in the sam●, with the monsters and secrets of nature they saw: which are all contained in the registers of hour Se●●te of th'●ffayres of India, 
Reg●stere of th'aff●yres of India.  out of the which I have selected the●e fe●● annotations, such as seemed to me most meet to be ●u●lis●●●d. notwithstanding these rich and goodly presents, yet were they that brought them, and also Cortesius the governor of the navy and autour of erecting their new colony in those remote regions, 
Tha●toritie of the lieutenant.  adjudged by the Senate to have done against right and equity, in that they attempted the same without th'advice of the governor of the Island of Cuba who sent them forth by the kings authority, where as they did other things beside their commission, ye although they went to the king, not first knowing his pleasure whom the king had substitute his lieutenant in that Island. In so much that by his procurator, he accused them before the Senate as fugitive thieves and traitors. They on the other part alleged that they had done the king better service than he: And that they had showed sufficient obedience in appealing to the king as the higher judge. But the governor required by the virtue of his commission and the kings letters patents that they might be headed for their disobedience against him whom they knew to be authorised by the king. They again replied that they had not offended the king, but rather deserved reward for their great dangiers and travails. Both the reward and punishment were deferred, and a day appointed when both parties should be hard. Leete us now therefore come to the Spaniards of Dariena, 
The spaniards of Dariena.  th'inhabitors of the gulf of Vraba in the supposed Continent. We have said before that Dariena is a river running toward the West side of the gulf of Vraba. On the bank of this river, the Spaniards planted their first colony or habitation after they had vanquished king Chemaccus. This colony they named Sancta Maria Antiqua, 
Sancta Maria Antiqua.  by reason of a vow which they made to the virgin Marie in the time of the battle against Chemaccus. To these (as we have mad● mention in the end of hour decades) was Petrus Arias sent with a thousand and two hundredth men at the request of Vaschus Nunnez Balboa, 
Petrus Arias whom the spaniards name Pedia●ias.  who was then the governor of Dariena, and the first that found and discovered the large South sea heretofore unknown. 
This sea the spaniards ●aule ●ardel 〈◊〉.  We have also declared how at the arrival of Petrus Arias the new governor, he divided his army into Centurions, that is, captains over hundreds, whom he sent forth divers ways. What tragedies followed hereof, I will absolve in few words, because all are horrible and unpleasant. For sense we finished hour Decades, 
Contention between Uaschus and Petrus Arias.  there hath been none other then killing, sleyinge, murdering and accusing. The king made Vaschus governor but during his pleasure. His courage was such, and his facts so notorious, that he could not long abide the hautynes of Petrus Arias. To be brief, their fauling out and discord confounded all things. john Cacedus the pulpit friar of the order of saint Frances, did his uttermost endeavour to make them friends, promising unto Vaschus the daughter of Petrus Arias to wife. But no means could be found how these two which bore the chief rule, might be brought to agreement. At the length the matter grew to such extremity, that Petrus Arias finding occasion of quereling against Vaschus, 
Petrus Arias commandeth that Uaschus be put to death.  sent process to the magistrates of the town, whereby he commanded them to strangle Vaschus, and five other which were chief captains under him: Alleging that they and their confetherates conspired to rebel in the South sea: And that Vaschus himself for that intent, had builded and furnished four ships to search the south coasts of the supposed continent: Also that to his three hundredth soldiers and companions which he had with him, he should speak words of this effect as followeth. My friends, and fellows of my long pains and travails: 
Uaschus is accused.  How long shall we be subject to the commandment of other, sith we have bidden the brunt and overcome th'enterprise for the which this new governor was sent with so great a multitude? Who can any longer abide his pride and insolentie? Let us therefore follow these coasts whither so ever fortune shall drive us: And among these so many pleasant and fruitful provinces of this large land, let us choose one in the which we may with liberty spend that portion of hour lives which yet remaineth. Who can find us, or shallbe able to proffer us violence? When these or the like words were declared to Petrus Arias, he sent to the south parts for Vaschus, willing him by the virtue of his commission to repair to him forth with. Vaschus obeyed, and at his coming was cast in prison: yet constantly denying that ever he intended any such thing. witnesses were brought against him, and his words rehearsed from the beginning. 
Uaschus is put to death.  To conclude, he was judged worthy death, and was put to execution. And this is the reward wherewith the blind goddess oftentimes recompenseth such as have sustained great travails and daungiours to be highly in her favour. Petrus Arias leaving his wife in Dariena, 
Petrus Arias.  embarked himself in the ships left of Vaschus, to th'intent to search those coasts. But whether he be returned or not, we have yet no certain knowledge. He hath also his fortune. Yet is there an other governor assigned, whose name is Lupus Sosa, 
Lupus Sosa.  the viceroy of the Islands of Canary. What stomach Petrus Arias may have if he return, let good men judge. There was nothing done under him worthy glory. Sume think that he was at the beginning to slack and negligent in his office, and not severe in correcting errors and misorders. But we will leave him and rehearse somewhat whereof we have been lately informed as touching the great and deep river of Dabaiba, 
The great river of Dabaiba or Grandis  the which for the greatness and largeness thereof, hour men named Grandis, that is, great, as we have noted in hour Decades. This river falleth into the furthest corner of the gulf of Vraba by seven ports or mouths as doth the river of Nilus into the Egyptian sea, 
The gulf of Uraba.  whose large description you may also read in hour Decades. That the mountains on every side about this river, 
The rich mountains of Dabaiba.  are rich in gold, we have learned by thinformation of thinhabitants, of whom we made diligent inquisition. Vaschus, and beside him other governors and Lieu●tenauntes, have fouretymes entered into this river with their armies in battle array, and with divers kinds of ships first for the space of forty miles, then fifty, and at the last fourscore, at an other time also overthwart the river. Oh shameful chance and detestable couwardenes of hour men. 
Fierce & war like people.  A naked nation encountering with them that had apparel, the armed against the unarmed, had the overthrow in manner in all conflicts, and were other all slain or wounded. They use invenemed arrows, and are such expert archers, that if they espy any place of their enemy bare or unarmed, they will not lightly fail to strike him there They use also many darts, 
Darts.  which in the time of the battle they hurl so thick a far of, that they take the light of the son from their enemies as it were with a cloud. They have likewise broad and long swords made of a heavy and hard kind of wood, 
Swords of heavy wood.  wherewith they fight fiercely near at hand. Vaschus himself received many wounds in encountering with them. And thus by reason of the fierceness of these barbarians, the river of Dabaiba is yet left unsearched. We will now speak somewhat more of the Island of Hispaniola (which the spaniards call Spagnuola) the mother and chief of all other lands or Islands whereof we intended to write. 
hispan●ola Ouiedus writeth that there are now .v. monasteries.  In it the Senate is now restored, and five judges assigned to give laws to all thinhabitants of those tracts. But in short time, they shall cease gathering of gold although there be grea●e plenty: by reason they shall lack labourers and miners, forasmuch as thinhabitants whose help they used herein, are brought to a smaule number, consumed partly by war, and many more by famen that year that they digged up the roots whereof they made their best bread, and left of sowing their grain of Maizium which is their common food, supposing hereby to have driven hour men out of the Island, who had victuals sent them from Spain. A great number of them also, died of new and strange diseases which in the year of Christ a thousand five hundredth and xviii consumed them like rotten sheep. 
New and strange diseases.   
And (to say the truth) hour men's unsatiable desire of gold, so oppressed these poor wretches with extreme labour and ●oyle, where as before they lived pleasantly and at liberty, given only to plays and pastimes as dancing, fysshinge, fouling, and hunting of little coneyes, that many of them peri●shed even for very anguy●he of mind, the which (with their unaccustomed labour) are things of themselves sufficient to engender many new diseases. But the king and the Senate have now determined that they be reduced to a people, and to give themselves only to increase, and tillage of the gound: And that only such as are bought or tak●n out of other regions, be appointed to labour in the gold mines. 
The sugar of hispaniola.  But it shall suffice to have said thus much of the pestiferous hunger of gold. Therefore to speak of other matters: It is a marvelous thing to consider how all things increase and prosper in this Island. There are now xxviii sugar presses wherewith great plenty of sugar is made. 
Sugar of Ualeutia.  The canes or reeds wherein the sugar groweth, are bigger and higher than in any other place: And are as big as a man's arm in the brawn, and higher than the stature of a man, by the half. This is more wonderful, that where as in Valentia in Spain (where a great quantity of sugar is made yearly) where so ever they apply themselves to the great increase thereof, 
A token of marvelous fruitfulness.  yet doth every root bring forth not passed five, or six, or at the most seven of those reeds: whereas in Hisponiola one root beareth twenty, and oftentimes thirty. Four footed beasts and cattle, 
cattle.  are marvelously increased in this Island. And albeit that the ravening hunger of gold hath hitherto greatly hindered hour men from tillage of the ground, yet is there great plenty of wheat, 
wheat.  which prospereth so well that it yieldeth sometime a hundreeh fold: And this especially on the hills or ridge's of the mountains prospecting toward the North. Uines do also increase here with no less fruitfulness. 
Uines.  What should I speak of the trees that bear Cassia fistula, 
Cassia Fistula.  brought first into this Island from the other Islands near unto the supposed Continent, as we have noted in our decades? There is now such plenty hereof, that after a few years we shall have a pound of the price that we pay now for an ounce. Of the bresyle and mirobalane trees, 
Brasyle.  
Myrobalanes  with other innumerable prerogatives and benefits which nature hath plentifully given to this blessed Island, we have spoken sufficiently in our decades. Yet have I thought good to repeat part of the same, because I think that the wits of many readers have diverted from the weight of great affairs, to the recordation of such pleasant things. And yet do not such things as are savoury, engender tediousness, so that a precious matter be adorned with a precious vesture.  
FINIS.    


EXEMPLAR BULLAE SEV DONATIONIS, AUTORITATE CVIUS, EPISCOPUS ROMANUS ALEXANder eius nominis sextus, concessit et donavit Castellae regibus & suis successoribus, regiones & Insulas novi orbis in Oceano occidentali Hispanorum navigationibus repertas⸫  
ALEXANDER EPISCOPUS, servus servorum Dei, Charissimo in Christo filio Ferdinando Regi, et Charissimae in Christo tiliae Elizabeth Reginae Castellae, Legionis, Aragonum, Siciliae, et Granatae, illustribus, salutem et Apostolicam benedictionem.  
Inter caetera Divinae maiestati beneplacita opera et cordis nostri desiderabilia, illud profecto potisimun existit ut fides catholica & Christiana religio nostris praesertim temporibus exaltetur ac ubilibet amplietur ac dilatetur, animarumque salus procuretur, ac barbarae nationes deprimantur et ad fidem ipsam reducantur. unde cum ad hanc sacram Petri sedem Divinafavente clementia (meritis lic●t imparibus) evocati fueremus, cognoscentes vos tanquam veros catholicos reges et principes: quales semper fuisse novimus, & a vobis praeclare gesta, toti pene orbi notissima demonstrant, nedum id exoptare, sed omni conatu, studio, et diligentia, nullis laboribus, nullis impensis, nullisque parcendo periculis, etiam proprium sanguinem effundendo efficere, ac omnem animum vestrum, omnesque, conatus ad hoc iam dudum dedicasse, quemadmodum recuperato regni Granatae a tyrannis de Sarracenorum hodiernis tem poribus per vos, cum tanta Divini nominis gloria facta, testatur. dign ducimur non immerito, et debemus illa vobis etiam sponte, ac favorabiliter con cedere, per quae huiusmodi sanctum ac laudabile ab immortali deo acceptum propositum, indies feruentiori animo ad ipsius dei honorem et Imperij Christiani propagationem, prosequi valeatis. Sane accepimus ꝙ vos qui dudum animum proposueratis aliquas insulas et terras firmas remotas et incognitas, ac per alios hactenus non repertas, quaerere et invenire, ut illarum incolas et habitatores ad colendum redemptorem nostrum et fidem catholicam profitendum reduceretis, hactenus in expugnatione et recuperatione ipsius regni Granatae plurimum occupati, huiusmodi sanctum et laudabile propositum vestrum ad optatum finem perducere nequivistis: Sed tamen sicut Domino placuit, regno predicto recuperato, volentes desiderium vestrum adimplere, dilectum filium Christophorum Colonum virum utique dignum et plurimum commendatum ac tanto negotio aptum, cum navigijs et hominibus ●d similia instructis, non sine maximis laboribus, acpericulis, et expensis destinastis ut terras firmas et Insulas remotas et incognitas, huiusmodi per mare ubi hactenus navigatum non fuerat, diligenter inquireret. Qui tandem (Divino auxilio facta extrema diligentia in mari Oceano navigantes) certas insulas remotissimas et etiam terras firmas quae per alios hactenus repertae non fuerant, invenerunt. In quibus plurimae gentes pacifice viventes, et (ut asseritur) nudi incedentes, nec carnibus vescentes, inhabitant: Et ut praefati nuncij vestri possunt opinari, gen tes ipsae in Insulis et terris praedictis habitantes, credunt unum deum creatorem in Coelis esse, ac ad fidem catholicam amplexandum et bonis moribus imbuendum, satis apti videntur: Spesque habetur, ꝙ si erudirentur, nomen salvatoris Domini nostri jesu Christi in terris et insulis praedictis facile indu●ere tur. Ac prefatus Christophorus in una ex principalibus Insulis praedictis, ●am unam turrim satis munitam, in qua certos Christianos qui secum iverant, in custodiam et ut alias Insulas ac terras firmas remotas et incognitas inquirerent posuit, constru●et aedificari fecit. In quibus quidem Insulis et terris iam repertis, aurum, aromata, et aliae quamplurimae res praeciosae diversi generis et diversae qualitatis reperiuntur. unde omnibus diligenter, et praesertim fidei catholicae exaltatione et dilatatione (prout decet Catholicos Reges et Principes) consideratis, more progenitorum vestrorum clarae memoriae Regum, terras firmas et insulas praedictas, illarumque incolas et habitatores, vobis divina favente clementia subiicere et ad fidem Catholicam reducere proposuistis.  
Nos itaque huiusmodi vestrum sanctum et laudabile propositum plurimum in domino commendantes, ac cupientes ut illud ad debitum finem perducatur, et ipsum nomen salvatoris nostri in partibus illis inducatur, hortamus vos quamplurimum in domino, et per sacri lavacri susceptionem, qua mandatis Aposto●icis obligati estis, et ꝑ viscera misericordiae Domini nostri jesu Christi attent requirimus, ut cum expeditionem huiusmodi omnino prosequi et assumere prona mente orthodoxae fidei zelo intendatis, populos in huiusmodi Insulis et terris degentes, ad Christianam religionem suscipiendum inducere velitis et debeatis, nec pericula nec labores vllo unquam tempore vos deterreant, firma spe fiduciaque conceptis ꝙ Deus omnipotens conatus vestros foeliciter prosequetur. Et ut tanti negocij provintiam Apostolicae gratiae largitate donati, liberius et audacius assumatis, motu proprio non ad vestram vel alterius pro vobis super hoc nobis oblatae petitionis instantiam▪ sed de nostra mera liberalitate, et ex certa scientia, ac de Apostolicae potestatis plenitudine, omnes Insulas et terras firmas inventas et inveniendas, detectas et detegendas versus Occidentem et Meridiem, fabricando et construendo unam lineam a polo Arctico, scilicet Septemtrione, ad polum Antarcticum, scilicet Meridiem, sive terrae firmae et insulae inventae et inveniendae sint versus Indiam aut versus aliam quamcunque partem quae linea distet a qualibet Insularum quae vulgariter nuncupantur de los Azores er Cabo verde centum leucis versus Occidentem et Meridiem. Itaque omnes Insulae et terrae firmae repertae et reperiendae, detectae et detegendae a praefata linea versis Occedentem et Meridiem, quae per alium Regem aut Principem Christianum non fuerint actualiter possessae usque ad diem nativitatis Domini nostri jesu Christi proxime praeteritum, a quo incipit annus praesens Millessimus Quadringen tessimus Nonogessimus tercius, quando fuerunt per nuncios et capitaneos vestros inventae aliquae praedictarum Insularum, Autoritate omnipotentis Dei nobis in beato Petro concessa, ac vicariatus jesu Christi qua fungimur in terris, cum omnibus illatum dominijs, civitatibus, castris, locis, et villis, iutibusque et iurisdictionibus ac partinentijs universis, vobis heredibusque et successoribus vestris (Castellae et Legionis regibus) in perpetuum tenore praesentium donamus, concedimus, et assignamus: Vosque et haeredes ac successores praefatos illarum Dominos, cum plena, libera, et omnimoda potestate, autoritate, et jurisdictione, facimus, constituimus, et deputamus. Decernentes nihilo minus per huiusmodi donationem, concessionem, et assignationem nostram, nullo Christiano Principi qui actualiter praefatas Insulas et terras firmas possederit usque ad praedictum diem nativitatis Domini nostri jesu Christi ius quaesitum, sublatum intelligi posse aut auferri debere.  
Et insuper mandamus vobis in virtutae sanctae obedientiae (ut sicut pollicemini et non dubitamus pro vestra maxima devotione et regia magnanimitate vos esse facturos) ad terras firmas et Insulas praedictas, viros probos et Deum timentes, doctos, peritos, et expertos ad instruendum incolas et habitatores praefatos in fide Chatholica et bonis moribus imbuendum, destinare debeatis, omnem debitam diligentiam in praemissis adhibentes. A quibuscumque personis, cuiuscunque dignitatis, etiam imperialis et regalis stratus, gradus, ordinis vel conditionis, sub excommunicationis latae sententiae poena quam eo ipso si contra fecerint incurrant, districtius inhibemus ne ad insulas et terras firmas inventas et inveniendas, detectas et detegendas versus Occidentem et Meridiem, fabricando et construendo lineam a polo Arctico ad polum Antarcticum, sivae terrae firmae et Insulae inventae et inveniendae sint versus Indiam aut versus aliam quamcunque partem quae linea distet a qualibet Insularum quae vulgariter nun cupantur de los Azores et Cabo verde centum leucis versus Occidentem et Meridiem ut praefertur, pro mercibus habendis vel quavis alia causa accedere praesumat absque vestra ac haeredum et successorum vestrorum praedictorum licentia speciali: Non obstantibus constitutionibus et ordinationibus Apostolicis, caeterisque quibuscunque, in illo in quo imperia et dominationes et bona cuncta procedunt: Confidentes ꝙ dirigente Domino actus vestros, si huiusmodi sanctum ac laudabile propositum prosequamini, brevi tempore cum felicitate et gloria totius populi Christiani, vestri labores et conatus exitum foelicissimum consequentur. Verum quia difficile foret praesentes literas ad singula quaeque loca in quibus expediens fuerit deferri, volumus ac motu et scientia similibus decernimus, ꝙ illarum transsumptis manu publici notarij inderogati subscriptis, et sigillo alicuius personae in ecclesiastica dignitate constitutae, seu curiae ecclesiasticae munitis, ea prorsus fides in judicio et extra ac alias ubilibet adhibeatur, quae praesentibus adhiberetur si essent adhibitae vel ostensae.  
Nulli ergo omnino hominum liceat hanc paginam nostrae commendationis, hortationis, requisitionis, donationis, concessionis, assignationis, constitutionis, deputationis, decreti, mandati, inhibitionis, et voluntatis infringere vel ei ausu temerario contrair. Si quis autem hoc attentare praesumpserit, indignationem omnipotentis Dei, ac beatorum Petri et Pauli Apostolorum eius, se noverit incursurum⸫  
Datum Romae apud sanctum Petrum: Anno incarnationis Dominicae .1593. quarto nonas Maij: Pontificatus nostri anno primo⸫   

¶ The copy of the Bull or donation, by th'authority whereof, Pope Alexander the sixth of that name, gave and granted to the kings of Castyle and their successors the Regions and Islands found in the West Ocean sea by the navigations of the spaniards.  
ALexander bishop, the servant of the servants of God: To hour most dear beloved son in Christ King Ferdinand, And to hour dear beloved daughter in christ Elyzabeth Queen of Castyle, Legion, Arragon, Sicily, and Granata, most noble Princes, Greeting and Apostolical benediction.  
Among other works acceptable to the divine majesty and according to hour hearts desire, this certainly is the chief, that the catholic faith and Christian religion, specially in this hour time may in all places be exalted, amplified, and enlarged, whereby the health of souls may be procured, and the Barbarous nations subdued and brought to the faith. And therefore whereas by the favour of god's clementy (although not without equal deserts) we are called to this holy seat of Peter, and understanding you to be true catholic Princes as we have ever known you, and as your noble and worthy facts have declared in manner to the hole world in that with all your study, diligence, and industry, you have spared no travails, charges, or perils, adventuring even the shedding of your own blood, with applying your hole minds and endeavours here unto, as your noble expeditions achieved in recovering the kingdom of Granata from the tyranny of the Sarracens in these our days, do plainly declare your facts with so great glory of the divine name. For the which as we think you worthy, so ought we of hour own free will favourably to grant you all things whereby you may daily with more fervent minds to the honour of god and enlarging the Christian empire, prosecute your devout and laudable purpose most acceptable to the immortal God. We are credibly informed that whereas of late you were determined to seek and find certain Islands & firm lands far remote and unknown (and not heretofore found by any other) to th'intent to bring thinhabitants of the same to honour hour redeemer and to profess the catholic faith, you have hitherto been much occupied in thexpugnation and recovery of the kingdom of Granata, by reason whereof you could not bring your said laudable purpose to th'end desired. Nevertheless as it hath pleased almighty god, the foresaid kingdom being recovered, willing taccomplyshe your said desire, you have, not without great labour, perils, and charges, appointed hour well-beloved son Christopher Colonus (a man certes well commended as most worthy and apt for so great a matter) well furnished with men and ships and other necessaries, to seek (by the sea where hitherto no man hath sailed) such firm lands and Islands far remote and hitherto unknown. Who (by gods help) making diligent search in the Ocean sea, have found certain remote Islands and firm lands which were not heretofore found by any other. In the which (as is said) many nations inhabit living peaceably and going naked, not accustomed to eat flesh. And as far as your messengers can conjecture, the nations inhabiting the foresaid lands and Islands, believe that there is one god creature in heaven: and seem apt to be brought to thembraceing of the catholic faith and to be imbued with good manners: by reason whereof, we may hope that if they be well instructed, they may easily be induced to receive the name of hour saviour jesus Christ. We are further advertised that the forenamed Christopher hath now builded and erected a fortress with good munition in one of the foresaid principal Islands in the which he hath placed a garrison of certain of the Christian men that went thither with him: aswell to th'intent to defend the same, as also to search other Islands and firm lands far remote and yet unknown. We also understand, that in these lands and Islands lately found, is great plenty of gold and spices, with divers and many other precious things of sundry kinds and qualities. Therefore all things diligently ocnsidered (especially thamplifying and enlarging of the catholic faith, as it behoveth catholic Princes following thexamples of your noble progenitors ol famous memory) whereas you are determined by the favour of almighty god to subdue and bring to the catholic faith thinhabitants of the foresaid lands and Islands.  
We greatly commending this your godly and laudable purpose in our lord, and desirous to have the same brought to a dew end, and the name of hour saviour to be known in those parts, do exhort you in hour Lord and by the receiving of your holy baptism whereby you are bound to Apostolical obedience, and earnestly require you by the bowels of mercy of hour Lord jesus Christ, that when you intend for the zeal of the catholic faith to prosecute the said expedition to reduce the people of the foresaid lands and Islands to the Christian religion, you shall spare no labours at any time, or be deterred with any perils, conceaving firm hope and confidence that the omnipotent god will give good success to your godly attempts. And that being autorysed by the privilege of the apostolical grace, you may the more freely and boldly take upon you th'enterprise of so great a matter, we of hour own motion, and not either at your request or at the instant petition of any other person, but of hour own mere liberality and certain science, and by the fullness of apostolical power, do give, grant, and assign to you, your heirs and successors, all the firm lands & Islands found or to be found discovered or to be discovered toward the West & South, drawing a line from the pole Arctic to the pole Antarctic (that is) from the north to the south: Containing in this donation, what so ever firm lands or Islands are found or to be found toward India, or toward any other part what so ever it be, being distant from, or without the foresaid line drawn a hundreh leaques toward the West and South from any of the Islands which are commonly called De los Azor●s and Cabo Verde.  
All the Islands therefore and firm lands, found and to be found, discovered and to be discovered from the said lyn● toward the West and South, such as have not actually been heretofore possessed by any other Christian king or prince until the day of the nativity of hour Lord Ie●u christ last paste, from the which beginneth this present year being the year of hour Lord. M. CCCC.lxxxxiii. when so ever any such shallbe found by your messengers & capytaines,  
We by the authority of almighty God granted unto us in saint Peter, and by the office which we bear on the earth in the steed of jesus Christ, do for ever by the tenor of these presents, give, grant, assign, unto you, your heirs, and successors (the kings of Castyle and Legion) all those lands and Islands, with their dominions, territories, cities, castles, towers, places, and villages, with all the right, and jurisdictions thereunto pertaining: constituting, assigning, and deputing, you, your heirs, and successors the lords thereof, with full and free power, autotoritie, and jurisdiction. Decreeinge nevertheless by this hour donation, grant, and assignation, that from no Christian Prince which actually hath possessed the foresaid Islands and firm lands unto the day of the nativity of hour lord before said their right obtained to be understood hereby to be taken away, or that it ought to be taken away.  
Furthermore we command you in the virtue of holy obedience (as you have promised, and as we doubt not you will do upon mere devotion and princely magnanimity) to send to the said firm lands and Islands, honest, virtuous, and learned men, such as fear God, and are able to instruct thinhabitants in the catholic faith and good manners, applying all their possible diligence in the premises.  
We furthermore straightly inhibit all manner of persons, of what state, degree, order, or condition so ever they be, although of Imperial and regal dignity, under the pain of the sentence of excommunication which they shall incur if they do to the contrary, that they in no case presume without special licence of you, your heirs, and successors, to travail for merchandise or for any other cause, to the said lands or Islands, found or to be found, discovered, or to be discovered, toward the west & south, drawing a line from the pole arctic to the pole Antarctic, whether the firm lands & Islands found & to be found, be situate toward India or toward any other part being distant from the line drawn a hundredth leagues toward the west from any of the Islands commonly called De los Azores and Cabo Verde: notwithstanding constitutions, decrees, and apostolical ordinances what so ever they are to the contrary: In him from whom empires, dominions, and all good things do proceed: trusting that almighty god directing your enterprises, if you follow your godly and laudable attempts, your labours and travails herein, shall in short time obtain a happy end with felicity and glory of all Christian people. But forasmuch as it should be a thing of great difficulty these letters to be carried to all such places as should be expedient, we will, and of like motion and knowledge do decree that whither so ever the same shallbe sent, or where so ever they shallbe received with the subscription of a common notary thereunto required, with the seal of any person constitute in ecclesiastical dignity, or such as are autorysed by the ecclesiastical court, the same faith and credit to be given thereunto in judgement or else where, as should be exhibited to these presents.  
It shall therefore be lawful for no man to infringe or rashly to contrary this letter of hour commendation, exhortation, request, donation, grant, assignation, constitution, deputation, decree, commandment, inhibition, and determination. And if any shall presume to attempt the same, he ought to know that he shall thereby incur the indignation of almighty God and his holy Apostles Peter and Paul.  
¶ Given at Rome at saint peter's: In the year of th'incarnation of hour Lord M. CCCC. LXXXXIII. The fourth day of the nonce of may, the first year of hour seat.    


To the reader.  
ALthough among divers which have written of the Ocean and West Indies, there is none to be compared to Peter Martyr of Angleria, in declaring by philosophical discourses the secret causes of natural affects both as touching the land, the sea, the stars, and other strange works of nature, yet forasmuch as of later days those countries have been better known and searched, and divers such particular and notable things found as are contained in the histories of later writers, among the number of whom, Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus, (whom learned Cardanus compareth to the ancient writers) is doubtless the chief, I have therefore thought good to join to the Decades of Peter Martyr certain notable things which I have gathered out of his book entitled the summary or abbrigement of his general history of the west Indies written in th● firm land of the same in the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena (where he dwelt and was governor many years) And dedicated to Themperous majesty, as may appear by the epistle following.   

¶ To the most high and mighty prince Charles the fift of that name: Emperor of Rome, King of Spain, and of the two Sicily's, of both the sides of the straight of Faro, King of Jerusalem and Hungary, Duke of Burgonie and Earl of Flaunders, Lord and inheritor of the firm land and Islands of the West Ocean. etc. Gonzalus Ferdinandus Ouiedus his most humble servant wisheth health and perpetual felicity.  
THe things which principally preserve and maintain the works of nature in the memories of men, are histories and books composed of the same. Among the which certes those are esteemed most true and authentic which have been written by witty and expert men well travailed in the world, as faithful witnesses of such things as they have partly seen and been partly informed by credible persons. Of this mind and opinion was Pliny, who better than any other author hath written in xxxvii. books all that pertaineth to the natural history, contained all in one volume dedicated to Uespasian Themperor. Wherein, as a prudent historiographer, he declareth such things as he had hard: Attributing the second authority to such as he had red in authors that wrote before him: And thirdly joined to the same history, such things as he himself had seen as most certain testimony. Whose exemple I following, will in this my brief summary reduce and represent to your majesties memory such things as I have seen in your Empire of the West Indies aswell in the Islands as in the firm land of the Ocean sea, where I have served now more than twelve years in the place of suruoyer of the gold mines by the commandment of the catholic king Don Fernando the fift of that name and grandfather unto your majesty, to whom god gave great fame and glory. Sense whose death also I have lykewies served and trust while the rest of my life yet remaineth, to serve your majesty as shall please you to command. As touching which things and such other like, I have more largely written in a history begun as soon as my age was ripe to take such matters in hand. Wherein furthermore I have made mention of such things as have chanced in Spain, from the year .1494. unto this tyme. Adding also thereunto such things worthy memory as I have observed in other realms and provinces where I have travailed. And have likewise particularly written the lives and worthy acts of the catholic Princes of famous memory Don Ferdinando and lady Elizabeth his wife to their last days. After whose fruition of heavenly paradise, I have noted such things as have chanced in your most fortunate succession. Not omitting particularly to write a large book of such things as have seemed most worthy to be noted as touching your majesties Indies. But for asmuch as that volume remaineth in the city of San. Dominico in the Island of Hispaniola where I dwell and am placed in household with wife, children, and family, I have brought no more with me of that my writing then I bear in memory. determining notwithstanding for your majesties recreation to make a brief rehearsal of certain notable things whereof I have more largely entreated in my said general history, and such as may seem most worthy to be red of your majesty. Of the which, although a great part have been written by other who have also seen the same, yet perhaps they are not so exactly and particularly described as of me, forasmuch as in manner all that travail into these Indies have greater respect to lucre and gains then diligently to search the works of nature whereunto I have been ever naturally inclined, and have therefore with all possible endeavour applied mine eyes and intelligence to find the same. And this present summary shall not be contrary or divers from my larger history wherein (as I have said) I have more amply declared these things: but shall only more briefly express th'effect thereof until such time as god shall restore me to mine own house, where I may accomplish and finish my said general history. Where unto to give the first principle, I say that Don Christopher Colonus (as it is well known) being the first admiral of this India, discovered the same in the days of the catholic king Don Ferdinando and the lady Elyzabeth his wife, grandfather and grandmother unto your majesty: In the year .1491. And came to Barzalona in the year 1492. with the first Indians and other shows and profess of the great riches and notice of this west Empire. The which gift and benefit was such, that it is unto this day, one of the greatest that ever any subject or servant hath done for his prince or country, as is manifest to the hole world. And to say the truth, this shall doubtless be so commodious and profitable unto the hole realm of Spain, that I repute him no good Castilian or spaniard that doth not recognize the same. And (as I have said before) forasmuch as in my said general history I have more largely entreated of these things, I intent at this present only briefly to rehearse certain especial things, the which surely are very few in respect of the thousands that might be said in this behalf. first therefore I will speak somewhat of the navigation into these parties. Then of the generation of the nations which are found in the same, with their rites, customs, and ceremonies. Also of beasts, fowls, birds, worms, fishes, seas, rivers, springs, trees, plants, herbs, and divers other things which are engendered both on the land and in the water. And forasmuch as I am one of thorder and company of them that are appointed to return into these regions to serve your majesty, if therefore the things contained in this book shall not be distinct in such order as I promised to perform in my greater work. I desire your majesty to have no respect hereunto, but rather to consider the novelty of such strange things as I have herein declared, which is the chief end that moved me to write. Protesting that in this summary I have written the truth of such things as come to my remembrance: whereof not only I myself can testify, but also divers other worthy and credible men which have been in those regions, and are now present in your majesties court. And thus it shall suffice to have said thus much unto your majesty in manner of a proheme unto this present work which I most humbly desire your maiesticas thankfully taccept, as I have written it faithfully.   

¶ Of the ordinary navygation from Spain to the West Indies.  
THe navygation which is commonly made from Spain to the West India, is from Seville, where your majesty have your house of contractation for those parts, with also your officers thereunto pertaining, of whom the captains take their passport and licence. The patrons of such ships as are appointed to these voyages, embark themselves at sand Luca di Barameda, where the river Cuadalchiber entereth into the Ocean sea. And from hence they follow their course toward the Islands of Canary. Of these seven Islands, they commonly touch two, that is, either Grancanaria or Gomera▪ And here the ships are furnished with fresh water, fuel, cheese, beef, and such other things which may seem requisite to be added to such as they bring with them owte of Spain. From Spain to these Islands, is coommonly eight days sailing, or little more or less. And when they are arrived there, they have sailed two hundredth and fifty leaques, which make a thousand miles, accounting four miles to a leaque as is their manner to reckon by sea. Departing from the said Islands to follow their course, the ships tarry xxv days, or a little more or less, before they see the first land of the Islands that lie before that which they call Lafoy Spagnuola or Hispaniola. And the land that is commonly first scene, is one of these Islands which they call Ogni sancti Marigalante (or Galanta) Lafoy Desseada (otherwise called Desyderata) Matanino, Dominica, Guadalupe, San. Christoval, or sum other of the Islands whereof there are a great multitude lying about these aforesaid. Yet it sometimes so chanceth that the ships pass without the sight of any of the said Islands, or any other that are within that course until they come to the Island of Sancti johannis or Hispaniola, or jamaica, or Cuba, which are before the other. It may also chance that they over pass all these likewise, until they faule upon the coasts of the firm land. But this chanceth when the pilot is not well practised in this navigation or not perfect in the true card. But making this voyage with expert mariners (whereof there is now great plenty) one of the said first Islands shall ever be known. And from the Islands of Canary to one of the first of these, the distance is nine hundredth leaques by sailing, or more. And from hence to the city of saint dominic which is in the Island of Hispaniola, is a hundredth and fifty leaques: So that from Spain hitherto, is a thousand and three hundredth leaques. Yet for asmuch as sometimes the navigation proceedeth not so directly, but that it chanceth to wander ever on the one side or on the other, we may well say that they have now sailed a thousand and five hundredth leaques and more. And if the navigation be slow by reason of sum hindrance, it commonly chanceth to be finished in xxxv or xl days. And this happeneth for the most part, not accounting the extremes: that is, either of them that have slow passage, or of them that arrive in very short tyme. For we ought to consider that which chanceth most commonly. The return from those parts to Spain, is not finished without longer time, as in the space of l days, or a little more or less. Nevertheless in this present year of .1525. there came four ships from the Island of San Dominico to saint Luca in Spain, in xxv days. But (as I have said) we ought not to judge of that which chanceth seldom, but of that which happeneth most ordinarily. This navigation is very safe and much used, even unto the said Island. And from this to the firm land, the ships traverse divers ways for the space of five, six, or seven days sailing, or more, according to the parts or coasts whither they direct their voyages, forasmuch as the said firm land is very great and large, and many navigations and voyages are directed to divers parts of the same. Yet to the firm land which is nearest to this Island, and lieth directly against San Dominico, the passage is finished in the time aforesaid. But it shallbe much better to remit all this to the card of these navigations and the new cosmography, of the which no part was known to Ptolemy or any other of the owlde writers.   

¶ Of two notable things as touching the West Indies: And of the great richesse brought from thence into Spayne⸫  
AFter my universal description of the history of the Indies, there cometh to my remembrance two things chiefly to be noted as touching th'empire of this West Indies pertaining to the dominion of your majesty. And these beside the other particulars whereof I have sufficiently spoken, are to be considered as things of great importance. Whereof, the one is the shortness of the way & with what expedition your majesties ships may pass beyond the main firm land of these Indies into the new south sea called Mare deal Sur lying beyond the same. And this to th'intent to come to the Islands where the spices grow, beside the other innumerable richesse of the kingdoms and signiories which confin● with the said sea where are so many people and nations of divers tongues and manners. The other thing, is to consider how innumerable treasures are entered into Spain by these Indies, aswell that which cometh daily from thence as also that is continually to be looked for, both of gold and pearl & other marchaunties which are first brought into this your realm of Spain before they are seen of other nations or traded into other realms. Whereby not only this your realm is greatly enriched, but also the benefit thereof redoundeth to the great profit of other countries which are near thereunto. A testimony of this, are the double ducades which your majesty have caused to be coined, and are dispersed throughowte the hole world. But after they are once pa●sed out of this your realm, they never return again because they are the best current money of the world. And therefore if after they have been in the hands of strangers they chance to be returned again into Spain, they come disguised in an other habit, and are diminished of the goodness of their gold, with the stamp of your majesty changed: So that if it were not for their such defacynges in other realms for the cause aforesaid, there should not be found so great quantity of fine gold of the coin of any prince in the world as of power majesties. And the cause of all this, are your Indies.   

¶ Of the mines of gold, and the manner of working in them.  
THis particular of the mines of gold, is a thing greatly to be noted: And I may much better speak hereof then any other man, forasmuch as there are now twelve years passed sense I served in the place of the surveyor of the melting shops pertaining to the gold mines of the firm land, and was the governor of the mines of the catholic king Don Ferdinando, after whose departure from this life, I served long in the same room in the name of your majesty: By reason whereof, I have had great occasion to know how gold is found and wrought out of the mines: And do know right well that this land is exceeding rich: having by my account and by the labour of my Indians and slaves, gathered and fyned a great portion of the same: and may therefore the better affirm this by testimony of sight. For I am well assured that in no part of Cas●ilia del oro, that is, golden Castille (otherwise called Boragua) no man could ask me of the mines of gold, but that I durst have bound myself to have discovered them in the space of ten leagues of the country where it should have been demanded me, and the same to be very rich. For I was allowed all manner of charges to make search for the same. And although gold be found in manner everywhere in these regions of golden Castille, yet ought we not in every place to bestow the travel, and charge to get it owte, because it is of less quantity and goodness in sum place then in sum. And the mine or beyne which ought to be followed, aught to be in a place which may stand to save much of the charges of the labourers, and for the administration of other necessary things that the charges may be recompensed with gains. For there is no doubt but that gold shallbe found more or less in every place. And the gold which is found in golden Castille, is very good, and of xxii caractes or better in finesse. Furthermore, beside this great quantity of gold which I have said to be found in the mines, there is also from day to day found or otherwise gotten, great treasure of such wrought gold as hath been in the custody of the subdued Indians and their kings, aswell of such as they have given for their fine and ransom, or otherwise as friends to the Christians, beside that which hath been upolently taken from the rebels. But the greatest part of the wrought gold which the Indians have, is base and holdeth somewhat of copper. Of this they make bracelets and chains and in the same they close their jewels which their women are accustomed to wear and esteem more than all the richesses of the world. The manner how gold is gathered, is this, either of such as is found in Za●ana, that is to say in the plains and rivers of the champain country being without trees, whether the earth be with gra●se or without. Or of such as is sometimes found on the land without the rivers in places where trees grow, so that to come by the same, it shallbe requisite to cut down many and great trees. But after which so ever of these two manners it be found, either in the rivers or ruptures or breaches of waters, or else in the earth, I will show how it is found in both these places, and how it is separate and purged. Therefore when the mine or vein is discovered, this chanceth by searching and proving in such places as by certain signs and tooken do appear to skilful men apt for the generation of gold and to hold gold. And when they have found it, they follow the mine and labour it, whether it be in the river or in the plain as I have said. And if it be found on the plain, first they make the place very clean where they intend to dig. Then they dig eight or ten foot in length and as much in breadth: but they go no deeper than a span or two, or more as shall seem best to the master of the mine, digging equally. Then they wa●he all the earth which they have taken out of the said space. And if herein they find any gold, they follow it. And if not, they dig a span deeper, and wash the earth as they did before. And if then also, they find nothing, they continue in digging and washing the earth as before until they come to the hard rock or stone. And if in fine they find no gold there, they follow no further to seek gold in that place, but go to an other part. And it is to be understood, that when they have found the mine, they follow it in digging in the same measure in level and depth until they have made an end of all the mine which that place containeth, if it appear to be rich. This mine ought to consist of certain feet or paces in length or breadth according to certain orders determined. And within that compass of earth, it is not lawful for any other to dig for gold. And where as endeth the my of him that first found the gold, immediately it is lawful for any other man that will, with a staff to assign himself a place by the side of the same, enclosing it with stakes or pales as his own. These mines of Zavana (that is such as are found in the plains) ought ever to be sought near to sum river or brook or springe of water, or dyke, or standing pool, to th'end that the gold may be washed, for the which purpose they use the labour of certain Indians as they do other in dygginge of the mine. And when they have digged out the mine, they fill certain trays with that earth, which other Indians have the charge immediately to receive at their hands, and to carry those treyes of earth to the water where it may be washed. Yet do not they that bring it, wash it, but deliver it to other, putting it out of their own trays into theirs which they have ready in their hands to receive it. These wasshers for the most part, are the Indian women, because this work is of less pain and travail then any other. These women when they wash, are accustomed to sit by the water's side, with their legs in the water even up to the knees or less as the place serveth their purpose. And thus holding the trays with earth in their hands by the handles thereof, and putting the same into the water, they move them round about after the manner of syfting, with a certain aptness in such sort that there entereth no more water into the trais then serveth their turn: And with the self same apt moving of their trais in the water, they ever avoid the foul water with the earth owte of the one side of the vessel, and receive in clean water on the other side thereof. So that by this means by little and little, the water washeth the earth as the lighter substance out of the trais, and the gold as the heavier matter resteth in the bottom of the same, being round and hollow in the midst like unto a barbers basin. And when all the earth is avoided, and the gold gathered together in the bottom of the traye, they put it apart, and return to take more earth, which they wash continually as ●efore. And thus they that labour in this work, do gather daily such portion of gold as shall please god to grant to the patrons of these Indians and such other as travail in the same. Furthermore, it is to be noted that for every two Indians that wash, it is requisite that two other serve them to bring earth from the mine, and other two to break the same smaule and fill their trais therewith. Also beside these labourers, it is necessary that there be other people in the place where they work and rest in the night. These are such as make their bread, and provide for victuals and other necessaries. So that to conclude, there are in all, five persons ordinarily assigned to every traye of wasshers.  
There is an other manner of working the mines in rivers or brooks of running waters. And this is, that in avoiding the water of his course, after that the beds of the rivers are dry and utterly emptied, they find gold among the breaches, cliffs, and rifts of stones, and among all that is in the bottom of the channel, and where naturally the river runneth of greatest force. So that it chanceth sum time, that when the bed of the river is good and rich, they find in it great quantity of gold. And therefore you majesty ought to understand for a general rule, as it appeareth in fact, that all gold is engendered in the tops and highest places of the montaines: And in continuance of time is by little and little browght down to the vales and plains by showers of rain, and the faults of springs, rivers, and brooks having their original in the mountains and descending from the same, notwithstanding it be oftentimes found in the plains far from the mountains.  
But when it chanceth to be found in great quantity, it is for the most part among the mountains and in the rivers, or their branches, more than in any other part of the plain. And in these two manners is it commonly found most abundantly. And for the better proof that gold is engendered on high, and is brought down into the low places, I have one great tooken thereof which causeth me to believe it for certain. And this is to consider that coals never putrefy nor corrupt under the ground, if they be made of strong wood. Whereby it chanceth that digging the earth by the folds or indented places of the mountains, or on the sides, and breaking a mine in the earth where it had not been broken before, and having now digged one or two or three poles in measure, the miners found certain coals of wood vnde● the same level where they found gold. And this I say in the earth which was taken for a virgin: that is to say, such as had not before been opened for any mine. The which coals could not naturally be engendered there, or enter in by any means. But when the superficial part of the earth was equal with the level where the coals were found, it is like that the coals were left there by sum occasion of fire, & that they fastened there in time, and that afterward in long continuance of time, they were by little and little covered with the earth which the often showers of rain washed from the mountains, so that by the course of years the earth overgrewe the coals unto the said level and measure which had before time been the superficial part of the earth where the coals and gold were found together: whereby it may appear that the gold was no more engendered there then were the coals, but brought thither from the mountains by the faults of waters as we have said: forasmuch as the mountains are the matrices and bowels of all rich metals. Further and beside this, I say that in how much more the gold is gone far from the natural place of his generation to the place where it is found, it is so much the more purified and fyned and of a better carracte. And the nearer that it is found to his proper mine or vain where it is engendered, it is so much the base, fouler, and more crude, and of a base allay and caracte, and doth waste so much the more in melting, and remaineth more brickle. sometime there are found grains of gold of great quantity and of great weight above the earth and sometimes also under the earth. And the greatest of all other that was found to this day in the Indies, was that which was lost in the sea about the Island Beata, which weighed three thousand and two hundredth Castellans of gold, which are in value four thousand a hundredth, thirty and eight ducades of gold, which way one Arrova and seven pound, or xxxii pound after xii ounces to the pound, 
A mark, is ● pound of viii. ounces summa. xl●i.li. weight viii ounces, after xii. ounces to the li  which make threescore and four marks of gold. And I saw in the year .1515. in the hands of Mychel Passamonte treasurer to your majesty, two grains of the which one weighed seven pounds, which are xiiii marks, and are in the value about threescore and five ducades of gold every mark. The other was of ten marks, which are live pounds of like value, and of very good gold of xxii taractes and better. There are also found many other great grains, although not equal unto these in bigness. And forasmuch as I have spoken of gold, I have thought good to declare somewhat how the Indians can very excellently guilt such vessels of copper and base gold as they make. For they can give them so fair and f●oryshynge a colour, that all the mass which they guilt, appeareth as though it were gold of xxii caractes and better. This colour they give with a certain herb as though it were wrought by the art of any goldesmyth of Spain or Italy, and would of them be esteemed as a thing of great riches, and a secret manner of gylding. And for as much as I have spoken sufficiently of the mine of gold, I will now speak somewhat of copper because I have made mention thereof. This metal is found in many of the Islands of the Indies and also in the firm land: And is found daily in great quantity holding somewhat of gold. But for the desire that hour men have to gold, they nothing esteem the copper, although there might great commodity and profit he had thereby, and also by other metals which they nothing regard except silver which is found abundantly in that part of the firm land which is called new Spain. But of this it shall suffice to have said thus much, because I have more particularly entreated of these things in my general history of India.   

¶ Of the manner of fishing for pearls.  
THe Indians exercise this kind of fishing for the most part in the coasts of the North in Cubagua and Cumana. And many of them which dwell in the houses of certain particular lords in the Islands of San Dominico and Sancti johannis, resort to the Island of Cubagua for this purpose. Their custom is to go five, six, or seven, or more in one of their Canoas' or barks early in the morning to sum place in the sea there about where it appeareth unto them that there should be great plenty of those shell fishes (which sum call muscles and sum oysters) wherein pearls are engendered. And there they plunge themselves under the water, even unto the bottom, saving one that remaineth in the Canoa or boat which he keepeth still in one place as near as he can, looking for their return out of the water. And when one of them hath been a good while under the water, he cyseth up and cometh swiming to the boat, entering into the same, and leaving there all the oysters which he hath taken and brought with him. For in these, are the pearls found. And when he hath there rested himself a while, and eaten part of the oysters, he returneth again to the water, where he remaineth as long as he can endure, and then riseth again, and swimmeth to the boat with his prey, where he resteth him as before, and thus continueth course by course, as do all the other in like manner, being all most expert swymmers and divers. And when the night draweth near, they return to the Island to their houses, and present all the oysters to the master or steward of the house of their lord who hath the charge of the said Indians. And when he hath given them somewhat to eat, he layeth up the oysters in safe custody until he have a great quantity thereof. Then he causeth the same fisher men to open them. And they find in every of them pearls other great or small, two or three or four, and sometimes five and six, and many smaule grains according to the liberality of nature. They save the pearls both smaule and great which they have founde●: And either eat the oysters if they will, or cast them away, having so great quantity thereof that they in manner abhor them. These oysters are of hard flesh, and not so pleasant in eating as are ours of Spain. This Island of Cubagua where this manner of fishing is exercised, is in the north coast, and is no bigger than the Island of Zelande. Oftentimes the sea increaseth greatly, and much more than the fishers for pearls would, because where as the place is very deep, a man can not naturally rest at the bottom by reason of the abundance of airy substance which is in him, as I have oftentimes proved. For although he may by violence and force descend to the bottom, yet are his feet lifted up again so that he can continue no time there. And therefore where the sea is very deep, these Indian fishers use to tie two great stones about them with a cord, on every side one, by the weight whereof they descend to the bottom and remain there until them lysteth to rise again: At which time they unlose the stones, and rise up at their pleasure. But this their aptness and agility in swimming, is not the thing that causeth men most to marvel: But rather to consider how many of them can stand in the bottom of the water for the space of one hole hour, and sum more or less, according as one is more apt hereunto then an other. another thing there is which seemeth to me very strange. And this is, that where as I have oftentimes demanded of sum of these lords of the Indians, if the place where they are accustomed to fy●●e for pearls being but little and narrow, will not in short time be utterly without oysters if they consume them so fast, they all answered me, that although they be consumed in one part, yet if they go a fishing in an other part or an other coast of the Island, or at an other contrary wind, and continue fishing there also until the oysters be likewise consumed, and then return again to the first place, or any other place where they fysshed before and emptied the same in like manner, they find them again as full of oysters as though they had never been fysshed. 
Of this read more largely in the decades.  Whereby we may judge that these oysters either remove from one place to an other as do other fishers, or else that they are engendered and increase in certain ordinary places. This Island of Cumana and Cubagua where they fish for these pearls, is in the twelve degree of the part of the said coast which inclineth toward the North. Likewise pearls are found and gathered in the South sea called Mare deal Sur. And the pearls of this sea are very big. Yet not so big as they of the Island of pearls called de las perlas, or Margaritea, which the Indians call Terarequi, lying in the gulf of saint Michael, where greater pearls are found and of greater price than in any other coast of the north sea, in Cumana, or any other part. I speak this as a true testimony of sight, having been long in that South sea, and making curious inquisition to be certainly informed of all that pertaineth to the fishing of pearls. From this Island of Tararequi, 
By the computation of venice four gra●nes make a carette.  there was brought a pearl of the fashion of a peace, weighing xxxi carats, which Petrus Arias had among a thousand and so many pounds weight of other pearls which he had when captain Gaspar Morales (before Petrus Arias) passed to the said Island in the year .1515. which pearl was of great prize. From the said Island also, came a great and very round pearl, which I brought out of that sea. This was as big as a smaule pellet of a stone bow, and of the weight of xxvi cacattes. I bought it in the city of Panama in the sea of Sur: And paid for it two hundredth and fifty times the weight thereof of good gold, and had it three years in my custody: and after my return into Spain, sold it to th'earl of Nansao marquess of Zenete, great chamberlain to your majesty, who gave it to the marquess his wife, the lady Mentia of Mendozza. I think verily that this pearl was the greatest, fairest, and roundest that hath been seen in those parts. For your majesty ought to understand that in the coast of the sea of Sur, there are found a hundredth great pearls round after the fashion of a pear, to one that is perfectly round and great. This Island of Terarequi, which the Christians call the Island of pearls, & other call it the Island of flouts, is found in the eight degree on the south side of the firm land in the province of golden Castyle or Beragua. And these are the coasts of the firm land where pearls are found even unto this day. I understand also that there are pools found in the province and Islands of Cartageni●. And ●ence your majesty appointed me a governor and capitain, I have made further search, and am advertised that peatles are found in divers other places as about the Island of Godego which lieth against the mouth of that port of the Island of Carta●enia which the Indians cawl Coro. The which Island and port, are on the North side in the tenth degree of the coasts of the firm land.   

¶ Of the familiarity which certain of the Indians have with the devil, and how they receive answer of him of things to come.  
WHen the Indians begin their batrayle, or go to any combat or attempt any other great matter, they have certain elect men whom they reverendely esteem and call them Tequ●nas, which in their tongue is as much to say as masters. notwithstanding that they call every man that is cunning in any science, by the same name, as fishers, fowlers, hunters, or makers of nets. These Tequinas therefore, they call the masters of their answers because they speak with Tuyra, that is th● devil, and bring them answer what he saith, either as touching such things as they have to do or shall chance to them the day following, or many days to come. For the devil being so ancient an Astronomer, knoweth the times of things and seeth how they are naturally directed and inclined. And maketh them believe that they come so to pass by his ordinance, as though he were the lord and mover of all that is and shallbe: And that he giveth the day light and ●ayne: causeth tempest and ruleth the stations of times, giving life or taking away life at his pleasure. By reason whereof, the Indians being deceived of him, and seeing also such effects to come certainly to pass as he hath told them before, believe him in all other things and honour him in many places with sacrifices of the blood and lives of men and odoriferous spices. And when god disposeth the contrary to that which the devil hath spoken in oracle whereby he is proved a liar, he causeth the Taquin●s to persuade the people that he hath changed his mind and sentence for sum of their sins, or deviseth sum such lie as liketh him best, being a skilful master in such subtle and crafty devices to deceive the simple and ignorant people which hath smaule defence against so mighty and crafty an adversary. And as they call the devil Tuyra, so do they in many places call the Christians by the same name, thinking that they greatly honour them thereby, as in deed it is a name very feet and agreeable to many of them, having laid apart all honesty and virtue, living more like dragons than men among these simple people.  
Before thinhabitants of the Island of Hispaniola had received the Christian faith there was among them a sect of men which lived solytarily in the deserts and woods and led their life in silence and abstinence more straightly than ever did the philosophers of Pythagoras' sect, abstaining in like manner from the eating of all things that live by blood contented only with such fruits, herbs, and roots as the deserts and woods ministered unto them to eat. The professors of this sect were called Piaces. They gave them selves to the knowledge of natural things, and used certain secret magical operations and superstitions whereby they had familiarity with spirits which they alured into their own bodies at such times as they would take upon them to tell of things to come, which they did in manner as followeth. When any of the k●nges had occasion to call any of them out of the deserts for this purpose, their custom was to send them a portion of their fine bread of Caxabbi or M●azium, and with humble request and suit to desire them to tell them of such things as they would demand. After the request granted and the place and day appointed, the Plari coometh with two of his disciples waiting on him, whereof the one bringeth with him a vessel of a secret water, and the other a little silver bell. When he coommeth to the place, he sitteth down on a round seat made for him of purpose. Where having his disciples the one standing on the one hand and the other on the other even in the presence of the king and certain of his nobles (for the common people are not admitted to these mysteries) and turning his face toward the desert, he beginneth his enchantment and cauleth the spirit with loud voice by certain names which no man understandeth but he and his disciples. After he hath done thus a while, if the spirit yet defer his coomming, he drinketh of the said water, and therewith waxeth hot and furious, and inverteth and turneth his enchantment, and letteth himself blood with a thorn, marvelously turmoiling himself as we read of the furious Sybilles' not ceasing until the spirit be come: who at his coomming entereth into him and overthroweth him as it wear a greyhound should overturn a squerell. Then for a space, he seemeth to lie as though he were in great pain or in a rapt, wonderfully tormenting himself, during which agony, the other disciple shaketh the silver bell continually. Thus when the agony is paste and he lieth quietly (yet without any sense or feeling) the king or sum other in his stead, demandeth of him what he desireth to know, and the spirit answereth by the mouth of the rapt Piaces with a direct and perfect answer to all points. In so much that on a time certain spaniards being present at these mysteries with one of the kings, and in the Spanish tongue demanding the Piaces of their ships which they looked for out of Spain, the spirit answered in the Indian tongue, and told them what day and hour the sh●ppes departed from Spain, how many they were, and what they brought without failing in any point. If he be also demanded of the eclipse of the son or moon (which they greatly fear and abhor) he giveth a perfect answer, and the like of tempests, famen, plenty, war or peace, and such other things. When all the demands are finished, his disciples call him aloud, ringing the silver bell at his ear and blowing a certain powder into his nostrils whereby he is raised as it we●e from a deadesscape being yet somewhat heavy headed and faint a good while afect. Thus being again r●w●●●ded of t●●cky●ge with more bread, he departeth again to the desert is with his disciples. But sense the Christian faith hath been dispersed through out the Island, these devil 〈◊〉 pr●ouses have ceased, and they of the members of the devil, are made the members of christ by baptism, forsaking the devil and his works, with the vain curiosity o● desire of knowledge of things to come, whereof for the most part it is better to be ignorant then with vexation to know that which can not be avoided.  
Furthermore; in many places of the firm land, when any of the kings die, all his household servants, aswell women as men which have continually served him, kill themselves, believing as they are taught by the devil Tuyra, that they which kill themselves when the king dieth, go with him to heaven and seen him in the same place and office as they did before on the earth while he lived. And that all that refuse so to do, when after they die by their natural death or otherwise, their souls to die with their bodies and to be dissolved into air and become nothing us do the souls of hogs, birds, or fishes or other brute beasts. And that only the other may enjoy the privilege of immortality for ever to serve the king in heaven. And of this false opinion cometh it that they which sow corn or set roots for the kings bread, and gather the same, are accustomed to kill themselves that they may enjoy this privilege in heaven. And for the same purpose, cause a portion of the grain of Maizium and a bundle of jucca (whereof their bread is made) to be buried with them in their graves that the same may serve them in heaven if perhaps there should lack seeds to sow. And therefore they take this with them to begin with all, until Tuyra (who maketh them all these fair promises) provide them of greater quantity. This have I myself seen in the top of the mountains of Guaturo, where having in prison the king of that province (who rebelled from th'obedience of your majesty) and demanding of him to whom pertained those sepultures or graves which I saw in his hou●e, he answered that they were of certain Indians which ●●ewe themselves at the death of his father. And because they are oftentimes accustomed to bury great quantities of wrought gold with them, I caused two graves to be opened, wherein was nothing found but a vessel full of the grain of Maizium, and a bundle of jucca as I have said. And demanding the cause hereof of the king and the other Indians, they answered that they that were buried there, were the labourers of the ground, and men skilful in sowing of seeds and making of bread, and servants to the kings father. And to th'end that their souls should not die with their bodies, they slew themselves at the death of the king their master to live with him in heaven. And to th'intent that they might seen him there in the same office they reserved that Maizium and jucca to sow it in heaven.  
Whereunto I answered them in this manner. Behold how your Tuyra deceiveth you? And how all that he teacheth you is false? Yowe see how in so long a time sense they are dead, they have not yet taken away this Maizium and jucca which is now putrefied and worth nothing, and not like to be sown in heaven. To this the king replied, saying. In that they have not taken it away nor sown it in heaven, the cause is that they chanced to find enough there, by reason whereof they had no need of this. To this error many things were said which seemed of little force to remove him from his false opinion, and especially any such as at that age are occupied of the devil, whom they paint of the self same form and colour as he appeareth unto them in divers shapes and forms. They make also Images of gold, copper and wood, to the same similitudes in terrible shapes and so variable as the painters are accustomed to paint them at the feet of saint Mychaell th'archangel or in any other place where they paint them of most horrible portiture. Likewise when the devil greatly intendeth to fear them, he threateneth to send them great tempests which they call Fu●acanas or Haurachanas, and are so vehement that they overthrow many houses and great trees. And I have seen in mountains full of many and great trees, th●t for the space of three quarters of a league the mountain hath been subverted and the trees overthrown and plucked out of the earth with the roots: a thing doubtless so fearful and terrible to behold, that it may verily appear to be done by the hand of the devil. And in this case the Christian men ought to consider with good reason, that in all places where the holy sacrament is reserved, the said tempests are no more so owtragious, or so perilous as they were wont to be.   

¶ Of the temperature of the regions under or near to the burned live called Torrida zona or the Equinoctial: and of the divers seasons of the year.  
THe lands and regions that are near about the climes of the Equinoctial line, are naturally hot, although they be otherwise temperate by the divine providence. And therefore such flesh or fish as is taken and killed in these regions, can not be preserved from putrefaction except it be toasted, sodden, or parboiled, the same day that it is killed. And whereas I have said that such regions are naturally hot, and yet temperate by the providence of god, it is so in deed. And therefore not without cause the ancient authors were of opinion that the burnt line or Torrida zona where passeth the line of the Equinoctial, should be unhabitable by reason the son hath greater dominion in that place then in any other of the sphere, remaining continually between the two tropykes of Cancer and Capricorn. For when in these regions the earth is opened or digged from the superficial part thereof to the depth of a man's height, it is found temperate. And within this space, the trees and plants fasten and spread their roots, and no dieper. Extending the same as far in breadth in the ground as do the●r branches in the air: And enter no dieper into the ground than I have said, because that beneath the depth of the said space of a man's height, the earth is very hot, the upper part being temperate and very moist aswell by reason of thabundance of water which falleth from heaven upon that earth at certain ordinary seasons of the year, as also for the multitude of great rivers, brooks, springs and marishes, whereby the mighty and supreme lord which made the●e lands, hath most prudently provided for the preservation of the same.  
R. E. As touching this point which was unknown to the owlde writers, and without consideration whereof rea●on can not perfectly conceive how temperate regione should be under the Equinoctial line. I have thought good for the better manifesting of this recreate work of nature, to note out of Cardanus his book de Elementis, how all waters have their cour●e toward the South as to the lowest part of the earth. he waiteth therefore as followeth. The water was made of less quantity than the earth and only in manner in the superficial part thereof, that place might be left for the habitation of beasts, and that water by his coldness might temperate and not destroy the life of beasts. And because this generation of living creatures, was only necessary on the superficial parts of the earth in comparison to the hole, therefore was the water made to occupy only the superficial part, in the which, metals, plants, beasts, and fishes should be nuryshed. And because there was great peril lest it should be to much consumed by the air and heat of the son, continual moving was joined to it, whereby it gathereth cou●denes and is preserved from sudden resolution. For such waters as do not move▪ do soon putrefy, and are easily resolved into air. By reason whereof nature provided for the generation of water in could places, as under the coals and mountains. And whereas the earth under the Equinoctial shu●de otherwise for lack of moister have been to much burned and scorched▪ nature also provided that that part of the earth should be lowest, by reason whereof all waters have their course toward the South to mitigate with moister th'extremity of heat which otherwise should have been intolerable in that c●yme. And by this reason, the famous river of Nilus in egypt, albeit it have his original and spring, out of the mountains of the moan called Montes Lunae near unto the circle of Caprico●ne, yet running with all his branches under and beyond the Equinoctial circle, ●t di●parseth through out the burnt line of Torrida ●ona, and by the same violent course falleth into hour sea near unto the city of Alexandria. It was necessary therefore that the greatest part of the could and moist element should have recourse thither and consist there, whereas was the greatest necessity thereof to temper the heat of the son by moisting and coolyn●e the earth and the air, as under the Equinoctial. And herewith also hath most prudent nature provided for the security and preservation of the places lying between both thextremities of heat and cold, as between the poles and the Equinoctial. For the waters flowing ever one ways and keeping one course, no regions can be drowned by studs: which thing they well observe that deliver fields from inundations or ou●rflowynges, and that take in hand to dry up marishes It therefore waters had not their cour●e and fault toward places low● or declining, the hole casth should be overflown as a marrysshe And that the most declining part should be toward the South, and somewhat higher about the poles, the cause is aswell the consuming dear of the son in the South● parts, as the preserving could of the high mountains near to the poles. For we have else where proved that heat consumeth and wasteth as could gathereth and preserveth. And for this cause that part of the earth that is nearest the poles, is, was, and ever shallbe highest, and likewise lowest in the midst furthest from the poles. And therefore it was not convenient that the son should ●aue his course on every side, neither to the poles. For if it wear ●●ryed alike to every part throughowt the world, it is necessary ●hat the earth be equal: and by that reason should it either be altogether dried, or else all overflowed with water. But where as this could not suffice to the free course of rivers for the often intercourse of higher places lying in the way, whereby overflowings and stays of waters and their corruption might ensue, most provident nature hath given this privilege to water that it may so much ascend as it hath descended: that by his means passing over mountains and hills, it may at the length be carried into the sea. etc. hitherto Cardanus, let us now return to the history.  
There are also many rough and high mountains with temperate air and pleasant, clear, and moderate nights. Of the which particularity the ancient writers having no certain knowledge, affirmed the said burnt line or Torrida zona, or Equinoctial to be naturally unhabitable. As touching which thing I am able to witness the contrary by testimony of sight and feeling as by most certain senses, having lived many years in this regions, by reason whereof better credit ought to be given to me then to such as have grounded their opinion only upon conjectures. And to speak further of the situation of these regions, you shall understand that the coast of the north sea, being in the gulf of Vraba and in the port of Dariena, where the ships arrive which come out of Spain, is in the sixth degree and a half, and in the seventh, and from six and a half unto eight, except a smaule point which entereth into the sea toward the North That point which of this land and new part of the world lieth most toward the East, is the cape of saint Augustine which is in the eight degree. So that the said gulf of Vraba is distant from the Equinoctial line, from a hundredth and twenty to a hundredth and thirty leaques and three quarters of a leaque after thaccount of xvii leaques and a half for every degree from pole to pole. And thus for a little more or less, goeth all the coast. By reason whereof, in the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, and in all that course of the foresaid gulf of Vraba, at all times of the yea●e the days and nights are in manner of equal length. And if there be any difference between them by reason of this smaule distance from the Equinoctial, it is so little, that in xxiiii hours making a natural day, it can not be perceived but by the judgement of speculative men and such as understand the sphere. From hence the North star is seen very low And when the stars which are called the wardens of the north star, are under the chariot, it can not be seen, because it is under the horisontal. And whereas I have said before that it raineth in these regions at certain ordinary times, it is so in deed. For it is winter and summer there at contrary times to that which is in Spain, where the greatest could of frost and rain is in December and january: And the greatest heat of summer about saint johannes day at midsummer or in the month of july. But in golden Castille or Beragua, it is contrary. For the summer and time of greatest drowght and without rain, is at christmas and a month before and a month after. And the time when it raineth most, is about midsummer and a month before and a month after. And this season which they call winter, is not for that it is any colder then, then at any other time of the year, or hotter at Christmas then at other seasons, the time in these regions being ever after one manner, but for that that in this time which they call winter, the son is hid from their sights by reason of clouds and rain more than at other times. Yet forasmuch as for the most part of the year they live in a clear, open, and temperate air, they somewhat shrink and feel a little could during the time of the said moist and cloudy air, although it be not could in deed, or at the least such could as hath any sensible sharpness.   

¶ Of divers particular things, as worms, serpents, beasts, fowls, trees, etc.  
MAny other things might be said, & much differing from these whereof I have spoken. But to let pass the multitude of things which are as variable as the power of nature is infinite, and to speak of such things as come chiefly to my remembrance as most worthy to be noted, I will first speak of terteyne little and troublous beasts which may● seem to be engendered of nature to molest and vex men, to show them and give them to understand how small and vile a thing may offend and disquiet them, to th'end that they may remember the principal end for the which they were created, that is, to know their maker and procurer of their salvation by the way which is open to all Christian men and all other which will open the eyes of their understanding. And although the things whereof we intend now to speak may seem vile and little to be esteemed, yet are they worthy to be noted and considered to understand the difference and variable works of nature. So it is therefore, that whereas in many parts of the firm land by the which aswell the Christians as Indians do travel, there are such marishes and waters in the way that they are fain to go without breeches among the herbs and weeds, by reason whereof, certain smaule beasts or worms (which they call Garapates) much like unto tykes, cleave fast to their legs. These worms are as little as the powder of beaten salt: And cleave so fast that they can by no means be taken away except the place be nointed with oil. And after that the legs be nointed awhile with oil, or the other parts where these little tykes are fastened, they scrape the place with a knife and so take them away. But the indians which have no oil, smoke them and burn them with fire, and abide great pains in taking them away by this means. Of other little beasts which trouble men and are engendein their heads or other ports of their bodies, I say that the Christian men which travel into these parts, have them but seldom times, and that not past one or two, and this also very seldom. For passing by the line of the Diameter where the compass maketh difference of sailing by the wind called Greco, (that is North East) and Magistral, (that is south west) which is in the course of the Islands of Azori, they sail but a little way following hour viage by the west, but that all the ly●e which the Christians carry with them, or are engendered in their heads or other places of their bodies, die and utterly consume by little and little, and are not engendered in India except in the heads of little children in those parts aswell among the children of the Christians which are borne there, as also among the natural Indians who have them commonly in their heads and sometimes in other parts of their bodies, and especially they of the province of Cueva, which is a region containing more than a hundredth leaques in length, and embraceth the one and the other coast of the North sea and of the East. When these Indians are infected with this filthiness, they dress and cleanse one an other. And they that exercise this, are for th● most part women who eat all that they take: And have herein such dexterity by reason of their exercise, that hour men can not lightly attain thereunto. There is also another thing greatly to be considered. And this is how the Christian men being there clean from this filthiness of India, aswell in their heads as the rest of their bodies, yet when they return to come again into Europe and begin to arrive in that place of the Ocean sea where we said befor● that the lice died and forsook them, suddenly in their repassing by the same clime (as though the lice had tarried for them in that place) they can by no means avoid them for the ●pace of certain days although they change their shirts two or three times in a day. These lice are at the first as little as nyttes, and grow by little and little until they be of the bigness that they are in Spain. This have I often times proved, having now four times pa●●ed the Ocean sea by this viage.  
Beside these worms and vermyn whereof we have spoken, there is another little mischievous worm, which we may number among the kinds of freas, This pestilence the Indians cawl Nigua: 
Nigua.  And is much less than a flea. It perse●h the flesh of a man, and so launseth or cutteth the same (while in the mean time it can neither be seen nor taken) that from sum it hath cut of their hands, and from other their fiete until the remedy was found to anoint the place with oil and scrape it with a razor.  
In the firm land in golden Castyle or Beragua, there are many vipers like unto them of Spain. 
Uypers,  They that a●e bitten of them, die in short space. For few live to the fourth day except present remedy. Of these, sum are of a le●●e k●nd than other: And have their tail somewhat round, and leap in the air to assail men. And for this cause, sum call this kind of vipers Tyro. Their biting is most venomous, and for the most part incurable. One of them chanced to bite an Indian maid which served me in my house, to whom I caused the surgians to minister their ordinary cure, but they could do her no good, nor yet get one drop of blood out of her, but only a yellow water, so that she died the third day for lack of remedy as the like hath chanced to divers other. This maid was of th'age of xiiii years and spoke the spanish tongue as if she had been borne in Castyle. She said that the viper which bit her on the foot, was two spans long or little le●se. And that to bite her she leapt in the air for the space of more than six paces, as I have hard the like of other credible persons.  
I have also seen in the firm land, a kind of adders very smaule and of seven or eight foot long. 
Adders.  These are so red that in the night they appear like burning cools, and in the day seem as red as blood. These are also venomous, but not so much as the vipers. There are other much less and shorter and blacker. These come out of the rivers and wander sometimes far on the land, and are likewise venomous. There are also other adders of a russet colour. These are somewhat bigger than the vipers, and are hurtful and venomous. There are likewise an other sort of many colours and very long. Of these I saw one in the year of Christ 1515. in the Island of Hispaniola near unto the sea costs at the foot of the mountains called Pedernales. When this adder was slain, I measured her and found her to be more than twenty foot long, and somewhat more than a man's fist in bigness. And although she had three or four deadly wounds with a sword, yet died she not nor stoonke the same day, in so much that her blood continued warm all that tyme. There are also in the marishes and deserts of the firm land many other kinds of lysertes, dragons, 
Dragons,  and other divers kinds of serpents whereof I intend not here to speak much, because I have more particularly entreated of these things in my general history of the West Indies.  
There are also spiders of marvelous bygnessse. 
Spiders,  And I have seen sum with the body and legs, bigger than a man's hand extended every way, And I ones saw one of such bigness, that only her body was as big as a sparrow, and full of that lawn whereof they make their webs. This was of a dark russette colour, with eyes great then the eyes of a sparrow. They are venomous and of terrible shape to behold. There are also scorpions and divers other such venomous worms. Whereby we may see, that where as natural causes and influence of the planets are of strongest activity, they cease not to engender and bring forth both good and bad according to the disposition of the matter, which they also do partly dispose as the philosophers affirm.  
Furthermore in the firm land, there are many toads being very noyous and hurtful by reason of their great multitude. They are not venomous. They are seen in great abundance in Dariena where they are so big that when they die in the time of drought, the bones of sum of them (and especially the rib) are of such greatness that they appear too be the bones of cats or of sum other beasts of the same bigness. But as the waters diminish and the moisture consumeth in the time of drought (as I have said) they also consume therewith until the year next following when the rain and moisture increase, at which time they are seen again. Nevertheless, at this present, there is no such quantity of them as was wont to be, by reason that as the land is better cultured by the Christians, as well by the felling of woods and shrubs as also by the pasture of kine, horses, and other beasts, so is it apparent that this poison diminisheth daily, whereby that region becometh more wholesome and pleasant. These toads sing after three or four sorts. For sum of them sing pleasantly: other, like ours of Spain. sum also whistle: and other sum make an other manner of noise. They are likewise of divers colours: as sum green, sum russette or grey, and sum almost black. But of all sorts, they are great, and filthy, and noyous by reason of their great multitude: yet are they not venomous as I have said.  
There are also a strange kind of crabs, 
Crabbe●.  which come forth of certain holes of the earth that they themselves make. The head and body of these, make one round thing much like unto the hood of a fawkon: having four feet coming out of the one side and as many out of the other. They have also two mouths like unto a pair of smaule pincers, the one bigger than the other, wherewith they bite, but do no great hurt because they are not venomous. Their skin and body is smooth and thin as is the skin of a man, saving that it is somewhat harder. Their colour is russette or white, or blewe, and walk sydelonge. They are very good to be eaten: In so much that the Christians travailing by the firm land, have been greatly nurysshed by them because they are found in manner every where. In shape and form, they are much like unto the crab which we paint for the sign Cancer, and like unto those which are found in Spain in Andalusia in the river Guadalchiber where it entereth into the sea, and in the sea coasts thereabout, saving that these are of the water and the other of the land. They are sometimes hurtful, so that they that eat of them die. But this chanceth only when they have eaten any venomous thing, or of the venomous apples wherewith the Canibale archers poison their arrows whereof I will speak hereafter. And for this cause the Christians take heed how they eat of these crabs if they find them near unto the said apple trees.  
Furthermore in these Indies, aswell in the firm land as in the Islands, there is found a kind of serpents, which they call Y. V anas, which sum call juannas. 
Serpent's called Iuan●i.  These are terrible and fearful to sight, and yet not hurtful. They are very delicate to be eaten, and it is not yet known whether they be beasts of the land or fishes, because they live in the water, and wander in the woods and on the land. They have four feet, and are commonly bigger than coneyes and in sum places bigger than otters, with tails like lisartes or eutes. Their skin is spotted, and of the same kind of smoothness or bareness, although of divers colours. Upon the ridge of their backs, they have many long pricks. Their teeth● are very sharp, and especially their fangs or dog teeth. Their throats are long and large, reaching from their beards to their breasts, of the like skin to the residue of their bodies. They are dumb, and have no voice or make any noise or cry although they be kept tied to the foot of a chest or any other thing for the space of twenty or xxv days without any thing to eat or drink, except they give them now and then a little of the bread of Cazabbi, or sum such other thing. They have four feet, and their fore feet as long as a man's finger with claws like the claws of a bird, but weaker, and such as can not grasple or take hold of any thing. They are much better to be eaten then to behold. For few that see them, will have desire to eat of them, by reason of their horrible shape except such as have been accustomed to the beasts of these regions, which are more horrible and fearful, as this is not but only in appearance. Their flesh is of much better taste than the flesh of connyes and more wholesome. For it hurteth none but only such as have had the frenshe pox. In so much that if they have only been touched of that infirmity, although they have been hole of long time, nevertheless they feel hurt and complain of the eating of these juannas, as hath been often times proved by experience.  
There are found in the firm land certain birds so little that the hole body of one of them is no bigger than the top of the bigest finger of a man's hand: 
Birds.  and yet is the hare body without the feathers not passed half so big. This bird, beside her lyttlenes, 
A very little bird.  is of such velocity and swiftness in flying that who so seeth her sleing in the air, can not see her flap or beat her wings after any other sort than do the dorres or humble bees or beetles: so that there is no man that see●h her fly, that would think her to be any other than a dorre. They make their nests according to the proportion of their bigness. And I have scene that one of these birds with her nest put in a pair of gold weights, altogether hath ward no more than two. Tomini, which are in poise .24. grams, with the feathers w●th out the which she should have weighed somewhat le●se. And doubt less when I consider the fineness of the claws and feet of these birds, I know not whereunto I may better liken them then to the little birds which the lymmers of books are accustomed to paint on the margentes of church books and other books of divine service. Their feathers are of many fair colours as golden yellow and green beside other variable colours. Thei● beak is very long for the proportion of their bodies: and as fine and subtle as a sowing needle. They are very hardy: so that when they see a man climb the tree whe●e they have their nests, they ●lye at his face and strike him in the eyes, coming, going, and returning with such swiftness, that no man would lightly believe it that hath not seen it. And certainly these birds are so little, that I durst not have made mention hereof if it were not that divers other which have seen them as well as I, can bear witness of my saying. They make their nests of flocks and hear of cotton whereof there is great plenty in these regions, and serveth well for their purpose. But as touching the birds, fowls, and beasts of these Indies, because they are innumerable both little and great, I intend not to speak much hear, because I have spoken more largely hereof in my general history of the Indies.  
There is an other kind of beasts seen in the firm land which seemed very strange and marvelous to the Christian men to behold, 
Beasts.  and much differing from all other beasts which have been seen in other parts of the world. These beasts are called Bardati: 
Bardati.  And are four footed, having their rail and all the rest of their bodies covered only with a skin like the coperture of a barbed horse or the chequered skin of a lysarte or Crocodyle, of colour between white and russet, inclining somewhat more to white. This beast, is of form and shape much like to a barbed horse with his barbs and flankettes in all points. And from under that which is the barb and coperture, the tail cometh forth, and the feet in their place, the neck also and the ears in their parts, and in fine all things in like sort as in a barbed courser. They are of the bygnes of one of these common dogs. They are not hurtful. They are filthy, and have their habitation in certain hillocks of earth where digging with there feet they make their dens very deep & the holes thereof in like manner as do connyes. They are very excellent to be eaten, and are taken with nets and sum also killed with crossbows. They are likewise taken often times when the husband men bury the stubble in sowing time, or to renew the herbage for kine and other beasts. I have often times eaten of their flesh which seemeth to me of better taste than kids flesh, and wholesome to be eaten. And if these beasts had ever been seen in these parts of the world where the first barbed horses had their original, no man would judge but that the form and fashion of the coperture of horses furnished for the wars was first devised by the sight of these beasts.  
There is also in the firm land an other beast called Orso Formigaro that is, the Ant bear. 
Bears.  This beast in hear and colour, is much like to the bear of Spain, and in manner of the same making save that he hath a much longer snout and is of evil sight. They are often times taken only with slaves without any other weapon, and are not hurtful. They are also taken with dogs because they are not naturally armed although they bite somewhat. They are found for the most part about and near to the hyllockes where are great abundance of ants. 
Ants.  For in these regions is engendered a certain kind of ants very little and black, in the fields and plains where as grow no trees, where by thinstinct of nature these ants separate themselves to engender far from the woods for fear of these bears: The which because they are fearful, vile, and unarmed (as I have said) they keep ever in places full of trees until very famen and necessity, or the great desire that they have to fiede of these ants, cause them to come out of the woods to hunt for them. These ants make a hillock of earth to the height of a man, or somewhat more or less, and as big as a great chest, and sometimes as big as a butt or a hogs head, and as hard as a stone: So that they seem as though they were stones set up to lymytte th'ends and confines of certain lands.  
Within these hyllockes made of most hard earth, are innumerable and infinite little ants, the which may be gathered by bushels when the hillock is broken. The which when it is sometimes moisted by rain and then dried again by the heat of the soon, it breaketh and hath certain small rifts as little and subtile as the edge of a knife. And it seemeth that nature hath given sense to these Ants to find such a matter of earth wherewith they may make the said hillock of such hardness that it may seem a strong pavement made of lime and stone. And whereas I have proved and caused sum of them to be broken, I have found them of such hardness as if I had not seen I could not have believed: In so much that they could scarcely be broken with pikes of Iren: So strong fortresses do these little beasts make for their safeguard against their adversary the bear, who is chiefly nurysshed by them, and given them as an enemy, according to the common proverb which saith, Non ●alcun● persona filibera, a chim●nchi il suo Bargello: That is, there is no man so free that hath not his persecutor or privy enemy. And here when I consider the marvelous providence which nature hath given to these little bodies, I call to remembrance the witty sentence of Pliny, where speaking of such little beasts, he saith thus. Why do we marvel at the towrebearing shoulders of Elephants, and not rather where nature hath placed so many senses and such industry in such little bodies? where is hearing, smelling, seeing, and feeling, ye, where are the veins & arteries (without which no beast can live or move) in these so little bodies whereof sum are so smaule that their hole bodies can scarcely be seen of our eyes, what shall we then say of the parts of the same? Yet even among these are there many of such sagacity and industry as the like is not seen in beasts of greater quantity, no nor yet in man. etc. But to return to the history. This enemy which nature hath given to these little beasts, useth this manner to assail them. When he resortethe to the hillock where the ants lie hid as in their fortress, he putteth his tongue to one of the rifts whereof we have spoken being as subtile as the edge of a sword, and there with continual lycking, maketh the place moist, the foam and froth of his mouth being of such property that by continual lycking the place, it enlargeth the rift in such sort by little and little, that at the length he easily putteth in his tongue which he hath very long and thin, and much disproportionate to his body. And when he hath thus made free passage for his tongue into the hillock to put it easily in and out at his pleasure, than he thrusteth it into the hole as far as he can reach, and so letteth it rest a good space until a great quantity of the ants (whose nature rejoiceth in heat and moister) have laden his tongue and as many as he can contain in the hollowness thereof: at which time he suddenly draweth it into his mouth and eateth them, and returneth again to the same practice immediately until he have eaten as many as him lysteth, or as long as he can reach any with his tongue. The flesh of this beast, is filthy and unsavoury. But by reason of th'extreme shifts and necessity that the Christian men were put to at their first coming into these parts, they were enforced to prove all things and so fell to theating of these beasts. But when they had found more delicate meats, they fell into hatred with this. These ants have thappearance of the place of their entrance into the hillock, under the ground. And this at so little a hole that it could hardly be found if certain of them were not seen to pass in and out. But by this way the bears could have no such pour to hurt them as above at the said rifts as I have said. There is an other strange beast which by a name of contrary effect, 
A strange beast which seemeth a kind of Chameleon.  the spaniards call Cagnuolo leggiero, that is the light dog, whereas it is one of the slowest beasts in the world, and so heavy and dull in moving that it can scarcely go fifty paces in a hole day. These beasts are in the firm land, and are very strange to behold for the disproportion that they have to all other beasts. They are about two spans in length when they are grown to their full bigness. But when they are very young, they are somewhat more gross then long. They have four subtile fiete, and in every of them four claws like unto birds, and joined together. Yet are neither their claws or their fiete able to sustain their bodies from the ground. By reason whereof and by the heaviness of their bodies, they draw their bellies on the ground. Their necks are high and straight and all equal like the pestle of a mortar, which is altogether equal even unto the top without making any proportion or similitude of a head, or any difference except in the noddle. And in the tops of their necks, they have very round faces much like unto owls: And have a mark of their own hear after the manner of a circle which maketh their faces seem somewhat more long than large. They have smaule eyes and round: And nostrylles like unto monkeys. They have little mouths, and move their necks from one side to an other as though they were astonysshed. Their chief desire and delight is to cleave and stick fast unto trees or sum other thing whereby they may climb aloft. And therefore for the most part, these beasts are found upon trees whereunto cleaving fast, they mount up by little and little, steyinge themselves by their long claws. The colour of their hear, is between russet and white, and of the proper colour of the hear of a weasel. They have no tails, and their voice is much differing from other beasts: for they sing only in the night: And that continually from time to time singing ever six notes one higher than an other, so falling with the same that the first note is the highest and the other in a base tewne as if a man should say La, sol, fa, mi, re, ut. So this beast saith, Ha, ha, ha, ha, ha ha. And doubtless, it seemeth unto me, that as I have said in the chapter of the beast called Bardari, that those beasts might be th'original and document to imbarbe horses, even so the first inventure of music might seem by the hearing of this beast to have the first principles of that science rather than by any other thing in the world. But now to return to the history: I say that in a short space after this beast hath soonge and hath paused a while, she returneth again to the self same song, and doth this only in the night and not in the day. By reason whereof and also because of her evil sight, I think her to be a night beast and the friend of darkness. sometimes the Christian men find these beasts and bring them home to their houses, where also they creep all about with their natural slowness, in so much that neither for threatening or pricking they will move any faster than their natural and accustomed pace. And if they find any trees, they creep thither immediately, and mount to the top of the highest branch thereof, where they remain continually for the space of eight, or ten, or twenty days without eating of any thing as far as any man can judge. And whereas I myself have kept them in my house, I could never perceive other but that they live only of air. And of the same opinion are in manner all men of those regions, because they have never seen them eat any thing, but ever turn their heads and mouths toward that part where the wind blows most: whereby may be considered that they take most pleasure in the air. They bite not, nor yet can bite, having very little mouths. They are not venomous or noyous any way: but altogether brutish and utterly unprofitable and without commodity yet known to men, saving only to move their minds to contemplate thinfinite pour of god, who delighteth in the variety of creatures, whereby appeareth the power of his incomprehensible wisdom and majesty so far to exceed the capacity of man's understanding.  
In these regions there are likewise found certain fowls or birds which the Indians call Alcatraz. 
Fowls, and birds,  
Alcatraz,  These are much bigger than geese. The greatest part of their feathers are of russet colour, and in sum parts yellow. Their bills or beaks are of two spans in length and very large near to the head, and growing smaule toward the point. They have great and large throats: And are much like to a foul which I saw in Flaunders in Brussels in your majesties palace which the flemings call Haina. And I remember that when your majesty dined one day in your great haule there was brought to your majesties presence a chauderne of water with certain fishes alive, which the said foul did eat up hole. And I think verily that that foul was a foul of the sea because she had fiete like fowls of the water as have also these Alcatrazi, which are likewise fowls of the sea: and of such greatness that I have seen a hole cote of a man put into the throats of one of them in Panama in the year 1521. And forasmuch as in that coast of Panama, 
Panama.  there passeth and flieth a great multitude of these Alcatrazi being a thing very notable, I will declare the manner hereof as not only I, but also divers other now present in your majesties court have often times seen. your majesty shall therefore understand that in this place (as I have said before) the sea or Sur riseth and falleth two leagues and more from six hours to two hours: so that when it increaseth, the water of the sea arriveth so near to the houses of Panama as doth hour sea (called Mare Mediteraneum) in Barzalona or in Naples. And when the said increasing of the sea cometh, there cometh also therewith such a multitude of the smaule fishes called sardines, that it is so marvelous a thing to behold, that no man would believe it that hath not seen it. In so much that the Cacique, (that is) the king of that land at such time as I dwelled there, was bound daily as he was commanded by your majesties governor, to bring ordinarily three canoas or barks full of the said sardines and to unlade the same in the market place, which were afterward by the ruler of the city divided among the Christian men without any cost or charge to any of them. In so much that if the people had been a much greater multitude than they were, and as many as are at this present in Toledo or more, and had none other thing to live by, they might have been sufficiently sustained by these sardines, bysyde thoverplus which should have remained. But to return to the fowls whereof we have spoken. As the sea cometh, and the sardines with the same, even so likewise come the said Alcatrazzi therewith: and fly continually over it in such a multitude, that they appear to cover th'upper part or flower of the water. And thus continue in mounting and falling from the air to the water, and from the water to the air during all the time of their fishing. And as soon as they have taken any of these sardines, they fly above the water and eat them incontinently, and suddenly return again to the water for more, continuing thus course by course with out ceasing. In like manner when the sea falleth, they follow there fishing as I have said. There goeth also in the company of these fowls, an other kind of fowls called Coda inforcata, (that is) the forked tail, whereof I have made mention before. And as soon as the Alcatraz mounteth from the water with her pray of the sardines, suddenly this Coda inforcata giveth her so many strokes, and so persecuteth her, that she causeth her to let faule the sardines which she hath in her mouth. The which as soon as they are fallen, and before they yet touch the water, the Coda inforcata catcheth them even in the fall, in such sort that it is a great pleasure to behold the combat between them all the day long. The number of these Alcatrazzi is such, that the Christian menn● are accustomed to send to certain Islands and rocks which are near about Panama, with their boats or barks to tak● these Alcatrazzi while they are yet young and can not fly: and kill as many of them with staves as they will, until they have therewith laden their barks or canoas. These young ones are so fat and well fed that they can not be eaten. And are taken for none other intent but only to make grease for candles to burn in the night, for the which purpose it serveth very well: and giveth a clear light, and burneth easily. After this manner and for this purpose, innumerable of them are killed. And yet it seemeth that the number of them that fish for sardines do daily increase  
There are other fowls called Passere sempie: 
P●ssere sempie.  that is, simple sparrows. These are somewhat less than semewes: and have their fiete like unto great malardes: And stand in the water sometimes. And when the ships sail fifty or a hundredth leaques about the Islands, these fowls beholding the ships coming toward them, break their flight and fall down upon the sail yards, masts, and cables thereof. And are so simple and foolish that they tarry until they may easily be taken with men's hands, and were therefore called of the mariners simple sparrows. They are black, and upon their black, have their head and shoulders of feathers of a dark russet colour. They are not good to be eaten, unless the mariners have sometimes been enforced to eat them.  
There is an other kind of birds in the firm land, which the Christians call Picuti, 
Picuti.  because they have very great beaks in respect of the lyttlenesse of their bodies: For their beaks are very heavy and way more than their hole boddyes bysyde. These birds are no bigger than quails, but have a much greater ambushment of feathers, in so much that their feathers are more than their bodies. Their feathers are very fair and of many variable colours. Their beaks are a quarter of a yard in length or more, and bending down toward the earth, and three fingers broad near unto the head. Their tongues are very quills, wherewith they make a great hissing. They make holes in trees with their beaks, in the which they make their nests. And surely these birds are marvelous to behold for the great difference which they have from all other birds that I have seen, aswell for their tongues (which are quills as I have said) as also for the strangeness of their sight and disproportion of their great beaks in respect of the rest of their bodies. There are no birds found that provide better for the safeguard of their young in the time of their breeding to be without danger of wild cats that they enter not into their nests to destroy their eggs or young. And this aswell by the strange manner of building their nests, as also by their own defence. And therefore when they perceive that the cats approach toward them, they ente● into their nests: and holding their beaks toward thentrance of the same, stand at their defence, and so vex the cats that they cause them to leave their enterprise.  
There are also other birds of sparrows, which the Christians by contrary effect call Matti, that is fools. Whereas nevertheless there is no bird that showeth more wit and craft in defending her young from peril. 
foolish sparrows.  These birds are little and in manner black, and somewhat bigger than hour thrusshes. They have certain white feathers in their necks, and the like sagacity or sharpness of sense as have the birds or pies called Gazzuole. They seldom times light upon the earth. They make their nests in trees separated from other, because the wild cats (called Mammoni) are accustomed to leap from tree to tree, not descending to the ground for fear of other beasts, except when they are enforced by thirst to come down to drink at such times as they are sure not to be molested. And for this cause do not these birds make their nests but in trees far divided from other. They make them of a cubit in length or more, after the manner of bags or little sacks, large at the bottom, and growing narrower and narrower toward the mouth whereby they are fastened: having the hole whereat they enter into the sack, of such bigness as may only suffice to releave them. And to th'end that the cats may not devour their young if they chance to mount upon the trees where they have their nests, they use an other craft, which is, to make their nests in thick branches of trees, and to defend the same with sharp and strong thorns implycate and set in such order that no man is able to make the like. So that the cats can by no means put their legs into the hole of the nest to take out the young birds, aswell for the sharpness of the thorns as also for the depth of the nests, in the bottom whereof, the young birds rest with out danger of their enemy. For sum of their nests being three or four spans in length, the leg of the cat can not reach to the bottom thereof. They use also an other policy: which is, to make many of their nests in one tree. The which they do for one of these two causes: that is, that either of their own natural disposition they are accustomed to go in great multitudes, & rejoice in the company of their own generation as do the birds which we call stars, or else to th'intent that if it should so chance that the cats should climb the trees where they make their nests, they might be a greater company to resist and molest the cats, at whose approach they make a fearful and terrible cry, whereby the cats are put to flight.  
Furthermore, in the firm land, and in the Islands, there are certain birds called Piche or Gazzuole, 
Gazz●ole.  somewhat like unto those which we call woodwaules, or woodpeckes, being less than owrs of Spain. These are altogether black, and go hopping and leaping. Their beaks are also black and of the same fashion as are the popingiays beaks. They have long tails, and are somewhat bigger than s●ares.  
There are other birds called Pintadellis, 
Pintadellis.  which are like unto certain green birds which the italians call Fringuelli: and are of seven colours. These birds for fear of the cats, are ever wont to make their nests over the banks of rivers or the sea, where the branches of trees so reach over the water that with a little weight they may bow down to the water. Their nests are made so near the tops of the branches that when the cats come thereon, the branches bend toward the water, and the cats turn back again for fear of falling. For although no beast in the world be more malicious than this, yet whereas the most part of beasts are naturally inclined to swim, this cat hath no manner of aptness thereunto, and is therefore soon drowned or strangled in the water, and by a privy sense of nature feareth the danger which he can not escape. These birds make their nests in such sort, that although they be wet and filled with water, yet do they so suddenly rise up again, that the young birds are not thereby hurt or drowned.  
There are also many nightingalings and other birds which sing marvelously with great melody and difference in singing. These birds are of marvelous divers colours the one from the other. Sum are altogether yellow, and sum other of so excellent, delectable, and high a colour as it wear a ruby. Other are also of divers and variable colours: sum of few colours, and other sum all of one colour: being all so fair and beautiful, that in brightness and shining they excel all that are seen in Spain, or Italy or other provinces of Europe. Many of these are taken with nets, lime twigs, and springs of divers sorts.  
divers other sorts of great fowls like unto Eagles, 
Great fowls  and such other as live of pray, are found in the firm land of such diversity, that it is in manner impossible to describe them all particularly. And forasmuch as I have more largely entreated hereof in my general history of the Indies, I think it not requysite here to make any further mention of the same.   

¶ Of trees, fruits, and plants.  
THere is both in the firm land and the Islands a certain tree called Cocus, 
Cocus.  being a kind of date trees and having their leaves of the self same greatness as have the date trees which bear dates, but differ much in their growing. For the leans of this Cocus grow out of the trunks of the tree as do the fingers out of the hand, wreathing themselves one within an other and so spreading abroad. These trees are high: and are found in great plenty in the coast of the sea of Sur, in the province of Cacique Chiman. These date trees bring forth a fruit after this sort. Being altogether unite as it groweth on the tree, it is of greater circumference than the head of a man. And from the superficial part to the midst which is the fruit, it is involved and covered with many webs much like unto those hyrdes of tow which they use in Andalusia. Of this tow or web, the East Indians make a certain kind of cloth of three or four sorts, and cords for the sails of ships.  
But in these Indies of your majesty, they pass not for these cords or this cloth that may be made of the fruit of Cocus, by reason of the great plenty that they have of the bombage or cotton of the gossampine trees. The fruit which is in the midst of the said tow, is (as I have said) as big as a man's fift, and sometimes twice as big and more. It is in form, like unto a walnut, or sum other round thing somewhat more long than large, and very hard. The rind or bark hereof, is as thick as the circle of letters of a rial of plate. And within, there cleaveth fast to the rind of the nut a carnosity or substance of coornel, of the thickness of half a finger or of the least finger of the hand: And is very white, like unto a fair Almond, and of better taste and more pleasant. When this fruit is ch●wed, there remain certain crumbs as do the like of almonds. Yet if it be swallowed down, it is not unpleasant. For al●howgh that after the iewse or moisture be gone down the throat before the said crumbs be swallowed, the rest which is eaten seem somewhat sharp or sour, yet ●oth it not so greatly offend the taste as to be cast away. While this Cocus is yet fresh and newly taken from the tree, they use not to eat of the said carnosity and fruit: But first beating it very much, and then straining it, they draw a milk thereof, much better and sweeter then is the milk of beasts, and of much substance: The which the Christian men of those regions put in the ●ortes or cakes which they make of the grain of Maizium whereof they make their bread, or in other bread as we put bread in porridge: So that by reason of the said milk of Cocus, the cortes are more excellent to be eaten w●th out offence to the stomach. They are so pleasant to the taste, and leave it aswell satisfied as thowghe it had been delighted with many delicate dishes. But to proceed further, your majesty shall understand, that in the place of the stone or coornell, there is in the midst of the said carnosity, a void place, which nevertheless is full of a most clear and excellent water, in such quantity as may fill a great egg shell, 
I have seen one of these fruits opened the which wh●n it was ho●e, if it were shaken the water was hard shogge therein as it were in a bottle, but in time it consumed and was partly congealed into a salt substance,  or more or less according to the bigness of the Cocus. The which water surely, is the most substantial, excellent and precious to be droonke, that may be found in the world. In so much that in the moment when it passeth the palate of the mouth and beginneth to go down the throat it seemeth that from the sole of the foot to the crown of the head, there is no part of the boddye but that feelethe great comfort thereby: as it is doubtless one of the most excellent things that may be tasted upon the earth, and such as I am not able by writing or tongue to express. And to proceed yet further, I say that when the meat of this fruit is taken from the vessel thereof, the vessel remaineth as fair and net as though is were pullyshed: and is without, of colour inclining toward black, and shineth or glistereth very fair. And is within of no less dilicatenesse. Such as have accustomed to drink in these vessels, and have bin trowbeled with the disease called the fretting of the guts, say that they have by experience found it a marvelous remedy against that disease: And that it breakethe the stone and provoketh urine. This fruit was called Cocus for this cause, that when it is taken from the place where it cleaveth fast to the tree, there are seen two holes, and above them two other natural holes, which altogether, do represent the giesture and figure of the cats called Mammone, that is, monkeys, when they cry: which cry the Indians call Coca: But in very deed, this tree is a kind of date trees: and hath the same effect to heal fretting of the guts, that Pliny describeth all kinds of date trees to have.  

Great trees.  There are furthermore in the firm land, trees of such bigness that I dare not speak thereof but in place where I have so many witnesses which have seen the same as well as I. I say therefore, that a leaque from Dariena or the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua, there passeth a river very large & deep, which is called Cuti: over the which the Indians had laid a great tree so traversing the same that it was in the stead of a bridge, the which I myself with divers other that are at this present in your majesties court, have often times passed over. And forasmuch as the said tree had line long there, and by the great weight thereof was so shrunk downward and partly covered with water that none could pass over it but were wet to the knee, I being then in the year 1522. thofficial of justice in that city at your majesties appointment, caused an other great tree to be laid in that place which in like manner traversed the river and reached more than fifty foot over the further side. This tree was exceeding great, and rested above the water more than two cubytes. In the fall, it cast down all such other trees as were within the reach thereof: And discovered certain wines which were so laden with black grapes of pleasant taste, that they satisfied more than fifty persons which eat their fill thereof. This tree in the thickest part thereof, was more than sixteen spans thick: And was nevertheless but little in respect of many other trees which are found in this province. For the Indians of the coast and province of Car●agenia, make barks or boats thereof (which they call Canoas',) of such bigness, being all of one hole tree, that sum contain a hundredth men, sum a hundredth and thirty, and sum more, having nevertheless such void space within the same, that there is left sufficient room to pass to and fro through out all the Canoa. Sum of these are so large bysyde the length, that they contain more than ten or twelve spans in breadth, and sail with two sails as with the master sail and the trinkette which they make of very good cotton. The greatest trees that I have seen in these parts or in any other regions, was in the province of Guaturo, the king whereof rebelling from th'obedience of your majesty, was pursued by me and taken prisoner: At which time I with my company, passed over a very high mountain full of great trees, in the top whereof we found one tree which had three roots or rather divisions of the root above the earth in form of a triangle or trivette: 
A maruelo●-tree.  so that between every foot of this triangle or three feet, there was a space of twenty foot between every foot. And this of such height above the earth, that a laden cart of those wherewith they are accustomed to bring home corn in the time of harvest in the kingdom of Toledo in Spain, might easily have passed through every of those partitions or windows which were between the three feet of the said tree. From the earth upward to the trunk of the tree, the open places of the dyvisions between these three feet, were of such height from the ground, that a footman with a javelin was not able to reach to the place where the said feet joined together in the trunk or body of the tree which grew of great height in one piece and one hole body, or ever it spread in branches, which it did not before it exceeded in heyhht the tower of saint Roman in the city of Toledo: from which height and upward, it spread very great and strong branches. Among certain spaniards which climbed this tree, I myself was one. And when I was ascended to the place where it begun to spread the branches, it was a marvelous thing to behold a great country of such trees toward the province of Abrayme. This tree was easy to climb, by rea●on of certain Besuchi (whereof I have spoken before) which grew wreathed about the tree in such sort that they seemed to make a scaling ladder. Every of the foresaid three feet which bore the body of the tree, was twenty spans in thickness. And where they joined all together above in the trunk or boddye of the tree, the principal trunk was more than forty and five spans in circuit. I named the mountain where these trees grow, the mountain of three footed trees. And this which I have now declared, was seen of all the company that was there with me when (as I have said before) I took king Guaturo prisoner in the year 1522. Many things more might here be spoken as touching this matter, as also how there are many other excellent trees found of divers sorts and difference, as sweet Cedar trees, black date trees, and many other: of the which sum are so heavy that they can not float above the water but sink immediately to the bottom. And other again as light as a cork. As touching all which things I have written more largely in my general history of the Indies. And forasmuch as at this present I have entered to entreat of trees, before I pass any further to other things, I will declare the manner how the Indians kindle fire, only wi●h wood and without fire, 
●yndlynge of fire without fire.  the manner whereof is this. They take a piece of wood of two spans in length, as big as the least finger of a man's hand, or as an arrow well pullysshed, and of a strong kind of wood which they keep only for this purpose. And where they intend to kindle any fire, they take two other pieces of wood of the dryest and lightest that they can find, and bind them fast together one with an other as close as two fingers joined. In the midst or between these, they put the point of the first little staff made of hard and strong wood which they hold in their hands by the top thereof, and turn or rub it round about continually in one place between the two pieces of wood which lie bound together upon the earth, which by that uncessant rubbing and chafing, are in short space kindled and take fire. 
Purrified wood shining in the night.   
I have also thought good here to speak somewhat of such things as come to my remembrance of certain trees which are found in this land, and sometime also the like have bin seen in Spain. These are certain putrefied trunks which have ●yne so long rotting on the ●arth that they are very white and shine in the night like burning fire brands. And when the spaniards find any of this wood, and intend privily in the night to make war and invade any province when case so requireth that it shallbe necessary to go in the night in such places where they know not the way, the foremost Christian man which guydethe the way, associate with an Indian to direct him therein, taketh a little star of the said wood, which he putteth in his cap hanging behind on h●s shoulders, by the light whereof he that followeth next to him, directeth his journey, who also in like manner beareth an other star behind him, by the shining whereof the third followeth the same way, and in like manner do all the rest, so that by this means none are lost or straggle out of the way. And forasmuch as this light is not seen very far, it is the better policy for the christians because they are not thereby disclosed before they invade their enemies.  
Furthermore as touching the natures of trees, one particular thing seemeth worthy to be noted, whereof Pliny maketh mention in his natural history where he saith that there are certain trees which continue ●uer green and never lose their leaves, 
Pliny.  as the bay tree, the Cedar, 
Trees which continue ever green.  the orange tree, and the olive tree with such other, of the which in all together he nameth not passed five or two. To this purpose, I say, that in the Islands of these Indies, and also in the firm land, it is a thing of much difficulty to find two trees that lose or cast their leaves at any tyme. For although I have diligently searched to know the truth hereof, y●t have I not seen any that lose their leaves, either of them which we have browght out of Spain into these regions, as Orange trees, Linions, Ceders, Palms, or date trees and Pomegranate trees, or of any other in these regions except only Cassia, 
Cassia,  which loseth his leaves and hath a greater thing appropriate to itself only: which is, that whereas all other trees and plants of India spread their roo●●s no deeper in the earth than the depth of a man's height or somewhat more, 
A secret thing.  not descending any further into the ground by reason of the great heat which is found beneath that depth, yet doth Cassia pierce further into the ground until it find water: which by the Philosophers opinion should be the cause of a thin and watery radycall moister to such things as draw their nuryshement thereof, 
Radycall moisture.  as ●at and unctuous grounds with temperate heat, yield a fast & firm moisture to such things as grow in them, which is the cause that such trees lose not their leaves, as the said thin and waterysshe moisture is cause of the contrary, as appeareth by the said effect which is seen only in Cassia, and none other tree or plant in all these parties.   

¶ Of Reeds or Canes.  
I Have not thought it convenient in the chapiture before to speak of that whereof I intend now to entreat of reeds or canes to th'intent that I would not mengle them with plants or trees, being things of themselves worthy to be particularly observed. So it is therefore, that in the firm land there are many sorts of reeds, so that in many places they make their houses thereof, covering them with the tops of the same, and making their walls of them in like manner, as I have said before. And among these kinds of reeds, there is one so great, that the canes thereof are as big as a man's leg in the knee, and three spans in length from joint to joint or more: in so much that every of them is of capacity to contain a little bucket of water. In this kind, here are found sum greater and sum less, of the which sum they use to make quivers for arrows. There is found an other kind which surely is marvelous, being little bigger than a javelen, the canes whereof are longer than two spans. These reeds grow one far from an other, as sometimes twenty or thirty paces, and sometimes also two or three leaques. They grow in manner in all provinces in the Indies: And grow near to very high trees whereunto they lean, and creep up to the tops of their branches, which they embrace and descend again down to the earth. Their canes are full of most clear water without any manner of taste or savour either of the canes or of any other thing: And such as if it were taken out of the fressheste spring in the world. Nor yet is it known that ever it hurt any that droonke thereof. For it hath oftentimes so chanced that as the christian men have travailed in these regions in desolate ways where for lack of water they have been in great danger to die for thirst, they have escaped that peril by reason that they found the said reeds, of the water of whose canes they have droonke a great quantity without any hurt thereof ensuing. Therefore when they find these in any place, they make water vessels of the canes thereof, and carry as many of them full of water as may suffice for one days journey. And sometime they carry so many, that they take for every man two or three quarts of water which may serve them for many days because it doth not corrupt, but remaineth still fresh and good.  
There are also certain plants which the Christians cawl Platani. 
Platani.  These are as high as trees, and become as big in the trunk as the knee of a man or more. from the foot to the top, they bear certain long and large leaves, being more than three spans in largeness, and about ten or twelve in length: The which when they are broken of the wind, the stalk remaineth hole in the midst. In the midst of this plant in the highest part thereof, there groweth a cluster with forty or fifty Platans' about it, every of them being a span and a half in length, and as big as a man's arm in the smau●e, or more or less according to the goodness of the soil where they grow. They have a rind not very thick, and easy to be broken: being within altogether full of a substance like unto the mary of the bone of an ox as it appeareth when the rind or bark is taken from the same. This cluster ought to be taken from the plant, when any one of the Platans' begin to appear yellow. At which time they take it and hang it in their houses where all the cluster waxeth ripe with all his Platans'. This cluster is a very good fruit: And when it is opened and the rind taken of, there are found within it many good dry figs which being roasted or stewed in an oven in a close pot or sum such other thing, 
Figs.  are of pleasant taste much like the conserve of honey. They putrefy not on the sea so soon as sum other fruits do: but continue fifteen days and more if they be gathered somewhat green. They seem more delicate on the sea then on the land, not for that they any thing increase in goodness on the sea, but because that whereas on the sea other things are lacking whereof is plenty on the land, those meats seem of best taste which satisfy present necessity. This troonke or sprygge which bringeth forth the said cluster is a hole year in growing and bringing forth fruit. In which time it hath put forth round about it ten or twelve sprygges as big as the first or principal, and multiplieth no less than the principal in bringing forth of clusters with fruits likewise at their time, and also in bringing forth other and many sprygges as is said before. From the which sprygges or trunks, as soon as the cluster of the fruit is taken away, the plant beginneth to dry and wither, which then they take out of the ground because it doth none other then occupy it in vain and without profit. They are so many and do so marvelously increase and multiply, that it is a thing in manner incredible. They are exceeding moist. In so much that when they are plucked up from the place where they gro●●, there issheweth forth a great quantity of water as well out of the plant as out of the place where it grew: In such sort that all the moisture of the earth far about, might seem to be gathered together about the trunk or block of the said plant: with the fruits whereof, the ants are so far in love, that they are seen in great multitudes in the branches of the plants. So that for the multitude thereof it sometime so chanceth that men are enforced to take away the Platans' from their possession. These fruits are found at all times of the year.  
There is also an other kind of wild plants that groweth in the fields: which I have not seen but in the Island of Hispaniola, although they be found in other Islands of the Indies. These they call Tunas. 
●unas.  They grow of a thistle full of thorns, and bring forth a fruit much like unto great figs, which have a crown like meddlers, and are within of a high colour, with grains and the rind like unto a fig. They are of good taste: And grow abundantly in the fields in many places. They work a strange effect in such as eat them. For if a man eat two or three or more, they cause his urine to be of the very colour of blood, which thing chanced once to myself. At which time as I made water and saw the colour of my urine, I entered into a great suspicion of my life, being so astonysshed for fear, that I thought the same had chanced to me upon sum other cause. In so much that surely my imagination might have done me hurt, but that they which were with me did comfort me immediately, declaring the cause thereof as they knew by experience being ancient inhabitors in those regions.  
There groweth also an other plant which the people of the country call Bihaos. 
Bihaos.  This putteth forth certain straight branches and very broad leaves which the Indians use for divers purposes. For in sum places they cover their houses with the leaves thereof couched and laid after the manner of thetche, whereunto it serveth very well. sometimes also when it raineth, they cast these over their heads to defend them from the water. They make also certain chests which they call Havas, 
Havas,  weaved after a strange sort and intermixed with the leaves of this Bihaos. These chests are wrought in such sort, that although it rain upon them, or they chance to fall into the water, yet are not such things wet as are within them. They are made of the branches of the said Bihaos with the leaves weaved together therewith. In these they keep salt and other subtile things. They use them also for an other purpose, which is this: That finding them in the fields at such time as they have scarceness of victuals, they dig up the roots of these plants while they are yet young, or eat the plant itself in that part where it is most tender, which is from a foot under the ground, where it is as tender and white as a reed or bulrusshe.  
And forasmuch as we are now come to th'end of this narration, 
Dying of cotton.  it cometh to my remembrance to make mention of an other thing which is not far from my purpose. And this is how the Indians do stain or die cloth of bombage cotton, or any other thing which they intend to die of divers colours: as black, tawny, green, blue, yellow, and red, which they do with the barks or rinds, and leaves of certain trees, which they know by experience to be good for this practice. And by this art they make colours in such perfection and excellency that no better can be devised. But this seemeth a strange thing, 
A strange thing.  that they do all this in one self same vessel: So that when they have caused the said rinds and leaves to boil together, they make in the same vessel without any change (as I have said) as many colours as them lysteth. Which thing I suppose to come to pass by the disposition of the colour which they have first given to the thing that they intend to die or colour, whether it be thread, web, or cloth, or any thing that they intend to colour.   

¶ Of venomous apples wherewith they poison their arrows.  
THe apples wherewith the Indian Canibales inveneme their arrows, grow on certain trees covered with many branches and leaves being very green and growing thick. They are laden with abundance of these evil fruits, and have their leaves like the leaves of a pear tree, but that they are less and rounder. The fruit is much like the muscadel pears of the Island of Sicily or Naples in form and bigness: And are in sum parts stained with red spots, and of very sweet savours. These trees for the most part, grow ever by the sea coasts and near unto the water: And are so fair and of pleasant savour, that there is no man that seeth them but will desire to eat thereof.  
In so much that if it may be spoken of any fruit yet growing on the earth, 
Note.  I would say that this was the unhappy fruit whereof hour first parents Adam and Eve tasted, whereby they both lost their felicity and procured death to them & their posterity. Of these fruits, and of the great ants whose biting causeth swelling (whereof I have spoken else where) and of the eutes or lysartes, and vipers, and such other venomous things, the Canibales which are the chief archers among the Indians, 
Canibales archers.  are accustomed to poison their arrows wherewith they kill all that they wound.  

wherewith they invenymther arrows  These venemes they mengle together and make thereof a black mass or composition which appeareth like unto very black pitch. Of this poison I caused a great quantity to be burnt in Sancta Maria Antiqua in a place two leaques and more within the land, with a great multitude of their envenomed arrows and other munition, with also the house wherein they were reserved. This was in the year .1514. at such time 
P●trus Arias.  as th'army arrived there with captain Pedrarias da villa at the commandment of the catholic king Don Ferdinando. But to return to the history. These apples (as I have said) grow near unto the sea. And whereas the Christians which serve your majesty in these parties, suppose that there is no remedy so profitable for such as are wounded with these arrows, as is the water of the sea if the wound be much wassted therewith, 
The water of the sea.  by which means sum have escaped although but few, yet to say the truth, albeit the water of the sea have a certain caustike quality agenyst poison, it is not a sufficient remedy in this case: nor yet to this day have the Christian perceived that of fifty that have been wounded, three have recovered. But that your majesty may the better consider the force of the veneme of these trees, you shall further understand that if a man do but repose himself to sleep a little while under the shadow of the same, he hath his head and eyes so swollen when he riseth, that the eye lids are joined with the cheeks. And if it chance one drop or more of the dew of the said tree to faule into the eye, it utterly destroyeth the sight. The pestilent nature of this tree is such that it can not be declared in few words. Of these there groweth great plenty in the gulf of Vraba toward the North coast on the West and east side. 
The gulf of uraba.  The wood of these trees when it burneth, maketh so great a stink that no man is able to abide it, by reason it causeth so great a pain in the head.  
Among other trees which are in these Indies as well in the Islands as in the firm land, there is an other kind which they call Xagua, 
Xagua.  whereof there is great plenty. They are very high and straight, and fair to behold. Of these they use to make pikes and javelins of divers lengths and bigness. They are of a fair colour between russette and white. This tree bringeth forth a great fruit as big as Papaver or poppy and much like thereunto. It is very good to be eaten when it is ●ype. Owte of this they get a very clear water wherewith they wash their legs and sometimes all their boddyes when they feel their flesh weary, faint, or lose. The which water, bysyd● that it hath a been ding quality, it hath also th●s property, th●t what so ever it toucheth, it staineth it black by little and little until it be as black as giete, which colour can not be taken away in less space than ten or twelve days. And if the nail be but touched therewith, it is so stained that it can by no means be taken away until it either fall of, or grow out and be clipped away by little and little, as I myself have oftentimes seen by experience.  
There is an other kind of trees which they call Hobi. 
Hobi.  These are very great and fair, 
Sum think these to be mi●obalanes.  & cause wholesome air where they grow and a pleasant shadow, and are found in great abundance. Their fruit is very good, and of good taste and savour, and much like unto certain damsons or prunes being little and yellow. But their stone is very great: by reason whereof they have but little meat. Their bark or rind boiled in water, maketh a wholesome bathe for the legs, because it bindeth and steyeth the looseness of the flesh so sensibly that it is a marvel to consider. It is surely a wholesome and excellent bathe against such faintness: And is the best tree that may be found in those parties to sleep under. For it causeth no heaviness of the head as do divers other trees. Which thing I speak because the Christians are much accustomed in those regions to lie in the fields. It is therefore a common practice among them, that where so ever they find these trees, there they spread their mattresses and beds wherein they sleep.  
There are also a kind of high date trees and full of thorns. 
Date trees,  The wood of these is most excellent: being very black, and shining, and so heavy that no part thereof can swim above the water, but sinketh immediately to the bottom. Of this wood they make their arrows and darts: Also iavelyns, spears, and pikes. And I say pikes, because that in the coasts of the sea of Sur, 
Thinhabitan●es of the sea of Sur.  beyond Esquegus and Vracha, the Indians use great and long pikes made of the wood of these date trees. Of the same likewise they make clubs and swords and divers other weapons. Also vessels and household stuff of divers sorts very fair and commodious. Furthermore of this wood the Christians use to make divers musical instruments, as clarisimbals, lutes, gyterns, and such other, the which bysyde their fair shyding colour like unto giete, are also of a good sound and very durable by reason of the hardness of the wood.  
After that I have said thus much of trees and plants, I have thought good also to speak somewhat of herbs. 
An herb that beareth cords.  You shall therefore understand that in these Indies there is an herb much like unto a yellow lily, about whose leaves there grow and creep certain cords or laces, as the like is partly seen in the herb which we call lase savoury. But these of the Indies are much bigger, and longer: and so strong that they tie their hanging beds thereby which they call Hamacas whereof we have spoken elsewhere. These cords, they call Cabuia and Henequen, 
Cabuia & heniquen.  which are all one thing saving that Henequen is less and of a finer substance as it were line: And the other is grosser like the wycke or twyste of hemp, and is imperfect in comparison to the other. They are of colour between white and yellow like unto abarne, and sum also white. With Henequen which is the most subtile and fine thread, the Indians saw in sunder fetters, 
A strange thing.  chains, or bars of Iren in this manner. They move the thread of Henequen upon the iron which they intend to saw or cut, drawing the one hand after the other as do they that saw, putting ever now and then a portion of fine sand upon the thread, or on the place or part of the Iren where they continue rubbing the said thread. So that if the thread be worn, they take an other, and continue in their work as before until they have cut in sunder the iron although it be never so big: and cut it as if it were a tender thing and easy to be sawn.  
And for as much as the leaves of trees may be counted among herbs, 
leaves,  I will here speak somewhat of the quality of the leaves of certain trees which are found in the Island of Hispaniola. These trees are so full of thorns, that there is no tree or plant that seemeth more wild and deformed: so that I can not well determine whether they be trees or plants. They have certain branches full of large and deformed leaves, which branches were first leaves like unto the other. As the branches made of these leaves grow forth inlength, there cometh other leaves of them. So that ●n fine it is a dyfficult thing to describe the form of these trees except the same should be done by a painter whereby the eye might conceive that wherein the tongue faileth in this behalf. The leaves of this tree are of such virtue, 
A leaf of great virtue.  that being well beaten and spread upon a cloth after the manner of a plaster, and so laid to a leg or arm that is broken in many pieces, it healeth it in fifteen days, and maketh it as hole as though it had never been broken. During the time of this operation, it cleaveth so fast to the flesh that it can not without much difficulty be taken away. But as soon as it hath healed the sore and wrought his operation, it looseth itself from the place where it was laid, as I myself and divers other which have proved it, know by experience   

¶ Of fishes and of the manner of fishing.  
IN the sea coasts of the firm land, there are divers and sundry kinds of fishes much differing in shape and form. And although it be impossible to speak of all, yet will I make mention of sum. And first to begin at sardines, you shall understand that there is found a kind of these fishes very large and with red tails, being a very delicate fish. The best kinds of other fishes are these: Moxarre, Diabace, Brettes, Dahaos, Thorn backs, and Salmons. All these and divers other which I donot now remember, are taken in great quantity in rivers. There are likewise taken very good crevysshes. There are also found in the sea, certain other fishes: as soles, mackerelles, turbuttes, Palamite, Lizzes, Polpi, Chieppe, Xaibas, Locusts, Oysters, exceeding great Tortoises, and Tiburoni of marvelous bigness: 
Tiburons.  Also Manates, 
Manates  and Murene, and many other fishes which have no names in our language. And these of such diversity and quantity as can not be expressed without large writing and long tyme. But to let pass to entreat particularly of the multitude of fishes, I intend to speak chiefly and somewhat largely of three sorts of most notable fishes: whereof the first is, the great Tortoises, 
Great Tortoises.  the second is called Tiburon, and the third Manate. And to begin at the first, I say that in the Island of Cuba, are found great Tortoises (which are certain shell fishes) of such bigness that ten or fifteen men are scarcely able to lift one of them out of the water, as I have been informed of credible persons dwelling in the same Island. But of that which I myself have seen, I can testify that in the firm land in the village of Acla there are of this sort sum taken and killed of such bigness that six men with much difficulty could scarcely draw them out of the water. And commonly the least sort of them are as much as two men may carry at a burden. That which I saw lifted up by six men, had her shell a yard and a quarter in length, and in breadth more than five yards. The manner of taking them, is this. It sometimes chanceth that in their great nets (which they call shoot ne●tes) there are found certain Tortoises of the common sort in great quantities. And when they come out of the sea and bring forth their eggs and go together by coompanies from the sea to feed on the land, the Christians or Indians follow their steps which they find in the sand, and soon overtake them because they are very heavy and slow in going, although they make all the haste they can to returns to the sea as soon as they espy any body. When they that pursue them have overtaken them, they put a stake or staff under their legs and overturn them on their backs as they are yet running, so that they can go no further nor yet rise again or turn. And thus they suffer them to lie still while they follow after the rest which they overturn in like manner: And by this means take very many at such times as they come forth of the sea as I have said. This fish is very excellent and wholesome to be eaten, and of good taste. The second of the three fishes whereof I have spoken, is the Tiburon. 
Tiburons.  This is a very great fish and very quick and swift in the water, and a cruel devourer. These are often times taken, as well when the ships are under sail in the Ocean, as also when they lie at anchor, or at any other time, and especially the least kind of these fishes. When the ships are under sail, the biggest sort are taken after this manner. When the Tiburon seeth the ship sailing he followeth it swiming behind. The which things the mariners seeing, cast forth all the filth of the ship into the sea for the fish to eat, who nevertheless followeth than with equal pace although th●y make never such haste with full wind and sails, and walloweth on every side and about the ship: And thus followeth it sometime for the space of a hundredth and fifty leaques and more. And when the mariners are disposed to take them, they cast down by the stern of the ship, a hook of iron as big as the biggest finger of a man's hand of three spans in length and crooked like a fysshehooke with beards according to the bigness thereof, and fastened to an iron chain of five or two links near unto th'end, and from thence tied with a great rope, fastening also on the hook for a bait, a piece of sum fish, or hogs flesh, or sum other flesh, or the bouwelles and entrails of an other Tiburon which they have taken before, which may easily be done, for I have seen nine taken in one day. And if they would have taken more, they might also. Thus when the Tiburon hath pleasantly followed the ship a long voyage, at the length he swalloweth the bait with the hook. And a●well by his striving to fly or escape, as also by the swift passage of the ship, the hook overthwarteth and catcheth hold of his chaps. The which fish when it is taken, it is of such huge b●ggenesse that twelve or fyfeteene men are scarcely able to draw it out of the water and lift it into the ship: Where one of the mariners giveth it many knocks on the head with a club or beetle until he have slain it. They are sometimes found of ten or twelve foot long, and of five, six, or seven spans in breadth where they are brodest. They have very great and wide mouths to the proportion of the rest of their bodies, and have two rows of teeth the one somewhat separate from the other, of cruel shape & standing very thick. When they have slain this fish, they cut the body thereof in smaule pieses, and put it to dry, hanging it three or four days at the cords of the sail clothes to dry in the wind, and then eat it. It is doubtless a good fish and of great commodity to serve the ships for victuals for many days. The least of these fishes are most wholesome and tender. It hath a skin much like to the skin of a sole, whereunto the said Tuberon is like in shape. Which I say because Pliny hath made mention of none of these three fishes among the number of them whereof he writeth in his natural history. 
Pliny.  These Tiburons come forth of the sea and enter into the rivers, where they are no less perilous than great lisartes or Crocodiles whereof I have spoken largely before. 
Crocodyles.  For they devour men, kine, and horses, even as do the Crocodiles. They are very dangerous in certain washing places or pools by the rivers sides, and where they have devoured at other times. divers other fishes both great and smaule, of sundry sorts and kinds are accustomed to follow the ships going under sail, of the which I will speak somewhat when I h●ue written of Manate which is the third of the three whereof I have promised to entreat. 
Manates.  Manate therefore, is a fish of the sea, of the bigest sort, and much greater than the Tiburon in length and breadth: And is very brutysshe and vile, so that it appeareth in form like unto one of those great vessels made of goats skins wherein they use to carry new wine in Medina de Campo or in Arevalo. The head of this beast is like the head of an ox, with also like eyes. And hath in the place of arms, two great stumps wherewith he swimmeth. It is a very gentle and tame beast: And cometh oftentimes out of the water to the next shore where if he find ny herbs or grass, he feedeth thereof. Hour men are accustomed to kill many of these and divers other good fishes with their crossbows, pursuing them in barks or Canoas', because they swim in manner above the water. The which thing when they see, they draw them with a hook tied at a smaule cord, but somewhat strong. As the fish flieth away, the archer letteth go and prolongeth the cord by little and little until he have let it go many fathams. At the end of the cord, there is tied a cork or a piece of light wood. And when the fish is gone a little way, & hath coloured the water with his blood, and feeleth himself to faint and draw toward th'end of his life, he resortethe to the shore, and the archer followeth gathering up his cord: whereof while there yet remain six or eight fathams or somewhat more or less, he draweth it toward the land, and draweth the fish therewith by little and little as the waves of the sea help him to do it the more easily. Then with the help of the rest of his company he lyftethe th●s great beast out of the water to the land, being of such hygnesse that to convey it from thence to the city, it shallbe requisite to have a cart with a good yoke of oxen, and sometimes more, according as these fishes are of bigness, sum being much greater than other sum in the same kind as is seen of other beasts. sometimes they life these fishes into the Canoa or bark, without drawing them to the land as before. For as soon as they are slain, they float above the water. And I believe verily that this fish is one of the best in the world to the taste, and the likest unto flesh. Especially so like unto beef, that who so hath not seen it hole, can judge it to be none other when he seeth it in pieces then very beef or veal. And is certainly so like unto flesh, that all the men in the world may herein be deceived. The taste likewise, is like unto the taste of very good veal, and lasteth long if it be powdered. So that in fine, the base of these parties, is by no means like unto this. This Manate, 
The fish Manate.  hath a c●rteine stone or rather bone in his head within the brain, which is of quality greatly appropriate against the disease of the stone, 
A remedy against the stone.  if it be burnt and ground into smaule powder, and taken fasting in the morning when the pain is felt, in such quantity as may lie upon a penny with a drawght of good white wine. For being th●s taken three or four mornings, it a●quieteth the grief as divers have told me which have proved it true. And I myself by testimony of sight, do witness that I have seen this stone sought of divers for this effect.  
There are also divers other fishes as big as this Manate: 
The sword fish.  among the which there is one caule● Vihuella. This fish beareth in the top of his head, a sword being on every side full of many sharp teeth. This sword is naturally very hard & strong, of four or five spans in length and of proportion according to the same bigness. And for this cause is this fish called Spada: that is the sword fish. Of this kind sum are found as little as sardines: and other so great, th●● two yokes of oxen are scarcely able to draw them on a cart. But whereas before, I have promised to speak of other fishes which are taken in these seas while the ships are under sail, I will not forget to speak of the Tunnye which is a great and good fish, 
Tunnye.  and is oftentimes taken and killed with trout spears and hooks cast in the water when they play and swim about the ships. In like manner also are taken many turbots which are very good fishes as are lightly in all the sea. 
Turbut,   
And here is to be noted, that in the great Ocean sea, there is a strange thing to be considered, which all that have been in the Indies affirm to be true. And this is, that like as on the land there are sum provinces fertile and fruitful, 
Note,  and sum barren, even so doth the like chance in the sea: So that at sum winds the ships sail fifty or a hundredth, or two hundredth leaques and more, without taking or seeing of one fish. And again in the self same Ocean, in sum places, all the water is seen tremble by the moving of the fishes, where they are taken abundantly.  
It cometh further to my remembrance to speak somewhat of the flying of fishes, 
Flying fishes.  which is doubtless a strange thing to behold, and is after this manner. When the ships sail by the great Ocean following their viage, there riseth sometimes on the one side or on the other, many coompanies of certain little fishes, of the which the bigest is no greater than a sardyne: and so diminish less and less from that quantity that sum of them are very little. These are called Volatori: that is, flying fishes. They rise by great coompanies and flocks in such multitudes that it is an astonysshement to behold them. sometimes they rise but little from the water: & (as it chanceth) continue one flight for the space of a hundredth paces and sometimes more or less before they faule again into the sea. sometimes also they faule into the ships. And I remember that on an evening when all the company in the ship were on their knees singing Salve regina in the highest part of the castle of the poop, and sailed with a full wind, there passed by us a flock of these flying fishes: and came so near us that many of them fell into the ship, among the which, two or three fell hard by me which I took alive in my hand: so that I might well perceive that they were as big as sardines and of the same quantity, having two wings or quills growing out of their fins, like unto those wherewith all fishes swim in rivers. These wings are as long as the fishes themselves. As long as their wings are moist, they bear them up in the air. But as soon as they are dry, they can continue their flight no further then as I have said before, but fall immediately into the sea, and so rise again, and fly as before from place to place.  
In the year. A thousand five hundredth fifteen. when I came first to inform your majesty of the state of the things Indya, and was the year following in Flaunders in the time of your most fortunate success in these your kingdoms of Aragonie and Castyle, whereas at that viage I sailed above the Island Bermuda otherwise called Garza, 
The Island of Bermuda.  being the furthest of all the Islands that are found at this day in the world, and arriving there at the depth of eight yards of water, and distant from the land as far as the shot of a piece of ordinance, I determined to send sum of the ship to land as well to make search of such things as were there, as also to leave in the Island certain hogs for increase. But the time not serving my purpose by reason of contrary wind, I could bring my ships no nearer the Island being twelve leaques in length and six in breadth and about thirty in circuit, lying in the thirty three & degree of the north side. While I remained here, I saw a strife and combat between these flying fishes and the fishes named guilt heads, and the fowls called seamewes and cormorauntes, which surely seemed unto me a thing of as great pleasure and solace as could be devised, while the guilt heads swam on the brim of the water and sometimes lifted their shoulders above the same to raise the swiming fishes out of the water to drive them to flight, and follow them swimming to the place where they faule to take and eat them suddenly. Again on the other side, the seamewes and cormorantes, take many of these flying fishes: so that by this means they are neither safe in the air nor in the water. 
Not to high for the pie nor to low fro: the crow.  In the self same peril and danger do men live in this mortal life wherein is no certain securytye nether in high estate nor in low. Which thing surely aught to put us in remembrance of that blessed and safe resting place which god hath prepared for such as love him, who shall acquyete and finish the travails of this troublous world wherein are so many daungyours, and bring them to that eternal life where they shall find eternal securytye and rest. But to return to the history: these birds and fowls which I saw, were of the Island of Bermuda near unto the which I saw these flying fishes. For they could be of no other land, forasmuch as they are not accustomed to wander far from the coasts where they are bred.   

¶ Of th'increase and decrease, (that is) rising and faulling of our Ocean sea and south sea called the sea of Sur.  
I Will now speak of certeayne things which are seen in the province, or at the least in the city of golden Castyle otherwise called Beragua, 
Beragua.  and in the coasts of the North sea and of the South sea called the sea of Sur. Not omitting to note one singular and marvelous thing which I have considered of the Ocean sea. whereof hitherto no cosmographer, pilot or mariner or any other have satisfied me.  
I say therefore as it is well known to your majesty and all such as have knowledge of the Ocean sea, that this great Ocean casteth from itself the sea Mediterraneum by the mouth of the straight of Gibilterra: in the which the water from th'end and furthest part of that sea, 
The West Ocean.  even unto the mouth of the said strait, either in the East toward the coast commonly called Levant, or in any other part of the said sea Mediterraneum, 
The s●a Mediteraneum.  the sea doth not so fall nor increase as reason would judge for so great a sea. But incresethe very little and a smaule space. Nevertheless, without the mouth of the strait in the main Ocean, it increaseth and falleth very much and a great space of ground from six hours to two hours, as in all the coasts of Spain, Britannye, Flanders, Germanye and England. The self same Ocean sea in the firm land newly found, in the coasts of the same lying toward the north, doth neither rise nor fall, nor likewise in the Islands of Hispaniola and Cuba and all the other Islands of the same sea lying toward the north, 
Hispaniola.  
Cuba.  for the space of three thousand leaques, but only in like manner as doth the sea Mediterr●neum in italy: which is in manner nothing in respect to that increase and decrease which the said Ocean hath in the coasts of Spain and Flaunders. But this is yet a greater thing, that also the self same Ocean in the coasts of the said firm land lying towards the south in the city of Panama, and also in the coast of that land which lieth toward the east and West from that city, as in the Island of pearls or Margaritea which the Indians call Tarrarequi, and also in Taboga and Otoque, and in all other Islands of the south sea of Sur, the water riseth and falleth so much, that when it falleth it goth in manner out of sight, which thing I myself have seen oftentimes.  
And here your majesty may note an other thing, that from the north sea to the south sea being of such dyffer●nce the one from the other in rising and falling, 
The South sea.  yet is the land that divideth them not passed fifteen or twenty leaques in breadth from coast to coast. So that both the said seas being all one Ocean this strange effect is a thing worthy greatly to be considered of all such as have inclination and desire to know the secret works of nature wherein the infinite power and wisdom of god is seen to be such as may allure all good natures to reverence and love so divine a majesty. 
The power and wisdom of god is seen in his creatures.  And whereas by the demonstrations of learned men I am not satisfied of the natural cause hereof, I content myself to know and believe that he which hath made these things, doth know this and many other which he hath not granted to the reason of man to comprehend, much less to so base a wit as mine is. They therefore that are of greater understanding, shall search the cause hereof, for them and for me, forasmuch as I ha●e only put the matter in question as a witness that have seen th'experience of the thing.   

¶ Of the straight or narrow passage of the land lying between the North and South sea, by the which spices way much sooner and easilier be brought from the Islands of Molucca into Spain by the West Ocean then by that way whereby the Portugals sail into East India.  
IT hath been an opinion among the Cosmographers and pilots of late time, and other which have had practise in things touching the sea, that there should be a straight of water passing from the North sea of the firm, in to the South sea of Sur, which nevertheless hath not been seen nor found to this day. And surely if there be any such straight▪ we that inhabit those parts do think the same should be rather of land than of water. For the firm land in sum parts thereof is so straight and narrow that the indians say that from the mountains of the province of Esquegua or Vrraca, 
Esquegua and urrace.  (which are between the one sea and the other) If a man ascend to the top of the mountains and look toward the north, he may see the water of the North sea of the province of Beragua. And again looking the contrary way, may on the other side toward the south, see the sea of Sur and the provinces which confyne with it, as do the territories of the two Lords or kings of the said provinces of Vrraca and Esquegua. And I believe that if it be as the indians say, of all that is hitherto known, this is the narowest straight of the firm land, which sum affirm to be full of rough mountains. Yet do I not take it for a better way, or so short as is that which is made from the port called Nomen dei (which is in the north sea) unto the new city of Panama being in the coast and on the bank of the sea of Sur. 
Nomen De●.  
Panama.  Which way is likewise very rough full of thick woods, mountains, rivers, valleys, and very difficulty to pass through, and can not be done without great labour and travail. Sum measure this way in this part, to be from sea to sea xviii leaques, which I suppose to be rather twenty not for that it is any more by measure, but because it is rough and difficulty as I have said, and as I have found it by experience having now twice passed that way by foot: counting from the port and village of Nomen Dei unto the dominion of the Cacique of juanaga otherwise called Capira viii leaques: And from thence to the river of Chagre, 
The river of Chagre.  other viii leaques. So that at this river being xvi leaques from the said port, endeth the roughness of the way. Then from hence to the marvelous bridge are two leaques: And beyond that, other two unto the port of Panama: So that all together in my judgement, make twenty leaques. And if therefore this navigation may be found in the South sea for the trade of spices (as we trust in God) to be brought from thence to the said port of Panama (as is possible enough) they may afterward easily pass to the north sea notwithstadding the difficulty of the way of the twenty leaques aforesaid. Which thing I affirm as a man well travailed in these regions, having twice on my feet passed over this straight in the year .1521. as I have said. It is furthermore to be understood, that it is a marvelous facility to bring spices by this way which I will now declare. From Panama to the river of Chagre, are four leaques of good and fair way by the which carts may pass at pleasure by reason that the mountains are but few and little, and that the greatest part of these four leaques is a plain ground void of trees. And when the carts are come to the said river, the spices may be carried in barks and pinnesses. For this river entereth into the North sea five or vi leaques lower than the port of Nomen dei, and emptieth itself in the sea near unto an Island called Bastimento, 
The Island Bastimento.  where is a very good and safe port. Your majesty may now therefore consider how great a thing and what commodity it may be to convey spices this way, forasmuch as the river of Chagre having his original only two leaques from the South sea, continueth his course & emptieth itself into the other North sea. This river runneth fast and is very great, and so commodious for this purpose as may be thowght or desired. The marvelous bridge made by the work of nature, 
The marvelous bridge.  being two leaques beyond the said river, and other two leaques on this side the port of Panama, so lying in the mid way between them both, is framed naturally in such sort that none which pass by this voyage see any such bridge or think that there is any such building in that place until they be in the top thereof in the way toward Panama. But as soon as they are on the bridge, looking toward the right hand, they see a little river under them which hath his channel distant from the feet of them that walk over it, the space of two spears length or more. The water of this river is very shallow, not passing the depth of a man's leg to the knee: and is in breadth between thirty and forty paces: and faulethe into the river of Chagre. Toward the right hand standing on this bridge, there is nothing seen but great trees. The largeness of the bridge, containeth xu paces: and the length ●herof about threescore or fourscore paces. The arch is so made of most hard stone, that no man can behold it without admiration, being made by the high and omnipotent creator of all things. But to return to speak somewhat more of the conveying of spices, I say that when it shall please almighty god that this navigation aforesaid shall be found by the good fortune of your majesty, and that the spices of the Islands of the South sea (which may also be otherwise called the Ocean of the East India in the which are the Islands of Molucca) shallbe browght to the said coast and the port of Panama, 
The Islands of Molucca.  and be conveyed from thence (as we have said) by the firm land with carts unto the river of Chagre, and from thence into this our other sea of the North, from whence they may afterward be browght into Spain, I say that by this means the viage shall be shortened more than seven thousand leaques, 
The commodity of this voyage.  with much less danger than is by the voyage now used by the way of Commendator of Aysa captain under your majesty, who this present year attempted a viage to the place of the said spices. And not only the way is thus much shortened, but also a third part of the time is abbreviate. To conclude therefore, if any had hitherto attempted this viage by the sea of Sur, to seek the Islands of spices, I am of firm opinion that they should have been found long sense, as doubtless they may be by the reasons of cosmography.   

¶ How things that are of one kind, differ in form and quality, according to the nature of the place where they are engendered or grow. And of the beasts called Tigers.  
IN the firm land are found many terrible beasts which sum think to be Tigers. 
Tigers.  Which thing nevertheless, I dare not affirm, considering what authors do write of the lightness and agility of the Tiger, whereas this beast being other wise in shape very like unto a Tiger, is notwithstanding very slow. Yet true it is, that according to the marvels of the world and differences which natural things have in divers regions under heaven and divers constellations of the same under the which they are created, we see that sum such plants and herbs as are hurtful in one country, 
plants and herbs.  are harmless and wholesome in other regions. And birds which in one province are of good taste, 
Birds.  are in other so unsavoury that they may not be eaten. Men likewise which in sum countries are black, are in other places white: and yet are both these and they men. 
Men.   
Even so may it be that Tigers are light in sum region as they write, and may nevertheless be slow and heavy in these Indies of your majesty whereof we speak. The sheep of Arabia draw their tails long and big on the ground, 
Sheep.  and the bulls of Egypt have their hear growing toward their heads: yet are those sheep and these bulls. 
Bulls.  Men in sum countries are hardy and of good courage, and in other naturally fearful and brutish. All these things and many more which may be said to this purpose, are easy to be proved and worthy to be believed of such as have red of the like in authors or travailed the world, whereby their own sight may teach them th'experience of these things whereof I speak. It is also manifest, that jucea whereof they make their bread in the Island of Hispaniola, 
jucea.  is deadly poison if it be eaten green with the juice: And yet hath it no such property in the firm land where I have eaten it many times & found it to be a good fruit. The bats of Spain although they bite, 
Bats.  yet are they not venomous. But in the firm land many die that are bitten of them. And in this form may so many things be said that time shall not suffice to write, whereas my intent is only to prove that this beast may be a Tiger or of the kind of Tigers although it be not of such lightness and swiftness as are they whereof Pliny and other authors speak, 
Pliny.  discrybing it to be one of the swyftesse beasts of the land, and that the river of Tigris for the swift course thereof was called by that name. The first Spaniards which saw this Tiger in the firm land, did so name it. Of the kind of these was that which Don Diego Columbo the Admiral sent your majesty owte of new Spain to Toledo. 
the Tiger.  Their heads are like to the heads of Lions or Lionesses, but greater. The rest of all their bodies and their legs, are full of black spots one near unto an other and divided with a circumference or fring of red colour shewing as it were a fair work and correspondent picture. about their croopes or hinder parts, they have these spots bydgest: and less and less toward their bellies, legs, and heads. That which was brought to Toledo, was young and but little, and by my estimation, of th'age of three years But in the firm land there are many found of greater quantity. For I have seen sum of three spans in height, and more than five in length. They are beasts of great force, with strong legs, and well armed with nails and fangs which we call dog teeth. They are so fierce that in my judgement no real lion of the bigest sort is so strong or fierce. Of these, there are many found in the firm land which devour many of the Indians & do much hurt otherwise. But sins the coming of the Christians, many have been killed with Crossbows after this manner. As soon as the archer hath knowledge of the haunt of any of these Tigers, 
The hunting of tigers.  he goeth searching their trase with his crossbow and with a little hound or bugle and not with a greehounde, because this beast would soon kill any dog that would venture on him. When the hound hath found the Tiger, he runneth about him bayinge continually, and approacheth so near him snapping and grynning with so quick flying and returning, that he hereby so molesteth this fierce beast that he driveth him to take the next tree, at the foot whereof he remaineth still baying and the Tiger grinning and showing his teeth, while in the mean time the archer cometh near, and xii or xiiii paces of, striketh him with the querel of his crossbow in the breast, and flieth incontinent, leaving the Tiger in his travail for life and death, biting the tree and eating earth for fierceness. Then within the space of two or three hours or the day following, the archer returneth thither, and with his dog findeth the place where he lieth dead.  
In the year, 1522. I with the other rulers & magistrates of the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena, took order in our counsel, A reward of four or five pieces of gold to be given to every man that killed any of these Tigers: 
A reward for killing of ●igers.  by reason whereof many were killed in short space both with crossbows and also with divers snares and ingens. But to conclude, I will not obstinately stand in opinion whether these beasts be Tigers or Panthers, or of the number of any other such beasts of spotted hear, or also peradventure sum other new beast unknown to the owlde writers as were many other whereof I have spoken in this book. Of which thing, I do not greatly marvel, For asmuch as unto hour time this great part of the world was unknown to the antiquity: In so much that none of the writers of that age, nor yet Ptolemy in his cosmography, or any other sense him, have made any mention hereof, until the first admiral Don Chrystopher Colonus discovered the same.  
A thing doubtless without comparison much greater than that which is said of Hercules, 
Colocus compared to Hercules.  that he first gave thentrance of the sea Mediterraneum into the Ocean, 
The pillars of hercules.  which the Greeks could never do before him. And hereof riseth the fable that the mountains of Calpe and Abila (which are directly one against an other in the straight of Gibilterra, 
the straights of Gibilterra.  the one being in Spain and the other in africa) were joined together before they were opened by Hercules, 
Note.  who erected those his pillars which your majesty give in token of pre-eminence and like enterprises with likewise these his words PLUS VLTRA: 
PLUS VLTRA.  words doubtless worthy for so great an universal an Emperor, and not convenient for any other Prince. 
how far Themperou● majesty excelleth hercules.  Forasmuch as your holy catholic Majesty have spread them in so strange and remote regions, so many thousand leaques further than ever did Hercules. And certeynlye sir, If there had been an Image of gold made in the praise and fame of Colonus, He had as well deserved it as any of those men to whom for their noble enterprise the antiquity gave divine honour, if he had been in their tyme. But to return to the matter whereof I began to speak: I need say no more of the form of this beast, for as much as your Majesty have seen that which is yet alive in Toledo. And surely the keeper of your majesties lions, who hath taken upon him the charge to tame this beast, might better have bestowed his pains in an other thing that might have bin more profitable for the safeguard of his life because this Tiger being yet but young, will daily be stronger and fiercer and increase in malice. The Indians (and especially they of the firm land in the province which the catholic King Don Ferdinando commanded to be called golden Castyle) call this beast Oobi. This thing is strange that chanced of late: that whereas the Tiger whereof we have made mention before, 
A tiger made ●ame.  would have killed his kee●●● that then kept him in a cage, was in few days after made so tame that he led her tied only with a smaule cord and played with her so familiarly that I marveled greatly to see it, yet not without certain belief that this friendship will not last long without danger of life to the keeper, forasmuch as surely these beasts are not meet to be among men for their fierceness and cruel nature that can not be tamed.   

❧ Of the manners and customs of the Indians of the firm land, and of their women.  
THe manners and customs of these Indians, are divers in divers provinces. Sum of them take as many wives as them list, and other live with one wife whom they forsake not without consent of both parties, which chanceth especially when they have no children. 
The Indian women.  The nobility aswell men as women, repute it infamous to join with any of base parentage or strangers, except Christians, whom they count noble men by reason of their valiantness, although they put a difference between the common sort and the other to whom they show obedience, counting it for a great matter and an honourable thing if they be beloved of any of them. In so much that if they know any Christian man carnally, they keep their faith to him, so that he be not long absent far from them. For their intent is not to be widows or to live chaste like religious women. Many of them have this custom, that when they perceive ●hat they are with child, they take an herb wherewith they destroy that is conceived. For they say that only well aged women should bear children, and that they will not forbear their pleasures and deform their bodies with bearing of children, whereby their teats become lose and hanging which thing they greatly dispraise. When they are delivered of their children they go to the river and wash them. Which done, their blood and purgation ceaseth immediately. And when after this they have a few days abstained from the company of men, they become so straight as they say which have had carnal familiarity with them, that such as use them, can not without much difficulty satis●ie their appetite, They also which never had children, are ever as byrgins. 
The men of India.  In sum parts they wear certain little apernes round about them before and behind as low as to their knees and hams, wherewith they cover their privy parts, and are naked all their body bysyde. The principal men bear their privities in a hollow pipe of gold: but the common sort have them enclosed in the shells of certain great welkes, and are bysyde utterly naked. For they think it no more shame to have their cods seen then any other part of their bodies. And in many provinces both the men and women go utterly naked without any such coverture at al. In the province of Cueva they cawl a man Chuy, and a woman Ira: which name is not greatly disagreeable to many both of their women and of ours.  
These Indians give great honour and reverence to their Cacique (that is) their kings and rulers. The principal Cacique, 
The king is borne on men's b●ckes.  hath twelve of his most strong Indians appointed to bear him when he removeth to any place, or goeth abroad for his pleasure. Two of them carry him sitting upon a long piece of wood which is naturally as light as they can find The other ten follow next unto him as foot men. They keep continually a trotting pace with him on their shoulders. When the two that carry him are weary, other two come in their places without any disturbance or stay. And thus if the way be plain, they carry him in this manner for the space of xu or twenty leaques in one day. The Indians that are assigned to this office, are for the most part slaves or Naboriti, that is, such as are bound to continual service.  
I have also noted that when the Indians perceive themselves to be troubled with to much blood, 
letting of blood.  they let themselves blood in the calves of their legs & brawns of their arms, This do they with a very sharp stone, and sometimes with the smaule tooth of a viper, or with a sharp reed or thorn  
All the Indians are commonly without beards: 
They have no beards.  In so much that it is in manner a marvel to see any of them either men or women to have any down or hear on their faces or other parts of their bodies. Albeit, I saw the Cacique of the province of Catarapa who had hear on his face and other parts of his body, as had also his wife in such places as women are accustomed to have. 
They paint their bodies.  This Cacique had a great part of his body painted with a black colour which never fadeth: And is much like unto that wherewith the moor paint them selves in Barbary in token of nobility. But the moors are painted specially on their visage and throat and certain other parts. Likewise the principal Indians use these paintings on their arms and breasts, but not on their visages, because among them the slaves are so marked. When the Indians of certain provinces go to the battle (especially the Cannibal archers) they carry certain shells of great welkes of the sea which they blow and make therewith great sound much like the noise of horns. 
The Canibales.  They carry also certain timbrels which they use in the stead of drums. Also very fair plumes of feathers, and certain armure of gold: 
armour of gold.  especially great and round pieces on their ●restes, and splintes on there arms. Likewise other pieces which they put on their heads and other parts of their bodies. 
Their galantnes in the wars.  For they esteem nothing so much as to appear galant in the wars, and to go in most coomely order that they can devise, glistering with precious stones, jewels, gold, and feathers. Of the least of these welkes or perewincles, they make certain little beads of divers sorts and colours. They make also little brass●lets which they mengle with gaudies of gold. 
Their Iuell●  These they roll about there arms from the elbow to the wrest of the hand. The like also do they on their legs from the knee to the soles of their feet in token of nobility. Especially their noble women in divers provinces are accustomed to wear such jewels, and have their necks in manner laden therewith. These beads and jewels and such other trynkettes, they call Caqu●ras. beside these also, they wear certain rings of gold at their cares and nostrils which they bore full of holes on both sides, so that the rings hang upon their lips. Sum of these Indians, are poulde and rounded. Albe●t, commonly both the men and women take it for a decent thing to wear long hear, which the women wear to the midst of their shoulders and cut it equally, especially above their brows. This do they with certain hard stones which they keep for the same purpose. The principal women when their teats fall or become lose, bear them up with hearts of gold of the length of a●spanne and a half, 
how the women bear up their s●a●es, wy●h bars of gold.  well wrought, and of such bigness that sum of them way more than two hundredth Castilians or ducades of gold. These bars have holes at both th'ends, whereat they tie two small cords made of cotton at every end of the bars. One of these cords goth over the shoulder, and the other under the arm holes where they tie both together, so that by th●s means the bar beareth up their teats. Sum of these chief women go to the battle with their husbands, or when they themselves are regentes in any provinces, in the which they have all things a● commandment and execute th'office of general captains, and cause themselves to be carried on men's backs in like manner as do the Caciques of whom I have spoken before.  
These Indians of the firm land are much of the same stature and colour as are they of the Islands. 
The stature & colour of the Indians.  They are for the most part of the colour of an olive. If there be any other difference, it is more in bigness then otherwise. And especially they that are called Coronati are stronger and bigger than any other that I have seen in these parties, 
The Indians called Coronati.  except those of the Island of giants which are on the south side of the Island of Hispaniola: 
The Island of giants.  near unto the coasts of the firm land: And likewise certain other which they call Yucatos which are on the north side. 
Iucato●.  All which chiefly, although they be no giants, yet are they doubtless the byggeste of the indians that are known to this day, and commonly bigger than the flemings: and especially many of them aswell women as men, are of very high stature, and are all archers both men and women. These Coronati inhabit thirty leaques in length by these coasts from the point of Canoa to the great river which they call Guadalchibir near unto Sancta Maria de gratia. As I traversed by those coasts, I filled a butt of fresh water of that river six leaques in the sea from the mouth thereof where it falleth into the sea. They are called Coronati (that is crowned) because their hear is cut round by their rares, and poulde lower a great compass about the crown much like the friars of saint Augustine's order. And because I have spoken of their manner of wearing their hear, here cometh to my remembrance a thing which I have oftentimes noted in these Indians. And this is, that they have the bones of the skulls of their heads four times thicker and much stronger than ours. 
The skulls of the Indians heads.  So that in coming to hand strokes with them, it shallbe requisite not to strike them on the heads with swords. For so have many swords bin broken on their heads with little hurt done. And to have said thus much of their customs and manners, it shall suffice for this time, because I have more largely entreated hereof in my general history of the Indies. Yet have I neither there nor here spoken much of that part of the firm land which is called Nova Hispania (that is, new Spain whereof the Island of jucatana is part) forasmuch as Ferdinando Cortese hath written a large book thereof. 
New Spain.   
Of the houses of these Indians, 
The house● of the Christians in India  I have spoken sufficiently elsewhere. Yet have I thought good to inform your majesty of the building and houses which the Christians have made in divers places in the firm land. They build them now therefore with two solars or lofts, and with loops and windows to open and shut. Also with strong timber and very fair boards. In such sort that any noble man may well and pleasantly be lodged in sum of them. And among other, I myself caused one to be builded in the city of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena which cost me more than a thousand and five hundredth Castelians: 
Darien●.  being of such sort that I may well entertain and commodiously lodge, any Lord or noble man, reserving also a part for myself and my family. For in this may many households be kept both above and beneath. It hath also a fair garden with many orange trees both sweet and sour: Ceders also, and Lemondes, 
Garde●●.  of the which there is now great plenty in the houses of the christians. On one side of the garden, there runneth a fair river. The situation is very pleasant, with a good and wholesome air, and a fair prospect about the river. In fine, hour trust is that in few years all things in these regions shall grow to a better state according to the holy intention of your majesty.   

Of the chief Islands Hispaniola and Cuba.  
THe Indians which at this present inhabit the Island of Hispaniola, are but few in number, and the christians not so many as they ought to be forasmuch as many of them that were in this Island, are gone to other Islands and to the firm land. For being for the most part young men unmarried, and desirous daily to see new things wherein man's nature delighteth, 
Men are desirous of new things.  they were not willing to continue long in on place: especially seeing daily other new lands discovered where they thowght they might sooner fill there purses by being present at the first spoil. Wherein nevertheless their hope deceived many of them, and especially such as bad houses and habitations in this Island, For I certainly believe, confirming myself herein with the judgement of many other, that if any one Prince had no more signiores then only this Island, it should in short time be such as not to give place either to Sicily or England: 
The commodities of hispaniola-Englande and Sicily.  whereas even at this present there is nothing wherefore it should malice their prosperity not being inferior to them in any filicite that in manner the heavens can grant to any land: being furthermore such as may enrich many provinces and k●ngedomes by reason of many rich gold mines that are in it of the best gold that is found to this day in the world, 
Gold mines.  and in greatest quantity. In this Island, nature of herself bringeth forth such abundance of cotton that if it were wrought and maintained there should be more and better then in any part of the world. 
Cotton.  There, is so great plenty of excellent Cassia that a gr●ate quantity is brought from thence into Spain: 
Cassia.  from whence it is carried to divers parts of the world. In increaseth so much that it is a marvelous thing to consider. In this are many rich shops where sugar is wrought: 
Sugar.  and that of such perfectenes and goodness, and in such quantity that ships come laden therewith yearly into Spain. 
plants and Herbs.  All such sedes, sertes, or plants, as are brought out of Spain and planted in this Island, becoomme much better, bigger, and of greater increase than they are in any part of hour Europe. And if it chance otherwise that sometimes they prosper nor so well, the cause is that they which should till and husband the ground, 
Great things hindered by respect of present gains.  and sow and plant in dew seasons, have no respect hereunto, being impatient while the wheat and wines wax ripe, being given to wandering and other affairs of present gains (as I have said) as searching the gold mines, fishing for pearls, and occupying merchandise, with such other trades, for the greedy following whereof, they neglect and contemn both sowing and planting. Such fruits as are brought out of Spain, into this Island, prosper marvelously and wax ripe all times of the year: as herbs of all sorts very good and pleasant to be eaten. Also many pomegranates of the best kind, and oranges both sweet and sour. 
Orangies. Pomegranates.  Likewise many fair Lymones & ceders: and a great quantity of all such as are of sharp, sour, and bitter taste. There are also many fig trees which bring forth their fruit all the hole year. 
Figs all the year.  Likewise those kind of date trees that bear dates: 
Dates.  and divers other trees and plants which were brought out of Spain thither.  
Beasts do also increase in like abundance: 
Beasts.  and especially the herds of kine are so augmented both in quantity and number, that there are now many patrons of cattle that have more than two thousand heads of neat: 
Great herds of catta●l.  and sum three or four thousand, and sum more. Bysyde these, there are very many that have herds of four or five hundreth. And truth it is, that this Island hath better pasture for such cattle than any other country in the world: 
good pasture.  also wholesome and clear water and temperate air, by reason whereof the herds of such beasts are much bigger, fatter, and also of better taste than ours in Spain because of the rank pasture whose moisture is better digested in the herb or grass by the continual and temperate heat of the son, 
The effect of continual and moderate heat.  whereby being made more fat and unctuous, it is of better and more steadfast nuryshement. 
The cause of fat nurisshement.  For continual and temperate heat, doth not only draw much moisture out of the earth to the nuryshement of such things as grow and are engendered in that clime, but doth also by moderation preserve the same from resolution and putrefaction, digesting also and condensating or thyckening the said moist nuryshement into a gummy and vactuous substance as is seen in all such things as grow in those regions. And this is the only natural cause aswell that certain great beasts and of long life (as the Elephante and Rhinoceros with such other) are engendered only in regions near unto the Equinoctial, 
Beasts of long life ●n regions about the Equinoctial line  as also that the leaves of such trees as grow there, do not wither or fall, 
Trees whose leaves do not whither  until they be thrust out by other, according to the verse of the poet which saith: Et nata pira piris, et ficus in ficubus extant. That is in effect: pears growing upon pears, and figs upon figs. Pliny also writeth, that such trees are never infected with the disease of trees that the Latins call carries, which we may call the worm or canker, 
The cancar of the tree  being but a certain putrefaction by reason of a waterish nuryshement not well consolidate. The same thing hath bin the cause that certain Philosophers considering aswell that man is the hottest and moistest beast that is (which is the best complexion) as also that men live longest in certain parts of India near the Equinoctial (where yet to this day sum live to th'age of a hundredth and fifty years) were of opinion that if mankind had any beginning on the earth, 
Long lived men in India.  that place ought by good reason to be under or not far from the Equinoctial line for the causes aforesaid. 
Paradise bear the equinoctial line  Sum of the divines also upon like consideration have thought it agreeable that their paradise should be about the same within the precinct of those rivers which are named in the book of Genesis. But to let pass these things and to return to the history.  
In this Island furthermore, are many sheep and a great number of hogs: 
Shepee and hogs  of the which (as also of the kine) many are become wild: And likewise many dogs and cats of those which were brought out of Spain. 
Dogs and cats become wild  These (and especially the dogs) do much hurt among the cattle by reason of the negligence of the heard men.  
There are also many horses, mares, and mules, and such other beasts as serve those of men in Spain, and are much greater than they of the first broad brought thither out of Spain. 
The situation of hispaniola.  Sum places of the Island are inhabited, although not so many as were requisite: Of the which I will say no more but that all the regions of the Island are so well situate that in the course of time all things shall come to greater perfection by reason of the rychnesse and pleasantness of the country and fertility of the soil.  
But now to speak somewhat of the principal and chief place of the Island, which is the city of San Domenico: 
The city of sandomenico  I say that as touching the buildings, there is no city in Spain so much for so much (not not Barsalona which I have oftentimes seen) that is to be preferred before this generally. For the houses of San Domenico, are for the most part of stone as are they of Barsalona: or of so strong and well wrought earth that it maketh a singular & strong binding. The situation is much better than that of Barsalona by reason that the are much larger and plainer▪ and without comparison more direct and straight forth. For being builded now in our time, bysyde the commodity of the place of the foundation, the streets were also directed with cord, compass and measure, wherein it excelleth all the cities that I have seen. It hath the sea so near, that of one side there is no more space between the sea and the city than the walls. And this is about fifty paces where it is furthest of. On this side, the waters of the sea beat upon the natural stones and fair coast. On the other part, hard by the side and at the foot of the houses, passeth the river Ozama which is a marvelous port wherein laden ships rise very near to the land and in manner under the house wynd●wes, 
The river dzama  & no further from the mouth of the river where it entereth into the sea, then is from the foot of the hill of Monyvye to the monastery of saint Frances or to the lodge of Barsalona. In the midst of this space in the city, is the fortress and castle, under the which and twenty paces distant from the same, pass the ships to arise sum what further in the same river. From the entrance of the ships until they cast anchor, they sail no further from the houses of the city than thirty or forty paces, because of this side of the city the habitation is near to the river. The port or haven also, 
The haven  is so fair and commodious to defraight or unlade ships, as the like is found but in few places of the world. The chymmeiss that are in this city, are about six hundredth in number, and such houses as I have spoken of before: Of the which sum are so fair and large that they may well receive and lodge any lord or noble man of Spain with his train and family. And especially that which Don Diego Colon viceroy under your majesty hath in this city, is such that I know no man in Spain that hath the like by a quarter in goodness considering all the commodities of the same. Likewise the situation thereof, as being above the said port and altogether of stone and having many fair and large rooms with as goodly a prospect of the land and sea as may be devised, seemeth unto me so magnifical and princelike that your majesty may be as well lodged therein as in any of the most exquisite builded houses of Spain. There is also a Cathedral church builded of late where aswell the bishop according to his dignity, 
A cathedral church and monastery in hispaniola.  as also the canon's are well endued. This church is well builded of stone and lime, and of good woorkemanshyppe. There are furthermore three monasteries bearing the name of saint Dominike, saint Frances, and saint Marie of Mercedes: The which are all well builded although not so curiously as they of Spain. But speaking without prejudice of any other religious monastery, your majesty may be well assured that in these three monasteries, god is as well served as in any other religious house with men of holy living and virtuous exemple. There is also a very good hospital for the aid and secure of poor people, 
An hospitale.  which was found by Michael Passament threasurer to your majesty. To conclude, this city from day to day increaseth in wealth and good order, aswell for that the said admiral and viceroy with the lord chancellor and counsel appointed there by your majesty, have their continual abiding here, as also that the richest men of the Island resort hither for their most commodious habitation and trade of such merchandise as are either brought out of Spain or sent thither from this Island which now so aboundeth in many things that it serveth Spain with m●ny commodities, as it were with usury requiting such benefits as it first received from thence.  
The people of this Island are commonly of somewhat less stature than are the spaniards, and of a shining or clear brown colour. They have wives of their own, and abstain from their daughters, sisters, and mothers. They have large foreheads, long black hear, and no beards or hear in any other parts of their bodies aswell men as women, 
The people  except very few as perhaps scarcely one among a thousand. They go as naked as they were borne, except that on the parts which may not with honesty be seen, they wear a certain leaf as broad as a man's hand, which nevertheless is not kept close with such diligence but that sometimes a man may see that they think sufficiently hid.  
In this Island are certain glowoormes that shine in the night as do ours. 
Glow worms  But are much bigger and give a greater light: In so much that when the men of the Island go any journeys in the night, they bear sum of these worms made fast about their fiete and head, in such sort that he that should see them a far and ignorant of the thing, would be greatly astonished thereat. By the light of these also, the women work in their houses in the night. These worms they call Clevas. Their light lasteth for the space of three days, and diminisheth as they begin to dry up.  
There is also a kind of crows whose breath stinketh in the morning and is sweet at after noon. 
Crows sty●kynge and sweet.  The excrement which they avoid, is a living worm.  
As touching other things of this Island whereof Peter Martyr hath more largely entreated in his Decades, I have thought it superfluous to repeat the same again out of this history of Gonzalus Ferdinandus: but have here gathered only such things as either are not touched of Peter Martyr or not so largely declared: as I have done the like in all other notable things which I have collected out of this summary of Gonzalus.   

¶ Of the Island of Cuba and other.  
OF the Island of Cuba and the other, as the Islands, of Sancti johannis and jamaica, 
Saint john his Island.  
jamaica.  the same may be said in manner in all things as before of Hispaniola although not so largely. Yet in less quantity do they bring forth the like things: as gold, copper, cattle, trees plants, fishes, and such other of the which we have spoken there.  
In Cuba, is a certain kind of Partyches being very little, with their feathers much of the colour of turtle doves: 
Partridges.  but are of much better taste to be eaten. They are taken in great number. And being brought wild into the houses, they become as tame within the space of three or four days as though they had been hatched there. They becoomme exceeding fat in short space, and are doubtless the most delicate and pleasant meat that ever I have eaten. But to let pass many other things that might here be said, and to speak of two marvelous things which are in this Island of Cuba: whereof the one is, 
Pellettes for guns wrought by nature.  that a valley containing two or three leaques in length between two mountains, is full of a kind of very hard stones of such perfect roundness and like unto pellettes of guns that no art can make better or more exactly polished. Of these, sum are as smaule as pellettes for handegunnes: and other so increasing bigger and bigger from that quantity, that they may serve for all sorts of artyllerie although they be of bigness to receive one or two or more quintales of powder, every quintale containing one hundredth weight: or of what other quantity so ever they be. These pelletes are found through out all the valley within the earth as in a mine, which they dig and take ow●e such as they need of all sorts.  
The other marvelous thing of this Island is this: That far from the sea, there issheweth out of a mountain a certain liquor much like the clay of Babylon called Bitumen or like unto pitch in great quantity and such as is very commodious for the calking of ships. 
A fountain of the pitch of Bitumen.  This falleth continually from the rock and runneth into the sea in such abundance that it is seen floating above the water on every side of the sea there about as it is driven from place to place by the wind or course of the water.  
Quintus Cursius writeth in his history, 
Quintus Cu●sius  that great Alexander came to the city of Memi where is a great cave or den in the which is a spring or fountain that continually avoideth a great quantity of Bitumen in such sort that it is an easy thing to believe that the stones of the walls of Babylon might be laid therewith according as the said author writeth. 
Bitumen of Babi●on.  I have seen this mine of Bitumen, not only in the Island of Cuba, but also such an other in new Spain, which was found of late in the province of Panuco where it is much better than the other of Cuba, 
Panuco.  as I have seen by experience in calking of ships.   

¶ Of the land of Baccaleos called Terra Baccalearum, situate on the North side of the firm land.  
SHortly after that your Majesty came to the city of Toledo, there arrived in the month of November, Steven Gomes the pilot who the year before of 1524. by the commandment of your majesty sailed to the north parts and found a great part of land continuate from that which is called Baccaleos discoursing toward the West to the xl and xli degree, 
Baccaleos.  from whence he broughe certain Indians (for so call we all the nations of the new found lands) of the which he brought sum with him from thence who are yet in Toledo at this present, 
Indians.  and of greater stature than other of the firm land as they are commonly. Their colour is much like tother of the firm land. They are great archers, and go covered with the skins of divers beasts both wild and tame. 
Rich furs and silver.  In this land are many excellent furs, as martens, sables, and such other rich furs of the which the said pilot brought sum with him into Spain. They have silver and copper, and certain other metals. They are Idolaters and honour the son and moon, 
Idolaters.  and are seduced with such superstitions and errors as are they of the firm.  
And to have written thus much, it may suffice of such things as have seemed to me most worthy to be noted in the Summarie of Gonzalus Ferdinandus written to Themperors majesty   

¶ Of other notable things gathered out of divers authors: And first of the universal card and new world.  
THe hole globe or compass of the earth was divided by the ancient writers into three parts, as Europa, Africa, and Asia: which parts contain in longitude .180. degrees, beginning the first degree at the Islands of Canary. And contain in latitude toward the North .63. degrees, beginning the first degree from the Equinoctial: And .10. degrees toward the South. All the rest of the longitude which containeth other .180. degrees, is discovered of late time, as the West India called the new world, 
west India the new world.  because none of the owlde authors had any knowledge or made any mention thereof. All that therefore is called new which is Westward from the Islands of Canary. And thus accounting these .180. degrees toward the East discovered in old time, with the other .180. degrees discovered of late days, they make, 360. degrees, which is all the circle of the Equinoctial in the sphere. 
The circumference of the Equinoctial line.  Also the part above the .63. degrees of the North latitude, 
The North regions.  was found by men of late time, as Norway and Grutlande with many other provinces. Likewise the part more south than .10. degrees of latitude, 
The South regions.  was discovered of late days, although Ariane and Pliny say that it was known in old time: which if it were, yet had they no such particular description thereof as we have in these days.    

¶ A discourse of the viage made by the spaniards round about the world.  
THe viage made by the spaniards round about the world, is one of the greatest and most marvelous things that hath bin known to hour tyme. And although in many things we excel hour ancient predecessors, in this especially we so far exceed all their inventions, that the like hath not heretofore been known to this day. This voyage was written particularly by Don Peter Martyr of Angleria being one of the counsel of Themperors Indies, 
Don Peter Martyr.  to whom also was committed the writing of the history and examination of all such as returned from thence into Spain to the city of Seville, in the year. M. D. xxii. But sending it to Rome to be printed in that miserable time when the city was sacked it was lost and not found to this day or any memory remaining thereof, 
Rome sacked  saving such as sum that red the same have borne in mind. And among other notable things by him written as touching that viage, this is one, that the spaniards having sailed about three years and one month, 
A day lost in three years and one month.  and the most of them noting the days, day by day (as is the manner of all them that sail by the Ocean) they found when they were returned to Spain, that they had lost one day: So that at their arrival at the port of Sivile being the seventh day of September, was by their account but the sixth day. And where as Don Peter Martyr declared the strange effect of this thing to a certain excellent man who for his singular learning was greatly advanced to honour in his common wealth and made Themperors ambassador, this worthy gentleman who was also a great Philosopher and Astronomer, answered that it could not otherwise chance unto them having sailed three years continually, ever following the son toward the West. And said furthermore that they of old time observed that all such as sailed behind the son toward the West, did greatly lengthen the day. And albeit that the said book of Peter Martyr is perished, yet hath not fortune permitted that the memory of so worthy and marvelous an enterprise should utterly be extinct: forasmuch as a certain noble gentleman of the city of Uincenza in Italy, called master Antony Pigafetta (who being one of the company of that viage and after his return into Spain in the ship Uictoria, 
Antony Pigafetta.  was made knight of the Rhodes) wrote a particular and large book thereof which he gave to Themperors Majesty, and sent a copy of the same into France to the lady Regente mother unto the french king, who committed it to an excellent philosopher called master jacobus Faber, 
jacobus Faber.  having long studied in Italy, willing him to translate it into the French tongue. This book therefore was printed first in the french tongue and then in the Italien, with also an epistle to the Cardinal of Salsepurge as touching the same voyage, written by maximilian Transiluane secretary to Themperors Majesty, 
Maximilian Transiluane  in the year .1522. And doubtless among all the cities of Italy, the city of Uicenza may herein much glory, that beside the ancient nobility and many excellent and rare wits which it hath browght forth aswell in learning as discipline of war, it hath also had so worthy and valiant a gentleman as was the said master Antony Pigafetta, who having compassed about the ball or globe of the world, hath likewise described that viage particularly. For the which his so noble and wonderful an enterprise so happily achieved, 
The reward of noble enterpryse●.  if the same had been done in the owlde time when th'empire of the Greeks and Romans flourished, he should doubtless have been rewarded with an Image of marble or gold erected in a place of honour in perpetual memory and for a singular exemple of his virtue to the posterity. In fine, this may we boldly affirm, that the antiquity had never such knowledge of the world which the son coompaseth about in xxiiii. hours, 
The antiquity had no such knowledge of the world as we have.  as we have at this present by thindustry of men of this hour age. But before I speak any thing of the voyage, I have thought it good first to add hereunto, the Epistle of Maximilian Transiluane which he wrote to the Cardinal of Salsepurge as a preface to his said book.  

¶ The Epistle of Maximilian Transiluane, secretary to The emperors majesty: written to the right honourable and reverend lord, the lord Cardinal of Salsepurge, of the marvelous and wonderful navigation made by the spaniards round about the world in the year of Christ. M. D. nineteen.  
IN these days my most honourable and reverend lord, returned one of those five ships which the year before Themperours being at Saragosa in Spain, were at his majesties commandment sent to the new world heretofore unknown unto us, to seek the Islands of spices. 
The Islands of Molucca.  For albeit the Portugals bring us great quantity of spices from that part of east India which in old time was called Aurea Chersonesus (where is now thought to be the great and rich city of Malaccha) yet in east India grow none of those spices except pepper. 
Aurea Chersonesus.  
Malaccha.  
spices.  For other spices, as Cinnamon, cloves, nutmegs, and mase, (which is the husk that covereth the shell of the nut) are brought from other far countries & from Islands scarcely known by their names. From the which Islands they are brought in ships or barks made without any iron tools, and tied together with cords of date trees: with round sails likewise made of the smaule twigs of the branches of date trees weaved together. These barks they call Giun●he: with the which barks and sails, they make their voyages with only one wind in the stern or contrariwise.  
Neither yet is it a thing greatly to be marveled at that these Islands where the spices grow have been unknown so many worlds passed unto hour time, 
The Islands of spices unknown in owlde tyme.  forasmuch as all such things as unto this day have been written of owld authors of the places where spices grow, are all fabulous and false: In so much that the countries where they affirm them to grow, are now certainly found to be further from the place where they grow in deed, than we are from them. For letting pass many other things that are written, I will speak only of this which Herodotus (otherwise a famous author) affirmeth that Cinnamon, 
Herodutus.  
Cinnamon,  is found in the tops of the nests of certain birds and fowls that bring it from far countries, & especially the phoenix, 
The phoenix.  the which I know no man that ever hath seen. But Pliny who might more certainly affirm things by reason that before his time many things were known and discovered by the navigations of great Alexander and other, 
Pliny.  
The navigations of great Alexander.  saith that Cinnamon groweth in that part of Ethiope which the people inhabit called Trogloditi. 
Ethiope.  
Trogloditi.  Nevertheless it is now found that Cinnamon groweth very far from all Ethiope and much further from the Trogloditi which dwell in caves under the ground. But to hour men which are now returned from those parts and the Islands of spices, having also good knowledge of Ethiope, it was necessary to pass far beyond Ethiope before they come to these Islands, 
The navigation about the world.  and to coompasse about the whole world, and many times under the greatest circumference of heaven. The which navigation made by th●m, being the most marvelous thing that ever was done by man upon the earth sense the first creation of the world, and never found before, or known, or attempted by any other, I have deliberated faithfully to write to your honourable lordship and to declare the hole success thereof. As touching which matter, I have with all diligence made inquisition to know the truth aswell by relation of the captain of that ship as also by conference with every of the mariners that returned with him. All which, gave the self same information both to Themperors majesty and divers other: And this with such faithfulness and sincerity, that not only they are judged of all men to have declared the truth in all things, but have thereby also given us certain knowledge that all that hath hitherto been said or written of old authors as touching these things, 
The owld● authors reproved.  are false and fabulous. For who will believe that men are found with only one leg. Or with such fiete whose shadow covereth their bodies? Or men of a cubit height, and other such like, being rather monsters than men? 
Monsters.  Of the which, neither the spaniards who in hour time sailing by the Ocean sea, 
The voyages of the spaniards and Portugales,  have discovered all the coasts of the land toward the West both under and above the Equinoctial, nor the Portugals who compassing about all africa have passed by all the east and likewise discovered all those coasts unto the great gulf called Sinus Magnus, 
Sinus Magnus.  nor yet the spaniards in this their last navigation, in the which they compassed about the hole earth, did never in any of their voyages write of such monsters: which doubtless they would not have omitted if they might have had certain knowledge thereof. But now intending to speak of the whole world, I will not be long in my preface, but begin my narration as followeth.   

❧ A brief declaration of the viage or navigation made about the world. Gathered out of a large book written hereof by master Antony Pygafetta Uincentine, knight of the Rhodes and one of the coomp●nye of that viage in the which, Ferdinando Magalianes a Portugal (whom sum call Magellanus) was general captain of the navy.  
unless Sebastian Munster in his universal cosmography in the fifth book of the lands of the greater Asia (which I translated into english about two years sen●e) hath written of the viage of Magellanus, 
Sebastian Munster.  declaring therein how the spaniards by the West, and the Portugals by the east, sailing to the Islands of Molucca, 
The Islands of Molucca.  compassed the hole globe of the world between them, yet have I here thought it good to make a brief repetition of this viage, adding hereunto divers notable things which were not touched of Munster, as I have gathered them out of the books of Antony Pigafetta and Transiluanus written of the same viage. For albeit in deed it was a strange and wonderful thing that the spaniards and Portugals compassed the hole circumference of the world between them, yet is it more marvelous that the same was done with one ship and one company of men as did the spaniards in this viage, who keeping their continual course by the West, returned into Spain by the east. A thing doubtless so much more wonderful and strange then if they had returned from the half circumference by the same way they went. In how much they were ignorant in the viage never attempted before, beside the thousand daungiours and perils which they were daily like to fall into, aswell by wandering in unknown coasts as also by falling into the hands of the Portugals by whose dominions in the east, 
Controversy betwine the spaniards and Portugals.  they should needs pass of necessity, not trusting to their gentleness for the controversy which had been long between them for the Islands of Molucca. I will therefore (as I have said) make a brief rehearsal of this viage from the beginning to the ending: omitting nevertheless many notable things which are more largely described in the books of Maximilianus Transiluanus and Antonius Pigafetta.  
The tenth day of August, in the year of hour lord M. D. nineteen. Ferdinando Magalianes departed from the port of Seville in Spain with a navy of five ships and two hundredth thirty and seven men, 
Ferdinando Magalianes.  well furnished with all things necessary. And sailing first down by the river of Guadalehiber which runneth from the said port into the sea, they came first to a place named Giovan Dulfarax where are many villages of the moors: And from thence arrived at a castle of the Duke of Medina Sidonia, where is the port from which they enter into the sea and to the cape saint Uincent being distant from the Equinoctial xxxvii degrees, 
The Cape of saint Uincent  and from the said port ten leaques, and is from thence to Seville between xvii. and twenty leaques. Here they remained certain days to make new provision of such things as they lacked.  
Departing from hence the twenty day of September, they arrived the xxvi day of the same month at one of the Islands of Canary called T●nerife, 
The Islands of Canary.  being xxv degrees about the Equinoctial. In one of these Islands is none other water but that is continually engendered of a cloud which appeareth daily at noon tide as though it descended from heaven and compasseth about a certain great tree from whose branches distilleth great abundance of water, 
water engendered of a cloud.  and faulethe in streams from the root of the same into certain trenches and cestarnes made and placed to receive it. This water serveth sufficiently all thinhabitants and cattle of the Island. The like thing is also seen in the Island of saint Thomas, 
The Island of saint Thoma●.  lying directly under the Equinoctial line.  
The third day of October about midnight, the capitain commanded them to light firebrands and to hoist up their sails directing their course toward the South, sailing between Capo Verde of africa and the Islands lying about the same, 
Capo verde.  being from the Equinoctial xiiii degrees and a half. They failed thus, many days in the sight of the coast of Guinea, of Ethio●e, 
Ginnea in ethiop  where is the mountain called Serra Liona being viii degrees above the Equinoctial. 
Serraliona.  In this coast they had no manner of contrary wind but a great calm and fair wether for the space of threescore and ten days, in the which they came under the Equinoctial line. In this viage they saw many strange fishes and monsters of the sea beside an other strange thing which appeared unto them. 
fishes and monsters of the sea.  For there appeared in their ships certain flames of fire burning very clear, which they cawl saint Helen and saint Nicolas. 
The fierce of saints helen & S. Nicolas. A tempest.  These appeared as thought they had been upon the mast of the ships, in such clearness that they took away their sight for the space of a quarter of an hour: by reason whereof, they so wandered out of their course and were dispersed in sunder, that they in manner despaired to meet again. But as God would, the sea and tempest being quieted, they came safely to their determined course. And before I speak any further of the viage, I have here thought good to say somewhat of these strange fierce, 
The natural cause of such ●iers as faule in the ships  which sum ignorant folks think to be spirits or such other fantasies whereas they are but natural things proceeding of natural causes and engendered of certain exhalations. Of these therefore, the great Philosopher of hour time Hieronimus Cardanus in his second book de Subtilitate, 
Cardanus.  writeth in this manner.  
There are two manner of fierce engendered of exhalations whereof the one is hurtful and the other without hurt. 
Two kinds of fierce engendered of exhalations.  That which is hurtful, is fire in deed, engendered of malicious & venomous vapours which in success of time take fire as apt matters to be kindled. The other kind, is no true fy●e, but like the matter that is in such owlde putrefied wood as giveth the shining of fire without the substance or quality thereof. Of the kind of true fire, 
True fire & false fire.  is the fire ball or star commonly called saint Helen which is sometime seen about the masts of ships, being of such fiery nature that it sometime melteth brazen vessels, and is a token of drowning, forasmuch as this chanceth only in great tempests. For the vapour or exhalation whereof this fire is engendered, can not be driven together or compact in form of fire, but of a gross vapour and by a great power of wind, and is therefore a token of imminent peril: As on the contrary part, the like fierce called in old time Castor and Pollux and now named the two lights of saint Peter and saint Nycolas which for the most part faule on the cables of the ships, 
Casto● and Pollux.  
The lights of saint Peter and saint Nycolas.  leaping from one to an other with a certain fluttering noise like birds, are a token of security and of the tempest overpassed. For they are but vapours cleaving to the cables: which in success of time, the fire passing from one to an other, appear in the similitude of a light candle. They are a token of security because they are little, not slow or gross, whereby they might have joined altogether in one, and been thereby more malicious and lasted longer, whereas being many and but little, they are the sooner consumed. hitherto Cardanus. But let us now return to the viage.  
When they had sailed passed the Equinoctial line, they lost the sight of the north star, 
They lost the sight of the North star.  and sailed by southwest until they came to a land named the land of Bressil which sum call Brasilia, 
The land▪ of Bresile.  being xxii degrees and a half toward the south pole or pole Antartyke. 
The South pole.  This land is continuate and one firm land with the cape of saint Augustine which is viii. degrees from the Equinoctial. In this land they were refreshed with many good fruits of innumerable kinds, and found here also very good sugar canes and divers kinds of beasts and other things which I omit for brevity. 
Sugar.  They entered into this haven on saint Lucy's day: where the son being there Zenith (that is the point of heaven directly over their heads) they felt greater heat that day then when they were under the Equinoctial line. This land of Brasile is very large and great: 
The greatness of the land of Brasile.  and bigger than all Spain, Portugal, France, and Italy: and is most abundant in all things. The people of this country pray to no manner of thing: but live by thinstinct of nature, and to th'age of. C.xx and. C. xl. years. Both the men and women go naked, and dwell in certain long houses. They are very docible, and soon alured to the Christian faith.  
Therteene days after that they arrived at the said port, they departed from this land and sailed to the xxxiiii degree and a half toward the pole Antarctic where they found a great river of fre●she water and certain Canibales. 
C●ni●ales.  Of these they saw one out of their ships, of stature as big as a giant, 
Giants.  having a voice like a bull. Hour men pursued them, but they were so swift of foot that they could not overtake them. about the mouth of this river, are seven Islands, 
Insula● gemmarum.  in the bigest whereof, they found certain precious stones, and called it the cape of saint Marie. 
Cap. S. Marry.  The spaniards thought that by this river they might have passed into the south sea. But they were deceived in their opinion. For there was none other passage then by the river which is xvii leaques large in the mouth.  
Thus following this coast by the tract of the land toward the pole Antartyke, 
The pole ●nartike.  they came to a place where were two Islands replenished with giese and wolves of the sea which sum think to be those fishes that we call pikes. 
Geese-Sea wolves  These were in such number that in an hour all the five ships might have been lade with giese being all of black colour, and such as can not fly. They live of fish and are so fat that they could scarcely i'll them. They have no feathers but a certain down: and their byls like ravens byls. These wolves of the sea are of divers colours, and of the bigness of calves, with their heads of golden colour. Here were they in great daungiour by tempest. But as soon as the three fierce called saint Helen, saint Nycolas, and saint Clare, appeared upon the cabels of the ships, suddenly the tempest and fury of the winds ceased.  
Departing from hence, they sailed to the .49. degree and a half under the pole Antartyke: 
The xlix degree of the south pole.  where being wintered, they were enforced to remain there for the space of two months, all which time they saw no man except that one day by chance they espied a man of the stature of a giant, 
Giants.  who came to the haven dancing and singing, and shortly after seemed to cast dust over his head. The captain sent one of his men to the shore with the ship boat, who made the like sign of peace. The which thing the giant seeing, was out of fear and came with the captains servant to his presence into a little Island. When he saw the captain with certain of his company about him, he was greatly amazed and made signs hilding up his hand to heaven, signifying thereby that hour men came from thence. This giant was so big, 
The bygnes of the giants.  that the head of one of our men of a mean stature, came but to his waste. He was of good corporature and well made in all parts of his body, with a large visage painted with divers colours, but for the most part yellow. Upon his cheeks were painted two hearts, and red circles about his eyes. The hear of his head was coloured white, and his apparel was the skin of a beast sowed together. This beast (as seemed unto us) had a large head and great ears like unto a mule, with the body of a camel and tail of a horse. The feet of the g●ant were folded in the said skin after the manner of shoes. He had in his hand, a big and short bow, the string whereof was made of a sinew of that beast. He had also a bundle of long arrows made of reeds feathered after the manner of owrs, typte with sharp stones in the stead of iron heads. The captain caused him to eat and drink, and gave him many things, and among other a great looking glass: In the which as soon as he saw his own likeness, was suddenly afraid and started back with such violence that he overthrew two that stood nearest about him. When the captain had thus given him certain hawks bells and other great bells, with also a looking glass, a comb, and a pair of beads of glass, he sent him to land with four of his own men well armed.  
Shortly after, they saw an other giant of somewhat greater stature, 
another giant.  with his bow and arrows in his hand, As he drew near unto hour men, he laid his hand on his head and pointed up toward heaven, and our men did the like. The captain sent his ship boat to bring him to a little Island being in the haven. This giant was very tractable and pleasant. He soonge and danced: and in his dancing left the print of his feet on the ground. Here main long with hour men who named him johan. He could well speak and plainly pronounce these words: jesus: ave Maria, johannes, even as we do, but with a bigger voice.  
The captain gave him a shirt of linen cloth, and a coat of white woollen cloth: Also a cap, a comb, a looking glass, with divers such other things, and so sent him to his company. The day following, he resorted again to the ships, and brought with him one of those great beasts▪ which he gave the captain. But after that day they never saw him more, supposing him to be slain of his own company for the conversation he had with hour men.  
After other xu days were paste, there came four other giants without any weapons, 
Four other giants.  but had hid their bows and arrows in certain bushes. The captain retained two of these which were youngest and best made. He took them by a deceit in this manner, that giving them knives, shears, 
Two giants are t●ken by a policy.  looking glasses, bells, beads of crystal, & such other ●ryfels, he so filled their hands that they could hold no more. Then caused two pair of shackles of iron to be put on their legs, making signs that he would also give them those chains: which they liked very well because they were made of bright and shining metal. And whereas they could not carry them because their hands were full, the other giants would have carried them: but the captain would not suffer them. When they felt the shakels fast about their legs, they begun to doubt: but the captain did put them in comfort and bad them stand still. In fine when they saw how they were deceived they roared like bulls and cried upon their great devil Setebo● to help them. 
The devil Setebos.  Being thus taken, they were immediately separate and put in sundry ships. They could never bind the hands of the other two, Yet was one of them with much difficulty overthrown by nine of hour men, and his hands bound: but he suddenly loosed himself and fled, as did also the other that came with them. In their f●ying, they shot of their arrows and slew one of hour men. They say that when any of them die, 
devils app●r● to the gyant●● when they die.  there appear ten or xii devils leaping and dancing about the body of the dead. and seem to have their boddyes painted with divers colours. And that among other, there is one seen bigger than the residue, who maketh great mirth and rejoicing. This grea●e devil they call Setebos, and call the less Chel●ule. One of these giants which they took, declared by signs that he had seen devils with two horns above their heads, with long hear down to their feet: And that they cast forth fire at their throats both before and behind. The captain named these people Patagoni. 
Patagoni.  The most part of them wear the skins of such beasts whereof I have spoken before: And have no houses of continuance but make certain cottages which they cover with the said skins, and carry them from place to place. They live of raw flesh and a certain sweet root which they call Capar. One of these which they had in their ships, did eat at one meal a basket of byskette, 
The giants feeding.  and drunk a bowl of water at a draft.  
They remained five months in this port of saint Iuli●n, where certain of the under captains conspiring the death of their general, 
They cospire against their captain.  were hanged and quartered: Among whom the treasurer Luigo of Mendozza was one. Certain of the other conspirators, he left in the said land of Patogoni  
Departing from hence to the .52. degree toward the pole Antarctic lacking a third part, where they found a river of fresh water and good fish. Their ships were here in great daungiour. They remained two months in this port where they made new provision of fresh water, fuel, and fish. Here the captain caused all his men to be confessed. 
Confession.   
approaching to the .52. degrees, they found the strait now called the strait of Magellanus, 
The strait of Magellanus.  being in sum place L. x. leaques in length: and in breadth somewhere very large and in other places little more than half a leaque in breadth. On both the sides of this straight, are great and high mountains covered with snow, beyond the which is the entrance into the sea of Sur. 
The South sea.  This entrance the captain named Mare Pacificum. 
Mare pacificu●.  Here one of the ships stole away punilie and returned into Spain. In this was one of the giants who died as soon as he felt the heat that is about the Equinoctial line.  
When the captain Magalianes was past the strait and saw the way open to the other main sea, 
The giants di●d fo● heat.  he was so glad thereof that for joy the tears fell from his eyes, and named the point of the land from whence he first saw that sea, Capo D●siderato. 
Capo Deside●ato   
Supposing that the ship which stole away had been lost, they erected a cro●●e upon the top of a high hill to direct their course in the strait if it were their chance to come that way. They found that in this straight in the month of October the night was not passed four hours long. 
Short nights in the month of October.  They found in this straight at every three miles, a safe haven and excellent water to drink: wood also and fish, and great plenty of goodherbes. They think that there is not a fairer straight in the world. Here also they saw certain ●●yinge fishes. 
F●ying fish   
The other giant which remained with them in the ship, named bread Capar: water, Ol●: red cloth, Chereca●red colour, 
The giants language.  Cheiche: black colour, Amel: And spoke all his words in the throat. On a time, as one made a cross before him and kissed it, showing it unto ●ym, he suddenly cried Setebos, and declared by signs that if they made any more crosses, Setebos would enter into his body and make him burst. But when in fine he saw no hurt come thereof, he took the cross and embraced and kissed it oftentimes, desiring that he might be a Christian before his death. He was therefore baptized and named Paul. 
The giant is baptized.   
Departing out of this straight into the sea called Mare Pacificum the xxviii day of November in the year .1520. they sailed three moons and twenty days before they saw any land. 
Three months say't ling without the sight of land.  And having in this time consumed all their bysket and other victuals, they fell into such necessity that they were enforced to eat the powder that remained thereof being now full of worms and stinking like piss by reason of the salt water. 
Extreme f●m●n.  Their fresh water was also putrefied and become yellow. They did eat skins and pieces of leather which were folded about certain great ropes of the ships. But these skins being made very hard by reason of the son, rain and wind, they hung them by a cord in the sea for the space of four or five days to mollify them, and sod them and eat them. By reason of this famen and unclean feeding, sum of their gums grew so over their teeth, 
Di●ease● of famen.  that they died miserably for hunger. And by this occasion died xix men, and also the giant with an Indian of the land of Brasile otherwise called Terra de papagalli, that is the land of popinjays. Beside these that died xxv or xxx were so sick that they were not able to do any service with their hands or arms for feebleness: So that there was in manner none without sum disease. In these three months & xx. days, they sailed four thousand leaques in one gulf by the said sea called Pacific●m (that is) peaceable, which may well be so called forasmuch as in all this time having no sight of any land, they had no misfortune of wind o● any other tempest. During this time also, they discovered only two little Islands unhabited, where they saw nothing but birds and trees, and therefore named them infortunate Islands, 
Unfortunate Islands.  being one from the other about two hundredth leaques distant. The first of these Islands is from the Equinoctial toward the pole Antarctic xu degrees, and the other five. Their sailing was in such sort that they sailed daily between. l.lx. to lxx leaques. 
what they sailed dayl●  So that in fine, if god of his mercy had not given them good wether, it was necessary that in this so great a sea they should all have dread for hunger. Which nevertheless they escaped so hardly, that it may be doubted whether ever the like voyage may be attempted with so good success.  
They considered in this navigation that the pole Antarctic hath no notable star after the sort of the pole Arctic. But they saw many stars gathered together, 
The ●tarre● abow● the south pole.  which are like two clouds one separate a l●ttle from an other, and sum what dark in the midst. Between these, are two stars not very big, nor much shynninge, which move a little: And these two are the pole Antarctic. The needell of their compass varied somewhat, 
The needle of the coompase.  and turned ever toward the pole Arctic. Nevertheless, had no such force as when it is in these parts of the pole Arctic. In so much that it was necessary to help the needle with the load stone (commonly called the adamant) before they could sail therewith, 
The load stone.  because it mou●d not as it doth when it is in these hour parts. When they were in the midst of the gulf, they saw a cross of five clear stars directly toward the West, eand of equal distance the one from the other.  
❧ The order of the stars about the pole Antarctic, sum have figured in this manner.  
A. The pole Antarctic. B. The cross.  
In these days they sailed between the West and South so far that they approached to the Equinoctial line, 
The Equinoctial line.  & were in longitude from the place from whence they first departed, a hundredth and twenty degrees. In this course they sailed by two Islands of exceeding height, whereof the one named Cipanghu, is twenty degrees from the pole Antarctic: And the other named Sumbdit xu degrees. 
The Islands of Cipanghu and Sumbdit  When they were past the Equinoctial line, they sailed between the West and south-west at the quarter of the West toward the south-west more than a hundredth leaques, changing their sails to the quarter of the south-west until they came to the xiii degrees above the Equinoctial toward the pole arctic, intending as much as were possible, to approach to the cape called of the owlde writers Cartigara: The which is not found as the owlde Cosmographers have described it, but is toward the north about xii degrees as they afterward understood.  
When they had thus sailed lxx leaques of this viage in the xii degree above the Equinoctial, and. C.xlvi. degrees of longitude (as I have said) the sixth day of March they discovered a little Island toward the northwest, and two other toward the southwest: but the one was higher and bigger than the two other. In the bigest of these, the general captain would have rested himself a while: but he could ●ot by reason the people of these islands resorted continually to the ships with their canoas, and stole now one thing and now an other, in such sort that our men could take no rest, and therefore demanded of the captain that they might strike their sails to bring the ships to land. But the captain being provoked to anger, went aland with forty armed men, and burnt about fifty of their houses with many of their Can●as: And slew also about seven men, and recovered a ship boat which the Barbarians had stolen, and so departed following his viage. The captain named these islands Insulae Latronum, that is, 
Insule Latronun.  the islands of thieves. When our men had so wounded sum of thaym with arrows that they were stricken through both sides, they pulled forth the arrows not ceasing to marvel at them till they ●ell down dead: And yet could not the other ●o depart, but still followed ●he ships with more than two hund●eth of their boats, approaching as near to the ships as they could, and prof●rynge hour men certain fysshee. As the s●yppes passed with full sail in ●he myddeste of their b●ates, they saw in sum of them certain wom●n lamenting and tearing their hear, which ●wre men thought they did for the death of their husbands. As far as they could perceive, these people live at their own liberty without any ruler or governor. They go naked and have black beards and black heat on their heads which they wear long down to their wastes. 
People with long hear  They are of the same stature that we are, and well made, of colour like unto an olive. Their women are well favoured with black and thick hear on their heads reaching to the ground. The men colour their teeth red and black, 
They colour their teeth.  which they esteem a coomely thing. They anoint their bodies and hear with the oil of Cocus. Their boats are sum all black, sum white, and sum red, and have sails made of the broad leaves of date trees sowed together. In the stead of a rudder, they use a certain broad boo, d● with a staff in the top, and may when they will, make the st●rne the forecastell, or the forecastell the stern.  
They sail to swiftly that they seem a far of, like Delphyns swiming above the water.  
The tenth day of ●arch, in the year .1521. they went aland upon a little Island named Zamal xxx leaques distant from the Island of the●ues. 
The Island of zamail.  Because this Island was not inhabited, they rested here a while, where the captain caused a pavilion to be pitched for the sick and crazed men, and a hog to be killed.  
The xviii day of March, they saw a boat with nine men coming toward them, showing themselves joyful and rejoicing of their coming. They brought many presents with them, and seemed to be people of much humanity. They gave the cap●tayne a great fish, and a great vessel of the wine of those date trees which bear the fruit Cocus. 
wine of date trees.  They made also signs that within the space of four days, they would bring rysse and divers fowls and beasts as they did in deed.  
This Cocu● is a fruit of certain date trees whereof they make bread, 
The marvelous fruit. Cocus.  wine, oil, and vinegar. They make wine in this manner. They cut a big branch of the tree, & hang thereat a reed as big as a man's leg, into the which droppeth a sweet liquor from the tree like unto new white wine somewhat ●ar●, & let the reed continue there from morning till evening, and from evening to morning. The fruit of this tree called Cocus, is as big as the head of a ●an or more. The first rind of this, is green and of the thickness of two fingers, having in it certain threads whereof they make cords with the which they tie their boats. Under this rind, there is a thick shell which they burn and make powder thereof and use it as a remedy for certain diseases. Under this shell, is a white substance like the carnel of a nut being a finger in thickness, which they eat with flesh and fish as we do bread. It hath the taste of an almond, and is used in the stead of bread when it is dried. In the midst of this carnel, is a clear and sweet water, being very wholesome and cordial. This water sometime congealeth and lieth within the shell like an egg. When they intend to make oil hereof, they lay it to putrefy in water, and boil it until it be like oil or liquid butter. When they intend to make vinegar, they suffer only the water to putrefy, and then set it to the son where it becometh vinegar like unto that which is made of white wine. And when they mengle the carnel with the water which is in the midst of the fruit, and strain it thorough a cloth, they make a milk thereof like unto goats milk. These date trees are like unto them that bear dates, but are not so full of knots. With the juice of two of these date trees, a hole family of ten persons may be maintained with wine using one viii. days, and the other, other viii days: for they should else be dried and withered. These trees continue for the space of a hundredth years. This Island where they found this human and gentle people, is called Zuluan, 
The Island of zuluan  and is not very big. about this Island they found many other Islands, and therefore named this sea Archipelago di San Lazaro, 
The sea cawled Arch●pelago d●●an La●aro.  that is, the great sea of saint Lazarus, being ten degrees above the Equinoctial toward hour pole, and. C.lxi from the place from whence they departed. The people of this Island are Caphranitae (that is gentiles. 
gentiles.  They go naked saving that they cover their privy parts with a cloth made of the rind of a certain tree. The chiefest men, have about their heads a silken cloth of needle work. They are gross and broad set and of the colour of an olive. They anoint their bodies with the oil of Cocus to defend them against the heat of the son and dryness of the wind. The xxv day of March, they departed from hence and directed their course between the West and south-west, and sailed between four Islands named Cenalo, Huinanghan, Hibusson, and Abarien, 
Four islands  etc.  
The xxviii. day of March, they came to the Island of Buthuan where they were honourably entertained of the King and the Prince his son who gave them much gold and spices. 
The Island of Buthuan.  The captain gave the king a vesture of red cloth and an other of yellow made after the Turaysshe fashion, and also a red cap. And gave likewise to other that came with him, certain knives, glasses, and beads of cristalle.  
After that, the captain had showed the King the secrets of his ship and such merchandise as he had therein, he caused a piece of ordinance suddenly to be shore of, whereat the king was greatly amazed until the captain comforted him. Then the captain commanded one of his men to be armed from the head to the foot, and caused three other to strike him with their swords, whereat the King marveled greatly, and said to th'interpreter (who was a slave borne in Malacha) that one of those armed men was able to encounter with a hundredth of his men. But he marveled much more when the captain told him by th'interpreter how he found the strait by the compass and load stone, and how many days they were without sight of any land. Then asking licence to depart, the captain sent two of his men with him, of the which Antony Pigafetta was one. When the king saw Antony Pigafetta write the names of many things, and afterward rehearse them again, he marveled yet more, making signs that such men descended from heaven. The King brought them first to his palace where he entertained them honourably and gave them many gifts, as did also the Prince in his palace being in an other Island named Caleghan. 
The Island of Cal●ghan.   
As they sifted a certain mine of earth in the Kings Island, they found pieces of gold, su● as big as nuts and other as big as eggs. All the kings vessels were of gold, 
Plent●e of gold.  and his house well furnished. In all the hole nation there was no man of coomlier parsonage than the king. He had his hear long down to his shoulders, and very black, with a vail of silk rolled about his head, 
The king of Buthuan.  and two great rings of gold hanging at his ears. He had about his middle, a cloth wrought of cotton and silk impaled with gold, and reacheinge down to his knees. On his one side, he had a long dagger with a haft of gold, and the sheathe of a fair kind of carved wood. He had on every finger, three rings of gold, and had his body anointed with oil of storax and Benjamin. The natural colour of his face was like unto the colour of an olive: And all his body bysyde painted with divers colours. The kings name was Raia Colambu, and the Prince was called Raia Siagu.  
The last day of March near unto Easter, the captain caused his priest to say mass, 
Mass.  and sent to the king by th'interpreter, that his coming a land at that time was not to dine with him, but only to hear mass. The captain came aland with fifty of his men in their best apparel with out weapons or harness, and all the residue well armed. Before the boats came to land, he caused six pieces of ordinance to be shot of in token of peace, and so came aland, where the two kings embraced him, and accompanied him to the place appointed for mass to be said not far from the sea side. somewhat before the beginning of mass, the captain sprinkled the Kings with damask water.  
When the priest was at mid mass at the offitorie, the kings proffered themselves to go to kiss the cross with the capitain, but offered nothing. At the time of sacringe when the priest lifted up the body of Christ, and the Christians kneeled down and held up their hands joined together, the kings did the like also with great reverence. In the mean time, while certain of the Christians were at the communion, a handegunne was shot of to signify unto them that were in the ships, to discharge all their ordinance.  
When mass was finished, the captain caused certain of his men to put on their harness and to make a combat with their naked swords, 
A combat.  whereat the kings took great pleasure. This done, the captain caused a cross to be brought forth, with nails and a crown of thorns, 
The Cross and crown of thorns.  giving commandment to all his men to give reverence thereunto, and signifying to the kings by th'interpreter that that banner was given him by Themperor his lord and master, with commandment t● l●aue the same in all places where he came to the great commodity and profit of all such as would reverendly receive it as an assured token of friendship: And that he would therefore leave it there aswell to accomplish his lords commandment, as also that if at any time any ships of Christians should chance to come that way, should by seeing that cross perceive that hour men had been well entertained there. and would therefore not only abstain from doing them any hurt or displeasure, but also help to aid them against their enemies. And that therefore it should be requisite to erect that cross upon the top of the highest mountain that might be seen from the sea on every side. Also to pray unto it reverently. And that in so doing, they should not be hurt with thunder, lightening, or tempests. When the kings hard these words, they gave the captain great thanks, promising gladly to observe and fulfil all such things as he required. Then the captain demanded whether they were Moors or gentiles. 
Moors and gentiles.  They answered that they had none other kind of religion, but that lyftyng● up their hands joined together and their faces toward heaven, they called upon their god Abba. which answer liked the captain ver● well, because the gentiles are sooner persuaded to hour faith then the moors. etc.  

Many islands  Departing from hence, they came to the Islands of Zeilon, Zubuth, Messana, and Calaghan, by the conduct of certain pilots of the said kings. Of these, Zubuth is the best, and hath the trade of best traffic. In the Island of M●ssana, 
The Island of Messana.  they found dogs, cats, hogs, heunes, goats, ry●e, ginger, Cocus, mill, panyke, barley, figs, oranges aware▪ and gold in great quantity. This Island is above the Equinoctial toward hour pole ix degrees two third parts: and .162. degrees from the place from whence they departed. They remained in this Island for the space of viii days, and then directed their viage toward the northwest, and passed between these five Islands, Zeilon, Bohol, Cangbu, Barbai, and Catighan. In this Island of Catighan, are certain great bats as big as Eagles, 
Bats as big as Eagles.  of the which they took one. They are good to be eaten, and of taste much like a hen. There are also stock doves, 
Fowls with horns.  turtle doves, popinjays, and certain fowls as big as hens. These fowls have little horns, and lay great eggs, which they cover a cubet depth in the sand, 
Eggs hatched in sand.  by the heat whereof and virtue of the son, they are hatched, and the young birds creep out of the sand by themselves. From the Island of Messana to Catighan▪ are twenty leaques sailing toward the West. And because the king of Messana could not follow the ships, they tarried for him about the Islands of Polo, Ticobon, and Pozon, where the captain took him into his ship with certain of his principal men, and so followed their viage toward the Island of Zubut, 
The Island of zubut.  which is about fifty leagues distant from Catighan.  
The vii day of Apryll about no one, they entered into the port of Zubut: And passing by many villages and habitations in trees, they came to the city, where the captain gave commandment to the mariners to strike their sails & to set themselves in order in manner of battle ray, causing all the ordinance to be short of, wherewith all the people were put in great fear. After this, the captain sent an ambassador with th'interpreter to the king of Zabut. 
The king of zubut.  When they approached near to the city, they found the king with a great company of men sore astonished at the noise of the guns, But th'interpreter advertised them that it was the custom of hour men in all suck places where ●hey come, to discharge their ordinance in token of friendship and to honour the lord of the city. With which words the king and his company, were well quieted. After this, th'interpreter declared that his master was the captain of the ships of the greatest Prince in the world, and that they went to discover the Islands of Molucca: And further, that hearing of his good name and fame by the report of the king of Messana, they determined to visit him and to have victuals for exchange of their merchandise. The king answered that he was well contented therewith, and that t●ey were heartily welcoome. Nevertheless, that it was a custom in that place▪ that all 〈◊〉 ships as cutered into that haven, should pay tribute: And that there were not many days paste, sense a ship laden with gold and slaves did so pay. 
A ship laden with gold and slaves.  In token whereof, he caused to come before him certain marchaunces of that company which yet remained with him. To this thinter●recour answered, that forasmuch as his lord was the captain o● so mighty a Prince, he never paid tribute to any king in the world, and would not now begin. Willing him to take this for a resolute answer, that if he would accept the peace that was proffered him, he should enjoy it, And if he rather desired war, he should have his hands full. When th'interpreter had said these words, one of the said merchants (who was a Moor) spoke to the king in this manner. CATACAIA Chitae: that is. Take heed syr. For these men are they that have conquered Calicut, 
Calicut.  Malaca, 
Malacha.  and all the greater India: and are of such power that if you entreat them otherwise then well, you may to late know what they are able to do more than they have done at Calicut and Malaca. When th'interpreter hard these words, he said that the king his lord was of much greater puissance and more dominions, and lord of more ships than was the king of Portugal: declaring further that he was king of Spain and Emperor of all Christendom Adding hereunto that if he would not be his friend, he would hereafter send thither such a power of armed men as should destroy his country. The Moor conferred all these words with the king, who said that he would further deliberate with his counsel, and give them a full answer the day following. In the mean time he sent them certain victuals and wine. When all these things were declared to the king of M●ssana who was the chiefest there about next unto him, and lord of many Islands, he went aland and repaired to the king of Zubut and declared unto him the great humanity and courtesy of the general captain. Shortly after, the captain sent certain of his men with th'interpreter to the king of Zubut to know his pleasure and what answer he would make them. As they went toward the court, they met the king coming in the street accompanied with many of his chief men. He caused our men to sit down by him, and demanded of them if there were any more than one captain in their company: And whether it were their request that he should pay tribute to Themperor. They answered that they desired none other thing but that they might exercise merchandise with them, 
Shedding of blood is a token of friendship  and to barter ware for ware. The king made answer that he was well content therewith: willing the captain in token of friendship to send him a little of the blood of his right arm, affirming that he would do the like. etc.  
After this the king of Messana with the king of Zubu● his nephew (who was the prince) and certain other of his gentlemen, came to the ships and brought the captain many goodly presents. They entered into great amity, and had large communication of many things. The captain persuaded them to the Christian faith, which they gladly embraced, and took such pleasure in hearing the articles of hour belief, that the tears fell from their eyes for joy. They were baptized, 
The king of zibut is baptized.  and shortly after all the people of the Island. They esteem nothing more precious than drinking glasses of Venice work.  
When they came to the city, they found the king in his palace sitting upon a flower or stuorie made of the leaves of date trees wrought after a curious device like a certain kind of mats. He had upon his body, none other apparel but only a cloth of bombasine cotton hanging before his privy parts. 
The king of zubut his apparel.  On his head, he had a veil of needle work: and about his neck a chain of great price. At his ears, hung two rings of gold wherein were enclosed many precious stones. He was but of smaule stature, but somewhat gross, and had the residue of his body painted with divers colours whereof sum were like unto flaming fire. Before him, he had two vessels made of the fine earth called Porcellana, with sodden eggs. Also four vessels of Porcellana full of wine made of date trees, and covered with many odoriferous herbs. The prince brought them to his house, where he had four daughters very well favoured and white like ours. 
well favoured women.  He caused them to dance all naked, and therewith to sing, and play on certain tymbrelles made of metal.  
At this time it so chanced that one of the spaniards died in one of the ships. And when certain of their coompanye desired the king to give them leave to bury him on the land, he answered that forasmuch as he and all his, were at the commandment of their king and master, how much more ought the ground so to be.  
They greatly marveled at the ceremonies pertaining to the manner of hour funerals, and honoured the crosses which were set at both thends the grave.  
They live with justice, and use weights and measures. Their houses are made of Timber and sawn boards: and are so builded above the ground upon props and piles, that they ascend to the same by certain stairs. Under their houses, they keep their hogs and hens.  
When they came to bartering, 
Bartering  they gave gold, rysse, hogs, hens, and divers other things for sum of hour trifles of smaule value. They gave ten Pesos of gold for xvi. pounds weight of men. 
Pesus what.  One pesus is in value a ducat and a half. The sunday following, the king was baptized with great solemnity. At which time, the captain admonished him before not to be afraid at the shooting of of the ordinance, because it was their custom so to do at such solemn feasts. After this, the captain caused them to break all their Idols, 
They break their Idols and erect the cross.  and to set up the cross in divers places, praying to the same both morning and evening kneeling on their knees and holding up their hands joined together. The king in his baptism, was named Charles after the emperors name, and the Prince, Ferdinando after the name of his majesties brother. The king of Messana was named john, and the Moor Christopher. To all other they gave such names as are commonly used in Christendom. And thus before mass was begun, were five hundredth men baptized. 
five hundredth men baptized.  When mass was finished, the captain invited the king to dine with him in his ship, and at his coming, caused the ordinance to be discharged.  

The queen of zubut.  The queen was also baptized with forty of her gentlewomen, and her daughter the Prince's wife. The queen was very young and fair, having her body covered with a white cloth. Her lips were red, and she had on her head a hat, on the top whereof was a triple crown much like the papes This crown & the hat, were made of the leaves of dates trees.  
Within the space of viii days, thinhabitants of the Island were baptized except one village of Idolaters who would not herein obey the kings commandment. whereupon the captain sent certain of his men thither, who burned the town and erected a cross in that place because the people of the village were gentiles (that is) Idolaters. But if they had been Moors (that is Machumetistes') they would have erected a pillar of stone, because the moors are more stooberne and harder to be converted then are the gentiles.  
When the queen came to the place where she should hear mass, she came forth with great pomp and solemnity, having going before her three young damoselles and three men with their caps in their hands, 
The queen's apparel.  whom she followed appareled in white and black, with a great veil of silk upon her head fringed about with gold, which covered her hat and hung down to her shoulders. She had also a great train of women following her, being all barefooted and naked, except that upon their heads and privy parts, they wore certain veils of silk, and had their hear spread.  
Before the king of Zubut was baptized, he was named Raia Humabuon. When the captain demanded of him why all the Idols in the Island were not burnt according to his promise, he answered that they esteemed them no more as gods, but only made sacrifice to them for the Prince's brother who was very sick, and as noble and witty a man as was in the Island. The captain answered that if he would burn a● his Idols and believe faithfully in Christ, and be baptized, he should be immediately restored to health, and that he would else give them leave to strike of his head. By these words and persuasions of the captain, he conceived such hope of health, that after he was baptized he felt no more grief of his disease. And this was a manifest miracle wrought in hour time whereby divers infidels were converted to hour faith, 
A miracle.  and their Idols destroyed, and also their altars overthrown on the which they were accustomed to eat the sacrifyced flesh. The people of the Island pay the king a portion of victuals for their tribute by all their cities and villages.  
Not far from this Island of Zubut, is the Island of Mathan, 
The Island of Mathan.  whose inhabitants use marvelous ceremonies in their sacrifices to the son and burying the dead. They wear rings of gold about their privy members. The Island is governed by two Princes whereof the one is named Zula, and the other Cilapulapu. And whereas this Cilapulapu refused to pay tribute to the king of Spain, the captain went against him in his own person with lx of his men armed with coats of mail and helmets. Cilapulapu divided his army into three battles, having in every battle two thousand and fifty men armed with bows, arrows, darts and javelins hardened at the points with fire. This continued long and sharp. But the captain being a valiant man and presing himself in the brunt of the battle, was sore wounded and slain, 
The captain Magellanus is slain.  forasmuch as the most of the Barbarians directed all their force against him. Beside the captain, were slain of hour men about viii or ix Of the Barbarians, were xu slain and many sore wounded. After the death of the captain, they chose two other in his place, of the which one was Odoardo Barbessa a Portugal, and the other john Serrano who was shortly after betrayed by th'interpreter and taken prisoner with divers other.  
Certain days before the Captains death, they had knowledge of the Islands of Molucca which they chiefly sought. Departing therefore from the Island of Mathan, they sailed far and came to the cape of an other Island named Bohol. 
The Island of Bohol.  In the midst of this main sea (which they named Archipelagus) they consulted to burn the ship named Conception, 
They burnt one of their ships.  because they were now few in number, and to furnish the other two ships with th'artillery thereof. Thus directing their course toward Southewest, they came to an other Island named paviloghon, where they found black men like unto the Saracens. Shortly after, they arrived at an other great Island, 
Black men.  whose king named Raia Calavar, entreated them very friendly in all things as did the king of Messana. This Island is rich in gold, and hath plenty of rysse, ginger, hogs, goats, hens, and divers other things. It is named Chippit, 
The Island of Chippit.  and is viii degrees above the Equinoctial line toward our pole: And in longitude from the place from whence they first departed .170. degrees: And about .50. leaques from Zubut.  
Departing from hence they came to an other Island named Caghaian being 40. leaques from Chippit as they sailed between the west and south west. 
The Island of Caghaian.  This Island is very great, and in manner unhabited. The people are moors, and were banyssshed out of the Island of Burnei which sum call Porne.  
from this Island about xxv. leaques between the west and north west, they found a marvelous fruitful Island named Pulaoan, 
The Island of Pulaoan.  being toward hour pole above the Equinoctial ix. degrees and a third part: And C.lxxix. degrees and a third part in longitude from the place of their departing.  
from this Island ten leaques toward the South west, they saw an other Island which seemed to them sometimes to mount as they sailed by the coasts thereof. 
The Island Burne● or Pone.  As they were entering into the port, there arose a boystious and dark tempest which ceased as soon as the fires of the three saints (whereof we have spoken before) appeared upon the cabells. from the beginning of this Island to the port, are five leaques. This Island is great and rich: and the chief city thereof containeth xxv thousand houses. 
A great city.  The king entertained hour men very friendly, and sent them beside many other presents, two elephants trapped with silk to bring them to his palace that brought the presents which the capitains sent him. 
Elephants.  He hath a magnyfycalle court and a great guard. Also a multitude of concubines. He is a moor, and is named Raia Siripada. He is a king of great power, and hath under him many other kings, Islands, and cities. This Island of Burnei is above the Equinoctial toward hour pole five degrees and a quarter. And in longitude from the place of their departing. C.lxxvi. degrees and two third parts.  
Departing from Burnei, they came to an Island called Cimbubon, 
The Island of Cimbulon.  being viii degrees above the Equinoctial line heat they remained xl days to calk their ships and furnish them with fresh water and fuel which was to them great pain and travail because they were in manner all bare footed, their shoes and in manner their other apparel being worn by reason of the long viage. In the woods of this Island, they found a tree whose leaves as soon as they faule on the ground, do slur and remove from place to place as though they were alive. 
Leaves of trees which seem to live  They are much like the leaves of a mulberry tree: And have on every side as it were two short and blunt fiete. When they are cut or broken, there is no blood seen come forth of them. Yet when any of them are touched, they suddenly move and start away. Antony Pigafetta kept one of them in a platter for the space of viii days. And ever when he touched it, it rannt, round about the platter. He supposeth that they live only by air.  
Departing from hence, they directed their course by the West quarter toward the South east, to find the Islands of Molucca. and sailed not far from certain mountains where they found the sea full of great weeds and herbs. 
A sea full of weeds.   
From hence, they came to the Islands of Zolo and Taghima, in the which are found pearls of exceeding bigness. 
Pearls.   
Following their course toward the north East, they came to a great city named Mangdando, lying above the Islands of Buthuan and Calaghan, where they took a canoa of certain of thinhabitants: by whom being informed of the Islands of Molucca, they left their course toward the north east, and followed the South east near unto a cape of the Island of Buthuan, they were advertised for certainty that on the banks of a certain river, there dwelt men overgrown with hear, 
Men overgrown with hear.  and of high stature.  
Following still their course by the south east, and passing by many smaule Islands, they came to the Islands of Molucca the sixth day of November and the xxvii month after their departure out of Spain. 
The Islands of Molucca.  Being therefore joyful and giving thanks unto god, they discharged all their ordinance. In the coast of all these Islands, even unto the Islands of Molucca, sounding with their plummet, they found the depth of the sea to be no less than a hundredth and two yards, which is contrary to the saying of the Portugals who affirm that no ship can pass that way with out great daungioure by reason of the shalownes and rocks or shelves: 
The Portugals are reproved.  and for the darkness which the clouds cause in the heaven. All which things they feigned to th'intent that none other should have knowledge of their vyagies.  
The viii day of November in the year .1521. before the rising of the son, they entered into the port of the Island of Tidore, 
Tidode one of the Islands of Molucca.  being one of the chief Islands of Molucca, where they were honourably entertained of the king who declared that he had long before seen a sign in heaven that certain ships should come from a far country to the Islands of Molucca: And that whereas for the better certificate thereof he considered the starious of the moon, 
A vision in the planets  he saw therein the coming of hour ships, and that we were the men whom he seemed to see in the same. Whereupon he proffered himself to enter into leaque of friendship w●th the king of Spain, and to accept hour men as his brethren and children willing them to come aland as into their own houses. Also that for their coming, that Island should no more be called Tidore, but Castille for the great love which he bore to their king whom he reputed as his lord and master. This king is a Moor, and is named Raia Sultan Mauzor.  
The Islands of Molucca are five in number, & are thus named: Tarenate, Tidore, Mutir, Macebian, and Bacchian. 
The five Islands of molucca.  Of these, Tarenate is the chiefest. 
Tarenate.   
Directly against the Island of Tidore, there is an other great Island named Gilolo, 
The Island of Gilolo.  inhabited of moors and gentiles. 
Moors & gentiles.  The moors have two kings, of the which one hath six hundredth children, & the other six hundredth and fifty. The gentiles keep not so many women as do the moors nor yet live in such superstitions. They pray to the first thing that they meet in the morning when they go forth of their houses, and honour that as their god for that day. The king of the gentiles is very rich in gold. 
Gold.  In the said Island of Gilolo, are reeds as big as a man's leg, and full of clear water wholesome to be drunk. 
water in reeds.   
The xii day of November, the king of Tidore appointed hour men a aware house in the city where they might sell their merchandise. Their manner of exchange was in this sort. 
Their manner of bartering.  For ten yards of good red cloth, they had one Bahar of cloves, which amounteth to four Cantari and two pound weight: And one Cantar is a hundredth pound weight. For xu yards of cloth somewhat worse than the other, they received in Cambie, one Bahar. For xxxv drinking cups of glass, they had one Bahar. For xvii Cathyls of quick silver, one Bahar. They came daily to the ships with many of their barks full of goats, hens, figs of a span long, also the fruit called Cocus, with divers other kinds of victuals in such quantity that it was a marvelous thing to behold. 
water of A strange quality.  They furnished also their ships with fresh water which is hot as it issheweth out of the spring, but is very could when it hath stood a while in an other place. It springeth from the mountains on the which the clove trees grow. They saw a cloud rise in manner daily, which compasseth about the said mountains.  
The king of the Island of Bacchian, sent the king of Spain two dead birds of strange form. 
Birds of a strange form,  They were of the bygg●nes of turtle doves, with little heads and long vylles: also long and smaule legs and no wings, but in the st●ade thereof certain long feathers of divers colours, and tails like turtle doves. All the other feathers are of one colour much like unto tawny, except those of the wings.  
They fly not but when the wind bloweth. These moors are of opinion that these birds come from the heavenly paradise, and therefore call them Manuccodiata, that is the birds of god.  
When they were determined to departed from the Islands of Molucca, certain kings of the Islands accompanied them with their canoas, and conducted them to an Island called Mare where they refreshed their ships with fresh water and fuel. The kings sent Themperors majesty many presents: and embracing hour men, departed with the tears in their eyes: And hour men for their last farewell, shot of all their ordinance. When in the Island of Mare, they perceived that one of their ships leaked and took water very sore: 
They lea●e one of their ships behind them.  whereby they were enforced to tarry there three days. But seeing that they could find no remedy for the same but in long time, they determined to leave it, giving order that if afterward it could be repaired, they should return into Spain as well as they could.  
In all the Islands of Molucca is found cloves, 
The Islands of Molucca.  ginger, bread of the root of Sagu, rise, goats, sheep, hens, figs, almonds, sweet pomegranates and sour, oranges, lemondes, and honey which is made of certain flies l●sse then ants: 
honey of flies.  Also canes of sugar, oil of Cocus, melons, geurdes, and a marvelous could fruit which they name Camulicai and divers other fruits. Furthermore white and red popinjays, 
popinjays.  and other of variable colours. It is not passed fifty years sense the moors first inhabited any of these islands, which were before inhabited only with gentiles.  
The Island of Tidere, 
The Island of Tidore.  is above the Equinoctial line toward hour pole, about .27. minutes: And in longitude from the place from whence they departed .171. degrees. And from the Archipelagus in the which is the Island of Zamal which our men named the Island of thieves, ix. degrees and a half, and runneth to the quarter of south south-west, and north North-east. Terenate, 
Terenate.  is under the Equinoctial line four minutes under the pole Antarctic. Mutir, 
Mutir.  is directly under the Equinoctial line, Macchian is xu minutes toward the pole Antarctic, 
Macchian.  ●nd Bac●hian one degree. These Islands are like four sharp mountains, except, Macchian which is not sharp. The bigest of all these, is Bacchian. 
Bacchian.   
Departing from the Island of Mare and directing these courle toward the south-west, with only xlvi men in their ship and xiii Indians, they passed by the Islands of Chacovan, Lagoma, Sico, Gioghi, Caphi, Sulacho, Lumatola, 
Many Island.  Tenetum, Buru, Ambon, Budia, Celaruri, Benaia, Ambalao, Bandan, Zorobua, Zolot, Nocevamor, Galian, and Mallua, with divers other Islands both great and smaule, of moors, gentiles, and Canibales. Hour men remained xv. days in the Island of Mallua to repair their ship in certain places where it took water. 
The Island of Mallua.  All the fields of this Island is full of long and round pepper, 
Pepper.  and is situate toward the pole Antarctic under the Equinoctial line viii degrees and a half, and is in the longitude of .169. degrees and 40. minutes.  
The pilot which hour men brought out of the Islands of Molucca, told them that not far from thence, was an Island named Arucetto in the which are men and women not past a cubit in height, having ears of such bigness that they lie upon one and cover them with the other. 
little men with long ears.  But our men would not sail thither, both because the wind and course of the sea was against them, and also for that they gave no credit to his report.  
The xxv day of january in the year .1522. they departed from Mallua, and the day following, arrived at a great Island named Timor, 
The Island of Timor.  being five leaques distant from Mallua between the south and south-west. In this Island is found the wood of white sanders and ginger, 
white sanders and ginger.  and divers kinds of fruits. Also sundry kinds of beasts, and plenty of victual and gold. They of the Islands of Giava, Molucca, and Lozon, resort to this Island for sanders. Th'inhabitants are gentiles. They say that when they go to cut the wood of sanders, the devil appeareth to them in divers forms and asketh them what they have need of: 
The devil appeareth.  And that after this vision, many of them are long sick. In all the Islands of this Archipelagus, raineth the disease of saint job (which we call the french pox) more than in any other place in the world. 
Saint job his disease.   
far from this Island between the west and northwest they came to an Island named Eude, in the which groweth great plenty of Cinnamon. 
Cinamome  In this tract are found many Islands lying in order as it were one directly behind an other, even unto the Island of the greater Giava, 
The Islands of Giava.  named Giava maior, and unto the cape of Malaccha, 
Malaccha.  being in East India. Giava the less, is as big as the Island of Madera, and is but half a leaque distant from Giava maior. Here they were informed that above Giava mayor toward the north, is a great gulf called the gulf of China, 
The great gulf of China.  in the which are trees of exceeding bigness, inhabited with fowls of such greatness that they carry great beasts in the air. The fruits of these trees are as big as cucummers.  
The cape of Malaccha is one degree and a half above the Equinoctial line toward the pole Arctic. 
The cape of Malaccha.  On the East side of this cape, runneth a very long coast in the which are many regions and cities whereof sum are called by these names, Cingaporla which is the cape. 
The names of many regions.  Also Pahan, Calantan, Patani, Braalin, Beneu, Longon, and Odia wherein is the city in the which dwelleth the king of Sian named Zacabedera. Their cities are builded as ours are, and subject to the king of Sian. After the realm of Sian, are the regions of jamgoma & Campaa where rhubarb groweth, 
rhubarb.  of the which are divers opinions, sum supposing it to be a root, and other a putrefied tree, affirming that if it were not putrefied, it should not have so great a savour. They call it Calama. Next unto this, is found the great China, 
The great king of China.  whose king is thought to be the greatest prince in the world, and is named Santoa Raia. Furthermore, all that is written hereafter of this king and these regions, they learned by thinformation of a Moor that was in the Island of Timor. He affirmed that the said king hath threescore and ten crowned kings under his empire, and hath a port in the sea named Canthan: And two principal cities named Nauchin and Connulaha where he remaineth himself, and hath ever four of his chief princes lying about his palace on every side, toward the east, West, north, and South giving diligent attendance what is done in every of their quarters. All the princes of the greater India (called India Mayor, 
The greater India. ) and of that whereof I have spoken before, are obedient to this king. And in token that they are true subjects, they keep in their palaces which are in the midst of their cities, the beast called Linx, 
The beast called linx.  being fairer than a lion, And is the great kings signette, which all such as intend to go to China, bear with them sealed in wax or on a piece of ivory for their safe conduct, without the which they may not enter into the haven.  
When any of his kings rebel or are disobedient, he causeth them to be f●ene, and salted and dried at the son: Then to be stuffed with chaff, 
The punishment of rebels.  and set up on sum high thing in the midst of the chief street of the city where all the people may see it. He never suffereth his own person to be openly seen to any man. But when his noble men of the court are desirous to see him, 
The king is not seen but at a glass.  he cometh down from his palace into a rich pavilion accompanied with six of his principal concubines appareyled with like vestures as is he himself. All this way he is not seen by reason of the pavilion. When he hath passed through the pavilion, he entereth into a serpent named Nagha, 
A thing of strange workmanshyppe.  being the most marvelous and rich work of the world, and placed in the greatest court of the palace. When the king entereth in to this with the women, to th'intent that he may not be known among them, he causeth the said noble men only to look in at a glass which is in the breast of the serpent, where they see the king among the women, but can not dicerne which is he. He joineth in marriage with his sister that the blood royal be not mixed with any other. 
The king marrieth his sister.  His palace is environed with seven large walls, 
hispallaice.  the one being far dystante from the other: And hath in every such circuit ten thousand men for the garrison of his palace, 
A marvelous guard.  who have their waiting days appointed them course by course with fresh men in their places, and thus keep their watch continually both day and night. In this palace are lxxix haules, in the which is an infinite number of women that serve the king having ever light torches in their hands for the greater magnyfycence●. 
women serve the king.  He that would see all the palace, should spend a hole day therein. Among other, there are four principal hauls where sometimes the king giveth audience to his noble men. 
Four marvelous hauls  Of these, one is covered both above and beneath with metal, an other all over with silver, the third with gold, and the fourth with pearls and precious stones. These people of China, 
The people of China.  are white men, apparelled as we are, and eat their meat on tables as we do. They have th● cross in sum estimation, but know not the cause why. Beyond the coast of China, 
The cross.  are divers other nations and people as Chenchii where pearls and cinnamon are found. Also the people named Lichii, where raineth the great king of M●en, 
The great king of m●en  having under him xxii kings, and is subject to the king of China. Here is also found the great city of CATHAY in the East, 
CATHAY.  and divers other nations in the said firm land, of the which sum are brutysshe and bestial which use to kill and eat their parents when they are owld, thinking thereby that they shall revive in them. All these people are gentiles.  
The xi day of February in the year .1522, they departed from the Island of Timor and were engulfed by chance in the great sea called Lantchidol, 
The sea of Lantchidol.  and took their course between the west and south west, leaving the north coasts on their right hand, fearing lest if they should sail toward the firm land, they might be seen of the portugals who are of great power in Malaccha: 
Malaccha.  and therefore directed their course without the Island of Sumatra called in owld time Taprobana: 
The Island of Sumetra.  Leaving also on their right hand upon the fyrm land, the provinces and regions of Pegu, 
Pegu,  Bengala, 
Bengala.  Calicut, 
Calicut.  Canonor, 
Canonor.  Coa, 
Coa.  Cambaia, 
Cambaia.  the gulf of the Island of Ormus, 
Ormus.  and all the coasts of the greater India. 
East India.  And more safely to pass the cape of Buona Speranza being about Africa, 
Cap. de Buona. Speranza.  they sailed about xlii degrees toward the pole Antarctic, and remained seven weeks about that cape with many fetches compassing the wind with their sails continually aloft, because they had a west and north west wind in the proos of their ship which would not suffer them to pass. The cape of Buona Speranza, is toward the pole Antartik beneath the Equinoctial line xxxiiii degrees and a half: and .1600. leaques from the cape of Malaccha: And is the greatest and most daungyerous cape that is found at this day in all the world.  
When they had by these perils overpassed this cape, certain of them aswell for lack of victuals as also by reason of sickness, were minded to sail to a haven of the Portugals named Monzambique above africa. 
The port of M●nzambiq●●.  But the other answered that they would rather die then go to any other place then directly to Spain. They followed their course therefore sailing toward the south-west two months continually without touching at any port: In which time there died about xxi of their company, whom they cast into the sea. And surely if god of his infinite mercy had not preserved the residue in time, they had all died of famen. 
Famen.   
In fine, being enforced of necessity, and half of their company dead, they sailed to one of the Islands of Capo verde called Insula Sancti jacobi, 
Capo Verde.  that is, saint james Island, 
S. james Island.  pertaining to the king of Portugal. Where, as soon as they ariyved, they sent certain aland in the ship boat for victuals, declaring to the Portugals with all love and favour what necessity they were driven to and what miseries and travails they had sustained, informing them further of their marvelous voyage and such things as they had seen in both the East and West India, with such other gentle words whereby they obtained certain measures of rise. 
The ingratitude of the Portugals.  But when afterward xiii of them returned for more rise, they were detained: Whereupon the rest which remained in the ship, fearing the like chance, departed with full sails, and the vii day of September with the help of god entered into the haven of San Lucar near unto Seville, 
The port of saint Lucar near unto Sivile.  where discharging all their ordinance for joy, they went immediately to the great church in their shirts and barefooted with a torch before them to give thanks to almighty god who had brought them safe to their own country, and restored them to their wives and children.  
As touching th'end of this voyage, Transiluanus writeth somewhat more largely as followeth.  
The other ship which they left behind them to be repaired, 
what became of the other ship.  returned afterward by the Archipelagus aforesaid and by the great sea to the coasts of the firm of the west India, and arrived at a region of the same being against Dariena, 
Dariena  where the South sea of Sur is separate but by a little space of land from the West Ocean in the which are the Islands of Hispaniola and Cuba, and other Islands of the spaniards. The other ship which returned into Spain by compasing about the hole bowl of the world by the coasts of East India and Africa, departing from the Island of Tidore, and sailing ever on this side the Equinoctial, did not find the cape of Cattigara being above Asia, 
The cape of Cattigara.  and (by the description of Ptolemy) reaching many degrees beyond the Equinoctial. 
Ptolemy.  But having sailed many days by the main sea, they came to the cape of Buona Speranza and from thence to the Islands of Capo verde, where their ship being sore bruised by reason of the long voyage, leaked and took water, in such sort that the mariners being now but few in number, and those also weak and feeble by reason of long sickness and hunger, 
The viage hardly performed.  were not able both to dry the poompe continually and otherwise govern the ship: and were therefore of necessity enforced to go aland at the Island of saint james to buy them certain slaves to help them. 
They buy slaves for lack of help  But being destitute of money, according to the custom of the mariners, they proffered them cloves for their slaves. The which thing when it came to the ears of the Portugal that was captain of that Island, he cast xiii of them in prison. Whereby the residue that remained in the ship (being now but xviii in number) were put in such fear that they departed immediately without rescuing their fellows, and sailed continually both by day and by night by the coasts of Africa, and came in fine to Spain the vi day of September in the year .1522. and arrived at the port near unto Seville the xvi month after they departed from the Island of Tidore. Mariners doubtless more worthy to be celebrated with eternal memory than they which in old time were called Argonauti that sailed with jason to win the golden fleece in the region of Cholehic and the river of Phasis in the great sea of Pontus. 
Mariners worthy immortal fame.  
Argonauti.  
The voyage of jason to win the golden fleece.  And the ship itself, more worthy to be placed among the stars then that owlde Argo which departing out of Grecia, sailed to th'end of that great sea. For this hour marvelous ship, taking her viage from the straights of Gibilterra and sailing by the great Ocean toward the South and pole Antarctic, 
The ship more worthy fame than owlde Argo of Grecia.  and turning from thence to the West, followed that course so far that passing under the great circumference of the world, 
The viage  she came into the east, and from thence again into the West, not by returning backward, but still failing forward, so compassing about the vaule of the world under the hole circumference of heaven until she were miraculously restored to her native region of Spain and house of Seville.    

¶ Of the prices of precious stones and Spices, with their weights and measures as they are accustomed to be sold both of the moors and the gentiles: And of the places where they grow.  
FOrasmuch as in divers places of this history, mention is made of precious stones, I have thought good to declare somewhat aswell of their prices as of the places of their generation, that we may not utterly be ignorant of the things which we so greatly esteem and buy so dear.  

Of the Ruby.  
THe Rubies grow in India: and are found for the most part in a river named Pegu. These are of the best kind and finest, which they of the land of Malabor call Nunpuclo, and are well sold if they be fair and clean without spots. The Indians to know their fineness, put them upon their tongues, coumpting that to be best that is couldst and most hard. And to see their fineness, they take them up with a piece of wax by the sharpest point: and looking against the light, espy in them every smaule spot or flake. They are also found in certain deep fosses or pits which are made in mountains that are beyond the said river. They are scoured and made clean in the country of Pegu. Yet can they not square and polish them. But for this purpose send them to divers other countries, and especially to Paleatate, Narsinga, Calicut, and the region of Malabar, where are many cunning Lapidaries.  
And to give you intelligence of the value of these stones, ye shall understand that this word Fanan, signifieth a weight somewhat more than two of hour carats: And xi Fanans and a quarter, is one Mitigal: And vi Mitigales and a half, make one ounce. This Fanan, 
One caratte is iiii. grains  is also a kind of money which is in value, one ryale of silver. And therefore after this account I say that Eight five rubies of the weight of one Fanan (which are in all, about two carat●es) are in value. 
which is one crown of gold  Fanan x. Four Rubies that weigh one fanan, are worth Fanan xx. Two that weigh one fanan Fanan xl. One that weyth three quarters of one fanan Fanan thirty. One that weyth one fanan Fanan l. One that weyth one fanan and a quarter. Fanan lxv. One that weyth one fanan and a half Fanan C. One that weyth one fanan and three quarters Fanan Cl. One that weyth two fanans. Fanan CC. One that weyth two fanans and a quarter Fanan Ccl One that weyth two fanans and a half Fanan ccc One that weyth two fanans and three quarters Fanan cccl Of three fanans Fanan cccc. Of three and a quarter Fanan D. Of three and a half Fanan Dl. Nf three and three quarters. Fanan Dc. Of three and three quarters and a half Fanan Dcxxx. Of four fanans Fanan Dclx. Of four and a quarter Fanan Dcc. Of four and a half Fanan Dcccc Of five fanans Fanan M. Of five and a half Fanan Mcc. Of two fanans, which are about xii carats. Fanan. MD. which make .150. crowns of gold.  
And these are commonly the prices of perfect Rubies. But such as are not perfect, and have any spots in them, or are not of good colour, are of less prize according to the arbitrament and estimation of the bier.   

¶ Of the Rubies which grow in the Island of Zeilam.  
IN the Island of Zeilam, being in the second India, are found many Rubies which the Indians name Manecas, the greatest part whereof do not arrive to the perfection of the other aforesaid in colour, because they are red as though they were washed, and of a fleshy colour. Yet are they very could and hard. The perfectesse of them are greatly esteemed among the people of the Island, and reserved only for the king himself if they be of any great quantity. When his iewelers find any big piece of this rock of the best kind, they put it in fire for the space of certain hours. Which if it come out of the fire uncorrupt, it becometh of the colour of a burning coal, and was therefore called of the Greeks, Anthrax, which signifieth a burning coal. The same that the Greeks call Anthrax, the Latins call Carbunculus. These they greatly esteem. When the king of Narsinga can get any of them, he causeth a fine hole to be boored in the undermost part of them to the midst: And suffereth none of them to pass out of his realm: especially if they have been tried by the said proof. These are of greater value than the other of Pegu, if they be in their natural perfection and cleanness.  
Of these, one that weith a carratte (which is half a fanan) is worth in calicut. Fanan thirty. 
which are three crows of gold  One of two carats Fanan .lxv. Of three carats. Fanan cl. Of three carats and a half Fanan cc. Of four carats Fanan ccc. Of four carats and a half Fanan cccl Of five carats Fanan cccc. Of five carats and a half Fanan ccccl. Of two carats Fanan Dxxx Of six carats and a half Fanan Dlx. Of seven carats Fanan Dcxxx Of seven carats and a half Fanan Dclx. One of viii carats that hath bin well proved in the fire, is worth Fanan Dccc Of viii carats and a half Fanan Dcccc. One such of ten carats Fanan M ccc One of ten carats and a half Fanan M d c Of xii carats Fanan MM Of xiiii carats Fanan MMM Of xvi carats Fanan 6000.   

¶ Of the kind of Rubies. called Spinelle.  
THere is also found an other kind of Rubies which we call Spinelle and the Indians, Caropus. They grow in the self same country of Pegu where as are the fine Rubies. And are found in the mountains in the upper crust or flower of the earth. These are not so fine nor of so good colour is are the true Rubies: But have somewhat the colour of a granate which we commonly call a garnet. Yet of these such as are perfect in their colour, are of value half less than true Rubies.   

¶ Of the Rubies called Balassi.  
BAlassi, are of the kinds of Rubies, but are not so hard. Their colour is somewhat like a rose, and sum are in manner white. They grow in Balassia, which is a region within the firm land above Pegu and Bengala: And are browght from thence by merchants of the moors to Cal●cut where they are wrought and polished: And are sold of the same price that are Spinelle.   

¶ Of the diamonds of the owlde mine.  
THese diamonds are found in the first India in a kingdom of the moors named Decan, from whence they are brought to other regions. There are also found other diamonds which are not so good, but somewhat white, and are called diamonds of the new mine which is in the kingdom of Narsinga. They of the owlde mine, are not polished in India, but in other places. There are made likewise in India, other false diamonds of Rubies, Topases, and white sapphires, which appear to be fine: and are also found in the Island of Zeilam. These stones differ in none other, saving that they have lost their natural colour. Of these, sum are found that have half the colour of Rubies, and other of sapphires: other also of the colour of a Topase. Other have all these colours mengeled together. They bore a fine hole in these through the midst, whereby they appear like the eyes of a cat. Of the whitest, they make many smaule diamonds which can not be known from the true, saving by touching of such as are skilful in that practice. They are sold by a poised or weight which they call Mangiar, which weigheth two Tar, and two threes, which amount to two threes or third parts of one caratte. For four Tarres, weigh one fanan which is about two carats.  
Viii diamonds that weigh one mangiar (which is two third parts of a caratte are in value. which are three crowns of gold. Fanan thirty. vi. Diamundes that weigh one mangiar Fanan xl. Four that weigh one mangiar Fanan lx. Two that weigh one mangiar Fanan lxxx. One that weith one mangiar Fanan C. One of one mangiar and a quarter Fanan clxv. One of one mangiar and a half Fanan clxxx. Of one mangiar and three quarters Fanan ccxx. Of two mangiars Fanan cccxx. Of two mangiars and a quarter Fanan ccclx Of two mangiars and a half Fanan ccclxxx Of two mangiars and three quarters full perfect Fanan. 420 Of three mangiars of like perfection Fanan ccccl. Of three mangiars and a half Fanan cccclxxx. Of four mangiars Fanan Dl. Of five mangiars Fanan Dccl. Of two mangiars Fanan Dccc. Of seven mangiars. Fanan Mcc. Of eight mangiars Fanan Mcccc. And thus they proceed, increasing the price as they increase in weight.   

¶ Of sapphires.  
IN the Island of Zeilam are found the best and most true sapphires, being very hard and five, and of the colour of azure. They are of price as followeth. 
A marcel, is a silver coin of Venice, of xi. ounces iii d. with fine, whereof ten make an une.   
One that weith one caratte is of value which are about two marcels of silver. Fanan two. One of the weight of two carats Fanan v. Of three carats Fanan x. Of four carats Fanan xv. Of five carats Fanan xviii Of six carats Fanan xxviii Of seven carats Fanan xxxv. Of eight carats Fanan l. Of nine carats Fanan lxv. Of ten carats Fanan l. Of xi carats Fanan lxv. Of xii carrates Fanan lxxv. Of xiii carats in all perfection of colour Fanan Cxv. Of xiiii carats. Fanan Clx. Of xu carats Fanan Clxxx. Of xvi carats Fanan CC. Of xviii▪ carats Fanan Ccl One that weith a mitigal, which is xi fanans and a quarter th●t is about xxiii. carats. Fanan Cccl  
Likewise in the Island of Zeilam, is found an other sort of sapphires which they call Quinigelinam. These are not so strong, or darker colour and of much less value th●n are the other of the best kind, whereof one is worth xiii of these of equal poise. Also in the kingdom of Narsinga, in a mountain above Bacanor and Mangalor, is found an other sort of sapphires more tender and of worse colour, which they call Cinganolam. These are somewhat white and of smaule value: So that the most perfect of this kind, weighing twenty carats, is not worth one ducat. Their colour is inclining somewhat to yellow. There is likewise found an other kind of sapphires upon the sea coasts of the kingdom of Calicut, in a place named Capucar. These the Indians call Carahatonilam. They are of a ●arke azure colour not shining but in the clear air. They are also tender and brickle, and of smaule estimation among the Indians. They seem on the one side like glass.   

¶ Of Topasies'.  
THe natural Topasies, grow in the Island of Zeilam, and are named of the Indians Purceragua. It is a hard and fine stone: and of equal estimation with the Ruby and the sapphire, because all these three are of one kind. The perfect colour of this, is yellow like unto fine beaten gold. And if it be perfect and clean, whether it be great or little, it is worth in Calicut as much fine gold as it weigheth. But if it be not perfect, it is worth the weight of gold the fanan, which is less by the half. And if it be in manner white, it is worth much less. And of these, are smaule diamonds counterfeit.   

¶ Of Turquesses'.  
Turquesses' are found in Erer a place of Siech Ishmael. Their mine is a dry eacth that is found upon a black stone, which the moors take of in smaule pieces, and carry them to the Island of Ormus, from whence they are brought to divers parts of the world by sea and by land. The Indians call them Perose. They are soft stones, of smaule weight and not much could. And to know that they are good and true, in the day they shall appear of the very colour of the Turquesse: and in the night by the light, they shall appear green. They that are not so perfect, do not so change there colour to the sight. If these stones be clean and of fine colour, they have underneath in the bottom, a black stone, upon the which they grow. And if any little vain rise upon the said stone, it shallbe the better. And to know more certainly that they are true Turquesses, they put on the tops of them a little quick lime tempered with water after the manner of an ointment. So that if the quick lime appear coloured, they are judged perfect, and are of value as followeth.  
One that weith one caratte, is worth in Malabar. Fanan xu One of two carats Fanan xl. Of four carats Fanan xc. Of. v●. carats Fanan Cl. Of viii carats Fanan CC Of x▪ carats Fanan CCC Of xii carats Fanan CCCCl Of xiiii carats Fanan Dl.  
Of greater than these they make none account because they are lighter pieces and of greater circuit. These of the bigest sort the moors carry into the kingdom of Guzerath.   

¶ Of jacinthes'.  
hyacinths grow in the Island of Zeilam. They are tender stones and yellow. They are best that are of d●●peste colour. The greatest part of these, have in them certain pimples or burbuls, which diminish their fairness. And they that are in their perfection clean from this deformity, are nevertheless of smaule value. For in Calicut where they are polished, they that weigh one fanan are worth no more than half a fanan. And they of xviii fanans, are not worth xvi. fanans.  
There are also found other stones like unto carts eyes, as Chrysolites, and Amethistes, which they do not much esteem because they are of smaule value, as also the stones called Giagonze.   

¶ Of Smaragdes or Emeralds.  
SMaragdes grow in the country of Babylon, where the Indians call the sea Dieguan. They grow also in other parts of India. They are stones of fair green colour, and are light and tender. Of these stones, many are conterfecte. But looking on them curiously toward the light, the conterfectes show certain burbuls, as doot● glass. But in the true, there is no such seen. But rather there appeareth to the eye a certain verdour shining like the beams of the son. And being rubbed upon the touch stone, they leave the colour of copper. And the smaragd of this sort is the best and most true: And is in value in Calicut, as much as a diamunde and somewhat more: And this not by weight, but by greateness, because the diamunde quantity for quantity, is of greater weight than the smaragd. There is likewise found an other kind of Smaragdes, which are green stones, but not so much esteemed. Nevertheless, the Indians reserve these to set them forth with other precious stones. They leave not any green colour upon the touch.    

¶ Of divers kinds of Spices, where they grow, what they are worth in Calicut, and whither they are carried from thence.  

¶ Of Pepper.  
first in all the kingdom of Malabor and Calicut pepper groweth: and is sold in Calicut by every. CC. Bahars, fine, for. CCxxx fanans, every fanan (as I have said) being in value, one rial of plate of Spain: which is as much as one marcel of silver in Venice. Bahar, weith four cantares of the owld weight of Portugal, by the which they sell all spices in Lisbona. Cantar, is in venice. C.xii pound weight of the gros● pound (being xviii ounces) and of the subtile pound. C.lxxviii. So that the said .712. pounds of venice subtle, will cost about twenty french crowns of gold: which amount to about two Marchetti (which make one penny) the pound. They pay also to the king of Calicut for custom xii fanans every Bahar by the load. They that buy them, are accustomed to bring them to Cambaia, Persia, Aden, and Mecha, and from thence to Alcayre and Alexandria. Now they pay custom to the king of Portugal after the rate of .6562. marvedis the Bahar, which are .193. fanans. marvedis are Spanish coins whereof vi go to a penny. This do they partly because there arriveth no more so great diversity of merchants to buy them, and partly by the agreement which the said king of Portugal made with those kings, and the moors, and merchants of the country of Malabar.  
Much pepper groweth likewise in the Island of Sumatra near unto Malaca, which is fairer and bigger than that of Malabar, but not so good and strong. This is brought from Bengala to China, and sum part to Mecha, privily and by stealth, unwares to the Portugals which would not otherwise suffer them to pass. It is worth in Sumatra, from four C. unto vii C. marau●dis the cantar of Portugal, of the new weight. And from the new to the owlde weight in Portugal, the difference is, two ounces in the pound weight. For the owlde pound consisteth of xiiii ounces: and the new pound of xvi uncus.   

¶ Of Cloves.  
Cloves grow in the Islands of Molucca, from whence they are brought to Malacha, and then to Calicut and the country of Malabar. They are worth in Calicut every bahar (which is .712. pounds of the subtile pound of venice) from .500. to .600. fanans (which are about fifty french crowns, which are in value about xii marchatti the pound weight. And being clean from stalks & h●●kes are in value 700. fanans. To carry them from then●e into other regions, they pay for passport xviii fanans the bahar, which is worth in Malacca from ten to xiiii ducades according to the rate and custom of the merchants.   

¶ Of cinnamon.  
CInamome of the best sort, groweth in the Island of Zeilam: and in the country of Malabar, groweth the worst. That of the best kind, is of smaule price in Zeilam. But in Calicut (if it be choice and fresh, it is worth CCC. fanans the bahar, which are about five marchettis the pound.   

¶ Of Ginger called Beledi.  
GInger Beledi, groweth on every side about Calicut from six to nine miles: And is worth th● bahar. ●l. fanans, and sometimes fifty, which is less than one marchetto the pound.  
They bring it from the mountains and out of the country to the city, where they sell it by retail to the Indian merchants, who ga●●er it together in great quantity and keep it to such ty●e as the moors ships arrive the●e, to whom they sell it, by the price of xc fanans, to. Cx. which is less than too marchetti the pound, because the weight is greater.   

¶ Of Ginger Mechino.  
GInger Mechino groweth, beginning from the mountain of Deli, unto Canonor. It is smaule, and not so white nor so good as the other. It is worth the bahar in Cananor, about lx fanans which is about one marchetto the pound. They pay for the bahar six fanans in money for the custom. It is sold uncleansed or unpurged.   

¶ Of green Ginger in conserves.  
IN Bengala is found great plenty of Ginger Beledi, of the which they make much Ginger in conserves with sugar, and carry it in stone pots from Martabani to be sold in the cauntrey of Malabar. And is worth the farazuola (which is xxii pounds and six ounces) after the rate of xiiii xv. or xvi fanans.  
That that is fresh and made in conserves, is worth in Calicut xxv fanans the farazuola, because sugar is dear there. Green ginger to put in conserves, is worth in Calicut three quarters of one fanan the farazuola, which is about two pounds for one marchetto.   

¶ Of the Apothecary's drugs: And of what price they are in Calicut and Malabar.  
LAcca of Martabani, if it be of the best, is worth the farazuola, which is xxii pound weight and six ounces of Portugal after xvi ounces the pound (which is about xl pound weight of the subtile pound of venice) And is in value xviii fanans: which are xviii marcels of silver. For one fanan, is in value about one marcel of silver.  
Lacca of the country, is worth the farazuola Fanan xii. Borace that is good and in great pieces is worth the farazuola. Fanan xxx to xl & l Camphire that is gross in cakes, is worth the farazuola Fanan lxx to lxxx Camphire to anoint Idols, *** Camphire for their children to eat, is worth the mytigal. Fanan iii. Aguila is worth the farazuola Fanan ccc to. cccc. Lignum aloe, black, heavy, and fine, is worth Fanan. M. Musk of the best is worth the ounce Fanan xxxvi. Benjamin of the best, is worth the farazuola Fanan lxv. Tamarindi being new, are worth the farazuola Fanan iiii Calamus aromaticus, the farazuola Fanan xii. Endego to die silk, true & good, the farazuola Fanan xxx myrrh, the farazuola. Fanan xviii to twenty Frankincense good and in grains, is worth the farazuola Fanan xv. Frankincense in paste of the basest sort, the faraz. Fanan iii Ambracan or ambergris that is good, is worth the metical Fanan two. to iii Mirabolanes in conserve of sugar, the faraz. Fanan xvi to xxv Cassia, fresh and good, and farazuola. Fanan one & a half Red Sanders, the farazuola Fanan .v. to vi white Sanders and citrine, which grow in the Island of Timor, the farazuola Fanan xl to lx spikenard, fresh and good, the faraz. Fanan xxx to xl Nut megs, which come from the Island of Bandan where the bahar is worth from viii to ten fanans, (which import vi pounds weight to the marchetto) are worth in Calicut, the faraz. Fanan x. to xii. Mace which is brought from the Island of Bandan where the Bahar is worth fifty fanans (which import about one marchetto the pound a●e worth in Calicut the farazuola. Fanan xxv. to xxx Turbithes, are worth the farazuola Fanan xiii. Worm seed of the best kind, called Semenzina, is worth the farazuola. 
Seeds kill lice.  Fanan xv. Zerumba, the farazuola Fanan two. Zedoarta, the farazuola Fanan i. Gum Serapine, the farazuola Fanan xx. Aloe cicotrine, the farazuola Fanan xviii Cardamome in grains, the farazuola Fanan xx. rhubarb groweth abundantly in the country of Malabar: And that which cometh from China by Malacha, is worth the farazuola Fanan xl. to l Mirabolani emblici, the farazuola Fanan two. Mirabolani belirici, the farazuola Fanan one & a half. Mirabolani citrini & chebuli, which are all of one sort. Fa ii Mirabolani Indi, which are of the same citrine trees Fa. iii Tutia, the farazuola Fanan thirty. Cububes which grow in the Island of java or Giava, are there of smaule price, and sold by measure without weight. Opium which is browght from the city of Aden where it is made, is worth in Calicut the faraz. Fanan cclxxx to cccxx Opium of an other sort which is made in Cambaia is worth the farazuola, Fanan cc. to ccl   

¶ Of the weights of Portugal and India: And how they agree.  
THe pound of the owld weight, containeth xiiii ounces.  
The pound of the new weight containeth xvi ounces. viii. cantares of the owlde weight, make vii of the new.  
And every new cantare, is of. C.xxviii, pounds after xvi ounces to the pound  
Every owlde cantare, containeth three quarters and a half of the new cantar: And is of. C.xxviii. pounds, after xiiii ounces the pound.  
One farazuola, is: xxii. pounds of xiiii ounces, and vi ounces more, with two fift parts.  
Twenty farazuoles, are one Bahar.  
One bahar is four cantares of the owld weight of Portugal. All the Spices and drugs, and all such other things as come from India, are sold in Portugal by the owld weight and all the rest by the new weight.  
¶ Hereby may we well consider that as we ought to rejoice and give god thanks for the abundance of all these things which he causeth the earth so plentifully to bring forth to hour use, so may we lament th'abuse of men whose covetousness causeth great dearth and searsenesse in the midst of abundance: herein no less offending the law of nature then do such as by wychcrafte intermingle poison with things created for the health of man, or by enchantment corrupt the seeds in the ground: ye rather as the unnatural mother who destroyeth the child whom she hath long nuryshed.   

❧ Of the doves of the Island of Madera.  
CAdamustus writeth, that before the Portugals came to this Island, it was overgrown with trees and unhabited. Yet were there many beasts, and great plenty of doves which were utterly without fear of men because they had never seen any men before, nor yet were accustomed to be put in fear. In so much that they stood still while snares were put about their necks with long rods and poles: The which thing he saith he hath also seen in other Islands. There are many rich men in this Island, and great abundance of flesh, because the hole Island is in manner one garden.   

¶ Of the Island of saint Thomas under the Equinoctial line.  
THe chiefest occupation and living of thinhabitants of this Island, is the making of sugar, which they sell yearly to the ships that come for it out of Spain and Portugal laden with butts of meal and flower, also wine, oil, cheese, leather, swords, cups of glass, beads, certain scaruels of the fine white earth called Porcellana, of the which are made the earthen dishes of the work of Maiolica. And if it were not that such victuals and provisions were brought them out of Spain and Portugal, the white merchants which dwell in that Island (pertaining to the dominion of the king of Portugal) should not be able to live there, forasmuch as they are not accustomed to eat such meats as do the Ethiopians or negroes. And therefore the Portugals which inhabit this Island, have certain black slaves of Guinea, Benin, and Manicongo, which they set to till and labour the ground and make sugar. Among these white inhabitants, there are many rich men which have .150. or .200. and sum .300. black slaves of men and women to till the ground and do other laborious works. This Island was discovered four score years sense by the navigations of the Portugals and was unknown to the owlde writers. It lieth in the great gulf of Africa in the .30. degree of longitude from the West to the East, and is in manner round. It is of largeness from side to side lx Italiam miles, (that is to say) one degree. The horizontal line of the Island, passeth by the two poles, Arctic and Antartyke: and hath ever the day equal with the night without any sensible difference, whether the son be in Cancer or in Capricorn. The star of the pole Arctic, is there invisible: But the wardens are seen somewhat to move about: And the stars called the Cross, are seen very high. Of this Island with the other lands and Islands lying between Portugal and the same, a certain pylotte of Portugal hath written a goodly viage to Conte Rimondo.   

¶ The debate and strife between the spaniards and Portugals, for the division of the Indies and the trade of Spices: and also for the islands of Molucca, which sum call Malucas. written in the Spanish tongue by Francisco Lopez de Gomara.  
Themperors majesty was very glad that the Malucas and islands of the spicery were discovered: and that he might pass unto them through his own countries without any prejudice or hurt to the Portugals: And because also that Almanzor, Luztu, and Corala which were the lords of the spicery, showed themselves to be his friends and became tributaries to him He also gave certain gifts and rewards ●o john Sebastian for his great pains and good service, 
john Sebastian.  forasmuch as he craved a reward for the good news that the Islands of the Malucas and other Islands richer and greater than they, we●e found to be in his part of those countries which pertained unto him according to the pope's bull. 
The cause of contention.  And hereby it came to pass that there was great contention and stri●e between the spaniards and the Portugals about the spicery and the division of the Indies by reason of the return of john Sebastian and thinformation which he gave thereof. Who also affirmed that the Portugals had never any entrance before that time into those Islands. Here upon, the counsel for the Indies, advertised Themperor to maintain his fleet for those parts, 
The trade of spice pertaineth to Themperor.  and to take the trade of spices into his own hand, forasmuch as it was his own of duty, aswell for that those Islands fell on his part, as also that he had now found passage and way through his west Indies into those regions. And finally to consider that he should thereby obtain and get to himself great revenues beside thinryching of his subjects and realms, and that with smaule coast and charge. Themperor being thus aduer●i●ed of the truth, took it for good counsel, and commanded all things hereunto appertaining to be furnished accordingly. In this mean time, when king john of Portugal had knowledge what th'emperor determined 
john king of Portugal.  to do, and the speedy hast his counsel made for the performance hereof, and of the coming home of john Sebastian of Cane, with thinformation he made, what of stoutness of mind and what for grief, was puffed up with anger as were also the rest of the Portugals, storming as although they would have plucked down the sky with their hands, not a little fearing least they should lose the trade of spices, if the spaniards should once put in their foot. whereupon the king immediately made supplication to Themperor, not to set forward any ships until it were determined to whether of them those Islands should belong: And that he would not so much endamage him as to cause him to liese the trade of spices which was so commodious and profitable to him. 
The trade of Spices.  And finally to avoid thoccasion of murder and bloodshed which were like to ensue thereof, if the spaniards and Portugals ships should meet together. Themperor although he knew that all this was but to make delays and prolonging of time, yet was he glad to have it tried by justice for the better justification of his cause and right. In fine, both parties were agreed to appoint learned men, Cosmographers and Pilots which should determine the controversy between them: 
The controversy determined by Cosmographers and Pilots.  promising on both parties to abide and stand to the sentence and determination made by those persons appointed and sworn to judge indifferently.   

¶ The repartition and division of the Indies and new world between the spaniards and the Portugals.  
THis matter concerning the trade of spices and the new world of the Indies, by reason of the great riches thereof was of great importance and very difficulty to be limited and drawn forth by l●nes. By reason whereof, it was necessary and convenient to seek wise & woorshypful men expert in navigations, 
The arby●rers on the Empiour● side.  in cosmography, and the mathematical sciences. Themproure for his side, chose and named for judges of the possession, the licentiate Acuna, one of the kings counsel. Also the licentiate Barrientos of the counsel of the orders: The licentiate Petro Manuel auditor of the court of the Chancery in Ualladol●th. For judges of the property, he chose Don Fernando Colonuo the son of Christopher Colonus: Also doctor Sancho Salaya, Peter Ruiz of Uillegas, friar Thomas Duran, Simon of Alcazava, and john Sebastian of Cano. His advocate & attorney, he made the licentiate john Rodriguez of Pisa: & for his fyscal doctor Ribera, & his secretary, Barthalome Ruiz of Castaneda. He also appointed that Sebastian Cabote, 
Sebastian Cabote.  Steven Gomes, Nunnio Garcia, Diego Rivero, being all expert pilots & cunning in making cards for the sea, should be present, 
Instruments of Cosmographic.  & bring forth their globes and maps with other instruments necessary to declare the situation of the Islands of the Malucas about the which was all the contention and strife. 
The Islands of Maluca.  But order was taken that they should show their minds on neither side, nor enter into the company of the other but when they were called. All these and divers other, went together to a town called Badaioz: 
Thearbitrers on the Portugals side.  and as many Portugals came to Elbes, or rather more. For they browght with them two fiscals and two advocates. The principal of them, was the licentiate Antony de Assevedo, Diego Lopes of Sequeyra the clerk of the weights and recepts, who had before been governor in India. Also Peralfonso of Melo, clerk: Simon of Tavira, with divers other whose names I know not. Before they met together, the one part remaining at Badaioz and the other in Elbes, there was much a do among them before they could agree upon the place where they should meet and who should speak fy●ste. 
The place where they met.  For the Portugals do greatly weight such circumstances. At the last, they concluded to meet together at Caya a little river which divideth Castille from Portugal, standing in the mid way between Badaioz and Elbes. And when they were assembled together one day at Badaioz and an other day at Elbes and saluted the one the other, 
Thunder of their process.  both parties were sworn that they should proceed and speak according to truth, justice, and equity. The Portugals refused Simon de Alcazava because he was a Portugal: and friar Thomas Duran because he had sometime been preacher to their king. So th●t Simon was by consent put out of the company, in whose room was placed master Antony of Alcaraz. Yet fell they not to reasoning the matter until the friar was put out. They were many days in beholding globes, maps, and cards of the sea, and hearing what might be said, both sides alleging for the right which they pretended. But the Portugals standing in vain contention, 
The Portugals.  said very angrily the Islands of Malaca whereupon their meeting and reasoning was at that presence, fell of their part and was of their conquest. And that they both had been there, and had them in their possession before john Sebastian had ever seen them. Likewise that the line should be drawn from the Island of Bonavista, 
Contention for drawing the line of the division.  or the Island called de la Sal, which are the most Easterly Islands from Caboverde, and not from the Island of Santanton or saint Antony, which lieth toward the West, and are. lxxxx. leaques the one from the other. All this was no more but to contend: and the other of the Malucas, is untrue. But they that have a naughty matter must set it forth with words and brabeling. 
how the portugales were deceived.  Here they found how greatly they were deceived in that they demanded that the line should be drawn three hundredth lxx leaques more to the West from the Islands of Caboverde (as appeareth hereafter) and not one hundredth according to thassignment of the pope's bull. The spaniards on the contrary part affirmed and made demonstration, 
The Spanya●des allegations.  that not only the Islands of Burney, Gilolo, Zubut, and Tidore, with the other Islands of the Malucas. But as well Samatra, 
Samatra.  Malacha, 
Malacha.  and a great parts of China, 
China.  should belong to the Cast●lians: and that those countries fell on their side and on the part of their conquest: Also that Magallanes and john Sebastian were the first Christian men that found them and obtained them for Themperor, 
Magallanes.  as the letters and presents of Almanzor do testify. And although the Portugals had been there first, yet went they thither after the donation of the pope: neither got they any right or just title thereby. For although they should draw the line by Buena Uista, 
Buena Uista.  what inconvenience should follow thereof, sith aswell by the one way as the other, the Islands of the Malucas must pertain to the Castilians: yea and moreover, the Islands of Cabo verde should also pertain to the Castilians, 
The Islands of C●bo Uerde.  forsomuch as drawing the line by Buena Uista, the Islands of the Malucas do remain within the line on the emperors side. They continued in these controversies for the space of two moons without any resolution or end made. For the Portugals prolonged and put of the matter, flying from the sentence with cavillations and could reasons to th'end that they might dissolve that assemble without any conclusion or determination: 
The Portugals cavillations.  for so it stood them upon. The Castilians which were the judges of the property, drew a line in the great globe three hundredth and lxx leaques from saint Antony's Island, 
The line of division.  lying by West Cabo Uerde according to the entreaty and determination which was agreed upon between the Catholic princes and the king of Portugal. These judges gave sentence upon this matter, 
The sentence.  cauling the contrary part before them upon the bridge of Caya in the year. ●524. The Portugals could neither disturb or defer the sentence, nor yet would they allow it to be just and according to right: saying that there was not sufficient process made that they should pass to the giving of sentence. And so departed threatening to slay the Castilians as many as they should find in the Islands of the Malucas. 
The Portugals threaten death to the Castilians  For they knew right well that their contreymen the Portugals had already taken the ship called the Trinity and had also taken the Castilians in Tidore. Then also departed hour men, taking their journey to the court giving up to Themperor all their writings and declaration what they had done. And according to this declaration must be signed and marked all globes and maps which good Cosmographers and masters do make. The line also of the repartition and last division of the new world of the Indies, 
The line of the last division.  aught to pass (little more or less) by the points of Humos and Buen Abrigo, as I have said in an other place. And thus shall it appear evidently that the Islands of Spices, and also the great Island of Zamotra, 
The great Island of Samotra.  do pertain to Castille. But the land of Brasile pertaineth to the king of Portugal where the cape of saint Augustine is, 
The land of Bra●ile, pertaineth to the portugals.  being viii degrees beneath the Equinoctial. This land reacheth from the point of Humos to the point of Buen Abrigo: and is in length North and South viii hundredth leaques. Being also sum way two hundredth leaques East and West.  
And hereafter these serious matters, we will rehearse ●ne merry thing, 
A merry tale.  which was this. It so chanced that as Frances de Melo, Diego Lopes of S●queyra, and other of those Portugals of this assemble, walked by the river side of Guadiana, a little boy who stood keeping his mother's clothes which she had washed, demanded of them whether they were those men that parted the world with Themperor And as they answered, yea: he took up his shirt and showed them his bare arse, saying: Coomme and draw your line here through the midst. Which saying was afterward in every man's mouth and laughed at in the town of Badaioz: yea even among the commissioners themselves, of whom sum were angry, and sum marveled at the saying of the child.    

¶ The cause and authority whereby they divided the Indies.  
THe Castilians and Portugals had long debated and reasoned about the gold mine of Guinea which was found in the year of hour lord 1471, 
The gold mine of Guinea.  in the time of the reign of Don Alonso King of Portugal the first of that name. 
Alonso king of Portugal.   
This was a matter of great importance. For the negroes or black moors, 
Gold for things of small value.  for things of no value, gave gold by hole handfuls which was at that time when the said King of Portugal pretended title and claim to the kingdom of Castille in the right of his wife Queen john (called the excellent) against the Catholic princes Isabel and Don Fernando whose it was in deed. 
Contention for the kingdom of Cast●le.  But that strife was ended as soon as Don Fernando had vanquished Don Alonso at a place called Temulos not far from Toro, which place Don Fernando chose rather to make war against the moors of Granada, 
war against the moors of Granada.  then to buy and sell with the black moors of Guinea. And thus the Portugals remained with the conquest of africa from the straits forward: 
The conquests of the Portugals in Africa.  which began where the infant of Portugal Don Henrique (son to king john the bastard and master of avis) did bebynne to enlarge it. When pope Alexander the vi (being a valentinian borne) had knowledge hereof, 
Pope Alexander.  he minded to give the Indies to the kings of Castille without any prejudice to the Portugals who had conquered the sea coasts of africa. These Indies, the pope gave of his own mind without the motion of any other, with this burden and charge that they should convert the idolaters to the faith of christ: And commanded a line or meridian to be drawn north and south from one hundredth leaques Westward beyond one of the Islands of Cabo Uerde toward the West, 
The pope maketh the division.  because the spaniards should not meddle in africa pertaining to the conquest of the Portugals, to thavoiding of all strife betwine them. King john of Portugal, 
The king of Portugal refuseth to stand to the Pope's bull.  the second of that name, was greatly offended when he red the bull and donation of the pope, unless his own ambassadors had made the self same request unto his holiness. He also found himself aggrieved with the catholic princes Isabella and Fernando, that they had shortened the course of the lands he had discovered, depriving him of the richesse which belonged to him. And therefore refused to stand to the pope's bull in this case: desiring the catholic princes Isabella and Fernando to grant him three hundredth leaques more to the West, beside the one hundredth which they had granted before: and therewith sent his ships to keep the coasts of africa. The princes catholic were content to satisfy his mind and to please him according to their gentle nature and for the alliance that was between them: And in fine, with the consent and agreement of the pope, 
The agreement of the last division  granted two hundrech lxx leaques more than the bull made mention of: At Tordefillas the vii day of june, in the year of our lord 1494. And whereas our kings thought that they should have lost ground in granting so many leaques that way, they won by that means the Islands of the Malucas with many other rich Islands. The king of Portugal also, herein deceived himself or was deceived of his whom he put in trust, 
wherein the Portugals were deceived.  having no certain knowledge of the situation of the Islands of the rich Spicery in demanding that which the king did demand. For it had been better for him to have requested the three hundredth and lxx leaques rather Eastward from the Islands of Cabo Uerde then toward the west. And yet for all that, I doubt whether the Malucas should have faulen within his conquest according to the ordinary account and dimension which the pylotes and Cosmographers do make. And after this manner they divided the Indies between them by th'authority of the pope for the avoiding of further strife and contention.   

❧ How and by what occasion Themperor laid the Islands of the Malucas to pledge to the king of Portugal.  
WHen the king of Portugal Don ivan the third of that name, had knowledge that the Cosmographers and pilots of Castille had drawn the line from the place before named, and that he could not deny the truth, fearing also thereby to liese the trade of Spices, made suit and request to Themperor that he should not send forth Loaisa nor Sebastian Cabote to the Malucas, 
Sebastian Cabote.  and that the Castilians should not attempt the trade of spices nor see such evils and miseries as his captains had showed in those Islands to them that adventured that voyage with Magalanes. Which thing he greatly covered, although he paid all the charges of those two fleets, and made other great bargains. In the mean time, Themperor married the Lady Isabella sister to king john: and king john married the lady Catharine sister to Themperor: 
th'emperor and the king of portugal joined i● alliance by marriage.  whereby this matter waxed could although the king ceased not to speak hereof, ever moving the partition. Themperor by the means of a certain Biscaine that was with Magallanes in the governors ship, had knowledge what the Portugals had done to the Castilians in the Island of Tidore, 
The portugals rob the Castilians  whereof he took great displeasure, and brought the said mariner face to face before th'ambassadors of Portugal, who denied all that he said, one of them being the chief captain and governor of India when the Portugals took the Castilians in Tidore and rob them of their Cloves and Cinamome and such other things as they had in the ship named the Trinity. But as the king of Portugals trade was great, and hour necessity greater, in the mean time Themperor (who was now going into Italy to be crowned in the year .1529) gagied the Malucas and the spicery to the king of Portugal 
The coronation of Themperor.  for three hundredth and fifty thousand ducades without any time determined otherwise then the controversy was defined upon the bridge of the river of Caya: 
The gageing of the islands of Malucas. zamatra and Malaca.  for the which thing, king john punished the licentiate Azevedo because he paid the money without declaration of the time. The covenant of the pledge was blindly made and greatly against the minds of the Castilians, as men that well understood the profit, commodity, and richesse of that trade: Affirming that the trade of spices might have been rented for one year or for two, for two times as much as the king gave for it. Peter Ruiz of Uillegas who was twice called to the bargeyne, as once at Granada and an other time at Madrid, said that it had been much better to have pledged Estremadura or Serena, or other greater lands and cities, rather than the Malucas, Zamatra, or Malaca, or other rich lands and rivers in the east not yet well known: forasmuch as it may so chance, that either by continuance of time, or alliance, the pledge might be forgotten as though it pertained to the right of Portugal. In fine, Themperor considered not the jewel that he pledged, nor the king what he received. Themperor was often times counseled to release the pledge of those Islands in consideration of the great vantage he might have thereby in few years. Furthermore, in the year .1548. the procuratoures of Cortes being in Ualladolid, made petition to Themperor to surrender the spicery to the kyngedoome of Castille for vi years, and that they would repay to the king of Portugal his .350. thousand crowns, and after those years, restore the trade to the crown, that his majesty might enjoy the same as was agreed at the beginning. But Themperor being then in Flaunders, sent word to the counsel that they should not assent to Cortes his request, nor speak any more hereof. Whereat, sum marveled, other were sorry, & all held their peace.   

¶ Of the Pole Antarctic and the stars about the same And of the quality of the regions and disposition of the Elements about the Equinoctial line. Also certain secrets touching the art of sailing.  
AMericus Uesputius in the summary of his voyages, writeth in this manner as followeth.  
Departing from Lisbona (commonly called Lusheburne) the viii day of May, in the year .1501. we sailed first to the Islands of Canary and from thence to Capoverde which the Ethiopians or black moors call Bisineghe, 
Caboverde  
Besenegha.  being xiiii degrees on this side the Equinoctial line. From whence directing hour course toward the South pole by the south-west, we saw no more land for the space of three moons and three days. Of which time during xl days, we had cruel fortune: In so much that for that space, 
A tempest.  the heaven in manner never ceased thundering roaring, and lightening with terrible noise, and fearful sights of fiery exhalations flying about in the air, and in manner continual showers of rain with dark clouds covering the heaven in such sort that aswell in the day as in the night we could see none otherwise but as when the moon giveth no light by reason of thick and dark clouds The sea was in like case unquieted with surgies and monsters. After these grievous & cruel days, it pleased god to have compassion on our lives. For we suddenly espied land whereby we recovered our spirits and strength. This land which we found, is from Capo Uerde .700. leaques, although Isuppose that we sailed more than .800. by reason of the cruel tempest and ignorance of the pilots and mariners whereby we were like to have been cast away. 
The ignorance of Pilots and mariners.  For we were in such dangerous places wandering in unknown coasts, that if I had not been skilful in the science of cosmography we had surely perished, 
The use of cosmography.  forasmuch as there was not one pilot that knew where we were by the space of fifty leaques. In so much that if I had not in time provided for the safeguard of mine own life and them that were with me, with my quadrant and astrolabe instruments of Astronomy, 
The use of the quadrant and astrolabe.  we had still wandered like blind men. But when in fine I had persuaded the pilots by demonstrations pertaining to that art, they gave me great honour and confessed that the ordinary pilottes and mariners ignorant in Cosmographi, are not to be compared to men of speculative knowledge. etc.  
We sailed by the coast of the said land .600. leaques And went oftentimes aland where we were friendly and honourably entertained of thinhabitants: In so much that considering their innocent nature, we sometimes remained with them xu or twenty days. This firm land beginneth beyond the Equinoctial line viii degrees toward the pole Antarctic. We sailed so far by the said coast that we passed the winter Tropyke toward the pole Antarctic by xvii. degrees and a half, 
The pole Antarctic.  where we had the Horizontal line elevate fifty degrees. Such things as I saw there, are not yet known to men of hour time: as the people, their customs and manners, the fertility of the land, the goodness of the air, the favourable influence of heaven and the planets, and especially the order of the stars of the eight sphere in the inferior hemispherie or lower half circle of heaven toward and about the South pole, 
The starred about the south pole.  whereof neither the old or new writers have made any mention to this day.  
To write particularly of the commodities and felicities of these regions, it would require rather a hole volume than a book: And that such, as if Pliny had had knowledge of these things, 
Most pleasant & fruitful regions.  he might greatly have increased his books of natural histories. The trees give from them continually such sweet savours as can scarcely be imagined: And on every part put forth such gums, liquors, and iuses, that if we knew their virtues, I suppose we might find in them marvelous medicines against diseases and to maintain health. And surely in my opinion, if there be any earthily paradise in the world, 
The earthly paradise.  it can not be far from these regions of the south, where the heaven is so beneficial and the elements so temperate that they are neither bitten with could in winter, nor molested with heat in summer. 
Continual temperatnesse.  The air also and the heaven is seldom darkened with clouds, so that the days and nights are ever clear. Yet have they sometimes moist dews in the morning and evening for the 
Moist dews  space of three hours, whereby the ground is marvelously refreshed. Likewise the firmament is marvelously adorned with certain stars which are not known to us, whereof I noted about twenty to be of such clearness as are the stars of Venus and jupiter when they are near unto us. 
Stars unknown to us   
And whereas having the knowledge of Geometry, 
The use of Geometry.  I considered their circuit and divers motions, and also measured their circumference and diameter, I am well assured that they are much greater than men think them to be. Among other, I saw three stars called Canopis, whereof two were exceeding clear, and the third somewhat dark. The pole Antarctic hath neither the great bear nor the little as is seen about hour pole. 
Notable stars in the inferior hemisphery.  But hath four stars which compass it about in form of a quadrangle.  
I saw also there many other stars, the divers motions whereof diligently observed, I made a particular book of the same, wherein I made mention of all such notable things as I saw and had knoweleage of, in this navigation. The which book I delivered to the kings majesty, trusting that he will shortly restore it me again. In this hemisphery or half coompasse of the heaven, 
The inferior hemisph●rie.  I diligently considered many things which are contrary to thopinions of philosophers. And among other things, I saw a white rainbow about midnight, 
The rainbow.  whereas other affirm that it hath four colours of the four elements, as red of the fire, green of the earth, white of the air, and blewe of the water. But Aristotle in his book entitled Meteora, 
Aristotle his opinion of the rainbow.  is of an other opinion For he saith that the rainbow is a reflection of the beams of the son in the vapour of a cloud directly against the son, as the shining of the same on the water, is reflected on a wall: And that the said cloud or vapour tempereth the heat of the son: and being resolved into rain, maketh the ground fertile, and purgeth the air. Also that is a token of abundant moisture. By reason whereof, 
A stran●e opinion.  sum are of opinion that it shall not appear xl years before th'end of the world, which shallbe a token of the dryness of the elements approaching to the time of their conflagration or consuming by fire. It is a pledge of peace between god and men, and is ever directly over against the son. It is therefore never seen in the South, because the son is never in the North. Nevertheless, Pliny saith, that after the Equinoctial in Autumn, it is seen at all hours. And thus much have I gathered out of the commentaries of Land●nus upon the fourth book of Uirgyl his Aeneids, because I would defraud no man of his travail. I saw the said rainbow two or three times. And not I only, but also many other which were in my company. Likewise we saw the new moon the self same day that she joined with the son. 
The new moan.   
We saw furthermore vapours and burning flames flying about heaven every night. 
Fiery exhalations.  A little before, I called this country by the name of Hemispherium (that is) the half sphere. 
hemispherium.  Which nevertheless can not be so named but by speaking improperly in comparison of ours. Yet forasmuch as it seemeth to represent such a form, I have improperly so named it.  
Departing therefore from Lisbona (as I have said) being from the Equinoctial line toward the North about xl degrees, 
Lisbona.  we sailed to this country which is beyond the Equinoctial l degrees: 
The forth part of the world.  All which sum, maketh the number of. lxxxx. being the fourth part of the greatest circle according to the true reason of the number tawght by the owlde authors. And by this demonstration it is manifest that we measured the fourth part of the world: Forasmuch as we that dwell in Lisbona on this side the Equinoctial line about xl degrees toward the north, sailed from thence lxxxx. degrees in length meridionale angularly by an overthwart line, to thinhabitants l degrees beyond the Equinoctial. And that the thing may be more plainly understood, imagine a parpendicular line to fall from the points of heaven which are Zenith (that is the prick over the head) to us both standing upright in the places of hour own habitations: and an other right line to be drawn from hour Zenith to theirs: 
Zenith.  Then granting us to be in the right line in comparison to them, it must of necessity follow that they are in the overthwart line as half Antipodes in comparison to us: In such sort that the figure of the said lines make a triangle which is the quarter or fourth part of the hole circle, as appeareth more plainly by the figure here following.  
As touching the stars and reasons of cosmography, I have gathered thus much out of the viage of Americus Uesputius. And have thought good to join hereunto that which Andreas de Corsali writeth in his viage to East India as concerning the same matter. 
The viage of Andreas de Corsali.   
After that we departed from Lisbona, we sailed ever with prosperous wind, not passing out of the Southeast and south-west. And passing beyond the Equinoctial line, 
The Equinoctial line.  we were in the height of .37. degrees of the other half circle of the earth. And traversing the cape of Bona Speranza a could and windy clime because at that time the son was in the north signs, 
Cap. de Speranza.  we found the night of xiiii hours. Here we saw a marvelous order of stars, so that in the part of heaven contrary to hour north pole, 
The stars of the under hemisphery.  to know in what place and degree the south pole was, we took the day with the son, and observed the night with the astrolabe, and saw manifestly two clouds of reasonable bigness moving about the place of the pole continually now rising and now falling, 
Clouds about the south pole.  so keeping their continual course in circular moving, with a star ever in the midst which is turned about with them about xi degrees from the pole. Above these appeareth a marvelous cross in the mydddest of five notable stars which compass it about (as doth charles wain the north pole) with other stars which move with them about xxx degrees distant from the pole, 
A cross of five stars.  and make their course in xxiiii hours. This cross is so fair and beautiful, that none other heavenly sign may be compared to it as may appear by this figure.  
A. The pole Antarctic. B. The cross. hitherto Andreas de Corsali.  
OF the like matters, and of the strange rising of the son in the morning, and of the divers seasons of the year and motions of the Elements in the coast of Ethiope about the river of Senega, 
The coasts of Ethiope.  and the rich region of Gambra where plenty of gold is found, 
Gold ●n Eth●ope.  somewhat beyond Capo Uerde, Aloisius Cadamustus writeth in this effect.  
During the time that we remained upon the mouth of the river, 
The viage of Aloisius Cadamustus.  we saw the north star but once: which appeared very low above the sea the height of a iavelen. We saw also two clear, bright, and great stars very low above the sea. And considering their stations with hour coompasse, 
The chariot of the south pole.  we found them to stand right south, figured in this manner.  
WE judged them to be the chariot or wain of the south: But we saw not the principal star, as we could not by good reason, except we should first lose the sight of the north pole. In this place we found the night of the length of a xi hours and a half: And the day of xii hours and a half at the beginning of july. This country is ever hot all times of the year. Yet is there a certain variety which they call winter. 
The winter about the Equinoctial.  For from the month of july to October, it raineth continually in manner daily about none after this sort. There rise continually certain clouds above the land between the North-east and the south east, 
Raine and clouds.  or from the east and southeast with great thundering and lightening and exceeding great showers of rain At this time the Eth●opians begin to sow their seeds. 
Thunder & lightning.  They live commonly with honey, herbs, roots, flesh, and milk. I had also intelligence that in this region by reason of the great heat of the air, the water that raineth in hot: 
hot showers of rain.  And that the son rising in the morning, maketh no clear daylyght as it doth with us: But that half an hour after the rising, it appeareth troubled, dim and smoky. The which thing, 
The day, and rising of t●e so●●ne.  I know not to proceed of any other cause then of the lowness of the ground in this country being without mountains.   

¶ A discourse of divers voyages and ways by the which Spices, Precious stones, and gold were brought in old time from India into Europe and other parts of the world. Also of the viage to CATHAY and East India by the north sea: And of certain secrets touching the same viage, declared by the duke of moscovy his ambassador to an excellent learned gentleman of Italy, named Galeatius Butrigarius. Likewise of the voyages of that worthy old man Sebastian Cabote, yet living in England, and at this present the governor of the company of the merchants of Cathay in the city of London.  
IT is doubtless a marvelous thing to consider what changes and alterations were caused in all the Roman Empire by the Goths and Uandales, 
The roman empire.  and other Barbarians into Italy. For by their invasions were extinguished all arts and sciences, and all trades of merchandise that were used in divers parts of the world. The desolation and ignorance which ensued hereof, continued as it were a cloud of perpetual darkness among men for the space of four hundredth years and more, 
iiii. hundredth years of ignorance.  in so much that none durst adventure to go any whither out of their own native countries: whereas before th'incursions of the said Barbarians when the Roman Empire flourished, they might safely pass the seas to all parts of East India which was at that time as well known and frequented as it is now by the navigations of the Portugals. 
east India well known in owld time.  And that this is true, it is manifest by that which Strabo writeth, 
Strabo.  who was in the time of Augustus and Tiberius. For speaking of the greatness and riches of the city of Alexandria in egypt (governed then as a province of the Romans) he writeth thus. This only place of egypt, 
The great richesse of Egipte.  is apt to receive all things that come by sea, by reason of the commodity of the haven: And likewise all such things as are brought by land, by reason of the river of Nilus whereby they may be easily conveyed to Alexandria, 
The city of A●exandria.  being by these commodities the richest city of merchants that is in the world.  
The revenues of Egypt are so great, that Marcus Tullius saith in one of his orations, 
marvelous richesse.  that king Tolomeus surnamed Auleta, the father of queen Cleopatra, had of revenues twelve thousand and five hundredth talentes, which are seven millions and a half of gold. If therefore this king had so great revenues when Egypt was governed of so few and so negligently, 
The governance and revenues of the Romans.  what might it then be worth to the Romans by whom it was governed with great diligence, & their trade of merchandise greatly increased by the traffic of Trogloditica and India? 
Trogloditica and India.  whereas in time passed there could hardly be found twenty ships together that durst enter into the gulf of Arabia, 
The gulf of Arabia.  or show their proos without the mouth of the same. But at this present, great navies sail together into India and to the furthest parts of Ethiope from whence are brought many rich and precious merchandise into Egypt and are carried from thence into other countries. 
Ethiope.  And by this means are the customs redoubeled aswell by such things as are brought thither, 
Rich customs  as also by such as are carried from thence, forasmuch as great customs arryse of things of great value. And that by this viage, infinite and precious merchandise were brought from the red sea and India, 
The richesse which were brought in old time from India. and the red sea.  and those of divers other sorts than are known in hour time, it appeareth by the fourth volume of the civil law wherein is described the commission of Themperors Marcus and Commodus, 
The commission of Themperors Marcus and Commodus.  with the rehearsal of all such stuff and merchandise whereof custom should be paid in the red sea by such as had the same in fee ferme, as were paid the customs of all other provinces pertaining to the Roman Empire: and they are these following. 

Cinamome.  
Long pepper.  
white pepper.  
Cloves.  
Costus.  
Cancamo.  
spikenard.  
Cassia.  
Sweet perfumes.  
Xilocassia.  
Mir.  
Amome.  
Ginger.  
Malabatrum.  
Ammoniac.  
Galbane.  
Lasser.  
Agarike.  
Gum of Arabia.  
Cardamome.  
Xilocinamome.  
Carpesio.  
silks of divers sorts.  
Linen cloth.  
skins and furs of Parthia and Babylon.  
ivory.  
Wood of Ebony.  
Precious stones.  
Pearls.  
jewels of Sardonica.  
Ceraunia.  
Calamus Aromaticus.  
Berille.  
Cilindro.  
Slaves.  
Cloth of Sarmatia.  
The silk called Metaxa.  
Uestures of silk.  
Died cloth and silk.  
Carbasei.  
Silk thread.  
Gelded men.  
popinjays.  
Lions of India.  
Leopards.  
Panthers.  
Purple.   Also that juice or liquor which is gathered of wool and of the hear of the Indians.  
By these words it doth appear that in owld time the said navigation by the way of the red sea, was well known and much frequented, and perhaps more than it is at this present. In so much that the ancient kings of Egypt considering the great profit of the customs they had by the viages of the red sea, 
The great riches the kings of E●ipte had by customs.  & willing to make the same more easy & commodious, attempted to make a fossae or channel which should begin in the last part of the said sea, where was a city named Arsinoe (which perhaps is that that is now called Sues) and should have reached to a branch of the river of Nilus named Pelusio, 
The noble enterprises of the kings of egypt. Ar●●noe. Damiata. Pelu●io.  which emptieth itself in hour sea toward the East about the city of Damiata. They determined also to make three causeis or high ways by land, which should pass from the said branch to the city of Arsinoe: but they found this to difficult to bring to pass.  
In fine, king Tolomeus surnamed Ph●ladelphus, ordained an o●her way: as to sail upon Nilus against the course of the river unto the city of Copto, 
Nilus.  
Copts.  and from thence to pass by a desert country until they come above the red sea to a city named Berenice or Miosormo, 
berenice,  where they embarked all their merchandise and wares for India, E●hiope, and Arabia, as appeareth by the writing first of Strabo (who writeth that he was in egypt) and then by Pliny who was in the time of Domitian. Strabo also speaking of the said fo●●e or trench which was made toward the red sea, 
A navigable trench made from egypt to the red sea  writeth thus  
There is a trench that goth toward the red sea and the gulf of Arabia, and to the city of Arsinoe, which sum cawl Cleopatrida: and passeth by the lakes named Amari (that is) bitter, 
Lacus Amari.  because in deed they were first bitter. But after that this trench was made and the river entered in, they became sweet, and are at this present full of fowls of the water by reason of their pleasantness. This trench was first begun by king Sesostre, 
King Sesostre.  before the battle of Troy. Sum say that it was begun by king Psammiticus while he was a child: 
King Psammiticus.  And that by reason of his death, it was left imperfect: Also that afterward, king Darius succeeded in the same enterprise, 
king Darius  who would have finished it, but yet brought it not to th'end because he was informed that the red sea was higher than Egypt: And that if this land dividing both the seas, were opened, all egypt should be drowned thereby. King Tolomeus would in deed have finished it: 
king Ptolomeus.  but yet left it shut at the head that he might when he would, sail to the other sea and return without peril. Here is the city of Arsinoe: And near unto that, the city called Heroum in the uttermost par● of the gulf of Arabia toward Egypt with many ports and habitations. 
The city heroum.  Pliny likewise speaking of this trench, 
What Plynye w●tt●h of the navigable trench.  saith. In the furthest part of the gulf of Arabia, is a port called Daneo, from whence they determined to bring a navigable trench unto the river of Nilus, where as is the first Delta. Between the said sea and Nilus, there is a straight of land of the length of lxii miles. The first that attempted this thing, was Sesostre king of egypt: and after him Darius' king of the Persians, whom Tolomeus followed, 
The largeness and length of the trench.  who made a trench a hundredth foot large, & xxx foot deep, being three hundredth miles in length unto the lakes named Amari, and durst proceed no further for fear of inundation, having knowledge that the red sea was higher by three cubits then all the country of Egypt. Other say that this was not the cause: but that he doubted that if he should have let the sea come any further, all the water of Nilus should have been thereby corrupted, which only ministereth drink to all egypt. But notwithstanding all these things aforesaid, all this viage is frequented by land from egypt to the red sea, 
The voyage bilande from egypt to the red sea.  in which passage are three causeis or high ways. The first beginneth at the mouth of Nilus named Pelusio. All which way is by the sands: In so much that if there were not certain high reeds fixed in the earth to show the right way, the causei could not be found by reason the wind ever covereth it with sand. The second causei is two miles from the mountain Cassius. And this also in th'end of lx miles, cometh upon the way or causey of Pelusius, inhabited with certain Arabians called Antei. The third beginneth at Gerro, named Adipson: and passeth by the same Arabians, for the space of lx miles somewhat shorter, but full of rough mountains and great scarceness of water. All these causeis, 
What king ptolomeus discovered.  lead the way to the city of Arsinoe, builded by Tolomeus Philadelphus in the gulf Carandra by the red sea. This Ptolomeus was the first that searched all that part of the red sea which is called Trogloditica. Of this trench described of Strabo and Pliny, there are seen certain tokens remaining at this present as they affirm which have been at Sues beyond the city of Alcayr otherwise called Babylon in egypt. But the merchants that of later days travail this voyage by land, ride through the dry & barren deserts on camels both by day and by night: directing their way by the stars and compass as do mariners on the sea, and carrying with them water sufficient for many days journeys. 
Alcayre.  The places of Arabia and India named of Strabo and Pliny, 
The voyage to east Indya frequented in owlde tyme.  are the self same where the Portugals practise their trade at this day, as the manners and customs of the Indians do yet declare. 
The customs and manners of the indians.  For even at this present their women use to burn themselves alive with the dead bodies of their husbands. Which thing (as writeth Strabo in his xu book) they did in old time by a law, for this consideration that sometime being in love with other they forsook or poisoned their husbands. And forasmuch as according to this custom, the owlde poet Propertius (who lived about a hundredth years before th'incarnation of christ) hath in his book made mention of the contention that was among the Indian women which of them should be burned alive with their husbands, I have thought good to subscribe his verses, which are these.  
Foelix Pois lex funeris una maritis,  
Quos aurora suis rubra colorat equis.  
Mamque ubi mortifero jacta est fax ultima lecto,  
Vxorum suis stat pia turba comis,  
Et certamen habent lethi, quae viva sequatur  
Coniugium, pudor est non licuisse mori.  
Ardent victrices, & flammae pectora praebent,  
Imponuntque suis ora perusta viris.  
As touthing these voyages both by sea and by land to East India & Cathay, many things are written very largely by divers authors which I omit because they pertain not so much unto us as doth the voyage attempted to CATHAY by the north seas and the coasts of Moscovia discovered in hour time by the voyage of that excellent young man Richard chancellor no less learned in all mathematical sciences than an expert pylotte, 
The viage to Cathay.  
richard Chancellor.  in the year of hour lord .1554.  
As concerning this viage, I have thought good to declare the communication which was between the said learned man Galeatius Butrigarius, and that great philosopher and noble gentleman of Italy named Hieronimus Fracastor as I find written in the Italian histories of navigations. As they were therefore conferring in matters of learning, and reasoning of the science of Cosmographi, 
A learned discourse of divers voyages.  the said learned man having in his hand an instrument of Astronomy, declared with a large oration how much the world was bound to the kings of Portugal, rehearsing the noble facts done by them in India, 
The vigages of the Portugals.  and what lands and Islands they had discovered▪ and how by their navigations they made the whole world hang in the air. 
The world hanging on the ●yer.  He further declared what parts of the bawl of the earth remained yet undiscovered. And said that of the lands of the inferior hemisphery or half compass of the ball toward the pole Antarctic, 
what is known of the lower hemisphery.  there was nothing known but that little of the coast of Brasilia unto the straight of Magellanus. 
The land of Brasile.  Also a part of Peru: 
Peru.  And a little above Africa toward the cape of Bona Speranza. Also that he marveled without measure that this thing was no better considered of Christian Princes to whom god hath deputed this charge, 
The charge & duty of Christian princes.  having ever on their counsailmen of great learning which may inform them of this thing being 
Note.  so marvelous and noble whereby they may obtain glory and fame by virtue, and be impuled among men as gods, by better demerits than ever were Hercules & great Alexander who travailed only into India: 
hercules and Alexander.  and that by making the men of this hour hemisphery known to them of the other half compass of the ball beneath us, they might by the title of this enterprise, without comparison far excel all the noble facts that ever were done by julius Cesar or any other of the Roman Emperors. Which thing they might easily bring to pass by assigning colonies to inhabit divers places of that hemisphery, in like manner as did the Romans in provinces newly subdued. 
The colonies of the Romans in regions subdued.  Whereby they might not only obtain great riches, but also enlarge the Christian faith and Empire to the glory of god and confusion of infidels. After this, he spoke of the Island of saint Laurence, called in old time Madagascar, 
The great Island of saint Laurence or Madagasca●.  which is greater than the realm of Castille and Portugal, and reacheth from the xii degree toward the pole Antarctic, unto the xxvi. degree and a half, lying north-east from the cape of Bona Speranza and partly under the line of Tropicus Capricorni: being well inhabited and of temperate air, with abundance of all things necessary for the life of man, and one of the most excellent Islands that is found this day in the world: And that nevertheless there is nothing known thereof, except only a few smaule havens by the sea side, as the like ignorance remaineth of the greatest part of the Islands of Taprobana, Giava the more and the less, 
The Islands of Tap●●bana or Giava.  and infinite other. Then beginning to speak of the parts of hour pole, he raused the books of pliny to be brought him where diligently pondering the lxvii chapiture of the second book, 
Pliny.  he found where he rehearseth the history of Cornelius Nepos, 
The history of Cornelius Nepos.  by these words: That in his time, one Eudoxus escaping the hands of king Lathyro, departed from the gulf of Arabia and came by sea to the Island of Calese. Declaring further, that whereas this narration was many years reputed for a fable, was now in hour time by the virtue of the Portugals, kdow●n to be true: And that likewise the same Cornelius Nepos recitethe that at the time when Quintus Met●llus Celer was proconsul or lieutenant for the Romans in France, 
Shypes of India driu●n into the sea of Germany.  the king of Suevia gave him certain Indians which sailing out of India for merchandise, were by tempest driven to the coasts of Germany. When he had red these words, he proceeded, saying that the same thing might be verified now in our time if the princes which confine upon that sea would endeavour their industry and diligence to bring it to pass. 
An enterprise whereby princes may obtain true fame and glory.  And that there could not any navigation be imagined so commodious and profitable to all Christendom as this might be if by this way the viage should be found open to India to come to the rich country of CATHAY which was discovered now two hundredth years sense by Marcus Paulus. 
Cathay discovered ●i Marcus Paulus.  Then taking the globe in his hand, he made demonstration that this viage should be very short in respect of that which the Portugals now follow, and also of that which the spaniards may attempt to the Islands of Moluca. He declared further more that the city of Lubyke being rich and of great power, 
The city of Lubyke.  and situate upon the sea of Germany, and also accustomed with continual navigations to travail the sea of Norway and Gothlande, and likewise the right noble king of Polony whose dominions with his realm of Lituania, 
The king of Polanie.  extend to the said sea, should be apt to discover this secret: But that above all other, the duke of moscovia, 
The duke of Moscovia.  should perform the same with greater commodity and more facility than any other Prince. And here steyinge a while, he began to speak again and said. Now forasmuch as we are come to this pass, me think it should seem a great discourtesy if I should not show you all that I know as touching this viage, whereof I greatly mused with myself many years by occasion of the words of Pliny. Whereas therefore being a young man, I was in Germany in the city of Augusta, it so chanced that in those days there came thither an ambasadour of the duke of moscovia, 
An ambassador from the duke of Moscovia.  a man singularly learned both in the Greek tongue and the Latin, and of good experience in worldly things, having been sent to divers places by the said Prince, and one of his counsel. Of whose learning being advertised, I sought his acquaintance. And talking with him one day of these Indians driven by fortune to the coasts of Germany, and of the viage that might be discovered by the North sea to the Islands of spices, I perceived that at the first he marveled exceadyngely, as at a thing that he could never have imagined. But resting a while in manner astonysshed in his secret fantasy, he took great pleasure therein, and said. 
The words of th'ambassador of Moscovia  Forasmuch as the Portugals have now compassed about all the south parts supposed in old time to be inaccessible by reason of great heat, why should we not certainly think that the like may be done about this part of the north without fear of could, especially to men borne & brought up in that clime? Yet proceeding further, he said, that if his Prince and master, had men that would animate him to discover this viage, there was no Prince in Christendom that might do it with more facility. Then cauling for a map in which was the description of moscovia and the provinces subject to the same, 
The way from moscovia to the north Ocean & Cathay.  he declared that from the city of moscovia or Mosca going toward the North-east for the space of lx miles, they come to the river of Uolochda, 
Uolochda.  and afterward by that, and following the course thereof, to the city of Usting, 
Ustiug.  so called because the river of jug falleth into the river of Succana, 
Succana.  where they lose their own names and make the great river Duina: 
Duina.  And by that, leaving on the right hand the city of Colmogor, 
Coimogor.  they sail unto the north Ocean. 
The north Ocean.  The which way, although it be a long tract, as more than .800. miles, nevertheless he said that in summer it might commodiously be sailed: And that whereas it falleth into the sea, there are infinite woods of goodly trees apt to make ships. 
Great woods.  And the place so convenient for this purpose, that shipwryghtes and other skilful workmen for all things hereunto appertaining, may easily come out of Germany. Also that the men which are used to travail the sea of Germany about the coasts of Gothlande, 
Gothlande.  should be best and most apt to attempt this enterprise, because they are indurate to abide could, hunger, and labour. He said furthermore, that in the court of his Prince, they have much knowledge of the great cane of Cathay, 
The Moscovites have knowledge of the great cane of Cathay.  by reason of the continual wars they have with the Tartars, of whom the greatest part give obedience to the said great Cane as to their chief Emperor. He made also demonstration in the said card by the north-east, that being passed the province of Permia and the river Pescora (which falleth into the north sea) and certain mountains named Catena Mundi, 
Permis.  
Plescora.  
Catena mund.  there is thentrance into the province of obdora, 
Obdora.  whereas is Uecchiadoro and the river Obo, 
Ucchiadoro.  
Obo.  which also falleth into the said sea, and is the furthest brother of Thempire of the Prince of Moscovia. The said river hath his original in a great lake called Chethai, 
●he lake Chethay.  which is the first habitation of the Tartars that pay tribute to the great Cane. 
The Tartars  And from this lake for the space of two months viage (as they were credibly informed by certain Tartars taken in the wars) is the most noble city of Cambalu, 
The city of Cambolu.  being one of the chiefest in the dominion of the great Cane, whom sum call the great Cham. 
Note this secret.  He also affirmed, that if ships should be made on the coasts of the said sea, and sail on the back half of the coast thereof (which he knew by many relations made to his Prince, to reach infinitely toward the North-east) they stulde doubtless in following the same, easily discover that country. Unto these words he added, that although there were great difficulty in moscovia, 
Difficult travailing in Moscoula.  by reason that the way to the said sea is full of thick woods and waters which in the summer make great marishes and impossible to be travailed, aswell for lack of victuals which can not there be found, not for certain days, but for the space of certain months, the place being desolate without inhabitants, nevertheless he said that if there were with his Prince, only two spaniards or Portugals to whom the charge of this viage should be committed, 
Commendation of the Spaniards and Portugals.  he no ways doubted but that they would follow it and find it, forasmuch as with great ingeniousness and inestimable patience, these nations have overcome much greater difficulties than are these which are but lytele in comparison to those that they have overpassed and do overpass in all their viages to India. 
●he history of Paulus Centur●o.  He proceeded declaring that not many years sense, there came to the court of his Prince, 
Of this read more at large in the book of Paulus jomus.  an ambassador from pope Leo, named master Paulo Centurion a Genueses under divers pretences. But the principal occasion of his coming, was, because he had conceived great indignation and hatred against the Portugals: 
Malice may do more with sum then Virtue.  And therefore intended to prove if he could open any viage by land whereby spiers might be brought from India by the land of Tartary, or by the sea Caspium (otherwise called Hircanum) to moscovia: 
The Cospien sea.  And from thence to be brought in ships by the river Riga, 
Riga.  which running by the country of Livonia, 
Livonia.  falleth into the sea of Germany. And that his Prince gave ear unto him: and caused the said voyage to be attempted by certain noble men of Lordo, of the Tartars confining next unto him. 
The Tartar● of Lordo.  But the wars which were then between them, and the great deserts which they should of necessity overpass, 
Deserts.  made them leave of their enterprise: which if it had been purposed by the coasts of this hour north sea, 
The voyage by the north se●.  it might have been easily finished. The said Ambassador continued his narration, saying that no man ought to doubt of that sea but that it may be sailed six months in the year, forasmuch as the days are then very long in that clime, and hot by reason of continual reverberation of the beams of the son and short nights. 
The worthiness of this viage.  And that this thing were as well worthy to be proved, as any other navigation whereby many parts of the world heretofore unknown, have been discovered & brought to civility. And here making an end of this talk, he said: Let us now omit this part of moscovia with his could, and speak somewhat of that part of the new world in which is the land of Brytons called Terra Britonum, and Baccaleos or Terra Baccalearum, 
The viage● of the Frenchmen to the land of Baccalaos.  where in the year .1534. and .1535. jaques Cartiar in two voyages made with three great French galleys, found the great and large countries named Canada, Ochelaga, and Sanguenai: which reach from the xlv to the li. degree, being well inhabited and pleasant countries, 
Pleasant countries.  and named by him Nova Francia. 
New France.  And here steyinge a while and lifting up his hands, he said: Oh what do the Christian Princes mean that in such lands discovered they do not assign certain colonies to inhabit the same to bring those people (whom god hath so blessed with natural gifts) to better civility and to embrace hour religion, 
Apostrophe to the Christian Princes.  than the which, nothing can be more acceptable to god? The said regions also, being so fair and fruitful, with plenty of all sorts of corn, herbs, fruits, wood, fishes, beasts, metals, and rivers of such greatness that ships may sail more than .180. miles upon one of them, 
Great rivers.  being on both sides infinitely inhabited: And to cause the governors of the said colonies to search whether that land toward the north named Terra de Laborador, 
A thing worthy to be searched.  do join as one firm land with Norway: Or whether there be any straight or open place of sea as is most like there should be, forasmuch as it is to be thought that the said Indians driven by fortune about the coasts of Norway, came by that straight or sea, to the coasts of Germany: And by the said straight to sail northwest to discover the lands and countries of CATHAY, and from thence to sail to the Islands of Molucca. 
The way to Cathay and the Islands of Maluca by the northwest A notable enterprise.  And these surely should be enterprises able to make men immortal. The which thing, that right worthy gentleman master Antony di Mendoza considering by the singular virtue and magnanimity that is in him, 
The noble enterprise of Antoni di Mendoza, viceroy of Mexico.  attempted to put this thing in practice. For being viceroy of the country of Mexico (so named of the great city Mexico otherwise called Temistitan, now called new Spain, being in the twenty degree above the Equinoctial, and part of the said firm land, he sent certain of his captains by land, and also a navy of ships by sea, to search this secret. And I remember that when I was in Flaunders in Themperors court, 
The discovering of the northwest parts.  I saw his letter written in the year .1541. and dated from Mexico: wherein was declared how toward the northwest, he had found the kingdom of Set Citta (that is) Seven Cities, whereas is that called Civola by the reverend father Marco da Riza: & how beyond the said kingdom yet further toward the Northwest, captain Francisco Uasques of Coronado, having overpassed great deserts, 
Ships sailing from Cathay by the north hyperborean sea to the coasts of the northwest part of the land of Baccaleos.  came to the sea side where he found certain ships which sailed by that sea with merchandise, and had in their banner upon the proos of their ships, certain fowls made of gold and silver which they of Mexico call Alcatrazzi: And that their mariners showed by signs that they were xxx days sailing in coming to that haven: whereby he understood that these ships could be of none other country then of Cathay, 
Cathay.  forasmuch as it is situate on the contrary part of the said land discovered. The said master Antony wrote furthermore, that by the opinion of men well practised, there was discovered so great a space of that country unto the said sea, that it passed .950. leaques, 
The sea from new France or Terra Britonum to Cathay.  which make .2850. miles. And doubtless if the French men in this their new France, would have passed by land toward the said northwest and by north, they should also have found the sea whereby they might have sailed to Cathay. But above all things, this seemed unto me most worthy of commendation, 
A notable book.  that the said master Antony wrote in his letter that he had made a book of all the natural and marvelous things which they found in searching those countries, with also the measures of lands and altytudes of degrees: A work doubtless which showeth a princely and magnifical mind, whereby we may conceive that if god had given him the charge of the other hemisphery, he would or now have made it better known to us. The which thing, I suppose no man doth greatly esteem at this time: being nevertheless the greatest and most glorious enterprise that may be imagined. 
A great and glorious enterprise.   
And here making a certain pause, and turning himself toward us, he said: Do you not understand to this purpose how to pass to India toward the northwest wind, as did of late a citizen of Uenese, so valiente a man, and so well practised in all things pertaining to navigations and the science of cosmography, that at this present he hath not his like in Spain, in so much that for his virtues he is preferred above all other pilots that sail to the west Indies, 
Sebastian Cabote thee grand pilot of the west Indies.  who may not pass thither without his licence, and is therefore called Piloto Maggiore (that is) the grand pilot. And when we said that we knew him not, he proceeded, saying, that being certain years in the city of Seville, 
Commendation of Sebastian Cabote.  and desirous to have sum knowledge of the navigations of the spaniards, it was told him that there was in the city a valiant man, a Uenecian borne, named Sebastian Cabote, 
Sebastian Cabote told me that he was borne in Brystowe, & that at four year owld he was carried with his father to Venice and so returned again into England with his father after certain years: Where by he was thought to have been born in Venice.  who had the charge of those things, being an expert man in that science, and one that could make cards for the sea with his own hand. And that by this report, seeking his acquaintance, he found him a very gentle person, who entertained him friendly and showed him many things, and among other a large map of the world with certain particular navigations aswell of the Portugals as of the spaniards. And that he spoke further unto him, in this effect. When my father departed from Uenese many years sense to dwell in England to follow the trade of merchandise, he took me with him to the city of London while I was very young, yet having nevertheless sum knowledge of letters of humanity and of the sphere. And when my father died in that time when news were browght that Don Christopher Colonus Genuese, had discovered the coasts of India, whereof was great talk in all the court of king Henry the seventh who then reigned: In so much that all men with great admiration affirmed it to be a thing more divine than human, to sail by the West into the East where spices grow, by a way that was never known before. By which fame and report, there increased in my heart a great flame of desire to attempt sum notable thing. And understanding by reason of the sphere, that if I should sail by the way of the northwest wind, I should by a shorter tract come to India, I thereupon caused the king to be advertised of my device, who immediately commanded two caravels to be furnished with all things appertaining to the viage, 
The first viage of Sebastian Cabote.  which was as far as I remember, in the year .1496. in the beginning of summer. Beginning therefore to sail toward Northwest, not thinking to find any other land then that of CATHAY, and from thence to turn toward India. But after certain days, I found that the land ran toward the north, which was to me a great displeasure. Nevertheless, sailing along by the coast to see if I could find any gulf that turned, I found the land still continent to the .56. degree under hour pole. And seeing that there the coast turned toward the East, dispayringe to find the passage, I turned back again, and sailed down by the coast of that land toward the Equinoctial (ever with intent to find the said passage to India) and came to that part of this firm land which is now called FLORIDA. 
The land● of Florid●.  Where, my victuals failing, I departed from thence and returned into England, where I found great tumults among the people, and preparance for wars in scotland: by reason whereof, there was no more consideration had to this viage: whereupon I went into Spain to the catholic king, 
The second viage of Cabote to the land of Brasile, and Rio ●ella Plata.  and queen Elizabeth: who being advertised what I had done, entertained me, and at their charges furnished certain ships wherewith they caused me to sail to discover the coasts of Brasile, where I found an exceeding great and large river, named at this present Rio della Plata (that is) the river of silver, into the which I sailed, 
Cabote told me that in a region within this river ●e sowed l. ●raynes of weate in September, and gathered thereof. l. thousand in December as writeth also Francisco Lopes.  and followed it into the firm land more than six hundreth leaques, finding it every where very fair and inhabited with infinite people, which with admiration came running daily to hour ships. Into this river, run so many other rivers, that it is in manner incredible. After this, I made many other voyages which I now pretermit. And waxing old, I give myself to rest from such travails because there are now many young and lusty pylotes and mariners of good experience, by whose forwardness I do rejoice in the fruits of my labours, and rest with the charge of this office as you see. And this is as much as I have understood of master Sebastian Cabote, as I have gathered out of divers navigations written in the Italian tongue.  
And whereas I have before made mention how Moscovia was in our time discovered by Richard chancellor in his voyage toward Cathai by the direction and information of the said master Sebastian who long before had this secret in his mind, 
The viage to Moscovia.  I shall not need here to describe that voyage, forasmuch as the same is largely and faithfully written in the Latin tongue by that learned young man Clement Adam's school master to the Queen's henshemen, as he received it at the moutht of the said Richard chancellor. Nevertheless I have thought good here to speak somewhat of moscovia as I have red in the book of john Faber written in the Latin tongue to the right noble Prince Ferdinando Archeduke of Austria and Infant of Spain, 
The history of Moscovia  of the manners and religion of the Moscovites, as he was partly instructed by the ambasadours of the duke of Moscovy sent into Spain to Themperors majesty in the year. M. D.XX.V. He writeth therefore as followeth.  
I think it first convenient to speak somewhat of the name of this region whereby it is called at this day, 
The dyuer● names of Moscovia.  and how it was called in owlde tyme. conferring therefore the most ancient of the Greek and latin monuments with the histories of later time, I perceive it to be a thing which requireth no smaule judgement of wit and learning. For we see in how short time the names of things are changed, as are also the manners of men. I find therefore that those people whom at this day we commonly call Moscovites, were in time past (as witnesseth Pliny) called Roxolani, 
Roxolani.  whom nevertheless by changing one letter, Ptolemy in his ●yght table of Europe, cauleth Rosolanos as doth also Strabo. 
Rosolani,   
They were also many years called Rutheni: 
Rutheni.  And are that people which sometime fought manfully against the Captains of Methridates as Strabo writeth. They were called Moscovites of the chief city of all the province named moscovia or Mosca: or (as Uolaterane saith) of the river Moscow. 
The river Moscow.  They were sometime governed by duke johan, whose wife was Helena of the lineage of Themperours of Constanstinople of the noble family of the Paleologi. Beyond these Roxolanos, Strabo saith there is no land inhabited. These Ruthenians therefore or Moscovites, are people of the north-east part of the world from us: And are determined with the limettes of the great river Boristhenes of Scythia, 
The river Boristhenes.  on the one side with the Lituanians and Polonians, and on the other side with the Tartars who cease not to vex them with continual wars and incursions. Especially the great Emperor Cham of Cathay the chief Prince of the Tartars, 
Themperor of Cathay.  resident by the sea side in Taurito Chersoneso, molesteth them with sore wars. They are toward the north side enclosed with the frozen sea, 
The frozen sea  the land of whose coasts being very large, pertaineth in manner all to the dominion of the duke of Moscovy. This sea is it which the owlde writers call Lacus Cronicus, 
Lacus Cronicus.  so named of the Greek word Cronos, which the Latins call Saturnus whom they feign to be an old man, 
Saturnus.  of complexion could and slow, and thereby name all such things as are could and slow, Cronica, as by like reason they did this north sea which being in manner ever frozen, is slow and could and in manner immovable. And for like consideration (as saith Pliny) Hethens nameth it in the Scythian tongue, Amaltheum, 
Amaltheum.  which word signifieth as much as congealed or frozen. But that I wander not far from my purpose: Thempire and dominion of the duke of Moscovy reacheth so far that it comprehendeth certain parts of Asia and also of Europe. 
The dominion of the duke of Moscovia.  The city of moscovia or Mosca, 
The city of Moscovia.  is counted twice as big as Colonia Agrippina as they faithfully report which know both. Unto this they have also an other not unequal in bigness called Fladimer. 
The chief cities of Moscovia.  Also Blescovia, Novogradia, Smolne, and Otifer, all which, their ambassadors affirm to be of princely and magnifical buildings, and strongly defended with walls both of brick and square stone. Of these, Blescovia is strongest and environed with three walls. Other which they have innumerable are not so famous as are these whereof this duke of Moscovy and Emperor of Russia taketh thinscription of his little. 
The 〈◊〉 Moscovia & Emperor of Russia.   
For even at this present, when so ever either by his ambassadors or his letters, he doth signify himself to be Emperor of Moscovy, his is accustomed to use this little. 
Th● duke of Moscovia his title.  Basilius by the grace of god Emperor of all Russia and great Duke of Fladamer, moscovy, Novigrade, Blescovia, Smolne, and Otifer. etc. And this is the title whereby the said ambassadors saluted your majesty in the name of great Basilius when they began their oration. 
Duke Basilius.  This prince of Moscovy hath under him princes of many provinces and those of great power: Of the which, that owlde white bearded man whom this Emperor of the Ruthians sent for his ambassador to Themperors majesty into Spain, 
Their power.  is not one of the least. For even he when necessity of war requireth, is accustomed to make for his Emperor a band of xxx thousand horsemen. But this is to their singular commendation that they are so obedient to their prince in all things, 
Their obedience to their prince.  that being summoned by him by never so mean an hearald, they obey incontinent as if it were to god, 
Their wars & conquests.  thinking nothing more glorious then to die in the quarrel of their prince. By reason of which obedience, they are able in short time, to assemble an army of two or three hundredth thousand men against their enemies either the Tartars or the great Cham: And have hereby obtained great victories and triumphs aswell against the Turks as the Tartars by the exceeding multitude of their horsemen and continual experience in wars. At such time as Themperor Maximilian made a league with them, they kept war against the king of Polony. 
Guns.  They use not only bows and darts after the manner of the Parthians, but have also the use of guns as we have. And to be brief, only the Moscovites may seem that nation which hath not felt the commodities of peace: 
On●y the moscovites have not felt the commodities of peace.  In so much that if their region were not strongly defended by the nature of the place being impreignable, it had or now been often times conquered. Their language agreeth much with the tongue of the Bohemians, Croatians, and slavons: so that the Slavon doth plainly understand the Moscovite, 
Their language.  although the Moscovian tongue be a more rude and hard phrase of speech. The historiographers write that the slavons tongue took the name of the confusion which was in Babel in the time of that stout hunter Nembroth of whom mention is made in the Genesis. But I can not enough marvel at this thing, that whereas between Dalmatia (now called Sclavonia) and Moscovia, 
Dalmatia.  both the Pannonies are situate, 
Pannonia.  yet this notwithstanding, the Hungarians tongue nothing agreeth w●th the Mosc●uites. 
hungary.  Whereby we may conjecture that the e●at●ons were sometimes divided by legions, 
Their original.  and that they came out of Dalmatia thither: which thing also Uolateranus affirmeth, saying that the language of the Ruthenians (which are the Moscovites) is Semid●lmatic● (that is) half Slavon. 
The Slavon t●●nge reacheth far.  How so ever it be, this is certain that the ohemians, Croatians, Sclau●ns, and Muscovites, agree in language as we perceived by th'interpreters which your majesty had then in your court. For whereas the said interpreters were borne among the Croatians and slavons and none of them had ever been in moscovia, or before that time had any conversation with them, yet did they well vnd●rstande the ambassadors words.  
There are in moscovia, woods of exceeding bigness, in the which black wolves and white bears are hunted. 
Great woods white bears and black wolves.  The cause whereof may be th'extreme could of the north, which doth greatly alter the complexions of beasts, and is the mother of whiteness as the Philosophers affirm. They have also great plenty of bees, whereby they have such abundance of honey and wax that it is with them of small price. 
Abundance of honey and wax.  When the commodity of their country is neglected by reason of long wars, their chief advantage whereby they have all things necessary toward their living, is the gains which they have by their rich furs, 
Rich furs.  as Sables, Marterns, 
Their manner of bargaining  Luzernes, most white armyns, and such other which they sell to merchants of divers countries. They buy and sell with simple faith of words exchanging ware for aware without any curious bonds or cautels. And albeit they have the use of both gold and silver moneys, yet do they for the most part exchange their furs for fruits and other things necessary to maintain their life. 
Rude & wild people.  There are also sum people under the dominion of this Emperor, which have neither wine nor wheat, but live only by flesh and milk as do the wild Tartars their borderers which dwell in woods by the coasts of the frozen sea. 
Tartars.  These people are brutysshe, and live in manner like wild beasts. But they of the city of Mosca and Novigrade, and other cities, are civil people: 
Civil people in cities.  and agree with us in eating of fish and flesh unless their manner of coquerie is in many things differing from ours. Uolaterane writeth that the Ruthenians use money uncoined. 
Their money  And enquiring further, I was informed that the money of Hungary is much currant with them. But this is chiefly to be considered, 
They embrace the Christian faith which they received of the Apostles.  that they embrace the Christian faith which they affirm to have been preached to them first by saint Andrew th'apostle and broother to Simon Peter. Such doctrine also as under Constanstine the great, in the year. CCC.xviii. was concluded in the first general counsel holden in the city of Nicene in Bythinia, 
The counsel of Nicene.  and there determined by. CCC.xviii. bishops, and also such as hath been written and tawght by the Greek doctoures Basilius Magnus and Chrisostomus, 
Basilius Magnus.  
Chrisostomus  they believe to be so holy, firm and sincere, that they think it no more lawful one hear to transgress or go back from the same, then from the gospel of Christ. For their constancy and modesty is such, 
Their constancy in their religion.  that no man dare call those things into question which have once been decised by holy fathers in their general counsels. They do therefore with a more constant mind persever in their first faith which they received of saint Andrew th'apostle and his successors and holy fathers, that do many of us being divided into schisms and sects which thing never chanceth among them. 
The bishops define controversies in religion.  But if any difficulty chance to rise as touching the faith or custom of religion, all is referred to the archbishop and other bishops as to be defined by their spirit. 
Their bishops.  not permyttinge any judgement to the inconstant and ignorant people. Their archbishop is resident in the city of Mosca, where also Themperor keepethe his court. They have likewise divers other bishops: as one in Novigradia, where also Isodorus was bishop under pope Eugenius. They have an other in Roscivia, an other in Sus●ali, an other in Otileri: also in Smolne, in Resan, in Colmum, and in Uolut, all which have their diocese. They acknowleage their archbishop as the chief. 
The archbishop.  Before the patriarch of Constantinople was oppressed by the Tiranni of the Turks, 
The patriarch of Constantinople.  this archbishop recognized him as his superioure. In so much that this duke of moscovia and Emperor of Russia, not unmindful hereof but a diligent observer of his accustomed religion, doth at this day yearly send a certain stipend in manner of alms to the patriarch of Constantinople, 
A notable exemple of a Christian prince.  that he may with more quiet mind look for th'end of this his Egyptian servitude until it shall please almighty god to restore him to his former church and authority. For he judgeth it much impiety, if he should now forsake him whose predicessoures have ruled and governed so many churches, and of whom the faith and religion of so many regions and provinces have depended.  
But to speak briefly of their religion, 
Their religion.  they agree in many things with us, and in sum things follow the Greeks. They have monks and religious men. Not far from the city of Mosca, they have a great monastery in the which are three hundredth monks living under the rule of Basilius Magnus in the which is also the sepulchre of S. Sergius the abbot. 
A monastery of ccc monks  They observe their vow of chastity which none may break that have once professed. Yet such as have married virgins of good fame, may be admitted to thorder of priesthood, but may never be a monk. The priests and bishops which are admitted to orders unmarried, 
priests.  may never after be married: nor yet such as have wives, marry again when they are dead, but live in perpetual chastity. Such as commit adultery or fornication, are grievously punished by the bishops and deprived of the benefices. 
Mass.  They celebrate mass after the manner of the Greeks which differeth from ours in divers things, 
A mystery.  as in fermented bread after the manner of the Greeks. They put in the chalesse as much water as red wine, which water they use to heat, because (not without a great mystery) there isshewed forth of the side of hour lord, both blood and water, which we ought by good reason to think was not without heat: for else should it scarcely have been judged for a miracle. 
The primative church.  In fine, they affirm that all their customs and rites are according to thinstitutions of the primitive church and the doctrine of Basilius Magnus, and Chrisostomus. 
A strange custom.  In this thing they differ greatly from us, that they minister the communion to young children of three years of age, which they do with fermented bread dippeth in a spoonful of wine, and give it them for the body and blood of christ.   

¶ A brief description of moscovia after the later writers, as Sebastian Munster and jacobus Bastaldus.  
THe province of moscovia, is so named by the river Moscow which passeth by the metropolitan city of Moscovia called Mosca by the name of the river Moscow. This province was called of the owlde writers, Sarmatia Asiatica. 
Sarmatia asiatica.  The borderers or confines to the moscovians on the one side toward the East, are the Tartars called Nogai, and the Scianbanians, with the Zagatians. Toward the West, the provinces of Livonia and Lituania. Toward the South, the river of Tanais and the people confining with the river Uolga, called of the owld writers Rha. And toward the North, the Ocean sea called the Scythian sea, 
The Scythian Ocean.  and the region of Lapponia. Moscovia is in manner all plain and full of marishes, woods, and many very great rivers whereof the river of Uolga is the principal. 
The river or Uolga.  Sum cawl this Ledyl, as the owld authors named it Rha. It beginneth at the great lake called Lacus Albus (that is) the white lake and runneth into the sea of Bachau, 
Lacus albus.  named of the ancient writers, the sea Caspium or Hircanum. 
The Caspian sea.  Under the dominion of moscovia, are certain regions and dukedoomes: as Alba Russia (that is white Russia. Also Colmogora, Plesconia, Basrida, Novogardia, with also many places of the Tartars which are subject to the duke of Moscovia. The chief cities of moscovia, 
Their chief cities.  are Mosca, Plesconia, Novogardia, Colmogora, Otogeria, Uiatra, Smolenser, Percassavia, Cologna, Uolodemaria, Roslavia, and Cassam. The people of Moscovia are Christians, and have great abundance of honey and wax: also rich furs, as Sabels', Marterns, Foins, Calaber, and divers other. All the Tartars which inhabit toward the East beyond the river of Uolga, 
The wild T●rtars.  have no dwelling places, nor yet cities or castles. But carry about with them certain carts or wagens covered with beasts hides, under the which they rest, as we do in hour houses.  
They remove together in great companies which they call Hordas. 
hordas.  They are warlike people and good horsemen, and are all Macometistes.  
Sebastian Munster in his book of Universal cosmography, writeth that the city of Mosca or Moscovia containeth in circuit xiiii miles, 
The bygnes of the city of Moscovia.  and that it is twice as big as the city of Praga in Bohemia. Of the country of moscovia, beside other provinces subject to the same, he writeth thus. It extendeth in largeness four hundredth miles, and is rich in silver. 
Silver.  It is lawful for no man to go out of the realm or come in without the duke's letters. 
The region of Moscovia.  It is plain without mountains, and full of woods and marishes. The beasts there by reason of the could, 
Beasts.  are less than in other countries more southward. In the midst of the city of Mosca being situate in a plain, there is a castle with xvii towers and three bulwarks so strong and fair, 
A fair and strong castle in the city of Mo●ca.  that the like are scarcely seen in any other place. There are also in the castle xvi. churches, and three very large courts in the which the noble men of the court have their lodgings. The duke's palace is builded after the manner of the Italian building, 
The duke's palace.  and very fair, but not great. Their drink is meed & beer as is the manner of the most part of the people that inhabit the North parts of the world. 
Their drink  They are exceadyngely given to drunkenness. 
They are given to drunkenness.  Yet (as sum say) the princes of the land are prohibit in pain of death to abstain from such strong drinks as are of force to inebriate, except at certain times when licence is granted them, as twice or thrice in the year. They plough the ground with horses and ploughs of wood. Their corn and other grain by reason of long could, 
Corn and grain.  do seldom wax ripe on the ground by reason whereof they are sometimes enforced to ripe and dry them in their stoves and hot houses, 
Stoves.  and then grind them. They lack wine and oil. Moscovia is extended unto jurham and Corelia which are in Scythia. The famous river of Tanais, 
The famous river of Tanais.  the Moscovites call Don, having his springs and original in moscovia in the dukedom of Rezense. It riseth out of a ground that is plain, barren, muddy, full of marishes and woods. And where it proceedeth toward the East to the mountains of Scythia and Tartary, it bendeth to the south: and coming to the marishes of Meotis it falleth into them. 
The marishes of Meotis.  The river of Uolga (sometime called Rha, 
Uolga.  and now called of the Tartars Edel) runneth toward the north certain miles, to whom is joined the river Occa or Ocha, 
Ocha.  flowing out of moscovia, and then bending into the South and increa●ed with many other rivers, falleth into the sea Euxinum, 
The sea Euxinum.  which divideth Europe and Asia.  
The wood or forest called Hyrcania sylua, occupie●h a small portion o● Moscovia. Yet is it somewhere inhabited, 
The forest of hyrcania.  and by the long labour of men made thinner and barer of trees. In that part that lieth toward Prussia, is a kind of great and fierce bulls called Uri or Bisontes, 
Uri.  as writeth Paulus iovius. There are also Alces much like unto har●es, 
Alces.  with long snouts of flesh and long legs without any bowing of their houx or pasterns. These beasts, the Moscovites call Lozzi, and the Almains Helenes. The iornaye that is between Ulna of Lituania by Smolense to Mosca, is travailed in winter on sleds by the snow congealed by long frost, 
They travail in winter on sleds.  and made very slypperye and compact like Ice by reason of much wearing and treading, by means whereof this viage is performed with incredible celerity. But in the summer, the plain countries can not be overcome with out difficult labour. For when the snow beginneth to be dissolved by continual heat, 
Causeys' of timber.  it causeth marishes and quamyres inextricable and dangerous both for horse and man, were it not for certain causeyes made of timber with in manner infinite labour. 
Trees and fruits.  The region of Moscovia (as I have said) beareth neither wines nor olive trees, nor yet any other trees that bear any apples or fruits of very pleasant or sw●te savour or taste except cherry trees, for as much as all ●ender fruits & trees are burnt of the could blasts of the North wind.  
Yet do the fields bear all kinds of corn, as wheat and the grain called Siligo, 
Corn and grain.  whereof the finest kind of bread is made: also mill and panyke, which the Italians call Melica: Likewise all kinds of pulse, as beans, peason, tars, and such other. 
honey in woods and trees.  But their chief harvest consisteth of honey and wax, forasmuch as the hole region is replenished with fruitful bees which make most sweet honey, not in the husband men's hives, but even in hollow trees. And hereby cometh it to pass that both in the woods and shalowed lawns, are seen many swarms of bees hanging on the bows of trees, so that it shall not be necessary to call them together or charm them with the sound of basins. There are oftentimes found great masses of honey combs, conserved in trees of the owlde honey forsaken of bees, forasmuch as the husband men can not seek every tree in so great and large woods: In so much that in the stocks or bodies of exceeding great and hollow trees, are sometimes found great pools or lakes of honey. Demetrius' th'ambassador of the duke of Moscovia whom he sent to the bishop of Rome not many years sense, 
Lakes or pools of honey.  made relation that a husband man of the country not far from the place where he remained, seeking in the woods for honey, descended into a great hollow tree full of honey into the which he slipped up to the breast, 
A man almost drowned in honey.  and lived there only with honey for the space of two days, cauling in vain for help in that desert of woods. And that in fine despairing of help, he escaped by a marvelous chance, 
A marvelous chance.  being drawn out by a great bear that descended into the tree, with her loins downward after the manner of men. For when the man (as present necessity and opportunity served) perceived the bear to be within his reach, he suddenly clasped her about the loins with his arms, and with a terrible cry provoked the beast to enforce her strength to leap out of the tree, and therewith to draw him out, as it chanced in deed.  
These regions abound with bears which everywhere seek both honey and bees, 
Bears feed of honey and bees.  not only herewith to fill their bellies, but also to help their sight. For their eyes are oftentimes dulled, and their mouths wounded of the bees: both which griefs are eased by eating of honey. They have weakest heads, as lions have strongest. In so much that when (being thereto enforced) they cast themselves down headelonge from any rocks, they cover their heads with their fiete, and lie for a time astoonysshed and half dead with knocks. They walk sometime on two fiete, and spoil trees backward. sometime also they invade bulls, 
Bears invade bulls.  & so hang on them with all their fiete, that they weary them with weight. The bear (as saith Pliny) bringeth forth her birth the xxx day and oftentimes two. 
The ●eares birth.  Their birth is a certain white mass of flesh without form and little bigger than a mouse without eyes, and without hear, with only the nails or claws coming forth. But the dam with continual lycking, by little and little figurethe the inform birth. When she entereth into the den which she hath chosen, she creepeth thither with her belly upward less the place should be found by the steps of her fiete. 
The bears den.  And being there delivered of her birth, remaineth in the same place for the space of xiiii days immovable as writeth Aristoteles. They live without meat forty days, and for that time sustain themselves only by licking and sucking their right foot. 
Bears live without meat xl days.  At the length chancing to find meat, they fill themselves so full, that they remedy that surfecte by vomit which they provoke by eating of ants. Their birth is oppressed with so heavy a sleep for the space of xiiii days, that it can not be raised either with pricking or wounds, 
The sleep of bears.  and in the mean time grow exceeding fat. After xiiii days they wake from sleep, and begin to lick and suck the soles of their fore fiete and live thereby for a space: Nor yet is it apparent that they live by any other meat until the spring time of the year. At which time beginning to run abroad, they feed of the tender buds and young sprigs or branches of trees, and other herbs correspondent to their lips.  
Before five hundredth years, the Moscovites honoured the gods of the gentiles: 
The religion of the Moscovites.  And then first received the Christian faith when the bishops of Grecia began to descent from the church of the Latins: and therefore received the rites of the Greeks. They minister the sacrament with fermented bread under both kinds: And think that the souls of dead men are not helped with the suffragies of priests, nor yet by the devotion of their friends or kinsfolks: Also that the place of Purgatory is a fable. In the time of the divine service, the history of the miracles of Christ and the epistles of saint Paul are rehearsed out of the pulpit. Beyond Moscovia, are many people which they call Scythians, and are partly subject to the Prince of Moscovia. 
The Scythians subject to the duke of Moscovia.  These are they which duke ivan subdued, as are the people of Perm, Baskird, Czriremissa, juhra, Corela, and Permska. These people were idolaters before the duke compelled them to baptism, and appointed a bishop over them named Steven, whom the Barbarians after the departure of the duke, fleyde alive and slew. But the duke returning shortly after, afflicted them sore and assigned them a new bishop.  
It is here also to be noted that the owlde Cosmographers feigned that in these regions toward the north pole, there should be certain great mountains which they called Ripheos & Hyperboreos, which nevertheless are not found in nature. It is also a fable that the rivers of Tanais and Uolham do spring out of high mountains, 
It was then an opinion that all rivers sprung out of montaines  whereas it is apparent that both these rivers and many other, have their original in the plains.  
next to Moscovia, is the fruitful region of Colmogora through the which runneth the river of Dividna being the greatest that is known in the north parts of the world. 
The fruitful region of Colmogora.  
The great river Dividna.  This river increaseth at certain times of the year as doth the river of Nilus in egypt, overfloweth the fields round about, and with abundance of fat moisture, resisteth the couldenesse of the air. Wheat sown in the ground, groweth abundantly without ploughing: 
wheat without ploughing  and fearing the new injury of the proud river, springeth, groweth, and ripeth with wonderful celerity of hasting nature.  
Into the river of Dividna runnethe the river of juga: 
The river of juga.  And in the very angle or corner where they meet, is a famous mart town named Ustiuga, 
Ustiuga.  being a hundredth and fifty miles distant from the chief city of Mosca. To this mart town from the higher countries, are sent the precious furs of marterns, 
Furrea.  sables, wolves and such other which are exchanged for divers other kinds of wares and merchandise. Hitherto Munsterus.  

The natural cau●e of much honey in could regions▪ Gums and spices in hot countries.  And forasmuch as many do marvel that such plenty of honey should be in so cool a country, I have thought good to declare the reason and natural cause hereof. It is therefore to be considered that like as spices, gums, & odoriferous fruits are engendered in hot regions by continual heat during all the hole year without impression of the mortifying quality of could whereby all things are constrained as they are dilated by heat, 
Flowers in could regions  even so in could & moist regions (whose moisture is thinner & more waterysshe than in hot regions) are dowres engendered more abundantly as caused by impression of less and faynter heat working in thin matter of waterysshe moisture less concoct than the matter of gums and spices and other unctuous fruits and trees growing in hot regions. For although (as Munster saith here before) the region of Moscovia beareth neither vines or olives, or any other fruits of sweet savour by reason of the couldenesse thereof, nevertheless forasmuch as flowers (whereof honey is chiefly gathered) may in summer season grow abundantly in the plains, 
Flowers of trees.  marishes, and woods, not only on the ground but also on trees in could regions, it is agreeable to good reason that great plenty of honey should be in such regions as abound with flowers, which are brought forth with the first degree of heat and first approach of the son, as appeareth in the spring time not only by the springing of flowers in fields and gardens, but also of blossoms of trees springing before the leaves or fruit, 
Blossoomes of trees.  as the lighter and th'inner matter first drawn out with the lowest and least degree of heat, 
An exemple of the degrees of heat.  as the like is seen in the art of stilling whereby all thin and light moistures are lifted up by the first degree of the fire: and the heaviest and thickest moistures are drawn out with more vehement fire. As we may therefore in this case compare the generation of flowers to the heat of May, 
The generation of flowers by moderate heat.  the generation of gums to the heat of june and spices to the heat of july. Even so in such could regions whose summer agreeth rather with the temperate heat and moisture of May then with thextreme heat of the other months, that heat is more apt to bring forth abundance of flowers as things caused by moderate heat, as plainly appeareth by their taste and savour in which is no sharp quality of heat either biting the tongue or offending the head as is in spices, gums, and fruits of hot regions. And as in could and plain regions, moderate heat with abundance of moisture, are causes of the generation of flowers (as I have said) so likewise the length of the days and shortness and warmness of the nights in summer season in such could reg●ons, 
Long days and short nights.  is a great help hereunto. Cardanus writeth in his book De Plantis, that bramble & fern grow not but in could regions, 
Bramble and fern.  as doth wheat in temperate regions. And that spices and hot seeds, 
Spices.  can not grow in could regions, forasmuch as being of thin substance, they should soon be mortified & extinct by excessive could. For (as he saith) nothing can concoct, ripe, and attenuate the substance of fruits with out the help of air agreeable to the natures of such things as are brought forth in the same, although it may do this in roots. But in manner all flowers are of sweet savour, 
The savour o● flowers.  forasmuch as the moisture that is in them, being thin and but little, is by mean heat soon and easily concoct or made ripe. Such also as are soon ripe, are soon rotten according to the proverb.  
Pliny, although in the xi book of his natural history. Cap. viii. he writeth that honey is gathered of the flowers of all trees and sets or plants, 
what pliny writeth of honey.  except sorrel and the herb called Chenopode (which sum call goose foot) yet he affirmeth that it descendeth from the air: for in the xii chapyture of the same book, he writeth thus.  
Thus coommeth from the air at the rising of certain stars, and especially at the rising of Sirius, 
Serius is otherwise called Canicula, this is the dog, of whom the canicular days have their name.  and not before the rising of Vergiliae (which are the seven stars called Pleiades) in the spring of the day. For then at the morning spring, the leaves of trees are found moist with a fat dew: In so much that such as have bin abroad under the firmament at that time, have their apparel anointed with lyquoure and the hear of their head clammy. And whether this be the sweat of heaven, 
what is honey  or as it were a certain spettyl of the star●es, either the juice of the air purging itself, I would it were pure, 
how honey is corrupted.  liquid, and simple of his own nature as it first falleth from above. ●ut now descending so far, and infected not only with such unclean vapours and exhalations, as it meeteth with by the way, but afterward also corrupted by the leaves of trees, herbs, and flowers of sundry tastes and qualities, and likewise aswell in stomachs of the bees (for they vomit it at their mouths) as also by long reserving the same in hives, it nevertheless retaineth a great part of the heavenly nature. etc. again in the xiiii chapiture of the same book, he writeth that in certain regions toward the north, 
honey of great quantity in North regions  as in sum places of Germany, honey is found in such quantity that there have bin seen honey combs of eight foot long, and black in the hollow part. By the which words of Pliny, and by the principles of natural philosophy, it doth appear that abundance of honey should chiefly be engendered in such regions where the heat of summer is temperate and continual aswell by night as by day as it is not in hot regions where the nights be long and could as is declared in the Decades. 
hot nights in could regions.  For like as such things as are fyned by continual heat, moving, and circulation, 
A similitude.  are hindered by refrigeration or could (as appeareth in the art of stilling and hatching of eggs) even so by the action of temperate and continual heat without interposition of contrary and mortifying quality, crude things are in short time made ripe, sour made sweet, thick made thin, heavy made light, gross made subtile, hard made soft, dead made living, and in fine bodies made spirits, 
Natural heat doth subtile and digest all things.  as manifestly appeareth in the marvelous work of digestion of living beasts, whereby the finest part of their nurisshement is turned into blood, and the finest of that blood converted into spirits, as the like is also seen in the nurysshement of trees, plants, and herbs, and all other things that grow on the ground, all which are moved, digested, subtiliate, attenuate, riped, and made sweet by the action of this continual heat whereof I have spoken. To conclude therefore, if honey be either the sweet of the stars, or the juice of the air purging itself (as pliny writeth) or other wise engendered of subtile and fine vapours rising from the earth, and concoct or digested in the air by the said continual and moderate heat, 
gentle vapours digested by heat  it may seem by good reason that the same s●ulde be engendered in soommer season more abundantly in could regions then in hot, for the causes aforesaid. And that it may by authority and reason more manifestly appear both that the heat of summer in could regions is continual (as I have said) and also that the could in winter is not there so intolerable to thinhabitants of those regions as other do think, 
Can regions  I have thought good for the better declaration hereof to add hereunto what I have gathered out of the book of Ziglerus written of the north regions. 
Ziglerus.    

¶ Of the North regions and of the moderate and continual heat in could regions aswell in the night as in the day in soommer season: Also how those regions are habitable to thinhabitants of the same, contrary to th'opinion of the owlde writers.  
OF this matter, Ziglerus in his book of the north regions in the description of Scondia writeth as followeth. 
Ziglerus.   
We will entreat of this matter, not as putting the same in question as did the owld writers, nor gathering judgement deducted of reasons in way of argument, forasmuch as we are already more certain by history that these could regions are inhabited. We will first therefore show by natural reason and by consideration of the sphere, declare how by the help of man and art, could regions are inhabited without damage or destruction of living beasts: And will first speak of the quality of summer, 
The quality of summer in could regions.  declaring how it is there augmented Yet intend I not to comprehend all that may be said in this matter, but only rehearse such reasons and similitudes as are most apparent and easy to be understood.  
In such regions therefore, as are extended from the burnt line or Equinoctial toward the north, as much as the son riseth higher over them, 
The course of the son.  so much are they the more burnt with heat, as Africa, because it riseth highest over them as they are nearest to the Equinoctial: and tarrying with them so much the shorter time causeth shorter days, with longer & colder nights to restore the damage of the day passed by reason of the moisture consumed by vapour. 
Uapours.  But in such regions over the which the son riseth lower (as in Sarmatia) it remaineth there the longer in the day, and causeth so much the shorter and warmer nights, 
Short and Warm nights.  as retaining warm vapours of the day past, which vapours help the work of the day. I speak as I have found by experience, saith Upsaliensis. For I have felt the summer nights scarcely tolerable for heat in Gothlande, 
Gothlande  whereas I felt them could in Rome.  
This benefit of th'increase of the day, doth augment so much the more in could regions as they are nearer the poles: and ceaceth not until it come directly over the centre or point of the ears or axceltree of the world, where the son being at the highest in summer, 
One day of vi months.  is elevate about xxiiii degrees: In which regions, one continual day consisteth of vi months from the spring time by the standing of the son (called Solstitium) in the sign of Cancer to Autumn. The son therefore, without any offence of the night, giveth his influence upon those lands with heat that never ceasethe during that time, which maketh to the great increase of summer by reason of continuance. 
how the summer is increased in could regions.  We have now therefore thought good to gather by a certain conjecture how greatly we think the summer to be increased hereby.  
We have before declared how high the son is elevate over the regions that are under the poles at the stay of the son: And so many parts is it elevate in Rome at the stay of the son in winter (that is) at the shortest day in the year. 
Rome.  But here, in the mid winter, the son at noon tide is beneficial, and bringeth forth flowers, roses, and ielefloures. I have gathered sum in winter in the month of December, not procured at home by human art, but growing ●n open gardenes in manner in every bed under the bare heaven, browght forth only by the son. But this benignity of the son, 
Can nights in hot regions.  continueth not past five hours in the natural day, forasmuch as thoperation thereof is extinct by the couldenesse of the night following. But if this benefit might be received without hindrance of the night, as it is under the poles, and so continue many months in hot regions unto winter, it should surely bring forth many wonderful things, if moisture failed not. And by this condition thus propounded, we may well conceive that the Roman winter, 
The Roman● winter.  although it be not hot, yet to be equal in heat to the full spring time in the same city during the time of the said five hours. And thus by a similitude of the height of the son under both places, and of the known quality of the Roman heaven, and by thaccess of the son to such places where the longest day continueth certain months, we may gather that summer in places under the pole, is like unto and equal with the full Roman spring.  
But the more difficult question, is of the time of the vi moons in the which the son leaveth those regions, 
One night of vi. months  and goth by the contrary or overthwart circle toward the south in winter. 
Objections.  For they say that at that time, those regions are deformed with horrible darkness and nights not increased, which may be the cause that beasts can not seek their food. And that also the could should then be intolerable: by which double evils all things constrained should die, so that no beast were able to abide th'injuries of winter and famen insuinge thereof: but that all beasts should perish before the summer following, when they should bring forth their brood or succession: And that for these causes, the said could climb should be perpetually desolate and unhabitable. To all which objections, we answer in this manner  
As touching the nights not increased, I say, that it was not convenient to assume that for any reason. For not as the son falleth, so suddenly cometh the dark night but that the evening doth substitute and prolong the day long after, 
The twylyghtes.  as also the day spring or dawning of the day giveth a certain light before the rising of the son: After the which, the residue of the night that receiveth no light by the said evening and morning twilightes, is accomplished by the light of the moon, 
The light of the moan.  so that the nights are seldom unaugmented. Let this be an exemple proved by hour temperate regions, whereby we may understand the condition of the night under the pole. 
●he might under the pole.  Therefore even there also the twilightes help the night a long time, as we will more presently demonstrate. It is approved by the Astronomers, that the son descending from the highest half sphere by xviii. parallels of the under horizon, maketh an end of the twilight, 
A demonstration.  so that at the length the dark night succeedeth: And that the son approaching, and rising above the highest half sphere by as many parallels, doth diminish the night and increase the twilight. again, by the position or placeinge of the sphere under the pole, the same is the horizontal that is the Equinoctial. Those paralelles therefore that are parallels to the horizontal line, are also parallels to the Equinoctial. So that the son descending there under the horizon, doth not bring dark nights to those regions until it come to the paralele distant xviii parts from the Equinoctial.  
Other demonstrations hereof are made by certain figures of Astronomy, which I would have added hereunto but that I could not get the same graven or cut.  
During the time of these said six moons of darkness under the pole, the night is destitute of the benefit of the son and the said twylyghtes, only for the space of three moons, in the which the son goeth and returneth by the portion of the overthwart circle. But yet neither this time of three moons is without remedy from heaven. For the moon with her full globe increased in light, 
The Moon.  hath access at that time, and illuminateth the moonethes' lacking light, every one by themselves, half the course of the moonethe: by whose benefit it coommeth to pass that the night, named as unaugmented, possesseth those regions no longer than one month and a half, neither that continually or all at one time: but this also divided into three sorts of shorter nights, of the which every one endureth for the space of two weeks, and are illuminate of the moon accordingly. And this is the reason conceived of the power of the sphere whereby we testify that the summers and nights under the pole, are tolerable to living beasts.  
But we will now declare by other remedies of nature and art, 
Remedies of nature & art.  that this could so greatly feared, is more remiss & tolerable then hour opinion: so that compared to the nature of such beasts as live there, it may be abidden. And there is no doubt but there are authors of more antiquity than that age in the which any thing was exactly known or discovered of the north regions. The owlde writers therefore persuaded only by naked conjecture, did gather what they might determine of those places: Or rather by the estimation of heaven, the which, because they felt it to be hardly tolerable to themselves, and less to men borne in the clime of egypt and Grecia, took thereby an argument of the hole habitable earth. The history of Strabo is known, that a pot of brass which was broken in sunder with frozen water, 
A brazen pot broken with frost.  was brought from Pontus and showed in Delphis in token of a grievous winter. Here therefore, they that so greatly feared the winter (such as chanceth to the earth under the xlviii. paralele) and therefore consecrated that broken pot to the temple of Apollo, what could such men truly define upon regions so far without that parallel, whether they were inhabited or not? But such as followed these, being contented with thinventions of the owlde authors, and borne in manner under the same quality of heaven, persisted willingly in the same opinion, with more confidence than consideration of the things whereof we now entreat: so lightly was that opinion received as touching the unhabitable clime under the poles. But we with better confidence and faith (forasmuch as we are not instructed with conjectures) intent to stand against the sentence of the owld authors: Affirming the north regions within the could climb to be inhabited with herrings, 
fishes of the North seas.  cods, haddocks, and brettes, tunnyes, and other great fishes, with thinfinite number whereof, tables are furnished through a great part of Europe: All which are taken in the north sea extended beyond our knoweleage. 
The North sea.  This sea at certain times of the year, poureth forth his plentifulness, or rather driveth forth his increase to seek new mansions, and are here taken in their passage. Furthermore also, even the mouths of the river of Tiber receive a fish as a new gest sent from the north sea. This swam twice through France and twice through Spain: Overpassed the Ligurian and Tuscan sea to communicate herself to the city of Rome. The lakes also and rivers of those regions are replenished with fish: In so much that no power of could is able to extinguy●she th'increase of the year following, and the succession reparable so many hundredth years. And I plainly think, that if it should of necessity follow, that one of these two elements, 
The quality of water.  the earth and the water, shuld● be destructive to living creatures, the water should chiefly have wrought this effect. But this is found so tractable, that in the deep winter, both that increase is brought forth, and fishing is also exercised. The land is likewise inhabited with like plentifulness. 
The land  But that we wander not to far: Let the faith hereof rest in th'exposition following, wherein we intent to declare how by the power of nature and industry of man, this commodity may come to pass. Therefore as touching nature, we suppose that the divine providence hath made nothing uncommunicable, 
The divine providence in moderating the elements  but to have given such order to all things whereby every thing may be tolerable to the next. The extremities of the elements consent with their next. The air is gross about the earth and water: But thin and botte about the fire. By this providence of nature, the uttermost sea is very salt. 
The nature of the sea.  And salt (as witnesseth Pliny) yieldeth the farnesse of oil. But oil, by a certain native heat, is of property agreeable to fire. The sea then, being all of such quality, 
Salt.  poureth forth itself far upon th'extreme lands, whereby by reason of the saltenesse thereof, it moveth and steereth up generative heat, 
Generative heat.  as by fatness it nourisheth the fecundity of things generate. It giveth this frutfulnes to the earth at certain floods, although the earth also itself, have in his inner bowels the same lively and nourishing heat, whereby not only the dens, caves and hollow places, 
Owtwarde could is cause of inward heat.  but also springs of water are made warm: And this so much the more, in how much the winter is more vehement. This thing doth more appear by this exemple, that the mountains of Norway and Suethlande are fruitful of metals, in the which, silver and copper are concoct and molten into veins, which can scarcely be done in furnaces. By this reason also, the vapours and hot exhalations perceinge the earth and the waters, 
Uapours and exhalations.  and through both those nature's breathing forth into the air, tempereth the quality of heaven and maketh it tolerable to beasts, as witnesseth the huge bigness of the whales in those seas, 
whales.  with the strength of body and long life of such beasts as live on the land: 
Beasts.  which thing could not be, except all things were there commodiously nurysshed by the benefit of the heaven and the air. For nothing that in the time of increase is hindered by any injury, or that is evil fed all the time it liveth, can prosper well. 
hereby may be considered the cause of the death of our men that sail directly to Guinea.  Neither are such things as live there, offended with their natural winter as although an Egyptian or Ethiopian were suddenly conveyed into those could regions. For they were in long time by little and little browght first acquainted with the nature of that heaven, as may be proved both by the life of man and by the history of holy scripture. They that were led from Mesopotania, and that famous tower of Babylon toward the north parts of the world in the first dispertion of nations, did not immediately pass to th'extreme bounds, 
No passage from one extremity to another but by a mean.  but planted their habitations first under a middle heaven between both, as in Thracia and Pontus, where their posterity was accustomed the better to sustain the rigour of Scythia and Lanais, as he 〈◊〉 at cometh from winter to summer, may the better after abide Ice and snow being first hardened thereto by the frosts of Autumn. In like manner mortal men, accustomed to bear the hardness of places next unto them, were thereby at the length more confirmed to sustain the extremes. And here also, if any sharpness remain that may seem intolerable, nature hath provided for the same with other remedies. For the land and sea, hath given unto beasts, deep and large caves, dens, 
Caves and dens.  and other hollow places and secret corners in mountains and rocks both on the land and by the sea banks, in the which are ever contained warm vapours so much the more intent and vehement, in how much they are the more constrained by extreme could Nature hath also given valleys diverted and defended from the north winds. 
Ualleys.  She hath likewise covered beasts with hear so much the thicker in how much the vehemency of could is greater: by reason whereof the best and richest furs are browght from those regions, 
The best furs.  as Sables whose price is grown to great excess next unto gold and precious stones, 
Sables.  and are esteemed princely ornaments. The beasts that bear these furs, are hunted chiefly in winter (wh●ch thing is more strange) because their hear is then thicker and cleaveth faster to the skin. How grievous then shall we think the winter to be there where this little beast liveth so well, and where the hunters may search the dens and haunts of such beasts through the woods and snow? 
Beasts that lie hid in winter.  But such beasts the condition of whose bodies is so tender that they are not able to abide thinjury of could, either lie hid in winter, or change their habitation, as do certain beasts also in hour climb. Nature hath furthermore given remedy to man both by art and industry to defend himself both a broad and at home. Abroad, with a thick vesture, and the same well dowbeled. At home, with large fierce on harthes', chymyneys, and in stoves for the day, with close chambers, and couches, soft and warm beds for the night: by which remedies they mirigate the winters which seem rigorous to strangers, 
All beasts have the nature of the place where they are engendere●  although they are to thinhabitants more tolerable than hour opinion, as in deed by the first natural mixture or composition of their bodies, such things are agreeable to them as seem very hard to other. The lion in Africa and the bear in Sarmatia, are fierce as in their present strength and vigor: but translated into a contrary heaven, are of less strength and courage. The foul called Ciconia (which sum think to be the stork) doth not tarry the winter: yet do the crane's coomme at that tyme. The Scythian will accuse the Roman heaven as induccinge fevers, whereas nevertheless there is none more holsoome. 
what exercise may do.  Such as have been tenderly browght up, if they come suddenly in to the camp, can not away with hunger, watching, heat, passages through rivers, battles, sieges, and assaults. But the owld soldier exercised in the wars, useth these as meditations of the field, as hardened thereto by long experience. He that hath been accustomed to the shadow of the city, and will attempt the saying of the poet Virgil, Nudus ara, sear nudus, that is, naked and bare without house & home, shall to his peril make an end of the verse, 
Use maketh masteries.  H●bebis frigora febrem (that is) he shall have the could ague. Such things therefore as seem hard unto us, being accustomed by little and little, become more tolerable: In so much that this exercise of sufferance by such degrees, doth oftentimes grow to prodigious effects fact beyond hour expectation. And thus we seem to have made sufficient demonstration, by heaven, nature, and art, whereby it may appear that no part of the land or sea is denied to living creatures. The reader may also perceive how large matter of reasons and exemples may be opened for the declaring of hour opinion wherein we rest. Let therefore th'authority of the ancient authors give place, and the consent of the new writers agree to this history, not as now at the length comprehended (whereas before many hundredth years Germany and Scondia had intercourse of, 
Scondia.  marchaund●es not severed by the large gulf of Bothia▪ but as now by our commentaries brought to light. And hau●ng said has much in manner of a preface, we w●ll now proceed to write of the north regions.  

¶ Schondia.  
SChondia, S●hondama, or Schondenmarchia, is as much to say as fair Dania or fair Denmark. 
Scone. is fair in the dutch tongue.  Pliny in one place, nameth it Scandia, and in an other, Scandinaui● if there be no fauce in the templars.  
It was named Schondia, by reason of the fairness and true fullness thereof. And this aswell for that in beneficial heaven, fertility of gronnde, 
The fertility of ●condia.  commodity of havens and mart towns, abundance of rivers and fish, plenty of beasts, great quantity of metal, as gold, silver, copper, and lead, diligent culturing the ground, with towns and cities well inhabited and governed by civil laws, it giveth place to none other fortunate region. This was in manner unknown to the old Greeks and Latins as may appear by this argoment that with one consent they affirmed that in these north regions the could zon● or clime, was condemned to perpetual snow intolerable to all living creatures. For few of them have made mention hereof as to be inhabited. Among whom Pliny as one of the chief, saith in his fourth book, that Schondania is of unknown bigness: and only that portion thereof to be known which is inhabited with the nation of the Hilleui●nes in fifty villages. Neither yet is Eningia less in opinion. 
he meaneth Diodorus Siculus.  Other more ancient than Pliny, have placed most fortunate regions, with men of long life (which the Greeks call Macrobios) and of most innocent behaviour under the tract of those lands: and that there came from thence to Delphos, certain religious virginnes with vows and gifts consecrated to Apollo: And furthermore that that nation observed this institution until the said virgins were violated of them of whom they were received as strangers. These are most clear testimonies of Antiquity, both of the greatness of Schondia, and the people that inhabit the same, unless they were sense unknown, as likewise the Goths departing from these north lands although they obtained Thempire of the regions about the marshes of Meotis and the coasts of the sea Euxinus, 
●hinuasions of the Goths  with the realm of Denmark (whereof that is thought to be a portion which is now called Transiluania) and the banks of the river of Danubius, 
●ransiluania  and in fine invaded the Roman Empire, yet were not the regions well known from whence they took their original. Therefore like as part of the owlde writers are unsufficient witnesses to testify of hour narrations as touching these lands unknown to them, Even so the other part which excluded the same as unhabitable, are to be convinced least their authority being admitted, should engender opinions not agreeable or convenient to the nature of places. Sigismundus Liberus, in his commentaries of moscovia, writeth thus. Scandia or Scondia, is no Island (as sum have thought) but part of the continente or firm land of Suetia, which by a long tract reacheth to Gothlande: And that now the king of Denmark possesseth a great part thereof. But whereas the writers of these things have made Scondia greater than Suetia, & that the Goths and Lombard's came from thence, 
The Goths and Lombard's.  they seem in my opinion to comprehend these three kingdoms as it were in one body, only under the name of Scondia, forasmuch as then, that part of land that lieth between the sea Balthrum (which floweth by the coasts of Finlandia) and the frozen sea, was unknown: And that by reason of so many marshes, innumerable rivers, and intemperateness of heaven, it is yet rude uncultured, and little known. Which thing hath been the cause that sum judged all that was called by the name of Scondia, to be one great Island.   

¶ Gronlande.  
GRonlande is interpreted green land: so called for the great increase and fruitfulness of pasture. 
Fruitful pasture.  By reason whereof, what great plenty of cattle there is, it may hereby appear that at such time as ships may pass thither they set forth great heaps of cheese and butter to be sold, whereby we conjecture that the land is not rough with barren mountains. It hath two Cathedral Churches under thordina●ion of Nidrosia. To one of these, was of late years a bishop appointed only by the title of a suffragan in consideration that while the metropolitan doth neglect the direction of religion for the distance of the place and difficult navigation, the people is in manner fallen to gentility, 
Religion neglected.  being of themself of movable wits and given to magical arts. For it is said that they (as also the people of Laponia) do raise tempests on the sea with magical enchantments, 
Enchanters  and bring such ships into danger as they int●●de to spoil. They use little ships made of leather, and safe against the bruising of the sea and rocks, and with them assail other ships. Peter Martyr of Angletia, writeth in his Decades of the Spanisshe navigations, that Sebastian Cabote sailing from England continually toward the north, 
The viage of Sebastian Cabote to the frozen sea  followed that course so far that he chanced upon great flakes of Ice in the month of july: and that diverting from thence, he followed the coast by the shore bending toward the South until he came to the clime of the Island of Hispaniola above Cuba, an Island of the Canibales. Which narration hath given me occasion to extend Gronlande beyond the promontory or cape of Huitsarch to the continente or firm land of Lapponia above the castle of Wardhus: 
Gronlande.  
wardhus.  which thing I did the rather for that the reverend archbishop of Nidrosia, constantly affirmed that the sea bendethe there into the form of a crooked elbow. It agreeth herewith also, that the Lapones consent with them in the like magical practices and do neither embrace the Christian religion nor refuse it: whereby I have thowght this likeness of customs to be between them because they join together in one continent. 
Lapponia & Gronlande.  The distance likewise, seemeth not to disagree. For between both these people, 
Schoeni.  the distance is not full two hundredth Sch●ni, every one being a space of ground containing lx furlongs, which make vii miles and a half. It furthermore agreeth with this conjecture that Cabote chanced into such Ise. And albeit as touching the month of july, 
Cabote told me that this Ice is of fresh water, and not of the sea.  I will contend it is not well rehearsed, no although he had sailed under the pole, for such reasons as we have declared before to the contrary, nevertheless, that at sum time he sailed by Ice, this testifieth in that he sailed not by the main sea, but in places near unto the land comprehending and embracing the sea in form of a gulf, 
A commixtion of salt water and fresh.  whereas for the same cause, the gulf of Gothland is frozen because it is straight & narrow, in the which also the little quantity of salt water is overcome by the abundance of fresh water of many and great rivers that fall into the gulf. But between Norway and Island, 
The sea between Norway and Island.  the sea is not frozen for the contrary cause, forasmuch as the pour of fresh water is there overcome of thabundance of the salt water. There is a fame (but of uncertain authority) that the spaniards sail at this present to Gronlande, and to an other land which they call Terra viridis, 
Terra Viridis.  that is, the green land, bringing from thence such wares as are found in Gronlande. Toward the north, it reacheth to the unknown land under the pole, from whence also the thieves and robbers of th● Pigmei come into this land. 
Pigmy.  Which is an argument that the regions under the pole are inhabited and almost environed with the sea, as are they which the Cosmographers call Chersonnesi or Peninsula (that is) almost Islands.  

☞ The description of Gronlande. ¶ The description of the East side which lieth toward Norway.  Wardhus castle. 54.  70. 50. Toward the North. 53. 30. 71. 30. The first extension. 40.  71. 40. The second extension. 28.  72.  Huitsarch. promont. 22.  67.  The extension. 5.  61. 45.  
It is continued from thence by the coasts of the land of Baccalaos. 
Baccalaos.  356. 60.  
Toward the west and north, it is termined with an unknown end of lands and seas.   

Island.  
Island is interpreted the land of Ice, and is called of the owlde writers Toil. 
Island called Thyle.  It is extended between the south and the north almost two hundredth schoenes in longitude. 
Schoeni is lx. furlongs.  It is for the most part full of mountains and uncultured. But in the plains it hath such fruitful pastures, that they are fain sometimes to drive the beasts from th●ir feeding lest they should be suffocate with to much fa●nes. 
Miracles of nature in Island.  This Island is famous by the strange miracles of nature, of the which Saxo Grammaticus in his history of Denmark, and Olanus Gothus in his description of the n●r●h lands, do make mention. There are in it three mountains of marvelous height the tops where of are covered with perpetual snow. 
Three marvelous mountains.  But the nether parts of them, are of like nature to the mountain Aetna in the Island of Sicily boiling with continual flames of fire and casting forth brimstone. One of these is named Helga, 
helgate.  and the other Mons Cruci● (that le) the mount of the cross. The third is named Hecla: 
hecla.  whose flames neither consume flare or row, matters most apt to take sire, nor yet are quenched with water. And with like force as the shot of great artillery is driven forth by violence of fire, even so by the commixtion and repugnance of fire, could, and brymstome, great stones are here thrown into the air. near unto these mostraynes are three chynkes or open places in the earth of huge bigness and such depth (especially at the mount Hecla) that no sight can attain thereto. 
Strange vilions.  But to such as look into them, there first appear men as although they were drowned and yet breathing forth their souls: who being exhorted by their friends to resort to their own, they answer with mourning voice and grievous sighs, that they must depart from thence to the mount Hecla, and therewith suddenly vanish out of sight. Isee floweth about the Island for the space of seven or eight moons, 
Ise.  making by running together a certain miserable wailing and groaning noise not unlike the voice of man. 
Purgatory.  Th'inhabitants think, that in this Ice & the mount Hecla, 
A strange thing.  are the places where the evil souls of their people are tormented. If any man take a great portion of this Ice, and keep it as diligently as may be in a close vessel or coffer, the same doth so vanish at the time when the other Isee about the Island dissolveth, that not so much as one drop of water or Ice can thereof be found.  
Not far from these mountains reaching toward the sea coasts, are four springs of water of most divers and contrary nature. 
Four springs of contrary nature.  The first, by reason of his perpetual and fervent heat, suddenly turneth all bodies that are cast therein, into stones, reserving nevertheless their first form and shape. The second, is of intolerable couldenesse. The third is sweeter than honey, and most pleasant to quench thirst. The fourth is plain poison, pestilent, and deadly. There is furthermore in these springs such abundance of brimstone, 
Abundance of brimstone.  that a thousand pound weight thereof is bought for little, as for the tenth part of a ducat. Their chief wares, are dried fish, 
Dried fish  as soles, maidens, playces, salpas stockefysshes, and such other which they exchange for wheat and such other things as are browght thither from Lubeck Hamborowe, and Amsterdam. For they have oftentimes such scarceness of corn, 
scarceness of corn.  that they use dried fish in the stead of bread, although in summer the Island so flourisheth with green and fruitful meadows, that they are fain sometimes to drive their beasts from pasture least they should suffocate for to much fattenesse, as I have said before. They make very good butter, and apt to be used in matters of physic. There are found divers kinds of good hawks, 
hawks.  as falcons gerfalcons, lanners, and sperhaukes. Also ravens, crows, bears, hares, and foxes, both white and black. 
white ravens.  They have most swift horses: and such as run xxx miles continually without rest or bait. They have many churches: and houses builded of the bones of whales and other great fishes. 
houses of whales bones.  The navigation is not open to this Island but in summer season: and that only for the space of four moons, 
The navigation to Island  by reason of the could and Ice whereby the passage is stopped. If any strife or debate arise on the sea among the mariners for the commodity of the haven, the governor of the place although he have knowledge thereof, yet doth he not punish them, forasmuch as it appertaineth not to his office to decern such things as are done on the sea, but only on the land. Ships are there often times in great peril by reason of whales and such other monsters of the sea, 
whales.  except the mariners take good heed and keep them far from the ships with the noise of droommes, and empty barrels cast into the sea. There are many mynstrels and other that play on instruments, with the sweet noise whereof, they use to allure fowls and fishes to their nets and snares. 
One thing serving for contrary uses  Many also, lie lurking in caves and dens to avoid the sharpness of could, as the africans do the like to defend themselves from the heat. On the top of a certain mountain called Weyszarch, (lying between Island and Greenland or Gronlande) is erected a shipman's quadrant of marvelous bigness, 
A shipman's quadran●.  made by two pirates named Pinnigt & Pothorst in favour of such as sail by those coasts that they may thereby avoid the dangerous places lying toward Gronland.  
The midst of the Island. 7 0 65 30. The city Harsol. etc. 7 40 60 42.   

Laponia.  
THe region of Laponia; was so named of the people that inhab●te it. For the germans, call all such Lapones, as are simple or unapt to things. This people is of smaule stature, and of such agility of body, that having their quivers of arrows gerte to them & their bows in their hands, 
People of great agility.  they can with a leap, cast thaym selves through a circle or hope of the diameter of a cubit. They seyght on foot, armed with bows and arrows and after the manner of the Tartars. They are exercised in hurling the dart and shooting from their youth: in so much that they give their children no meat until they hit the mark they shoot at, as did in old time thinhabitants of the Islands called Bal●ares. They use to make their apparel straight and close to their bodies that it hinder not their work. 
A strange apparel.  Their winter vestures are made of the hole skins of seals or bears artificially wrought & made supple. These they tie with a knot above their heads, leaving only two holes open to look through, and have all the residue of their bodies covered as though they were sowed in sacks, but that this being adapted to all parts of their bodies, is so made for commodity and not for a punishment as the Romans were accustomed to sow parricides in sacks of leather with a cock, 
The cau●e of an owlde error.  an ape, and a serpent, and so to hurl them alive all together into the river of Tiber. And hereby I think it came to pass that in old time it was rashly believed that in these regions there were men with rough & hery bodies wild beasts, as part made relation through ignorance, part also taking pleasure in rehearsal of such things as are strange to the hearers. The Lapones defended by this art and industry, go abroad and withstand the sharpness of winter and the north winds, with all the injuries of heaven. They have no houses, but certain tabernacles like tents or hales wherewith they pa●se from place to place & change their mansions. 
So do the Tartars.  Sum of them liu● after the manner of the people of Sarmaria called in old time Amaxobii, which used veins in the stead of houses. They are much given to hunting: and have such plenty of wild beasts that they kill them in manner in every place. 
Plenty of wild beasts  It is not lawful for a woman to go forth of the tent at that door by the which her husband went out on hunting the same day: nor yet to touch with her hand any part of the beast that is taken until her husband reach her on the spit such a portion of flesh as he thinketh good. They till not the ground. The region nuryssheth no kind of serpents: 
No serpents.  yet are there great and noysoome gnats. 
Great gnats,  They take fish in great plenty's by the commodity whereof, they live after the manner of the Ethiopians called Ichthiophagi. For as these dry their fish with fervent heat, so do they dry them with could, and grind or stamp them to powder as smaule as meal or flower They have such abundance of these fishes, 
Abundance of fish.  that they heued great plenty thereof in certain store houses to carry them unto other lands near about them, as Northbothnia & white Russia. Their ships are not made with nails, but are tied together and made fast with cords and wyththes. 
Ships without nails.  With these they sail by the swift rivers between the mountains of Laponia, being naked in summer that they may the better swim in the time of peril, and gather together such wares as are in danger to be lost by shipwreck. Part of them crereise handiecraftes, as imbrothering and weaving of cloth interlaced with gold and silver. 
Science honoured.  Such as have devised any necessary art, or do increase and amend thinventions of other, are openly honoured, and rewarded with a vesture, in the which is imbrothered an argument or token of the thing they devised. And this remaineth to the posterity of their family in token of their deserts. They frame ships, build houses, and make divers sorts of household stuff artificially, and transport them to other places near about. They buy and sell both for exchange of wares and for mon●y. 
Bargeining without words.  And this only by consent of both party's without communication: yet not for lack of wit or for rudeness of manners, but because they have a peculiar language unknown to their borderers. It is a valiant nation, and lived long free, and sustained the wars of Norway and Suecia until at the length they submitted themselves, and paid rich furs for their tribute. They chose themselves a governor whom they call a king: But the king of Suetia giveth him authority and administration. Nevertheless, the people in their suits and doubtful causes, resort to Suecia to have their matters decised.  
In their journeys, they go not to any Inn, nor yet enter into any house, but lie all night under the firmament. They have no horses: 
No horses.  but in the stead of them, they tame certain wild beasts which they call Keen, being of the just bigness of a mule, 
A beast of marvelous strength and swiftness.  wi●lyrowgh hear like an Ass, cloven feet, and bra●nthed hor●es like a heart, but lower and with fewer antlettes. They will not abide to be ridden. But when their pestrels or drawing collars are put on them, and they so joined to the chariotre or sled, they run in the space of xxiiii h●●res, a hundredth and fifty miles, or xxx sch●nos: 
shalt Schoenus is look 〈◊〉 Gronland.  The which spare they affirm to change the horizon thrice: 
The change of the horizon.  that is these to come to the furthest sign or mark that they see a far of. Which doubtless is a token both of the marvelous swiftness and great strength of these beasts being able to continue running for so great a space, in the mean while also spending sometime in feeding. I suppose that this thing was somewhat known to the owlde writers, although received in manner by an obscure and doubtful fame. For they also write that certain Scythians do ride on hearts. 
The owld authors called all the north people Scythyans.   
They neither follow the Christian religion, nor yet refuse it or are offended therewith as are the Jews: but do sum times receive it favourably to gratify the princes to whom them obey. 
Erasmus lamenteth this in his first book de ratine concionandi, where he speaketh of the people. called pilapil  And that no more of them embrace the Christian faith, the fault is somewhat to be imputed to the by shops and prelate's that have either rejected this cure and charge of instructing the nation, or suffered the faith of Christ to be suffocate even in the first spring. For under the pretence of religion, they would have advanced their own revenues and overburthened the people by an intolerable exemple, none otherwise here then in all Christendom, which thing is doubtless the cause of most grievous defections. I hard john a bishop of Gothlande say thus: We that govern the church of Up●alia, and have under hour diocese a great part of that nation, like as it is not convenient to declare many things of hour vigilance and attendance over the flock committed to hour charge, even so abstaining from mischievous covetousness whereby religion is abused for lucre, we do in all places hour diligent endeavour that we minister none occasion whereby this nation as offended by hour ●innes, may be the less willing to embrace the Christian ●ayth. This is the state of the religion among the Lapones: although of their own institution and custom received of their predecessors, they are idolaters, 
Idolatry.  honouring that living thing that they meet first in the morning, for the god of that day, and divining thereby their good luck or evil. They also erect images of stone upon the mountains which they esteem as gods, attributing to them divine honour. They solemn marriages, and begin the same with fire and flint, 
A mystery of marriage in fire & f●int.  as with a mystery so aptly applied to the image of stone as if it had been received from the mydde●●e of Grecia. For in that they adhibite a mystery of fire, as they do not this alone (forasmuch as the Romans observed the same custom) even so are they herein partly to be commended in that they use the ceremonies of so noble a people. The mystery of the flint is no less to be praised, both forasmuch as this is domestical philosophy, and hath also a near affinity and signification to these sonemnities. For as the flint hath in it fire lying hid which appeareth not but by moving and force, so is there a secret life in both kinds of man and woman which by mutual conjunction coommethe forth to a living birth. They are furthermore expert enchanters. 
expert inchauncers.  They tie three knots on a string hanging at a whip. When they lose one of these, they raise tolerable winds, When they lose an other, the wind is more vehement. But by losing the third, they raise plain tempests as in old time they were accustomed to raise thunder and lightning. This art do they use against such as sail by their coasts, and stay or move the rivers and seas more or less as they list to show favour or displeasure. They make also of lead certain short magical darts of the quantity and length of a finger. 
Magical darts.  These they throw against such of whom they desire to be revenged, 
The canker.  to places never so far distant. They are sometimes so vexed with the canker on their arms or legs that in the space of three days they die through the vehemency of the pain. The son falleth very low in these regions: and prolongeth one continual night for the space of three moons in winter, 
One night of three moons.  during which time they have none other light but like unto the twilight of evenings and mornings. This is very clear, but continueth but few honres, and is like the bright shining of the moon. Therefore that day that the son returneth to the hemisphery, they keep holy day and make great mirth with solemn festivity. And these are the manners of this nation, not so brutysshe or salvage as worthy therefore to be called Lapones for their unaptness or simplicity as when they lined under their own Empire and used no familiarity or intercourse with other nations and knew not the commodity of their own things, 
Rich furs.  neither the price and estimation of their furs in hour regions, by reason whereof they sold great plenty of them for sum of hour wares of smaule v●lue.  
The hounds or limits of Laponia (being th'extreme land of Scondia known toward the north pole) are extended toward this part of the North, to the world yet unknown to us: And furthermore toward the same part of the uttermost sea, according to this description.  
The first coast, 70 72. The coast following. 80 7. That that yet followeth, 90 70.  
From the fishing places and store houses of this sea, 
Plenty of sea fish.  they carry forth to Nordbothnia and white Russia, lands confining to them, great plenty of fish. Whereby we may conjecture that this sea is extended on every side toward the North. Toward the west, it is limited with the most inward gulf of at the Castle of Wardhus at the degree. 
wardhus.  54 70 30.  
Toward the south, it is lymitted by a line drawn from thence unto the degree .90 69.   

Norwegia or Norway.  
NOrdway, is as much to say as the Northwaye. This was sometime a flourishing kingdom, whose dominion comprehended Denmark, Friselande and the Islands far about, until the domestical E●pire wa● governed by the succession of inheritance. In the mean time while this governance ceased for lack of dew issue, it was instituted by consent of the nobility that the kings should be admitted by election: supposing that they would with more equity execute that office forasmuch as they were placed in the same by such authority, and not by obtaining the kingdom by fortune and new advancement. But it came so to pass, that as every of them excelled in richesse, ambition and favour by consangivitie, so were they in greater hope to obtain the kingdom: And were by this means divided into factions, 
kingdoms destroyed by factions.  attemting also occasion t'invadeinvade foreign realms whereby they might strengthen their parties. It is therefore at this present under the dominion of the Danes: 
The Dane●  who do not only exact intolerable tributes, but also bring all their riches and commodities into Denmark, constituting the continuance of their governance in th'infirmity and poverty of the subjects: which exemple, sum other princes do follow at this day in the Christian Empire. For after that the princes had forsaken such virtues as should have shined in them, as to be Patres patriae (that is) the fathers of their countries, and that in the place hereof, only the proud countenance of dominion remained, which opened licentiousness to thiniuxie of the subjects, this followed thereof, that whereas the Danes by this occasion had no further trust or aid in the love of the people, 
An exemple of tyranni.  they provided for thindemnity of their own estate by forcible extenuating the goods and pour of them whom they desired to keep in subjection. This is the fortune of Norway, whose edefies, towns, and cities cannot defend their ancient amplitude and dignity: neither is there any hope of repairing their state. For there are no consultations admitted for the redress of the common wealth: No man dare show his advice or attempt any thing, uncertain of the minds and consent of other. To this difficulty, is added the quality of the place. For the Danes have in their power all the navigations of Norway, whereby it may exercise no trade by sea, neither carry forth wares to other places. So that in fine it may seem most unfortunate, 
The miserable state of Norway.  as lacking the favour of heaven, the sea, and the land. From hen●e is brought into all Europe a fysske of the kinds of them which we call haddocks or hakes indurate and dried with could, and beaten with clubs or stocks, by reason whereof the germans call them stockefysshe. 
Stockfysse.  The taking of these, is most commended in januarie that they may be sufficiently dried and hardened with could. For such as are taken in the more temperate months, do corrupt and putrefy: And are not meet to be carried forth.  
The description of the west coast, with the part thereof lying most toward the north.  
Wardhus (that is) the watch house, or watch tower .54 70 30. It is a strong castle or fortress appointed to the Lapones. The coast following, 48 50 70. Matthkur. etc.  
All the coast from hence, and the places near about unto the degree .45 69. being sometime left desolate by the seditions and destruction of Norway, the Lapones chose for their habitations, 
The Lapone●.  as coming to a more beneficial heaven.  
From the castle of Wardhus, unto the degree .40 30 64 10 all the coast in the spring time is dangerous to pass, by reason of whales of such huge bigness that sum of them grow to a hundredth cubits. 
Ships in daung●our by reason of whales.  For these fishes at that time of the year resort together for generation. Such ships as chance to fall either upon their bodies, or into such whyrlepooles as they make by their vehement motions, are in great peril. The remedy to avoid this daungiour, is to pour into the sea Castoreum (that is) oil made of the stones of the beast called the Beaver, 
Castoreum.  mengeled with water. For with this, the hole heard of whales vanisheth suddenly to the bottom of the sea: They make a terrible roaring: 
The roaring of whales.  and have two breathing places in the highest part of their foreheads, standing forth right a cubit in length, and are as broad at the ends, being covered with a skin, through the which they blow waters like showers or storms of rain. The pricks of their backs, are found containing three else in circuit, 
whales salted and reserved.  and every knot between them, of one elle. They are at the least of lx cubits in length: And are salted and kept in store houses. The greatest are unprofitable to be eaten by reason of their rank and unsavoury taste which can not be qualified.  
Nidrosia standing upon the south side of the sea bank, 
The city of Nidrosia.  was the chief city and metropolitan church through out all Norway, Iselande, Gronlande, and the Islands there about. This city was noble at the first under the ●lorysshing Empire of Norway, containing in circuit xxiiii parishes, but it is now browght in manner to a village and is called in the German tongue Truthaim, as the house of the Dryides. There remaineth at this day a Cathedral church in token of the ancient felicity, 
A magnifical church.  being such that in bigness & workmanship of wrought stone, the like is not in all Christendom. The greases or compass about the altar, was destroyed by fire, and was repaired at the same time that we writ this history. The charge of the reparasion, was esteemed to be seven thousand crowns: by which smaule portion, an estimate may be made of the excellency of the hole Church.  
The tract of all the sea coasts Norway, is very quiet and meek. The sea is not frozen. The snows endure not long. This land hath also a peculiar pestilence which they call Leem or Lemmer. This is a little four footed beast about the bigness of a ra●te with a spotted skin. 
Noisome beasts of unknown generation.  These fall upon the ground at certain tempests and sudden showers, not yet known from whence they come, as whither they are browght by the winds from remote Islands, or otherwise engendered of thick and feculent clouds. But this is well known, that as soon as they fall down, green grass and herbs are found in their bowels not yet digested. They confume all green things as do locusts: And such as they only bite, wither and die. This pestilence liveth as long as it doth not taste of the grass newly sproonge. They come together by flocks as do swallows: And at an ordinary time, either die by heaps with great infection of the land (as by whose corruption the air is made pestiferous and molesteth the Norwegians with swiming in the head and the jaundice) or are consumed of other beasts named Lefrat. Toward the East, it is included with in the l●ne that is drawn by the mountains whose ends or uttermost bounds they are that lie toward the south above the mouths of the river Trolhetta. But that par●e that lieth toward the north, passeth by the castle of Wardhus, 
wardhus.  and is extended to the unknown land of the Lapones. 
The unknown land of the Lapon●s.   
The lake called Mos, and the Island of Hossuen in the midst thereof, is in the degree .45 30 61.  
In this lake appeareth a strange monster: which is, a serpent of huge bigness. 
A serpent of huge bigness.  And as to all other places of the world, blazing stars do portend th'alteration and change of things, so doth this to Norway. It was see●e of late (in the year of Christ: M. D. xxii. appearing far ●boue the water rolling like a great pillar: And was by conjecture far of, esteemed to be of fifty cubits in length. Shortly after followed the rejecting of Christiernus king of Denmark. 
God warneth us by signs of things to come.  Such other monstrous things are said to be seen in divers places of the world. And doubtless except we should think that the divine providence having mercy upon mortal men, and hereby warning them of their offences, doth send such strange things (as also blazing stars and armies fighting in the air, with such other portentous monsters whereof no causes can be found by natural things) we might else suspect that such sights were but imaginations of the sense of man deceived.  
On the East side, are exceeding rough mountains which admit no passage to Suecia. The sea between Norway & the Islands, is called Tialleslund, Euripus, or the straits. The Island of Lofoth. whose midst .42 67 10. Langanas', whose midst, 41 67 Uastral, 
The straits or boiling sea.  whose midst .41 30 67 30.  
The sea between these three Islands, is called Muscostrom (that is) boiling. At the flowing of the sea, it is swallowed into the caves, and is blown out again at the reflowing, with no less violence than the streams of rivers faule from mountains. This sea is navigable until it be lower than the mouths of the rocks. Such as chance into it out of dew time, are carried headlong into whyrlepooles The fragments of the lost ships, are seldom call up again. But when they are cast up, they are so bruised and fretted against the rocks, 
Dangerous places in the sea.  that they seem to be overgrown with hore. This is the power of nature, passing the fabulous Simplegadeses and the fearful Malea, with the dangerous places of Silla and Charybdis, and all other miracles that nature hath wrought in any other sea hitherto known to man.  
The Islands about Norway, are of such fruitful pasture, 
fruitful Islands about Norway.  that they bring not their beasts into the stables before the month of November: And do many places winter than abroad.   

Suecia, or Suethlande.  
¶ Suecia, is a kingdom rich in gold, silver, 
Gold and silver.  copper, lead, Iren, fruit, cattle, and exceeding increase of fish of the rivers, lakes, and the sea. And hath no less plenty of such wild beasts as are taken with hunting.  
Toward the West, it is ended with the mountains of Norway from the castle of Wardhus unto th'end. 
wardhus castle.  51 63 40 Toward the South, with the line from this end unto the degrees .53. 30. 61. And from thence unto the degrees .61. 60. 30. Above the gulf of Suecia, 
The gulf of Suecia.  toward the north, with the south end of Lapponia from the castle of Wardhus unto th'end .62. 70. Toward the east, it is ended with the line from this end unto the degree .63. 69. etc. Stokholme the chief city. 
The city of Stockholme.  64. 61. This is the chief mart town of Suecia, and is strongly defended by art and nature. It is situate in marshes after the manner of venice: and was therefore called Stokholme, forasmuch as being placed in the water, the foundation is fortified with stocks or piles. The sea entereth into it with two arms or branches of such largeness and depth that ships of great burden and with main sails may enter by the same with their full freight. This suffered of late years grievous spoil & destruction to the singular exemple of cruel hostility: And such, as the like hath not been lightly showed to any other city received by league & composition.  
In all the tract from Scokholme to the lake above the river of Dalekarle, which is in the degree. 
Gold in could reg●ons.  56. 30. 63. 50. are mountains fruitful of good silver, copper, and lead. They get great riches by the salmons and plenty of other fishes which they take in certain great lakes. 
fish.   
The dukedom of Agermannia, occupieth the north side to the confines of Laponia. This tract is full of woods in the which they hunt the beasts called Uros or Bisontes, which in their tongue they call Elg, 
The beast called Uro● or Elg.  (that is) wild asses. These are of such height, that the highest part of their backs are equal with the measure of a man holding up his arms as high as he may reach. etc. Upsalia the chief city. 
Upsalia.  62. 62. 30. here is buried the body of saint Hericus king and martyr.  
Copperdalia (that is) the copper valley, 
Copperdali●.  is a dukedom southward from the dukedom of jemptia. Under this, is the valiant nation of the people called Dalekarly.  
Oplandia, is a dukedom & the navel or midst of Scondia. 
Oplandia,   
The city of Pircho, on the north side of the lake of Meler, was once a great city and able to arm xiiii thousand men to the wars: but is now browght to a village.  
All the tract of Oplandia, hath mines of silver, copper, and steel.  
Of the Islands and rocks that lie about Suecia, the midst is .67 30 61 30. These were called of the owlde writers Done, the reason of which name remaineth to this day. For there are in these innumerable multitudes of birds: 
Birds.  In so much that thinhabitants of the next coast, sail thither in the month of May while the birds sit on their eggs: which they steal and reserve them in salt for a long tyme. 
Eggs reserved in salt.    

Bothnia.  
BOthnia is so named of the precious furs of all sorts that are carried from thence into foreign regions. 
Precious furs.  For by these and their fishing, they have great commodity. 
fish.  Salmons of the best sort are taken in these seas and are great riches among these nations. Bothnia is divided into two parts, as Nordbothnia, and South Bothnia, called Ostrobothnia. Nordbothnia, is termined with the south end of the Lapones unto the end .78 30 69. Toward the East, it is termined with this end and unto the degree .78 30 68 20. Toward the West, with the line termining the East side of Suecia: And toward the south, with the residue of the gulf of Suecia from th'end that hath degrees .63 69.  
Ostrobothnia, toward the East is termined from the said end of the most East coast. And toward the South, with a line extended by the mountains from this end unto the degree .71 66  
Toward the north and west, with part of the gulf of Suecia. etc.   

Gothia or Gothlande.  
GOTHIA, is by interpretation good. For the holy name of God, is in the German tongue Goth (that is) Good. At what time the Goths upon a general consent, sent forth their ofsrping or succession to seek new seats or countries to inhabit, 
Thinuasions of the Goths  and when they possessed the coasts of Meotis and Asia, none of the owlde writers have made mention as far as I know. But they have been known sense the time that the Romans dilated their Empire by Illyria (now called Slavonie) unto the river of Danubius. And were also famous from the time of Cesar Dictator and Octavianus Augustus by reason of their great wars at Danubius being th'uttermost bound of Thempire. 
The war of the goths against the Romans.  Nevertheless, in that renown, what Gothia was, under what part of heaven it was situate, or of whom the Goths took their original, it hath been unknown almost to this age. This is termined toward the north, with the south end of Suecia: And toward the west, 
The bounds of Gothland.  with the other mountains of Norway, which continue from the bounds of Suecia to the mouths of the rivers of Trolheta. etc.  
It hath many goodly towns, cities, castles, mines. etc. The city of Uisba, 
The city of Ui●ba.  being in the degree .61 30 54 15. was an ancient and famous mart town as is Genua in Italy at this day. But afterward being afflicted by th'incursions of the pirates of the Danes and Moscovites, 
Danes and Moscovites.  it was left desolate. There remain to this day certain ruins which testify the ancient nobility In this place were the first stations of the Goths that possessed Meotis. It is at this day of fruitful soil, and famous by many goodly and strong castles and monasteries. There is among other, a monastery of thorder of saint benedict, in the which is a library of about two thousand books of old authors. 
A library of two thousand ●ookes.   
about the year of Christ fourscore and viii the Goths, unto whom resorted a great multitude of other people of these north par●es of the world, as from Livonia, Prusia, Russia and Tartary with divers other countries, making them divers Kings and captains, did depopulate and bring in subjection the more part of Europe, invaded Italy, destroyed Rome, 
The Goths invaded Europe and destroyed Rome.  inhabited that part of Italy now called Lombardy▪ and likewise subdued the roialmes of Castille and Aragonie. Their wars continued above three hundredth years.   

¶ Finland, and Eningia.  
FInlandia, is as much to say as a fair land or fine land, so named for the fertility of the ground, Pliny seemeth to call it Finnonia. For he saith that about the coasts of Finlande, are many Islands without names. Of the which there lieth one before Scythia called Pannonia. The gulf called Sinus Finnonicus, is so named at this day of the land of Finnonia. 
Pannonia falsely taken for Finnonia.  Finnonia confineth with Scythia, and runneth without all Tanais (that is to say) without the limetes of Europe to the confines or Asia. But that the name of Finlande seemeth not to agree hereunto, the cause is that this place of Pliny is corrupted as are many other in this autour: So that from the name of Finnonia, or Phinnonia, it was a likely error to call it Pannonia forasmuch as these words do not greatly differ in writing and found: so that the counterfeit name was soon put in the place of the true name by him that knew Pannonia and red that name before, being also ignorant of Phinnonia.  
Eningia had in old time the title of a kingdom, 
Eningia.  it is of such largeness. But hath now only the title of an inferior governor, being under the dominion of the slavons and using the same tongue. In religion, it observed the rites of the Greeks of late years, when it was under the governance of the Moscovites. But it is at this present under the king of Suecia and observeth thinstitutions of the Occidental church. spanish wines are browght thither in great plenty which the people use merely and cheerfully. 
spanish wyne●.  It is termined on the north side, by the south line of Ostrobothnia, and is extended by the mountains. Toward the west, it is termined with the sea of Finnonia according to this description: and hath degrees .71. 66. etc.    

¶ Of the difference of regions and causes of great cities, after the description of Hieronimus Cardanus. Liber xi de Subtilitate.  
THere is an other difference of regions caused of could and heat. For such as are near unto the poles, are vexed with to much could: And such as are under the line where the son is of greatest force, are oppressed with heat. Such as are in the midst between both, are nearest unto temperateness. Under the pole, it is impossible that there should be populous cities because the land is barren, and the carriage or conveyance of fruits, victuals, and other necessaries, is incommodious. By reason whereof, it is necessary that thinhabitants of such regions live ever in continual wandering from place to place, or else in smaule villages. Such as inhabit temperate regions, have mean cities, aswell for that they have more commodious conveyance for necessaries, as also that they may dwell better and more safely together then in villages by, reason of fortifying their towns with walls, and exercising of arts and occupations whereby the one may the he●ter help the other. Yet that owlde Rome (being in a temperate region) was of such incredible bigness, the 〈◊〉 was that it obtained Thempire of the world, by reason whereof, all nations had cons●uence thither, and not the greatness of the walls. But it is necessary that the greatest cities be in hot regions: first, for that in such regions, part of the soil is either barren if it lack water, or else most fruitful if it abound with water. And for this inequality, when they find any place meet to sustain a multitude, it followeth of necessity that great cities be builded in such places by reason of great concourse of people resorting to the same. another great cause is, that whereas in such regions, merchants come very far to such commodious places, they pass through many desert and perilous regions: So that it shallbe necessary for their better security, to come in great companies as it were grea● armies. And therefore whereas such a society is once knit together in a commodious place, it should be great hindrance aswell to thinhabitants as to merchants if they should wander in incommodious places. And by this confluence, both of such as dwell near to such places, and also of strangers and such as dwell far of, it is necessary that in continuance of time, smaule towns become great c●ties, as are these: Quinsai, Singui, Cambalu, Memphis, Cairus, or Alcair, otherwise called Babylon in Egipte. But if here any will object Constan●inople (in old time called Byzantium) being in a temperate region, although it be not to be compared to such cities as are more than lx miles in circuit, yet do we answer hereunto, that the Turks Empire is the cause of the greatness hereof, as we said before of Rome.   

¶ The history written in the latin tongue by Paulus iovius bishop of Nuceria in Italy, of the legation or ambassade of great Basilius' Prince of Moscovia, to pope Clement the vii of that name: In which is contained the description of moscovia with the regions confining about the same even unto the great & rich Empire of Cathay.  
I 〈◊〉 first briefly to desc●ribe the situation of the region which we plainly see to have been little know●● to Strabo and Ptolemy, and then to proceed in rehearsing the manners, customs and religion of the people. And this in manner in the like simple style and phrase of speech as the same was declared unto us by Demetrius the ambassador, 
Demetrius the ambassador of Moscovia.  a man not ignorant in the Latin tongue, as from his youth browght up in Livonia, where he learned the first rudiments of letters. And being grown to man's age, executed th'office of an ambassador into divers Christian provinces. For whereas by reason of his approved faithfulness and industry, he had before been sent as orator to the kings of Suecia and Denmark, and the great master of Prussia, he was at the last sent to Themperor Maximilian, in whose court (being replenished with all sorts of men) while he was conversant, if any thing of barbarous manners yet remained in so docible and quiet a nature, the same was put away by framing himself to better civility. The cause of his legacy or ambassade, was given by Paulus Centurio a Genuese, 
Paulus Centurio.  who when he had received letters commendatori of pope Leo the tenth, and came to moscovia for the trade of merchandise, of his own mind conferred with the familiars of Duke Basilius as touching the conformation of the rites of both churches. He furthermore of great magnanimity and in manner owtragious desire, sowght how by a new and incredible voyage, spices might be browght from India. 
Spice● browght from India to Moscovia.  For while before he had exercised the trade of merchandise in Syria, egypt, and Pontus, he knew by fame that spices might be conveyed from the further India up the river Indus against the course of the same, 
The river Indus.  and from thence by a small viage by land passing over the mountains of Paropanisus, to be carried to the river Oxus in Bactria, 
Oxus or hexina a river of Asia. runneth through the deserts of Sythia.  which having his original almost from the same mountains from whence Indus doth springe, and violently carrying with it many other rivers, falleth into the sea Hircanum or Caspium at the port called Strava. 
The sea hircanum, is now called mare Abacuk or mare de Sala.  And he earnestly affirmed that from Strava, is an easy and safe navigation unto the mart town of Citrachan or Astrachan and the mouth of the river Uolga and from thence ever against the co●rse of the rivers, 
Citrachan or Astracan.  as Uolga, Occha, and Moscho, unto the city Moscha, and from thence by land to Riga and into the sea of Sarmatia and all the west regions. For he was vehemently and more than of equity accensed and provoked by the injuries of the Portugals, 
Sarmartia is that great country wherein 〈◊〉 contained Russia Livonia and Tartary, & the north and East part of Polonia.  who having by force of arms subdued a great part of India, and possessed all the mart towns, taking holy into their hands all the trade of spices to bring the same into Spain, and nevertheless to sell them at a more grievous and intolerable price to the people of Europe then ever was hard of before: And furthermore kept the coasts of the Indian sea so straightly with continual navies, that those trades are thereby left of, which were before exercised by the gulf of Persia and toward the river of Euphrates, 
against the Portugals.  and also by the straits of the sea of Arabia and the river Nilus, and in fine by hour sea: 
The trade of spices inowld tyme.  by which trade all Asia and Europe was abundantly satisfied and better cheap than hath been sense the Portugals had the trade in their hands with so many incommodities of such long viages whereby the spices are so corrupted by th'infection of the poompe and other filthiness of the ships, that their natural savour, taste, 
Spices corrupted.  and quality aswell hereby as by their long reserving in the shops, sellers, and warehouses in Lussheburne, vanisheth and resolveth, so that reserving ever the freshest and newest, they sell only the worst and most corrupted. But Paulus, although in all places he earnestly and vehemently argued of these things, and stirred great malice and hatred against the Portugals, affirming that not only thereby the customs and revenues of princes should be much greater if that viage might be discovered, but also that spices might be better cheap bowght at the hands of the Moscovites, yet could he nothing avail in this suit, forasmuch as Duke Basilius thowght it not good to make open or disclose unto a stranger and unknown man, those regions which give entrance to the sea Caspium and the kingdoms of Persia. 
The Caspian sea.  Paulus therefore excluding all hope of further travail, and become now of a merchant an ambassador, browght Basilius letters (pope Leo being now departed) to Adriane his successor, 
Basilius wrote to Pope Ad●●ane.  in the which he declared with honourable and reverened words his good will and favourable mind toward the bishop of Rome. For a few years before, Basilius (then keeping wars against the Polones at such time as the general counsel was celebrate at Lateran) required by john, king of Denmark (the father of Christian who was of late expulsed from his kingdom) that safe passage might be granted to th'ambassadors of moscovia to go to Rome. But whereas it so chanced, that king john and pope julius died both in one day, whereby he lacked a convenient sequester or solicitoure, he omittted his consolation as touching that legacy. After this, the war waxed hot between him and Sigismunde the king of Polony: who obtaining the victory against the Moscovites at Boristhene, 
war between the Polones and Moscovites.  supplications were decreed in Rome for the overthrow and vanquyssing the enemies of the Christian faith, which thing greatly alienated both king Basilius himself and all that nation from the bishop of Rome. But when Adriane the vi departed from this life, and left Paulus now ready to his second viage, his successor Clement the vii perceiving that Paulus still furiously revolved and tossed in his unquiet mind that viage toward the east, sent him again with letters to moscovia, 
The second voyage of Paulus to Moscoui●.  by the which with propense and friendly persuasions, he exhorted Basilius to acknowledge the majesty of the Roman church, 
The Pope persuadeth Basilius to acknowledge the Roman church.  and to make a perpetual league and agreement in matters of religion, which thing should be not only for the health of his soul, but also greatly to th'increase of his honour: And further promised, that by the holy authority of his office he would make him a king and give him kingly ornaments, if rejecting the doctrine of the Greeks, he would conform himself to th'authority of th● Roman church. For Basilius desired the name and title of a king by thassignation of the bishop of Rome, forasmuch as the judged that to appertain to the catholic right and the bishops majesty, of whom (as he knew right well) even Themperours themselves by an ancient custom have received there insignes of honour with the Diadem and sceptre of the Roman Empire: 
The Emperors receive there diadem of the bishops of Rome.  although it is said that he required the same of Themperor maximilian by many ambassades. Paulus therefore who with more prosperous journeys then great vantage, had from his youth travailed a great part of the world, although he were now aged and sore vexed with the strangury, came with a prosperous and speedy journey to moscovia, where he was gently received of Basilius, and remained in his court for the space of two months. But in fine, mistrusting his own strength, and deterred by the difficulty of so great a journey, when he had utterly put away all his imaginations and hope of this trade to India, returned to Rome with Demetrius ●hambassadour of Basilius, before we yet thowght that he had been in Moscovia. 
Demetrius' interteynement at Rome.  The bishop commanded that Demetrius should be lodged in the most magnificent and princely part of the houses of Uaticane, the ruffs of whose edifies are guilded and embowed, and the chambers richly furnished with silken beds and cloth of Arresse. Willing furthermore that he should be honourably received and vestured with silk●. He also assigned Franciscus Cheregatus the bishop of Aprutium (a man that had often times been ambassador to divers regions) to accompany him and show him thorder and rites of hour religion with the monuments and manners of the city. Furthermore, when Demetrius had certain days rested and recreate himself, washing away the filth he had gathered by reason of the long viage, then appareled with a fair vesture after the manner of his country, he was browght to the bishops presence, whom he honoured kneeling with great humility and reverence (as is the manner) and therewith presented unto his holiness certain furs of Sables in his own name and in the name of his prince, 
Demetrius is brought to the pope's presence.  and also delivered the letters of Basilius, which they before, and then the Illyrian or Slavon interpreter Nicolaus Siccensis translated into the Latin tongue in this effect as followeth.  
To pope Clement shepherd and teacher of the Roman church, 
Basi●ius letters to pope Clement.  great Basilius by the grace of God, lord, Emperor and dominatour of all Ru●sia, and great duke Uolodemaria, Moscovia, Novogrodia, Plescovia, S●nolenia, Ifferia jugoria, Periunia, Uetcha, Bolgaria. etc. Dominator & great prince of Novogrodia in the lower contrei: Also of Cern●gouia, Razania, Uolotchia, Rezevia, Belchia, Rostovia, jaroslavia, Belozeria, Udoria, Obdoria, & Condinia. etc. You sent unto us Paulus Centurio a citizen of Genua with letters whereby you do exhort us to join in power and counsel withyowe and other Princes of Christendom against the enemies of the christian faith: and that a free passage and ready way may be opened for both your ambassadors and ours to come and go to and fro, whereby by mutual duty and endeavour on both parties, we may have knowledge of the state of things pertaining to the wealth of us both. We certes as we have hitherto happily by the aid and help of almighty god constantly and earnestly resisted the cruel and wicked enemies of the Christian faith, so are we determined to do hereafter. And are likewise ready to consent with other Christian Princes, and to grant free passage into out dominions. In consideration whereof, we have sent unto you hour faithful servant Demetrius Erasmus with these hour letters: and with him have remitted Paulus Centurio: desiring you also shortly to dismiss Demetrius with safeguard and indemnity unto the borthers of hour dominions. And we will likewise do the same if you send your ambassador with Demetrius, whereby both by communication and letters, we may be better certified of thorder and administration of such things as you require: so that being advertised of the minds & intent of all other Christian princes, we may also consult what is best to be done herein. Thus far ye well. Given in our dominion in our city of moscovia, in the year from the creation of the world, seven thousand and three hundredth, the third day of Aprell.  
But Demetrius, as he is expert in divine and human things, and especially of holy scripture, seemed to have secret commandment of greater matters which we think he will shortly declare to the se●ate in private consultations. For he is now delivered of the fever into the which he fell by change of air, and hath so recovered his strength and native colour, that being a man of threescore years of age, he was not only present at the pope's mass celebrated with great solemnity in the honour of saint Cosmus and Damian but came also into the Senate at such time as Cardinal Campegius coming ●yrst from the legacy of Pannonia, 
Cardinal Campegius.  was received of the pope and all the nobility of the court: And furthermore also viewed the temples of the holy city with the ruins of the Roman magnificence, 
The ruins of Rome.  and with woondering eyes beheld the lamentable decay of the ancient buildings So that we think that shortly after he hath declared his message, he shall return to moscovia with the bishop of Scarense the pope's legate, not unrecompensed with just rewards at the hands of his holiness.  
The name of the Moscovites is now new, 
The description of Moscovia.  unless the poet Lucan maketh mention of the Moschos confining with the Sarmatians, and Pliny also placeth the Moschos at the springs of the great river of Phasis in the region of Colcho● above the sea Euxinus toward the East. Their region hath very large bounds, and is extended from the altars of great Alexander about the springs of Tanais, 
The altars of great alexander.  to the extreme lands and north Ocean in manner under the north stars called charles wain or the great bear, being for the most part plain and of fruitful pasture, but in summer in many places full of marshes. For whereas all that land is replenished with many and great rivers which are greatly increased by the winter snow and ise resolved by the heat of the son, the plains and fields are thereby overflown with marshes, 
marshes in summer.  and all journeys encumbered with continual waters and miry slabbynesse until by the benefit of the new winter the rivers and marshes be frozen again, and give safe passage to the sleds that are accustomed to journey by the same. The wood or forest of Hercynia (and not Hyrcania as is red in sum false copies) occupieth a great part of moscovia, 
The forest of hercynia.  and is here and there inhabited, with houses builded therein and so made thinner by the long labour of men that it doth not now show that horror of thick and impenetrable woods and lands as many think it ●o have. But being replenished with many wild beasts, 
wild beasts  is so far extended through Moscovia with a continual tract between. the East and the North toward the Scythian Ocean, 
The Scythian Ocean.  that by the infinite greatness thereof it hath deluded the hope of such as have curiously searched th'end of the same. In that part that reacheth toward Prussia, are found the great and fierce beasts called Uri, or Bisontes, 
The beasts called Uri or Bisontes.  of the kind of bulls: Also Alces like unto hearts, which the Moscovites call Lozzi, and are called of the germans Helenes. 
helenes.   
On the East side of moscovia, are the Scythyans which are at this day called Tartars, 
Of the Scythyans and Tartars.  a wandering nation, and at all ages famous in wars. In the stead of houses they use wagons covered with beasts hides, whereby they were in old time called Amaxovii. 
Amaxovii.  For cities and towns, they use great tents and pavilions, not defended with trenches or walls of timber or stone, but enclosed with an innumerable multitude of archers on horseback. The Tartars are divided by companies which they call Hordas, 
horde.  which word in their tongue signifieth a consenting company of people gathered together in form of a city. Every Horda is governed by an Emperor whom either his parentage or warlike prows hath promoted to that dignity. For they oftentimes keep war with their borderers and contend ambitiously and fiercely for dominion. 
The large dominion of the Tartars.  It doth hereby appear that they consist of innumerable Hordas, in that the Tartars possess the most large deserts even unto the famous city of Cathay in the furthest Ocean in the East They also that are nearest to the Moscovites, 
Cathay.  are known by their trade of merchandise and often incursions. 
The Tartars of Europe.  In Europe near unto the place called Dromon Achilles in Taurica Chersoneso, are the Tartars called Precopites, the daughter of whose prince, Selimus Themperor of the Turks took to wife. These are most infest to the Polones, and waste the regions on every side between the rivers of Boristhenes and Tanais. They that in the same Taurica possess Caffam a colony of the Ligurians (called in old time Theodosia) do both in religion & all other things agree with the Turks. But the Tartars that inhabit the regions of Asia between Tanais and Uolga, are subject to Basilius the king of the Moscovites, 
The Tartars of Asia. are subject to the Du●e of Moscovia.  and those them a governor at his assignment. Among these, the Cremii afflicted with civil seditions, where as heretofore they were rich and of great power, have of late years lost their dominion and dignity. The Tartars that are beyond the river of volga, 
The Tartars beyond the river of Uolga.  do religiously observe the friendship of the Moscovites and profess themselves to be their subjects. Beyond the Cassanites toward the north, are the Sciambani, rich in herds of catta●lle and consisting of a great multitude of men. After these, ar● Nogai, 
Nogai. Sigismundu● cauleth them Nogaysri.  which obtain at this day the chief fame of riches and warly affairs. Their Horda, although it be most ample, yet hath it no emperor, but is governed by the wisdom and virtue of the most ancient and valiant men after the manner of the common wealth of venice. Beyond the Nogais somewhat toward the south and the Caspian sea, the nobelest nation of the Tartars called Zagathai, 
The nobeles● nation of the Tartars.  inhabit towns builded of stone, and have an exceeding great and fair city called Samarkand, which jaxartes the great river of Sogdiana runneth through, 
The river jaxartes.  and passing from thence about a hundredth miles, falleth into the Caspian sea. With these people in hour days, Ishmael the Sophi and king of Persia hath often times kept war with doubtful success: 
Ishmael the Soph●, king of Persia.  In so much that fearing the greatness of their power which heresysted with all that he might, he left Armenia and Taurisium the chief city of the kingdom, for a pray to Selinius the vyctourer of one wing of the battle. From the city of Samarkand, 
The city of Samarkand.  descended Tamburlanes the mighty Emperor of the Tartars whom sum call Tanberlanis. 
Tamburlanes, the mighty Emperor of the Tartars. The conquests of Tamburlanes.  But Demetrius saith that he should be called Themircuthlu. This is he that about the year of christ. M. CCC.lxxxxviii. subdued almost all the east parts of the world: And lastly with an innumerable multitude of men invaded the Turks dominions, with whom Baiasetes Ottomanus their king, (and father to the great grandfather of this Solyman that now liveth) meeting at Ancyra in the confines or marches of Galatia and Bythinia, gave him a sore battle, in the which self on the Turaes' part .20000. men, and Baiasetes himself was taken prisoner, 
Baiasetes.  whom Tamburlanes caused to be locked in an iren●cage and so carried him about with him through all Asia which he also conquered with a terrible army. He conquered all the lands between Tanais and Nilus, and in fine vanquished in battle the great Soltane of egypt, whom he chased beyond Nilus, and took also the city of Damascus.  
from the region of these Tartars called Zagathei, is browght great plenty of silken apparel to the Moscovites. 
This apparel t●ey have of the Permians.  But th● Tartars that inhabit the midland or inner regions, b●inge none other wares than truckes or droves of swift running horses and cloaks made of white feltes: also hales or tents to withstand th'injuries of could and rain. These they make very artificially and apt for the purpose. They receive again of the Moscovites, coats of cloth, and silver money, 
The Tartars traffic w●th the Moscovites.  containing all other bodily ornaments, and the furniture of superfluous housolde stuff. For being defended against the violence of wether and tempests only with such apparel and coverture whereof we have spoken, they trust only to their arrows which they shoot aswell backward flying as when they assail their enemy's face to face: Albeit, when they determined to invad Europe, their princes and captains had helmetts coats of fence, and hooked swords which they bought of the Persians. Toward the south, 
The tartars of the South side of Mo●couia.  the hounds of Moscovia are termined by the same Tartars which possess the plain regions near unto the Caspian sea: above the marishes of Meotis in Asia, and about● the ●yuers of Borysthenes and Tanais in part of Europe. The people called Roxolani, Gete and Bastarne, 
Gete and Roxolani.  inhabited these regions in old time, of whom I think the name of Russia took original. 
Russia.  For they call part of Lituania, Russia the lower, whereas Moscovia itself, is called white Russia. Lituania therefore, lieth on the Northwest side of Moscovia: 
Moscovia called white Russia. Lituania. Pruissa. Livonis. Denmark. Norway. Tuecia. The people of Laponia.  But toward the full west the main lands of Prussia and Livonia are joined to the confines or marches of moscovia, where the Sarmatian sea breaking forth of the straits of Cimbrica Chersonesus (now called Denmark) is bended with a crooked gulf toward the north. But in the furthest banks of that Ocean where the large kingdoms of Norway and Suecia are joined to the continent and almost environed with the sea, are the people called Lapones, A nation exceeding rude, suspicyous, and fearful, flying and astonysshed at the sight of all strangers & ships. They know neither fruits nor apples, nor yet any benignity either of heaven or earth. They provide them meat only with shooting, and are apparelled with the skins of wild beasts. They dwell in caves filled with dry leaves, and in hollow trees consumed within either by fire or rotten for age such as dwell near the sea side, fish more luckyly then cunningly, and in the stead of fruits, reserve in store fishes dried with smoke, They are of smaule stature of body, with star visagies, pale and wannye colour, and very swift of foot. Their wits or dispositions, are not known to the Moscovites their borderers, who think it therefore a madness to assail them with a smaule pour, 
Armeline furs.  and judge it neither profitable nor glorious, with great armies to invade a poor and beggarly nation. They exchange the most white furs which we call Armelines for other wares of divers sorts: 
Bargeninge without words.  Yet so, that they fly the sight and company of all merchants. For comparing and laying their wares together, and leaving their furs in a mid place, they bargeyne with simple faith, with absent and unknown men. 
The dark region by th●s dark region and the Pigme●ts the way to Cathay by the north sea.  Sum men of great credit and authority, do testify that in a region beyond the Lappones, between the west and the north oppressed with perpetual darkness, is the nation of the people called Pig●ei, who being grown to their full grought, do scarcely exceed the stature of hour children of ten years of age. It is a fearful kind of men, and express their words in such chattering sort that they seem to be so much the more like unto apes, in how much they differ in sense and stature from men of just height.  
Toward the North, innumerable people are subject to th'empire of the Moscovites. Their regions extend to the Scythian Ocean for the space of almost three moons journey. 
The scythian Ocean.   
N●x● unto Moscovia, is the region of Colmogora abounding with fruits. 
The region of co●mogora.  Through this runneth the river of Dividna being one of the greatest that is known in the north parts, and gave the name to an other le●●e river w●ich breaketh forth in●o the sea Baltheum. 
She river of dividna.  This increasing a● certain times of the year as doth the river Nilus, ou●r loweth the f●eldes and plains, and with his fat and nurishinge moisture, doth marvelously resist the injuries of heaven and the sharp b●astes of the North wind. When it riseth by reason of molten snow and great showers of rain, it falleth into the Ocean by unknown nations, and with so large a trench like unto a great sea, that it can not be sailed over in one day with a prosperous wind. But when the waters are faulen, they leave here and there large and fruitful Islands. For corn there cast on the ground, groweth without any help of the plough, and with marvelous celerity of hasting nature fearing the new injury of the proud river, doth both spring and ripe in short space.  
Into the river Dividna, runneth the river juga: 
The river of juga or jug.  And in the corner where they join together, is the famous mart town called Ustiuga distant from the chief city Mosca vi hundredth miles. 
Ustiuga.   
Note that whereas Paulus iovius writeth here that the river of Dividna, otherwise called Dwina, 
The river of Dividna or Dwina.  runneth through the region of Colmogor, it is to be understood that there are two rivers of that name, the one on the North-east side of moscovia toward the frozen sea, and the other on the south-west side falling into the sea Beltheum, or the gulf of Finnonia by the city of Riga in Livonia. And forasmuch as the true knowledge of these and certain other i● very necessary for all such as shall trade into moscovia or other regions in those coasts by the north sea, I have thought good to make further declaration hereof as I have found in the history of Moscavia, most faithfully and largely written by Sigismundus Liberus who was twice sent ambassador into Moscovia, as first by Maximilian Themperor, and then again by Ferdinando king of Hungary and Boheme. This have I done the rather, for that in all the maps that I have seen of moscovia, there is no mention made of the river of Dwina that runneth through the region of Colmogor and by the city of the same name, although the province of Dwina be in all cards placed Northewarde from the river of Ustiug or Succana, 
The river Suchana.  which is the same Dwina whereof we now speak, and whereof Paulus iovius writeth, although it be not so named but from the angle or corner where joining with the river of jug and Suchana, it runneth Northewarde toward the city of Colmogor, and from thence falleth into the north or frozen sea, 
The frozen sea.  as shall hereafter more plainly appear by the words of Sigismundus, that the one of these be not taken for the other being so far distant that great error might ensue by mistaking the same, especially because this whereof Paulus iovius writeth is not by name expressed in the cards, but only the other, whereby is the error might be the greater. Of that therefore that runneth by the confines of Livonia and the city of Riga, Sigismundus writeth in this manner.  
The lake of Dwina, is distant from the springs of Bousthenes, almost ten miles, and as many from the marysshe of Fronowo. From it, a river of the ●ame name toward the west, distant from Uuilua twenty miles, runneth from thence toward the north, where by Riga the chief city of Livonia, it faulethe into the German sea which the Muscovites call Uuareczk●●e move. It runneth by Uuitepsko, Polotzko, and Dunenburg, and not by Plescovia as one hath written. This river being for the most part navigable, the Lyvons call Duna.  
Of the other Dwina whereof Paulus iovius speaketh, he writeth as followeth.  
The province of Dwina and the river of the same name, is so named from the place where the rivers of Suchana and jug meating together, make one river so called. 
Dwina and Suchana.  For Dwina in the Moscovites tongue, signifieth two. This river by the course of a hundred miles, entereth into the North Ocean on that part where the said sea runneth by the coasts of Swecia and Norway, and dividethe Engronlande from the unknown land. This province situate in the full north, pertained in time cast to the signory of Novegorede. 
Gronland or Engronland.  From moscovia to the mouths of Dwina, are numbered. CCC. miles: Albeit as I have said, in the regions that are beyond Uolga, the account of the journey can not be well observed by reason of many marishes, rivers, and very great woods that lie in the way. Yet are we led by conjecture to think it to be scarcely two hundredth miles: 
Understand miles of Germany, that is leaques.  forasmuch as from moscovia to Uuolochda, from Uuolochda to Ustyug somewhat into the east: and last of all from Ustyug by the river Dwina, is the right passage to the north sea. This region, beside the castle of Colmogor and the city of Dwina, situate almost in the mid way between the springs and mouths of the river, and the castle of Pienega standing in the very mouths of Dwina, is utterly without towns and castles: yet hath it many villages which are far in sunder by reason of the barrenness of the soil. etc.  
In an other place he writeth, that Suchana and jug, after they are joined together in one, lose their first names and make the river Dwina. etc. But let us now return to the hystone of Paulus iovius.  
Unto Ustiuga, from the Permians, Pecerrians, Inugrians, 
Rich furs.  Ugolicans, and Pinnegians, people inhabiting the north and North-east provinces, are brought the precious furs of martens and Sables: Also the cases of wolves and foxes both white and black: And likewise the skins of the beasts called Ceruarii Lupi (that is) heart wolves, 
Lupi Ceruarii  being engendered either of a wolf and a hind, or a heart and a bitch wolf. These furs and skins. they exchange for divers other wares. The best kind of sables and of the finest hear wherewith now the vestures of princes are lined, 
Sables.  and the tender necks of delicate dames are covered with the express similitude of the living beast, are brought by the Permians and Pecerrians, which they themselves also receive at the hands of other that inhab●te the regions near unto the north Ocean. The Permians and Pecerrians, a little before hour time, did sacrifice to Idols after the manner of the gentiles: 
The mountains called hiperbore●.  but do now acknowledge christ their God. The passage to the Inugrians, and Ugolicans, is by certain rough 〈…〉, which perhaps are they that in old time we●e cawled Hyperborei. In the tops of these, are found the be●●e kinds of Falcons: whereof one kind (called Herodiu●) is white with spotted feathers. 
hawks of divers kinds.   
There are also ierfalcons, sakers, and peregrines, which were unknown to the ancient princes in their excessive and nice pleasures.  
Beyond those people whom I last named (being all tributaries to the kings of moscovia) are other nations the last of men, not known by any viages of the Moscovites, forasmuch as none of them h●ue passed to the Ocean, 
The passage from Mo●couia to cathay.  and are therefore known only by the fabulous narrations of merchants. Yet is it ap●arente that the river of Dividna or Dwina, drawing with it innumerable other rivers, runneth with a vehement course toward the north: and that the sea is there exceeding large: so that sailing by the coast of the right hand, ships may have passage from thence to Cathay as is thought by most likely conjecture, 
Cathay.  except there lie sum land in the way. For the region of Cathay per●eyneth to th'extreme and furthest parts of the east, situate almost in the parallel of Thracia, 
Master Eliot cauleth Cathay the region of sivarun.  and known to the Portugals in India when they sailed near thereunto by the regions of Sinara and Malacha to Aurea Chersonesus, and brought from thence certain vestures made of Sables skins, by which only argument it is apparent that the city of Cathay is not far from the coasts of Scythia.  

The Goths subverted the Roman Empire.  But when Demetrius was demanded whether either by the monuments of letters or by fame left them of their predecessors, they had any knowledge of the goths who now more than a thousand years sense subverted Thempire of the Roman Emperors, and defaced the city of Rome, he answered, 
The north regions conspired against the Romans.  that both the nation of the Goths of the name of king Totilas their chief captain, was of famous memory among them: And that divers nations of the north regions conspired to that expedition, and especially the Moscovites: Also that that army increased of the confluence of the Barbarous Livons and wandering Tartars: But that they were all called Goths forasmuch as the Goths that inhabited Scondania and Iselande, were the authors of that invasion. 
Moscovia   
And with these bounds are the Moscovites enclosed on every side, whom we think to be those people that Ptolemy called Modocas: but have doubtless at this day their name of the river Moscow which runneth through the chief city Mosca named also after the same. 
The city of Mosca.  This is the most famous city in moscovia, aswell for the situation thereof being in manner in the midst of the region, as also for the commodious opportunity of rivers, multitude of houses, and strong fence of so fair and goodly a castle. For the city is extended with a long tract of buildings by the banks of the river for the space of five miles. The houses are made all of timber, and are divided into parlours, chambers, & kichins of large rooms: yet neither of unseemly height or to low, but of decent measure and proportion. 
Richard chaste celer told me that these masts are somewhat hollow on the one side, and that the hole side of the next entereth into the same whereby they lie very close  For they have great trees apt for the purpose browght from the forest of Hercinia? of the which, made perfectly round like the masts of ships, and so laid one upon an other that they join at the ends in right angles, where being made very fast and sure, they frame their houses thereof of marvelous strength with smaule charges and in very short tyme. In manner all the houses have private gardens aswell for pleasure as commodity of herbs, whereby the circuit of the dispersed city appeareth very great. All the wards or quarters of the city, have their peculiar chapels. But in the chiefest and highest place thereof, is the Church of hour ladi of ample and goodly workmanship, which Aristoteles of Bononie, a man of singular knowledge and experience in architecture, builded more than lx years sense. At the very head of the city, 
The castle of Mo●ca.  a little river called Neglina which driveth many corn mills, enteryth into the river Moscus, and maketh almost an Island, in whose end is the castle with many strong towers and bulwarks, builded very fair by the device of Italien architecturs that are the masters of the kings works. In the fields about the city, is an incredible multitude o● hares and roe bucks, 
whitehares and roe burkes.  the which it is lawful for no man to chase or pursue with dogs or nets except only certain of the kings familiars and strange ambassadors to whom he giveth licence by special commandment. Almost three parts of the city is environed with two rivers, and the resytus with a large mote that receiveth plenty of water from the said rivers. The city is also defended on the other side with an other river named jausa, which falleth also into Moscus a little beneath the city. Furthermore Moscus running toward the South, falleth into the river Ocha or Occa much greater than itself at the town Columna, 
The river Ocha.  and not very far from thence Ocha itself increased with other rivers, unladeth his streams in the famous river Uolga, 
Uolga.  where at the place where they join, is situate the city of Novogrodia the less, 
Novogrodia.  so named in respect of the greater city of that name from whence was browght the first colony of the less city. Uolga called in old time Rha, 
Rha.  hath his original of the great marishes named the white lakes. 
The white lakes.  These are above moscovia between the north and the West, and send forth from them almost all the rivers that are dispersed into divers regions on every side, as we see of the Alpes from whose tops and springs descend the waters of whose concourse the rivers of Rhine, Po, and Rodanum, have their increase. For these marishes in the stead of mountains full of springs, minister abundant moisture, forasmuch as no mountains are yet found in that region by the long travails of men, in so much that many that have been studious of the owlde cosmography, suppose the Ryphean and Hyperborean mountains so often mentioned of the ancient writers, 
The Ryphean & hyperborean mountains.  to be fabulous. From these marishes therefore, the rivers of Dwina, Ocha, Moschus, Uolga, Tanais, and Borysthenes, have their original. The Tartars call Uolga Edel: Tanais they call Don: And Borysthenes is at this day called Neper. 
Tanais and Boristhenes.  This, a little beneath Taurica, runneth into the sea Euxinus. 
The sea Euxinus.  Tanais is received of the marishes of Meotis at the noble mart town Azoun. But Uolga leaving the city of Moscha toward the south, and running with a large circuit and great wyndynges and creeks first toward the east, then to the West, and lastly to the south, falleth with a full stream into the Caspian or Hyrcan sea. 
The Caspian sea.  Above the mouth of this, is a city of the Tartars called Cytrachan, which sum call Astrachan, 
Astrachan.  where martes are kept by the merchants of Media, 
Media.  Armenia, 
Armenia.  and Persia. 
Persia.  On the further bank of Uolga, there is a town of the Tartars called Casan, 
Casan.  of the which the Horda of the Casanite Tartars took their name. It is distant from the mouth of Uolga & the Caspian sea five hundredth miles. Above Casan. Cl. miles at the entrance of the river Sura, 
Sura.  Basilius that now reigneth, builded a town called Surcium, 
Surcium.  to th'intent that in those deserts, the merchants and travailers which certify the governors of the marches of the doings of the Tartars and the manners of that unquiet nation, may have a safe mansion among their customers.  
Themperours of moscovia at divers times, either moved thereto by occasion of things present, or for the desire they had to nobilitate new and obscure places, have kept the seat of their court and Empire in divers cities. For Novogrodia which lieth toward the West and the Lyvon sea, 
Nouogrodi●.  not many years past, was the head city of moscovia, & obtained ever the chief dignity by reason of the incredible number of houses and edifies, with the opportunity of the large lake replenished with fish, and also for the fame of the most ancient and venerable temple which more than four hundredth years sense was dedicated to Sancta Sophia christ the son of God, 
The temple of Sancta Sophia.  according to the custom of the emperors of Byzantium now called Constantinople. Novogrodia is oppressed in manner with continual winter and darkness of long nights. 
The elevation of the pole at Novogrodia, & Moscovia.  For it hath the pole Arctic elevate above the Horizon threescore and four degrees: and is further from the Equinoctial than moscovia by almost vi degrees. By which difference of heaven, it is said that at the summer stay of the son, it is burnt with continual heat by reason of the short nights. 
heat by reason of short nights.   
The city also of Uolodemaria, 
The city of Uolodemaria  being more than two hundredth miles distant from Mosca toward the east, had the name of the chief city and kings town, whither the seat of Thempire was translated by the valiant Emperors for necessary considerations, that such aid, furniture, and requisites as appperteyne to the wars might be near at hand at such time as they kept continual war against the Tartars their borderers. For it is situate without Uolga, on the banks of the river Clesma, which falleth into Uolga. But Moscha, 
The city of Moscha.  aswell for those gifts and commodities whereof we have spoken, as also that it is situate in the midst of the most frequented place of all the region and Empire, and defended with the river and castle, hath in comparison to other cities been thowght moste worthy to be esteemed for the chief. Mo●cha is distant from Novogrodia five hundredth miles: and almost in the mid way is the city of Ottoferia (otherwise called Otwer or Tuwer) upon the river of Uolga. 
Otteferis.  
Uolga.  This river near unto the fountains and springs of the same, not yet increased by receiving so many other rivers, runneth but slowly and gently: And passeth from thence to Novogrodia through many woods and desolate plains. Furthermore from Novogrodia to Riga the next port of the Sarmatian ●ea, 
Riga.  is the journey of a thousand miles little more or less. This tract is thought to be more commodious than the other, because it hath many towns and the city of Plescovia in the way, 
The city of Plescovia.  being embraced with two rivers. From Riga (pertaining to the dominion of the great master of the wars of the Livons) to the city of Lubeck a port of Germany in the gulf of Cymbrica Chersonesus (now called Denmark) are numbered about a thousand miles of dangerous sailing. 
The city of Lubeke.   
From Rome to the city of Moscha, 
from Rome to Moscovia.  the distance is known to be two thousand and two hundredth miles by the nearest way passing by Ravenna, Taruisium, the Alpes of Carnica: Also Uillacum, Noricum, and Uienna of Pannonie: and from thence (passing over the river of Danubius) to Olmutium of the Marovians and to Craconia the chief city of Polony, are counted xi hundredth miles. From Cracovia to Uilna the head city of Lithuania, are counted five hundredth miles: and as many from that city to Smolenzko situate beyond Borysthenes, from whence to Moscha are counted six hundredth miles. The journey from Uilna by Smolenzko to Moscha, 
winter travail by ise & snow.  is travailed in winter with expedite sleds and incredible celerity upon the snows hardened with long frost and compact like Ice by reason of much wearing. But in summer, the plains can not be overpassed but by difficult and laborious travail. For when the snows by the continual heat of the son begin to melt and dissolve, they cause great marishes and quamyres able to entangle both horse and man, 
marishes in summer.  were it not that ways are made through the same with bridges and causeys of wood, and almost infinite labour. 
Other writers deny this.   
In all the region of moscovia, there is no vain or mine of gold or silver, or any other common metal except iron: neither yet is there any token of precious stones. And therefore they buy all those things of strangers. Nevertheless, this injury of nature is recompensed with abundance of rich furs, 
rich furs.  whose price by the wanton niceness of men is grown to such excess that the furs pertaining to one sort of apparel, 
The price of furs,  are now sold for a thousand crowns. But the time hath been that these have been bought better cheap when the furthest nations of the north being ignorant of our nice fineness and breathing desire toward effeminate and superfluous pleasures, exchanged the same with much simplicity often times for trifles and things of smaule value: In so much that commonly the Permians and Pecerrians, were accustomed to give so many skins of Sables for an Iren axe or hatchet as being tied hard together, 
how many sables skins for an axe.  the merchants of Moscovia could draw through the hole where the haft or handyll entereth into the same. But the Moscou●tes send into all parts of Europe the best kind of flax to make linen cloth, 
Flax.  and hemp for ropes: Also many ox hides, 
O●e hides.  and exceeding great masses of wax. 
wax.   
They proudly deny that the Roman church obtaineth the principate and pre-eminent authority of all other.  
They so abhor the nation of the jews, 
They abhor the jews.  that they detest the memory of them, and will in no condition admit them to dwell within their dominions: esteeming them as wicked and mischievous people that have of late tawght the Turks to make guns. Beside the books that they have of the ancient Greek doctors, 
Their books and religion.  they have also the commentaries and homilies of saint Ambrose, Augustine, Jerome, and Gregory, translated into the Illirian or Slavon tongue which agreeth with theirs. For they use both the Slavon tongue and letters, as do also the slavons, Dalmates, Bohemes, Pollones, and Lithuanes. This tongue is spread further than any other at this day. 
The Slavon tongue spread further than any other.  For it is familiar at Constantinople in the court of the Emperors of the Turks: and was of late hard in egypt among the Mamalukes in the court of the Soltane of Alcayre otherwise called Memphis or Babylon in Egipte. A great number of books of holy scripture a●e translated into this tongue by thindustry of saint Jerome and Cyrillus. Furthermore, beside the histories of their own countries, 
●●●nte Jerome was borne in salmen now cawled Sclavonia.  they have also books containing the facts of great Alexander and the Roman Emperors, and likewise of Marcus Antonius and Cleopatra. They have no manner of knowledge of philosophy, Astronomy, or speculative physic with other liberal sciences: But such are taken for physicians as profess that they have often times observed the virtue and quality of sum unknown herb.  
They number the years, not from the birth of christ, but from the beginning of the world. 
how they number the years.  And this they begin to account, not from the month of january, but from September.  
They have few and simple laws through out all the kingdom, 
Few and simple laws  made by the equity and conscience of their princes, and approved by the consent of wise and good men: and are therefore greatly for the wealth and quietness of the people forasmuch as it is not lawful to pervert them with any interpretations or cavillations of lawyers or attorneys. They punish thieves, rovers, privy pickers, and murderers.  
When they examine malefactors, they pour a great quantity of could water upon such as they suspect, which they say to be an intolerable kind of torment. But sometimes they manacle such as are stubborn, and will not confess apparent crimes.  
Their youth is exercised in divers kinds of games and plays resembeling the wars, 
The exercise of youth.  whereby they both practice policy and increase their strength. They use running both on horseback and afoot. Also running at the tilt, wresteling, and especially shooting. 
Shooting.  For they give rewards to such as excel therein.  
The Moscovites are universally of mean stature, 
The corporature of the Moscovites.  yet very square set and mightily brawned. They have all grey eyes long beards, short legs, and big bellies. They ride very short, and shoot backward very cunnyngely even as they fly. At home in their houses, their fare is rather plentiful then dainty. For their tables are furnished for a smaule price with all such kinds of meats as may be desired of such as are given to most excessive gluttony. 
Their fare.  Hens and ducks are bought for little silver pense the piece. There is incredible plenty of beasts and cattle both great and smaule. The flesh of beef that is killed in the midst of winter, is so congealed and frozen, that it putrifiethe not for the space of two moons. 
Flesh preserved long by reason of could.  Their best and most delicate dishes, are gotten by huntynge and hawking as with us. 
hawking and hunting.  For they take all sorts of wild beasts with hounds and divers kinds of nets. And with falcons and erens or eagles of a marvelous kind which the region of Pecerra bringeth forth unto them, they take not only pheasants and wild ducks, but also crane's and wild swans. They take also a foul of dark colour about the bigness of a goose with red overbrow, whose flesh in taste passeth the pleasantness of Pheasauntes. These in the Moscovites tongue are called Tetrao, which I suppose to be the same that Pliny cauleth Erythratao, known to the people of the Alpes, and especially to the Rhetians which inhabit the lands about the springs of the river Abdua. The river of Uolga ministereth unto them great fishes and of pleasant taste: 
Plenty of fish.  especially sturgeons or rather a kind of fish like unto sturgeons: which in the winter season being enclosed in Ice, are long reserved fresh and uncorrupt. 
fish long reserved in Ise.  Of other kinds of fishes, they take in manner an incredible multitude in the white lakes whereof we have spoken before. And whereas they utterly lack native wines, 
wine.  they use such as are browght from other places. And this only in certain feasts and holy mysteries. Especially the pleasant Maluasies of the Island of Creta now called Candy, 
Malvasy.  are had in most honour: and used either as medicens or for a show of excessive abundance, forasmuch as it is in manner a miracle that wines browght from Candy by the straights of Hercules pillars and the Islands of Gades, 
All the north part of the firm land was called Scythia ●nd the people Scythyans.  & tossed with such floods of the enclosed Ocean, should be droonke among the Scythian snows in their native purity and pleasantness.  
The common people drink meed made of honey & hops sodden together, which they keep long in pitched barrels where the goodness increaseth with age. They use also beer and ale as do the Germans and Polones. They are accustomed for delycatenes n● summer to cool their beer and meed with putting Ice therein, 
Drink cooled with Ise.  which the noble men reserve in their sellars in great quantity for the same purpose. sum there are that delight greatly in the juice that is pressed out of cherries before they be full ripe: 
wine of cherries.  which they affirm to have the colour of clear and ruddy wine with a very pleasant taste.  
Their wives and women, 
Their women.  are not with them in such honour as they are in other nations. For they use them in manner in the place of servants. The noble men and gentlemen, do diligently observe their walks and have an eye to their chastity. They are seldom bidden forth to any feasts: nether are permitted to resort to churches far of, or to walk abroad without sum grea●e consideration. But the common sort of women, are easily and for a smaule price alured to lechery even of strangers: by reason whereof, the gentlemen do little or nothing esteem them.  
john the father of king Basilius died more than twenty years sense. He married Sophia the daughter of Thomas Paleologus who reigned far in P●loponnesus (now called Morea) and was brother to Themperor of constantinople. 
Thomas Paleologus.  She was then at Rome when Thomas her father was driven out of Grecia by the turks. 
The conquest of the turks in Grecia.  Of her were five children borne, as Basilius himself, George, Demetrius, simeon, and Andreas. Basilius took to wife Salomonia the daughter of George Soborovius a man of singular fidelity and wisdom & one of his counsel. The excellent virtues of wh●ch woman, only barrenness obscured.  
When the princes of moscovia delyberat to marry, their custom is to have choice of the virgins in the realm, 
how the Princes chu●e their wives.  & to cause such as are of most fair and beautiful visage and parsonage with manners & virtues according, to be browght before them. Which afterward they commit to certain faithful men and grave matrons to be further viewed, in so much that they leave no part of them unserched. Of these, she whom the prince most liketh, is pronounced worthy to be his wife, not without great and careful expectation of their parents, living for that time between hope and fear. The other virgins also which stood in election and contended in beauty and integrity of manners, are often times the same day to gratyfye the prince, married to his noble men, gentellmen, and capitains: whereby it sometimes cometh to pass that while the princes contemn the lineage of royal descente, such as are borne of humble parentage, are exalted to the degree of princely estate, In like manner as Themperours of the turks were accustomed to be chosen by comeliness of parsonage and warly prows.  
Basilius was under th'age of forty and seven years, 
Duke Basilius.  of cu●ly parsonage, singular virtue, and princely qualities, by all means studious for the prosperity and commodities of his subjects. Furthermore in benevolence, liberality and good success in his doings, to be preferred before his progenitors. For when he had vi years kept war with the Lyvons that moved lxxii confetherate cities to the cause of that war, he obtained the victory and departed with few conditions of peace rather given then accepted. 
war between the Polones and Mo●chouites.  Also at the beginning of his reign, he put the Polones to flight and took prisoner Constantine the captain of the Ruthens whom he brought to Moscovia tied in chains. But shortly after at the river Boristhenes above the city of Orsa, he himself was overcome in a great battle by the same Constantine whom he had dismissed: Yet so, that the town of Smolenzko which the Moscovites possessed before and was now won by the Polons, s●ulde still pertain to the dominions of Basilius. But against the Tartars, 
war between the Moschovites & Tartars.  and especially the Tartars of Europe called the Precopites, the Moscovites have often times kept war with good success, in revenge of th'injuries done to them by their incursions.  
Basilius is accustomed to bring to the field more than a hundredth and fifty thousand horsemen divided into three bands and following the banners or ensigns of their captains in order of battle. 
The Muscovites' army. Their banner.  On the banner of the kings wing, is figured the image of joshua the captain of the Hebrews at whose prayer the son prolonged the day and steyde his course as witness the histories of holy scripture. Armies of footmen are in manner to no use in those great wildernesses, aswell for their apparel being lose and long, as also for the custom of their enemies, who in their wars trust rather to the swiftness of their light horses then to try the matter in a pight field.  
Their horses are of less than mean stature: 
Their horses and horsemen.  but very strong and swift. Their horsemen are armed with pikes, rivets, mazes of Iren and arrows. Few have hooked swords. 
Their armure.  Their bodies are defended with round Targets after the manner of the Turks of Asia: or with bending and cornarde targets after the manner of the Greeks: Also with coats of mail, brygantynes, and sharp helmets. Basilius did furthermore institute a band of harquebusiers on horseback: 
harquebusiers.  and caused many great brazen pieces to be made by the woorkemanshype of certain italians: 
Guns.  and the same with their stocks & wheels to be placed in the castle of Mosca.  
The king himself with princely magnificence & singular familiarity (wherewith nevertheless no part of the majesty of a king is violate) is accustomed to dine openly with his noble men and strange ambassadors in his own chamber of presence where is seen A marvelous quantity of silver and guilt plate standing upon two great and high cubbardes in the same chamber. 
The Prince dineth openly.  
Sigismundus saith that much of this is gold.  He hath not about him any other guard for the custody of his person saving only his accustomed family. For watch and ward is diligently kept of the faithful multitude of the citizens: In so much that every ward or quarter of the city is enclosed with gates rails, 
The custody of the city.  and bars: neither is it lawful for any man rashly to walk in the city in the night, or without light. All the court consisteth of noble men, 
The duke's court.  gentlemen, and choice soldiers which are called out of every region by their towns and villages, and commanded to wait course by course at certain moons appointed. Furthermore when war is proclaimed, all the army is collected both of the owlde soldiers and by mustering of new in all provinces. For the lieutenants and capitains of the army, are accustomed in all cities to muster the youth, and to admit to th'order of soldiers such as they think able to serve the turn. their wages is paid them of the common treasury of every province which is gathered and partly paid also in the time of peace although it be but little. 
Soldiers wages of the common treasury.  But such as are assigned to the wars, are free from all tributes, and enjoy certain other privileges whereby they may the more gladly & cheerfully serve their king and defend their country. For in the time of war, occasion is ministered to show true virtue and manhodde, where in so great and necessary an institituon, every man according to his approved activity and ingenious forwardness, may obtain the fortune either of perpetual honour or ignominy.  
Vix olim ulla fides referentibus horrida regna  
Moschorum, & Ponti, res glacialis erat.  
Nunc Iouio autore, ill● oculis lustramus, et urbes.  
Et nemora, et mon●es cernimus et flwios.  
Moschovian, monumenta iovi, tua culta reuoluen●.  
Coepi alios mund●s credere Democriti.  

¶ Other notable things as concerning moscovia: gathered out of the books of Sigismundus Liberus. Note that when he saith miles, he meaneth leaques.  
FRom whence Russia had the name, 
Russia.  there are divers opinions. Sume think that it was so named of one Russus the son or nevie of Lech the king of the Polons. Other affirm that it was so called of a certain old town named Russus not far from Novogoroda or Novogardia the more.  
Sum also think that it was so called of the brown colour of the nation. 
The brown colour of the Russes.  But the moscovians confute all these opinions as untrue: Affirming that this nation was in old time called Rosseia as a nation dispersed, as the name itself doth declare. For Rosseia in the Ruthens tongue, 
Rossei●.  doth signify dispersed or scattered. The which thing to be true, divers other people commyxt with thinhabitants, and divers provinces lying here and there between divers parts of Russia do plainly declare. But whence so ever they took their name, doubtless all the people that use the Slavon tongue, 
The Slavon tongue spreadeth far.  and profess the faith of christ after the manner of the Greeks, (called in their common language Russi, and in the Latin tongue Rutheni) are increased to such a multitude that they have either expulsed all the nations that lie beewene them, or drawn them to their manner of living, in so much that they are now called all Rutheni by one common name.  
Furthermore the Slavon tongue (which at this day is somewhat corruptly called Slavon) runneth exceeding fa●, as used of the Dalmates, Bossuenser, Croatians, Istri●ns, and by a long tract of the sea Adriatic unto Forum julii: Of the Caruians also whom the venetians call Charsos: and likewise of the Carniolans and Carinthians unto the river Draws: Furthermore of the Stirians within Gretzium and by Muera unto Danubius and from thence of the Mysians, Seruians, Bulgarians, and other inhabiting even unto Constantinople: Furthermore of the Bohemians, Lusacians, Silesians, Moranians, and thinhabitants near unto the river Uagus in the kingdom of Hungary: The Polons also and the Ruthenians whose Empire reacheth very far: likewise the Circasians and Quinquemontanians unto Pontus: and is from thence used in the north parts of Germany among the remanent of the Uandales inhabiting here and there. 
Uandales.  All which nations although they acknowleage themselves to be slavons, yet the germans taking the denomination only of the Uandales, call all them that use the Slavon tongue, Uuenden, Uuinden, or Uuindysh.  
Of the Princes that now reign in Russia, 
The Prince's of Russia.  the chief is the great Duke of moscovia who possesseth the greatest part thereof. The second is the great duke of Lithuania: and the third the king of Polony, who now obtaineth the dominion of Polony and Lithuania.  
In authority and dominion over his subjects, the prince of Moscovy passeth all the monarch of the world. 
The duke of Moscovia.  For he depriveth all his noble men and gentlemen of all their holds and munitions at his pleasure. He trusteth not his own brethren, but oppresseth all with like servitude. In so much that whom so ever he commandeth either to remain with him in the court, or to go to the wars, or sendeth on embassage, they are compelled to be at their own charges, except the young gentlemen the sons of the Boiarons, that is, the noble men of the lowest degree. He usurpeth this authority aswell over the spirituality as the temporalty: constituting what him lysteth of the goods and life of all men. Of his counsilers there is not one that dare dissent from him in any thing. They openly confess that the will of the prince is the will of god: and therefore call him the key bearer and chamberlain of god, and believe him to be the executor of gods will. By reason whereof, the prince himself when any petition is made to him for the delivery of any captive, is accustomed accustomed to answer: When god commandeth he shallbe delivered. Likewise when any asketh a question of an uncertain or doubtful thing, their custom is to answer thus: God knoweth and the great prince. It is uncertain whether the cruelty and fierceness of the nation do require so tyrannous a prince, or whether by the tyranny of the prince, the nation is made so fierce and cruel.  
Basilius the son of john, was the first that took upon him the name and title of a king in this manner: The great lord Basilius, by the grace of god king and lord of all Russia and the great duke of Uuolodimaria, Moscovia, Novogardia. etc.  
Furthermore, whereas now this prince is called an Emperor, 
why the duke of Mo●couia was called an Emperor  I have thought good to show the title and cause of this error. Note therefore that Czar in the Ruthens tongue signifieth a king, whereas in the language of the slavons, Pollons, Bohemes, and other, the same word Czar, signifieth Cesar by which name Themperours have been commonly called. For both they and the slavons that are under the kingdom of Hungary, call a king by an other name: as sum Crall, other Kyrall, and sum Koroll: but think that only an Emperor is called Czar. Whereby it came to pass that the Ruthene or Moscovite interpreters hearing their prince to be so called of strange nations, began themselves also to name him an Emperor, and think the name of Czar to be more worthy than the name of a king, although they signify all one thing. But who so will read all their histories and books of holy scripture, 
The great Turk.  shall find that a king is called Czar, and an Emperor Kessar. By the like error Themperor of the Turks is called Czar, who nevertheless of antiquity used no higher title than the name of a king, expressed by this word Czar. And hereof the Turks of Europe that use the Slavon tongue, call the city of Constantinople Czargead, (that is) the kings city.  
Sum call the prince of moscovy the white king, 
The white king.  which I think to proceed of the white caps, or other tyrementes they wear on their heads, like as they call the king of Percia Kisilpassa (that is) red head. 
The duke of Mo●couia his till.  He useth the title of a king when he writeth or sendeth to Rome, the Emperor, the pope, the king of Suetia and Denmacke, the great master of Prussia and Livonia, and also to the great Turk as I have been credibly informed: but he is not called king of any of them, except perhaps of the Livons. Yet by reason of his later conquests, sum have thought him worthy the name of a king or rather of an Emperor because he hath kings under his Empire.  
To the king of Polone, he useth this title: The great lord Basilius by the grace of god, lord of all Russia, and great duke of Uuolodimeria, Moscovia, Novogardia. etc. leaving out the title of a king. For none of them vouchsafeth to receive the letters of the other augmented with any new title, as I knew by experience at my being in moscovia, at which time Sigismundus the king of Polone sent him his letters augmented with the title of the duke of Masovia, wherewith he was not a little offended.  
They glory in their histories that before Uuolodimeria and Olha, the land of Ru●sia was baptized and blessed of saint Andrew th'apostle of christ, 
Russia baptized by saint Andrew the Apostle.  affirming that he came from Grecia to the mouths of the river Borysthenes: and that he sailed up the river to the mountains where as is now Chiovia; and that there he blessed all the land and placed his cross, prophesying also that the grace of god should be great there, and that there should be many churches of Christian men: Likewise that he afterward came to the springs of Borysthenes unto the great lake Uuolok, and by the river Lovat descended into the lake Ilmer: from whence by the river Uuolcon which runneth out of the same lake, he came to Novogardia: and passed from thence by the same river to the lake Ladoga and the river Heva, and so unto the sea which they call Uuaretzkoia, being the same that we call the German sea, between Uuinlandia or Finlandia and Liu●nia, by the which he sailed to Rome, and was at the last crucified for christ his gospel in Peloponnesus by the tyranny of Agus Antipater, as their crownacles make mention.  
The prince every second or third year, causeth a muster to be taken of the sons of the Boiarons, 
The Moscovites wars  and taketh an accoumpt● both of their number and how many horses and men every of them is able to make: and then appointeth a certain stipend to such as are able further to bear their own charges in the wars. They have seldom any rest or quietness. For they either keep war with the Lithuanians. livonians, Suetians, or Tartars of Casan. Or if it so chance that the prince keep no war, yet doth he yearly appoint garrysons of twenty thousand men in places about Tanais and Occa to repress the incursions and robberies of the European Tartar's called Precopites.  
As in other matters, 
divers manners of divers people in the ware.  even so in thorder of warfare there is great diversity among men. For the Moscovian as soon as he beginneth to fly, thinketh of none other succour but putteth all his confidence therein. Being pursued or taken of his enemy, he neither defendeth himself nor desirethe pardon.  
The Tartar cast of from his horse, spoiled of all his armure & weapons, and also sore wounded, defendeth himself with hands, feet, and teeth, and by all means he may, until his strength and spirit fail him.  
The Turk, when he seeth himself destitute of all help and hope to escape, doth humbly desire pardon, casting away his weapons & armure, and reching forth to the victorer his hands joined together to be bound, hoping by captivity to save his life.  
The Moscovites in placeinge their army choose them a large plain where the best of them pitch their tents & the other make than certain arbours of bouwes fixed in the ground, 
The Moscovytes army.  bending together the tops thereof, which they cover with their cloaks to defend themselves, their bows, arrows, saddyles, and other their necessaries from rain. They put forth their horses to pasture, and for that cause have their tents so far in sunder, which they fortify neither with carts or trenches or any other impediment, except perhaps the place be defended by nature as with woods, rivers and marishes.  
It may perhaps seem strange how he maintaineth him and his so long with so smaule an army as I have said. 
how he maintaineth his army.  I will now therefore briefly declare their sparing and frugality. He that hath six or sometimes more horses, useth one of them as A pack horse to bear all their necessaries, eyes. He hath also in a bag of two or three spanes long, the flower or meal of the grain called mill: and viii or x. pounds weight of swines flesh powdered. He hath likewise A bag of salt, mixed with pepper if he be rich. Furthermore every man carrieth with him A hatchet, A fire box, and a brazen pot: so that if they chance to come to any place where they can find no fruits, garlic, onions or flesh, they kindle a fire and fill their pots with water whereunto they put a spoonful of meal with a quantity of salt, and make pottage thereof, wherewith the master and all his servants live contented. But if the master be very hungary he eateth all alone, and the servants are sometimes enforced to fast for the space of two or three days. And if the master intend to far somewhat more delicately, than he addeth thereto a little portion of swines flesh. I speak not this of the best of them, but of such as are of the mean sort. The governors and capitains of th'army, do sometimes bid the poorer sort to their tables: where they feed themselves so well, that they fast two or three days after. When they have fruits, garlic, and onions, they can well forbear all other meats. proceeding forward to the battle, they put more confidence in their multitude, and with what great armies they assail their enemies, them either in the strength and valyantenesse of their soldiers, or in well instructing their army: and fight better afar of, then at hand: and therefore study how to cirumvent or enclose their enemies and to assail them on the back half.  

Instruments of war.  They have many trumpiters: The which while they blow all at once after their manner, make A marvelous strange noise. They have also an other kind of instruments which they call Szurna. These they blow without seizing for the space of an hour together, so tempering the same and holding in the wind while they draw more, that the noise seemeth continual without intermyssion. 
The Moscovites and Tartars apparel.   
They use all one manner of apparel: as long coats without pleyghtes and with narrow sleeves after the manner of the Hungaryans. These the Christians use to button on the right side: and the Tartars (using the like) button them on the left side. They wear red and short buskyns that reach not to their knees: and have the souls thereof defended with plates of Iren. In manner all their shirts are wrought with divers colours about the neck: and have the collars and ruffs bysette with little round baules like beads, of silver or gilted copper, and sometime pearls also. They gird themselves beneath the belly even as low as their privy members, that they may seem more boorely which they greatly esteem, as do at this day the spaniards, italians, and Almains.  
The province of Moscovia is neither very large nor fruitful, 
The province of Moscovia.  forasmuch as the fertylytye is hindered with sandy ground which either with to much dryness or moister killeth the corn. Furthermore the immoderate and sharp untemperateness of the air while the could of the winter overcommethe the heat of the son, 
Extreme could.  sometimes doth not suffer the corn to ripe. For the could is there sometime so extreme, that like as with us in summer by reason of heat, even so there by extreme could the earth hath many great chynkes or breaches. Water also cast into the air, and spittle falling from one mouth, are frozen before they touch the ground. I myself, when I came thither in the year 1526. saw the branches of fruitful trees wythyred by the could of the winter before, which was so extreme that many of their wagoners or carries (whom they call Gonecz) were found frozen to death in their sleds. There were sum that at the same time leading and driving their cattle from the next villages to moscovia, died by the way with their beasts through thextremity of the could. Furthermore, the same year many players that were accustomed to wander about the country with dancing bears, were found dead in the high ways. Wild bears also enforced thereto by famine, left the woods and ran here and there into divers villages and houses: At whose coming while the men of the country forsook their houses and fled into the fields, many of them perished through the vehemency of the could. Again, it sometimes so chanceth that in summer the heat is as extreme: 
Extreme heat in cold regions.  as in the year .1525. in the which almost all kinds of pulse and grain were scorched and burnt: and such a dearth of corn followed that drought, that that which before was bowght for three dengas, was afterward sold for .xx, or xxx Furthermore also, many villages, woods, and stacks of corn, were set on fire by thextreme heat: The smoke whereof so filled the region, that the eyes of many were sore hurt thereby. There arose also as it were a dark and thick mist without smoke which so molested the eyes, that many lost their sight thereby.  
They sow and narysshe the seeds of melons with great diligence in certain raised beds mixed with doonge: whereby they find a remedy both against extreme could and heat. For if the heat exceed, they make certain rifts in the beds as it were breathing places lest the seeds should be suffocate with to much heat. And if the could be extreme it is tempered with the heat of the muck or dung.  

little beasts.  Their beasts are much less than ours: yet not all without horns as one hath written. For I have there seen oxen, kine, goats, and rams all with horns.  
Not far from the city of Moscha, are certain monasteries which a far of, seem like unto a city. They say that in this city is an incredible number of houses: 
The city of Mo●couia or Mosca.  And that the sixth year before my coming thither, the prince caused them to be numbered, and found them to be more than one and forty thousand and five hundredth houses. The city is very large and wide: and also very slabby and miry. By reason whereof it hath many bridges and causeys.  
The air of the region is so wholesome, 
wholesome air.  that beyond the springs of Tanais, especially toward the north and a great part also toward the east, the pestilence hath not been hard of sense the memory of man. Yet have they sometimes a disease in their bowels and heads not much unlike the pestilence. This disease they call a heat: wherewith such as are taken, die within few days.  

A rich spoil.  Sum write that john the duke of moscovia and son of Basilius, under the pretence of religion sacked & spoiled, the city of Novogardia: and carried with him from thence to moscovia three hundredth sleds laden with gold, silver, and precious stones of the goods of the archbishop, the merchants, citizens, and strangers.  
Solowki is an Island situate in the north sea viii leaques from the continent between: 
The ●land of Solowki.  Dwina and the province of Corela. How far it is distant from moscovia, can not be well known by reason of many sennes, marishes, Woods, and desolate places lying in the way. Albeit, sum say that it is not three hundredth leaques from moscovia, & two hundredth from Bieloiesero. 
Bieloiesero.  In this Island is made great plenty of salt: and it hath in it a monastery into the which it is not lawful for any woman or virgin to enter.  
There is also great fishing for hearing. They say that here the son at the summer Equinoctial, 
The length of the day.  shineth continually except two hours.  
Demetriowe, is a city with a castle, distant from moscovia xii. leaques declining from the west somewhat toward the north. By this runneth the river Lachroma that runneth in to the river of Sest. Sest also receiveth the river Dubna which unladeth itself in Uolga. And by the commodity of thus many rivers, many rich merchandise are browght without great labour or difficulty from the caspian sea by the river Uolga to Moscovia and divers other provinces & cities about the same. 
The trade from Moscocovia to the Caspian sea.   
Bieloiesero, a city with a castle, is situate at a lake of the same name. For Bieloiesero in the Moscovites tongue, signifieth a white lake. 
Bieloiesero or the white lakes.  The city standeth not in the lake as sum have said. Yet is it so environed with marishes that it may seem to be inexpugnable: In consideration whereof, the princes of Moscovia are accustomed to keep their treasure there. Bieloiesero is from moscovia, a hundredth leaques, and as much from Novogardia the great. The lake itself, is xii leaques in length and as much in breadth: and hath (as they say) three hundredth rivers falling into it. Th'inhabitants of this place, have a peculiar language, although now in manner all speak the Moscovites tongue. The longest day here in the summer Equinoctial, 
Diversity of temperament in small distance.  is said to consist of xix hours. A man of great name and credit told me, that at the beginning of the spring when the trees began now to be green, he went in post from moscovia to Bieloiesero: And passing over the river Uolga, found the region there so covered with Ice and snow, that he was fain to dispatch the residue of his journey on fleades. And although the winter be longer there, yet do the fruits wax ripe and are gathered even at the same time that they are in Moscovia. With in an arrow shot of the lake, 
A lake of brimstone.  there is an other lake that bringeth forth brimstone. which a certain river running out of the same, carrieth with it in great quantity floating above the water like a scoomme. Yet through the ignorance of the people, they have no commodity thereby.  
The people that inhabit the regions lying far north and east from moscovia, exchange their furs for apparel, knives, needles, spoons, hatchets, and such at her necessary wares. 
Exchange of furs for other ware.  For they have not the use of gold and silver.   

¶ The description of the regions, people, and rivers, lying North and east from Moscovia: As the way from moscovia to the river Petzora, and the province of jugaria, or juhra: And from thence to the river Obi. Likewise the description of other countries and regions, even unto Thempire of the great Cham of Cathay.  
THe dominion of the Prince of Moscovia reacheth far toward the east and north unto the places which we will now describe. As concerning which thing, 
The dominion of the duke of Moscovia.  I translated a book that was presented unto me in the Moscovites tongue, and have hear made a brief rehearsal of the same. I will first therefore describe the journey from moscovia to Petzora, and so to jugaria and Obi.  
From moscovia to the city of Uuolochda, 
Uuolochda.  are numbered fifty Werstes, 
werste.  one Werst containing almost the space of an italian mile. From Uuolochda to Ustiug toward the right hand descending with the course of the river of Uuolochda and Suchana with whom it joineth, 
Ustiug.  are counted five hundredth Werstes: where within two Werstes of the town called Strelze and hard by the city of Ustiug Suchana joineth. jug which runneth from the south: from whose mouth unto the springs of the same, are numbered five hundreth Werstles.  
Note that whereas here before the autour numbereth but fifty werstes from Moscovia to Uuolochda, it seemeth that the place is corrupted by the Printers mistaking one word for an other, as Quinquaginta, which is fifty, for Quingenta, which is five hundredth. For the distance is no less from moscovia to Uuolochda, then is from Uuolochda to Ustiug, which is five hundreh werstes.  
But Suchana and jug after they join together, 
Suchana.  
jug.  lose their first names and make both one river named Dwina, 
Dwina.  by the which the passage to the city of Colmogor containeth five hundredth Werstes: 
Colmogor.  from whence in the space of six days journey, Dwina entereth into the north Ocean at vi mouths, And the greatest part of this journey consisteth by navigation. For by land, from Uuolochda unto Colmogor, passing over the river Uuaga, are a thousand Werstes. Not far from Colmogor, the river Pienega running from the east on the right hand for the space of seven hundredth Werstes, falleth into Dwina. From Dwina by the river Pienega by the space of two hundredth Werstes, 
Pieneg●.  they come to a place called Nicolsi: 
Nicolai.  from whence within half a wert, ships have passage into the river Kuluio, 
Kuluio.  which hath his original from a lake of the same name toward the north, from whose springs is viii days viage to the mouth of the same where it entereth into the Ocean.  
Sailing by the coasts of the right hand the sea, 
The regions by the North sea.  they pass by the regions of Stanuwische, Calunczscho, and Apnu. And sailing about the promontory or cape of Chorogoski Nosz, Stanuwische, Camenckh, and Tolstickh, they come at the length into the river Mezen, and from thence in the space of six days to a village of the same name, standing in the mouth of the river Pieza: 
Pieza.  by the which again ascending toward the left hand and summer East, they come to the river Piescoya. 
Piescoia.  From whence sailing for the space of five Werstes, they come into two lakes in the which are seen two ways: whereof one on the right side, goeth to the river Rubicho, 
Rubicho.  by the which they pass to the river Czircho. Other by an other and shorter way, bring their ships from the lake directly into Czircho: 
Czircho.  From whence, except they be hindered by tempest, they come in the space of three weeks to the river and mouth of Czilma, 
C●ilma.  flowing into the great river Petzora, 
Petzora.  which in that place is two Werstes in breadth. Sailing from hence, they come in the space of six days to the town and castle of Pustoosero, 
Pustoosero.  near unto the which, Petzora entereth into the north Ocean at six mouths. The inhabitants of this place, are men of simple wit. They received the faith of christ, and were baptized in the year M.D.xviii.  
From the mouth of Czilma unto the mouth of the river Ussa, 
Ussa.  going by Petzora, is one months viage. Ussa hath his springs in the mountain Poyas Semnoi, being on the left hand toward the soommer East, 
Cingulus mundi.  and springeth out of a great stone of the same mountain, called Camen Bolschoi. From the springs of Ussa to the mouths of the same, are numbered more than a thousand Werstes. Furthermore Petzora runneth from this south winter part, from whence ascending from the mouths of Ussa unto the mouths of the river Stzuchogora, 
Stzuchogora.  is three weeks viage. They that described this viage, said that they rested between the mouths of the rivers of Stzuchogora and Potzscheriema: 
Potzscheriema.  and left their victuals there which they browght with them from Russia. Beyond the rivers of Petzora and Stzuchogora toward the mountain Camenipoias' and the sea with the Islands there about and the castle of Pustoosero, 
Camenipoias'.  are divers and innumerable nations which by one common name are called Samoged (that is) such as eat themselves. 
Samoged.  They have great increase of fowls, birds, & divers kinds of beasts: 
Fowls and beasts.  as Sables, Marterns, Bevers, Otters, Hermelines, Squyrels: and in the Ocean the beast called Mors: Also Uess, white bears, wolves, hares, Equiwoduani, great whales, and a fish called Semfi, with divers other. The people of these nations, come not to Moscovia. For they are wild, 
wild people.  and fly the company & society of other men.  
From the mouths of Stzuchogora sailing up the river unto Poiassa, 
Poiassa.  Artawische, Cameni, and Poiassa the greater, is three weeks viage. Furthermore the ascending to th● mount Camen, 
Camen.  is three days journey: from the which, descending, they come to the river Artawischa, 
Artawischa.  and from thence to the river Sibut, 
Sibut.  from whence they pass to the castle of Lepin, 
Lepin.  and from Lepin to the river Sossa. The people that inhabit the region by this river, are called Uuogolici. Leaving Sossa on the right hand,, 
So●sa.  they come to the great river Oby, 
Ob●.  that springeth out of the lake Kitaisko 
Kitaisko.  the which with all the haste they could make, they could scarcely pass over in one day, the river being of such breadth that it reacheth fourscore Werstes. The people also that dwell about this river, are called Uuogoli●i and Ugritzschi. 
Uuogolici.  From the castle of Ohea ascending by the river of Oby, unto the river Irtische into the which Sossa entereth, 
Irtische.  is three moonethes' journey. In these places are two castles named jerom and Lumen, 
jeron.  
●umem.  kept by certain lords called Knesi juhorski. being tributaries to the great duke of moscovia as they say. Here are divers kinds of beasts and furs.  
from the mouth of the river Irtische to the Castle of Grustina, 
Grustina.  is two months journey: from whence to the lake Kitai by the river Oby (which I said to have his springs in this lake) is more than three months journey. 
Kitai.  From this lake come many black men, lacking those of common speech. 
Black men without speech.  They bring with them divers wares, and especially pearls and precious stones, which they sell to the people called Grustintzi and Serponowtzi. These have their name of the castle Serponow, 
Serponowe.  situate in the mountains of Lucomorya beyond the river Obi. 
Lucomoria.  They say that to the men of Lucomorya, chanceth a marvelous thing and incredible. 
Men that yearly die and revive.  For they affirm, that they die yearly at the xxvii day of November, being the feast of saint George among the Moscovytes: and that at the next spring about the xxiiii day of Apryll, they revive again as do frogs.  
With these also, the people of Grustintzi and Serponowtzi, 
A strange trade of merchandise.  exercise a new and strange kind of trade. For when the accustomed time of their dying, or rather of sleeping, approacheth, they leave their wares in certain places appointed, which the Grustintzi and Serponowtzi carry away leaving other wares of equal value in their places: which if the dead men at the time of their revyuyne perceive to be of unequal price, they require their own again: by reason whereof much strife and fight is between them.  
From the river of Obi descending toward the left hand, 
Obi.  are the people called Calami, 
Calami.  which came thither from Obiowa and Pogosa. Beneath Obi, about Aurea Anus (that is the golden old wife) are the rivers Sossa, Beres, Uua, 
Rivers.  and Danadim, all which spring out of the mountain Camen, Bolschega, Poiassa, and the rocks joining to the same.  
All the nations that inhabit from these rivers of Aurea Anus, are subject to the prince of moscovia,  
Aurea Anus called in the Moscovites tongue Slata Baba, 
Aurea Anus.  is an Idol at the mouths of Obi in the province of Obdora, 
Obdora.  standing on the furthest bank toward the sea. Along by the banks of Obrand the rivers near there about, are here and there many castles and fortresses, all the lords whereof are subject to the prince of moscovia, as they say.  
They say also, or rather fable, that the Idol called Aurea Anus, is an Image like unto an owlde wife having a child in ●er lap: and that there is now seen an other infant which they say to be her nevie: Also that there are certain instruments that make a continual sound like the noise of trumpets. The which if it so be, I think it to be by reason of the wind blowing continually into the hollow places of those instruments.  
The river Cousin, 
Cousin.  falleth out of the mountains into Lucomoria. In the mouth of this, is a castle. Whither from the springs of the great river Cousin, is two moons by age. Furthermore from the springs of the same river, the river Cassima hath his original: 
Cassima.  which running through Lucomoria, falleth into the great river Tachnin, 
Tachnin.  beyond the which (as is said) dwell men of prodigious ●hape, of whom sum are overgrown which hear like wild beasts: other have heads like dogs, 
People of Monstrous shape.  and other their faces in their breasts without necks, and with long hands also and without feet. 
A fish like a man.  There is likewise in the river Tachnin, a certain fish with head, eyes, nose, mouth, hands, fiete, 
Pliny writeth of the like fish.  & other members utterly of human shape, and yet without any voice, & pleasant to be eaten as are other fishes.  
All that I have hitherto rehearsed, I have translated out of the said joiney which was delivered me in the Moscovites tongue. In the which perhaps sum things may seem fabulous and in manner incredible, as of the doomme men and the dead revyuing, the Aurea Anus also, and the monstrous shapes of men, with the fish of human form: whereof unless I have made diligent inquisition, yet could I know nothing certain of any that had seen the same with their eyes, nevertheless to give further occasion to other to search the truth of these things, I have thowght good to make mention hereof.  
Noss in the Moscovites tongue signifieth a nose: and therefore they call all capes or points of land that reach into the sea, by the same name.  
The mountains about the river of Petzora, 
Mountains.  are called Semnoi Poyas, or Lingulus mundi: (that is) the girdle of the world, or of the earth.  
Kithay, is a lake of whom the great Chan of CATHAY whom the Moscovians call Czar Kythaiski, 
The great Chan of Cathay.  hath his name. For Chan in the Tartars language signifieth a king.  
The places of Lucomorya near unto the sea, 
Lucomoria.  are salvage, full of woods, and inhabited without any houses. And albeit that the author of this journey, said that many nations of Lucomorya are subject to the prince of moscovia, yet for as much as the kingdom of Tumen is near thereunto, 
Tumen.  whose prince is a Tartar and named in their tongue Tumenski Czar (that is) a king in Tumen, and hath of late done great damage to the prince of moscovia, it is most like that these nations should rather be subject unto him.  
Near unto the river Petzora, 
Petzora.  (whereof mention is made in this journey) is the city and castle of Papin or Papinowgorod, 
Papin.  whose inhabytauntes are named Papini, and have a private language differing from the Moscovites. Beyond this river, are exceeding high mountains, 
high mountains, supposed to be hyperborei, and Rhiphei.  reaching even unto the banks: whose ridgies or tops by reason of continual winds, are in manner utterly barren without grass or fruits. And although in divers places they have divers names, yet are they commonly called Cingulus Mundi, (that is) the world. In these mountains do ierfalcons breed, whereof I have spoken before. There grow also Ced●r trees, among the which are found the best and blackest kind of sables. And only these mountains are seen in all the dominions of the prince of moscovia, which perhaps are the same that the owld writers call Rhipheos or Hyperboreos, so named of the Greek word Hiper, (that is) under: and Boreas (that is) the north. For by reason they are covered with continual snow and frost, they can not without great difficulty be travailed and reach so far into the north, that they make the unknown land of Engroneland. 
Engronland.  The duke of Moscovia Basilius the son of john, sent on a time two of his captains named Simeon Pheodorowitz Kurbski, and Knes Peter Uschatoi, to search the places beyond these mountains and to subdue the nations therabowte. Kurbiki was yet alive at my being in Moscovia: and declared unto me that he spent xvii. days in ascending the mountain, and yet could not come to the ●oppe thereof, which in they● tongue is called Stolp (that is) a pillar. 
Stolp.  This mountain is extended into the Ocean unto the mouths of the rivers of Dwina and Pe●zora. But now having spoken thus much of the said journey, I will return to the dominions of moscovia with other regions lying eastward and south from the same toward the mighty Empire of CATHAY. 
Cathay.  But I will first speak somewhat briefly of the province of Rezan and the famous river of Tanais.  
The province of Rezan situate between the rivers of Occa and Tanais, 
The fruitful province of Re●an.  hath a city builded of wood not far from the bank of Occa. There was in it a castle named jaroslaw, 
jaroslaw.  whereof there now remaineth nothing but tokens of the olwd ruin. Not far from that city, the river Occa maketh an Island named Strub which was sumtym a great dukedom, whose prince was subject to none other. This province of Rezan is more fruitful than any other of the provinces of moscovia: In so much that in this (as they say) every grain of wheat bringeth forth two and sometimes more ears: whose stalks or straws grow so thick that horses can scarcely go through them, or quails fly out of them. There is great plenty of honey, 
honey.  fishes, fowls, birds, and wild beasts. The fruits also do far exceed the fruits of Moscovia. The people are bold & warlyk men.   

¶ Of the famous river of Tanais.  
From moscovia unto the castle of jaroslaw, and beyond for the space of almost xxiiii. leaques, runneth the river of Tanais, at a place called Donco, 
Donco.  where the merchants that trade to Asoph, 
Asoph.  Capha, 
Capha.  and Constantynople, 
Constantinople.  freight their ships: and this for the most part in autumn being a rayney time of the year. For Tanais here at other times of the year doth not so abound with water as to hear ships of any burden: This famous river of Tanais, divideth Europe from Asia: 
Tanais divideth Europe from Asia.  and hath his original or springs almost viii leaques from the city of Tulla toward the south inclining somewhat toward the east: 
The springs of Tanais.  and not out of the Riphean mountains as some have written: But out of a great lake named Iwanowosero (that is) the lake of john: 
A great lake.  being in length and breadth about .1500. Werstes in a wood which sum call Okonitzkilies, and other name it jepiphanowlies. And out of this lake, spring the two great rivers of Schat and Tanais. 
The river Schat.  Schat toward the West receiving into it the river of Uppa, runneth into the river of Occa between the West and the north. But Tanais at the first runneth directly East: and continueth his course between the kingdoms of Casan and Astrachan within six or seven leaques of Uolga: 
Casan.  
Astrachan.  And from thence bending toward the south, maketh the fens or marishes of Meotis. 
Meotis.  Furthermore, next unto his springs, is the city of Tulla: 
Tulla.  and upon the bank of the river almost three leaques above the mouths of the same, is the city of Asoph, which was first called Tanas. Four days journey above this, is a town called Achas, 
Achas.  situate hard by the same river: 
Fruitful regions about Tanais.  which the Moscovites call Don. I can not sufficiently praise this river for the exceeding abundance of good fishes, and fairness of the regions on both sides and banks, with plenty of holsoome herbs and sweet roots, beside divers and many fruitful trees growing in ●uche coomly order as though they had been set of purpose in gardens or archardes. There is also in manner every where such plenty of wild beasts, 
Plenty of wild beasts.  that they may easily be slain with arrows▪ In so much that such as travail by those regions, shall stand in need of none other thing to maintain their life but only fire and salt. 
Fire and salt.  In these parts, is no observation of miles, but of days journeys. But as far as I could conjecture, from the fountains or springs of Tanais unto the mouths of the same iorneyinge by land, are almost fourscore leaques. And sailing from Donco (from whence I said that Tanais was first navigable) in scarcely twenty days viage, 
where Tanais is first navygable.  they come to the city of Asoph tributary to the Turks: 
Asoph.  which is (as they say) five days journey from the straight of Taurica, otherwise called Precop. In this c●tie is a famous mart town, unto the which resort many merchants of divers nations, and from divers parts of the world. 
The mart of Asoph.  For, that all nations may the gladlier have recourse thither, free liberty of buying and selling is granted unto all: 
Liberty a●sureth strangers.  and that without the city every man may freely use his own and accustomed manner of living without punishment.  
Of the altars of great Alexander and julius Cesar which many writers make mention of in this place, 
The altars of Alexander and Cesar.  or of their ruins, I could have no certain knowledge of thinhabitants or any other that had oftentimes travailed these places. Furthermore the soldiers which the prince of Moscovia maintaineth there yearly to oppress thincursion of the Tartars, being of me demanded hereof, answered that they never saw or hard of any such thing. Nevertheless, they said that about the mouths of Tanais the less, four days journey from Asoph near unto a place called Sewerski, by the holy mountains, 
The holy mountains.  they saw certain images of stone and marble. Tanais the less, 
Tanais the less.  hath his springs in the dukedom of Sewerski: whereof it is called Donetz Sewerski: and falleth into Tanais three days journey above Asoph. But such as journey from moscovia to Asoph by land, 
From moscovia to Asoph.  they, passing over Tanais about the owlde and ruinated town of Donco, do somewhat turn from the south to the east: In the which place, if a right line be drawn from the mouths of Tanais to the spirnges of the same, Moscovia shallbe found to be in Asia and not in Europe. 
Moscovia in Asia and not in Europe.    

¶ More directly from Moscovia. to Cathay.  
THe great and large province of Permia, 
The province of Permia.  is dystante from moscovia two hundredth and fifty or (as sum say) three hundredth leaques directly between the East and North: And hath a city of the same name by the river Uischora which runneth ten leaques beneath Kamam. The journey by land can scarcely be travailed thither but in winter by reason of many rivers, marishes, 
marishes in summer.  and fens. But in summer, this journey is dispatched with more facility in boats or smaule ships by Uuolochda, Ustiug, and the river Uitzechda which runneth into Dwina xii leaques from Ustiug. 
Dwina.  
Ustiug.  But they that go from Permia to Ustiug, must sail up the river Uischora against the course of the stream: and passing over certain rivers, sometimes also conveying their boats into other rivers by land, they come at the length to Ustiug three hundredth leaques distant from the city of Permia. There is smaule use of bread in this province. For their yearly tribute, 
Tribute.  they pay to the prince furs & horses. 
Furs and horses.  They have a private language, and letters of their own, which one Steven a bishop (who confirmed them yet wavering in the faith) did invent. For before being yet infants in the faith of christ, they slew and fleyde an other bishop that was appointed to instruct them. This Steven afterward when Demetrius the son of john reigned, was taken for a saint among the Ruthens. Of these people there yet remain many idolaters here and there in the woods, whom the moonkes and eremites that go thither, 
Monks and eremites.  do not cease to convert from their vain error. In the winter they journey in Artach as they do in many places of Russia. Artach, are certain long patents of wood of almost two handfuls in length, 
Patentes.  which they make fast to their fiete with latchettes, & therewith perform their journeys with great celerity. 
Marcus Paulus writeth that these dogs are almost as big as Asses: and that they v●e two to one stead.  They use for this purpose great dogs in the stead of other beasts, with the which they carry their farthels on sleds, as other do with hearts in other places, as we will further declare hereafter. They say that that province toward the East confineth with the province called Tumen, pertaining to the Tartars.  
The situation of the province of jugaria, 
jugaria.  is apparent by that which we have said before. The Moscovites call it juhra with an aspiration: and call the people juhrici. This is that jugaria from whence the Hungarians came in time paste, 
hungaria.  possessed Pannonia, 
Pannonia.  and under the conduct of Attila, 
Attila.  subdued many provinces of Europe: wherein the Moscovites do greatly glory, that a nation subject to them, invaded and wasted a great part of Europe. Georgius Paruns a greek borne, and a man of reputation with the Prince of Moscovia, willing to ascribe to the right of his prince the great dukedom of Lithuania, and the kingdom of Polony with certain other dominions, told me that the juharici or juhgary, being subjects to the great duke of moscovia, came forth of their own country, and first inhabited the regions about the fens of Meoris, and then Pannonie which was afterward called Hungary, 
The higher or superior hungary, is called Austria.  by the river of Danubius: Also that in fine they possessed the region of Moravia so named of the river: and likewise Pollonie, 
Polony.  so called of Polle, which signifieth a plain. Furthermore that Buda was so called after the name of the brother of Attila. 
Buda.  They say also that the juhgari use the same tongue that do the Hungarians. The which whether it be true or not, I do not know. For although I have made diligent inquisition to know the truth hereof, yet could I find no man of that region with whom my servant being expert in the Hungarian tongue might speak. They also pay furs for their tributes to the prince of Moscovia. 
Furs.  And albeit that pearls and precious stones are brought from thence to moscovia, 
Pearls and Precious stones.  yet are they not gathered in their Ocean, but in other places: especially about the coast of the Ocean near unto the mouths of Dwina.  
The province of Sibier, 
Sibi●r.  confineth with Permia and Uuiathka: The which, whether it have any castles or cities, I do not yet certainly know. In this the river jaick hath his original, and falleth into the Caspian sea. They say that this region is deserve because it lieth so near the Tartars: 
Aspreolos, I think to be martens: yet sum think them to be squerels Ge●nerus writeth that the kings of the Tartars, have their ten●e● covered without with the skins of lions: & within▪ with the skins of ●sbles and ermines.  Or that if it be in any part inhabited, the same to be possessed of the Tartar Schichmamai. Thinhabitantes have a peculiar language: and have their chief gains by the furs of martens, which in fairness and greatness, excel all the furs of that kind that are found in any other provinces. Yet could I have no great plenty of them in moscovia at my being there. Note that long after the writing of this history, at richard Chancellor his first being in moscovia, Duke john Uasilivich that now reigneth, subdued all the Tartars with their regions and provinces even unto the great city and mart town of Astrachan & the Caspian ●ea. At the same time also, there was in the dukes court an ambassador that came from this province of Sibier: who declared that his father had been sent ambassador to the great Chan of Cathay. And that the great city of Cambalu where the great Chan keepeth his court in winter, was in manner destroyed by Necromancy and magical arts wherein the Cathaynes are very expert as writeth Marcus Paulus Uenctus. There was also at the same time th'ambassador of the king of Persia called the great Sophic. This ambassador was apparelled all inscarlet, and spoke much to the duke in the behalf of hour men, of whose kingdom and trade he was not ignorant.  
The people called Czeremisse, 
Czeremisse.  dwell in the woods beneath Novogardia the lower. They have a peculiar language and are of the sect of Machumet. They were sometime subject to the king of Casan: but the greater part of them are now subject to the prince of Moscovia. Many of them at my being there, were brought to moscovia, as suspected of rebellion. This nation doth inhabit a large region without houses from Uuiathka and Uuolochda, 
habitation without houses.  to the river of Kama All the nation aswell women as men, are very swift of foot, and expert archers: wherein they so delight, that their bows are in manner never out of their hands: and give their children no meat until they it the mark they shoot at.  
Two leaques distant from Novogardia the lower, were many houses to the similitude of a city or town, where they were accustomed to make salt. 
Salt.  These a few years sense being burnt of the Tartars, were restored by the commandment of the prince.  
Mordwa, are people inhabyting by the river of Uolga on the south bank beneath Novogardia the lower: And are in all things like unto the Czeremisses but that they have more houses. And here endeth Thempire of the Moscovites.  
Note here that Mathias of Michou, in his book of Sarmatia Asiatica, writeth that the dominion of the duke of Moscovia reacheth from the northwest to the southeast five hundredth miles of Germany, which are more than leaques. For they affirm that a german mile is more than three english miles.   

¶ Of the Tartars.  
We will now add hereunto somewhat of the people confining with ●he Moscovites toward the East: of the which the Tartars of Casan are the first. 
The Tartars of Casan.  But before we speak of them particularly, we will first rehearse somewhat of their manners and customs in general.  
The Tartars are divided into companies which they cawl Hordas, of the which the Horda of the Sawolhenses is the chief in fame and multitude. 
horda.  For it is said that the other Hordas had their offspring and original of this. And albeit that every Horda hath his peculiar name, as the Sawolhenses, Precropenses, and Nahays with divers other being all Machumetans, yet do they take it evil and count it reproach to be called Turks: but will themselves to be called Besermani, 
Besermani.  by the which name also the Turks desire to be called. And as the Tartars inhabit many provinces reaching far on every side, even so in manners and order of living do they not agree in all things. They are men of mean stature, 
The stature of the Tartars.  with broad and fat faces, hollow eyed, with rough and thick beards, and poulde heads. Only the noble men have long hear, and that exceeding black, which they wreath on both sides their ears. They are strong of body and stout of mind: prone to leacherye, and that unnatural. They eat the fleasshe of horses, camels, and other b●astes except hogs, 
They abste●ne from hogs flesh.  
Abstinence.  from which they abstain by a law. They can so abide fasting & hunger, that they suntime forbear meat and sleep for the space of four days, occupied nevertheless about their necessary affairs. again when they get any thing to devour, 
Uoracitie.  they ingorge themselves beyond measure: and with that surfecte in manner recompense their former abstinence. And being thus oppressed with labour and meat, they sleep continually for the space of three or four days without doing any manner of work or labour: during which time the Lyvons and Moscovites into whose dominions they are accustomed to make their incursions, assail them unwares thus oppressed with meat and sleep, lying scattered here and there out of order without watch or ward. Also if when they ride, they be molested with hunger and thirst, 
So do the Turks.  they use to let their horse's blood, and with drinking the same, satisfy their present necessity, and affirm their horses to be the better thereby. And because they all wander in unknown places, they use to direct their journeys by thaspect of the stars, 
journeying by the pole star.  and especially of the pole star, which in their tongue they call Selesnikoll, (that is) an iron nail. They greatly delight in mare's milk, 
Mare's milk  and believe that it maketh men strong and fat. They eat herbs very much: and especially such as grow about Tanais. Few of them use salt. 
horse flesh eaten.  When their kings distribute any victuals among them, they are accustomed to give one horse or cow to forty men. Of the slain beast, the bowels and tripes are reserved for the chief men and capitains. 
Cleanly.  These they heat at the fire until they may shake out the doonge, and then devour them greedily. They suck and lick, not only their fingers imbrued with fat, but also their knives and sticks wherewith they scrape the dung from the guts. The heads of horses are counted delicate dishes with them as are bores heads with us: 
horse heads, dainty meat  and are reserved only for the chief men. 
The Tartars horses.  Their horses (whereof they have great abundance) are but smaule, and with short necks: but very strong and such as can well away with labour & hunger. These they feed with the branches & barks or rinds of trees & the roots of herbs and weeds, whereby they accustom them to hard feeding, and exercise them to continual labour: by reason whereof (as say the Moscovytes) their horses are swifter and more durable than any other. These kind of horses, they call Pachmat. They have none other saddells and steroppes then of wood, 
Saddles and styrrops of wood.  except such as they either buy of the christians, or take from them by violence. Lest their horse backs should be hurt with their saddells, they underlaye them with grass and leaves of trees. They also pass over rivers on horseback. But if when they fly, they fear the pursuing of their enemies, than casting away their saddells, apparelle, and all other impediments, reserving only their armour and weapons they fly amain and with great ceelrytye. Their women use the same kind of apparel that do the men without any difference except that they cover their heads with linen veils, 
The Tartars women.  and use linen hose much like unto mariners slops. When their queens come abroad, they are accustomed to cover their faces. The other multitude of the common sort that liveth here and there in the fields, have their apparel made of sheeps skins, which they change not until they be worn and torn to fytters. They tarry not long in one place, judging it a great misery so to do: 
The Tartars curse.  In so much that when they are angry with their children, the greatest curse that they can give them, is that they may remain perpetually in one place, and draw the stynshe of their own filthiness as do the christians. When they have consumed the pasture in one place, they go to an other with their droves of cattle and their wives and children whom they ever carry about with them in Wagons: albeit the Tartars that dwell in cities and towns, use an other order of living. If they be enclosed with any dangerous warr●, they place their wives, children, and owld folks, in the savest places. There is no justice among them. 
No justice among the Tartars.  For if any man stand in need of any thing, he may without punnysshement take it away from an other. If any complain to the judge of the violence and wrong done unto him, the offender denieth not the crime, but saith that he could not lack that thing. Then the judge is wont to give this sentence: If thowe also shalt have need of any thing do the like to other. Sum say they do not steal: But whether they steal or not, let other judge. They are surely a thee●●sshe kind of men and very poor, 
The Tartars are thieves and poor.  living only by robbing of other, and stealing away other men's cattle, and violently also carrying away the men themselves whom either they sell to the Turks or proffer them to be redeemed by ransom, reserving only the young wenches. They seldom assault cities or castles, 
They rejoice in spoiling  but burn and waste towns and vyllagyes: In so much that they so please themselves herein, that they think they have so much the more enlarged their empire, in how much they have wasted and made desolate many provinces. And although they be most impatient of rest and quietness, yet do they not kill or destroy one an other, except their kings ●ee at dessention between themselves. If any man be slain in any fray or quarrel, and the authors of the mischief be taken, only their horse, harness, weapons, and app●rell, are taken from them, and they dismissed. So that the murderer by the loss of a vile horse or a bow, is discharged of the judge with these words: get the hence and go about thy business. They have no use of gold and silver, except only a few merchants: But exersyse exchange of ware for ware. And if it so chance that by selling of such things as they have stolen, they get any money of their borderers, they buy therewith certain apparel and other nece●saryes of the Moscovites. The regions of their habytations (the field Tartars I mean) are not limited with any bounds or borthers. 
The field Tartars.  
A merry tale.  There was on a time a certain fat Tartar taken prisoner of the Moscovites: to whom when the prince said, How art thou so fat thowe dog, sith though haste not to eat, the Tartar answered, Why should not I have to eat sith I possess so large a land from the East to the west, whereby I may be abundauntely nury●shed? But thowe mayst rather seem to lack, sith though inhabytest so smaule a portion of the world, and dust daily strive for the same.  
Casan, 
Ca●an.  is a kingdom, also a city, and a castle of the same name, situate by the river Uolga on the further b●nke, almost threescore and ten●e leaques beneath Nouogar●ia the lower. Along by the cour●e of Uolga toward the East an● South, it is termined with desert fields. Toward the summer East, it confineth with the ●artars called Schiba●●●i, and Kosatzki. The king of this province, 
The king of Ca●an.  is able to make an army of xxx thousand men, especially foot men, of the which the Czeremi●se & Czubas●hi are most expert a●chers. 
Archers.  The Czubaschi are also cunning mariners, 
Mariners.  The city of Casan, is threescore leaques distant from the principal castle Uuiathka. Furthermore, Casan in the Tartars language, 
The town Tartars.  signifieth a bra●en pot boiling. These Tartars are more civil than the other. For they dwell in houses, till the ground, and exercise the trade of merchandise. They were of late subdued by Basilius the great duke of moscovia, and had their king assigned them at his arbitrament. But shortly after, 
Moscovia invaded by the Tartars.  they rebelled again: and associate with other Tartars, invaded the region of moscovia, spoiled and wasted many cities and towns, and led away innumerable captives, even from the city Moscovia which they possessed for a time, and had utterly destroyed the same if it had not been for the valiantness of the Almaigne gunner's which kept the castle with great ordinance. 
The prince of moscovia tributary to the Tartars.  They also put duke Basilius to flight, and caused him to make a letter of his own hand to Machmetgirei their king to acknowledge himself for a perpetual tributary to them, whereupon they dissolved the siege, and gave the Moscou●tes free liberty to redeem their captives and goods, and so departed. But Basilius not long able to abide this contumely and dishonour, 
Duke Basilius arm● against the Tartars.  after that he had put to death such as flying at the fy●st encountering were the cause of this overthrow, assembled an army of a hundredth and fourscore thousand men shortly after in the year .1523. And sent forward his army under the conduct of his lieutenant: and therewith an herald at arms to bid battle to Machmetgirei the king of Casan, with words in this effect: The last year like a thief and robber without bidding of battle, thou diddest privily oppress me. Wherefore I now challenge thee, once again to prove the fortune of war if thou mistrust not thine own power. To this the king answered, that there were many ways open for him to invade moscovia: And that the wars have no less respect to the commodity of time and place then of armure or strength: And that he would take th'advantage thereof when & where it should seem best to him and not to other. With which words Basilius b●inge greatly accensed and burning with desire of revenge, invaded the kingdom of Casan: whose king being stricken with sudden fear at thapproach of so terrible an army, assigned the governance of his kingdom to the young king of Taurica his nephew, while he himself went to require aid of the Emperor of the Turks. But in fine the king of Casan submitted himself upon certain conditions of peace which the Moscovites did the gladlier except for that time because their victuals failed them to maintain so great a multitude. 
The king of Casan ●ubmitteth himself.  But whereas duke Basilius himself was not present at this last expedition, he greatly suspected Palitzki the lieutenant of th'army to be corrupted with bribes to proceed no further. In this mean time, the king of Casan sent ambassadors to Basilius to entreat of peace: whom I saw in the duke's court at my being there: but I could perceive no hope of peace to be between them. For even then, Basilius to endamage the Casans, translated the mart to Novogardia, which before was accustomed to be kept in the Island of merchants near unto the city of Casan: 
The Island of merchants  Commanding also under pain of grievous punishment that none of his subjects should resort to the Island of merchants: thynkyng● that this translation of the mart should greatly have endamaged the Casans: and that only by taking away their trade of salt (which they were accustomed to buy of the Moscovites at that mart) they should have been compelled to submission. But the Moscovites themselves felt no less inconvenience hereby then did the Casans, by reason of the dearth and ●earesenesse that followed hereof of all such things as the Tartars were accustomed to bring thither by the river of Uolga from the Caspian sea, 
The Ca●pi●n ●ea.  the kingdoms of Persia and Armenia, 
P●r●ia.  
●●menia.  and the mart town of Astrachan: 
●str●c●an.  especially the great number of most excellent fishes that are taken in Uolga both on the hither and further side of Casan.  
But having said thus much of the wars between the prince of moscovia and the Tartars of Casan, we will now proceed to speak somewhat of the other Tartars inhabiting the regions toward the southeast and the Caspian sea.  
Next beyond the Tartars of Casan, 
The Tartars near to the Caspian ●ea.  are the Tartars called Nagai or Nogai, 
Nog●i.  which inhab●te the regions beyond Uolga about the Caspian sea at the river jaick, running out of the province of Sibier. These have no kings but dukes In hour time, three brethren dividing the provinces equally between them, possessed those dukedoms. 
The possession of three brethrens.  The first of them named Schidack, possesseth the city of Scharaitzick, beyond the river of Rha or Uolga toward the east, with the region confining with the river jaick. The second called Cossum, enjoyeth all the land that lieth between the rivers of Kaman jaick and Uolga. The thryde brother named Schichmamai, possesseth part of the province of Sibier and all the region about the same. Schichmamai, is as much to say by interpretation, as holy or mighty. And in manner all these regions are full of woods, except that that lieth toward Scharaitz, which consisteth of plains and fields.  
Between the rivers of Uolga and jaick, about the Caspian sea, there sometimes inhabited the kings called Sawolhenses. 
The kings called Sawolhenses.  Demetrius Danielis (a man among these barbarians, of singular faith and gravity) told us of a marvelous and in manner incredible thing that is seen among And that his father being sent by the prince of moscovia to the king of Sawolhense, saw while he was in that legacy, a certain seed in that Island somewhat less and rounder than the seeds of Melones: Of the which being hid in the ground, there groweth a fruit or plant very like a lamb, 
A marvelous fruit like a lamb.  of the height of five spans: And is therefore called in their tongue Boranetz, which signifieth a little lamb. For it hath the head, eyes, ears, an all other parts like unto a lamb newly cyned: with also a very thin skin wherewith divers of thinhabitants of those regions are accustomed to line their caps and hats and other tyrementes for their heads. Many also confirmed in hour presence that they had seen these skins. He said furthermore that that plant (if it may be called a plant hath blood, and no flesh: but hath in the stead of flesh a certain substance like unto the flesh of crevysshes. The hooves also are not of horn a● are the lambs, but covered with hear in the same form. The root cleaveth to the navel or midst of the belly. The plant or fruit liveth until all the grass and herbs growing about it being eaten, the root withereth for lack of nurysshement. They say that it is very sweet to be eaten, and is therefore greatly desired and sought for of the wolves and other ravening beasts. And albeit I extreme all that is said of this plant to be fabulous, yet forasmuch as it hath been told me of credible persons, I have thought good to make mention hereof.  
Of this strange fruit, Mandevell maketh m●ntion, 
Mandevell.  where in the. ixxxiiii. chapiture of his book he writeth thus: Now shall I say of sum lands, countries, and Isles that are beyond the land of Cathay. Therefore who so goeth from Cathay to India the high and the low▪ he shall go through a kingdom that men call Cadissen, and is a great land. There groweth a manner of fruit as it were gourds. And when it is ripe, men cut it a sunder: and find therein a beast as it were of fle●she, bone, and blood, as it were a little lamb without wool. 
Barnacles o● the O●ke●eys.  And men eat that beast and the fruit also, which is a great marvel Nevertheless, I said unto them that I held that for no marvel. For I said that in my country are tres that bear fruit that become birds flying which are good to be eaten. And that that falleth into the water, liveth: And that that falleth on the earth dieth. And they had great marvel of this▪ etc.  
From the prince of Schidack, proceeding twenty days journey toward the East, are the people which the Moscovites call jurgenci, whose prince is Barack Soltan, 
Barack Soltan.  brother to the great Chan of Cathay. 
Cathay.  In ten days journey from Barack Soltan, they come to Bebe●d Chan. And this is that great Chan of Cathay.  
Names of dignities among the Tartars, 
Names of dignities among the Tartars.  are these, Chan, signifieth a king. Soltan, the son of a king. Bii, a Duke. Mursa, the son of a duke. Olboud, a noble man or counsiler. Olboadulu, the son of a noble man. Seid, the high pressed. Ksi, a private person.  
The names of offices are these: 
Names of offices.  Ulan, the second dignity to the king. For the kings of the Tartars have four principal men whose counsel they use in all their weighty affairs. Of these the first is called Schirni: the second Barni. the third, Gargni: The fourth, Tziptzan. And to have said thus much of the Tartars, it shall suffice. Marcus Pau●us writeth that the great Chan, is called ●han Cubl●i that is, the great king of kings: 
Chan Cublai  as the great turk writeth himself in like manner, as I ●awe in a letter written by him of late to the city of Raguls, in the which he v●eth this subscription: Soltan Soliman deselun Chain Signore de Signior in ●empiterno. As concerning Mo●couia and Cathay, I was minded to have added hereunto divers other things, but that for certain considerations I was persuaded to proceed no further. Unto who●e request, herein satisfying rather other than myself, willing otherwise to have accomplished this book to further perfection, I was content to agree for two causes especaially moving me: whereof the one is, that as touching these trades and voyages▪ as in manner in all other sciences, there are certain secrets not to be published and made common to all men. The other cause is, that the partners at whose charge this book is printed, although the c●ppy whereof they have wrought a long space have cest them nought do not nevertheless cease daily to call upon me to make an end and proceed no further: affirming that the book will be of to great a price & not every man's money: fearing rather their own loss and hindrance, then careful to be beneficial to other, as is now in manner the trade of all men. which ordinary respect of private commodity hath at this time so little moved me, I take god to witness, that for my pains and travails taken herein such as they be, I may upon just occasion think myself a loser many ways, except such men of good inclination as shall take pleasure and feel sum commonditie in the knowledge of these things, shall think me worthy their good woor●e, wherewith I shall repute myself and my travails so abundantly satisfied, that I ●hall repute other men's gains a recompense for my losses, as they may be in deed, if men be not unthankful, which only vice of ingratitude hath hindered the world of many benefits.   

☞ The navigation by the frozen sea.  
AT my being in moscovia when I was sent thither by king Ferdinando my lord and master, it so chanced that Georgius Istoma the duke of Moscovia his interpreter, a man of great experience who had before learned the latin tongue in the court of john king of Denmark, was there present at the same tyme. He in the year of Christ .1496. being sent of his prince with master David a scotte borne and them ambassador for the king of Denmark, (where also I knows there at my first legacy) made me a brief information of all thorder of his journey. The which, forasmuch as it may seem difficult and laborious aswell for the distance as dangerous places, I have thought good to describe the same as I received it at his mouth.  
first he said that being sent of his prince with the said David, they came first to Novogardia the great. 
Novogardia.  And whereas at the time the kingdom of Suecia revolted from the king of Denmark, and also the duke of Moscovia was at dissension with the Suctians, 
Suecia under the king of Denmark.  by reason whereof they could not pass by the most accustomed way for the tumults of war they attempted their journey by an other way longer by safer And came first from Novogardia to the mouths of the river of Dwina and Potiwlo, 
Dwina.  
Potiwlo.  by a very dyfficult and painful journey. For he said that this journey which can not be to much de●ested for such labours and travails, continueth for the space of three hundredth leaques. In fine, taking four small ships or barks at the mouths of Dwina, they sailed by the coast on the right hand of the Ocean, where they saw certain high and rough mountains: 
high mountains near the north Ocean.  and at the length sailing xvi leaques, and passing a great gulf, followed the coast on the left hand: And leaving on the right hand the large sea which hath the name of the river Petzora (as have also the mountains adjacent to the same) they came to the people of Finlappia: 
Finlappia.  who, although they dwell here and there in low cottagies by the sea side, and lead in manner a beastly life, yet are they more meek and tractable than the wild Lappians. 
The wild Lappians.  He said that these also are tributaries to the prince of Moscovia. Then leaving the land of the Lappians, and sailing fourscore leaques, they came to the region of Nortpoden under the dominion of the king of Suecia This the Moscovites call Katenska Semla, 
The region of Nortpoden  and the people Kayeni. Departing from hence, and sailing along by the coast of a winding and bending shore reaching toward the right hand, they came to a promontory or cape called the Holy nose, 
The cape called the holy nose.  being a great stone reaching far into the sea to the similitude of a nose: under the which is seen a cave with a whirlpool which swalowth the sea every six hours: 
A whyrl●oole or swallowing gulf.  and casting forth the same again with terrible roaring and violence, causeth the said whirlpool. Sum call this the navel of the sea: and other name it Charybdis. He affirmeth that the violence of this swalowing gulf is such, that it draweth into it, involveth, 
●uch whirl pools, are called vipers  and swalloweth up ships and all other things that come near it: and that they were never in greater daungioure. For the whirlpool so suddenly and violently drew unto it the ship or bark wherein they were carried, that with the help of oars and great labour they hardly escaped. When they had thus overpassed the holy nose, they came to a certain stony mountain which they should needs compass about. But being there stayed with contrary winds for the space of certain days, the pylotte of the ship spoke unto them in this effect: This stone (saith he) that you see, is called Seems: 
The stone called S●mes.  The which except we please with sum gift, we shall not pass by without great daungiour. But the pilot being reproved of Istoma for his vain superstition, 
Superstition  held his peace. And when they had been detained there by tempest for the space of four days, at the length the tempest ceased and they went forward on their viage with a prosperous wind. Then the pilotte spoke unto them again, saying: Yowe despised my admonition of pleasing the Seems, and scorned the same as vain and superstitions. But if I had not privily in the night ascended a rock and pleased the Seems, we should surely have had no passage. Being demanded what he offered to the Seems, 
Sacrifice to the stone Seems  he said that he poured butter mixed with otemele upon the stone which we saw reach forth into the sea. As they sailed further, they came to an other cape named Motka, 
The cape Motka.  which was almost environed with the sea like an Island: in whose extreme point, is situate the castle of Barthus, which sum call Wardhus, 
The castle of Wardhus.  (that is) a house of defence or fortress. For the kings of Norway have there a garrison of men to defend their marches. He said furthermore that that cape reacheth so far into the sea, that they could scarcely compass it in eight days. By which tarrying least they should be hindered, they carried on their shoulders with great labour, their barks and farthels over a straight of land containing half a leaque in breadth. From hence they sailed to the region of the wild Lappones, 
The region of the Wild Lappones.  called Dikilappones to a place named Dront, 
D●ont.  being. CC. leaques distant from Dwina toward the North. And thus far as he saith, doth the prince of Moscovia exact tribute. Furthermore leaving their barks here, they finished the residue of their journey on sleds. 
jorneyinge on sleds.  He further declared that there were herds of hearts as are with us of oxen, which in the Norwegians tongue are called Rhen, being somewhat bigger than hour hearts. 
how the baits draw sleds.  These the Lappones use in this manner. They join them to sleds made like fisher botes, as we put horses to the cart. The man in the sled, is tied fast by the feet lest he fall out by the swift course of the hearts. In his left hand, he holdeth a collar or rain wherewith he moderateth the course of the hearts: and in the right hand, a py●●ed staff wherewith he may sustain the sled from fauling if it chance to decline to much on any part. And he told me that by this means he travailed twenty leaques in one day, 
●●. leaques in one day.  and then dismysses the heart, who by himself returned to his own master and accustomed stable. This journey thus finished, they came to Berges a city of Norduegia or Norway, 
The city of Berges in Norway.  situate directly toward the north between the mountains: and went from thence to Denmark on horseback. At Dront and Berges, the day is said to be xxii hours long in the summer Equinoctial. Blasius an other of the prince of Moscovia his interpreters, who a few years before, was sent of his prince into Spain to Themperor, declared unto us an other and shorter way of his journey. 
A shorter journey.  For he said that when he was sent from moscovia to john the king of Denmark, he came first on foot unto Rostowe: 
Rostow.  And taking ship there, came to Pereaslaw: 
Pereaslaw.  and from Pereaslaw by the river Uolga to Castromow: 
Castromow.  and that from thence going seven Werstes by land, he came to a little river: sailing by the which, when first he came to Uuolochda, 
Uuolochda.  then to Suchana, 
Suchana.  and Dwina, 
Dwina.  and in fine to the city of Berges in Norway, overpassing in this viage all the perils and labours that Istoma rehearsed before, he came at the length to Hafnia the chief city of Denmark, 
hafnia.  which the germans call Koppenhagen. 
Koppenhagen.  But in their returning home, they both confess that they came to moscovia by Livonia: 
Livonia.  and that they were a year in this viage: Albeit Georgius Istoma, said that half the part of that time, he was hindered by tempests, and enforced to tarry long in many places by the way. Yet they both likewise constantly affirm that in this journey either of them travailed a thousand threescore and ten Werstes 
werste is almost an Italian mile.  (that is) three hundredth and forty leaques. Furthermore also Demetrius who of late was sent ambassador from the prince of moscovia to the bishop of Rome, (by whose relation also Paulus iovius wrote his description of moscovia) confirmed all these things to be true. 
Paulus iovius.  All they being demanded of me of the congealed or frozen sea, made none other answer but that in places near unto that sea, 
Rivers falling into the frozen sea.  they saw many and great rivers by whose vehement course and abundant flowing, the seas are driven far from the shore: and that the said water of the rivers is frozen with the sea a good space from the land, as in Livonia and other parts of Suecia. For although by the vehemency of the winds, 
wind.  the Ice is broken in the sea, 
Ise.  yet doth this chance seldom or never in rivers, except by sum inundation or flood the Ice gathered together be lifted up and broken. For the flakes or pieses of Ice carried into the sea by force of the rivers, do float above the water in manner all the hole year, and are again so vehemently frozen together, that a man may there sometimes see great heaps of the Ice of many years, 
Isee of many years.  as doth appear by such pieses as are driven to the shore by the wind. I have also been credebly informed by faithful men that the sea Baltheum (otherwise called the gulf of Livonia) is often times frozen in many places. 
The sea Baltheum.  They say furthermore, that in that region which is inhabited of the wild Lappones, the son in the summer Equinoctial doth not fall for the space of xl days: 
where the son falleth not in xl day●.  yet that the body thereof is so hidden with a dark mist or cloud three hours, that the beams do not appear: Nevertheless to give such light during that time, that the darkness hindereth not their work. The Moscovites make their boast that these wild Lappones are tributaries to their prince. 
The Wild Lappones are tributaries to the Moscovites  Whereat I do not greatly marvel, forasmuch as they have none other near unto them, that may demand tribute of them. Their tribute is only furs and fish, 
Furs and fish.  having in manner none other thing greatly commodious. And albeit they lack bread, salt, and other enticements and gluttony, and live only with fish and wild beasts, yet are they exceeding prone to lechery. They are such expert archers, 
expert archers.  that if in their hunting they espy any beasts whose skins they desire to save unperysshed, they will not lightly miss to hit them in the nostrils. ●hen they go forth on hunting, they are accustomed to leave at home with their wives such merchants or strangers as they have received into their houses. 
Good fellowship.  So that if at their return, they perceive their wives through the company of the strangers to be myrier and more jocund than they were wont to be, they give the strangers sum present. But if they find it otherwise, they thrust them forth of the doors with words of reproach. But now by the company they have with strangers that resort thither for gains, they begin to leave their native barbarousness. They gladly admit merchants, because they bring them apparel of gross cloth: also hatchettes, needle's, spoons, knives, drinking cups, earthen and brazen pots, with such other necessary wares: 
Necessary wars.  So that they use now to eat sodden and roasted meat, and do embrace more civil manners. Their own apparel is made of the skins of divers beasts sowed together. And in this apparel they sometimes come to moscovia. Yet few of them have caps or hosen, which they use to make of hearts skins. They have not the use of gold or silver money: 
No v●e of money.  but use only bartering of ware for ware. And being ignorant of other languages beside their own, they seem among strangers to be in manner dumb. Their cottages are covered only with the barks of trees. 
Their cottages.  They have no certain resting habitation. But when they have consumed the fish and wild beasts in one place, they remove to an other. Furthermore also the said ambassadors of the prince of moscovia, declared that in the same parts they saw certain high mountains continually casting forth flames of fire as doth the mountain of Aetna in the Island of Sicilia: 
Mountains continually bu●nyng.  and that even in Norway, many mountains are faulen down and burnt in manner to ashes with such continual flames. Which thing sum considering, fain the fire of Purgatory to be there. 
Purgatory.  And as concerning these mountains of Norway, when I was sent ambassador to Christian king of Denmark, I was informed the like by the governors of Norway who chanced at that time to be present there.  
about the mouths of the river Petzora that are toward the right hand from the mouths of Dwina, 
The river Pet●ora,  are said to be divers and great beasts in the Ocean: and among other, a certain great beast as big as an ox, which thinhabitants call Mors. 
The beast called Mors.  This beast hath short feet like a beaver or an Otter, with a breast somewhat high and broad for the proportion of the residue of his body: and two long and great teeth growing out of the upper jaw. These beasts for rest and increase, do sometimes leave the Ocean, & by great herds ascend the mountains: where before they give themselves to profound sleep (whereunto they are naturally inclined) they appoint one of their number as it were a watchman as do crane's for the security of the rest. 
●he providence of nature.  Which if he chance to sleep, or to be slain of the hunters, the residue may easily be taken. But if the watchman give warning with toring (as the manner is) immediately the hole heard a wakened thereby, suddenly put their hinder feet to their teeth: And so falling from the mountain with great celerity as it were on a stead. they cast themselves headlong into the Ocean: where also they rest and sleep for a while upon the heaps of I'll. The hunters pursue these beasts only for thayr teeth: Of the which the Moscovites, Tartars, and especially the Turks, make haftes for swords and dags very artificially. And use these rather for ornament, then to give the greater stroke for the weight or heaviness thereof as sum fable. Also among the Turks, Moscovites, and Tartars, these teeth are sold by weight, and are called the teeth of fishes.  
The frozen sea reacheth far and wide beyond Dwina to Petzcora and unto the mouths of the great river Obi: 
The frozen sea.  beyond the which they say to be the region of Engroneland, 
Engronland or Groneland  unknown and separate from the trade and conversation of hour men, by reason of high mountains covered and could with perpetual snow, and the sea no less encumbered with continually Ice which hindereth navigations and maketh them dangerous, as they say.    


EXEMPLAR EPISTOLAE SEV LI TERARUM MISSIVARUM QVAS illustrissimus Princeps Edwardus eius nominis Sextus, Angliae, Franciae, et Hiberniae Rex, misit ad Principes Septemtrionalem ac Orientalem mundi plagam inhabitantes juxta mare glaciale, nec non Indiam Orientalem. Anno Dni. 1553. Regni sui Anno septimo et ultimo.  
EDwardus sextus, Angliae, Franciae, & Hiberniae Rex. etc. Omnibus, Regibus et Principibus ac Dominis, et cunctis judicibus terrae, & Ducibus eius qui buscunque est excellens aliqua dignitas in ea cunctis in locis quae sunt sub universo coelo: Pax, tranquillitas, & honour vobis, terris, et regionibus vestris quae imp●rio vestro subiacent, cuique vestrum quemadmodum convenit ei, Propterea quod indidit Deus Opt. Max. hominibus prae cunstis alijs viventibus cor & desiderium tale, ut appetat quisque cum alijs societatem mire, amare, et vicissim amari, beneficijs afficere, et mutua accipere beneficia studeat, ideo cuique pro facultate sua hoc desiderium in omnibus quidem hominibus beneficijs fovere et conseruare convenit, in illis autem maxime, qui hoc desiderio adducti, a remotis etiam regionibus ad eos veniunt. Quo enim longius iter, eius rei gratia ingressi sunt, eo ardentius in eis hoc desiderium fuiste declararunt. Insuper etiam ad hoc, nos patrum maiorumque nostrorum exempla invitant, qui semper humanissime susceperunt et benignissime tractaverunt illos qui tum a locis propinquis tum a remotis, eos amice adibant, eorum se protectioni commendantes. Quod si omnibus id prestare aequum est, certe mercatoribus impri mis praestari debet, qui per universum orbem discurrunt, mare circumlustrantes et aridam, ut res bonas et utiles quae Dei beneficio in regione eorum inveniuntur, ad remotissimas regiones et regna adferant, atque inde vivissim referant ꝙ suae regioni utile ibi repererint: ut et populi ad quos eunt, non destituantur commodis quae non profert illis terra eorum, & ipsi sint participes rerum quibus illi abundant. Nam Deus coeli et terrae, humano generi maxime consulens, noluit ut omnia in quavis regione invenirentur, quo regio ope alterius regionis indigeret, et gens ab alia gente commodum aliquod expectaret, ac ita sta biliretur amicitia inter omnes, singulique omnibus be nefacere quererent, Hoc itaque ineundae ac stabiliendae ●micitiae desiderio moti viri quidam regni nostri, iter in remo●● matitimas regiones instituerunt, ut inter nostros e●●llos populos viam mercibus inferendis et eferendi● aperirent: Nosque rogaverunt ut id illis con cederemus. Qui peticioni illorum annuentes, concessimus viro honorabili et forti Hugoni Wilibeo et alijs qui cum eo sunt servis nostris fidis et charis, ut pro sua voluntate, in regiones eye prius incognitas eant, quesituri ea quibus nos caremus, et adducantillis ex nostris terris, id quo illi carent. Atque ita illis et nobis commodum inde accedat, sitque amicitia perpetua et foedus indissolubile inter illos et nos, dum per mittent illi nos accipere de rebus quibus superabundant in regnis suis, et nos concedemus illis ex regnis nostris res, quibus destituuntur. Rogamus itaque vos Reges et Principes & omnes quibus aliqua est potestas in terra, ut viris istis nostris transitum permittatis per regiones vestras. Non enim tangent quicquam ex rebus vestris invitis vobis. Cogitate ꝙ homines et ipsi sunt. Et si quare caruerint, oramus pro vestra beneficentia, eam vos illis tribuatis, accipientes vicissim ab eis quod poterunt rependere vobis. Ita vos gerite erga eos quemadmodum cuperetis ut nos et subditi nostri nos gereremus erga servos vestros si quando transierint per regiones nostras. Atque promittimus vobis per Deum omnium quae coelo, terra et mari continentur, perque vitam nostram et tranquil litatem regnorum nostrorum, nos pari benignitate servos vestros accepturos si ad regna nostra aliquando venerint. Atque a nobis et subditis nostris, ac sinati fuissent in regnis nostris, ita benign tractabuntu● ut rependamus vobis benignitatem quam nostris ex hibueritis. Postquam vos Reges, Principes, etc. roga vimus ut humanitate et beneficentia omniprosequamini servos nostros nobis charos, oramus omnipotentem Deum nostrum, ut vobis diuturnam vitam largiatur, et pacem quae nullam habeat finem. Scrip tum Londini, quae civitas est regni nostri. Anno. 5515. a creato mundo, mense jiar. xiiii. die mensis, anno septimo regni nostri.   

¶ The copy of the letters missive which the right noble prince Edward the vi sent to the Kings, Princes, & other potentates inhabiting the North-east parts of the world toward the mighty Empire of Cathay, at such time as sir Hugh Willoby knight and Richard Chancellor with their company attempted their viage thither in the year of christ .1553. and the vii and last year of his reign.  
EDwarde the sixth by the grace of God, king of England, France, and jerlande▪ etc. To all Kings, Princes, Rulers, judges, and governors of the earth, and all other having any excellent dignity on the same in all places under the universal heau●n: Peace, tranquillity, and honour, be unto you, and your lands and regions which are under your dominions, and to every of you as is convenient.  
Forasmuch as the great and almighty god hath given unto mankind above all other living creators, such a heart & desire, that every man desireth to join friendship with other, to love and be loved, also to give and receive mutual benefits, it is therefore the duty of all men, according to their power to maintain and increase this desire in every man with well deserving to all men, and especially to show this good affection to such as being moved with this desire, come unto them from far countries. For in how much the longer voyage they have attempted for this intent, so much the more do they thereby declare that this desire hath been ardent in them. Furthermore also thexamples of hour fathers and predecessors do invite us hereunto, forasmuch as they have ever gently and lovingly entreated such as of friendly mind came to them aswell from countries near hand as far remote, commending themselves to their protection. And if it be right and equity to show such humanity toward all men, doubtless the same ought chiefly to be showed to merchants, who wandering about the world, search both the land and sea to carry such good and profitable things as are found in their countries, to remote regions and kingdoms: and again to bring from the same, such things as they find there commodious for their own countries: Both, aswell that the people to whom they go, may not be destitute of such commodities as their countries bring not forth to them, as that also they may be partakers of such things whereof they abound. For god of heaven and earth, greatly providing for mankind, would not that all things should be found in one region, to th'end that one should have need of an other, that by this means friendship might be established among all men, and every one seek to gratify all. For thestablishing and furtherance of which universal amity, certain men of hour realm moved hereunto by the said desire, have institute and taken upon them a viage by sea into far countries to th'intent that between hour people and them, a way be opened to bring in and carry out merchandise, desiring us to further their enterprise. Who assenting to their petition, have licensed the right valiant and worthy sir Hugh Wylloby knight, and other hour trusty and faithful servants which are with him according to their desire to go to countries to them heretofore unknown, aswell to seek such things as we lack, as also to carry unto them from hour regions, such things as they lack. So that hereby not only commodity may ensue both to them and to us, but also an indissoluble and perpetual league of friendship be established between us both, while they permit us to take of their things such whereof they have abundance in their regions, and we again grant them such things of owrs whereof they are destitute. We therefore desire you kings and princes, and all other to whom there is any power on the earth, to permit unto these our servants, free passage by your regions and dominions. For they shall not touch any thing of yowres unwilling unto you. Consider you that they also are men. If therefore they shall stand in need of any thing, we desire you of all humanity, and for the nobility which is in you, to aid and help them with such things as they lack, receiving again of them such things as they shallbe able to give you in recompense. Show your selves so toward them, as you would that we and our subjects should show our selves toward your servants, if at any time they shall pass by hour regions. Thus doing, we promise you by the God of all things that are contained in heaven, earth, and the sea, and by ●he life and tranquillity of hour kingdoms, that we will with like humanity accept your servants if at any time they shall come to hour kingdoms, where they shall as friendly and gently be inte●teyned as if they were borne in our dominions, th●t we may hereby recompense the favour and benignity which you have showed to our men. Thus after we have desired you kings and princes. etc. With all humani●●e and favour to entertain our well-beloved servants, we pray hour almighty god to grant you long life and peace which never shall have end. written in London which is the chief city of hour kingdom: In the year from the creation of the world .5515. in the month of I●ar, the xiiii day of the month, and seventh year of hour reign.  
¶ This letter was written also in Greek and divers other languages.    

¶ Other notable things as touching the Indies: and first of the foreknowleage that the poet Seneca had of the finding this new world and other regions not then known. Francisco Lopes.  
TO speak of things that shallbe, long before they are, is a kind of divination if the truth thereof follow effectually. 
Divination.  Nevertheless unless such things as are spoken either by conjecture, 
Conjecture.  or by thinstinct of nature, or by natural reason, do oftentimes take place and succeed accordingly, yet are not such conjectures to be accounted as certain as prophecies revealed by the spirit of god, 
prophesy.  which we ought entirely to believe: but not so the other gathered only by certain apparences, similitudes, reasons, and demonstrations: although it be greatly to be marveled to consider how they hit e the truth sometime: which perhaps they do according to the proverb that saith: He that speaketh much shall sometimes stumble on the truth. 
So do the Egyptians.  All this I speak considering the saying of the poet Seneca in his tragedy of Medea, where his words seem in all points to agree with the discovering of the Indies found of late by Chrystofer Colon & the spaniards. The words of Seneca, 
The words of Seneca.  are these. 
Venient annis  
Saecula seris, quibus Oceanus  
Vincula rerum laxet, et ingens  
Pateat tellus, Tiphisque novos  
Detegat orbs,  
Nec sit terris ultima Thyle.  That is to say: There shall come worlds in late years, in the which the Ocean shall unlose the bonds of things, and a great land shall appear. Also Typhis (that is navigation) shall discover new worlds: And Thyle shall not be the furthest land. 
Island was in old time called Thyle as sum think.   

¶ The copy of the duke of Moscovy and Emperor of Russia his letters, sent to king Edward the sixth.  
The almighty power of god and the incomprehensible holy Trinity, rightful Christian belief, we greatest Duke Ivan Uasilevich by the grace of god Emperor of all Russia and great duke of Uflademerskii, 
ivan Uasilivich (that is) john the soon of Basilius. He conquered Casan, & therefore writeth Lazanskii.  Moskouskii, Nougorodskii, Cazanskii, Pskouskii, Smolenskii, Tuerskii, Yougorskii, Permskii, Ueatsskii, Bolgarskii, with divers other lands. Emperor also and great duke of Novagoroda, and in the low countries of Chermgouskii, Rezanskii, Uolotsskii, Rzefskii, Belskii, Rostouskii, Yaroslauskii, Bclocherskii, Oodorskii, Obdorskii, Condinskii, and many other countries, Lord over all the north coast, greeting.  
BEfore all right great and of honour worthy Edward king of England our most hearty and of good zeal with good intent and friendly desire, and of hour holy Christian faith & of great governance, & in the light of great understanding: Hour answer by this our honourable writing unto your kingly governance at the request of your faithful servant richard with his company as they shall let you wisely know, is thus.  
In the strength of the twenty year of hour governance, be it known that at hour sea coasts, arrived a ship with one richard and his company: and said that he was desirous to come into hour dominions: and according to his request, hath seen hour lordships and hour eyes: 
Seen hour eyes (that is) come to our presence.  & hath declared unto us your majesties desire as that we should grant unto your subjects to go and come: And in our dominions and among hour subjects to frequent free mart●s with all sorts of merchandise; and upon the same to have wares for their return. And they have also delivered us your letters which declare the same request. And here upon we have given order, that where soever your faithful servant Hugh Wyllobie land or touch in hour dominions, to be well entertained, who as yet is not arrived as your servant richard can declare.  
And we with Christian belief and faithfulness, and according to your honourable request and my honourable commandment, will not leave it undone: And am furthermore willing that you send unto us with your ships and vessels when and as often as they may have passage, with good assurance on hour party to see them harmless. And if you send one of your majesties counsel to treat with us where by your country merchants may with all kinds of wares and where they will, make their market in our dominions, and there to have their free mart with all free liberties through my whole dominions with all kinds of wares to come and go at their pleasure without any let, damage, or impediment according to this our letter, our word, and our seal which we have commanded to be under sealed. written in our dominion, in our town and our palesse in the Castle of Moscovia, in the year vii thousand and syxtie, the second month Febriarie.  
This letter was written in the Moscovian tongue, in letters much like unto the Greek letters very fair written in paper with a broad seal hanging at the same, sealed in paper upon wax. This seal was much like unto the broad seal of England, having in it on the one side, the Image of a man on horseback in complete harness fight with a dragon. Under this letter, was an other paper written in the duche tongue, which was thinterpretation of the other written in the Moscovite Letters.  
These letters were sent the next year after the data of King Edward's Letters.   

¶ Of the great Island which Plato called Atlantica or Atlantide.  
THe Philosopher Plato writeth in his dialogs of Timeus and Cricia, that in the owlde time there was in the sea Atlantic over against Africa, an Island called Atlantide greater than Africa and Asia: 
Plato saith that these kings were the sons of Neptunus.  affirming that those lands a●e from thence continent and great: And that the kings of that Island governed a great part of Africa and Europe. But that in a certain great earthquake and tempest of rain, 
An earthquake.  this Island sunk and the people were drowned: Also that there remained so much mud of the drowning or sinking of that Island, that that sea Atlantike could not be sailed. Sum take this for a fable: and many for a true history, as doth Marcilius Ficinus inducinge Proclus alleging certain histories of the Ethiopians written by one Marcellus, 
Marcilius Ficinus.  
Proclus.  who corfirmeth the same to be true. But there is now no cause why we should any longer doubt or dispute of the Island Antlantide, forasmuch as the discovering and conquest of the west Indies do plainly declare what Plato hath written of the said lands. In Mexico also at this day they cawl that water Atl. by the half name of Atlant, 
Mexico or new Spain.  as by a word remaining of the name of the Island that is not. We may likewise say that the Indies are either the Island and firm land of Plato or the remanent of the same: and not the Islands of Hesperides or Ophir, or Tharsis, as sum have thought of late days. For the Hesperides, are the Islands of Cabo Uerde and the Gorgonas from whence Hannon browght apes: Albeit in conferring it with Solinus, 
hesperides. Capo Uerde Ophir. Tharsis. Gorgonas. Solinus.  there is sum doubt by reason of the navigation of forty days whereof he speaketh. Aswell may it be, that Cuba or Hayti, 
Lands found by the Carthaginenses.  or any other Island of the Indies, should be those which the Carthaginenses found and forbodde their citizens to make any voyages thither or to inhabit the same as Aristotle and Theophraste do rehearse where they write of the marvelous and unknown works of nature. 
aristotel.  
Theophrast.  As concerning Ophir and Tharsis, it is not known what or where they be, although many learned men as saint Augustine and other have searched what city or land Tharsis might be. Saint Jerome who was expert in the Hebrew tongue, saith in many places upon the prophets that Tharsis is as much to say as the sea: and that whereas it is written that jonas fled to Tharsis, 
jonas fled to Thar●is.  he went to the sea by a long journey. Furthermore as concerning the navigations of Solomon, it is not to be thowght that his navies sailed to the west Indies, 
The navigations of Solomon.  forasmuch as to pass thither, it was requisite for them to sail Westward departy●ge from the sea of Bermeio: and not Eastward as they sailed. again, the west Indies have no unicorns, elephants, diamonds, and such other things as they browght in the trade of their navigations. 
Bermeio●is the arabian sea.    

¶ Of the colour of the Indians.  
ONe of the marvelous things that god useth in the composition of man, is colour: which doubtless can not be considered without great admiration in beholding one to be white and an other black, being colours utterly contrary. Sum likewise to be yellow which is between black and white: and other of other colours as it were of divers liveres. And as these colours are to be marveled at, even so is it to be considered how they differ one from an other as it were by degrees, forasmuch as sum men are white after divers sorts of whiteness: 
how colour● differ by degrees.  yellow after divers manners of yellow: and black after divers sorts of blackness: and how from white they go to yellow after discolouring to brown and red: and to black by ash colour, 
The colour of the west Indians.  and murrey somewhat lighter than black: and tawnye like unto the west Indians which are all together in general either purple, or tawny like unto sod quynses, or of the colour of chestnuts or olives: which colour is to them natural and not by their going naked as many have thought: albeit their nakedness have somewhat helped thereunto. Therefore in like manner and with such diversity as men are commonly white in Europe and black in Africa, 
Dyves' sorts of white and black.  even with like variety are they tawny in these Indies, with divers degrees diversly inclining more or less to black or white. No less marvel is it to consider that men are white in Seville and black at the cape of Buena Speranza, and of chestnutte colour at the river of Plata, 
Difference of colour in the same clime.  bring all in equal degrees from the Equinoctial line. Likewise that the men of africa and Asia that live under the burnt line (called Zona Terrida) are black: 
Rio de la plata.  and not they that live beneath or on this side the same line as in Mexico, Yucatan, Quauhtema, Lian, Nicaragua, Panama, Santo Domingo, Paria, Cape, saint Augustine, Lima, Quito, and other lands of Peru which touch in the same Equinoctial. 
Peru.  For in all the tract of these coasts certain black men were found only in Quarequa when Uaschus Nunnez of Balboa discovered the sea of Sur. 
Black men in the west Indies.  By reason whereof it may seem that such variety of colours proceedeth of man, 
From whē●e proceedeth the variety of colours.  and not of the earth: which may well be although we be all borne of Adam and Eve, and know not the cause why god hath so ordained it, otherwise then to consider that his divine majesty hath done this as infinite other to declare his omnipotency and wisdom in such diversities of colours as appear not only in the nature of man, 
God's wisdom & power is seen in his works.  but the like also in beasts, birds, and flowers, where divers and contrary colours are seen in one little feather, or the leaves growing out of one little stalk. another thing is also greatly to be noted as touching these Indians. And this is, 
Curled hear and baldness.  that their hear is not curled as is the moors and Ethiopians that inhabit the same clime: neither are they bald except very seldom, and that buy little. All which things may give further occasion to philosophers to search the secrets of nature and complexions of men with the novelties of the new world.   

¶ Why they were called Indians.  
SUm think that the people of the new world were called Indians because they are of the colour of the east Indians. 
The colour of the East Indians.  And although (as it seemeth to me) they differ much in colour and fashions, yet is it true that of India they were called Indians. 
East India.  India is properly called that great province of Asia in the which great Alexander kept his wars: and was so named of the river Indus: and is divided into many kingdoms confining with the same. From this great India (called the East India) came great companies of men as writeth Herodotus: and inhabited that part of Ethiopia that lieth between the sea Bermeia (otherwise called the red sea or the gulf of Arabia) and the river of Nilus: all which regions that great Christian prince Prester john doth now possess. 
Prester john came out of India to Ethiope.  The said Indians prevailed so much, that they utterly changed the customs and name of that land, and called it India: 
Ethyopia called India.  by reason whereof, Ethiopia also hath of long time been called India. And hereupon came it that Arystotell, Seneca, and certain other old authors said that India was not far from Spain. 
India not far from Spain  After this also, of later days hour West India was so called of the said India of Prester john where the Portugals had their trade. For the pilot of the carvel that was first driven by forcyble wind to an unknown land in the West Ocean, 
Prester john known to the Portugals.  called the same India because the Portugals so called such lands as they had lately discovered Eastward. Chrystopher Colon also after the said pilot, called the west lands by the same name. Albeit, sum that take Colonus for an expert Cosmographer, think that he so named them of the East India, as to be the furthest and unknown end thereof reaching into the West under the other hemisphery or half globe of the earth beneath us: 
At the furthest east, beginneth the west.  affirming that when he first attempted to dicover the Indies, he went chiefly to seek the rich Island of Cipango, 
The Island of Cipango.  which falleth on the part of great China or Cathay as writeth Marcus Paulus Uenetus and other: 
China.  
Cathay.  And that he should sooner come thither by following the course of the son Westward then against the same: 
To the East by the west.  Albeit many think that there is no such Island, or at the least not yet known by that name: whereas also Marcus Paulus observed no exact description of the place either of this Island or of Cathay. 
Marcus Paulus Uenetus.    

☞ The first discovering of the West Indies.  
A Certain carvel sailing in the west Ocean about the coasts of Spain, had a forcyble and continual wind from the East whereby it was driven to a land unknown and not describe in any map or card of the sea: 
A hard beginning.  and was driven still along by the coast of the same for the space of many days until it came to a haven: where in a short time the most part of the mariners being long before very weak and feeble by reason of hunger & travail, died: So that only the pilot with three or four other remained alive. And not only they that died did not enjoy the Indies which they first discovered to their misfortune, but the residue also that lived had in manner as little fruition of the same: not leaving or at the least not openly publishing any memory thereof, neither of the place, or what it was called, or in what year it was found. Albeit, the fault was not theirs, but rather the malice of other, or the envy of that which we call fortune. I do not therefore marvel that the ancient histories affirm that great things proceed and increase of small and obscure beginnings, 
Great things proceeding of smaule and obscure beginnings.  sith we have seen the same verefyed in this finding of the Indies, being so notable and new a thing. We need not be curious to seek the name of the pilot sith death made a short end of his doings. Sum will that he came from Andaluzia, and traded to the islands of Canaria and the Island of Madera when this large and mortal navigation chanced unto him. 
The pylotte that first found the Indies.  Other say that he was a Byscayne, and traded into England and France. Other also, that he was a Portugal: and that either he went or came from Mina or India: 
Mina.  which agreeth well with the name of these new lands as I have said before. again, sum there be that say that he browght the caravel to Portugal: or to the Island of Madera, or to sum other of the Islands called delos Azores. Yet do none of them affirm any thing, although they all affirm that the pylotte died in the house of Chrystopher Colon, with whom remained all such writings and annotations as he had made of his viage in the said caravel, aswell of such things as he observed both by land and sea, as also of the elevation of the pole in those lands which he had discovered.   

¶ What manner of man Chrystopher Colon was: and how he Came first to the knowledge of the Indies.  
CHristopher Colon was borne in Cugureo, or (as sum say) in Nerui, a village in the territory of Genua in Italy. He descended as sum think, of the house of the Pelestreles of Placentia in Lombardy. He began of a child to be a mariner: of whose art they have great exercise on the river of Genua. 
Thus also began Richard chancellor.  He traded many years into Suria and other parts of the East. After this, he became a master in making cards for the sea, whereby he had great vantage. He came to Portugal to know the reason and description of the south coast of Africa and the navigations of the Portugals, thereby to make his cards more perfect to be sold. He married in Portugal as sum say: or as many say, in the Island of Madera, where he dwelled at such time as the said carvel arrived there, whose pilot suiorned in his house, and died also there, bequething to Colon his card of the description of such new lands as he had found, whereby Colon had the first knowledge of the Indies. Sum have thowght that Colon was well learned in the Latin tongue and the science of cosmography: 
Colon was not much learned.  and that he was thereby first moved to seek the lands of the Antipodes and the rich Island of Cipango whereof Marcus Paulus writeth. Also that he had red what Plato in his dialogs of Timeus and Cricias, writeth of the great Island Atlantide, 
The Island ●tlantide.  and of a great land in the West Ocean undiscovered being bigger than Asia and Africa. Furthermore that he had knowledge what aristotel and Theophrastus say in their books of marvels, where they write that certain merchants of Carthage sailing from the straights of Gibraltar toward the west and south, 
The land found by the Carthaginenses.  found after many days a great Island not inhabited: yet replenished with all things requisite, and having many navigable rivers. In deed Colon was not greatly learned: yet of good understanding. And when he had knowledge of the said new lands by the information of the dead pilot, 
Colon conferred with learned men.  made relation thereof to certain learned men with whom he conferred as touching the like things mentioned of old authors. He communicated this secret and conferred chiefly with a friar, named john Perez of Marchena that dwelled in the monastery of Rabida. So that I verily believe, that in manner all that he declared, and many things more that he left unspoken, were written by the said Spanish pilot that died in his house. For I am persuaded, that if Colon by science attained to the knowledge of the Indies, he would long before have communicate this secret to his own country men the Genueses, that travail all the world for gains, and not have come into Spain for this purpose. But doubtless he never thought of any such thing before he chanced to be acquainted with the said pilot who found those lands by fortune, 
Chance and art.  according to the saying of Pliny: Quod ars docere non potuit, casus invenit. That is: That art could not teach, chance found. Albeit, the more Christian opinion is, 
A Christian opinion.  to think that god of his singular providence and infinite goodness, at the length with eyes of compassion as it were looking down from heaven upon the sons of Adam so long kept under Satan's captivity, intended even then (for causes to him only known) to raise those winds of mercy whereby that carvel (herein most like unto the ship of No whereby the remanent of the hole world was saved as by this carvel this new world received the first hope of their salvation) was driven to these lands. 
The carvel compared to the ship of Noye.  But we will now declare what great things followed of this smaule beginning, and how Colon followed this matter revealed unto him not without gods providence.   

¶ What labour and travail Colon took in attempting his first viage to the Indies.  
AFter the death of the pilot and mariners of the Spanish carvel that discovered the Indies, Chrystopher Colon purposed to seek the same. But in how much more he desired this, the less was his power to accomplish his desire. For, beside that of himself he was not able to furnish one ship, he lacked also the favour of a king under whose protection he might so enjoy the riches he hoped to find, that none other might take the same from him or defeat him thereof. And seeing the king of Portugal occupied in the conquest of Africa and the navigations of the East which were then first attempted, 
The king of Portugal.  the king of Castyle likewise no less busied in the wars of Granada, 
The king of Castille.  he sent to his brother Bartholomewe Colon (who was also privy to this secret) to practise with the king of England Henry the seventh being very rich and without wars: 
King Henry the seventh.  promising to bring him great riches in short time if he would show him favour and furnish him with ships to discover the new Indies whereof he had certain knowledge. But neither here being able to bring his suit to pass, he caused the matter to be moved to the king of Portugal Don Alonso the fift of that name: at whose hands he found neither favour nor money, forasmuch as the licenciate Calzadilla the bishop of Uiseo, 
barnard knew not all things.  and one master Rodrigo men of credit in the science of cosmography, withstood him and contended that there neither was nor could any gold or other riches be found in the west as Colon affirmed. By reason whereof he was very sad and pensive: but yet was not discouraged or despaired of the hope of his good adventure which he afterward found This done, he took shiping at Lisburne, and came to Palos of Moguer where he communed with Martin Alonso Pinzon an expert pilot, who offered himself unto him. After this disclosing the hole secrets of his mind to john Perez of Marchena (a friar of thorder of saint Frances in Rabida, and well learned in cosmography) & declarying unto him how by following the course of the son by a temperate usage, rich and great lands might be found, the friar greatly commended his enterprise, and gave him counsel to break the matter to the duke of Medina Sidonia Don Enrique of Guzman a great lord and very rich: 
The duke of Medina Sidonia.  And also to Don Lewis of Cerda the duke of Medina Celi, 
The duke of Medina Celi.  who at that times had great provision of ships well furnished in his haven of Santa Maria. But whereas both these dukes took the matter for a dream and as a thing devised of an Italian deceiver who (as they thought) had before with like pretence deluded the kings of England and Portugal, the friar gave him courage to go to the court of the catholic prince's Don Ferdinando and lady Isabella princes of Castille: affirming that they would be joyful of such news. And for his better furtherance herein, wrote letters by him to friar Ferdinando of Talavera the queen's confessor. Chrystopher Colon therefore, repaired to the court of the Cathollike princes, in the year. M. CCCC.lxxxvi. and delivered unto their hands the petition of his request as concerning the discovering of the new Indies. But they being more careful, and applying all their mind how they might drive the moors out of the kingdom of Granade, 
The conquest of Granada.  which great enterprise they had already taken in hand, did little or nothing esteem the matter. But Colon not thus discouraged, found the means to declare his suit to such as had sometimes private communication with the king. 
what men know not they count funtasticall.  Yet because he was a stranger and went but in simple apparel, nor otherwise credited then by the letter of a grey friar, they believed him not, neither gave ear to his words: whereby he was greatly tormented in his imagination. 
Colon his entertainment.  Only Alonso of Quintanilia the kings chief auditor gave him meat and drink at his own charges, and hard gladly such things as he declared of the lands not then found: desiring him in the mean time to be content with that poor enterteynement, and not to despair of his enterprise: putting him also in good comfort that he should at one time or other, come to the speech of the catholic princes. And thus shortly after by the means of Alonso of Quintanilia, Colon was browght to the presence and audience of the Cardinal Don Pero Gonzales of Mendoza, archbishop of Toledo, 
The archbishop of Toledo.  a man of great revenues & authority with the king and queen, who brought him before them after that he well perceived and examined his intent. 
Colon is brought to the kings presence.  And by this means was his suit hard of the catholic princes, who also red the book of his memorials which he presented unto them. And although at the first they took it for vain and false that he promised, nevertheless they put him in good hope that he should be well dispatched when they had finished the wars of Granada which they had now in hand. With which answer, Colon began to revive his spirits, with hope to be better esteemed and more favourably to be hard among the gentlemen and noble men of the court, who before took him only for a crafty fellow and deceiver: and was nothing dismayed or discouraged when so ever he debated the matter with them, although many judged him fantastical, 
The judgement of ignorant folks.  as is the manner of ignorant men to call all such as attempt any thing beyond their reach and the compass of their knowledge: thinking the world to be no bigger than the cagies wherein they are brought up and live. But to return to Colon: So hot and urgent was the siege of Granada, that they presently granted him his demand to seek the new lands, 
Colon is dispatched.  and to bring from thence gold, silver, pearls, precious stones, spices, and such other rich things. They gave him also the tenth part of all the revenues and customs dew unto the king of all such lands as he should discover, 
Colon his reward.  not doing prejudice in any thing to the king of Portugal. The particulars of this agreement were made in the town caused Sanera Fe: and the privilege of the reward, in Granada the xxx day of Aprell the same year that the city was won. And whereas the said catholic princes had not money presently to dispatch Colon, Lewis of s. Angel the kings secretary of accounts, lente them six quentes of maravedes, which in a gross sum make xvi thousand ducades. Two things are herein chiefly to be noted: 
One quent is x hundredth thousand●.  whereof the one is, that for so smaule charges they have increased the revenues of the crown of Castyle as much as the Indies are in value. The other is, that ending the conquest of the moors who possessed the kingdom of Granada eight hundredth years, they immediately began the conquest of the Indies, as though the nation of the spaniards were ever appointed to fight against infidels and enemies of the faith of jesus Chryst.  
By this travail of Colonus in so noble an enterprise and so hard success, doth the saying of Pliny appear to be most true, where in the preface of his natural history written to themprour Uespasian he writeth in this manner. Res ardus vetustis novitatem dare: Novis, autori tatem: absoletis, nitorem, obseuris, lucem: sastiditis, gratiam: dubiis, fidem: omnibus vero naturam, et naturae fuatl omnia, Itaque etiam non assecutis, voluisse abund● pulchrum atque magnificum est. That is to say: It is a dyfficulte thing to give newenes to owlde things, authority to new things: beauty to things out of use: fame to the obscure: favour to the hateful: credit to the doubtful: nature to all, and all to nature. To such nevertheless as can not attain to all these, it is greatly commendable and magnifical to have attempted the same.  
In the scuchen of arms given to Colon by Don Ferdinando and queen Elizabeth Catholic princes (so called for their wars against the infidels) these verses were written.  
Por Castilia y por Leon,  
nuevo mundo hallo Colon.  
That is; For Castille and for Leon,  
The new world found Colon.   

¶ Of new Spain called Nova Hispania, or Mexico.  
New Spain is that part of the continent or firm land that lieth West and South from the land of Floryda. This was subdued to th'empire of Castille by the right noble gentleman Ferdinando Cortese the marquis of the vale of Quaxaca. In this land are many provinces containing in them in manner innumerable cities, among whichthat is the chief which the Indians call Mexico or Temixtitan, 
The city of Mexico or Temixtitan  consysting of more than five hundredth thousand inhabitants. It standeth in the midst of a lake of salt water as doth venice in the sea. The lake containeth forty Persian miles called Parasange, every one consysting of xxx furlons, and more as sum say. In these regions is found great plenty of gold, silver, 
Gold and silver.  and precious stones, with innumerable other things both necessary for the life of man and pleasant: as silk, 
Silk.  bombasine cotton, 
Cotton.  alame, 
Alum.  Safferne, Woade, 
woad.  with divers other things wherewith cloth & silk is died. There is also such abundance of sugar, 
Sugar.  that certain spanish ships are yearly freighted therewith and bring the same into Seville from whence it is carried in manner to all parts of Christendom. the inhabitauntes of Mexico are subtile people, and use much craft in their bargaining They have not the use of gold and silver money: 
Shells for money.  but use in the stead thereof the half shells of almonds, which kind of Barbarous money they call Cacao or Cacanguate. In manner all kinds of corn are there very good cheap: 
Corn Beasts.  especially barley and wheat. They have great plenty of hearts, wild bores, Lions, Leopards, and Tigers, which beasts wander in manner in every place. The region is most commodious for hawking and hunting for the great abundance it hath of beasts and fowls. 
hawking and hunting.  But the people exercise all their cunning in making the images of their Idolatry, and in painting. 
Painting.  Their women are valiant: and sumptuous in their apparel and other tyrementes. For they so vychely fring and beset the same with pearls, 
women sumptuously apparelled.  precious stones, and gold, that nothing can be more excellent. They have a kind of paper greatly differing from owrs. In this they express their minds by certain figures. For they have nor otherwise those ofletters. The nation is desirous of war: and doth not long keep the conditions of peace unviolated: 
A warlike nation.  But delighteth rather in civil and most cruel battle among themselves then to live in peace and quietness. Such as in the wars faule by any means into the hands of their enemies, either by submission or otherwise, are partly sacrificed to the Idols, 
Captives sacrificed to Idols.  and the residue given to the soldiers to be eaten, in like manner as we reward dogs and hawks with part of their prey. They have innumerable Idols which every one maketh for his particular god after the fantasy of his own brain, and giveth thereto divine honour. Albeit at this day they do by little and little leave of their barbarous fierceness: and with hour religion embrace better manners. For they now profess the faith of christ, and in his name pray unto God the father.  
Understand here that as touching these regions called new Spain, you may read at large in the book here before entitled of the lands and Islands lately found. This book followeth immediately after the Decades, unless the printer have also written the third decade over the head of that book which entreateth principally of the regions now cauld new Spain. Of the conquest of this Mexico, Francisco Lopez hath written a large book in the spanish tongue.   

¶ Of Peru.  
The province called Peru, was also named nova Cathilia by them that first found it. This region is the west part of America: and is situate in the longitude of .290. degrees, proceeding from the West to the East. And southward beginneth five degrees beyond the Equinoctial line, and is extended very far into the south. This is taken to be the richest land in gold, silver, 
Peru is the richest land that is known  pearls precious stones, and spices, that ever was found yet to this day. For gold is there in such plenty that they make pyspots thereof, and other vessels applied to filthy uses. But this is more to be marveled at, that in a city called Collao was found a house all covered with massy plates of gold. 
A house covered withgold  In their wars also their harness was of gold and silver. 
harness of gold.  Their weapons are bows, arrows, flings, darts, and pikes. Thinhabitantes are warlike people and of great agility. They have cities defended with laws and arms. The region is exceeding fruitful, 
A fruitful region.  and yieldeth corn twice in the year. It is so flourishing with many fayze woods, mountains, rivers, and other both pleasant and necessary commodities, that it seemeth in manner an earthly paradise. It hath divers kinds of beasts, and yet none hurtful or of ravening kind. There are sheep of such height that they use them in the stead of horses. 
Great sheep  Sume write that they are as big as the young fools of camels: and that their wool is very soft and fine. Also that the ewes bring forth lambs twice a year. The people are witty and of gentle behaviour. Cunning also in arts, faithful of promise, 
The beauty of Christian Princes.  and of manners not greatly to be discommended, save that they are ignorant of christ: who nevertheless is now known unto them in many places, as our hope is he shallbe daily more and more if all princes will herein put their helping hands to the plough of hour lord, and send labourers into his vineyard.   

¶ Of the great river called Rio de la Plata (that is) the river of silver.  
This is river reacheth very far in length & breadth: and is called Uruai in the Indian tongue. Into this falleth an other river named Parave. 
Parave.  The first that sailed into the river of Plata, was john Dias Solis, 
john Dias Solis.  whom the right noble king of Spain Ferdinandus made admiral of these seas. In the river lieth an Island which john Dias named Martinus Gratias because a pilot of his so called, 
The Island Martinus Gratias.  was buried there. This Island is situate in the midst of the river: and is distant from the mouth of the same about forty leaques. As the said Admiral attempted to expugn the Island, he was suddenly oppressed and slain of the Indians that privily assailed him. Wherewith nevertheless their barbarous cruelty was not satisfied until they had torn him in pieses and devoured him. But many years after, Themperors majesty and king of Spain Charles the fift, sent forth Sebastian Cabot (a man of great courage and skilful in Cosmographi, 
The voyage of Sebastian Cabote to the river of Plata.  and of no less experience as concerning the stars and the sea) with commandment to discover and subdue the Islands of Tharsis, 
Thar●is.  Ophir, 
Ophir.  Cipango, 
Cipango.  and Coi Cathay. 
Cathay.  Receiving therefore his commission and proceeding forward on his usage, he arrived by chance at this Island: The cause whereof was that the principal vessel was lost by shipwreck, and the men that saved their lives by swiming were received into other ships. perceiving therefore that by reason of this chance he could by no means perform his viage attempted, he intended to expugn the said Island, and thereupon to convey his victuals to land, to prepare his soldiers to thinvasion, to plant colonies, and to erect for tresses by the rivers side whereby the spaniards might be defended from the violence of the barbarians. But before he attempted this, he was advertised that the Island was rich in gold and silver. Which thing did so encourage him, that without respect of peril he thought best to expugn it by one means or other, wherein his boldness took good effect as often times chanceth in great affairs. Furthermore as touching the river, 
The river of Plata.  Sebastian Cabote made relation that he never saw any comparable unto this in breadth and depth. For whereas it falleth into the sea, it containeth xxv leaques in breath. From the mouth of the river, Cabot sailed up the same into the land for the space of three hundredth and fifty leaques as he writeth in his own card. That it is of great depth, may hereby be considered that many great rivers fall into it: so that the channel can not be shallow that containeth such abundance of water, and such plenty of good and great fishes. For there in is manner no fish in the sea, that is not found in this river. As soon as the Spaniards were set aland, they made a proof if the soil were fruitful to bear corn. Taking therefore fifty grains of wheat and committing the same to the earth in the month of September, 
marvelous fru●fu●nes.  they gathered thereof two thousand and fifty at December next following: wherein sum being deceived and mistaking the thing, have written in the stead of two thousand and fifty, fifty thousand and two. The like fertility is there of all other grain and pulse. Furthermore thinhabitants declared that not far from that place, there are great and high mountains in the which is found great plenty of gold. And no great distance from the same, to be other mountains no less fruitful of silver, 
Mountains containing gold and silver.  and many other things long to rehearse. the inhabitauntes are painful men, and till the ground diligently, wherein they take great pleasure: and have therefore great plenty of bread of Maizium. There are sheep of such bigness that they compare them to young camels or asses as sum say. 
Great sheep  Their wool is very fine: and nearest unto the fyennesse of silk. There are also beasts of divers kinds. Among men there is difference, that such as live in the mountains, are white, 
Men with deformed legs.  and for the most part like unto the men of hour regions. But they that dwell about the river (as though they took their colour thereof) are blackysshe or purple of the colour of fine Iren or steel. 
Their colour.  This also chanceth to many of them, that their fiete and legs are like the legs and fiete of the foul called the oystreche.   

¶ Of the higher East India called India Tercera or Trecera.  
IN this India which the Portugals call Tercera, are very great kingdoms: as the kingdoms of Bengala, Pegu, Berma, Erancangui, Dausian, Copelam, and the great kingdom of Malacha, 
Malacha.  called of the owlde writers Aurea Chersonesus: whose chief city isalso called Malacha, and was in old time named Tachola. 
Tachola.  Under this kyngedgme are infinite Islands called Maluche, 
The Island of ●alucha.  whereof the principal are these: java the greater, java the less, Polagua, Mendana Cubu, Cailon, Huban, Burr, Tenado, Anbon, and Gilolo. With infinite other. On the south-west part from Malacha, is the great Island of Samotra called in old time Laprobana, 
The Island of Samotra.  in the which are the kingdoms of Pe●ir, Biraen, Pazer, Ardagni, and Ham. This Island and all the other caule● Maluche, 
spices.  bring forth great quantity of cloves, cinnamon, nutmegs, maces, and all other kinds of spices exe. p●o pepper, which groweth in the province of calicut a●d the Island of Ceilam. 
Calocut.  
Ceilam.  All these sorts of spices are carried to Malacha to be sold. But the greatest part of them is carried to Cathay and China: and from thence to the north parts of Tartary. 
Cathay.  
China.  This kingdom of China, is very great: and was in old time called Sina. Here is found great plenty o● precious stones. 
Precious stones.  The people are very subtile and rich. They are all apparelled either in silk or cloth, 
Silk.  or vestures of other workmanship: and are of good civility. They do not gladly permit the Portugals or other strangers to traffic in their kingdom: whose most famous place upon the sea side, is named Cautan, 
Cautan.  and the sea Machiam, called of the owlde writers the sea of Sina.   

¶ Of the lands of Laborador and Baccalaos, lying west and northwest from England, and being part of the firm land of the West Indies.  
MAny have travailed to search the coast of th● land of Laborador, aswell to th'intent to know how far or whither it reacheth, as also whether there be any passage by sea through the same into the sea of Surand the Islands of Maluca which are under the Equinoctial line: 
The way to the Islands of Maluca by the north sea.  thinking that the way● thither should greatly be shortened by this viage. The spaniards as to whose right the said Islands of spices pertain, 
The Spany●●des.  did first seek to find the same by this way The Portugales also having the trade of spices in their hands, did travail to find the same: although hitherto neither any such passage is found or the end of that land. In the year a thousand and five hundredth. Basper Cortesreales, 
Ba●per Corte●reales.  made a viage thither with two caravels: but found not the straight or passage he sought. At his being there, he named the Islands that lie in the mouth of the gulf Quadrado, after his name Cortesreales, 
〈…〉.  lying in the. L. degrees and more: and browght from that land about three score men for slaves. He greatly marveled to behold the huge quantity of snow and Ise. 
snow and Ise.  For the sea is there frozen exceedingly. the inhabitauntes are men of good corporature, although tawny like the Indies, and laborious. They paint their bodies, and wear bracelets and hoops of silver and copper. 
Furre●.  Their apparel is made of the skins of marterns and divers other beasts, which they wear with the hear inward in winter, and outward in summer. This apparel they gird to their bodies with girdles made of cotton, or the sinews of fishes and beasts. They eat fish more than any other thing, and especially salmons, 
fish.  although they have fowls and fruit. They make their houses of timber whereof they have great plenty's and in the stead of tiles, cover them with the skins of fishes and beasts. It is said also that there are griefs in this land: 
Gryfes.  and that the bears and many other beasts and fowls are white. 
Bears.  To this and the Islands about the same, the Britons are accustomed to resort: 
The britons.  as men of nature agreeable unto them and borne under the same altitude and temperature. The Norway's also sailed thither with the pilot called john Scoluo: And the english men with Sebastian Cabot. 
Sebastian Cabot.   
The coast of the land of Baccalaos, 
The land of Baccall●os.  is a great tract: and the greatest altitude thereof, is. xiviii. degrees and a half Sebastian Cabot was the first that browght any knowledge of this land. For being in England in the days of king Henry the seventh, 
The viage of Cabot in the days of king henry the seventh.  he furnished two ships at his own charges or (as sum say) at the kings, whom he persuaded that a passage might be found to Cathay by the north seas, and that spices might be brought from thence sooner by that way, then by the viage the Portugals use by the sea of Sur He went also to know what manner of lands those Indies were to inhabit. He had with him three hundredth men, and directed his course by the tract of Island upon the cape of Laborador at lviii degrees: 
Isee in july.  affirming that in the month of july there was such could and heaps of Ice that he durst pass no further: also that the days were very long and in manner without might, and the nights very clear. Certain it is, that at the. lx. degrees, the longest day is of xviii hours. But considering the could and the strangeness of th● unknown land, he turned his course from thence to the West, following the coast of the land of Baccalaos unto th● xxxviii. degrees, 
Baccalaos.  from whence he returned to England. To conclude, the Brytons and Danes have sailed to the Baccalaos: 
Bry●ons.  
●anes.  and jaques Cartier a french man was there twice with three galleons: 
jaques Cartyer.  as one in the year xxxiiii and the other in the xxxv and chose the land to inhabit from the xlv degrees to the. li. being as good a land as France, and all things therein commune to such as first possess the same.  
Of these lands, jacobus Gastaldus writeth thus: The new land of Baccalaos, 
The people of Baccalaos  is a could region, whose inhabytauntes are idolaters and pray to the son and moon● and divers Idols. They are white people and very rustical. For they eat flesh and fish and all other things raw. sometimes also they eat man's flesh privily so that their Laciqui have no knowledge thereof. The apparel of both the men and women, is made of bears skins, although they have sables and marterns, not greatly esteemed because they are little. Sum of them go naked in summer, and wear apparel only in winter. The Brytous and French men are accustomed to take fish in the coast of these lands where is found great plenty of Tunnyes which thinhabitants cawl Baccalaos whereof the land was so named. 
fishing for tunnyes.  Northward from the region of Baccalaos, is the land of Laborador, 
Laborador.  all full of mountains and great woods in which are many bears and wild bores. Th'inhabitants are Idolatoures and warlike people, apparelled as are they of Baccalaos. In all this new land, is neither city or castle: but they live in companies like herds of beasts.   

¶ The discovering of the land of Floryda.  
THe governor of the Island of Boriquena john Ponce of Leon being discharged of his office and very rich, 
john Ponce.  
water of great virtue, of this read in the De●ades.  furnished and sent forth two carvels to seek the Islands of Boyuca in the which the Indians affirmed to be a fountain or springe Whose water is of virtue to make old men young. While he travailed six months with owtragious desire among many Islands to find that he sought, and coul●e find no token of any such fountain, he entered into Bimini and discovered the land of Florida in the year .1512. on Easter day which the spaniards call the flourishing day of Pascha, 
Bemmin●.  whereby they named that land Florida. And supposing that great richeses might be browght from thence, he returned into Spain and convenaunted with king Ferdinando as touching the trade: and by thintercession of Nicolas de Quando and Peter Nunez de Guzman, the king did not only make him governor of Bemini and Florida, but also sent forth with him three ships from Seville toward his second viage in the year .1515. He touched in the Island of Guacana otherwise called Guadalupe, 
Guacana.  and sent to land certain of his men with the laundresses of the ships: whom the Canibales lying in ambusshe, 
The Canibales.  assailed with their envenomed arrows: and slaying the most part, carried away the women. With this evil beginning, john Ponce departed from hence to Boriquen and from thence to Florida where he went alaude with his soldiers to espy a place most commodious to inhabit and plant a colony. 
Boriquena.  But the Indians coming forth against him to defend the entrance, assailed the spaniards fiercely and slew and wounded many of them. At which conflict also he himself being wounded with an arrow, died shortly after in the Island of Cuba: 
The dea●● of john Ponce.  and so ending his life, consumed a great part of the richesse he had before begotten at saint johannes of Boriquen. This john Ponce had before sailed with Chrystopher Colon to the Island of Hispaniola in the year .1493. He was a gentle soldier in the wars of this Island, and captain of the province of Niguei for Nycolas de Quando ●hat conquested the same. The region of Floryda is a point or cape of land reaching into the sea like unto a tongue: 
The land of Floryda.  being a famous and notorious place among the Indians by rea●on of many spaniards that have been slain there. But whereas by same this Floryda was esteemed a rich land, many valiant and noble men desired the conquest thereof, among whom Ferdinando de Soto (who had before been a captain in Peru and greatly enriched by thimprisonment of king Atabaliba) attempted 
Ferdinando de Soto.  a viage thither with a good band of men, and spent five year in seeking of gold mines, supposing that this land had been like unto Peru.  
In fine, he died there and was the destruction and undoing of all that went with him without inhabyting that land. 
The valiente minds of the spaniards.  in the which the conquestours had hitherto never good success, forasmuch as these Indians are valiente archers and strong and hardy men. But the valiant minds of the spaniards not discouraged by these mysaduentures, after the death of Ferdinando Soto, 
The third attempt of the conquest of Florida.  many worthy gentlemen desired this conquest in the year .1544. among whom was julyan Samano, and Peter de Ahumada being brethren and men of sufficient ability for such an enterprise. But neither th'emperor being then in Germany, neither the prince Don Phylippe his son who governed all the kingdoms of Castille and Aragonie, neither yet the counsel of the Indies would in any case agree to the conquest. 
certain friars attempt the conquest only with words, but with evil success.  Nevertheless not utterly contemning the matter which they were partly persuaded might otherwise be browght to pass, they sent thither friar Lewis Cancel of Baluastro with other friars of the order of saint Dominike who offered themselves to convert the nations of that land from their gentility to the faith of christ and obedience to Themperor, only with words. The friar therefore going forward on his viage at the kings charges in the year .1549. went aland with four other friars which he took with him and certain mariners with out harness or weapons: unto whom as he began his preaching, 
The friars are slain and eaten.  many of the Indians of the said Florida resorted to the sea side, where without giving audience to his words, they carried him away with three other of his companions and did eat them, whereby they suffered martyrdoms for the faith of Chryst. The residue that escaped, made haste to the ship and kept themselves for confessors as sum say Many that favour th'intent of the friars, do now consider that by that means the Indians could not be browght to hour friendship and religion. Nevertheless, that if it could so have been browght to pass, 
A new kind of disgrading  it had been better. There came of late from that ship, one that had been the page of Ferdinando de Sodo, who declared that the Indians hanged up the skins with the heads and crowns of the said friars in one of their temples.   

¶ An opinion that Europa, Africa, and Asia, are Islands: and of certain navigations about the same.  
THe ancient writers divided this hour world into Asia, Africa, and Europa, by the river Tanais as Isocrates declareth in his Panegyrico. afterward they divided Asia and Africa by the ●urnynges and course of the river Nilus, thowghe the same had been better by the sea Bermeto (that is) the red sea, which almost traverseth and passeth through the land from the Ocean to the sea Mediterraneum which divideth Europa and Asia. But Berosus the Chaldean, saith that Noah gave names to Africa, Asia, and Europa: 
Noah gave names to Africa, A●ia, and Europa.  and gave them to his sons, Cham, Sem, and Jafet: also that he sailed by the sea Mediterraneum ten years. In fine we now conclude that the three said provinces occupy this mydlande of the world. All in general say that Asia is greater than any of the other, 
A●ia.  and in manner as big as they both. Albeit Herodotus in his Melpomene, scorneth them that make Europe and Asia equal: 
Europe.  affirming that Europe in longitude is equal to Asia and Africa: and that it passeeh them in latitude, wherein he speaketh not greatly out of square. But to speak more of this elsewhere, not pertaining to the matter we have in hand, 
The hole earth is an Island.  I say that Homerus one of the most ancient writers, saith that the world which is divided into Asia, Africa, and Europa, is an Island as rehearseth Pomponius Mela in his third book. Strabo in the first book of his Geography, saith that the earth which is inhabited, is an Island environed with the Ocean. H●ginius also, and Solinus, confirmed this sentence, although Solinus do err in mystakinge the names of the seas, supposing that the Caspian sea was part of the Ocean, 
The Caspian sea.  being rather like unto the sea Mediterraneum so named because it is in the mydlande as is the Caspian sea without participation of the great Ocean. 
Calais is a river.  Strabo writeth that in the time of Tolomeus Euergetes, one Eudoxus sailed three or four times from Calais to India: 
navigations from the red sea to East India.  And that the guides of the red sea (called the gulf of Arabia or Bermeio) presented to the same king Tolomeus, an Indian whom he brought from thence. King juba also proved this navigation from Calais to India as writeth Solinus. Whereby it appeareth that the navigation to India by the Ocean was then well known and frequented, although not so much as at this present, the same being neither then or now a thing of great difficulty or travail by the coasts of hot regions. 
The viage to India by the no●th seas.  But to sail from India to Calais by the other part of the north by a clime and regions of extreme could, should be doubtless a difficult and dangerous thing, whereof is no memory among the owlde authors saving only of one ship as Pliny and Mela do write, rehearsing the testimony of Cornelius Nepos who affirmed that the king of Suema presented to Quintus Metelus Cele● lieutenant of France, 
The history of Comelius Nepos.  certain Indians driven by tempest into the sea of Germany: if the same were not of the land of Laborador or bacalaos, and they deceived in their colour. 
Note this.  For sum say that likewise in the days of the Emperor Fredericus Barbarossa, certain Indians were browght in a Canoa from the city of Lubec in Germany. 
Indians in Lubec.  Furthermore pope Aeneas Silvius writeth that the Sarmation sea, is as certain as the Scythian, Germanian, or Indian sea. Now also there is great knowledge and experience how the navigations and passage may be attempted by Norway● and other north regions under the same north, 
The Sarmatian sea.  and to follow that coast to the sou●h sea of Sur and keep that course by the tract of China. Olanus Gothus the archbishop of Upsalia and borne in Gothlande, hath written much of these north regions and navigations by the north sea. In the trace of this viage by the north sea, 
●lande.  are the Islands of Island and Gruntlande, 
Gruntlande.  although there is doubt whether Gruntlande be an Island or part of the firm land. It is, xl. leaques, from Lapponia, 
Lapponia.  and somewhat more from Finmarchia a land of Scandinavia in Europe. 
Finmarchia.  The people of Greenland are strong men and of coomly stature. They sail with small ships or barks covered close above with leather or beasts hides for fear of the could and fishes. 
Gruntlande.  Gruntlande as sum say, is fifty leaques from the north part of the firm land of the West Indies by the land of Laborador. 
The distance from Greenland to the land of Laborador.  But it is not yet known whether this land be continent or adherent with Gruntlande, or if there be any straight of sea between them. If all be one firm land adjoining by any part, than the two great parts of the world seem to join together about the north pole or under it, or beneath it, 
of the straight if it be.  forasmuch as it is not past forty or fifty leaques from Finmarche to Grun●lan●● whereby it may appear that although there be any suchstraight of ●idynge them, yet are they neighbours & not far in sunder. Furthermore from the land of Laborador by th'account of the pilottes, is about four hundredth leaques to ●aial, one of the Islands of Azores, 
The Ilande● of Sova, or Azores.  otherwise called the Islands of Soria lying in the West Ocean over against Spain. Also by their account the land of Laborador is about five hundredth leaques from Irland, 
From laborador to Irland.  and six hundredth from Spain.   

That the spaniards have sailed to the Antipodes (that is) such as go fiete to fiete against us, and inhabit the inferior hemisphery or half globe of the earth, contrary to th'opinion of the owlde writers.  
ALL the ancient philosophers of the gentiles do deny that there may be any passage from hour hemisphery or half compass of the earth to the Antopides by reason of the burnt line (called Zona Torrida) and the Ocean sea lying in the mid way, whereby this viage should be hindered and impossible, as Macrobius writeth, 
Macrobius.  at large in his commentaries upon the dream of Scipio. Of the christian philosophers, Clement writeth that it is not possible for any man to pass the Ocean: 
Clement.  and other writers of later time, seem to confirm the same. In deed I verily believe that this way was never known to them, aswell for that ever presupposing the thing to be impossible they never attempted it, as also that the Indians (whom we call Antipodes) have no ships sufficient for so long and difficult a navigation to bring them knowledge hereof, 
The Indians are Antipodes.  as have the Spaniards to pass the Ocean unto them: In so much that at this present this viage is by daily experience so well known unto the spaniards and Portugals, that they can in manner go thither blyndfielde, contrary to th'opinion of those philosophers. I will here omit to speak of many ships ●hat have sailed ordinarily from Spain to India, and speak only of the ship Uictoria which compassed about the hole globe of the world and touched in the lands of two or three Antipodes, 
The ship 〈◊〉  and in fine returned to Spain by a contrary way, whereby is declared the ignorance of the sage antiquity. In this navigation, they found m●ny secrea●es, 
A strange thing.  among the which this is strange and worthy memory, that all such dead Christians as were cast into the sea, lay on their backs and turned their faces upward: but the gentiles lay all groovelyn on their bellies. They also p●rceaued the son and moon to keep a contrary course from that they do here, & ever to cast the shadows of all things toward the south: 
Shadows to 〈◊〉 the so●th  which thing also was known to sum of the owlde writers. For this is manifest that the son riseth on the right hand to them that live in the thirty degrees on tother side the Equinoctial: 
The son rising on the right ●ande.  so that looking toward the son, they turn their faces to the north: whereby it appeareth to be true that they affirm. They consumed three years lacking xiiii days in goyn●e and coming, 
The viage of Magellanus.  and lost a day in their account, whereby they did eat flesh on fridays, and celebrated the feast of Easter on mondays: so that they overleaped a day (not failing in the calendar) and kept no just reckoning of the bisertile. The cause whereof while some have searched by philosophy, they have erred more than the mariners. They sailed x. thousand leaques and xiiii miles by their account, albeit they should have gone less, if their way had live right forth. But as they were enforced partly of necessity, and partly to find that they sowght, they made many wyndynges and turnings. They traversed the Equinoctial line two times without burning, contrary to th'opinion of t●e old authors. They remained five months in the Island of Tidore, whose inhabitants are Antipodes to them of Guinea, 
Antipodes.  
Guinea.  whereby it is apparent that we may communicate with them. And although they lost the sight of the north star, yet did they ever direct their course thereby. For being in the xl degrees of the south, 
The north star.  they saw the needle of the compass stand as directly toward the north as it doth in the sea Mediterraneum: unless sum say that it looseth his force somewhat. 
The needle & compass.  about the point of the south or pole Antarctic, they saw a little white cloud and four stars like unto to cross with three other ioyay●ge thereunto, which resemble hour Septentrion, and are indeed to be the signs or tokens of the south exeltre of heaven. 
〈…〉  Gre●t was the navigation of the fleet of Solomon, bu● greater was this of Themperors majesty Don Charles king of Spain. The Argos of jason which the antiquity plac●d among the stars, sailed but a little way and a short viage in comparison of the sh●ppe Uictoria which ought worthily to be kept in the Arsenal of Seville in perpetual memory of so famous an enterprise. The daungiours, payn●s, travails and labours of Uly●ses were nothing in respect of such as john Sebastian sustained: 
〈◊〉 Ioh● S●●●stian.  whereby in the scuchion of his arms in the stead of a monstrous or invincible beast, he worthily gave the world with this circumscription: PRIMUS CIRCUNDEDISTI ME. (that is) Thou art the first that hath compassed me about.  
As touching the need●e of our compass▪ I have red in the Portugals navigations that sailing as far so●th as Cap. de ●●na Speranza, the point of the needle stied respected ●h● north as it did on th●s side the Equinoctial. ●a●ynge that it ●um what trembeled and ●eciyned a ●●t●e, whereby the force ●eemed somewhat to be ●iminisshed, so that they were fain to help it with the lead stone.   

¶ Who first found the needle of the compass, and the use thereof.  
Speaking much of navigations, it might s●●e a thing undecent to omit to say somewhat of the needle of the compass▪ without the wh●ch as all navigations are but blind and wandering conjectures, even so should the Indieses never have bin found but by help of the same, forasmuch as the ships should have been lost in the Ocean, 
The chiefest 〈…〉 the ship.  were it not that their courses were directed by the ne●d●e and compass, which ought therefore to be compled the chief parts of the ship and principal instruments of 〈◊〉. The first that found the needle and the use thereof 〈…〉 and Mapheus' Girarours do write was one 〈◊〉 of Malpha a city in the kingdom of Naples, of 〈…〉 Neopolitans glory to this day: and that by goo● 〈…〉 as much as a citizen and neyghbour●s 〈…〉 the first finder of so commodious and profitable a thing, to the secret whereof so many excellent wits as were before him could not attain, although they had both iron and the load stone (caule● M●gnes) which are the materials of the needle. 
Magnes.  F●ert unto Flautus, the chief commendation is dew to the spaniards and Portugals by whose daily experience, 
The spaniards and Portugals.  the same is browght to further perfection, and the use thereof better kwowen: although hitherto no man knoweth the cause why the iron touched with the load stone, turneth ever toward the north star, as plainly appeareth in every common dial. 
why the needle turneth to the north.  In manner all writers attribute this to a secret and hid property, sum of the north, and other of the mixture or natural temperature of elements that is between iron and the said stone. If it be the property of the north or north star, than (as the pilots make their reckoning) neither should the needle make any change or dy●fer innorthestinge, as in sailing north-east without the Island of Tercera being one of the Islands of Azores or Soria and two hundredth leaques from Spain toward the West Eastwest) neither yet should it lose his office (as saith Olanus) in pa●synge from the Island of Magnet, 
The Island of Tercera.  
The Island of Magnet.  that is, the Island of the load stone, which is under or near about the north pole. But how so ever it be, or what so ever be the cau●e, truth it is that the needle turneth ever to the north although we sail about the south. We ought therefore to understand that the load s●one (which we falsely call the adamant) hath head, 
Note the quarters of the load stone.  fiete, and also arms as sum say. The iron that is rubbed with the head, never ceaseth to turn directly toward the north, as is to see in the dials that are made to the son. The rubbing of the fiete serveth for the south: as do likewise the other parts, for other quarters and points of heaven.  
Note here that if a piece of this stone, of the byggene●se of an egg or a walnut, or more or less, be broken into many sma●le pieces as big as ●yce or le●se, yet every of those smaule pieses, hath head, foot, and arms, as is said here before.   

¶ The Situation and bigness of the earth.  
IT may to sum seem a vain thing to seek the situation and bigness of the earth, although it be easy to know, forasmuch as it is situate in the midst of the world as the centre of the same, 
The sea.  being environed and as it were borne up of the sea which compasseth it about. Mela saith that the pillars that sustain it, are east, West, North, and South: which saying david confirmeth in the C.vi. psalm. 
The winds  These four are the most notable pillars or sustentations that the earth hath in heaven, according to the motions whereof, all voyages are ruled on the earth, from whence they have their original, as engendered of the divers qualities of vapours & exhalations raised by the son and otherwise. Eratosthenes put none other sustentations than the north and south poles, 
The poles.  and parteth the earth by the course of the son: which partition Marcus Uarro doth greatly commend as agreeable to reason. The poles are firm and immovable as an exeltre about the which the heaven month and is thurby sustained. They furthermore declare unto us under what part of heaven we be, how far, and wh●ch way we go, with also the largeness of heaven and commensuration of the earth. As for exemple: the straight of Gibraltar (accounting from Spain) is from the north, 
The measuring the circumference of the earth  or to speak more plainly from the point of the earth that is or may be directly vnde● the north ●ole, about liiii degrees which make ix hundredth and lxxx leaques according to the common computation of th● Cosmographers and Astronomers: And is from the Equinoctial line xxxvi degrees▪ which added to the other liiii make xxx degrees, being the hole distance from the north point to the Equinoctial l●ne dividing the earth by the midst, and the quarter or fourth part of the hole circumference of the earth: the which how great it is in compass and how many le●ques or miles it containeth, is easy to perceive accounting every degree lx miles. But that you may the bet●er perceive wh●t degrees are, I have thowght good to speak somewhat more hereof.   

¶ What degrees are.  
IN the owlde time their manner was to measure the earth and the world by furlongs, pa●es, and fiete, as is to read in Pliny, Strabo, and ●ther writers. But after that P●olome found degrees a hundredth and fifty years after the death of C●ryst, that manner of account was received as the best. 
〈…〉  Ptolemy divided all the hole body and face of the land and sea into three hundredth and sixty degrees of length o● longitude: and other as many degrees of breadth or latitude: so that the hole globe of the ball being round, containeth as much ●n latitude as longitude. 
〈…〉  He assigned likewise to every degree three score miles, which make xvii Spany●she leagues and a half: In such sort that the globe or ball of the earth measured directly by any of the four parts of the same, 
〈…〉.  cont●yne●h ●n circuit sy●e thou●and and two hundredth leaques. This computation and measuring, is so certain, th●t as it is approved of all men and found ●rewe by experience, so much the 〈◊〉 is it to be commended and had in admiration for 〈…〉 ●ereof was judged so dyfficult by job and 〈…〉, that no ●●an had found the measure of 〈◊〉 of the ●ame. They name those degrees of longitude, 
Degrees of Longitude.  that they account from son to son by the Equinoctial line which reacheth from the East to the West by the middle of the globe or ball of the earth. These can not well be obseru●d, forasmuch as in this ●ract of heaven, there is no fix or permanent sign whereunto the pilots may direct their eyes or instruments. For the son, although i● be a most clear sign, yet doth it daily change the place of rising and falling, 
The de●rees of 〈◊〉 are 〈◊〉 k●ow●n.  and keepethe not the same course the day following as the Astronomers affirm. And although there is no number of them that in travailing strange lands and seas have spent their goods and almost their wits to find the degrees of longitude without error as are found the degrees of latitude & height, 
The degrees of latitude.  yet is there none that hitherto hath any true knowledge thereof. The degrees of latitude or altitude, are they that are accounted from the north point to the sout●, the commensuration or measuring whenby, is most certain by reason that the north star is permane 
The nor●h st●●●e.  and remaineth still in one place, or at the least moveth about the pole which is their firm and steadfast sign whereby they account their degrees and direct their voyages. By the degrees therefore accounted by these most certain signs, is unfaylably measured the hole circumference of the land and sea, 
The circuit of the earth.  dividing the same into four equal parts in this manner. From the north point to the Equinoctial, are. lxxxx. degrees: and from the Equinoctial to the south point, other lxxxx. again on the contrary side, from the south point to the Equinoctial, are other. lxxxx. degrees: and from the Equinoctial again to the north point, are as many. This may we conjecture by good reason aswell of thinferior hemisphery whereof a great part is known unto us by the navigations of such as have passed the streyghets of Magellanus and the cape of Bona Speranza, 
The inferior hemi●pherie.  although we have no such clear and manifest relation as we ought to have of the land under the south pole being the other exel●ree of the world whose sight we lack. For (as Herodotus saith) if there be any land of the Hyperborcans (that is such as are under the north) there is also of the hypernorios, 
hyp●rbore●.  that is such as are under the south: 
〈◊〉  which perhaps are they that live in the land of the streygh●es of Magellanus as near unto the other pole. But what these l●ndes are, 〈◊〉 of what 〈◊〉 we can have no certain knowledge until sum man shall h●ue compassed about the lands under the south pole as did john Sebastian the circumference of the Equinoctial line.  
These last annotations of the Indies, ha●e I tran●●●ted out of the books of Franciscus Lopes, written in the 〈…〉 Themperors majesty: and partly also 〈◊〉 of the card ma●se by Sebastian Cabot.   

¶ A demonstration of the roundness of the Earth.  
MAny ignorant men think that the earth is not round only by judgement of the eye which is deceived in many things not only of the works of nature, 
T●● eye is de●ea●ed.  but also of ●athe as are done b● the 〈◊〉 and art of man. For they say: How can it be round forasmuch as although a man travail never so far either by land or sea, he seemeth ever to pass as it were by a right line with out any such circuit or compassing, ascending or descending, as pertaineth to all the parts of a round form. The which objection, as it is gross and simple, proceeding of the narrowness of the understanding of such as can not conceive the large circumference of the land and sea, even so may it be answered with this simple demonstration. In a ring that serveth for the finger of a man's hand, 
A ring. A circle.  the space of half an inch or little more, is half a circle. But in a ring or circle of bigger circumference, as in the hoop of a tub, half an inch appeareth in manner a right line, although it be not so in deed, forasmuch as it is not possible for any part of a circle to consist of a right line, neither any part of a line to consist of a circle, sith the parts must needs be conformable to the hole, consysting of such uniform parts as are in mathematicals. But not to wander to far in these subtylties, the greater that you can imagen the circle to be, so shall a greater part thereof seem a right line or plain form: As for exemple, imagining a circle whose diameter (that is measure from side to side) consisteth of a mile: in this circle a pole length or more, may seem a right line, as you may otherwise multiply of the like infinitely: whereby it shall appear that the large circumference of the earth well considered, a much greater part of the circle thereof then the eye of man conceiveth, may seem to be a right line, and he continually to walk upon a plain form forasmuch as every part of a circle is like unto other as I have said. This may suffice for a simple and brief demonstration and induction for such as are desirous to seek forth to know the truth hereof.   

¶ What credit ought to be given to writers as touching the works of nature.  
THe most ancient writer Diodorus, Siculus, in the fourth book of his Bibliotheca, writeth in this manner. If any man for the marvelous strangeness and novelty of such things as are describe in hour books, will not perhaps give credit to hour history, let him with right judgement consider the difference that is between the air of the Scythians and the Troglodytes compared to ours, 
The diversity of air in divers regions.  and he shall the easilier perceive the works of nature and approve hour writings. For hour air differeth so much from theirs, that it might seem incredible if experience were not more certain than doubtful reason. In sum regions the could is so extreme that great rivers are so frozen, 
Extreme cold.  that laden carts and armies of men pass over the immovable ise. Wine also and other moist things are so conieled that they may be cut with knives. But this is more marvelous, that thextreme parts of such apparel as men wear, are so bitten with could that they faule of. men's eyes are also dimmed: the fire giveth not his natural brightness: and brazen vessels and images are broken. Sumtime by reason of thick clouds, thunders and lightnings are neither seen or hard in such regions. Many other things more marvelous than these hath nature wrought, which may seem incredible to the ignorant: but easy to such as have experience. In the furthest parts of Egypt and Trogloditica, the heat of the son is so extreme about noon, 
Extreme heat.  that no man can see him that standeth by him, by reason of the thick air caused by the vapours and exhalations raised by the heat. None can go without shoes but have their fiete suddenly blystered and exulcerate. Such as are a thirst, die immediately except they have drink at hand, the heat so fast consumeth the moisture of their bodies. Meat put in brazen vessels, is sod in short space by the heat of the son without other fire. 
The force of education.  Yet they that are borne and browght up in such regions, had rather willingly sustain these incommodities than be enforced to live otherwise: such a love of their native country hath nature given to all men: custom of continuance from young years being also of force to over come the maliciousness of the air. Neverehelesse, 
Extreme heat & cold in A small distance.  these places of such contrary natures whereby such strange effects are caused, are not far in sunder or divided by any great distance. For, from the marishes of Meotis or Meotides where certain Scythians dwell in extreme could, 
from Scythia to Ethiopia.  many have sailed with ships of burden to Rhodes in the space of ten days: and from thence to Alexandria in four days. From whence passing through egypt by the river of Nilus, they have arrived in Ethiopia in other ten days: So that the navigation from the couldst parts of the world to the hottest r●gions, is no more than xxiiii continual days. Where as therefore the variety of the air is such in places of so small distance, it is no marvel that the customs and manners of living of the people of those regions, with the complexions of their bodies and such things as are engendered there, do greatly differ from ours.    

¶ The preface to the book● of Metals.  
TO this book of the Indies and navigations I have thowght good to add the book of metals, for three causes especially me moving: whereo● the first is, that it seemeth to me a thing undecent to read so much of gold and silver, and to know little or nothing of the natural generation thereof, being nevertheless things not only most desired, but also such without the which at this age the life of man can not be passed over without many adversities, forasmuch as poverty is hateful to all men, and virtue no further esteemed than it is supported by riches, sith now that lady that reigned in Satur's days, is become the slave to him that was then her bondman in that golden world, so named, not for the desire that men had to gold, but for thinnocency of living in those days, when Mars was of no power, and men thought it cruelty by breaking the bones of hour mother the earth, to open a way to the court of infernal Pluto from thence to get gold and silver the seeds of all mischiefs and angels of such a god, whom the antiquity (not without good consideration) painted blind, affirming also that of him gold and silver have received the property to blind the eyes of men. But sith it is now so that we shallbe enforced to seek aid by that which was sometimes a mischief, it resteth to use the matter as do cunning physicians that can minister poison in proportion with other things in such sort qualyfyinge the maliciousness thereof, that none shall thereby be intoxicate. Forasmuch therefore as gold and silver have obtained this prerogative that they are such necessary evils which the life of man can not lack without detriment, not only they but other metals also perhaps more necessary although not so precious, are things worthy to be better known then only by name, sith they are thinstruments of ●ll arts, the prices of all things, the ornaments of all dignities, and not the least portion of nature, whereby the contemplation of them is no less pleasant than necessary. But forasmuch as it is not here my intent to entreat much of metals, I will speak of the second cause: which is, that if in travailing strange and unknown countries any man's chance shallbe to arrive in such regions where he may know by thinformation of thinhabitants or otherwise, that such regions are fruitful of rich metals, he may not be without sum judgement to make further search for the same. The third cause is, that although this hour realm of England be full of metals not to be contemned and much richer than men suppose, yet is there few or none in England that have any great skill thereof, or any thing written in our tongue, whereby men may be well instructed of the generation and finding of the same: as the like ignorance hath been among us as touching cosmography and navigations until I attempted according to the portion of my talon and simple learning to open the ●yrst door to the entrance of this knowledge into hour language, wherein I would wish that other of greater learning would take sum pains to accomplish and bring to further perfection that I have rudely begun, not as an autour but a translator, least I be injurious to any man in ascribing to myself the travails of other. And whereas as concerning the knowledge of metals, I was once minded to have translated into english the hole work of Pyrotechnia whereof I finished xxii chapitures now more than three years sense, and left the copy thereof in the hands of one of whom I could never get it again (omitting to speak of other ingratitudes) I was thereby discouraged to proceed any further in that work. Nevertheless, sith this history of the Indies hath ministered occasion to entreat somewhat of metals, I have again translated three of the first chapitures of that book, which seem most necessary to be known in this case. And hereof to have said thus much in manner of a preface it may suffice.   

Of the generation of metals and their mines with the manner of finding the same: written in the Italien tongue by Vannuccius Biringuczius in his book called Pyrotechnia. To his loving friend Master Bernardino Moncellese, greeting.  
WHereas I promised you to writ of the natures of metals in particular, I am now enforced to declare every thing in generale, and especially of the places of their generation and their order, with the form and manner of working in the same, and the instruments thereto pertaining. Yowe shall therefore understand, that mines of metals are found in the most parts of the world, more or less according to the diligence of wittis searchers: and show themselves standing in the ground in manner in such sort as the veins of blood are dispersed in the bodies of living beasts, 
The mineral tree.  or like unto the branches of trees spread forth divers ways. Wherefore, the diligent searchers of mines, willing by a certain similitude declare how the mines are placed in the mountains, have figured a great tree full of branches planted in the midst of the base of a mountain, from the which are derived divers and many bouwes and branches, sum great and sum smaule, much like unto very trees that are in old woods. 
The mines do grow.  They will also that in growing, they ever engross themselves and reach toward the heaven, converting into their nature the most disposed and near matter, until the tops of their branches extend to the highest part of the mountain, and there show forth theirselves with manifest appearance, putting forth in the stead of bouwes and flowers, certain fumosites of blue or green colour, or marchasites with smaule veins of ponderous matter, 
Marchasites.  or such other compositions of tinctures. And when by this means they show themselves unto us, we may make firm conjecture that such mountains are mineral, and that according to the demonstrations they show more or less, they are richer or poorer of mine. Therefore the searchers, according to thappearances which they find, 
Signs of metals.  take good courage unto them: and with hope and security of profect, apply all their possible diligence with wit and expenses to dig or get owte such ethynges as the signs and owtewarde apperaunces declare unto them. And by this manner of fynd●nge of mines, it hath often times chanced that many have been exalted to the highest degree of riches. Whereas therefore by this means men enter into the mountains with the eyes of consideration and right judgement, and see the places where the minerals are engendered and comprehend in manner their quantity, they adapt their caves or fosses according thereunto, whereas they should otherwise wander by chance, because no man can by any other means know where the mines are in the mountains, although he were of never so good judgement, and should make search for the same never so curyously by little & little. It shall therefore in this case be necessary to follow the certificate & aperaunces of signs, 
Signs and tokens of metals.  & to encounter the same as near as may be, with eyes & ears ever attentive where they may hope to find any tokens of metals, especially by enquyringe of shepherds and other ancient inhabitants of such regions in the which minerals are engendered. And this I speak the rather for that I am persuaded that at the first sight of a mountain, 
Mountains in the which metals are engendered.  by reason of the great barrenness and roughness thereof, and also by reason of the great abundance of waters that are engendered in the same, a right good judgement shall not suffice to come to certain knoweleage that metal is contained in such mountains, until the searchers have with charges and travail caused miners in sundry places to discover the same. And therefore I also believe that one man although he be never so strong, witty, and far casting, shall not be able in a new and strange country, to search by smaule portions not only all the mountains of one or moo provinces which may bring forth minerals, but shall with much difficulty scarcely suffice to search the secrets of only one mountain: 
against seeky●ge metals w●●h the rod whi●h they call v●rgula divina.  In so much that sum considering the difficulty hereof, are of opinion that in this effect, it should be requisite to work by the art of necromancy, which I think to be a fable without further knoweleage. But I would that these necromancers should tell me why this their art helpeth them no further in the work after that they have once found the mine, if it be true that they say. 
Negromancie,  Why (I say) doth it not help them forth as at the beginning to find the mine, so consequently in the midst and the end to bring the ●ame to further perfection, as to gett● it out, to bring it to fusion or melting, and to purify or purge it from dross, which doubtless it should have pour● to do if it may be believed that it can do the other. But forasmuch as such effects are so fearful and terrible, that they ought not or can not be practised of all men, and also perhaps because such manner of working is not known, I think it not good to be used: but think rather by good reason that this art is so much the more to be omitted and contemned, in how much we are accustomed in the beginning of digging of mines, especially to call for the grace of god that it may please him to be present with his aid to hour doubtful and travalious work. letting pass therefore this devilish device of such beastly and fearful men, I exhort you to follow the practice by the foresaid signs ministered unto you by the benignity of nature, both grounded upon the foundation of truth and approved by th'experience of many practicionars, not consysting in words or promises of things vain and incomprehensible. With these signs therefore shall you search the banks and sides of the valleys, with the cliffs and rifts of the stones, and the backs, tops, or ridges of the mountains: Also the beds, channels, and courses of rivers, looking diligently among their sands, 
The manner of searching for mines.  and the ruins of their fosses, among the which you shall often times espy marchasites or smaule sparks of mines, or other divers tinctures of metals, whereby you may be certified that certain mines are in such places, which you shall exactly find by diligent and curious searching the cliffs of their rifts and dry places. After these advertisements, take this for a general sign, 
A general sign.  that all such places and mountains are mineral, out of the which many springs and great abundance of crude water doth isshewe, having with their clearness a certain mineral taste, and such as at variable seasons of the year change their quality, being warm in the spring time and could in summer. And this thing ought you to believe the more when you shall see the aspect of such mountains to be rough, 
rough and barren mountains.  sharp, and salvage without earth or trees. Or so that if there be a little earth found upon the same with a smaule vain of herbs or grass you shall perceive the greenness thereof to be faint and in manner withered and dried. And albeit that sometimes also, mines are found in mountains having earth and fruitful trees in the tops thereof, yet are they for the most part found in such whereof we have spoken. Of these other, there may few signs be given, except to go by little and little to seek the banks of their sides. But among all these, the best and most certain sign that may be given, 
The best sign.  is whereas on the superficial part of the earth either on high or below, the mine doth show itself apparent to sight. Sum there are that for a good sign do greatly commend the residences which certain waters make where they have rested for a time and being dried up of the heat of the son, 
The residence of waters.  do often times show in certain parts of their residencies divers tinctures of mineral substance. sum other are accustomed to take such waters, and in a vessel of earth or glass or other matter, cause them to boil and vapour away until the dregs or residence remain in the bottom well dried in the likeness of a gross earth, of the which they make an assay either by the ordinary trial of fire, or after sum other manner as liketh them best. And by this means (although they attain not to thexact knowledge of the truth) yet do they approach to a certain knowledge of the thing whereby they have sum intelligence of what sufficiency and goodness the mine is which they seek, before they be at any great charges in following the same: providing always that with all diligent advertisement the places near unto the roots of the confine mountains be curiously searched, with also the banks and sides of the self same mountain, and all such superficial parts thereof, where any stones are found discovered either of their own proper nature or by the course of water: presupposing ever that it is in manner impossible but that if such mountains contain any mines, they must needs show forth sum flowers, tinctures, or colours of their exhalations. 
Marchasit●s are the tinctures of myneral exhalations.  Yet if it should so chance that they do not this, the goodness of the mine may be the cause hereof forasmuch as either it is not of vaporable nature, or to be of smaule quantity, or else perhaps because the mountain is great and the mine very low or so far with in, that it is not sufficient to put forth any signs of fumosities. The cause also hereof may be that sum stone like unto that called Albasano (which I think to be of that kind which we call the greet stone) or black and white marble of thick and resisting nature, may be found to lie between and so to stop the passages, 
Metals in fruitful mountains.  that the said fumosities may thereby be hindered to arrive to the uppermost part of the earth: by reason whereof, it is possible that such mountains may bring forth trees and herbs forasmuch as the earth thereof doth retain his virtue and may nuryshe their roots not being incinerate or burnt with hot and venomous vapours of the mines: so that the showers of rain or floods with their courses can not carry away the earth as in such places where the same is found sore dried. And therefore upon such mountains I have seen great woods of chestnut trees, beech's also and oaks, with well cultured and fruitful fields. So that to conclude, by the signs of the rowghnesse or barrenness of the mountain, is not taken away but that other places may also have plenty of mines which ought to be searched and followed. But forasmuch as these signs are of the natures of minerals, I will speak more determinately of them in the places where I entreat of their proper mines: Not intending here to say much of these things in general, but only to induce you to sum clearness of the first light. And therefore that you may give the more diligent advertisement, I say unto you that all the mines which you shall find by such signs, by what means so ever they shall come to your hands, whether they be found in stones, 
how the signs are to be considered.  earth, or sand, after that at the first sight they have showed themselves to be mines of metals, you ought to consider of what ponderosity or weight they are: The which the greater that it is, so much the more doth it show both the perfection and goodness of the substance, and also the more quantity of the mine. And thus presupposing that by the signs or other means you have found the mine, not yet fully perceiving of what kind of metal it might be, to certify you hereof and also of what quantity it is, or how it is accompanied or mixed with other, or likewise of what purity it is of itself, or of what evil disposition or malice it is found to be, it shall herein be necessary before you be at any further charges therewith, to prove the same by two or three assays or more, 
The assay of the mines.  as I will further declare in the particular place of assays. Being therefore certified of the mine, and of what metal it is, and also what quantity it containeth, finding it by account to be so profitable as to bear the charges, I exhort you boldly to give the first attempt to fall to mining, and with all possible diligence to follow your enterprise: assuring your self, that of what so ever mineral matter you shall take assay according to the proportion of that pice which you took of the uppermost or owtmost part of the mine for that purpose, you shall find that to be much better and richer which is further within the mountain. 
The richer mine further within the mountain.  And thus being certified by the assay of what quantity the thing is that appeared by the signs, and of all other reasonable considerations appertaining to the work, you shall with all celerity dispose your self to fall to digging, to th'intent that you may shortly either here enjoy the fruit of your travel, or else where with better success prove your good fortune. But in thattempt of this enterprise, you ought principally to have respect to the situation of the place where you intend to make the beginning of your cave or fossae: 
considerations how the cave ought to be made.  Taking good advertisement that it be commodious for the labourers that shall work therein: providing above all things that it have an easy entrance into the mountain, with less charges and in shorter time to arrive under the signs which you have taken: encountering the same as much as is possible as it were by a right line, first with judgement and then with workman ship, until you strike on the gross mass or body of the mine, 
The body of the mine.  breaking in the course of the cave all matters of hard compositions, as quarreys and stones overthwarting the same: having ever respect to the outward signs which you follow, forecasting in your mind how yowe may directly arrive to the same, even as the mariners direct their course by their compass and sight of the north star. Also bysyde that place where you have determined to make the entrance and beginning of the cave, 
houses of office for the miners.  you must take choice of an other place, either on the front of the mountain or on the side that it may be near and commodious to make one or two or more cottages for the commodity and necessity of the workmen. One of these must be appointed for their dormitory where sum may rest and sleep while other work, and that you may the more commodiously be present and assystaunt to their doings, diligently to behold all things and to comfort them in their labours: also to dispense and bestow their victuals as shall be needful, and to reseru● the same in safe custody, with daily provision of all things appertaining. The other must be as it were a smiths forg● wherein their worn and broken tools must be renewed, and other new made, to th'intent that the work be not hindered for lack of store of necessary instruments. When these things are thus finished, with good provision of victuals and a sufficient number of expert miners, then in the name of God and good adventure, causing a pressed to bless the mos● ta'en with all the shops, and to baptize the cave, dedicating it (as the manner is) to the holy Trinity or to our Lady or to the name of sum other saint which you have in devotion, 
baptizing & dedication of the cave.  with invocation to them to prosper your attempts, you shall with good courage and hope begin to dig the cave, with intent to follow the same without ceasing as far as your ability shall reach, or until you have passed over the lymettes signified by the signs before named: Taking ever diligent head that you begin your cave as low as you may at the foot of the mountain, in such order that your miners so continue and follow the same by a right line, 
The making of the cave.  that they encounter the vain of the mine by the shortest and safest way that may be devised. For it often times chanceth, that although the cave have been well begun, yet hath it not been well followed, 
Causes of hindrance.  for that the miners being withdrawn from the right course by the hope of such branches of mines as have appeared unto them in the way, do often times decline from their attempted course, and from the signs which they ought to have followed. And bysyde other precepts, see that you bear in memory to procure that in digging, you eschew as much as you may, the cutting of soft or brykell stones, 
Soft stones.  aswell for that it may be dangerous for ruin of the cave, as also that it seldom chanceth that any mines are found in such stones. But if you shall chaunc● so to find them that you can by no means avoid them, A comfort you that where such cause of fear showeth itself, both that you lose not the charges of the cave and for the be●ter safeguard of your workmen, it shallbe necessary that you use all possible diligence in well upholding and fortyfying● the cave with arches of walls traversed with strong posts of timber after the manner of framed beams, 
The fortef●ī● of the cave.  sustained with gross and strong piles made of good and strong timber of oak or other great trees. And in this manner ought you to proceed in digging your mine that you may with more security enjoy the fruit of your travail. 
how the caue● were made in old tyme.  But in the owlde time they that digged mines (as is yet to see) in the caves left of them) followed an other manner: so that in the stead of beginning the cave below at the foot of the mountain (as do the later miners) they begun to dig their cave in the upper or highest part where the day discovered the mine, digging downward after the manner of a pit or a well, following the same sometime on the one side, and sometime on the other even unto the depth, as the vain showed itself to their sight: whereof I have thought good to make mention, for that in th'opinion of many men, this way doth seem much better and of more security to find that they seek, then to dig by the sides: because that by this means they have ever the mine before their eyes either more or less as a line to lead them to the gross mass. Yet who so considereth the thing well, shall understand that the later miners have better conceived the reason of this work, in respect (as is to see) of many more commodities and securities which ensue rather of this manner of working then of the other: as the difficulty to descend and ascend the cave, & the daungiour lest it be stopped up by many ruins, bysyde the travalyous labour to draw out the mine with the rocks & fragments of stones: And above all things, that they shall not be able to draw out the waters which are often times so abundant that they greatly increase the charges and travails of the patrons of the mines by reason of the great aid and help which shallbe requisite to have in that case and also for the making of wheels, troughs, pipes, & pumps, 
Abundanu●● of water in the mines.  with such other instruments serving for the purpose to draw out the waters. And yet with all this, it often times chanceth that although they labour hereat continually, yet shall they be enforced to forsake their profitable & laudable enterprise So that to conclude, 
The best manner of making the cave.  I say (as you may well under stand) that it is a much better way and of more security to begin the digging of the cave rather at the root or foot of the mountain and to enter into the same by little and little a slope upward, then to begin at the top or the highest back thereof. And this both for the more commodious passing forth of the water, and also for the easier travail of the labourers. Observing ever diligently the change of the signs which appear unto you owtwardly, 
The change of the signs.  using the rudder and compass as do they that sail on the sea. For hereby the miners shallbe instructed ever to follow the right way in the cave until by the conducting of wit and art, 
The rudder & compass.  they be browght to the place of the gross mass or body of the tree, which is the cause, fountain, and original from whence the said tinctures fumosites, and mineral signs, are derived and sent forth to the superficial parts. And as concerning this purpose, I think it good to declare unto you how in the Dukedom of Austria, 
Austria.  between Isprue and Alla where I continued many years, I saw a large vale environed with a great number of mountains, 
mines of copper and lead holding silver.  by the midst whereof a river passed through of great abundance of water: and in manner in all the mountains that are there about, is digged great plenty of mine, whereof the most part are of copper or lead, although also in manner every of them is found to hold sum portion of silver. Among these mountains, I saw one in the which thinhabitants of the country dwelling there about, alured by the sight of many signs, began to dig a cave after the manner whereof we have spoken: In so much that (as it appeared unto me) from the place where they began the cave, they had digged little less than two miles before they saw any spark or shadow of any my And being arrived with the cave in manner perpendicularly under the signs they followed, 
A cave of two miles.  they were encountered with a vain of the hard stone called Albazano, of a yard and a half thick, which they passed through with great travail and long time, and with the help of commodious instruments of iron hardened to work in such stones. And when they had thus passed through this quarry of stone, 
A large cave of the mine of copper holding silver.  they chanced upon a very great vain of the mine of copper of such sort that when I was there, looking between the one and the other, I saw on every side as it were a wall of the hard stone of Albazano, and therein a void place of such largeness from the one side to the other that more than two hundredth men all at one time, had sufficient room to stand labouring from the highest part to the lowest, having none other light then of candles, 
Candle light.  and making certain marks in every place where they saw the ure or mine show itself: and thus ceased not to work continually both day and night, course by course, a thing surely marvelous to be hold. Without the mouth of the cave, I saw great abundance of mine partly mixed with the stone of the ure, and partly chosen and separated. Among these pieces, there was one consisting of a hole mass of pure mine of such biggnes and weight, 
A great mass of pure mine.  that two good horses with a light car could scarcely draw it away. This mine was of copper as I have said. But to magnify it, they called it silver, because it held such plenty thereof that it surmounted the charges, whereas they had also the copper for advantage. Yowe shall further understand that in the midst of the cave, there was a channel or gutter which gathered together the waters that fell into it continually on every side from the ruptures or broken places and cliffs. 
Abundance of water in the mines.  These waters ran through the channel with so vehement a stream, that I surely believe that it might well suffice to drive and great mill. In so much that in going in and coming out of the cave, I remember that by the continual faule & sprinkling of the waters from above & beneath, I was as wet as though I had passed through a ●●eate shower of rain. Whereat I marvel the less when I consider that water is the first and nearest principle of the which the substance of minerals is engendered. 
water is the nearest principle of minerales.  By reason whereof, such men of understanding as have searched the natures of these things, argue hereby and take it for a general rule, 
A general rule.  that all those mountains out of the which springeth great abundance of water, do also abound with mine. The which thing well considering, and weighing the greatness hereof, I faule into this account with myself, that if to the patrons of the said cave, the charges of the same had been a hindrance or grief, either for the length thereof, or for despair that they should not have found that they sought, they would surely have forsaken it. And being now come to this hard stone after they had sustained so great charges bysyde the travail both of mind and body, if they should then have left of their enterprise, 
Great rich is obtained by searching of mines.  they should not have come to such riches whereby they have obtained many commodities aswell profitable for themselves a● also for their lords and princes, their country, their kinsfolks and family. Neither yet should they have been so well able to help their poor neighbours as they have done by the means of the valientnesse of their constant minds and persisting in so good and commendable an enterprise. Wherefore to conclude, you that will begin to attempt any such thing, 
Magnanimity & patience.  must be of good courage and much patience to follow that you have begun, at the least until you know by the signs what the thing is: hoping ever that in going forward, the day following (as it is possible) shall discover the thing that you seek and content your desire: Whereof you may be the better assured, if you well consider that the mothers and matrices of most esteemed riches, and the mints of all treasures, are the mountains: 
The mounta●nes are the matrices of riches.  To the which (with th● help of fortune and your ingenious endeavour) you shall open the way, not only to find the mine and arrive to the belly of the mountains where such things lie hid, but shall also be exalted by riches to high honour and dignity as they of whom we have made mention before; forasmuch as most beningne and liberal nature, doth open her lap and promise good success to such as seek riches by such honest means. The which way surely is much rather to be followed, then either the wars full of troubles and misery, or the careful trade of merchandise with wandering about the world, or such other fastidious cares perhaps unlawful for a good man. And albeit (as sum men use to speak) the finding of mines be an especial grace of God, nevertheless, forasmuch as we are borne to labour, i● shallbe necessary that we seek the same in such places where they are brought forth by the work of nature, 
The grace of God is received by hour endeavour.  and by searching to find them, and being found to dig for them. and by this means to receive the grace of God with applying hour own diligence thereto, with help of the disposition of fortune and natural judgement. 
Money begetteth riches.  And yet shall not this only suffice without sufficiency of money able to sustain the charges and continue the work: to th'end that if you can not finish it with your own expenses, you may supply the same by the aid of other, either patrons or partners. But let us now cease to reason any further of these things. Presupposing therefore that you have already passed the charges, and have not only found the mine you sought, but also have brought forth to light a great quantity thereof, it shall then be needful (as a thing chiefly to be considered before you begin to dig) well to ponder & examen both the commodities of such things as shall occur, 
Necessary advertismentes.  and also of such whereof you shall have need: as timber and wood of all sorts, with water and victuals: of all the which, you must have great plenty: and especially of wood, 
Plenty o● wood.  whereof you must have great quantity, aswell to serve to the proportion of the mine, as also to make coals to the use of melting, fyning, drying, garboyling, and such other broylynges, bysyde that which must serve to fortify cave and to build shops and cottages with such other edifies. 
Cottages and edifies.  Diligent consideration must likewise be had to the situation of the place where the buildings shallbe erected: 
The situation of the place.  as that the plot thereof be commodious with abundance of water having a good faule. Also not only of plenty of wood and coal near unto the mine, but of such as may serve the turn. And of all other incommodities, you must chiefly avoid the lack of water, 
The use of water,  as a thing of greatest importance and most necessary in this effect. For by the force and weight of the course hereof, wheels and divers other ingenious instruments are adapted with ease to lift up great bellows to make fierce of great power, to beat with hammers of great weight, and to turn mighty and strong eugens, by the force whereof the travails of men are so much furthered, that without such help, it were in manner impossible to overcome such tedious travails or to arrive to the end of the work, forasmuch as the force of one wheel may lift more, and that more safely than the painful labour of a hundredth men. It shall therefore be needful to have great consideration hereof, not only to make these edifies or houses of office, but also to make them commodious for the purpose, as for the carriage of mine and coal with other necessaries. For if any of these effects should be wanting, the cost, time and travail, should be cast away: forasmuch as these things do so much the more relieve the one the other as they are joined together, 
Necessary considerations.  and hinder the work not a little if any be separate. But because these commodities can not ever be had all together, you ought to weigh with your self which of the two serveth for more necessary uses, as either to have the coal or the mine most commodious to the houses, and according there unto to place the houses near unto the same if the commodity of water will so permit.  
Albeit, if it were possible, it should be much better if all these necessary commodities were joined together, whereas otherwise you must content your self as occasion serveth. Now therefore to conclude, bysyde that which I have declared unto you of the finding of the mine and the digging thereof with other considerations, I exhort you further to fall to practise with sum mine of your own, that you may thereby take occasion to rise to the degree of riches which you desire. And therefore I advertise you that after you have found the mountain and begun to dig, you shall ever go forward with a bold mind and stout courage, working with wit and judgement, forasmuch as in this effect the one serveth the other in the steed of eyes to enter where they can not. give no credit to that which many ignorant folks do say and believe, 
A false opinion  affirming that in digging for metals, they are found rather by chance then by art. The which although it were true, yet ought we to trust more to art and practise then to chance. And when you are now entered into the mountain, bear well in memory that you have presently with you the tally or ruler of the cave, whereby you may traverse the vain of the mine when you are coomne to it. 
The traversing of the vain.  For if you should follow it by the course as it lieth, it is possible that you mighe follow it a great way not passed the bigness of a man's finger and perhaps less: By reason whereof, it might happen that you should lose it and never find it again. The like should chance unto you if after that you have begun to dig a cave, it should repent you of the charges, and that for the basnes thereof you should forsake it, as many have done who because they could not find the mine at the first stroke, 
Continuance in the work.  despayringe that they should never find it, have forsaken it as a thing unprofitable, thinking that they have won enough in that they were not at further charges with that which they account loss and damage: And thus furiously leave of their enterprise, not regarding that they may leave the fruit of their expenses and travail to an other that may follow their beginnings, and perhaps find the my within the distance of a cubet, a span, or a finger. We may say therefore that such men do willingly forsake their good fortune as many have done. He therefore that hath begun to dig a cave, let him determine to follow it, putting away thestimation of the baseness thereof, and not to fear the streyghtnesse of the way, but rather to apply all his possible diligence without remorse, hoping thereby no less to obtain honour and riches, then to avoid shame and infamy for omitting so profitable an enterprise. And that you may the more circumspectly behave your self in all things, beside the former instructions, I further advertise you to set ever fresh men a work by course in such order, 
Fresh men.  that in every sixth or eight hours (according to the number of the miners) you appoint such to the work as have reposed or taken their rest, that you may by this means the sooner come to th'end you desire, whereunto (after you have laid so sure a foundation) I exhort you to run without a bridle. And whereas to these effects it shallbe necessary to have many instruments adapted for the purpose, I can none otherwise speak of them then in general, considering that according to the nature of the place and the mine, it shallbe necessary to use instruments and iron tools of divers forms, 
Instruments.  as there ought to be difference in such wherewith you shall dig in mines engendered in marble, greet stone, and hard freeze stone, or such other. For the digging of such as are found in dead and tender stones, as Alabaster and marvel, it is requisite to have apt and strong instruments, as great beetles, mattocks and spades of iron, also great & long crows of iron to lift great burdens: likewise great and smaule pick axe's sum of iron and sum of steel: furthermore great maules with handels and without handels, and such other both of iron and fine steel hardened, if the hardness of stone shall so require. But as for such as shall serve to dig the mines which are engendered in tender and soft stones, I need make no mention of them, forasmuch as the tools of the common sort may suffice, and necessity shall daily forth instruct you to devise such as shall serve for your purpose. Albeit, for the most part, they are beetles, maules, mattocks, pikes, shovels, spades, and such like. But as well for the soft stones as for the hard, it shallbe necessary to have great plenty of all sorts, to th'end that the miners may lose no time, and that the work may go the better forward to the comfort of the patrons of the mine. Bysyde these before named, it shall also be requisite to have plenty of great baskets, spades, shovels, sleds, and handbarrowes, both with wheels and without wheels: also sacks made of raw or untande hides to carry the fragments out of the cave. It shall furthermore be requisite to have great quantity of unctuous liquors to maintain fire: 
Fire in the cave.  as are the oils of olives, of nuts, of line seed and hemp seed: Likewise the roots of putrefied trees, or tallow of beasts, or fat and oil of fishes. For without the light of fire, it is not possible for the labourers to work: 
The conveyance of eyer.  Nor yet can any fire be maintained in the cave except it receive the air by sum respiracle or breathing place by the means of a funnel or trunk of wood or such other open instrument whereby the air may be conveyed into the cave.  

¶ Of the mine of gold and the quality thereof in particular.  
Forasmuch as gold is a compound mineral which of the philosophers and all men of understanding, 
The excellency of gold.  is found to be of greatest perfection among all other mixed minerals, it is judged by the universal opinion of such men, that for the beauty and excellent quality thereof, it should be of excessive virtue to help and comfort men. And therefore among all things that are in this world (except living creatures) it is ch●efely esteemed. By reason whereof, I also the more to honour it, will first speak of this before I entreat of any other metal, and declare in particular the conception with the most apparent qualities thereof. The which although it be a metal most known, desired also and sought for of all kinds of men, yet are there not many that do care to know of what substance or natural mixtion it consisteth. But that you should not be one of them that know it only by name or by superficial appearance, 
The original & substance of gold.  I certify you that the original and proper matter thereof, is none other then elemental substances with equal quantity and quality proportionate the one with the other, most perfectly purified by the subtile work of nature. For of these being thus joined together (and of equal force) is engendered an amiable and most perfect mixtion by the help of fermentation and decoction of the mineral heat, 
Mineral heat.  whereby is caused such a permanent union between the said elements, that they are in manner inseparable: So that by the virtue of heavenly influence or of time, or by thorder of most prudent nature, or by all these causes concurrant, such substance is converted into this metalline body that we call gold. 
The temperature & pureness of gold.  The which (as I have said) by his much temperateness, pureness, and perfect mixtion, is condensate and made thick, in such sort that the elements thereof can not be unbound or loosed, so that it remaineth in manner incorruptible: The cause whereof is, that it either containeth in it no manner of superfluity, or the same to be but very little. And hereof cometh it, that although it lie many years in the earth or in the water, it is not infected with rust or canker for that neither of them are able to corrupt it, 
Gold is incorruptible.  nor yet the fire whose force doth incinerate or bring to ashes & resolve in manner all creatures: And yet is the pour hereof so far unable to destroy or corrupt this metal, that it is thereby the more purified and made better. Likewise the said perfect union or mixtion, causeth it to be a body without steam, and without unctuous or fat superfluity: 
The beauty of gold.  which is the cause that it ever remaineth in the native brightness and fairness of colour, in so much that when it is rubbed upon any thing, it leaveth not behind it the tincture of any black or yellow colour, as do in manner all other metals: Nor yet hath it any taste or savour that may be perceived to the sense. Furthermore, if it be eaten either willingly or by chance, it is not venomous to the life of man, as are sum of the other metals: but is rather a medicine curing divers diseases. 
Gold is medicinable.  In so much that nature hath given unto it of peculiar property, a virtue and privilege to comfort the weakness of the heart, and to give joyfulness and mirth to the spirits, disposing thereby the mind to magnanimity and attempts of great enterprises. 
Gold is comfortable.  Which singular qualities, sum wise men affirm that it hath received by thinfluence of the son, and that it is therefore of such grace and pour to help men: especially such as have many great bags and chesses full thereof. To conclude therefore, this metal is a body tractable and bright, of colour like unto the son: And hath in it inwardly such a natural attractive or alluring virtue, that being seen, it greatly disposeth the minds of men to desire it and esteem it as a thing most precious: 
The attractive quality of gold.  although many there are which cry out against it and accuse it as the root and seed of most pestiferous and monstrous covetousness, and the cause of many other mischiefs. But whether it be the cause of more good or evil, we intend to let pass this disputation as a thing unprofitable. To proceed therefore as I have begun I say (as before) that the worthiness which is found in it, hath caused me to entreat of it before any other metal. And this the rather for that thorder of this present work m so to require, that I may the better descend to the degrees of other metals, to th'end that in these hour parts of Italy, you may have sum instruction of practice, which may redound from you to other, whereby the minds of all men may receive sum light: being well assured that new informations, willbe the seeds of other new witty devices in the understandings of such men as with these keys shall open their wits to arrive to such places whither they can not else come or by any means approach. And now therefore, bysyde that which I have said unto you in general, I will further in particular declare the nature hereof and the generation of the same, with also the signs which it showeth forth, that I do not omit any thing. Last of all, I will show you how it ought to be purged from superfluous earthynes of the mine, after that I shall have expressed the manner how it is found. But forasmuch as I have not with mine eyes seen the mountains which contain the mines of gold, or the places where this thing is put in practice, I will only show you (having made diligent inquisition for the same) what hath been told me of credible persons, or what I have gathered in reading of divers authors, 
where most plenty of gold is found.  by whom I am certified for a truth that the greatest plenty of this metal, 
Cathay.  is found in Scythia, in those provinces which we commonly call the East parts, where the son extendeth his chief force and vigour. Of these places India is thought to be the chief, and especially those Islands which the ships of Themperors majesty and the king of Portugal have found of late: 
Gold in the I●nde of the west indies.  as the Islands about Peru and Paria with the firm land of the same which extendeth it selues very far on both sides the Equinoctial. In Europe also, gold is found in many places: as in Astesia, and in many places in Boheme. Also in Hungary, in Rhine, and in Apsa. Pliny saith that it is likewise found in Austria and in Portugal: 
Gold in Europe.  and that the Romans had from thence yearly xxiiii pounds' weight. And thus speaking of this precious metal, 
The influent of heaven.  I believe certainly, that it is and may be engendered in all such places where the influence of the heavens disposeth the elemental causes to bring forth an apt substance for this purpose. But now intending more particularly to speak of the places of the conception hereof, 
The mountains and stones in the which gold is engendered.  you shall understand that it is engendered in divers kinds of stones in great and rough mountains, and such as are utterly bare of earth, trees, grass, or herbs. And among all the stones of this mine, that is best which is of a blue or asurine colour like unto a sapphire, and is commonly called Lapis Lazuli. 
Lapis Lazuli.  But it is not bright and hard as is the sapphire. It is also found in orpement called Auripigmentum: 
Orpement.  but more often in the mines of other metals. 
Gold in other metals.  It is likewise found in many provinces in the sands of rivers. 
gold in the ●andes of rivers.  That which is found in the mountains lieth in order veins between quarry and quarry joined with the said Azurine stone and mixed therewith. They say that this mine is so much the better in how much it is the heavier and of high colour, showing in it many sparks of gold They say furthermore that it is engendered in an other stone like unto salt marble: but it is of a dead colour. And also in an other whose colour is yellow with certain red spots within it. They affirm likewise that it is found in certain black stones, whose veins spread divers ways much like the courses of rivers. They further declare that it is found in a certain bituminous earth, 
Gold in earth.  of colour like unto clay and very heavy, having in it a great savour of brimstone: And that the gold which is found in this, is very good, and in manner all together fine, yet very hard to be gotten out, because it consisteth of so smaule sparks like unto invisible atoms of such lytelnesse that they can hardly be perceived with the eye. 
Golden dust.  And herein may you not do as in Lapis Laxuli, or other stones, or as the manner is to do with that which is found in the sands of rivers: the which the more it is washed, the more it falleth to the bottom: & in melting with the mother of his earthines, doth incorporate itself therewith in a brickle substance But in fine, 
Rivers in the which gold is found.  with much patience and by one means or an other, or by the help of quicksilver, it is drawn out. again (as I have said before) it is found in the sands of divers rivers, as in Spain in the river Tago: in Tracia, in Ebro: In Asia, in Patolo and Ganges. In Hungary and Boheme, it is found in Lasiesia in divers rivers: And in Italy, in the sands of Tesino, Adda, and Po. But not everywhere in the beds of their channels, but in certain particular places where in certain clods the sand is discovered in the time of the overflowing of the rivers when the water leaveth behind it a fine sand wherewith the said gold is mixed in the form of certain smaule scales, 
The washing and pourgeing● of gold.  and shining grains. Then in the summer season, with patience and ingenious practice, the searchers to purge it from the gross earthiness of the mine, and wash it diligently: preparing for that effect, certain tables made either of the timber of plane trees, 
how gold is divided from sand.  of elm, or white nuts, or such other wood apt to be sawen, having their plains made full of hacks, & notches, with the help of the saw or such other instruments of ir●n. Upon these tables standing somewhat a slope or declining, with a hollow shovel they cast a great quantity of water mixed with the said sand, which they cast so, that the water run down directly along the tables. 
The Spany●rdes make these dishes with handels.  And by this means the gold, as a matter most heavy, falleth to the bottom of the sawn hacks, and there resting and cleaving fast, is so divided from the sand. When therefore they perceive a sufficient quantity of gold thus remaining on the tables, they gather it with diligence and put it in a trey or great shallow dish of wood like unto those which the gold finers use: 
The drawe●nge out of gold with quick silver.  And in these they wash it more exactly again and again from all filth or uncleanliness. This done, they beat or mixed (or amalgame it as they call it) with Mercury or quicksilver, which afterward they separate again from the same either by straining and pressing it through a bag of leather, or by stilling or evaporating the quicksilver from it in a styllatory of glass and so find they the gold remaining in the bottom of the vessel in the likeness of fine sand, which they bring into a metalline body by melting it with a little borage, or salt petre or black soap, & so cast it either in the form of a wedge or a rod, or otherwise as liketh them best. And this is the exact manner of drawing gold out of the sands of rivers, which many have used to their great commodity: And that the rather because that in following this order of work in the purging and dividing of gold, it shall not be requisite as in other manner of practices, to be at great charges by reason of many men which shall be needful, 
From whence gold is derived into the sands of rivers.  with many murals, furnaces, fires, and divers artificers: whereas in working after this sort, one man may suffice with one table and one hollow shovel, with a little quicksilver and sufficient abundance of water. But letting pass to speak any further of these things: perhaps sum man would here demand from whence this gold is derived into the sands of the said rivers, and whether it be browght thither by the water, or engendered there. As touching which question, I have often times deliberated with myself not without great marvel: and especially of that which is found in the sands of the rivers of Tesino, Adda, and Po, because (whereas I have said before that it is browght thither by the course of the water) I can not perceive from whence it should be browght, forasmuch as there is no mine of gold, or of any other metal that is known, near to any of those places. By reason whereof, my judgement is in manner confounded, seeing also that it is th'opinion of certain writers, that it is engendered even where it is found: The which, if it so be, it is not true that it is browght thither by the water. again, if it be engendered there, it seemeth to me a dyfficult thing to comprehend whether it be brought forth there by the virtue of the water or the earth, or the heaven. 
That gold is not engendered in the ●andes of rivers.  If furthermore any of these should be the cause of the generation hereof, it seemeth agreeable to reason that it should be both found and engendered through out all the beds of such rivers, and at all times. And if the influence of heaven be the most prepotent cause of this effect, than it seemeth to me that it should work immediately, because it can not otherwise observe thorder which nature useth in the generation of metals: first bringing it forth to the open show, in the place where aboundeth the continual isshewe of water, which ought also to be of such force as to remove the earthy substance thereof from place to place, and not to intermixte such great inequality of couldenesse and moistness. And albeit that this composition begun in this order, should not be dissevered or broken by the waters of the rivers, yet it appeareth to me that the showers of rain and increase of fiuddes, should be of sufficient power to distemper, break, and utterly destroy all such compositions as should be engendered in such places, forasmuch as all things are conceived by rest and quietness after the commixtion of the first elements. And therefore if this gold of the rivers, be there engendered where it is found, I would it were declared unto me why it is engendered only in these places and not in other: and why in like manner, silver, copper, lead, or any other metals are not also engendered there as well as gold, being matters of an easier composition of nature than it is, by reason of the perfect unity and concordance with purity of substance & perfect concoction which is in gold above all other metals: whereas also in many places in the territories of Rome, there are found many sparks of the mine of ●ren of black colour among the sands of certain smaule rivers: And yet these only in certain particular places of the said rivers: whereby it appeareth that these also, should not be engendered where they are found. By all which reasons and apparent effects, it seemeth most agreeable to truth that the gold which is found in such sands, 
This matter is apparent in the gold found in the rivers in the Indies.  is rather brought thither by the water, then engendered there. And therefore to declare my mind more plainly herein, I suppose that this chanceth only in great rivers which receive abundance of waters of divers springs, fosses, and other rivers, engendered partly of the melting of snow and partly of great showers of rain, which falling in certain channels from the tops and sides of mineral mountains, wash away part of the earth of their banks and the overchanginge and hollow rocks which may contain the substance of gold: 
The ●aule of waters from mountains.  Or otherwise, that in such places, there are ordinary mines in the high mountains or other superficial out places, perhaps incessable, and either such whither men can not come for extreme heat or cold or other hynderaunces, or else such as they have contemned to search. And yet the same to be so consumed by the force of water as we have said, and by the course thereof to be carried into the rivers. It may also chance that such mineral earths Bee far within the mountains near unto such rivers: 
springs of water in mountains.  And that in the space of many years, the springs isshewing out of the same, may either be dried up (which thing hath been seen) or else turn their course an other way So that it is no marvel if in such a multitude of years, the true original of these things be unknown even unto them that dwell near such places. But in fine, how so ever it be, true it is that gold is found ●n the sands of many rivers: And particularly (as I have noted) in the forenamed rivers. A●d if therefore I have marveled at this ●hynge, I ought worthily to be excused, forasmuch as where judgement can not be certified by reason or effectual appearance, there aris● many doubtful conjectures and new causes of admiration. But yet do I marvel much more of an other thing the which I am informed to be most true by the report of many credible p●rsons: That is, 
Uegetable gold growing out of the earth.  that in sum places of Hungary at certain tym●s of the year, pure, gold springeth out of the earth in the likeness of smaule herbs, wreathed and twined like smaule stalks of hops, about the bigness of a pack thread, and four fingers in length or sum a handful. As concerning which thing, 
Of this, read Alexander ab Alexandro. lib. 4 Genialium dierum. Cap. 9  Pliny also in the xxxiii book of his natural history, writeth the like to have chauncet in Dalm●tia in his tyme. The which (if it be true) surely the husband men of these fields shall ●●ape heavenly and not earthly fruits, sent them of god from heaven, and browght forth of nature without their travail or a●te. A grave doubtless most especial, sith that in so great a quantity of earth granted to the possession of men, in mand only this is thought worthy so high a privilege But what shall I say of that whereof Albertus Magnu● writeth in his boo●e of minerals, affirming that he hath seen gold engendered in a dead man's head: 
Gold found in A dead man's head.  And that the same being found by chance in digging, and perceived by the weight and colour to contain sum mineral substance, was proved by experience to hold a portion of fine gold mixed with smaule sand. And indeed his words seem to sound to none other sense but only that this precious metal was engendend there by the great disposition of the place and strong influence of heaven: The which surly is a thing hardly to be believed. Yet considering th'authority of so great a clerk, with the force of the superior causes and the marvelous power of nature, I had rather give faith hereto then rashly to contemn the judgement of so great a clerk. And forasmuch as I have begun to tell you of these effects, I will not omit to show yowe of a strange thing which chanced also in a part of Hungary, where a mine of gold was so found by chance and unsought for, 
A mine of gold found by chance.  that it may nevertheless be an advertisement to other to search diligently. So it is therefore, that a woman of the country being accustomed to resorre with her buck of clothes to wash them in a certain fossae or dike where ran a little water, and using to beat and rub them upon a ●●one which seemed commodious for her purpose, chanced at the length by her good fortune to espy on the stone, a vain of gold traversing or overthwartinge the same about the bigness of a gross pack thread, 
A vain of gold in a stone.  showing fair & bright by reason of her much rubbing. Whereat marvelling daily more and more, at the length opened the matter of her familiars: who conferring with such as had better skill of the thing, found it in fine to be a vain of pure gold: And that the quarry of that stone, traversed the course of the water of the fossae. Removing therefore the water, and turning the course thereof an other way, they began to dig and follow the mine which hath now continued certain. C. years fence it was first found: And hath not only greatly enriched that country, But also all Christendom hath had great commodity by the same. This have I rehearsed unto you the rather that you should not be negligent in any point of omit and sign or token whereby you may be certified of great things. 
No signs to be omitted.  not con●emnynge the shadow of any smaule tokens: but aswell to give attentive care and eye unto them, as to fear and foresee all such things as may hinder: For (as you may hereby well perceive) if credit had not first been given to the words of the simple woman, and the thing afterward well followed, perhaps they should neither now nor ever hereafter have enjoyed the fruit of so great a commodity. Men therefore of good courage following such rich signs, did nether fear the smaulenesse of the vain or hardness of the stone: presupposing by good reason that gold and silver can not lightly be found in so smaule quantity, but that the same shallbe able to surmount the charges. And this the more, in how much the further you shall enter into the stone, as chanceth commonly in all other mines. Albeit, the practised searchers, say that the mine of gold is not found in such great quantity as are the mines of other metals. 
Gold is not found in like quantity as are other metals.  Wherein although perhaps they say truly, yet doth it not follow but that gold also may be found in great quantity. And surely it seemeth to me, that the benignity of nature hath granted large quantities thereof to the world, and that much hath ever been and is found among men, considering in how many places it is daily gathered aswell in mountains as in sands of rivers, 
Arguments of plenty of gold.  bysyde that which is found accompanied and joined with other metals. A further proof hereof may that be, which is consumed and hid by the divers inventions of men: As that which the painters bestow in adourning their works: And goldesmythes both in gylting other metals and also in making divers works of massy gold: 
how divers ways gold is consumed.  bysyde that which the worker of cloth of gold and arras do consume: with such as imbrotherers and silk woomen spend about the vanities of men and women's apparel and tyrementes. Also such as is consumed upon trappers and furnimentes for horses, with gilted harness and such other sumptuousness as pertaineth to the wars and magnifical buildings of noble men's houses and temples: Bysyde that also which the covetousness of men hath hid in strong walls, and buried in the ground, enclosed in chained coffers locked with triple keys: And that which serveth to the daily uses of men and wandereth about the world through the hands of merchants. The which things well considered, who so thinketh that nature bringeth forth but little gold, shall perceive that there is great quantity thereof in the world, 
Ma●●● have to much, but few have enough.  although there be but few that have so much as may satisfy the thirst of their covetousness. And to speak particularly of I●alie, 
Italy wasted bit the barbar●ans.  although there be no mine of gold known in it, yet by the virtue and diligence of good wits, it hath ever and at all ages been more rich than many other provinces. notwithstanding it hath often times been spoiled and overrun of divers nations, as now of late in hour time by the cruel hands of the Barbarians which entered into it about xl years paste. But who knoweth as hath chanced in the days of hour valiant predecessors) whether god will again give us occasion to chastise them and so to invade their regions that we may won hour own again with increase of double usury. Or if he will not permit this, perhaps he will grant us to find sum rich mine of gold. 
Commendation of Italy  For, considering and saying that this hour region of Italy is replenished with as many excellent things as in manner heaven can give to any habitable place, it is not to be thought that this benefit of gold should be wanting, whereas it bringeth forth such plenty of all other mines except this of gold and tin. 
Gold and tin.  And yet do I verily believe that it is not without the mines of these also, although they be not yet discovered to the knowledge of men: As I am persuaded both by the gold th●t is found in the said rivers, and also by the divers and sundry mean minerals which are found in many places and adjudged of the practicionars to be certain clear tokens of their proper and natural agentes. 
Mean minerals.  But for that they are not found, felt, or seen, we ought not thereby to affirm that they are not. To conclude therefore, I think that in our parts of Italy, 
The gold of Italy.  pure gold is none other ways found (except that which is currant among the merchants) then after two sorts, whereof the one is that which is found in the sands of rivers: And the other, that which is gotten by the industrious & subtile art of parting gold from new silver, or from gilting silver, or other metals which hold gold, 
Gold contained in other metals.  as there are in manner but few which hold not some small portion thereof, more or less according to the mixtion & permanency of their substances, or according to the quality and force of the planets which express their influence in the generation of them. And in fine, this is the gold that which is found in hour parts of Italy. Now therefore to return to the matter whereof is hour chief intent to entreat, having before spoken sufficiently of the generation and invention of the mine of gold, I will further declare unto you how it ought to be purged from earthly superfluity, 
The manner of purging of gold.  and especially that which is found lying in the form of veins, And although I have not seen the edifies and engens wherewith the miners are accustomed to get it out, yet will I show you how ●y other practices I have learned to purge it, that you may not be without sum knowledge if your fortune shallbe so good as to find any in Italy. When you have therefore digged out the mine and placed it in order, you ought to consider in what kind of stone it is engendered. And if it be in that which is called Lapis Lazuli, 
Lapis lazuli.  then must you so draw out the gold that you also save the stone, because perfect Azure is made thereof, 
Azure.  and such as the painters call Azu●ro Oltramarino, that is, Azure of beyond the sea, which they greatly esteem & buy it dear. And to do this, it is necessary that you first beat it into fine powder, and then put it in a trey or broad treene dish, and wash it fair and clean with water. This done amalgame or rub it well with quickesy●uer until it have licked up and drawn all the gold into it and left the stone pure of itself. 
how gold is drawn from Lapis lazuli. with quick silver.  Then strain the quicksilver from the gold through a bag of leather, or vapour it away in a styllatorie of glass: And thus shall you find the gold in the bottom of the vessel in manner pure without quicksilver, as I have said before. And if you have no respect to save the stone, it shall suffice to use the common experience, melting it in a furnace in a bain or teste of lead. 
The bane or test of lead.  But in my opinion, the best manner to bring it to pureness, is first to burn the mine with a gentle fire in an open furnace, and to suffer it to evaporate well if it be not in such stone as you desire to save. Then grind it in a mill or beat it with pestelles adapted with a wheel until it be browght to fine powder. And when you have well washed it and so much wasted the superfluous earthynesse thereof, then put it in a teste made according to the quantity of the same, and melt it therein with lead which you shall consume partly by vapour and partly with drawing it out by the side of the teste (as is the manner) until you come to the pure gold which you shall in fine bring to perfect pureness in utterly consuming the remanent of the lead with vehement fire increased by the help of strong bellows. And this is the universal manner which you may use not only in purging the my of gold, 
The manner of pourginge gol●e with lead.  but also the mines of all other metals.   

☞ Of the mine of silver and the quality thereof.  
THere are (as I understand) divers opinions among the practitionars of the mines, whether silver have a proper mine by itself or no. 
whether sylver have A mine by hi● self or no.  The reasons of such as writ of the natures of minerals, and th'authority of the most, persuade me to assent to the affirmative: Not only to see the natural matter distinct, as is to perceive in the mines of gold, copper, lead and other metals which in their mines are found pure by themselves without mixtion, but also that I understand that there hath been found likewise certain pieces as well of this metal of silver, as of gold and copper, browght to his last finesse by th'only work of nature. And this doth Georgius Agricola a learned man of Germany confirm in his book of minerals where he writeth that in Saxony there was found in a cave a piece of mineral silver of such bigness, 
Georgius Agricola.  
A table of mineral silver.  that the duke the prince & pa●rone of that place, caused a chair and square dyninge table after the manner of almany to be made thereof without any further work of man's hand: Gloryinge often times that in this thing he surmounted the greatness and magnificence of the Emperor. But in deed (except copper) I have seen no metal taken out of the cave pure without his ure. Yet do I believe it a thing possible, considering the great force and pour of nature, 
The works of nature.  th'end of whose working ever intendeth to bring all things to perfection as far as it is not otherwise hindered. Yet (as I have said) of the most part of those mines which I have seen, none of them have been without mixture, 
Mixed metales.  not only of the earth of their own proper mine, but have been also mixed with other metals: And especially this of silver more than any other, except only that which was digged in Schio in Vicentina. And therefore not without sum shadow of apparent reason, have such doubts risin among the practitionars of the mines. And yet (as I have said I believe that silver may have and hath his proper mine, forasmuch as every substance that may be converted into metal, may aswell stand by itself pure in his own kind, as either separate or mixed with other, as is often times seen in one mass in the which divers metals are contained and engendered by nature. 
divers metals in one mass.  And by this means it often chanceth that he that speaketh of the mine of silver, may with the same brethe and without distinction, speak also of all other metales, forasmuch as there are but few mines which are not mixed with other. But because the most noble and rich metals have obtained the prerogative to be esteemed above other, therefore the name of the mine is given to them where they are mixed with other: as the mines which hold copper, lead, or iron, 
In the indies gold found in great quantity, pure and unmixed.  (as do the most part) yet if they hold also gold or silver, they are called gold mines or silver mines, according unto that which is found in them to be of most value. But to let pass this matter, you shall further understand that when such mines are mixed of divers metals, they show forth so much the more divers and variable fumosites of tinctures and marchasites, as signs where they be and of what pureness: forasmuch as every of them according to their natures, exalt their colours which they show forth to the eye, 
The colours of mineral fumosites.  sum in the similitude of asurine or blue stones, sum green, sum yellow, and sum of undistinct colours according to the compositions and mixtures of the first matters of metals, which is also the cause that they are found more or less in quantity. Now to speak more particularly of this metal of silver, 
The generation & quality of silver.  the philosopher's speculatours of natural things, say that it is engendered of substance more watery than fiery, of complexion feminine and phlegmatic in comparison to gold: receiving more of thinfluence of the moon then of the son, 
The influens of the moan.  and therefore engendered more in could regions nearer unto the moon, then in hot regions under the son: consisting also of pure elements, although somewhat crude and undigested in respect of the elements of gold as may be plainly perceived by their colours, weight, and fixation. 
Stones in the ●hich silver is engendered.  The practicionars affirm that it is engendered in a stone like unto Albazano, and also in an other ●●one of a russet, dead, and dark colour: And is often times found in an other stone like unto Trevertino or in Trevertino itself. The mine hereof, is very ponderous, and hath in it often times certain shining grains: 
The mine of silver.  The which how much the less they are like to the point of a needle so much is the mine found to be the perfecter, because this is a token of pureness and fixion. And when it is found in a white stone, or lead stone, it is so much the better, because it may be the easier purged from the stone and earthynesse. When also it is found lying as it were lose among certain frales or clods of earth, they say th●t it is perfect, although it have not to the eye such resplendence as other are wont to have. The● say also that it is engendered in an earth of dark russet colour: And that when it is found in this, it is of gre●t quantity and perfection, and that there is great plenty thereof within the mountain: 
The mountain.  This also to be so much the better in how much more it is shining of the colour of iron or red●e. And that you may the bet●er comprehend the signs of the mine of the foresaid metal, you shall understand that even together with the mine, either where it is first found, or near unto the same, you shall see certain marchasites of yellow colour like unto gold. 
Marchasites of silver.  The which, the more they hold of such high colour, so much the more do they show adust or burnt ma●ter and heat, as things contrary to the nature of their metals. And therefore according to the degrees of such colours, you may in manner judge of what fatness or leanness the mine is like to be. Such marcha●ites therefore as ●hew● the best signs of the goodness of their mines, 
what marchasites are the best signs.  ought in colour to approach to whiteness as much as may be, and to consist of smaule grains, and not in great quantity. And this is a general rule of all marchasites, that how much th● narrower and less they are, the more do they show the goodness of their mine. This mine of silver is also often times found in a vain of great quantity, and yet so lean in quality that it will not bear the charge of the digging, because it is found in a hard stone like unto Al●azano, 
Silver myns in hard stones.  being very hard to be digged or broken. Sum times also, it is found in the company of copper or lead: 
Silver with copper or lead.  The which likewise if it do not surmount the value of the charges, it is not to be followed. otherwiles also, it so chuanceth that these three metals are found accompanied together in one mine: In which case it shallbe necessary to use advertisement of art. And presupposing that you desyte to separate the silver from the other metal, it is necessary that you increase the lead. But if you pass not to save neither the syl●er nor the lead, 
The devyding ●t silver from other metals.  but ●nly the copper, it shal●e requisite to proceed wi●h l●●g● ●nd great fierce until the weakest martyrs be consumed. But this ought to be done especially in such mines as hold iron. 
Iren.  Yet neither for this or those, can there any general rule be given, but that according unto their quality and nature, so ought they to be divided: And this so much the more in that they are often times mixed with sum dry earth, or with a quantity of antimony or arsenic, 
Metals mixed with Antimony or Arsnike  which are matters all together evaporable and burnt, or of hard substance to be reduced to fusion or melting: In so much that the artificers sometimes being overcome of them, leave them as things unprofitable. Whereof there can none other cause often times be given, than their own ignorance by reason of extraordinary and long fierce which they give them. And therefore they work inordinately in such kind of mines, except they accompany them in the fusion or melting with such things as may defend them from the fire. 
how metals are preserved in fusion.  For whereas is such abundance either of burnt matter, or of superfluous waterynesse, whereof the one is called Sulphur or brimstone, & the other Mercury or quicksilver not fixed, 
Sulphur and mercury.  or arsenic, it is necessary that the one burn and silver, and the other carry it a way, so that of the mine there resteth none other than an ear thy substance infusible and not able to be melted. To save the said mine therefore it shallbe requisite to use discretion with much patience and convenient means, 
Grinding and washing of mines.  first after the common manner of working to evaporate the mine (as we have said) or without evaporation to grind it smaule: then to wash it often, and in fine, if not by great fierce, at the least by great baynes or testes of lead to purge it. And to bring this effect the more easily to pass as much as may be, after that it is ground you ought to prove in the same grinding or in an other, if it may be amalgamed with Mercury which is the best manner of proof, 
The amalgaming of mines with Mercury.  if the mine be of a dry nature: And I know that it hath bin used of many to their great profit: And especially in those sort of mines which I said before to be digged in Vigentina in Schio, being very rich and good. Prove it therefore. For all kinds of mines do not receive it. And of this whereof I have spoken, I have intelligence that there hath bin pieces found holding a fourth part of silver, 
Mines holding the fourth part of silver.  and sum more than half. And this was found lying in manner in the superficial part of the earth: and sum times in paths and high ways. It hath also been found under the roots of such trees as have been overthrown by tempest: and this very perfect. So that emong● all the mines which I have seen in the dominions of Venice, as in Carnia and in mnay other places, I can not say that I have seen any better: Although there be many caves whereof the most part are of coppe● holding silver: 
Copper holding silver.  and among other, that in the mountain of Auanzo, where I in the company of certain other gentlemen caused a cave to be digged. And because the hole charge was committed to me, I went by occasion twice into high almany to see the mines of ●hat country, whereby I might have the better experience to fall to practise at my return. In so much that I found the mine which we had taken in hand to follow, to be very good and rich: holding more than three ounces and a half of silver in every hundredth of the mine. 
Th●e unces dim of silver in every hundredth of mine  And doubtless we should have obtained great commodity hereby if fortune at that time had not raised war between Maximilian Themperor and the signory of venice: 
war between Maximilian ●hemperour and the Venetians.  which was the cause that those places of Frioli and Carnia, could not be quietly inhabited: whereby w● were enforced to forsake hour enterprise, and to raze and destroy thorder which we had begun. And by reason that the wars continued long, we were constrained to divide our company, where I also departed an other way, having ever in mind to follow hour attempted enterprise when better opportunity should serve. In the mean time returning ageing into high Almanie, 
The mines of almany.  I made more diligent search to know● the mines then before: and went to Sbozzo, Plaiper, Ispruch, Alla, and Arotrinbergh: from whence I went into divers places of Italy. So that to conclude, the most and best mines which I have seen to hold most of silver, are those that are found'st in Vice●tina in certain stones of a dark grey, or russet colour, as I have said before. And now for a general advertisement, I will not omit to tell you, that when you have attempted to dig any mines, and have found the marchasite and the mine mixed together, 
The marchasite mixed with the mine.  you shall leave of your work, because it signifieth that the mine is near to the superficial part of the earth, & that it is of but little quantity. And thus as touching this mine of silver, I can say no mor● saving that I have not yet showed you the manner of purging it from earthly grossness and to bring it to perfect metal. But because I have determined to speak largely hereof in the proper place of the fusion or melting of all metals, I have thowght good to speak no further of this matter at this present.   

The manner of working in gold mines of Egipte in owld time, after the description of Diodorus Siculus, who wrote his history called Bibliotheca, somewhat before the days of th'emperor O●tauianus Augustus, & before th incarnation of Christ about xl years. He writeth therefore in his fourth book as followeth.  
WE have not thowght good to pretermit how gold is found, digged, and wrought among the Egyptians. In the confines therefore of Egipte where it borthereth with Ethiopia and Arabia, there are certain places fruitful of metals, out of the which, gold is digged with great labour and expenses. For a black earth of minerale nature, hath certain veins of most white marble exceeding bright and shining. 
Gold in a black earth●, and white marble  The surveyors of this work, have assigned them a great company of men to work and coin gold. For the kings of Egipte are accustomed to appoint to these painful travails, 
Then damned to the metales as now to the galleys.  all such as have been convict for certain crimes and condemned by laws, or taken prisoners in the wars, or such as have been committed to prison through the indignation of princes who by this means have both great vantage by their labour, and punish them sufficiently for their offences. For barbarous & strange soldiers of divers languagies, bore ruleover them and keep them to their work, in such sort that those of speech being taken from thyem, they can not be corrupted by love or entreaty. They draw gold out of the hardest earth decoct with much fire. The softest stone which is broken with mean labour, is digged with instruments of iron by the travail of many thousands of men. The scrier which decerneth the veins of the mine, 
The scrier of the vain.  goth before the workmen, appointing them the places where they shall dig. The marble stone which he showeth them, they break and cleave with wedgies of iron by the mere strength of their body's without art. They make their fossae or cave, not right forth, but as the bright nature of the golden marble leadeth them, 
Golden marble.  being otherwise dark and obscure by reason of their sundry turns and bendinge divers ways. The labourers carrying light befor● their foreheads, dig great stones out of the mine, which they let fall on the ground. From this labour they never rest, enforced to continual work with strokes and contumelious words. 
The work of children.  Children of th'age of xii or xiii years or uppewarde, are divided into two companies, whereof the one break the stones into smaule pieces, and the other carry forth that which is broken. They that are past th'age of xxx years, receive the said broken stones at their hands and beat them in vessels of stone with maules of iron, to the quantity of tars or fitches which afterward they cast into many mills, 
Mylles.  where by the labour of two or three women or owlde men to every mill, 
The mi●ery of the miners  they are ground as smaule as meal. The filthiness of the bodies of these labourers, is apparent to all men. For not so much as their privy members are covered with any thing: And their bodies bysyde so filthy, that no man can behold them without compassion of their misery. But no pity, no rest, no remission is granted them, whether they be men or women, young or old, sick or feeble: But are all with strokes enforced to continual labour until the poor wretches faint and often times die for extreme debility: In so much that many of them for fear of their life to come (which they think worse than the present pain) prefer death before life. 
The pourgeinge of the metal from the ure.  When they have thus ground the stones very smaule, they cast that substance upon broad tables inclining somewhat steep or standing a slope, and cast wate● thereon, steering continually the said powder of marble: by the means whereof the earth and ure of the mine is washed away, and the gold as the heavier matter remaineth on the tables. When they have done thus often times, they overturn the gold continually with their hands & rub it with thin spoonges, out of the which they press a soft earth, and thus continue until the pure metal remain like unto golden sand. 
The melting of gold.  After that this preparation is finished, other workmen receiving it at their hands by measure and weight, cast it into earthen pots, putting thereto a certain portion of lead, with bran of barley, and weeds of the sea called reites or ouse. These things proportioned accordingly, they close the pots diligently with clay, 
Alg●.  and so let them stand in a furnace with fire for the space of five continual days and nights. In which space, all other things of contrary mixture being consumed, only the gold is found in the vessels, somewhat diminysshed of the first weight. And by this labour and diligence is gold possessed in the furthest part of Egypt. Whereby, even nature herself teacheth us how laborious it is in finding, tedious in pursuing, dangerous in keeping, and in use constitute between pleasure and sorrow.    

¶ The description of the two viages made out of England into Guinea in Africa at the charges of certain merchants adventurers of the city of London, in the year of hour Lord. M.D.LIII  
THat these voyages to Guinea are placed after the book of Metals as separate from other voyages, the cause hereof is, that after I had delivered the said book of metals to the hands of the printers, I was desired by certain my friends to make sum mention of these viages, that sum memory thereof might remain to our posterity if either iniquity of time consuming all things, or ignorance creeping in by barbarousness and contempt of knowledge, should hereafter bury in oblivion so worthy attempts, so much the greatlyer to be esteemed as before never enterprised by english men, or at the least so frequented as at this present they are and may be to the great commodity of hour merchants, if the same be not hindered by thambition of such as for the conquesting of forty or fifty miles here and there, and erecting of certain fortresses or rather blockhouses among naked people, 
Ambition.  think themselves worthy to be lords of half the world, envying that other should enjoy the commodities which they themselves can not holy possess. And although such as have been at charges in the discovering and conquesting of such lands, ought by good reason to have certain pr●uilegies, preeminencies, and tributes for the same, yet (to speak under correction) it may seem somewhat rigorous and against good reason and conscience, or rather against the charity that ought to be among christian men, that such as violently invade the dominions of other, should not permit other friendly to use the trade of merchandise in places never or seldom frequented of them, whereby their trade is not hindered in such places where they themselves have at their own election appointed the martes of their traffic. But forasmuch as at this present it is not my intent to accuse or defend, approve or improve, I will cease to speak any further hereof, and proceed to the description of the first voyage as briefly and faithfully as I was advertised of the same by thinformation of such credible persons as made diligent inquisition to know the truth hereof as much as shallbe requisite, omitting to speak of many particular things not greatly necessary to be known: which nevertheless with also thexact course of the navigation, shall be more fully declared in the second viage. And if herein favour or friendship shall perhaps cause sum to think that sum have been sharply touched, let them lay a part favour and friendship and give place to truth, that honest men may receive praise for well doing, and lewd persons reproach as the just stipend of their evil deserts, whereby other may be deterred to do the like, and virtuous men encouraged to proceed in honest attempts.  
But that these voyages may be more plainly understood of all men, I have thowght good for this purpose before I entreat hereof, to make a brief description of Africa being that great part of the world, 
Africa.  on whose West side beginneth the coast of Guinea at Cabo Uerde about the xii degrees in latitude on this side the Equinoctial line, 
The coast of Guinea.  and two degrees in longitude from the measuring line, so running from the north to the south and by east in sum places within v. iiii. and iii degrees and a half within the Equinoctial, and so forth in manner directly east and by north for the space of xxxvi degrees or there about in longitude from the West to the East, as shall more plainly appear in the description of the second viage.  

¶ A brief description of Africa.  
IN Africa the less are these kingdoms: The kingdom of Tunes and Constantina which is at this day under Tunes, 
Tons.  and also the region of Bugia, 
Bugia.  Tripoli, 
Tri●oli.  and ●zzab. This part of Africa is very barren by reason of the great deserts, as the deserts of Numidia and Barcha. 
Numidia.  The principal ports of the kingdom of Tunes are these: Goletta, Bizerta, Portofarnia, Bova, and Stora. The chief cities of Tunes, are Constantia and Bova with divers other. 
Islands of Tons.  Under this kingdom are many Islands, as Zerbi, Lampadola, Pantalarea, Limoso, Be it, Gamelaro, and Malta where at this present is the great master of the Rhodes. 
Malta.  Under the south of this of kingdom, are the great deserts of Libya. 
The disertes of Libya.  All the nations this Africa the less, are of the sect of Machomet and a rustical people living scattered in villages. The best of this part of Africa, is Barbaria lying on the coast of the sea Mediterraneum. 
Barbary.   
Mauritania (now called Barbaria) is divided into two parts, 
Mauritania.  as Mauritania Tingitania, and Cesariensis. Mauritania Tingitania, is now called the kingdom of Fes and the kingdom of Marrocko. The principal city of Fes, is called Fessa: and the chief city of Marrocko, 
The kingdoms of Fes and ma●rock.  is named Marrocko. Mauritania Cesariensis is at this day called the kingdom of Tremisen, 
Tremesin.  with also the city called Tremisen or Telensin. This region is full of deserts, and reacheth to the sea Mediterraneum to the city of Oram with the port of Massaquiber. 
Oram.  
Nassaquiber  The kingdom of Fes reacheth unto the Ocean sea from the West to the city of Argilla: and the port of the said kingdom is called Salla. 
Sa●la.   
The kingdom of Marrocko is also extended above the Ocean sea unto the city of Azamor and Azafi which are above the Ocean sea toward the West of the said kingdom. 
Azamor.  In Mauritania Tingitanea (that is to say in the two kingdoms of Fes and Marrocko) are in the sea, the Islands of Canary called in old time the fortunate Islands. 
The Islands of Canary.  Toward the south of this region, is the kingdom of Guinea, 
Guinea.  with Senega, jaiofo, Gambra, and many other regions of the black moors called Ethiopians or Negroes, 
Ethiopians.  all which are watered with the river Negro called in old time Niger. In the said regions are no cities: but only certain low cottages made of bouwes of trees plastered with chauke and covered with straw: In these regions are also very great deserts.  
The kingdom of Marrocko hath under it these seven kingdoms: Hea, Sus, Guzula, the territory of Marrocko, 
Marrocko.  Duchala, Hazchora, and Telde. The kingdom of Fes hath as many: as Fes, 
Fes.  Temesne, Azgar, Elabath, Errifi, Garet, and Eicauz. The kingdom of Tremisen hath these regions: 
Tremesin.  Tremisen, Tenez, and Elgazaet, all which are Machometistes. But all the regions of Guinea are pure gentiles and idolaters without profession of any religion or other knowledge of god then by the law of nature. 
Guinea.   
Africa the great, 
Africa the great.  is one of the three parts of the world known in old time and severed from Asia, on the East by the river Nilus: On the West, from Europe by the pillars of Hercules. The hither part is now called Barbary, and the people Moors. The inner part is called Libya and Ethiopia. Africa the less is in this wise bounded: 
Africa the less.  On the west it hath Numidia: On the east Cyrenaica: On the north, the sea called Mediterraneum. In this country was the noble city of Carthage. 
Carthage.   
In the East side of Africa beneath the red sea, dwelleth the great and mighty Emperor and Christian king Prester johan, 
Prester john.  well known to the Portugals in their voyages to Calicut. His dominions reach very far on every side: and hath under him many other kings both Christian and heathen that pay him tribute. This mighty prince is called David Themperor of Ethiopia. Sum write that the king of Portugal sendeth him yearly viii ships laden with merchandise. His kingdom confineth with the red sea, and reacheth far into Africa toward egypt and Barbary. southward it confineth with the sea toward the cape de Buona Speranza: 
Cape de Buona Speranza.  and on the other side with the sea of sand called Mare de Sabione, 
The sea of sand.  a very dangerous sea, lying between the great city of Alcaer or Cairo in egypt and the country of Ethiopia: 
Alcair.  In the which way are many unable deserts continuing for the space of five days journey. And they affirm that if the said Christian Emperor were not hindered by those deserts (in the which is great lack of victuals and especially of water) he would or now have invaded the kingdom of egypt and the city of Alcayer. The chief city of Ethiope where this great Emperor is resident, is called Amacaiz being a fair city, whose inhabitants are of the colour of an olive. There are also many other cities, as the city of Sava upon the river of Nilus where Themperor is accustomed to remain in the soommer season. There is likewise a great city named Barbaregaf: And Ascon from whence it is said that the queen of Saba came to jerusalem to hear the wisdom of Solomon. 
From whence the queen of Saba came.  This city is but little, yet very fair and one of the chief cities in Ethiope. In the said kingdom is a province called Manicongni, 
Manicongni.  whose king is a Moor and tributary to Themperor of Ethiope. In this province are many exceeding high mountains upon the which is said to be the earthly paradise: 
The earthly paradise.  And sum say that there are the trees of the son and moon whereof the antiquity maketh mention: 
The trees of the son and moon.  Yet that none can pass thither by reason of great deserts of a hundredth days journey. Also beyond these mountains, is the cape of Buona Speranza. And to have said thus much of Africa it may suffice.   

¶ The first viage of Guinea.  
IN the year of hour Lord. M.D.LIII the xii. day of August, sailed from Porchemouth two goodly ships, the Primrose and the Lion, 
The primrose  
The lion.  with a pinnace called the moon: 
The Moon  being all well furnished aswell with men of the lustiest sort to the number of seven score, as also with ordinance and victuals requisite to such a viage: Having also two captains, the one a stranger called Antoniades Pinteado a Portugal, 
Pinteado.  borne in a town named the port of Portugal, a wise, discrete, and sober man, who for his cunning in sailing being aswell an expert pilot as politic captain, was sometime in great favour with the king of Portugal, and to whom the coasts of Brasile and Guinea were committed to be kept from the frenchmen to whom he was a terror on the sea in those parts: 
Brasile.  
Guinea.  and was furthermore a gentleman of the king his master's house. But as fortune in manner never favoureth but flattereth, 
The flattering of fortune.  never promiseth but deceiveth, never raiseth but casteth down again, and as great wealth and favour hath always companions emulation and envy, he was after many adversities and quarrels made against him, enforced to come into England: where in this golden viage he was evil matched with an unequal coompanion and unlike match of most sundry qualities and conditions with virtues few or none adorned, with vices divers and many foully spotted, 
The evil conditions of Wyndam.  known of many with out profit, and desired of few or none for his wickedness: whose smaule acquaintance was profitable to all men, and his familiar conversation an undoinge, that happy was the man or woman that knew him not, he for his goods and she for her name. In fine, unfortunate was the company that had ought to do with him: in so much that it was no marvel that so goodly an enterprise with so noble a furniture of men, ships, and ordinance of all sorts, with all kind of victuals and that of so ●reat abundance, had so small success: which could be none otherwise where so foul a spot did blemish, ye rather deface the rest. Thus departed these noble ships under sail on their viage. But first this captain Wyndam, putting forth of his ship at Porchmouth, a kinsman of one of the head merchants, and showing herein a muster of the tragical parts he had conceived in his brain, and with such smaule beginnings nurysshed so monstrous a birth, that more happy, yea and blessed was that young man being left behind then if he had been taken with them, as sum do wish he had done the like by theirs. Thus sailed they on their viage until they came to the Islands of Madera where they took in certain wines for the store of their ships, 
The Islands of Madera.  and paid for them as they agreed of the price. At these Islands they met with a great galion of the king of Portugal full of men and ordinance: 
A galleon of the king of Portugal.  yet such as could not have prevailed if it had attempted to withstand or resist hour ships, for the which cause it was set forth, not only to let and interrupt these hour ships of their purposed viage, but all other that should attempt the like. Yet chiefly to frustrate hour viage. For the king of Portugal was sinisterly informed that hour ships were armed to his castle of Mina in these parties, 
The castle of Mina.  whereas nothing less was meant.  
After that our ships departed from the Islands of Madera forward on their viage, began this worthy captain Pinteados sorrow as a man tormented with the company of a terrible hydra who hitherto flattered with him and made him a fair countenance and show of love. 
how Wyndan abused Pinteado.  Then did he take upon him to command all alone, setting nowght both by captain Pinteado with the rest of the merchant factors: sometimes with opprobrious words and sometimes with threatenings most shamefully abusing them, taking from Pinteado the service of the boys and certain mariners that were assigned him by thorder and direction of the woorshypfull merchants, and leaving him as a common mariner, which is the greatest despite and grief that can be to a Portugal or spaniard to be diminysshte their honour which they esteem above all richesse. Thus sailing forward on their viage, they came to the Islands of Canary, 
The Islands of Canary.  continuing their course from thence until they arrived at the Island of saint Nicolas where they vyttayled themselves with fresh meat of the flesh of wild goats whereof is great plenty in that Island and in manner of nothing else. 
The Island of. s. Nico●as.  From hence following on their course, and tarrying here and there at the desert Islands in the way, because they would not come to timely to the country of Guinea for the heat, 
Guinea.  and tarrying somewhat to long (for what can be well ministered in a common wealth where inequality with tyranny will rule alone) they came at the length to the first land of the country of Guinea where they fell with the great river of Sesto where they might for their merchandise have laden their ships with the grains of that country, 
The river of ●esto.  
Grains.  which is a very hot fruit, and much like unto a fig as it groweth on the tree. For as the figs are full of smaule seeds, so is the said fruit full of grains which are lose within the cod, having in the midst thereof a hole on every side. This kind of spice is much used in could countries, and may there be sold for great advantage for thexchange of other wares. 
The thirst of gold.  But our men by the persuasion or rather enforcement of this tragical captain, not regarding and setting light by that commodity in comparison to the fine gold they thrusted, 
The castle of mena.  sailed an hundredth leaques further until they came to the golden land: where not attempting to come near the castle pertaining to the king of Portugal, which was within the river of Mina, 
The quantity of gold.  made sale of their ware only on this side and beyond it for the gold of that country to the quantity of an hundredth and fifty pounds weight, there being in case that they might have dispatched all their ware for gold, if the untame brain of Wyndam had or could have given ear to the counsel and experience of Pinteado. For when that Wyndam not satisfied with the gold which he had (and more might have had if he had tarried about the Mina) commanding the said Pinteado (for so he took upon him) to lead the ships to Benin being under the Equinoctial line and a hundredth and fifty leaques beyond the Mina where he looked to have thyer ships laden with pepper: 
Benin.  
Pepper.  And being counseled of the said Pinteado considering the late time of the year for that time to go no further but to make sale of their wares such as they had for gold whereby they might have been great gainers. But Wyndam not assenting hereunto, fell into a sudden rage, reviling the said Pinteado, 
Fury admitteth no counsel.  cauling him jew with other opprobrious words, saying. This whoreson jew hath promised to bring us to such places as are not, or as he can not bring us unto. But if he do not, I will cut of his ears and nail them to the mast. Pinteado gave the foresaid counsel to go no further for the safeguard of the men and their lives, which they should put in daungioure if they came to late for the rossia which is their winter, 
The Rossia.  not for could but for smothering heat with close and cloudy air and storming wether of such putrifyinge quality that it rotted the coats of their backs. 
rotting heat.  Or else for coming to son for the scorching heat of the son which caused them to linger in the way. 
Scorchinge heat.  But of force and not of will, browght he the ships before the river of Benin: 
Benin.  where riding at an anchor, sent their pinnace up into the river fifty or threescore leaques, from whence certain of the merchants with captain Pinteado, Francisco a Portugal, 
Francisco.  Nicolas Lambert gentleman, 
Nicolas Lambert.  and other merchants were conducted to the court where the king remained ten leaques from the river side: whither when they came, 
The king of Benin his court.  they were browght with a great company to the presence of the king who being a black moor (although not so black as the rest) sat in a great huge haul long and wide, the walls made of earth without windows, the the roof of thin boards open in sundry places like unto lovers to let in the air.  
And here to speak of the great reverence they give to their king, 
Reverence toward the king.  being such that if we would give as much to our saviour christ, we should remove from our heads many plagues which w●e daily deserve for hour contempt and impiety.  
So it is therefore, that when his noble men are in his presence, they never look him in the face, but sit cowering, as we upon hour knees so they upon their buttocks with their elbows upon their knees and their hands before their faces, not looking up until the king command them. And when they are coming toward the king as far as they do see him, do they show such reverence sitting on the ground with their faces covered as before. Likewise when they depart from him they turn not their backs toward him, but go creeping backward with like reverence.  
And now to speak somewhat of the communication that was between the king and hour men, 
The communication between the king of Benin and our men.  you shall first understand that he himself could speak the Portugal tongue which he had learned of a child. Therefore after that he had commanded hour men to stand up, and demanded of them the cause of their coming into that country, they answered by Pinteado that they were merchants travailing into those parties for the commodities of his country for exchange of wares which they had browght from their countries, being such as should be no less commodious for him and his people. The king then having of owlde lying in a certain store house thirty or forty kyntals of pepper (every kyntall being an hundredth weight) willing them to look upon the same, 
Pepper.  and again to bring him a sight of such merchandise as they had browght with them. And thereupon sent with the captain and the merchants certain of his men to conduct them to the warers side, with other to bring the ware from the pinnace to the court. Who when they were returned and the wares seen, the king grew to this end with the merchants, 
The kings gentleness toward our men.  to provide in thirty days the lading of all their ships with pepper.  
And in case their merchandise would not extend to the value of so much pepper, he promised to credit them to their next return: and thereupon sent the country round about to gather pepper, causing the same to be browght to the court: So that within the space of xxx days they had gathered four score toonne of pepper.  
In the mean season hour men partly having no rule of themselves, 
The disorder and death of hour men.  but eating without measure of the fruits of the country, and drinking the wine of the palm trees that droppeth in the night from the cut branches of the same, and in such extreme heat running continually into the water, not used before to such sudden and vehement alterations (than the which nothing is more dangerous) were thereby browght into swellings and agues. In so much that the later time of the year coming on, caused them to die sū●ymes iii. & sometimes four or .v. in a day. Then Wyndam perceiving the time of the xxx days to be expired, & his men dying so fast, sent to the court in post to captain Pinteado and the rest to come away and to tarry no longer. But Pinteado with the rest, wrote back to him again, certifyinge him of the great quantity of pepper they had already gathered and looked daily for much more: desiring him furthermore to remember the great praise and name they should win if they came home prosperously, and what shame of the contrary. With which answer Wyndam not satisfied, and many of their men dying daily, willed and commanded them again either to come away forthwith, or else threatened to leave them behind. When Pinteado hard this answer, thinking to persuade him with reason, took his way from the court toward the ships being conducted thither with men by the kings commandment.  
In the mean season Windam all rageinge, 
The fury of Wyndam.  broke up Pinteadoes Cabin, broke open his chests, spoiled such provision of could stilled waters and suckettes as he had provided for his health, and left him nothing neither of his instruments to sail by, nor yet of his apparel. And in the mean time faulinge sick himself, died also. 
The death of Wyndam.  Whose death Pinteado coming aboard, lamented as much as if he had been the dearest friend he had in the world. But certain of the mariners and other officers did spette in his face, 
Pinteado evil used of the mariners.  sum cauling him jew, saying that he had browght them thither to kill them: And sum drawing their sword at him making A show to slay him. Then he perceiving that they would needs away, desired them to tarry that he might fetch the rest of the merchants that were fefte at the court. But they would not grant his request. Then desired he them to give him the ship boat with as much of an owlde sail as might serve for the same, promising them therewith to bring Nicolas Lamberte and the rest into England: But all was in vain. Then wrote he a letter to the court to the merchants informing them of all the matter, and promising them if god would lend him life to return with all haste to fetch them. And thus was Pinteado kept a bordeshippe against his will, thrust among the boys of the ship, not used like a man, nor yet like an honest boy: But glad to find favour at the cook's hand. Then departed they, leaving one of their ships behind them, which they sunk for lake of men to carry her. After this within six or seven days sailing, died also Pinteado for very pensiveness and thowght that struck him to the heart: 
The death of Pinteado.  A man worthy to serve any prince and most vilely used. And of seven score men came home to Plymmuowth scarcely forty, and of them many died. And that no man should suspect these words which I have said in commendation of Pinteado, to be spoken upon favour otherwise then truth, I have thought good to add hereunto the copy of the letters which the king of Portugal and the infant his brother wrote unto him to reconcile him at such time as upon the king his master's displeasure (and not for any other crime or offence as may appear by the said letters) he was only for poverty enforced to come into England where he first persuaded hour merchants to attempt the said voyages to Guinea. But as the king of Portugal to late repent him that he had so punished Pinteado upon malicious informations of such as envied the man's good fortune, even so may it hereby appear, that in sum cases, even Lions themselves, may either be hindered by the contempt or aided by the help of the poor mice according unto the fable of Isope.  
¶ The copy of Antomanes Pinteado his letters parents whereby the king of Portugal made him knight of his house after all his troubles and imprisonment, which by wrong information made to the king, he had sustained of long time, being at the last delivered, his cause known and manifested to the king by a grey friar the kings confessor.  
I The king do give you to understand lord Frances Desseosa one of my counsel and overseer of my house, that in consideration of the good service which Antony Anes Pinteado, the son of john Anes, dwelling in the town called the port, hath done unto me, my will and pleasure is, to make him knight of my house, allowing to him in pension seven hundredth reys monthly, 
Seven hundredth reys are ten s. Alcayr, is half a bushel.  and every day one alcayr of barley as long as he keepeth a horse, and to be paid according to the ordinance of my house. providing always that he shall receive but one marriage gift: And this also in such condition that the time which is excepted in hour ordinance forbidding such men to marry for getting such children as might succeed them in this allowance, which is two years after the making of this patent, shallbe first expired before he do marry. I therefore command you to cause this to be entered in the book called the Matricola of hour household under the title of knights. And when it is so entered, let the clerk of the Matricola for the certainty thereof, write on the back side of this Aluala or patente, the number of the leaf wherein this hour grant is entered. Which done, let him return this writing unto the said Antony Anes Pinteado for his warrant.  
I Diego Henriques have written this in Almarin the xxii. day of September, in the year of hour lord .1551. And this benevolence the king gave unto Antony Anes Pinteado the xxv day of july this present year.  
Rey.—  
¶ The secretaries declaration written under the kings grant.  
your majesty hath vouchsafed in respect and consideration of the good service of Antony Anes Pinteado dwelling in the port, and son of john Anes to make him knight of your house with ordinary allowance of seven hundredth reys pension by the month and one Alcayr of barley by the day as long as he keepeth a horse: And to be paid according to the ordinance of your house with condition that he shall have but one marriage gift: And that not within the space of vi years after the making of these letters patents.  
The secretaries note. Entered in the book of the Matricola. Fol. 683.  
Francisco de Siquera.  
¶ The copy of the letter of Don jews thinfant and brother to the king of Portugal: sent into England to Antonianes Pinteado.  
ANtonie Anes Pinteado, I the infant brother to the king, have me heartily commended unto you. Peter Gonsalues is gone to seek you, desiring to bring you home again into your country. And for that purpose, hath with him a safe conduct for you, granted by the king, that thereby you may freely and without all fear come home. And although the wether be foul and stormy, yet fail not to come. For in the time that his majesty hath given you, you may do many things to your contentation and gratifying the king, whereof I would be right glad: and to bring the same to pass will do all that lieth in me for your profit. But forasmuch as Peter Gonsalues will make further declaration hereof unto you, I say no more at this present. written in Luxburne the viii day of December, Anno. M.D.LII  
¶ The Infant done Lews.  
ALL these foresaid writings I saw under sel● in the house of my friend Nicolas Lyese with whom Pinteado left them at his unfortunate departing to Guinea. But notwithstanding all these friendly letters and fair promises, Pinteado durst not attempt to go home, neither to keeps company with the Portugals his country men without th● presence of other, forasmuch as he had secret admonition that they intended to slay him, if time and place might hau● served their wicked intent.   

☞ The second viage to Guinea.  
AS in the first viage I have declared rathe● the order of the history them the course of the navigation, whereof at that time I could have no perfect information, so in the description of this second viage my chief intent hath been to show the course of the same according to the observation and ordinary custom of them aryners, and as I received it at the hands of an expert pilot being one of the chief in this voyage, who also with his own hands wrote a brief declaration of the same as he found and tried all things not by conjecture, but by the art of sailing and instruments pertaining to the mariners faculty. Not therefore assuming to myself the commendations dew to other, neither so bold as in any part to change or otherwise dispose the order of this voyage so well observed by art and experience, I have thowght good to set forth the same in such sort and phrase of speech as is commonly used among them, and as I received it of the said pilot as I have said. Take it therefore as, followeth.  
In the year of hour lord. M.D.LIIII. the xi day of October, we d●parted the river of Thames with three goodly ships, th'one called the Trinity, a ship of the burden of seven score toonne: Thother called the Barthelmewe a ship of the burden of. lxxxx. The third was the john Evangelist a ship of seven score toonne. With the said ships and two pyunesses (whereof the one was drowned in the coast of England) we went forward on our viage, and steyde at Dover xiiii days. We steyde also at Rye three or four days. More over last of all we touched at Darthmouth.  
The first day of November at ix of the clock at night departing from the coast of England, we s●rte of the start bearing south-west all that night in the sea, and the next day all day, and the next night after until the third day● of the said month about noon, making our way good, did run .60. leaques.  
Item from xii of the clock the third day till xii of the clock the iiii day of the said month, making our way good southeast, did run every three hours two leaques, which amounteth to xvi leaques the hole.  
Item from xii of the clock the four day to xii of the clock the .v. day, running south-west in the sea, did run xii leaques.  
Item running from xii of the clock the .v. day until xii of the clock the vi day running southeast, did run xviii leaques.  
And so from xii of the clock the vi day until xii of the clock the vii day, running southsouthwest, did run every hour ii leaques which amount to xlviii leaques the hole. Item from xii of the clock the vii day till iii of the clock the viii day, southsouthwest, running in the sea. did run thirty. leaques.  
Item from three of the clock the viii day, until iii of the clock the ix day, running southsouthwest, did run xxx leaques.  
Item from iii of the clock the ix day till iii of the clock the ten day, did southsouthaest in running in the sea the sum of xxiiii leaques.  
Also from iii of the clock thy ten day until xli of the clock the xi day, did run southsouthwest the sum of xii leaques, and from xii of the. clock till vi of the said day, did run vi. leaques.  
running south and by west in the sea from vi of the clock● the xi day till vi of the clock the xii day; did run xxxvi leaques.  
From vi of the clock at after none the xii day till vi of the clock the xiii day at after none, did run xiii leaques Item from vi of the clock the xiii day, till vi of the clock the xiiii day at after none that we were becalmed that w●● could lie south-west with a sail. And the xu day in the morming, the wind came to the East and east North-east. The xvii day in the morning, we had sight of the isle of Madera which doth rise to him that cometh in the north North-east part upright land in the west part of it, and very high: and to the south southeast a low long land and a long point with a saddle through the midst of it, standeth in the xxxii degrees: and in the west part, many springs of water running down from the mountain, and many white fields like unto corn fields, and sum white houses to the southeast part of it: and the top of the mountain showeth very ragged if you may see it, and in the North-east part there is a byght or bay as although it were a harborowe. Also in the said part, there is a rock a little distance from the shore: and over the said byght, you shall see a great gap in the mountain.  
The xix day at xii of the clock, we had sight of the isle of Palms and Teneriffa and the Canaries. 
The I'll of palms.  
T●neriffa.  
The Canaries.  The I'll of Palm riseth round and lieth southeast and northwest, and the northwest part is lowest. In the south, is a round hill over the head land, and an other round hill above that in the land.  
There is between the southeast part of the isle of Madera and the northwest part of the isle of Palm lvii leaques. 
from madera to the isle of Palms.  This I'll of Palm lieth in the xxix degrees. And hour course from Madera to the isle of Palm was south and south and by west, so that we had sight of Teneriffa and of the Canaries. The southeast part of the isle of Palm, and the north North-east of Teneriffa, lieth southeast and northwest. And between them is twenty leaques. Teneriffa and the great Canary called Grancanaria, 
Grancanaria.  and the west part of Fortisuentura standeth in xxvii degrees and a half. 
Forts Uentura.  Gomera is a fair Island and very ragged and lieth west south-west of Teneriffa. 
The Island of Gomera.  And who so ever will come between them two Islands, must come south and by east, and in the south part of Gomera, is a town and a good road in the said part of the Island: and it standeth in xxvii degrees & three terces. Teneriffa is a high land and a great high pick like a sugar loaf. 
Teneriffa.  And upon the said pick is snow throughowt a●l the hole year. 
snow.  And by reason of that pick, it may be known above all other Islands, and there we were becalmed the twenty day of November from vi of the clock in the morning until four of the clock at after none.  

¶ Between Gomera and Cape de las Barbas.  
THe xxii day of November under the Tropic of Cancer, the son goeth down west and by south.  
Upon the coast of Barbary xxv. leaques by north cape blank at iii leaques of the main, 
The coast of ●arbarye.  
Cape blank.  there is xu fathom and good shelly ground and sand among, and no streams, and two smaule Islands standing in the xxii degrees and a t●r●e.  
From Gomera to cape de las Barbas is a hundredth leaques and our course was south and by east. The said cape standeth in xxii and a half: and all that coast is start xvi or xvii. fathom deep, seven. or viii leaques of from the river de Oro to cape de las Barbas, 
The river of de Oro.  there use many spaniards and Portugals to trade for fishing during the month of November: and all that coast is very low lands. Also we went from cape de las Barbas southsouthwest and south-west and by south ●yll we brought hour selves in twenty degrees and a half, reckoning our selves vii leaques of: and that was the least shoals of cape Blank.  
Then we went south until we browght hour selves in xiii. degrees, reckoning hour selves xxv leaques of. And in xv. degrees, we did rear the crossiers: 
The crosiers or cross stars.  and we might have reared them sooner if we had looked for them. They are not right a cross in the moonethe of November by reason the nights are short there. Nevertheless we had the sight of them the xxix day of the said month at night.  
The first of December out xiii degrees, we set hour course south and by East until the fourth day of December at xii of the clock the same day. Then we were in ix degrees and a terce, reckoning our selves xxx leaques of the shoals of the river called Rio Grande being west southwest of them: 
Rio Grande  The which shoals be xxx leaques long.  
The fourth of December, we began to set hour coarse southeast, we being in vi degrees and a half.  
The ninth day of December we set our course east southeast  
The xiiii day of the said month, we set hour coarse east, we being in .v. degrees and a half, reckoning hour selves xxxvi leaques from the coast of Guinea.  
The xix day of the said month, we set hour course east and by north, reckoning our selves xvii leaques distant from cape Mensurado, 
Cape Mesurado.  the said cape being east North-east of us, and the river of Sesto being east. 
The river of Sesto.   
The xxi day of the said month we fell with cape Mesurado to the southeast about two leaques of. This ca●e may be easily known, by reason the rising of it is like a purpose head. Also toward the southeast there are three trees, whereof the eastermost tree is the highest, and the myddlemost is like a hay stack, and the southermost like unto a iebet: and upon the main, are four or five high hills rising one after an other like round hoommockes or hyllockes. And the southeast of the three trees, is three trees like a brandierwyse: and all the coast along is white sand. The sayda cape standeth within a little in vi degrees.  
The xxii of. December, we came to the river of Sesto, and remained there until the xxix day of the said month Here we thought it best to send before us the pynne●●e to th● river of Dulce called Rio Dulce, that they might have the beginning of the market before the coming of the john.  
At the river of Sesto, 
The river of Sesto.  we had a toonne of grains. This river standeth in vi degrees lacking a terce. From the river of Sesto to Rio Dulce, 
Rio Dulce.  is xxv leaques. Rio Dulce standeth in .v. degrees and a half. The river of Sesto is easy to be known by reason there is a ledge of rocks on the southeast part of the road. And at the entering into the haven, are five or two trees that bear no leaves. This is a good harborowe: but very narrow at the entrance into the river. There is also a rock in the haven mouth right as you enter. And all that coast between cape de Monte and cape de las Palmas, 
Cape de Monte.  lieth southeast and by east, northwest and by west, being three leaques of the shore. And you shall have in sum places rocks two leaques of: and that between the river of Sesto and cape de las Palmas. 
Cape de las Palmas.   
Between the river of Sesto and the river Dulce, is xxv leaques. And the high land that is between them both, is called Cakeado, 
The land of Cakeado.  being viii leaques from the river of Sesto. And to the southeastward of him, is a place called Shawgro and an other called Shyawe or Shavo, 
Shavo.  where you may get fresh water. Of this Shyawe, lieth a ledge of rocks: and to the southeastward, lieth a head land called Croke. 
Croke.  Between Cakeado and Croke, is ix or ten leaques. To the southeastward of, is a harborowe called saint Uincent. Right over against saint Uincent, is a rock under the water, two leaques and a half of the shore. To the southeastward of that rock, 
Saint Uincentes harborou.  you shall see an Island about three or four leaques of. This Island is not passed a leaque of the shore. To the east southeast of the Island, is a rock that lieth above the water: and by that rock goeth in the river of Dulce, 
The river Dulce.  which you shall know by the said river and rock. The northwest side of the haven, is flat sand: and the south east side thereof, is like an Island and a bare plot without any trees, and so is it not many other place.  
In the road, you shall ride in xiii or xiiii fathoms, good owes and sand, being the marks of the road to bring the Island and the northwest land together. And here we anchored the last of December.  
The third day of january, we came from the river of Dulce.  
Note that cape de las Palmas is a fair high land. 
Cape de las Palmas.  But sum low places thereof by the water side, look like red cliffs with white streaks like ways a cable length a piece. And this is to the East part of the cape. This cape is the southermost land in all the coast of Guinea: 
The coast of Gu●nea.  And standeth in four degrees and a terce.  
The coast from cape de las Palmas to cape Trepoyntes or de tres Puntas, 
Cape de tres Puntas.  is fair and clear without rock or other daungiour.  
xxv. leaques from cape de las Palmas, the land is higher than in any place until we came to cape Trepoyntes And about ten leaques before you come to cape Trepointes, th● land riseth still higher and higher until you come to cap● Trepoyntes. Also before you come to the said cape after other five leaques to the northwest part of it, there is certain broken ground with two great rocks: and within them in the byght of a bay, is a castle called Arra, 
The castle of Arra.  pertaining to the king of Portugal. You shall know it by the said rocks that lie of it: For there is none such from cape de las Palmas to cape Trepoyntes. This coast lieth east and by north, west and by south. From cape de las Palmas to the said castle, is four score and xv. leaques. And the coast lieth from the said castle to the Westermoste point of the Trepoyntes, southeast and by south, northwest and by north Also the Westermost point of the Trepointes, is a low land lying half a mile out in the sea: and upon the innermost neck to the landward, is a tuft of trees, and there we arrived the xi day of january  
The xii day of january, we came to a town called Samma or Samua, 
The town of Samma.  being viii leaques from cape Trepoyntes toward east North-east. Between cape Trepointes and the town of Samua, is a great ledge of rocks a great way out in the sea. We continued four days at that town: and the captain thereof would needs have a pledge a shore. But when they received the pledge, 
The pledge was ●t john york his n●v. c.  they kente him still and would traffic no more, but shot of their ordinance at us. They have two or three pieces of ordinance and no more.  
The xvi day of the said month, we made reckoning to come to a place called cape Corea where captain Don john dwells, 
Cape Corea.  whose men entertained us friendly. This cape Corea is four leaques eastward of the castle of Mina, 
The castle of mina pe●teykinge to the king of Portugal.  otherwise called La Mina, or Castello de Mina, where we arrived the xviii day of the month. Here we made sale of all our cloth saving two or three packs.  
The xxvi day of the same month, we weyd anchor and departed from thence to the Trinity which was vii leaques eastward of us where she sold her wares. Then they of the Trinity willed us to go eastward of that viii or ix leaques to sell part of their wares in a place called Perecow, 
Perecowe.  & an other place named Perecowe grand, 
Perecowe grand.  being the eastermost place of both these, which you shall know by a great round hill near unto it named Monte Rodondo lying westewarde from it. 
Monte rodondo.  And by the water side are many high palm trees. From hence did we set forth homeward the xiii day of February and plied up alongst till we came within vii, or, viii, leaques to cape Trepointes. about viii of the clock the xv day at after noon, we did cast about to seaward. And beware of the currants, 
The currant●  for they will deceive you sore.  
Who so ever shall come from the coast of Mina homeward, 
from mina homeward.  let him be sure to make his way good west until he reckon himself as far as cape de las Palmas where the currant setteth always to the eastward. And within twenty leaques eastward of cape de las Palmas, is a river called Rio de los Poros where you may have fresh water and balasse enough, 
Rio de los Poros.  and plenty of ivory or Elephants teeth. 
Iverye.  This river standeth in four degrees and almost two terces.  
And when you reckon your self as far shot as cape de las Palmas, 
Cape de las Palmas,  being in a degree or a degree and a half, you may go west or west and by north until you come in three degrees: and then you may go west northwest, and northwest and by west until you come in five degrees and then northwest. And in the vi degrees, we met northerly winds and great roosting of tides. And as we could judge, the currants went to the north northwest. Furthermore between cape de Monte and cape Uerde, go great currants which deceive many men. 
currants.   
The xxii day of Apryll, we were in viii degrees and two terces: and so we ran to the northwest, having the wind at North-east and eastnortheast, and sometimes at east until we were at xviii degrees a●d a terce, which was on May day. And so from xviii and two terces, we had the wind at east and east North-east, and sometimes at east southeast: and then we reckoned the Islands of cape Uerde east southeast of us, we judging hour selves to be xlviii leaques of. And in twenty and xxi degrees, we had the wind more easterly to the southwa●de then before. And so we ran to the northwest and northnorthwest, and sometimes north and by west and north vn●yll we came into xxxi degrees, where we reckoned hour ●elues a hundredth and four score leaques south-west and by south of the Island de Flore or de los Flores. 
The I'll de F●ore.  And there we met with the wind at south●outheast, and ●et hour course north-east.  
In xxxiii degrees, we had the wind at the south and south-west: and then we set our course north North-east, and so we ran to xl. degrees: and then we set our course North-east the wind being at the south-west and having the Isle de Flore east of us, and xvii leagues of.  
In xli degrees, we met with the wind at North-east, and so we ran northwestwarde. Then we met with the wind at the west northwest and at the west within vi leaques running toward the northwest: And then we cast about and lay North-east until we came in xlii degrees, where we set our course east North-east, judging the Isle of Coruo south and by west of us and xxxvi leaques distant from us. 
The I'll of Corvo.   
A remembrance that the xxi day of may, we communed with john Ralph, and he thought it best to go north-east, and judged himself xxv leaques eastward to the Isle de Flore, and in xxxix degrees and a half.  
Note that in the fourth day of September under nine degrees, we lost the sight of the north star. 
where they lost the light of the north star.   
Note also, that in the xlv degrees the compass is varied viii degrees to the west. 
how the compass doth vary.   
Item, in xl degrees, the compass did vary xu degrees in the hole.  
Item, in thirty. degrees and a half, the compass is varied .v. degrees to the west.  
Be it also in memory, that two or three days before we came to cape Trepointes, the pinnace went alongst the shore th●nkynge to sell sum of our wares. And so we came to ank●r three or four leaques west and by south of the cape Trepoyntes where we left the Trinity.  
Then hour pinnace came a board with all our men. The pinnace also took in more wares. They told me more over that they would go to a place where the Primrose was and had received much gold at the first viage to these par●ies. 
The primrose.  And told me furthermore that it was a good place. But I fearing and brigantine that was then upon the coast, did weigh and follow them, and left the Trinity about faure leaques of from us. And there we road against that town four days: so that Martin by his own desire and assent of sum of the commissioners that were in the pinnace, went a shore to the town. And there john Beryn went to traffic from us being three miles of traf●kynge at an other town. The town is called Samma or Samua. 
The town of Samma.  For Samma and Sammaterra, 
Gold.  are the names of the two first towns wh●re we did traffic for gold, to the North-east of cape Trepoints:  
hitherto continueth the course of the viage as it was described by the said pilot. Now therefore to speak somewhat of the country and people, and of such things as are browght from thence.  
They browght from thence at the last viage, four hundredth pound weight and odd of gold of xxii carrattes and one grain in fineness. 
Gold four hundredth weight.  Also xxxvi butts of grains: 
Grains.  and about two hundredth and fifty elephants teeth of all quantities. 
ivory.  
Elephants' teeth.  Of these, I saw and measured sum of ix spans in length as they were crooked▪ Sum of them were as big as a man's thigh above the knee: and weighed about four score and ten pound weight a piece. They say that sum one hath been seen of a hundredth and xxv poun●e weight. Other there were which they call the teeth of calves of one or two or three years, whereof sum were a foot and a half, sum two foot, and sum three or more according to th'age of the beast. These great teeth or tusks, grow in the upper jaw downward, and not in the nether law upward, wherein the painters and arras workers are deceived. At this last voyage was browght from Guinea the head of an elephante of such huge bigness, 
The head of an Elephant.  that only the bones or cravewe thereof beside the nether ●awe and great tusks, weighed about two hundredth weight, and was as much as I could well lift from the ground. In so much that considering also herewith the weight of ii such great teeth, the nether ●awes with the less teeth, the tongue, the great hanging ears, the big and long snout or troonke, wit● all the flesh, brains, and skin, with all other parts belonging to the hole head, in my judgement it could weigh little less than five hundredth weight. This head divers have seen in the house of the worthy merchant sir Andrew judde, where also I saw it, and beheld it not only with my bodily eyes, but much more with the eyes of my mind and spirit considered by the work, 
The contemplations of gods works  the cunning and wisdom of the work master: without which consyd●ration, the sight of such strange and wonderful things may rather seem curiosities then profitable contemplations.  
The elephante (which sum call an oliphant) is the biggest of all four footed beasts. 
The description and properties of the Elephante.  His forelegges are longer than his hinder He hath ankles in the lower part of his hinder legs, and five toes on his fiete undivided. His snout or troonke is so long and in such form that it is to him in the steed of a hand. For he neither eateth nor drinketh but by bringing his troonke to his mouth. Therewith he helpeth up his master or keeper: therewith he overthroweth trees. Bysyde his two great tusks, he hath on every side of his mouth four teeth wherewith he eateth and grindeth his meat. Either of these teeth, are almost a span in length as they grow along in the law: and are about two inches in height and almost as much in thickness. The tusks of the male are greater than of the female. His tongue is very little, and so far in his mouth that it can not be seen. Of all beasts they are most gentle and tractable. For by many sundry ways they are taught and do understand: In so much that they learn to do due honour to a king, and are of quick sense and sharpness of wit. When the male hath once seasoned the female, he never after toucheth her. The male Elephante liveth two hundredth years, or at the least one hundredth and twenty. The female almost as long: but the flower of their age, is but lx years as sum write. They can not suffer winter or could. They love rivers and will often go into them up to the snout wherewith they blow and snuff, and play in the water: but swim they can not for the weight of their bodies. Pliny and Soline write that they use none adultery. If they happen to meet with a man in wilderness being out of the way, gently they will go before him and bring him into the plain way. joined in battle, they have no smaule respect unto them that be wounded. For they bring them that are hurt or weary into the middle of the army to be defended. They are made tame by drinking the juice of barley. They have continual war against dragons which desire their blood because it is very could. And therefore the dragon lying await as the Elephant passeth by, 
Debate between the Elephant and the dragon.  windeth his tail (being of exceeding length) about the hinder legs of the elephant: and so steying him, thrusteth his head into his trunk and exhausteth his breath, or else biteth him in the ear whereunto he can not reach with his troonke. And when the elephant waxeth faint, he falleth down on the serpent being now full of blood: and with the poised of his body breaketh him: so that his own blood with the blood of the elephant, runneth out of him mengeled together: which being could, is congealed into that substance which the apothecary's call Sanguis Draconis, 
Sanguis Draconis.  (that is) dragons blood, otherwise called Cinnabaris, although there be an other kind of Cinnaba●is, 
Cinnabaris.  commonly called cinoper or vermilion which the painters use in certain colours.  
They are also of three kinds, 
Three kinds of elephants.  as of the marishes, the plains, and the mountains, no lose differing in conditions. Philostratus writeth, that as much as the elephant of Lybia in bigness passeth the horse of Ny●ea, so much doth the elephants of India exceed them of Lybia. For of the elephants of India, sum have been seen of the height of ix cubits. The other do so greatly fear these that they dare not abide the sight of them. Of the Indian elephants, only the males have tusks. But of them of Ethiopia and Lybia, both kinds are tusked. They are of divers heyghtes, as of xii xiii. and xiiii dodrantes, every dodrant being a measure of ix. inches. Sum write that an elephant is bigger than three wild oxen or buffs. They of India are black or of the colour of a mouse. But they of Ethiope or Guinea, are brown. The hide or skin of them all, is very hard and without hear or bristles. Their ears are two dodrantes broad, and their eyes very little. our men saw one drinking at a river in Guinea as they sailed into the land.  
Of other properties and conditions of the elephant, as of their marvelous docili●ie, of their fight and use in the wars, of their generation and chastity, when they were first seen in the theatres and triumphs of the Romans, how they are taken and tamed, and when they cast their tusks, with those of the same in medicine, who so desireth to know, let him read Pliny in the viii book of his natural history. He also writeth in his xii book, that in old time they made many goodly works of ivory or elephants teeth: 
works of ivory.  as tables, trestles, posts of houses, rails, lattesses for windows, Images of their gods, and divers other things of ivory both coloured and uncoloured and intermyxte with sundry kinds of precious woods, as at this day are made certain chairs, lutes, and virginals.  
They had such plenty thereof in old time, that (as far as I remember) josephus writeth that one of the gates of Jerusalem was called Porta Eburnea, (that is) the ivory gate. The whiteness thereof was so much esteemed that it was thought to represent the natural fairness of man's skin: In so much that such as went about to set forth (or rather corrupt) natural beauty with colours and painting, were reproved by this proverb: Ebur atramento candesacere. That is: To make ivory white with ink. The poettes also describing the fair necks of beautiful virgins, call them Eburnea colla: That is: ivory necks. And to have said thus much of elephants and ivory, it may suffice.  

The people of Africa.  Now therefore to speak somewhat of the people and their manners and manner of living, with also an other brief description of Africa. It is to understand that the people which now inhabit the regions of the coast of Guinea and the mid parts of Africa, as Lybia the inner, and Nubia with divers other great and large regions about the same, were in old time called Ethiopes and Nigrite, which we now call Moors, Moorens, or Negroes, a people of beastly living, without a god, law, religion, or common wealth, and so scorched and vexed with the heat of the son, that in many places they curse it when it riseth. Of the regions and people about the inner Libya (called Libya Interior) Gemma Phrysius writeth thus. 
Libya Interior.   
Lybia Interior, is very large and desolate, in the which are many horrible wildernesses and mountains replenished with divers kinds of wild and monstrous beasts and serpents. first from Mauritania or Barbary toward the south is Getulia, 
Getul●a.  a rough and salvage region whose inhabitants are wild and wand●rynge people. After these follow the people called Melanogetuli and Pharus●i which wander in the wilderness carrying with them great gourds of water. The Ethiopians called Nigrite, 
Ethiopes.  
Nigrite.  occupy a great part of Aphrica, and are extended to th● West Ocean. southward also they reach to the river Nigritis whose nature agreeth with the river of Nilus forasmuch as it is increased and di●inyssh●d at the same time, 
The river Nigritis or Senega.  and bringeth forth the like beasts as the Crocodile. By reason whereof, I think this to be the same river which the Portugals call Senega. For this river is also of the same nature. It is furthermore marvellous and very strange that is said of this river. 
A strange thing.  And this is, that on the one side thereof, thinhabitants are of high stature and black: and on the other side of brown or tawny colour and low stature, which thing also hour men confirm to be true.  
There are also other people of Lybia called Garamantes, 
Garamantes.  whose women are common. For they contract no matrimony, neither have respect to chastity. After these ●re the nations of the people called Pyrei, Sathiodaphnite, Odrangi, M●maces, Lynxamate, Dolopes, Agangine, Leuce Ethiopes, 
People of Lybia.  Xilicei Ethiopes, Calcei Ethiopes, and Nubi. These have the same situation in Ptolemy that they now give to the kingdom of Nub●a. Here are certain Christians under the dominion of the great Emperor of Ethiopie called Prester john. 
Prester john.  From these toward the west, is a great nation of people called Aphricerones: whose region (as far as may be gathered by con●ecture) is the same that is now called Regnum Orguene, 
Regnum Orguene.  confining upon the east parts of Guin●a. From hence westward and somewhat toward the north, are the kingdoms of Gambra and Budomel not far from the river of Senega. 
Gambra.  And from hence toward the inland regions and along by the sea coast, are the regions of Ginoia or Guinea which we commonly call Gynne. 
Guinea or Gino●a.  On the west side of these regions toward the Ocean, is the cape or point called Caboverde or Caput viride (that is) the green cape, 
Cap. Uerde.  to the which the Portugales first direct their course when they sail to America or the land of Brasile. 
The Portugals navigations to Brasi●e.  Then departing from hence, they t●r●e to the right hand toward the quarter of the wind called Garbino which is between the west and the south. Bu● to speak somewhat more of Ethiopia. 
Ethiopia.  Althowgh there are many nations of people so named, yet is Ethiopia chiefly divided into two parts: whereof the one is called Ethiopia under egypt, a great and rich region. To this pertaineth the Island of Meroe, 
The Island of Meroe.  embraced round about with the streams of the river Nilus. In this Island women reigned in old tyme. josephus writeth that it was sometime called Sabea: and that the queen of Saba came from thence to Jerusalem to hear the wisdom of Solomon. 
The queen of Saba.  From hence toward the East, reigneth the said Christian Emperor Prester john whom sum call Papa johannes, and other say that he is called Pean ivan (that is great john, 
Prester john emperor of Ethiopia.  whose empire reacheth far beyond Nilus, and is extended to the coasts of the red sea and Indian sea. The middle of the region is almost in the 66. degrees of longitude, and xii degrees of latitude. about th●s region inhabit the people called Clodii, 
People of the east side of Africa.  Risophagi, Babilonii, Axiunite, Mosyli, and Molybe. After these is the region called Trogloditica, whose inhabitants dwell in caves and dens. For these are their houses, 
Ophiophagi.  and the flesh of serpents their meat, as writeth Pliny and Diodorus Siculus. They have no speech, but rather a grynning and chattering. There are also people without heads called Blemines, 
Pe●ple without heads.  having their eyes and mouth in their breast. Likewise S●rucophagi and naked Gāpha●antes. Satyrs also which have nothing of men but only shape. More over Oripei great hunters. Mennones also, and the region of Smyrnophora which bringeth forth myrrh After these is the region of Azania in the which money elephants are found. 
Myrrh.  
Azania.  A great part of the other regions of Africa that are beyond the Equinoctial line, are now ascribed to the kingdom of Melinde, 
Regnum Melinde.  whose inhabitants are accustomed to traffic with the nations of Arabia, and their king is ioyded in friendship with the king of Portugal, and payeth tribute to Prester john.  
The other Ethiope called ethiopia Interior (that is) the inner Ethiope, 
Ethiopia Interior.  is not yet known for the greatness thereof but only by the sea coasts. Yet is it described in this manner. first from the Equinoctial toward the south, is a great● region of Ethiopians which bringeth forth white elephants, 
white elephants.  tigers, and the beasts called Rhinocerontes. Also a region that bringeth forth plenty of cinnamon, lying between the branches of Nilus. Also the kingdom of Habech or Habassia, 
habassia.  a region of christian men, lying both on this side and beyond Nilus. Here are also the Ethiopians called Ichthiophagi (that is) such as live only by fish: 
Ichthiophagi  and were sumtime subdued by the wars of great Alexander. Furthermore the Ethiopians called Rhansii, and Anthropophagis that are accustomed to eat man's flesh, 
Anthropophagi.  inhabit the regions near unto the mountains called Montes Lunae, 
Montes Luna.  (that is) the mountains of the moon. Gazatia, 
Gazatia.  is under the tropic of Capricorn. After this, followeth th● front of afrique, the cape of Buena Speranza or Caput Bonae Spei, (that is) the cape of good hope, 
Cap Bonae Spei.  by the which they pa●se that sail from Spain to Calicut. But by what names the capes and gulfs are called, forasmuch as the same are in eu●ry globe and card, it were here superfluous to rehearse them.  
Sum write that Aphrica was so named by the Grecians because it is without could. 
Ephica without could.  For the Greek letter Alpha or, A, signifieth pryvation, void, or without: and phrice, signifieth could. 
The winter of Africa.  For in d●ede unless in the steed of winter they have a cloudy and tempestuous season, yet is it not could, but rather smothering hot with also hot showers of rain and somewhere such scorching winds, that what by one means and other they seem at certain times to live as it were in furnaces▪ 
Flames of fire & noise in the air.  and in manner already half way in Purgatory or hell. Gemma Phrisius writeth that in certain parts of Aphrica, (as in Atlas the greater) the air in the night season is seen shining with many strange fierce and flames rising in manner as high as the moon: And that in the element are sumtime hard as it were the sound of pipes, trumpets, and droomines. Which noises may perhaps be caused by the vehement and sundry motions of such fiery exhalations in the air, 
Uhe middle region of the ●er is could.  as we see the like in many experiences wrought by fire, air, & wind. The hollowness also & divers reflections & breaking of the clouds may be great causes here of, bysyde the vehement cold of the middle region of the air whereby the said fiery exhalations ascending thither are suddenly stricken back with great force. For even common and daily experience teacheth us by the whyssinge of a burning torge what noise fire maketh in the air, 
The strife of clementes.  & much more where it striveth when it is enclosed with aye as appeareth in gonns, and as the like is seen in only air enclosed, as in orgen pipes and such other instruments that go by wind. For wind as say the philosophers is none other than air vehemently moved, 
wind.  as we see in a payer of bellows and such other.  
Sum of hour men of good credit that were in this last viage to Guinea, affirm earnestly that in the night season they felt a sensible heat to come from the beams of the moon. 
The heat of the moon.  The which thing although it be strange and insensible to us that inhabit could regions, yet doth it stand with good reason that it may so be, forasmuch as the nature of the stars and planets (as writeth Pliny) consisteth of fire, 
The nature of ●he stars.  and containeth in it a spirit of life, which cannot be without heat.  
And that the moon giveth heat upon the earth, the prophet david seemeth to confirm in his. Cxx. Psalm, where speaking of such men as are defended from evils by god's protection, he saith thus: Per diem sol non exuret te, necluna per noctem. That is to say. In the day the son shall not burn the nor the moon by night.  
They say furthermore that in certain places of the sea, they saw certain streams of water which they call spouts falling out of the air into the sea: 
Spouts of water fauling out of the air.  And that sum of these are as big as the great pillars of churches: In so much that sometimes they faule into ships and put them in great● daungiour of drowning. Sum fantasy that these should be the ●arractes of heaven which were all opened at noah's flood. 
Cataracts of heaven.  But I think them rather to be such fluxions and eruptions as Aristotle in his book de Mundo, saith to chance in the sea. For speaking of such strange things as are seen often times in the sea, 
Uehement motions in the sea.  he writeth thus: Often times also even in the sea are seen evaporations of fire, and such eruptions and breaking forth of springs, that the mouths of rivers are opened, whyrlepooles, and fluxions are caused of such other vehement motions not only in the midst of the sea, but also in creeks and straights. At certain times also, a great quantity of water is suddenly lifted up and carried about with the moon. etc. By which words of Arystotle it doth appear that such waters may be lifted up in one place at one time, and suddenly fall down in an other place at an other tyme. And hereunto perhaps pertaineth it that Kycharde Chancellor told me that he hard Sebastian Cabot report, 
A strange. thing.  that (as far as I remember) either about the coasts of Brasile or Rio de Plata, his ship or pings was suddenly lifted from the sea and cast upon the land I wot not how far. The which thing and such other like wonderful and strange works of nature while I consider and call to remembrance the narownes of man's understanding and knowledge in comparison of her mighty power, 
The power of nature.  I can but cease to marvel and confess with Pliny that nothing is to her impossible, the least part of whose power is not yet known to men.  
Many things more hour men saw and considered in this viage worthy to be noted, whereof I have thought good to put sum in memory that the reader may aswell take pleasure in the variety of things as knowledge of the history. Among other things therefore touching the manners and nature of the people, this may seem strange that their princes and noble men use to pounse and raze their skins with pretty knots in divers forms as it were branched damask, 
They ●ase their skins.  thinking that to be a decent ornament. And albeit they go in manner all naked, yet are many of them and especially their women in manner laden with collars, bracelets, hoops, and chains either of gold, copper, or ivory. 
Fine jewels.  I myself have one of their bracelets of ivory weighing two pound and vi. ounces of Troy weight, which make xxxviii ounces. 
A braslet.  This, one of their women did wear upon her arm. It is made of one hole piece of the bigest part of the tooth turned and somewhat carved, with a hole in the midst wherein they put their hands to wear it on their arm. Sum have of every arm one and as many on their legs, 
●hackelles.  wherewith sum of them are so galded that although they are in manner made lame thereby, yet will they by no means leave them of. sum wear also on their legs great shackles of bright copper which they think to be no less comely. They wear also collars, bracelets, garlands and girdles of certain blue stones like beads. Likewise sum of their women wear on their bare arms certain foresleeves made of the plates of beaten gold. 
●inges.  On their fingers also they wear rings made of golden wires with a knot or wreath like unto that which children make in a ring of a rush. Among other things of gold that our men bowght of them for exchange of their wares, were certain dogs chains and collars. 
Dog's chain● of gold.   
They are very aware people in their bargaining, and will not lose one spark of gold of any value. They use weights and measures, and are very circumspect in occupying the same. They that shall have to do with them must use them ●entelly▪ for they will not traffic or bring in any wares if they be evil use. At the first usage that our men had in●o the●e parties, it so chanced that at their departure from the first place where they did traffic, one of them either stole a musk● cat or took her a way by force, 
A mu●ke cat.  not in●strustynge that that should have hindered their bargaining in an other place whither they intended to go. But for all the hast they could make with full sails, the fame of their mysusage so prevented them that the people of that place also offended thereby, would bring in no wares: In so much that they were enforced either to restore the cat or pay for her at their price before they could traffic there.  
Their houses are made of four posts or trees, 
Their house's.  and covered with bouwes.  
Their common feeding is of roots and such fishes as they take, 
Their feeding.  whereof they have great plenty. There are also such flying fishes as are seen in the sea of the West Indies. 
fleeing fishes  Hour men salted of their fishes hoping to provide store thereof. But they would take no salt: And must therefore be eaten forthwith as sum say. How be it, other affirm that if they be salted immediately after they be taken, they will last uncorrupted ten or xii days. But this is more strange, that part of such flesh as they carried with them owte of England and putrefied there, 
A strange thing.  became sweet again at their return to the clime of temperate regions.  
They use also a strange making of bread in this manner. 
Their bread.  They grind between two stones with their hands as much c●rne as they think may suffice their family. And when they have thus brought it to flower, they put thereto a certain quantity of water and make thereof very thin dowgh which they stick upon sum post of their houses, where it is baked by the heat of the son: So that when the master of the house or any of his family will eat thereof, they take it down and eat it.  
They have very fair wheat, 
Their wheat.  the ere whereof is two handfuls in length and as big as a great bulrusshe, and almost four inches about where it is byggest. The esteem or straw, seemeth to be almost as big as the little finger of a man's hand, or little less. The grains of this wheat are as big as our peason: round also, and very white and somewhat shining like pearls that have lost their colour. Almost all the substance of them turneth into flower, and maketh little bran or none. I told in one ere two hundredth and three score grains. The ere is enclosed in three blades longer than itself, and of two inches broad a piece. And by this fruitfulness the son seemeth partly to recompense such griefs and molestations as they otherwise receive by the fervent heat thereof. It is doubtless a worthy contemplation to consider the contrary effects of the son: 
The son.  or rather the contrary passions of such things as receive thinfluence of his beams either to their hurt or benefit.  
Their drink is either water or the juice that droppeth from the cut branches of the barren date trees called Palmites. 
Their drink.  For either they hang great gourds at the said branches every evening and let them so hang all night, or else they set them on the ground under the trees that the drops may fall therein. They say that this kind of drink is in taste much like unto whey, but somewhat sweeter and more pleasant. They cut●● the branches every evening because they are scred up in the day by the heat of the son. They have also great beans as big as chestenuttes, and very hard with a shell in the steed of a husk.  
Many things more might be said of the manners of the people and of the wonders and monstrous things that are engendered in Africa. But it shall suffice to have said thus much of such things as hour men partly saw and partly browght with them.  
And whereas before speaking of the fruit of grains, 
Grains.  I describe the same to have holes by the side (as in deed it is as it is browght hither) yet was I afterward informed that those holes were made to put strings or twigs through the fruit thereby to hang them up to dry at the son. They grow not passed a foot and a half or two foot from the ground: and are as red as blood when they are gathered. The grains them selves, are called of the physisians, Grana Paradysi.  
At their coming home, the keles of their ships were marvelously overgrown with certain shells of ii inches length and more as thick as they could stand, 
Shells that cleave to ships.  and of such bigness that a man may put his thom in the mouths of them. They certainly affirm that in these there groweth a certain slimy substance which at the length slypping out of the shell & fauling in the sea, becometh those fowls which we call barnacles 
Barnacles.  The like shells have been seen in ships returning from I●lande. But these shells were not passed half an inch in length. Of the other that came from Guinea, I saw the primrose lying in the dock, and in manner covered with the said shells, which in my judgement should greatly hinder her sailing. Their ships were also in many places eaten with the worms called Bromas or Bissas whereof mention is made in the Decades. 
Bromas.  These creep between the planks which they eat through in many places. 
A secret.   
Among other things that chanced to them in this viage, this is worthy to be noted, that whereas they sailed thither in seven weeks, they could return in no less space than twenty weeks. The cause whereof they say to be this: ●hat about the coast of Cabo Uerde, the wind is ever at the East by reason whereof they were enforced to sail far out of their course into the main Ocean to find the wind at the west to bring them home. 
The death of our men.  There died of hour men at this last viage about xxiiii whereof many died at their return into the clime of the could regions, as between the Islands of Soria and England. They browght with them certain black slaves, whereof sum were taule and strong men, and could well agree with our meats and drinks. 
Can may be better abiden than heat.  The could and moist air doth somewhat offend them. Yet doubtless men that are borne in hot regions may better abide could, than men that are borne in could regions may abide heat, forasmuch as vehement heat resolveth the radical moisture of men's bodies, as could constreyneth and preserveth the same  
This is also to be considered as a secret work of nature, that throughout all Afryke under the Equinoctial line and near about the same on both sides, the regions are extreme hot and the people very black. Whereas contraryly such regions of the West Indies as are under the same line, 
The west Incise.  are very temperate and the people neither black nor with curled and short wool on their heads as have they of africa, but of the colour of an olive with long and black hear on their heads: the cause of which variety is declared in divers places in the Decades.  
It is also worthy to be noted that sum of them that were at this viage told me. That is, that they overtook the course of the son, so that they had it north from them at noon the xiiii day of March. And to have said thus much of these voyages it may suffice. For (as I have said before) Whereas the partners at whose charges this book is printed, would long sense have me proceeded no further, I had not thought to have written any thing of these voyages but that the liberality of master Toy encouraged me to attempt the same. Which I speak not to the reproach of other in whom I think there lacked no good will, but that they thought the book would be to chargeable.     

¶ The manner of finding the Longitude of regions by divers ways after the description of Gemma Phrysius.  
perceiving what contention is and long hath been not only among the pilots that by travailing the sea have observed the stars, but also among sum men that are skilful in mathematical sciecens, whereof many affirm that the longitude (that is to mean, the course from the East to the West) can not be perfectly known, I have thowght good for the better satisfying of such as desire to have sum knowledge hereof, to interpret such demonstrations as I have red of the declaring of the same in Gemma Phrysius, who as touching this matter hath added to thinventions of other, a more certain way of his our device whereby (as he saith) he can find the longitude of regions although he were driven out of the way a thousand miles into places unto him utterly unknown and of unknown distance. He writeth therefore as followeth.  
When you have found the place of the moan, 
By the moan.  you ought to consider the hour when she occupied that place. Then either by the Ephimerides or by the tables of Alphonsus you ought to know in what hour the moon entereth into the same sign of the Zodiac in an other region or town whose longitude is well known. Then reducing the hours to xxiiii. the less number of hours is to be deducted out of the greater number. Then the remanent of the hours & minutes is to be brought to degrees in this manner. Multiply the hours by xu and divide the minutes of the hours by four: so shall appear the degrees of the Equinoctial contained between two meridians. And if after this division there r●mayne any minutes, multiply them also by xu and thereby shallbe know●n the minutes of degrees. Add th●s difference of longitude found to the longitude of the region known if the hours of that place be more in number: or take away from the same longitude if they be less: So shall you in fin● gather the longitude of the place unknown from the Islands of Canary. 
The Islands of Canary.  But the same is more easily and readily found geometrically by the globes by this means. Set directly under the meridian, the place whose longitude is known in the globe. 
how to find the longitude by the globe  Then direct the point or style that moveth about the pole, to the hour in the which the moon occupieth the place assigned in that region. Then turn the globe until the style that showeth the hour, be come to the hour in the which yowesowght the unknown place of the moon. And so shall the degrees of the Equinoctial distant or divided from the movable meridian, declare the longitude of the region which you seek. Nevertheless, the more certain way whereby the differences of longitudes may be found, is by sum one thing that in one moment appeareth in all regions, as by the eclipses of the moon. 
The Eclipses of the moon.  For the divers hours being known in the which the said eclipses chance in divers regions, the longitudo may thus aswell be known by geometry and arithmetic, as it is found by the rule here before. But forasmuch as this doth neither appear at all times nor to all men, and the other way is somewhat difficult, neither at all times ready by reason of the conjunctions of the moan and furthermore also sometimes uncertain and varying sum what from the truth for the divers aspects and l●titud●s of the moan, it so chanceth hereby that we have either no longitudes or the same very uncertain of many regions, and especially of those which the spaniards have of late discovered. For no certainty doubtless can be known by such commensurations as are made in the wandering turnings and wyndynges of such voyages, as Ptolemy affirmeth in the first book of his cosmography. I will therefore add hereunto sum thing of mine own invention whereby by an easy way and at all times the longitudes of regions may be found in all voyages and navigations.   

¶ A new manner of finding the Longitudes of regions.  
We see that in these hour days certain little clocks are very artificially made the which for their smaule quantity are not cumbrous to be carried about in all voyages. 
Little clocked  These often times move continually for the space. of xxiiii hours: and may with help continue their moving in manner perpetually. By the help therefore of these the longitude may be found after this manner. Before we enter into any viage, we must first foresee that the said clock exactly observe the hours of the place from whence we depart: And again that in the way it never cease. accomplishing therefore xu or twenty miles of the viage, if we desire to know how much in longitude we are distant from the place of hour departure, we must tarry until the point or style of the clock do exactly come to the point of sum hour: and at the same moment by our astrolabe or globe, 
By the astrolabe and globe.  ought we to seek the hour of the place where we be: The which if it agree in minute with the hours which the Horoscopium or ascendent doth show, 
horoscopus or the Ascendent.  then is it certain that we are yet under the same Meridian or the same Longitude: and that hour course hath been toward the south or north. But if it differ one hour or any minute, them are the same to be reduced to degrees or minutes of degrees as we have taught in the chapiture here before.  
And so shall the longitude be found. And by this art can I find the longitude of regions although I were a thousand miles out of my attempted course & in an unknown distance, but the latitude must first be perfectly known. 
The latitude.   
FINIS.   



¶ A brief rehearsal of the contents of the books of the first Decade, and so following of all the other Decades. Folio i  

IN the first book is declared how Christophorus Colonus otherwise called Columbus, persuaded Fernando and Elizabeth, princes of Spain, to foorther his attempt in searching new and unknown lands in the West Ocean. Also of the vii Islands of Canary, by whom they were found and conquered.  
How Colonus found the Islands of Hispaniola, and Cuba: And of the fierce people called Canibales or Caribes, which are accustomed to eat man's flesh.  
Of the roots called Ages, jucca, and the grain Maizium, whereof the people of the Islands make their bread.  
Of the gold found in the sands of rivers, and of the serpents which are without hurt. Also of turtle doves, ducks and popyngiayes.  
Of Mastix, and Aloe, with divers fruits and trees unknown to us: and of the fruitfulness of the Island of Hispaniola which the spaniards call Spagnuola.  
Of the second viage of Colonus into these regions, and how he was furnished with xvii ships and a thousand and two hundredth soldiers, with all kind of artiliarye, artificers, and grain to sow. And of the tree from the which water droppeth continually into a trench made by man's hand.    

☞ The contents of the second book. Fol. 4.  

¶ How Colonus departing from the Islands of Canary, sailed viii hundredth and twenty leagues in xxi days, and came to Dominica an Island of the Canibales: And of the fragrant savour of spices which proceeded from the Islands.  
Of the Islands of Galanta or Galana and Guadalupea, and of the trees which bear that kind of cotton which the Italians call Bombasine, and the spaniards Algadon.  
Of divers kinds of popinjays: And of the Island of Matinino or Madanino, being inhabited only with women: Also of divers other fruitful Islands: And of a conflict which the spaniards had with the Canibales.  
Of certain Islands in the which are seen the mines of metals and precious stones: and of the fruitful and peopulous Island called Burichena or Boriquen. or Insula S. johanuis  
how all the Admiral's men which at his first viage he left in Hispaniola, were slain in his absence by the rebellion of Guaccanarillus, king of the Region of Xamana: and of the free kind of life which they lead that have not the use of money.  
Of the vii maidens which swam iii miles in the sea: And of the manner of gathering of gold in the sands of rivers    

¶ The Contents of the third book. Fol. 10.  

¶ A particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, which Colonus thinketh to be Ophir, from whence king Solomon had his great riches of gold.  
Of the marvelous fruitfulness of Hispaniola, and of the sugar canes growing there.  
Of the golden regions of Cipanga or Cibava, and of the rivers in whose sands is found great plenty of gold.  
Of certain grains of gold of exceeding great quantity.  
Of wild vines of pleasant taste, and of grass which in four days groweth as high as wheat.  
Of the Island of johanna or Cuba, being the end of the East and the West: And of the fruitful and peopulous Island of jamaica.  
How the Admiral thought that he had sailed about the lowest hemisphery or half circle of the earth, and of a secret of Astronomy touching the same matter.  
How the Admiral gave names to vii hundredth Islands, and passed by three thousand unnamed.  
Of certain serpents like unto Crocodiles of viii foot long, whose flesh is delicate to be eaten: and of certain trees which bear gourds.  
Of the river whose water is very hot: and of the hunting fish which taketh other fishes.  
Of great abundance of Tortoises as big as targets, and of a fruitful mountain well inhabited.  
Of dogs of deformed shape and dumb: And of white and thick water.  
Of woods of date trees and pynepaple trees, and of certain people apparelled like white friars.  
Of certain trees which bear spices, and of crane's of exceeding bigness.  
Of stock doves of more pleasant taste then partridges.  
An oration of a barbarous governor as touching the immortality of the soul: Also of the reward of virtue and punishment of vice.  
A similitude of the golden world, and of provision with out care.  
How the admiral fell sick by reason of to much watching: And of a sedition which rose among the Spaniards in the Island of Hispaniola.    

¶ The Contents of the fourth book. Fol. 18.  

How the Kings of the Island of Hispaniola, were by the Spaniards mysbehavoure provoked to Rebellion: And how the admiral sent for them.  
How king Caunaboa the Lord of the house of gold, that is, of the mountains of Cibava, conspired the Admiral's death, and how he with his family were taken prisoners.  
Of a great famine that chanced in the Island of Hispaniola: and how the Admiral builded certain fortresses.  
Of a piece of rude gold waighinge twenty ounces: and of the mine of the rich metal called Electrum.  
Of the mountain in the which is found great plenty of Amber and orpement: And of the woods of brasile trees.  
How thinhabitants are put to their tribute: And how the nature of the Region disposethe the manners of the people.  
How the brother of king Caunaboa came against the Admiral with an army of five thousand naked men: and how he was taken and his amry put to flight.  
Of the fruitful vale Magona, in the sands of whose rivers is found great plenty of gold: and of certain whirlewyndes and tempests.  
How the Admiral sent forth his brother Bartholomeus Colonus with an army of men to search the gold mines & of the fosses which he found to have been digged in old time    

¶ The Contents of the .v. book. Fol. 22.  

How the lieutenant builded a fortress in the gold mines: And prepared instruments for the purging and fyninge of the gold.  
How certain ships laden with victuals, came from Spain: And how the lieutenant sent the kings which rebelled, with three hundredth captives into Spain.  
How the Liefetenaunte removed his habitation: And builded a fortress which he called saint Dominickes tower Also how he passed over the river Naiba, and entered into the woods of brasyle trees.  
How the great king Beuchius Anacauchoa, friendly entertained the lieutenant, and browght him to his palace, where the kings wives and concubines received him honourably with pomps and triumphs.  
Of the fortresses which were erected in Hispaniola: And how the lieutenant exacted tribute of the kings which rebelled again.  
How the lieutenant set upon the kings unwares in the night season, and took xiiii of them prisoners.  
How king Guarionexius, captain of the conspiracy was pardoned, & how he persuaded the people to obedience.  
How king Beuchius Anacauchoa, sent messengers to the lieutenant to repair to his palace where he found xxxii. kings ready with their tributes: And how the queen Anacaona enticed him to eat of the serpent's flesh.  
How the serpent's flesh is prepared to be eaten: And how delicate meat their eggs are if they be sodden.  
How queen Anacaona, sister to king Beuchius A●acauchoa, entertained the lieutenant, and gave him much household stuff and many vessels of Hebene wood artificially wrought and carved.  
How king Anacauchoa and the queen his sister went aboard the lieutenant his ship, and how greatly they were amazed to behold the furniture thereof.  
How Roldanus Xeminus a spaniard, rebelled in the lieutenants absence: by whose mysdemeanour also king Guarionexius was provoked to a new conspiracy, & with him Maiobanexius the king of the mountains.    

☞ The contents of the sixth book. Foli. 28.  

¶ The thy●de viage of Colonus, and how he diverted from his accustomed race by the Islands of Canary to the Island of Madera for fear of certain french pirates and rovers.  
Of the xiii Islands which in old time were called Hesperides, and are now called the Islands of Caput Uiride or Caboverde. Also of the Tortoises of the Island of Bonavista, wherewith the leper is healed.  
How the Admiral found contagious air and extreme heat near the Equinoctial where the north pole was elevate only five degrees: And how sailing from thence westward, he found the stars placed in other order, and the sea rising as it were the back of a mountain.  
How the admiral sailing westward, and never passing out of the clime or paraleles of Ethiope, found a temperate Region and people of goodly corporature: And what difference is between the natures of Regions being under one parallel and one elevation of the pole.  
Of the Islands of Puta and Margarita: and of the swift course or fall of the Ocean from the East to the west.  
Of the gulfs called Os Draconis: And of the conflict between the fresh water and the salt.  
Of a sea of fresh water: And a mountain inhabited only with monkeys and marmasettes.  
Of the fair, rich, and large region of Paria: And how friendly thinhabitants entreated the admiral and his men. Also of pleasant wine made of diverse fruits: And of great abundance of pearls and gold.  
Of the regions of Cumana, Manacapana, and Curiana, being regions of the large province of Paria: And of the ●ea of herbs or weeds.  
A certain secret as touching the pole star and the elevation of the same: Also of the roundness of the earth.  
Of the mountains of Paria in the tops whereof Colonus earnestly affirmeth the earthly Paradise to be situate: And whether Paria be part of the firm land or continent of India.    

¶ The contents of the vii book. Fol. 33.  

¶ How Roldanus Xeminus with his confetherates, accused the Admiral to the king: And how he purged himself and accused them  
How king Guarionexius rebelled again: And with him king Maiobanexius: Also how they with other kings came against the lieutenant with an army of viii thousand naked and painted ciguavians. Also two rare exemples of friendship and faithfulness in barbarous princes.  
How Colonus the Admiral and the lieutenant his brother, were sent bound into Spain: And new officers appointed in their places.    

The contents of the viii book. Fol. 37,  

¶ The Navigation of Petrus Alphonsus from Spain to Paria, where in the region of Curiana, he had in short space xu ounces of pearls & great plenty of victuals for hawks bellees, pins, looking glasses, and such other tryfelles,  
Of certain conjectures whereby Paria is thought to be part of the firm land: And of the golden region of Cauchieta, where in the month of November the air is temperate and not could.  
How Alphonsus had a conflict with the Cannibals: and how they are accustomed to invade other countries.  
Of great abundance of salt in the region of Haraia: & how the dead bodies of their princes are dried, reserved, and religiously honoured.  
How Alphonsus at his return to Spain from Curiana, brought with him threescore and xvi pound weight of pearls which he bought for hour tryfells amounting only to the value of five shillings.    

The contents of the ix book. Fol. 40.  

¶ The Navigation of Uincentius Pinzonus and Aries Pinzonus, and how they sailed beyond the Equinoctial line, loss the sight of the north star, and found the stars in other order.  
How Uincentius passing the equinoctial toward the south pole, found fierce and warlike people of great stature: And of the sea of fresh water.  
How Uincentius directing his course toward the north west from the equinoctial, recovered the sight of the north pole, and by the regions of Mariatamball, Camomorus, and Pericora, came to the fair and rich province of Paria, and to the regions of Os Draconis, Cumana, Manacapana, Curiana. etc.  
A conjecture that Paria (whereby is meant that main land now called America) should be part of the firm land or continent of India, beyond the river of Ganges and no island: And of the exceeding great river Maragnonus replenished with Islands.  
Of Boriostomea and Spiriostomea, the mouths of the famous river of Danubius, called in old time Ister: And of the commodities of the regions and Islands about Paria. Also of the woods of brasile trees.  
Of many fruitful Islands wasted and left desolate by reason of the Cannibals cruelty: And of the trees of Cassia Fistula. Also of other trees of exceeding bigness.  
The description of a certain monstrous beast, And how Uincentius lost two of his ships by tempest.  
How Uincentius at his return to Spain, brought with him cinamome, ginger, and certain precious stones called Topases And of the navigations of certain other inhabitants of the town of Palos.  
Of the precious medicine called Anime Album. And of the diverse superstitions of the inhabitants of Hispaniola. Also of their Idolatry, and how they honour the images of devils, which they call Zemes.    

¶ The Contents of the ten book. Fol. 48.  

Of great glentie of gold, pearls, and franken●ence found in the regions of Paria. And of innumerable beasts in shape differing from ours.  
How the Spaniards proffered themselves to conquer the new found lands, being in largeness thrice as great as Europe beside the south lands pertaining to the Portugals. And how the nature of the place altereth the forms and qualities of things.  
Of the Island of Cuba, and of the gold mines of the Island of Sancti johannis, otherwise called Burichena, or Buchena. Also of the rich gold mines of Hispaniola, and of the order of working in the same.  
Of the two chief gold mines of Hispaniola. And of a piece of gold weighing three thousand three hundredth and ten pound weight.  
How the gold is fyned and distributed: And how that only in the melting shops of the two golden mines of Hispaniola, is melted yearly above three hundredth thousand pound weight of gold.  
How thenterprises of the spaniards are not inferior to th'acts of Saturnus or Hercules: And how the admiral discovered the land over against the west corner of Cuba and the Island or Guanassa.     

¶ The Contents of the books of the second Decade.  

¶ The contents of the first book. Fol. 51.  

¶ how after the death of Colonus the Admiral, the king gave free licence to all such as would attempt any voyages: And of the navigations of Diego Nicuesa, & Alphonsus Fogeda  
Of the Island Codego and the region of Caramairi: And of certain sweet apples which turn into worms when they are eaten, whose trees are also contagious.  
How Alfonsus Fogeda, the lieutenant of Uraba, encountering with the barbarians had the overthrow. And how in this conflict, fifty of his men were slain with johannes de la Cossa their capitain.  
How Fogeda, and Nicuesa the lieutenant of Beragua, revenged the death of their companions. And how Fogeda came to the Island Fortis and the region of Caribana where he was repulsed from the gold mines by the fierceness of the barbarians using arrows infected with poison.  
How Fogeda was wounded in the thigh with a venomous arrow, and his men almost consumed with famine.  
How a brigantine was drowned with the stroke of a fish: And of the navigation of Ancisus from Hispaniola to Uraba.  
Of the Lamentable shyppewracke of Ancisus: And of the date trees and wytde bores which he found.  
Of the fruits or apples of the trees called Ceders of Libane which bear old fruits and new all the year.  
How only three of the Canibales with their bows and envenomed arrows assailed Ancisus with a hundredth of his men: In which conflict they wounded and slew many. Also of their swiftness of foot.  
Of the great river of Dariena: And how Ancisus encountered with five hundredth of thinhabitants of the gulf of Uraba and put them to flight. Also how he found great plent●e of wrought gold and household stuff in a thicket of reeds.    

¶ The contents of the second book. Fol. 58.  

¶ How Nicuesa lost his fellows in the dark night and went past the mouth of the river Beragua which he sought: And how the captains of the other ships consulted how to find him. Also of the river Lagartos in the which great Lysartes are found much like unto the Crocodiles of Nilus.  
How the captains forsook their ships that the soldiers might be without hope of departure: And of the miserable chance of Petrus de Umbria and his fellows.  
By what chance Nicuesa was found, and of the calamities which he and his company sustained. Also of the region of Gracia Dei or Cerabaro, and of the river of Sancti Matthei.  
How Nicuesa caused them to remove their habitation from Beragua to point Marmor where he builded a fortress And how his men by war and famine, were consumed from seven hundredth and odd, to scarcely one hundredth.  
How one Uaschus Nunnez usurped th'authority of the lieutenant ship of Uraba in th'absence of Fogeda: And of the navigation of Rodericus Colmenatis from Hispaniola to Uraba.  
Of the river Gaira descending from the top of a high mountain covered with snow: And how Rodericus Colm●naris in a conflict against the barbarians, lost xlvii of his men by reason of their envenomed arrows.  
Of the force of the poison wherewith the barbarians infect their arrows, and a remedy for the same. Also how Colmenaris by gunneshot and kyndeling fierce on the high tops of the rocks, came to the spaniards left desolate in Dariena.    

¶ The contents of the third book. Fol. 61.  

¶ How Nicuesa was sought forth to acquiete the contentions of Uraba: And how he was again rejected.  
How Uaschus Nunnez invaded, took prisoners, and spoiled the kings borthering about the region of Uraba: And how Ancisus lieutenant for Fogeda was cast in prison, and afterward set at liberty.  
How Ancisus took his viage from Uraba to Spain to accuse Uaschus: who also at the same time sent Ualdivia aswell to speak in his defence, as also to certify the king of their doings.  
How king Careta conspired with the spaniards against king Poncha whom they put to flight and spoiled his village.  
How king Comogrus friendly entertained the spaniards and brought them to his palace where he showed them the dried Carcases of his ancestors reserved and sumptuously appareled: And how the kings elder son gave Uaschus and Colmenaris four thousand ounces of wrought gold and fifty slaves. Also a witty oration which he made to the spaniards, wherein he certified them of a country exceeding rich in gold. etc.    

¶ The contents of the fourth book. Fol. 66.  

¶ Of horrible thunder and lightening in the month of November, and of grain which waxeth ripe thrice a year Also how digestion is strengthened by owtwarde could.  
How Ualdivia is sent again into Hispaniola to mou● the governor and counsel there to send into Spain to the king for a supply of a thousand soldiers to make way to the golden mountains: And how he carried with him the kings portion, (that is) the fift part of gold and other things.  
How Uaschus invaded the kings inhabiting the regions about the gulf of Uraba, and how he put king Dabaiba to flight, in whose village he found wrought gold● amounting to the weight of seven thousand Castellans.  
Of bats as big as turtle doves which sometime bite men in the night in their sleep, whose biting is also venomous: but is healed with water of the sea or by cauterization as are also the wounds of venomous arrows.  
Of the Island of Cannafistula, and a town of five hundredth houses, whose king Abenamachei was taken and his arm cut of in the fight.  
Of trees of exceeding bigness and height: And how king Abibeiba had his palace in the top of a tree from the which he was enforced to descend and entreat of peace.    

¶ The contents of the fifth book. Fol. 69.  

¶ How king Abraiba slew a captain of the Spaniards and caused the kings to rebel. Also how they were put to flight and many of their men slain.  
Of five kings which attempted a new conspiracy with a hundredth great Canoas' and five thousand men: And how their intent was bewrayed by a woman, and prevented. Also how Rodericus Colmenaris sacked the village of Tichiri and hung the king thereof with four of his chief rulers, and commanded them to be shot through with arrows.    

¶ The contents of the sixth book. Fol. 72.  

¶ How Uaschus with his confetherates, sent johannes Quicedus and Colmenaris from Dariena to Hispaniola and from thence to Spain to the king for a thousand men to pass over the mountains to the golden regions: And what miseries they sustained in that viage. Also of the death of Ualuia, Zamudius, and Fogeda.  
Of the prosperous viage of Ancisus: And how god wrought miracles by the simple faith of a mariner. Also ho● god respecteth thinfancy of faith for zeles sake: And how one religion turned into another, holdeth still many things of the first.  
How many of the barbarians were baptized by reason of the miracles: And how they rewarded the priests by whom they were baptized.  
How Ancisus shortly after his arrival in Spain, resorted to the court and made his complaint to the king of th'insolency of Uaschus, whereupon the king gave sentence against him: And how apt the barbarous nations are to embrace the Christian faith.    

¶ The contents of the seventh book. Fol. 79.  

¶ How Quicedus and Colmenaris the procurators of Dariena, were honourably entertained at the court and brought to the kings presence: And how their complexion was changed by alteration of the air.  
How Petrus Arias a noble man, was elected governor and lieutenant of Dariena: And how other of the court laboured for the same office. Also how the bishop of Burges spoke to the king in his behalf.  
How Petrus Arias had a thousand and two hundreth soldiers appointed him at the kings charges: And of th● kings custom hou●e in the city of Civil, called the house of the contracts of India.  
How a great number of spaniards proffered themselves to go at their own charges: And of a restraint made that no stranger might pass without the kings licence. Also how the autour reproveth Aloisius' Cadamustus a writer of the Portugals voyages.  
How Petrus Arias shortly after his departure from Civil, lost two of his ships and was driven back again by tempest: And how being newly furnished, he pa●sed the Ocean with more prosperous winds.  
The third viage of Uincentius Pinzonus, and how he came to the regions of Paria where encountering with thinhabitants he put them first to flight: but after falling to entreaty of peace, they gave him great plenty of gold and abundance of masculine frankincense with divers other princely presents.  
Of the great multitude of popinjays which are in th● region of Paria, and how th'inhabitors are appareled. Also of the five kings that made a league of friendship with Uincentius.  
How Uincentius sailed Eastward by the tract of the regions of Paria until he came to the point of that long land which the autour supposeth to be the great Island Atlantike whereof the owlde writers make mention. 
Cap. S. A●gustini.     

¶ The contents of the viii book. Fol. 80.  

¶ A contention between the Castilians and Portugals as concerning the division of the new found lands: And how the controversy was finished by the bishop of Rome.  
How Don Chrystopher the governor of the Island of Sancti johannis, was slain by the Canibales and the bishop put to flight. Also of the other bishops of the Islands.  
How the Canibales of the Island of Sancta Crux, slew and eat a king with certain of his men being friends to the christians and made faggots of their bones: And how quereling with hour men, they put them to silence.    

¶ The contents of the ix book. Fol. 81.  

¶ Of the marvelous fruitfulness of the regions of Beragua, Uraba, and Dariena: And of the divers kinds of trees and fruits. Also of the pleasant taste of swines flesh being fed with the fruits of Mirobalane trees.  
Of Lions and Tigers and other wild beasts: And of a beast of strange form.  
Of the rivers of the gulf of Uraba, as the river of Dariena and Rio Grandis: And how the great serpents called Crocodiles, are found in other rivers bysyde Nilus in egypt. Also how thauthor of this book was sent Ambassador to the sultan of Alcayr in Egipte.  
Of the Portugals navigations, and of the river Senega found by them to be a channel of Nilus. Also of the multitude of birds & fowls being in the marishes of Dariena.  
A philosophical discourse of th'original and generation of springs and rivers: And of the breadth of the land dividing the north and south Ocean.  
Of the great river Maragnonus and of the earthly paradise: And how springs are engendered by conversion of air into water.  
Of the often faule of rain under the Equinoctial line, and of the pores of the sea opened by the South winds.  
Of the great rivers of Tanais, Ganges, Danubius, and Eridanus, famous to the owlde writers: And how certain rivers running through the caves of the earth, break forth into springs afar of.    

¶ The contents of the ten book. Fol. 86.  

¶ How the new found lands discovered by the spaniards in the West Ocean, are eight times bigger than Italy beside that which the Portugals possess: And of the cards of the sea drawn by Colonus and Americus Uesputius.  
The order of measuring the land: And how a league containeth four miles by sea and but three by land.  
The Navigation of johannes Dias, and of the sundry elevations of the pole star.  
Of the Island of Boiuca or Agnaneo, and of the springe whose water being drunk, causeth owld men to look young.  
How Nicuesa and his soldiers were so oppressed with famine, that they were driven to eat mangy dogs, toads, and dead men: And how a broth made of a dogs skin, was sold for many pieces of gold.     

¶ The contents of the books of the third Decade.  

¶ The contents of the first book. Fol. 88  

¶ Of the desperate adventure and good fortune of Uaschus: And how with a hundredth fourscore and ten men, he brought that to pass for the wh●ch Petrus Arias was sent with a thousand and two hundredth fresh soldiers.  
How iron serveth for more necessary uses than gold, and how superfluities hinder liberty.  
How Uaschus in one conflict, slew six hundredth barbaryans with their kings: And how he found the house of king Quarequa infected with unnatural lechery, commanding that the king and forty such as he kept for that purpose, should be given for a pray to his dogs which he used to serve in the wars against these naked people.  
Of a region of black moors: And how Uaschus came to the tops of the mountains, where giving thanks to god, he beheld the new south Ocean never before seen nor known to men of hour world.  
How Uaschus put king Chiapes to flight, and after made a league of friendship with him: And how the king gave him four hundredth pounds weight of wrought gold.  
How king Coquera was put to f●yght, who also being received to friendship, gave Uaschus six hundredth and fifty pounds weight of wrought gold.  
Of the gulf called Sinus. S. Michaelis being full of inhabited Islands: And of the manly courage and godly zeal of Uaschus. Also of the rising and falling of the south sea.  
How king Tumaccus being driven to flight and afterward reconciled, gave Uaschus vi hundredth and xiiii pesoes of gold, and two hundredth and forty of the greatest and fairest pearls: And how the king caused his men to fish for pearls.  
Of the Island called Margaritea Dives: And of the abundance of fair and great pearls found therein.  
Of habitable regions under the Equinoctial line: And of the Portugals navigations to the Antipodes inhabiting the five and fifty degree of the south pole. Also a declaration of Antipodes, and of the stars about the south pole.    

¶ The contents of the second book. Fol. 95.  

¶ Of the manner of fishing for pearls and of the three kinds thereof. Also divers other questions concerning pearls.  
Of the multitude of the shell fishes wherein pearls are engendered and found in manner in all places in the south sea: And of abundance of gold found almost in every house. Also how the treasury of nature is in those coasts: And of the gold mines of Dariena.  
How king Teaocha gave Uaschus twenty pounds weight of wrought gold and two hundredth pearls. Also of deserts full of wild beasts, and how Uaschus was troubled with great heat in the month of November.  
How a dog Tiger was taken, and his whelps tied in chains and torn in pieces: Also how Uaschus gave iiii kings to his dogs to be devoured.  
Of the use of dogs in their wars, and of the fierceness of the Canibales.  
How king Bononians favoured the christians and gave Uaschus twenty pound weight of wrought gold. Also his oration to Uaschus.  
A similitude proving great plenty of gold in the regions of the south sea, and of the travails which owlde soldiers are able to sustain.    

¶ The contents of the third book. Fol. 99  

¶ How king Buchibuea submitted himself to Uaschus, and sent him certain vessels of gold. Also how king Chiorisus sent him xxx dishes of pure gold.  
How iron serveth for more necessary uses than gold. Also an exemple of the life of our first parents.  
How king Pocchorrosa submitted himself, and gave Uaschus xu pound weight of wrought gold. Also how Tumanama the great king of the golden regions towards the south sea, is taken prisoner. Likewise how he gave Uaschus xxx pound weight of pure and wrought gold, and his noble men lx pounds weight of gold.  
Of the cause of vehement winds near unto the Equinoctial line, and of the colour of the earth of the golden mines.  
Of the large and fruitful plain of zavana, and of the river Comogrus. Also how king Comogrus baptized by the name of Charles, gave Uaschus twenty pound weight of wrought gold.  
Of the good fortune of Uaschus, and how he was turned from Goliath to Eliseus, and from Anteus to Hercules: And with what facility the spaniards shall hereafter obtain great plenty of gold and pearls.  
Of the spaniards conquests, and fierceness of the Canibales. Also an exhortation to Christian princes to set forward Christ's religion.    

¶ The contents of the fourth book. Fol. 104▪  

¶ The fourth viage of Colonus the Admitall from Spain to Hispaniola, and to the other Islands and coasts of the firm land: Also of the flourishing Island Guanassa.  
Of seven kinds of date trees, wild vyves, and Myrobalanes: Also of birds and fowls.  
Of people of goodly stature which use to paint their bodies: And of the swift course of the sea from the east to the west. Also of fresh water in the sea.  
Of the large regions of Paria, Os Draconis, and Quiriquetana: And of great Tortoises and reeds. Also of the four fruitful Islands called Quatuor Tempora, and xii Islands called Limonares.  
Of sweet savours and wholesome air: And of the region Quicuri, and the haven Cariai or Myrobalanus: Also of certain civil people.  
Of trees growing in the sea after a strange sort, and of a strange kind of Moonkeys which invade men and fight with wild bores.  
Of the great gulf of Cerabaro replenished with many fruitful Islands, and of the people which wear chains of gold made of ouches wrought to the similitude of divers wild beasts and fowls.  
Of five villages whose inhabitants give themselves only to gathering of gold, and are painted, using to wear garlands of Lions and Tigers claws. Also of seven rivers in all the which is found great plenty of gold: And where the plenty of gold ceaseth.  
Of certain people which paint their bodies, and cover their privy members with shells, having also plates of gold hanging at their nostrils.  
Of certain worms which being engendered in the seas near about the Equinoctial, eat holes in ships: And how the Admiral's ships were destroyed by them.  
How the king of Beragua entertained the Lieutenant and of the great plenty of gold in the river of Duraba and in all the regions there about: Also in roots of trees and siones and in manner in all the rivers.  
How the lieutenant and his company would have erected a colony beside the river of Beragua, and was repulsed by thinhabitants.  
How the Admiral fell into the hands of the barbarians of the Island of jamaica where he lived miserably the space of ten moons: And by what chance he was saved and came to the Island of Hispaniola.  
Of wholesome regions, temperate air, and continual spring all the hole year: Also of certain people which honour gold religiously during their golden harvest.  
Of the mountains of Beragua being fifty miles in height and higher than the clouds: Also the description of other mountains and regions there about, comparing the same to Italy.  
Colonus his opinion as touching the supposed continente, and joining of the no●th and south Ocean. Also of the breadth of the said continente or firm land.  
Of the regions of Uraba and Beragua and the great riue● Maragnonus and the river of Dabaiba or Sancti johannis Also of certain marishes and desolate ways, and of dragons and Crocodiles engendered in the sa●e.  
Of twenty golden rivers about Dariena and of certain precious stones, especially a diamunde of marvelous bigness bought in the province of P●●ia.  
Of the heroical facts of the spaniards and how they contemn effeminate pleasures. Also a similitude proving great plenty of gold and precious stones.    

¶ The contents of the fifth book. Fol. 113.  

¶ The navigation of Petrus Arias from Spain to Hispaniola and Dariena, and of the Islands of Canary. Also of the Islands of Madanino, Guadalupea, and Gatan●a.  
Of the sea of herbs and mountains covered with snow: Also of the swift course of the sea toward the west.  
Of the river Gaira, the region Caramairi, and the port Carthago and Sancta Martha: Also of Americus Uesputius and his expert cunning in the knowledge of the card, compass and quadrant.  
How the Canibales assailed Petrus Arias with his hole navy, and shot of their venomous arrows even in the sea. Also of their houses and household stuff.  
How Gonzalus Quiedus found a sapphire bigger than a goose egg: Also emeralds, calcidonies, jaspers, and amber of the mountains.  
Of woods of brasile trees, plenty of gold, and marchasites of metals found in the regions of Caramairi, Gaira, and Saturma. Also of a strange kind of merchandise exercised among the people of Zunu.  
That the region of Caramairi is like to an earthly Paradise: And of the fruitful mountains and pleasant gardens of the same.  
Of many goodly countries made desolate by the fierceness of the Canibales, and of divers kinds of bread made of roots. Also of the manner of planting the root of jucca, whose juice is deadly poison in the Islands, and without hurt in the continent or firm land.  
Of certain golden rivers, hearts, wild bores, fowls, gossampine, white marble, and wholesome air. Also of the great river Maragnonus descending from the mountains covered with snow, called Serra Nevata.  
How Petrus Arias wasted certain Islands of the Canibales: Also how by the swift course of the sea, his ships were carried in one night forty leaques beyond thestimation of the best pilots.    

¶ The contents of the sixth book. Fol. 118.  

¶ Of sundry opinions why the sea runneth with so swift a course from the east to the west: and of the great gulf of the north part of the firm land.  
The viage of Sebastian Cabote from England to the frozen sea, and how being repulsed with Ice in the moonethe of july, he sailed far westward.  
Of people appareled with beasts skins: And how bears take fishes in the sea and eat them.  
How Sebastian Cabote after that he had discovered the land of Baccalaos or Baccallearum, was called out of England into Spain, where he was made one of thassistance of the counsel of th'affairs of India, & of his second voyage  
Of the Island Fortis: And how a great foul as big as a stork lighted in the governors ship. Also how he arrived at Dariena with the kings navy.  
How Uaschus received the new governor: And of habitable regions under the Equinoctial.  
How Petrus Aries the new governor distributed his army to conquer the south regions rich in gold, and to erect new colonies in the same.  
Of the rich gold mines of Dabaiba, and of th'expedition against the king of that region.  
Of the Violent course of the sea from the east to the west: And of the difficult sailing against the same.  
Of the pestiferous and unwholesome air of Sancta Maria Antiqua in Dariena: and how the spaniards were of necessity enforced to plant their first colony and habitation there.  
The cause of the variety of regions lying all under one degree or paralelle, and by what means the son beams are cause of fervent heat.  
Of toads and flees engendered of drops of water, and of a house set on fire with lightening.  

Tanqua●m canis ● Nilo.  Of a dog devoured of a Crocodyle, and of the venemus biting of great bats. Also of Lions and Tigers and other wild beasts.  
How in these regions all four footed beasts grow to a bigger quantity than they which were of the first brood. Also of certain trees of whose planks if ships be made, they are safe from the worms called Broma or Byssas.  
Of a tre whose wood is present poison if it be only borne about: And of an herb that is a preservative against the same.  
Of the rich Islands of the south sea, and of certain expeditions against the Canibales.    

¶ The contents of the vii book. Fol. 124.  

¶ The particular description of the Island of Hispaniola, and of the rich Island called Margaritea Dives lying in the South sea. Also of the great abundance of big pearls found in the same.  
How the author compareth Hispaniola to the earthily paradise: And how it far excelleth Italy in fertility and temperate air.  
Of the first inhabitors of Hispaniola & of the Islands of Canary.  
How the inhabitants of Hispaniola in their songs & rhymes had certain prophecies that appareled men should come to their country and bring them into servitude: And of their familiarity with spirits. Also how those spirits have no more appeared to them sense they were baptized.  
Of their expertenesse in swiming: And of their delicate serpents, birds, fowls, and popingiais.  
Of the form and situation of Hispaniola near the Equinoctial: And how could is in sum place thereof accidental and not by the situation of the region.  
Of oxen and swine of exceeding bigness: And of ears of wheat as big as a man's arm in the braun. Also how the swine are fed with myrobalanes. etc.  
Of plenty of gold, brasyle, mastix, gossampyne, Electrum etc.: And of thincommodities of intemperate regions.  
Of divers languages in the Island: And how the provinces are divided into regions.  
How Andreas Moralis sailed into a dangerous and dark cave within the rock of a mountain: And of hole rivers devoured of such caves. Also of the conflict of the waters.  
Of a standing pool in the tope of an high mountain: And how fern and bramble bushes grow only in could regions.    

The contents of the viii book. Fol. 130  

¶ Of a great lake or standing pool of sour and salt water, and of the sea fishes in the same in the myddelande of the Island. Also of devouring fishes called Tiburoni.  
Of the rivers fauling into the lakes, and of. CC. springs in the space of a furlong.  
Ameruelous history of a king stricken dumb and lame by a miracle: And of the Indian language.  
How such as are drowned in the lake, are never cast up again: And of the Island Guarizacca in the midst of a standing lake. Also of a lake of fresh water, and an other of salt and fresh water.  
Of a large plain of two hundredth miles in length: And an other of hundreth and twenty.  
Of the marvelous fish or monster of the sea, called Manati or Matum, fed with man's hand: and how she carrieth men over the lake.  
Of the mountains, vales, hills, plains, and rivers of Hispaniola: And how gold is found in all mountains and gold and fish in all rivers.  
Of salt bays, and how the rivers have their increase from the caves of the mountains. Also how there is no hurtful beast in the Island.  
Of the pleasures of Hispaniola: And of the region of Cotohi well inhabited and situate in a plain in the tops of mountains reaching to the clouds.  
Of moderate could in the mountains, and of fern of marvelous bigness.  
How pure and massy gold is found in the region of Cotoy or Cotohy: And that the vain of gold is a living tree. Also of the roots, branches, and flowers of the same, and how certain caves are sustained with pillars of gold.  
What gold is brought yearly from Hispaniola into Spain: And of the salt of the mountains, being as hard as stones and clear as crystal. Also springs of salt, fresh and sour water.  
Of certain wild men living in caves and deunes with out any certain language: And of their marvelous swiftness a foot.  
Of pitch of the rock and two kinds of trees: And of the leaf of a tree used in the steed of paper. Also how thinhabitants think that the Christians can make those leaves speak and disclose all secrets.  
Of a strong colour made of the juice of a certain apple: And of the herb whose smoke is poison.    

The contents of the ix book. Fol. 136.  

Of the kinds of fruits wherewith thinhabitants of Hispaniola lived first, and how they came to the knowledge of jucca. Also how Ceres first found wheat and barley in egypt.  
Why their kings are called by divers names, & by what names they salute the kings children when they are borne.  
How they make their testaments, and how certain of the kings wives and concubines are buried with them.  
Of the variable motions of the elements in Hispaniola: And where it raineth but little, and where much.  
Of the colonies and villages that the spaniards have builded in Hispaniola: & of the other islands about the same  
Of a spring which running under the sea from Hispaniola, breaketh forth in the Island of Arethusa: Also of habitable regions under the Equinoctial, and of the rich gold mines of the Island of Cuba.  
Of the gum called Animae Album: And of the Canibale Also whereby it was thought that there were Islands of women.  
Of honey found in trees and rocks: And of the general on of great Tortoises and of their eggs.    

¶ The contents of the ten book. Fol. 140.  

¶ Of the expedition against the king of the Island Dites in the south sea: And how after four conflicts, submitting himself, he gave our men a hundredth and ten pound weight of great pearls. Also how he agreed to pay yearly a hundredth pound weight of pearls for a tribute.  
How axes and hatchettes are more esteemed than gold, or pearls: And of great plenty of hearts and cunnyes. Also how the king of Dites and his family were baptized.  
Of pearls of great price: And how Paul the bishop of Rome bowght a pearl for four and forty thousand ducades.  
divers opinions of the generation of pearls: And of a hundredth pearls found in one shell fish. Also of the birth of pearls.  
Of the regions of the east side of the gulf of Uraba: And of the original of the Canibales.  
Of certain circumcised people which have the knowledge ●f letters and use ●ookes: And what chanced of the captains which Petrus Arias sent forth divers ways. Also how john Solysius' was slain of the Canibales, and of their fierceness.  
How john Pontius was repulsed of the Canibales, and of the lewd behaviour of john Aiora.  
Of the variable fortune of Gonsalus Badaiocius: And how after he had gathered great riches of gold, he had the overthrow, and was spoiled of all.  
Of the golden region of Coiba Dites: And how their slaue● are ma●ked in the face.  
Of the Islands of the souh sea: And of the regions from whence the Portugals fetch their spices.  
Of a strange kind of fowling: and of the trees that bear gourds.  
Of the later opinions as touching the swift course of the Ocean toward the west: and of the continente or firm● land. Also of the viage from the new lands to Spain.  
Of the gold mines of Dariena, and the manner of gathering of gold in the same: Also of the dropsy of covetousness which is not satisfied with riches.  
¶ For the contents of the book of the islands lately found ●ade the margent notes of the same.    
FINIS.    

¶ Thinterpreters excuse.  

I have not in writing been very curious  
To avoid the scorns of Rhinocetoes nose,  
Or the filed judgement of severe Aristarchus  
Not fearing thereby any thing to lose,  
But have thought it sufficient to be open and plaint  
Not looking for other commodity or grain.   

I am not eloquent I know it right well,  
I I be not barbarous I desire no more,  
I have not for every word asked counsel  
Of eloquent Eliot or sir Thomas Moor.  
Take it therefore as I have intended,  
The fantes with favour may soon be amended.   

The poet Homer for all this eloquence,  
Lacked not Zoilus to be his fo●  
Wherefore I conclude this for a true sentence.  
That no man lacketh fuo bargello:  
For as no beast liveth without worm or ●lye,  
So no man lacketh his privy enemy.   
Rumpatur Zoilus.   

¶ Faults escaped in the printing. F. the leaf. L. the line. B. the back side of the leaf.  
F. 2. B. L. 36. helpen, read helped.  
F. 3. B. L. 25. three feathers, read their father's.  
F. 9 L. 28. form, read form.  
F. 20. L. 37 hour, read your.  
F. 22. B. L. 27. sure, read sure.  
F. 30. L. 6. clock, read cloak.  
F. 34. L. 5. woods, read woods.  
F. 36. B. L. 2. put out and.  
F. 36. the last line. put out, I do.  
F. 36. B. L. 34. first part, read fife part.  
F. 38. B. L. 13. gardens, read guardens.  
F. 52. L. 18. part, read port.  
F. 62. B. L. 25. and, read then.  
F. 68 the last line, put out trees.  
F. 92. L. 18. Michaeld, read michael's▪  
F. 92. L. 19 ans, read and.  
Also there the last line, put out, arose▪  
F. 95. L. 12. cause, read sauce.  
F. 96. B. L. 15. gretheardes, read great hearde●▪  
F. 99 L. 17. filled high, read filthy.  
F. 118. B. L. 35. langitude, read longitude.  
F. 128. L. 4. heirs, read heres,  
F. 129. L. 1. Antipu●▪ read Antique.  
F. 140. L. 17. counciled, read counseled.  
F. 150. L. 15. veles, read veils. F. 150. L. 33. providence, read province.  
F. 153. L. 32. tracks, read tracts.  
F. 154. L. 2. seld, read seldom.  
F. 157. L. 26. wood, read wood.  
F. 168. B. L. 13. bortamus, read hortamur.  
F. 170. B. L. 17. for. 1593., read. 1493.  
F. 171. L. 21. without, read with.  
F. 188. B. L. 33. bury, read burn.  
F. 193. B. L. 21. webs, read webs.  
F. 199. B. L. 37. shydinge, read shining.  
F. 202. L. 17. ny, read any.  
F. 206. B. L. 23. form, read form.  
F. 208. B. L. 7. codes, read cods.  
F. 209. L. 15. wars, read wars.  
F. 212. L. 40. ignitie, read dignity.  
F. 219. L. 10. us, read them.  
F. 228. L. 37. rant, read ran.  
F. 241. L. 4. Colonuo, read Colono.  
F. 249. L. 17. read by the coming of the Goths and Uandales▪ etc.  
F. 262. B. L. 15. Thus, read this.  
F. 296. L. 26. read Cingulus Mundi, that is the gerdle of the world, otherwise called Ca●en● Mundi, that is, the chain of the world.  
F. 298. B. L. 3. sennes, read fens.  
F. 300. L. 20. ceelrytie read celerity.  
F. 317. L. 27. read Tercera or Terciera▪  
Also. L. 35. kyngedgme, read kingdom. F. 322. L. 17. hour compass; read the compass.   

¶ Imprinted at London in Lombard street at the sign of the Cradle by Edward Sutton.  
Anno. Dnni. M. D. LV.